Today’s News October 15, 2015

  • Government Corruption Tops List of Americans’ Fears

    Time reports:

    Corruption of government officials is currently Americans’ number one fear, according to a recent survey by researchers at Chapman University.

     

    The researchers asked a random sample of 1,541 adults to rate the level of fear for 88 different fear options across a variety of domains (like crime and natural disasters). Based on their findings, here were the top 10 fears for 2015:

    • Corruption of government officials (58.0%)
    • Cyber-terrorism (44.8%)
    • Corporate tracking of personal information (44.6%)
    • Terrorist attacks (44.4%)
    • Government tracking of personal information (41.4%)
    • Bio-warfare (40.9%)
    • Identity theft (39.6%)
    • Economic collapse (39.2%)
    • Running out of money in the future (37.4%)
    • Credit card fraud (36.9%)

    Last month, Gallup found that 75% of Americans said they believe corruption is widespread in the government (up from 66% percent in 2009).

    Also last month, Gallup found that a record low 38% of Americans trust the government to handle domestic problems. And half of Americans think that the government is an immediate threat to us.

    We at Washington’s Blog are non-partisan and non-dogmatic. We don’t believe that government is inherently good or inherently bad.  We instead believe that each government has to be analyzed to determine its degree of honesty or corruption.

    Unfortunately, it is T-H-O-R-O-U-G-H-L-Y documented  that systemic corruption has destroyed America … as admitted by politicians on both sides of the political aisle.

    (Sadly, America is not alone … governments worldwide are sliding down into mud pits of corruption.)

    Postscript:  Mainstream politicians and media are trying to browbeat Americans into trusting our government more. For example, Time Magazine tries to make fun of Americans who don’t trust the government … by comparing them to people who believe in  aliens and the paranormal.

    Likewise, Obama frequently chides Americans for distrusting their government.

    But we Americans don’t trust our government because our government has repeatedly demonstrated through its actions that it is corrupt and untrustworthy.

  • Hilsenrath 'No Rate Hikes In 2015' Hint Sparks Buying Panic In EM FX And Japanese Stocks

    Between the plunging market-implied rate-hike probabilities and Fed-Whsiperer Jon Hilsenrath's WSJ piece this evening strongly hinting at no hikes in 2015, the 'relief' rally in Asian FX (and Japanese stocks) is – in a word – insane. If the world's central banks mandates are "price stability" in whatever format they believe that to manifest, they have well and truly failed. The Won has jumped most since 2011, Ringgit and Rupiah are soaring over 2%, and Nikkei 225 is up over 400 points from the US session close…

    The rate-hike odds are collapsing…

     

    And as WSJ's Hilsenrath notes, confirming the market's bias…

    The chances of a Federal Reserve interest-rate increase in 2015 are diminishing amid new signs of anemic economic activity, a disappointing development for central bank officials who have been hoping to move this year after a prolonged period of easy-money policies.

     

    Lackluster readings on consumer spending, inflation and jobs have virtually eliminated the chances of a move this month. Already, two Fed governors expressed doubts this week about whether the timing will be right this year, and the recent trove of data hasn’t reassured top officials about the economic outlook.

    Sparking panic buying in Nikkei 225…

     

    But EM FX is soaring against the USD…

     

    As the following chaos shows…

    • *KOREAN WON SET FOR BIGGEST GAIN VS DOLLAR SINCE NOV. 2011

     

    We would note though that the USD weakness is starting to stall out any BoJ-hope-strewn JPY weakness which supports the world's equity markets…

     

    Between the pace of hot money flows and illiquidity, the yo-yo-ing "markets" are as fragile as anything we have seen since Lehman.

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • Meet Allen Dulles: The "Psychopath" Who Created America's Modern Shadow Government

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    Allen Dulles, the CIA director under presidents Eisenhower and Kennedy, the younger brother of Secretary of State John Foster Dulles, and the architect of a secretive national security apparatus that functioned as essentially an autonomous branch of government. Talbot offers a portrait of a black-and-white Cold War-era world full of spy games and nuclear brinkmanship, in which everyone is either a good guy or a bad guy. Dulles—who deceived American elected leaders and overthrew foreign ones, who backed ex-Nazis and thwarted left-leaning democrats—falls firmly in the latter camp.

     

    But what I was really trying to do was a biography on the American power elite from World War II up to the 60s. That was the key period when the national security state was constructed in this country, and where it begins to overshadow American democracy. It’s almost like Game of Thrones to me, where you have the dynastic struggles between these power groups within the American system for control of the country and the world…

     

    Absolutely. The surveillance state that Snowden and others have exposed is very much a legacy of the Dulles past. I think Dulles would have been delighted by how technology and other developments have allowed the American security state to go much further than he went. He had to build a team of cutthroats and assassins on the ground to go around eliminating the people he wanted to eliminate, who he felt were in the way of American interests. He called them communists. We call them terrorists today. And of course the most controversial part of my book, I’m sure, will be the end, where I say there was blowback from that. Because that killing machine in some way was brought back home.

     

    – From the Mother Jones article: You Think the NSA Is Bad? Meet Former CIA Director Allen Dulles

    Many of you will be intimately familiar with the name Allen Dulles. Younger readers, of my generation or below, will be far less so. It is precisely because the youth of this nation remain so ignorant of the nefarious characters in America’s past, that David Talbot’s recently published book, The Devil’s Chessboard: Allen Dulles, the CIA, and the Rise of America’s Secret Government, is so incredibly important.

    Mr. Talbot has been recently conducting invaluable interviews about the book with various media organizations. One of the best I’ve seen is with Mother Jones. Here’s some of what he had to say about America’s longest serving CIA director:

    But what I was really trying to do was a biography on the American power elite from World War II up to the 60s. That was the key period when the national security state was constructed in this country, and where it begins to overshadow American democracy. It’s almost like Game of Thrones to me, where you have the dynastic struggles between these power groups within the American system for control of the country and the world.

     

    I focused on those elements that I thought were important to understanding him. I thought other books covered that ground fairly well before me. But what they left out was the interesting nuances and shadow aspects of Dulles’s biography. I think that you can make a case, although I didn’t explicitly say this in the book, for Allen Dulles being a psychopath.

     

    They’ve done studies of people in power, and they all have to be, to some extent, on the spectrum. You have to be unfeeling to a certain extent to send people to their death in war and take the kind of actions that men and women in power routinely have to take. But with Dulles, I think he went to the next step. His own wife and mistress called him “the Shark.” His favorite word was whether you were “useful” to him or not. And this went for people he was sleeping with or people he was manipulating in espionage or so on. He was the kind of man that could cold-bloodedly, again and again, send people to their death, including people he was familiar with and supposedly fond of.

     

    There’s a thread there between people like Dulles up through Dick Cheney and [Donald] Rumsfeld—who was sitting at Dulles’s knee at one point. I was fascinated to find that correspondence between a young Congressman Rumsfeld and Allen Dulles, who he was looking to for wisdom and guidance as a young politician.

     

    Absolutely. The surveillance state that Snowden and others have exposed is very much a legacy of the Dulles past. I think Dulles would have been delighted by how technology and other developments have allowed the American security state to go much further than he went. He had to build a team of cutthroats and assassins on the ground to go around eliminating the people he wanted to eliminate, who he felt were in the way of American interests. He called them communists. We call them terrorists today. And of course the most controversial part of my book, I’m sure, will be the end, where I say there was blowback from that. Because that killing machine in some way was brought back home.

    How about Dulles’ role in the assassination of JFK? Talbot pulls no punches here either…

    To me it’s one of the greatest examples of media incompetence and negligence in American history. I even confronted Ben Bradlee about this, who was probably JFK’s closest friend in the Washington press corps and wrote a book all about JFK and their close friendship. “Why didn’t you, with your investigative resources, try to get [to] the bottom of it?” You should read what he says in Brothers, but basically it came down to, “Well, I thought it would ruin my career.”

     

    I think I have studied this about as much as anyone in my generation at this point, and my final conclusion after 50 years was we have to go there, we have to look at the fact that there’s a wealth of circumstantial evidence that says not only was there, at the highest level, CIA involvement. Probably in the assassination cover-up. But beyond the CIA, because the CIA wouldn’t have acted on its own.

    But the CIA are good guys now. Or so the propagandized American public believes…

    Now check out David’s interview with Amy Goodman of Democracy Now:

  • America #1? 36 Facts That Prove That The United States Is An 'Exceptional' Nation

    Submitted by Michael Snyder via The End of The American Dream blog,

    Is the United States an “exceptional” nation?  Well, the facts show that we are, but not for the reasons that you may think.  Now that it is election season, we have all sorts of politicians running around proclaiming that America is the greatest nation on the entire planet.  And just this week, Warren Buffett stated that “America’s great now — it’s never been greater“.  But is it actually true?  Is the United States still a great nation? 

    I would submit that the numbers suggest otherwise.  I love America, and in my opinion there is not much hope for us until we are willing to admit to ourselves just how far we have fallen.  The following are 36 facts that prove that the United States is an “exceptional” nation…

    #1 According to a brand new report that was just released by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development, the United States has the fattest population in the entire industrialized world by a wide margin.

    #2 That same report from the OECD also found that we are number one in child obesity.  In fact, at 38 percent our rate of childhood obesity is even higher than our overall rate of obesity.

    #3 According to USA Today, the obesity rate in the United States has more than doubled over the past 25 years.

    #4 The Washington Post has reported that Americans spend an average of 293 minutes a day watching television, which is the most in the world by a wide margin.   And as I have discussed previously, more than 90 percent of the “programming” that we absorb is created by just 6 enormously powerful media corporations.

    #5 One study found that the average American spends more than 10 hours a day using some sort of electronic device.

    #6 By the time an American child reaches the age of 18, that child will have seen approximately 40,000 murders on television.

    #7 The average young American will spend 10,000 hours playing video games before the age of 21.

    #8 Out of 22 countries studied by the Educational Testing Service, Americans were dead last in tech proficiency, dead last in numeracy and only two countries performed worse than us when it came to literacy proficiency.

    #9 In more than half of all U.S. states, the highest paid public employee in the state is a football coach.

    #10 The percentage of wealth owned by middle class adults is lower in North America than it is anywhere else in the world.

    #11 Almost half of all Americans (47 percent) do not put a single penny out of their paychecks into savings.

    #12 It turns out that Americans are very good at locking people away in prison.  At 716 per 100,000 members of the population, the United States has the highest incarceration rate on the entire planet by a very wide margin.

    #13 Approximately one-fourth of the entire global prison population is in the United States.

    #14 In 2014, police in the United States killed 1,100 people.  During that same year, police in Canada killed 14 people, police in China killed 12 people and police in Germany didn’t kill anyone at all.

    #15 One recently published study found that one out of every six young Americans has stolen something during the past year.

    #16 There are more car thefts in the United States than anywhere else in the world by far.

    #17 According to Fox News, approximately 70 percent of married men in the United States admit to having cheated on their wives.

    #18 Americans spend far more on health care than anyone else in the world, and yet we only rank 26th in life expectancy and our entire health care system has been transformed into a giant money making scam.

    #19 According to a study conducted by the Mayo Clinic, nearly 70 percent of all Americans are on at least one prescription drug, and an astounding 20 percent of all Americans are on at least five prescription drugs.

    #20 According to the U.S. Department of Agriculture, 31 percent of all food in the United States gets wasted.  In case you were wondering, that amounts to approximately 133 billion pounds of food a year.

    #21 In 2013, women earned 60 percent of all bachelor’s degrees that were awarded that year in the United States.

    #22 A survey conducted by the Barna Group discovered that 77 percent of Christian men in America in the 18 to 30-year-old age bracket view pornography at least monthly.

    #23 There are more than 4 million adult websites on the Internet, and they get more traffic than Netflix, Amazon and Twitter combined.

    #24 70 percent of Americans do not “feel engaged or inspired at their jobs”.

    #25 When LBJ’s “War on Poverty” began, less than 10 percent of all U.S. children were growing up in single parent households.  Today, that number has skyrocketed to 33 percent.

    #26 In 1950, less than 5 percent of all babies in America were born to unmarried parents.  Today, that number is over 40 percent.

    #27 According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, there are 20 million new cases of sexually-transmitted disease in the United States each year.

    #28 Today, the United States has the highest STD infection rate in the entire industrialized world.

    #29 According to a survey that was just released within the last 30 days, only 29 percent of Americans want to cut off federal funding for Planned Parenthood even after all of the shocking undercover videos that were released this year.

    #30 America has the highest rate of illegal drug use on the entire planet.

    #31 Doctors in the United States write more than 250 million prescriptions for antidepressants each year.

    #32 One survey of 50-year-old men in the U.S. found that only 12 percent of them said that they were “very happy”.

    #33 Every single year, the United States has the largest trade deficit in the entire world by a very wide margin.  But most Americans still don’t seem concerned that thousands of businesses and millions of good jobs have been leaving our country.

    #34 As you read this article, there are 102.6 million working age Americans that do not have a job.

    #35 We are supposed to have a government “of the people, by the people, for the people”, but only 25 percent of all Americans know how long U.S. Senators are elected for (6 years), and only 20 percent of all Americans know how many U.S. senators there are in total.

    #36 On average, we have been stealing more than 100 million dollars from future generations of Americans every single hour of every single day since Barack Obama entered the White House.

  • China's Other Big Problem: 35 Applicants For One White Collar Job

    Over a year ago, the world’s most influential and central-banker spawning FDIC-backed hedge fund, Goldman Sachs, proudly revealed that despite 6 consecutive years of revelations of bank rigging, manipulation, fraud, bailout, crime and so on, there was no other job that the world’s most ambitious young people wanted to do more:

    As an investment bank, our main asset is our people and the advice and solutions that they provide to our clients. Great people build great relationships. And, we are fortunate to have a diverse group of young people from around the world who continue to view Goldman Sachs as a great place to begin and sustain their careers. For our latest analyst class, more than 43,000 candidates applied for 1,900 positions. We accepted about four percent of those applicants and of those receiving offers, more than 80 percent accepted.

    Or, as Lloyd Blankfein would proudly calculate, 23 applicants for every job opening.

    According to that logic, if working at Goldman is about as prestigious as it gets, then we know a job – based on unprecedented demand – that is even more prestigious: your average white-collar job in China, for which there were a record 35 application in the third quarter.

    Indeed, in the world’s most populous communist country where jobs used to be guaranteed – by definition – to anyone, in any walk of life, it has suddenly become next to impossible to progress up the career ladder, something which will result in great social angst and instability in the coming years.

    According to China Daily, competition for white-collar jobs became fiercer in the third quarter, with more than 35 job seekers contending for the same position on average. This is a jump from 26 and 29 in the first and second quarters this year, a Chinese human resources website said on Tuesday.

    The Daily cites Zhaopin.com’s third-quarter jobs report for white-collar workers, which  showed that demand for talent was shrinking with the slowdown of China’s economic growth. At the same time, more such workers were considering changing jobs, leading to more competition among job hunters, especially those in Northeast China and in second-tier cites.

    In Zhaopin’s competition index for major cities, Shenyang and Dalian, both in Liaoning province, and Changchun, Jilin province – all in Northeast China – ranked first, fourth and eighth.

    Zhu Hongyan, chief career consultant for the website, said that “the changing economic structure affects certain traditional careers. The need for professionals in certain fields declined, and some even disappeared.” Hongyan added that “Workers in these industries are forced to seek career opportunities in other ones, increasing competition in the market for job seekers.”

     

    Moreover, second-tier cities such as Chengdu, Sichuan province, Suzhou, Jiangsu province, Xi’an, Shaanxi province, and Tianjin are all among the top 10 cities with the most competitive job market.

     

    Beijing ranked ninth, while Shanghai ranked 18th.

     

    Zhu, the career consultant, said the trend of white collar workers shifting their jobs to fast-developing second-or third-tier cities has become more prominent because of the high pressures of working and living in larger cities, deteriorating environments and restrictions on cars and housing.

     

    “Regional preferential policies have helped second-and third-tier cities attract overflow industries and companies from the overcrowded metropolises, which have their own restrictions such as limited land and other resources,” Zhu said.

    “However, second-and third-tier cities do not have the same mature economic structure and industries as the metropolises,” added Zhu. “So not all job seekers can find satisfactory jobs.”

    And with 35 applicants for any one job, that is precisely what is happening.

    Worse, due to surging labor market competition and the drop of vacant positions for which there is demands – usually at the best paid positions in the labor chain – wages are about to tumble as employers realize they can pay anything they want: after all if someone quits, there are 34 other workers happy to replace him.

    This has two major impllcations:

    • first, with wages set to drop, yet another source of deflation is about to be unveiled;
    • second, as China’s economic collapse leads to increasingly less job opening , it inevitably means that social tensions and violence are set to rise in a country which see the migration of tens of millions of people from the heartland to the coastal cities.

    Finally, all those conflicting forecasts in 2011 that China may or may not hit wage parity with the US some time in 2016, well – we now know the answer: China may have reached its Lewis point, but now that the economy is on its way to a crash landing, it has solidly gone into reverse.

    (for those asking what China’s first problem is, well there are many to choose from, but if given just one option, we would repeat what we said last night when we reported that “CLSA Just Stumbled On The Neutron Bomb In China’s Banking System” – the country’s trillion in non-performing loans which nobody is talking about just yet).

  • Market Cycles And Collisions In A Non-Linear World

    Submitted by Keith Dicker of IceCap Asset Management, October 2015 letter to Clients

    Newsflash

    Newsflash # 1: A few short weeks ago, Canada’s self-proclaimed biggest and best bank told clients: “much of the negative news from Europe is firmly rooted in the past” and that there is “more potential for upside for markets.”

    Result: European Stocks subsequently declined -13.5%

    Newsflash # 2: America’s biggest and best bank bragged: “global developed market equities should remain attractive”.

    Result: Global Stocks subsequently declined -11.3%

    Newsflash # 3: Britain’s biggest and best bank was all squiffy over markets, proclaiming: “Economic growth is gaining momentum” and “overall, we continue to prefer risk assets such as equities, high yield credit and EM debt.”

    Result: Global stocks subsequently declined -11.3%, High Yield Bonds subsequently declined -4.7%, and Emerging Market Debt subsequently declined -3.2%

    By now, most people are once again painfully aware that stocks, high yield bonds and emerging market bonds can actually go down as well as up. For stock investors, it has been a brutal 5 weeks with most markets dropping -10% or more.

    As a reminder, a -10% decline needs a +11.1% rebound to get back to where you started. Or from a more serious perspective, a -50% decline needs a +100% rebound to get back to where you started.

    The reason we share these very simple and obvious mathematical facts is due to the following intelligent investment insight: avoiding and limiting downside losses is a crucial aspect of investment management.

    Yet, as you can see from the market wisdom from the biggest Canadian, American and British banks – they completely ignore this very simple rule of investing.

    Instead, millions of investors are constantly bombarded with the seemingly innocuous market wisdoms:

    1. Buy the dip
    2. Invest for the long term
    3. Know your time horizon
    4. Invest regularly 

    And in our opinion, this is a real shame – a very, real shame. There certainly are times when these are words of wisdom. But, there are also times when they are not.

    By now, clients, non-clients, and peers are all familiar with our big view of the World. Our experience, perspective and research continues to conclude that global financial markets, the global economy and government fiscal balances are all converging to make everyone’s investment experience very different than that painted by the very big banks.

    Yet, the big banks continue to shamefully respond as if all is well. Considering the fact that central banks have kept interest rates at 0% for 7 years and the global economy continues to decline is the clearest of clear messages that the financial World isn’t quite right.

    And if that isn’t clear enough, just know that now many countries have begun to implement NEGATIVE interest rates to help stimulate their economies.

    Yet, we rarely read or hear any of these facts from the big banks. This of course can mean several things – none of which are complimentary:

    1 – the big banks feel the average investor isn’t intelligent enough to understand what is happening

    2 – the big banks cannot articulate the true state of the money World to their millions of clients

    3 – the big banks truly believe all is well, and that the World will always see a few bumps every now and then.

    As we all know, investment managers will ALWAYS make a few wrong decisions – it’s inevitable. Managing other people’s wealth can be a stressful responsibility. The good times are awesome. The bad times, not so much.

    However, if anyone has any aspirations to be an investment manager – this is THE most perfect time to realise your dream.

    Let us explain why.

    As of today, 100,000s of investment professionals around the World are following the age-old adage of buy and hold, buy the dip, stocks always outperform bonds, and never invest in currencies.

    Just steer the course and you’ll be fine, just fine.

    Unless of course, the ship you are in doesn’t have a rudder, a mast, a jib, a boom, a tiller or a keel. In truth, these ships are not really investment managers at all, instead they are asset gatherers.

    The difference being is that real investment managers are very focused on making investment decisions to preserve your capital during volatile times, while growing your capital during the good times.

    Asset gatherers on the other hand, are very focused on winning new clients and receiving new money to manage – after all, investment management IS a business.

    At these firms, the focus is on marketing and sales. They razzle and dazzle you with very nice commercials, brochures and presentations, as well as a splendid array of investment options.

    Yet, if you open your eyes and ears just enough, you’ll notice the difference and it mainly starts with investing for the long-term, buy and hold, and invest regularly – sadly, it ends the same way as well.

    In other words – investors hear the same old story, time and time again. This would be perfectly acceptable IF we lived in a linear World.

    The problem of course is that we DO NOT live in a linear World.

    While it is human nature to think and expect along linear lines, our World just doesn’t work that way. Instead, everything moves in cycles, some short and shallow, while other cycles are long and deep.

    What we are experiencing today is the likely turning point in a very long cycle of borrowing, borrowing and then borrowing some more.

    The capacity to borrow has reached the limit for many, yet our governments and central banks are desperate to keep the party going. Yes, despite foggy heads, tired legs and full bellies; governments and central banks continue to pour more drinks, dish out more food, all while playing even louder music.

    In some ways, the real question to ask your mutual fund sales person is whether the party has ended or is it just getting started?

    The real difference between the investment managers and asset gatherers is in their ability to truly understand market conditions, identify the key driving points, reposition your strategies and then to easily communicate the entire process.

    Let’s be honest here – the calm sailing and the good times ended in March 2000. That was the end of the most beautiful simultaneous bull market in both stocks and bonds ever known to mankind.

    For 18 stunning years prior to March 2000, financial markets everywhere, charmed everyone into believing that life as an investment manager was as difficult as a sail into a gentle, onshore breeze.

    And considering markets produced an average annual return of +15%, how could anyone not be happy?

    This was the way life should be.

    However, since March 2000, stocks plummeted -50%, then soared +100%, then crashed -56%, only to zoom +215%.

    So since March 2000, 16 years of buying the dip, investing for the long-term, knowing your time horizon, diversifying your portfolio, and investing regularly netted you a handsome annual return of +2%.

    This wasn’t the way life should be.

    So which is it? Do you expect stocks to always perform like they did from 1982 to 2000? Or, do you expect stocks to perform like they did from 2000 to 2015?

    Judging by their investment commentary, the big banks obviously believe in the 80-90s era. In reality however, the big banks believe in gathering your assets, and investing for the long-term, buying the dip…

    Collision Time

    Make no doubt about it – our economy and our debt loads have created a very uncomfortable environment for those in governments and central banks.

    Over the years, individuals, companies and governments of all kinds have borrowed to their hearts content. Subsequently, all of this borrowing gushed new money into our economies and swirled around, around and around.

    The good times became so great, they turned awesome.

    Politicians promised a chicken in every pot – yet, by borrowing and borrowing they delivered entire farms to their voters.

    Companies promised steady hours with steady pay – yet they delivered more jobs, more pay and more pensions.

    Not to be outdone, individuals goosed the system too, and enjoyed golden eggs year after year after year.

    It happened during the hippy-days of the 60s, and during the disco-days of the 70s. Of course, bumps also happened during the metal-days of the 80s and then again during the grunge-days of the 90s. Then American Idol took over and all was lost – well, all except the ineffective vision of our leading central bankers and government treasuries.

    While some people began their careers in the 1970s, even more started their investment careers in the 1980s; with more still in the 1990s and 2000s.

    Worse still, many of today’s investment young guns started their careers after the 2008 crisis.

    We share this perspective because every market expert today draws upon their years of wisdom to make very important investment decisions for you, your family and your pension plans.

    This would be great if everyone lived to be 300 years old and shared this much longer, and much richer experience with the World.

    Instead, our minds are trapped within a very narrow place in time which limits our ability to think and see things from a much broader and clearer perspective.

    Today, we have 3 enormously important market drivers steam rolling towards each other and when they collide, the distortions will be leave everyone dazed, confused, asking questions – and demanding answers.

    Sadly, the answers will be completely unsatisfying entirely due to an industry focused on linear thinking and obsessed with gathering assets. Fortunately, the key to understanding why the World has reached a precarious point in time is actually quite easy to achieve – just shed your mind of your tunnel visions and linear thinking, and open it to a World that is crystal clear.

    For starters, knowing and accepting that every market, every economy, and every society is interconnected will allow you to understand the events that are unfolding around us.

    Next, ignore the drivel from the talking heads and asset gathering machines. Then, know that every single time our World has experienced an economic bump, our governments and centrals always responded by:

    1) Borrowing more money to spend on special projects

    2) Cutting interest rates to make it cheaper for individuals and companies to borrow

    The result of 1) and 2) would be more money pumped into our economies which would inevitably help us recover from the little bumps.

    This happened like clock work in the 60s, 70s, 80s, 90s, and 2000s. Unfortunately, this clock has suddenly become broken. Yes, broken clocks are correct twice a day, but right now our global financial World is over 11 figurative hours away from that effusive goal.

    Over 60 years of borrowing and 35 years of cutting interest rates has left us with the mess we have today:

    1) Excessive debt loads for practically EVERY country

    2) ZERO and NEGATIVE interest rates

    Collision Time

    Linear thinkers not only see these as two separate market dynamics, but they also view it as two markets factors within every single, separate country and market.

    To proclaim that Greece doesn’t matter is tunnel vision.

    To believe China is an economic miracle is gullible.

    To conclude that lower interest rates and money printing will create a better World is pretty weak.

    Instead, we’ll show you how to liberate your mind and see the World as one continuous flowing market, where capital, ideas and innovation always seeks safety and avoids excessive risks and losses.

    We cannot stop what is coming, however if you escape the traps caused by linear thinking, the opportunity for your own personal schadenfreude is right around the corner.

    And it all starts with a collision:

     

    Here comes the recession

    Recently someone told us that if everyone simply acted with more optimism, then all of this gloom and doom would disappear.

    In one way, this is 100% correct. Positive thinking is great for a positive economy which leads to positive everything – more jobs, more bonuses, more raises, and more spending, and then rinse and repeat.

    Yet, all of this optimism can only carry an economy so far. Eventually mathematics take over, and soon thereafter one realises positive thinking doesn’t automatically give you a new job with more bonus, more raises which creates more spending.

    It’s funny how the loss of a bonus, or worse still, the loss of a job really affects the ole’ optimism gene by affecting it with something very different – pessimism.

    Suddenly, that vacation in Europe becomes a stay-cation. That new dream kitchen remains a distant dream. And the weekly eat-outs, turn into home pizza night (not that there’s anything wrong with home pizza night).

    As you can see, eventually mathematics always trumps optimism and pessimism too for that matter. Unfortunately, today’s market cycle – has the World sliding downwards and not upwards. Eventually the day will come when the opposite is happening, but we have to slump into the financial valley first – that’s just the way it works.

    * * *

    Continue reading in the full letter below:

     


  • What Has Generated Alpha This Year?

    It only makes sense in this "good news is bad news" market that the best outperformance this year has been achieved by being ultimately contrarian and fading the crowd. As BofAML warns, 2015 is another year of position-driven alpha as selling the 10 most-overweight stocks held by active managers and buying the 10 most-underweight stocks crated a stunning 17 percentage point spread this year

     

     

    BofAML sees risk this positioning trade continues.

    Consultants may be helping to perpetuate it, given they have honed in active share as a key metric for fund managers, which has forced managers into a crowded subset of similar holdings (typically smaller, more idiosyncratic stocks).
     

  • World's Largest Leveraged ETF Halts Orders, Citing "Liquidity Constraints"

    First The Bank of Japan destroyed the Japanese bond market, and then, back in May we warned that The Bank of Japan had 'broken' the stock market. Now, it appears the all too obvious consequences of being the sole provider of buying power in an antirely false market are coming home to roost as Nomura reports the "temporary suspension" of new orders for 3 leveraged ETFs – the largest in the world – citing "liquidity of the underlying Nikkei 225 futures market."

    Source: Nomura

    As Bloomberg reported previously on Nomura's funds,

    Money is being shredded at an unprecedented rate in a souped-up exchange-traded fund tied to Japan’s most famous stock index.

     

    Since mid-August, investors have poured a record $4.5 billion into the Next Funds Nikkei 225 Leveraged Index ETF, a security designed to rise or fall twice as fast as its namesake equity gauge. That’s too bad, considering that twice the Nikkei 225 Stock Average’s loss over that period comes out to about 21 percent.

     

    So fast have the country’s individual investors been plowing money into the fund that even as a fifth was lopped off its price, its market value more than doubled. It’s the largest security of its kind in the world, and is now big enough to affect the whole stock market as overseers rush to buy and sell securities to meet its price target, according to BNP Paribas Investment Partners Ltd.

     

    “They are taking up a larger proportion of the market,” said Tony Glover, head of the investment management department at BNP Paribas Investment Partners Japan in Tokyo. “Volatile markets are not great news with increasingly wider intraday swings. The funds are a big factor causing this.”

     

    The ETF has become more popular with traders than even Toyota Motor Corp., Japan’s biggest company. Average turnover for the ETF was about 250 billion yen ($2.1 billion) a day over the past two months, triple that of Toyota.

    *  *  *

    Who could have seen this coming? Well we did… numerous times…and here is the explanation…

    Two months ago, in “ETF Issuers Quietly Prepare For Meltdown With Billions In Emergency Liquidity,” we outlined the rather disconcerting circumstances that have led some large fund managers to quietly line up emergency liquidity facilities that can be tapped in the event of a sudden retail exodus from bond funds.

     

    "The biggest providers of exchange-traded funds, which have been funneling billions of investor dollars into some little-traded corners of the bond market, are bolstering bank credit lines for cash to tap in the event of a market meltdown. Vanguard Group, Guggenheim Investments and First Trust are among U.S. fund companies that have lined up new bank guarantees or expanded ones they already had, recent company filings show," Reuters reported at the time, in a story we suspect did not get the attention it deserved.

     

    At a base level, these precautionary measures are the result of the interplay between central bank policy and the unintended consequences of the post-crisis regulatory regime. ZIRP creates a hunt a for yield and simultaneously incentivizes companies (especially cash strapped companies) to tap the bond market while borrowing costs remain artificially suppressed. Clearly, this is a self-fulfilling prophecy. The longer rates on risk free assets remain near, at, or even below zero, the more demand there is for new corporate issuance (the rationale being that at least corporate credit offers some semblance of yield). More demand means rates on corporate credit are driven still lower, and once yields on high grade issues get close to the lower limit, yield-starved investors are then herded into HY.

     

    All of this supply in the primary market comes at a time when liquidity in the secondary market for corporate credit is non-existent thanks to the shrinking dealer books that resulted from the government’s (maybe) well-meaning attempt to crack down on prop trading. The result: a crowded theatre with a tiny exit.

     

    This situation has been exacerbated by the proliferation of bond ETFs which have allowed retail investors to pile into corners of the fixed income world where they might not belong.

    All of the above can be summarized as follows.

    "MF assets too large versus dealer inventories" (via Citi)…

    … clear evidence of "structural damage in corporate bond trading liquidity" (via JP Morgan)…

    … and the rapid growth of bond funds in the post-crisis world (via BIS)…

    So given the above, the question is this: if something were to spook the market – a rate hike cycle for instance, or an October revolver raid on HY energy names, or an exogenous geopolitical shock – causing an exodus from these funds, what would happen to prices if fund managers were suddenly forced to transact in size in an illiquid secondary market in order to meet redemptions?

    "Nothing good", is the answer. 

    The solution is to avoid selling the underlying bonds – even when investors are selling their shares in the funds.

    But how is this possible? 

    To a certain extent, outflows in one fund can be offset by inflows to another. These "diversifiable flows" are one happy byproduct of the great ETF proliferation. Here's a refresher on how this works courtesy of Barclays.

    *  *  *

    Portfolio Products Replace Dealer Inventory

    While diversifiable flows limit the risks to portfolio managers in principle, the reality of the high yield market is more complicated. Managers have specific views on tenor, callability, sectors, covenants, and, most importantly, individual credits, such that actually finding buyers for specific bonds can be quite difficult. In the pre-crisis period, dealers ran large inventories that effectively facilitated the netting of flows across funds (Figure 1). A fund with an outflow would sell bonds into the dealer community, and funds with outflows would buy bonds out of the dealer inventory. When inventory is large, the fact that the specific bonds bought and sold did not match was largely irrelevant. Funds with outflows could sell the bonds of their choice, and the funds with inflows could pick investments from the large variety of inventory held by dealers.

    The matching problem has become more acute as dealer inventories have declined. Even funds can net flows in principle, dealers are much less willing to warehouse bonds, and are much more likely to buy only when they believe they can quickly offload the risk. Under this scenario, the fact that flows can theoretically be netted is of little practical use to fund managers – actually netting individual bonds is extremely difficult, particularly in the short time frame required by funds offering daily liquidity to end investors.

    This is where portfolio products come in. Investors can use portfolio products to fund outflows/invest inflows immediately and execute the necessary single-name bond trades over time as liquidity in the underlying bond market allows (Figure 2). In this scenario, funds with inflows and outflows simply exchange portfolio products, sidestepping the immediate need to trade single-name corporate bonds.

    *  *  *

    Ok great, so ETFs provide a kind of "phantom" liquidity if you will. There are two problems with this:

    • It only works when flows are diversifiable. Once flows become unidirectional, it all goes out the window.
    • It makes the underlying markets even more illiquid.

    Here's how we put it last month in "How Fund Managers Use ETF Phantom Liquidity To Avert A Meltdown"

    In other words, if I'm a fund manager, the idea that ETFs provide liquidity rests on the assumption that when I experience outflows, someone else will be experiencing inflows and thus I can sell ETFs and avoid offloading my bonds into an illiquid corporate credit market. Put another way: I am depending on new money coming into the market to fund redemptions from previous investors who are exiting the market, all so that I can avoid liquidating assets that are declining in value and that I believe will be difficult to sell. There's a term for that kind of business. It's called a ponzi scheme and just like all other ponzi schemes, when the new money dries up (so, for example, when HY bond ETF flows are all headed in the wrong direction), the only way to meet redemptions is to get what I can for the assets I have and when the market for those assets is thin (as the secondary market for corporate credit most certainly is), I may incur substantial losses. 

     

    Note also that the more often ETFs are used as a way of avoiding the underlying bond market, the more illiquid that market becomes, making the situation still more precarious in the event of a panic.

    So what is a fund manager to do?

    This is where we come full circle to the emergency liquidity lines mentioned at the outset. In order to avoid tapping the underlying illiquid bond market in a situation where flows are unidirectional, fund managers may instead pay out redemptions in borrowed cash.

     

    This is, to quote Citi's Matt King, "creative destruction destroyed."

     

    Only worse.

     

     

    That is, this represents the willful delay of a long overdue episode of creative destruction layered atop another delay of the much needed Schumpeterian endgame. Stripping out the metaphysics and philosophy references, that can be translated as follows: this strategy is yet another example of delaying the inevitable. If fund managers are forced to tap these liquidity lines it likely means investors have found a reason to sell en masse and if that reason turns out to be something that permanently impairs the value of the underlying bonds (as opposed to a transitory, irrational panic) then all the funds are doing by borrowing to meet redemptions is employing leverage to stave off the recognition of losses, which is ironically the same thing (in principle anyway) that the companies whose bonds they’re holding have done to stay in business. It’s a delay-and-pray scheme designed to avoid selling the debt of companies whose similar delay-and-pray schemes have run their course.

    In closing, it's important to note that no fund manager in the world will be able to line up enough emergency liquidity protection to avoid tapping the corporate credit market in the event of panic selling in the increasingly crowded market for bond funds. 

    In other words, when the exodus comes, the illiquidity that's been chasing markets for the better part of seven years will finally catch up, and at that point, all bets are officially off.

    *  *  *

    At the end of the day, one is reminded of what Howard Marks' recently said about ETFs: 

    "[They] can't be more liquid than the underlying and we know the underlying can be quite illiquid."

    We are about to get the real-life answer to Howard Marks' more critical question: "What happens when ETF Holders all sell at once?"

  • Paul Craig Roberts On The MH-17 Report: "Only An Idiot Would Believe It"

    Submitted by Paul Craig Roberts,

    When I read that the report on the downing of the Malaysian airliner over Ukraine was being
    put in the hands of the Dutch, I knew that there would be no investigation and no attention to the facts.

    And there wasn’t.

    I did not intend to write about the report, because Washington’s propaganda has already succeeded, at least in the Western world, in its purpose of laying the blame on Russia. However, the misrepresentation of the Dutch report by Western media, such as NPR, is so outrageous as to make the media the story and not the report.

    For example, I just heard NPR’s Moscow correspondent, Corey Flintoff, say that the missile that hit the airliner was fired by Ukrainian separatists who lack the technical ability to operate the system. Therefore, the missile had to have been fired by a Russian.

    There is nothing in the Dutch report whatsoever that leads to this conclusion. Flintoff either is incompetent or lying or he is expressing his view and not the report’s conclusion.

    The only conclusion that the report reaches is one that we already knew: if a Buk missile brought down the airliner, it was a Russian-made missile. The Dutch report does not say who fired it.

    Indeed, the report places no blame on Russia, but it does place blame on Ukraine for not closing the airspace over the war area. Attorneys have stated in response to the report that families of those killed and the Malaysian airline itself are likely to file lawsuits against Ukraine for negligence.

    Of course, there was nothing of this in Flintoff’s report.

    As I wrote at the time of the airliner’s destruction, the Western media already had “the-Russians-did-it” story ready the moment the airliner was reported to be shot down. This story was very useful to Washington in hardening its European vassal states into sanctions against Russia, as there was some dissent. What Washington has never explained and the Western media has never asked is: What motive did separatists and Russia have to shoot down a Malaysian airliner?

    None whatsoever. The Russian government would never allow such a thing. Putin would have immediately strung up those responsible.

    Washington’s story makes no sense whatsoever. Only an idiot could believe it.

    What motive did Washington have? Many. The demonization of Russia made it impossible for European governments to resist or abandon the economic sanctions that Washington is using to break economic and political relationships between Europe and Russia.

    The Russian manufacturer of the Buk missile has proven that if a Buk missile was used, it was an old version that exists only in the Ukraine military. For some years the Russian military has been equipped with a replacement version that has a different signature in its destructive impact. The damage to the Malaysian airliner is inconsistent with the destructive force of the Buk missile in Russian service. The reports were given to the Dutch, but no effort was made to replicate and verify the validity of the tests conducted by the manufacturer of the missile. Indeed, the Dutch report does not even consider whether the airliner was downed by Ukrainian fighter jets. The report is as useless as the 9/11 Commission’s report.

    Don’t expect any acknowledgement of this by the Western media, a collection of people who lie for a living.

    The reason that the West has no future is that the West has no media, only propagandists for government and corporate agendas and apologists for their crimes. Every day the bought-and-paid-for-media sustains The Matrix that makes Western peoples politically impotent.

    The Western media has no independence. An editor of a major German newspaper has written a book, a best-seller published in Germany, in which he states that not only he himself served the CIA as a reliable purveyor of Washington’s lies, but that every significant journalist in Europe does so also.

    Obviously, his book has not been translated and published in America.

    NPR, like all of Western media, has lost its integrity. NPR claims to be reader-supported. In fact, it is supported by corporations. Pay attention to the ads: “NPR is supported by xyz corporation working to sell you this or that product or service.”

    The George W. Bush regime destroyed NPR by appointing two Republican female ideologues to oversee NPR’s public function. The two Republicans succeeded in making job security, not reporting integrity, the motive of NPR journalists.

    As a person who worked with President Reagan to end the Cold War and associated nuclear threat, I am dismayed that the Western media has failed life on earth by resurrecting the prospect of nuclear armageddon.

  • OPeRaTioN OaTMeaL…

    OPERATION OATMEAL

  • Whose FX Reserves Suffered The Most During The "China Tantrum"? Goldman Has The Answer

    In the four or so weeks after the August 11 China deval, all anyone wanted to talk about was FX reserves. 

    What most didn’t immediately realize was that China’s new FX regime would, in the short-term anyway, end up leaving less of a role for the market in determining the yuan’s exchange rate not more. This is because – and we’re fond of quoting BNP’s Mole Hau on this – “whereas the daily fix was previously used to fix the spot rate, the PBoC now seemingly fixes the spot rate to determine the daily fix.” Because the market ultimately expects a much larger devaluation, the persistent pressure on the yuan caused the PBoC to have to intervene in the onshore and eventually, the offshore spot markets. That meant liquidating reserves. The sheer pace of the drawdown caught the world’s attention as suddenly, everyone woke up to what we began discussing last November when it became clear that the Saudi’s move to kill the petrodollar would lead directly to reserve liquidation across EM as commodity currencies and exporters were set to suffer from crude’s collapse. 

    Of course the yuan deval was especially bad news for emerging Asia where economies that were already suffering from slowing Chinese demand and slumping commodities were suddenly forced to grapple with a loss of export competitiveness as well. 

    Before you knew it, it was an all-out Eastern USD reserve liquidation party, leading some to ask what effect the drawdowns would ultimately have on UST yields because all else equal, FX reserve selling is just QE in reverse. As we noted on any number of occasions, this could have the effect of amplifying what would otherwise be a merely “symbolic” 25 bps Fed hike. That is, if the Fed hikes and triggers more EM outflows, well then they’ll be more USD paper selling (i.e. a loss of global liquidity) as FX managers move to support their currencies. 

    Against this backdrop, we bring you the following from Goldman who has endeavored to tally up currency intervention as a percentage of reserve money in Asia during what they’re calling the “China tantrum”. Note the rather scary looking figure for Malaysia, where it’s not just financial and economic conditions that threaten to tip the country into crisis, but a political scandal as well that has quickly mushroomed into a series of investigations across the globe that could ultimately cost PM Najib his career and legacy.

    *  *  *

    From Goldman

    When the mini-devaluation of the RMB surprised us and markets in early August, we argued strongly that this was a one-off adjustment that did not signal the beginning of a devaluation cycle. Markets disagreed and risk assets sold off hard in the weeks that followed. Asian FX was not spared amid the sell-off, with RMB proxies such as the MYR hit especially hard. There is always a challenge in reading price action in the moment, given that many Asian central banks use their official foreign exchange reserves to stabilize exchange rates. These actions are usually not known until months afterwards, when data on spot reserves and forward books become available. In this Global Markets Daily, we compile the full picture for Asian central bank intervention during what we are calling the ‘China tantrum’, the period from June to August when SHCOMP was already selling off. We compare the magnitude of reserve drawdowns to the ‘taper tantrum’, the period from June to August 2013.

    Many Asian central banks intervene not just in spot foreign exchange markets, but also in forward markets. Typically, these transactions consist of a spot/forward foreign exchange swap that results in the central bank having a forward USD asset. This kind of intervention leaves the central bank balance sheet unaffected and thus amounts to sterilized intervention. Many Asian central banks rely heavily on this kind of intervention, so it is important to factor this into the overall intervention picture. We look at the FX-valuation-adjusted decline in spot reserves between end-May and end-August (using the COFER data to adjust for valuation effects) plus the change in forward books over this period. We scale this proxy for official intervention by reserve money at the end of May, which helps control for differences in size across countries. After all, a $1bn drop in reserves is a different story for China compared with Malaysia.

    Relative to reserve money, foreign exchange intervention was most pronounced for Malaysia (43%), followed by Thailand (17%), Singapore (16%), South Korea (15%) and Indonesia (10%). Despite the seemingly large drop in China’s official reserves, this works out to be only 4% of reserve money, underscoring our view that developments there are more benign than meets the eye. Coupled with FX moves, these numbers paint a picture where depreciation pressure was most pronounced for Malaysia. With the exception of Malaysia, these reserve losses are comparable to 2013 when the ‘taper tantrum’ put depreciation pressure on currencies in the region.

  • Moral Hazard, "Supernormal" VIX Swings, And Why August 2015 Was Just An Appetizer

    Excerpted from Artemis Capital Management letter to investors,

    True knowledge is not what you know but certainty in what you do not. Volatility is simply about putting a price on that. Drawing from the famous quote by Donald Rumsfeld, former US Secretary of Defense(20), the trader of volatility must be able to identify “known unknowns” and “unknown unknowns” while simultaneously making a market in both. Modern volatility markets know that the global economy is facing deflation… but they also know that global central banks will be right there to respond to any crisis. The single most important “unknown unknown” today is any random event that may unexpectedly cause global central banks to withdraw their stated support of markets.

    Moral hazard has contributed to a significant build up in short and leveraged volatility creating a shadow ‘volatility gamma’ that reinforces the current trend in volatility direction. Rising volatility is followed by more rising volatility and vice versa. Volatility is crushed whenever a central bank responds to crisis and thereafter leverage is re-applied in even greater amounts in a cycle of moral hazard. The pattern is creating a pro-cyclical monster of short volatility that, if left unchecked will contribute to a repeat of the May 2010 Flash Crash or 1987 Black Monday Crash.  August 2015 was just an appetizer.

    In 2012 Artemis coined the term “Bull Market in Fear” to explain a regime of volatility defined by investor's willingness to pay almost anything to shield their portfolios from the next deflationary crash. Between 2013 and October 2014 we experienced a “Bear Market in Fear” defined by a rising short volatility complex and low risk premiums for selling variance. Ever since last fall, we have entered into one last dangerous phase in the volatility cycle. Forward volatility markets no longer fade volatility out of denial; they fade volatility out of the prospect of central bank support.

    This is a new era of hyper-moral hazard whereby a central bank reaction function is fully priced into option markets. Volatility markets do not believe central banks will let us fail. 

    For evidence, consider that the VIX futures markets faded the August VIX spike by the greatest margin in history.  The graph below shows the ratio of the VIX to the market’s one-month forward expectation of the VIX. The higher the ratio the greater the market’s confidence in volatility mean reversion. August 2015 dwarfed all other crises in mean reversion expectation including October 2008, May 2010, and August 2011. The entire VIX market was essentially one large leveraged bet that central banks would respond to the crisis… and it paid off! What if it didn’t?

    The VIX is experiencing epileptic seizures including erratic and violent outbursts up and down at the most frequent pace in history as new sources of structural short convexity interact with interventionist policy responses to crisis. The VIX has registered a quantifiable ‘supernormal’ (five standard deviation +) move up or down every three months over the last two years. 

    In July-August 2015 alone, we experienced the single largest multi-day drawup and drawdown in the history of the VIX index. Artemis ranks consecutive drawups and drawdowns (trough-to-peak or peak-to-trough) in volatility and models them as a power law distribution.  The distributions of a wide variety of physical, biological, and human phenomena closely follow this form. Examples include earthquakes, deaths in war and terrorism, populations of cities, solar flares, word frequencies in language, movie box office receipts, and asset price movements.  When you logarithmically rank the event magnitude of these natural and human phenomena the majority of observations will align linearly along the x-axis as a power-law function (see white line below). Violations of the power-law function are supernormal events because their results contain a degree of reflexivity that exceeds the exponential growth function. Examples of supernormal violations in power laws across other phenomena include death counts in WWII ranked among all wars, box office receipts of the movie Titanic, the Titanic disaster itself, the 9.2 Magnitude 1960 Chilean Earthquake, the population of Tokyo, the 1987 Black Monday Crash, and the 9/11 terror attack in NYC. Three of the top ten supernormal VIX increases and four of the top eight supernormal VIX decreases have occurred in the last year alone! The top eight ranked drawdown collapses in VIX have all occurred during the post-2012 monetary regime. Power-law violations in VIX to the downside and upside are now happening with regularity!

    Volatility markets are demonstrating deep uncertainty in the very nature of uncertainty itself. The schizophrenic behavior of volatility is a deep warning sign for policy makers that something is not right. Implied Volatility-of-the VIX (“CBOE VVIX”) reached the highest levels in history on August 24th, 2015. The volatility-of-VIX rose higher than levels achieved even during the 2008 financial crisis, 2010 Flash Crash, and 2011-debt downgrade crisis.

    Many will point to structural considerations as a driver including the proliferation of VIX exchange traded products and the new spot-VIX calculation methodology. While these are important factors, they are only part of the story.

    To understand why the volatility of volatility reached new highs we have to engage in deep meta-thinking about our reaction to change. Volatility provides exposure to our collective insecurity towards an unknowable future. Likewise, to short volatility is to express personal confidence in the status quo of market affairs despite a broader fear of change. To go long volatility is to express fear that change is coming.

    Volatility-of-volatility is simply the war between these two different modes of perception… shifting perceptions in the nature of uncertainty itself. If uncertainty is rising so should the VIX… but there is a very different type of uncertainty to evaluate … the uncertainty that central banks will intervene.  When global central banks seek to defend the status quo and mean reversion it becomes increasingly difficult to accurately gauge the probability of change in markets.  Volatility markets are now gaming central banks in addition to fundamental economic and technical conditions. If we are unclear from one moment to the next whether radical change or the status quo will prevail than volatility-of-volatility should logically rise. 

    Volatility mean reversion has been an abnormally profitable bet during the regime of pre-emptive strikes on financial risk. Following each tail event in volatility, we are experiencing another tail event in the magnitude of volatility declines. Central banks refuse to let volatility remain elevated and are quick to react to any crisis.

    Between August and September 2015 the VIX collapsed faster than ever before following a spike to 40 (see red line below) due to another massive stimulus response by central banks.  China cuts rates, devalued the Yuan, and purchased an estimated $263bn of equity (9.2% of freely traded shares) to artificially prop-up their stock market before a nationalistic military parade. Following China, the ECB expanded their QE program.  The graph below demonstrates the historic decline in volatility by showing the average, high, and low trajectory paths of the VIX the ensuing fifteen days following every implied volatility spike to 40.

    Likewise, the area chart below graphs the forward probability distribution of S&P 100 implied volatility (VXO) following a breach of the 35 barrier in spot-vol.

    As expected, implied volatility exhibits an exceptionally positively skewed distribution following a ‘risk-off’ event, but notice how the current trajectory of VXO lies on the far left of the distribution. Central banks refuse to let volatility remain elevated but this is creating a new set of shadow risks…Global central banking has artificially incentivized bets on mean reversion.

  • Fastenal CEO: "The Industrial Environment Is In A Recession – I Don’t Care What Anybody Says!"

    You know things might not be going particularly well when you’ve had three CEOs in the space of nine months, and that’s exactly what’s happened at nuts and bolts maker Fastenal which named current CFO Daniel Florness to the top spot on Tuesday.

    The move came after the company reported meager top and bottom line results for Q3 this week. 

    It’s not very difficult to understand why the company’s business has come under pressure. The slump in crude prices has put an enormous strain on its energy-related operations. Here’s some color from Credit Suisse who notes that in September, Fastenal saw its first Y/Y sales decline since 2009:

    Not surprising, FAST indicated the industrial outlook has deteriorated in particular during the month of September. In fact, September, was the first month since 2009 in which FAST experienced y/y declines. Along with the stronger dollar, FAST noted continued oil and gas headwinds, and heavy manufacturing. By geography, Texas took a step down and FAST noted slowing growth in Canada. Of FAST’s top 100 customers, 44 saw top line declines. Of the 44, 32 were negative by more than 10% and 17 were negative by more than 25%. FAST does not expect to see any improvement for the next several quarters and believes the industrial environment is in a recession.

    Now hilariously, Credit Suisse somehow managed to take that strikingly bad assessment and turn it into this title: “SteadFAST In the Face of Adversity.” But hey, it’s the sellside so it’s not like they were going to tell you to sell it. 

    Anyway, what struck us was the rhetoric on the call, especially the retort from new CEO Daniel Florness when William Blair analyst Ryan Merkel (no relation to any “pure hearted” German “lion mothers”) made the mistake of calling the current environment “non-recessionary”:

    Merkel: Then just lastly, Fastenal growing zero percent here in September and in a non-recessionary environment, it’s pretty surprising, I think, for a lot of us. But if we just step back and we think about quantifying some of the headwinds, and I don’t want to put words in your mouth but it seems to me, oil and gas customers are probably down, what, 30% this year. It might be a 3% headwind to sales. And then what about exports? I’ve got to think that’s an even bigger impact, but you tell me – and we’ve also got FX as a one-point headwind.

     

    Florness: Yeah, a couple things. First off, the premise of the question, I would argue that anybody selling into the industrial market is not selling into a non-recessionary environment. We are–

     

    Merkel: I agree. I agree with you there.

     

    Florness: The industrial environment is in a recession – I don’t care what anybody says, because nobody knows that market better than we do. You know, we touch 250,000 active customers a month. 

     

    Right now in the third quarter, 44 of our top 100 customers are negative. We have not lost any business with that group. They are negative in their spend. In some cases, they are negative because their business is very negative and they are somewhat negative with us. 

     

    Of that 44 that were negative, 32 of them were negative more than 10%. Of that 44 that’s negative, 17 of them were negative more than 25%. That’s a sign of a recessionary environment.

    So, two very simple, yet very critical takeaways:

    • the industrial sector is in a recession,
    • whatever you do, do not suggest to Dan Florness that Fastenal’s lackluster performance is related to anything other than the pitiable condition of the US economy

  • Russia Sends Its Only Aircraft Carrier To Syria, Signals It Is Just Getting Started

    As should be abundantly clear by now, The Kremlinis adopting a “slightly” different strategy when it comes to combatting terror in the Mid-East than that adopted by the US and its Western and regional allies. 

    The strategy of the US and its allies seems to go something like this: 1) covertly arm and train groups who you know might ultimately become terrorists because arming and training these groups may be a way to destabilize unfriendly regimes, 2) wait for blowback, 3) launch serious effort to combat terror if unfriendly regime has been “successfully” replaced by puppet government, or launch half-hearted effort to combat terror if situation still fluid and regime still clings to power. 

    Obviously, that strategy is prone to all types of problems, and sensing that the US and its allies might have finally met their foreign policy blunder Waterloo in Syria, Russia decided to call everyone’s bluff by launching a real war on terror. Of course, this war conveniently restores the regime of one of Moscow’s allies, but in the end the result is the same: anyone who is a terrorist and who is also fighting Assad in Syria is in for big trouble because Russia is using this is as an opportunity to reassert itself on the world stage and also to fire up a long-dormant military juggernaut. 

    Now, on the heels of hundreds of airstrikes accompanied by dramatic video footage as well as cruise missile attacks launched from Russian warships in the Caspian, The Kremlin is sending its lone heavy aircraft carrier into the fight. This is only the ship’s sixth deployment in history. 

     Here’s more from Flashnord (Google translated):

    Heavy aircraft carrier (heavy aircraft), “Admiral Kuznetsov” is Russia’s only aircraft carrier, the weekend will go from Murmansk to the shores of Syria, said FlashNord source in the Northern Fleet command.

     

    “The cruiser dock repair completed until the end of the week go to the coast of Syria, where he joined the operation to destroy the group” Islamic State “,” – a spokesman said.

     

    According to him, from May to August this year was held aircraft carrier dock repair 82 Shipyard in Roslyakovo (Murmansk region). Then, on a regular docked in Murmansk, he walked up to the restoration of full combat readiness.

     

    Since September 30, Russia carries out air operations in Syria with the aim of destroying the objects of the “Islamic state.”

    Here are some images:

    Here’s a bit of color via Reuters from earlier this year. Notably, the Kuznetsov isn’t known for being in particularly great working order which probably makes the chances of some kind of accident that much greater:

    When the Soviet Union launched Kuznetsov in 1985, it was a major technical accomplishment for the then-superpower. Moscow began assembling Varyag, a sister ship of Kuznetsov, around the same time. It also started work on a true full-size carrier, as big as anything the United States builds.

     

    But the Soviet Union’s collapse in 1991 abruptly halted the carrier program.

     

    Russia was left with Kuznetsov as its sole flattop and, deprived of funds and Ukraine’s assistance, has struggled to keep the vessel in working condition. Since the ship was commissioned into frontline service in the early 1990s, Kuznetsov has deployed just five times. Each deployment, lasting between three and six months, saw the flattop sail from its home port in northern Russia around Europe and into the Mediterranean as a show of force and to demonstrate support for Russia’s allies in the region, including Syria.

  • "A Generation In Crisis" – The World Needs 5 Million Jobs/Month To Stymie Youth Extremism

    For over 3 years we have pointed out that the surging youth unemployment was Europe's (if not the world's) scariest chart, because the last thing Europe needs is a discontented, disenfranchised, and devoid of hope youth roving the streets with nothing to do, easily susceptible to extremist and xenophobic tendencies: after all, it must be "someone's" fault that there are no job opportunities for anyone. Well, as Bloomberg reports, The World Bank has an unsettling message for young people around the globe: unless we create 5 million jobs a month, the situation is going to get worse.

    As The World Bank notes, Unemployment in any form is a drag on an economy and society.

    It undercuts productivity, spending, and investment, stunting national growth. It contributes to inequality and spurs social tension. Joblessness and inactivity and the failure to tap into the economic aspirations and resources of young people carry an even higher price.

     

    As prospects dwindle, many face social exclusion, or see their emotional, mental, or physical health deteriorate.

     

     

    Young people account for roughly 40 percent of the world’s unemployed and are up to four times more likely to be unemployed than adults.

     

     

    When young people are not fully participating in the labor force or are NEETs, governments forgo tax revenue and incur the cost of social safety nets, unemployment benefits and insurances, and lost  roductivity. Businesses risk losing a generation of consumers. Social costs are ever mounting as well. The Arab Spring and subsequent youth-led uprisings in many countries, along with the rise of economic insurgency and youth extremism, demand that we explore the links between economic participation, inequality, and community security, crime, and national fragility through a lens focused on youth. What we see is a generation in economic crisis.

     

    Over the next decade, a billion more young people will enter the job market—and only 40 percent are expected to be able to enter jobs that currently exist. The global economy will need to create 600 million jobs over the next 10 years: that’s 5 million jobs each month simply to keep employment rates constant.

    In other words, even with that 'growth' we are going nowhere!!

     

    As Bloomberg reports,

    The youngest workers have been hit hardest by the financial crisis and the global recession of the last decade because they often held the temporary jobs, which offer less protection. The youth unemployment rate is projected to be 13.1 percent in 2015, compared with 4.5 percent for adults, according to the ILO.

     

    Global employers are looking not only for technical and academic skills, but also such qualities as being open, responsible or organized, …Young workers are often either overqualified or underqualified for their jobs, it said.

     

    "In emerging economies that are progressively more service-based, employers find a workforce population that lacks necessary skills," the report said. "Elsewhere, the problem is that many of the unemployed are highly educated but the market demands different competencies or more technical or vocational skills."

     

    At stake is the well-being of the entire global economy. Without an income, millions of young people slump into poverty. By delaying their entry into the workforce or accepting low-paying jobs, many limit their lifetime earning potential. When young people don't work, governments don't get the tax revenue and businesses fail to gain customers.

     

    "Social costs are ever mounting as well," the report said, citing youth-led uprisings in many Arab countries and the rise of economic insurgency and youth extremism. "What we see is a generation in economic crisis."

    *  *  *

    Full World Bank Report below…

    Toward Solutions for Youth Employment Full

  • A Third Of All Containers Shipped From Long Beach Port Are Empty

    In the past several months, it has been virtually impossible to make any sense of the conflicting trends involving US and global trade. On one hand, there is global trade, which as we have covered since the spring, has been in a state of consistent decline. Some example of this:

    And of course China’s terrible trade data for the past 5 months, which has seen the longest stretch of import declines since the financial crisis.

    In short: only an economist, either a tenured one or one employed by CNBC, is unable to see that the world is sinking into a global trade recession, with a economic one soon to follow.

    Where things get more complicated, however, is when looking at the US. Here, macro data throughout the summer had suggested more or less smooth sailing in the trade space, and it was only a week ago that the facade started to crack, following the ugly advance trade report, when as we reported there was a “16% Surge In August Trade Deficit; Imports Jump As Exports Drop.”

    But what really confused us, and others, was the “micro” reports from the ground. Take the following article from Bloomberg in September, in which we read that “Record Long Beach Port Traffic Shows Strength in U.S. Demand.” Some more details:

    The Port of Long Beach — which is poised to overtake neighboring Los Angeles next year to become the No. 1 shipping gateway in the country — had a record month in July, with cargo volume up 18 percent from July 2014. Figures being released later this month will show unprecedented traffic again in August, and early signs in September are “very very encouraging,” Jon Slangerup, the Long Beach port’s chief executive officer, said in an interview at Bloomberg’s offices in New York last week.

     

    Overall, the two ports are handling 4 percent more cargo this year than last, Slangerup said. With consumers showing no letup, he predicted a record year for Long Beach in 2015, taking out pre-recession highs set in 2007. West Coast ports are poised to regain share lost earlier in the year, when backlogs led clients to divert cargo to East Coast destinations like Savannah, Georgia, he said.

    The article’s punchline:

    When you look at the macros, you look at unemployment, consumer confidence, savings, available discretionary spending, all of those numbers suggest that we have more to spend,” Slangerup said. “The economy here is super strong relative to the rest of the world, and the strongest I’ve seen it in a very long time.”

    As it turns out, the economy was neither “super strong”, nor was “unemployment, consumer confidence, savings, or available discretionary spending” suggesting that we have more to spend. In fact just the opposite, because thanks to the WSJ we can now reconcile the seeming discrepancy between slowing macro and booming micro, at least as manifested by “record” west coast port traffic.

    According to the WSJ, “shipments of empty containers out of the U.S. are surging this year, highlighting the impact the economic slowdown in China is having on U.S. exporters. The U.S. imports more from China than it sends back, but certain American industries—including those that supply scrap metal and wastepaper—feed China’s industrial production.”

    The magnitude of the shipping container “contagion” is stunning: in September, the Port of Long Beach handled a near record 197,076 outbound empty boxes. “They accounted for nearly a third of all containers that moved through the port last month. September was the eighth straight month in which empty containers leaving Long Beach outnumbered those loaded with exports.

    As the chart below shows, the situation at LA and Long Beach is so dire, the amount of empty container has surpassed the 2008 crisis period, and is about to take out the all time highs from the peak of the 2006 credit bubble:

     

    And here is the “record” West Coast port traffic in all its unglory: as noted above, empty containers now amount to a third of all West Coast port traffic in the US.

     

    What is an empty container? The WSJ explains that after under normal conditions, containers filled with consumer goods are delivered to the U.S. and unloaded, they return to export hubs. There, they typically are stuffed with American agricultural products, certain high-end consumer goods and large volumes of the heavy, bulk refuse that is recycled through China’s factories into products or packaging.

    Not any more:

    Last month, however, Long Beach and the Port of Oakland both reported double-digit gains in exports of empty containers. So far this year, empties at the two ports are up more than 20% from a year earlier.

    A big reason for the collapse in trade is the strong dollar: the empties are shipping out at a faster rate at many U.S. ports, particularly those closely tied to trade with China, while shipments of containers loaded with goods are declining as exporters find it tougher to make foreign sales. That’s at least partly because the strong dollar makes American goods more expensive.

    The problem is spreading:

    Outbound empties have mounted this year at other big gateways, too. In August, the Port of Los Angeles, the country’s largest single container port, handled more than 225,000 empty outbound containers, counted in twenty-foot equivalent units, a standard maritime industry measure. That was 21% more than a year earlier. The Port Authority of New York and New Jersey expanded its empty-container exports nearly 31.5% in the first eight months of this year, and empties outnumbered loaded container exports over that time.

    Suddenly the discrepancy between the ugly macro data and the

    Dollar-based or not, the end result is the same – global trade channels are rapidly slowing down.

    And it is not just empty containers that are being shipped out: overall containerized exports are also tumbling: “Long Beach’s containerized exports were down 8.2% this year through September, while Oakland’s volume of outbound loaded containers fell 12.7% from a year earlier in the January-September period.”

    This data certainly puts that “record” Long Beach port traffic in a different perspective. Others admit the same:

    “This is a thermometer,” said Jock O’Connell, an international-trade economist at Beacon Economics. “The thing to worry about is if the trade imbalance starts to widen.”

    It is starting to widen: the U.S. trade gap has expanded sharply in recent months as exports have slipped, growing 15.6% in August to a seasonally adjusted $48.3 billion, according to the Commerce Department. U.S. exports fell 2% in the month to their lowest level since October 2012.

    And as a reminder, net trade feeds directly into GDP, so the next time an idiot tells you that there are no direct linkages or contagion choke points between China and the US, feel free to take them to the Long Beach and show them the thousands of empty boxes whose contents one can label  simply as “recession”.

    There is, however, a silver lining: if the containers remain empty, and once the US slides back into depression, they can always be used for housing, just like now in San Francisco’s unicorn bubble mania.

  • "China Has No Reason To Rush To The Frontlines": Beijing Denies Syria "Rumors"

    In the weeks since Moscow joined the fight in Syria, in the process lending Iran’s ground troops a rather powerful hand in the form of airstrikes by the Russian air force juggernaut, there have been two questions on everyone’s mind, i) how would Washington respond?, and ii) will China get involved? 

    As for the first question, the US has responded in the only way they could given the situation the West and its allies got themselves into: with a confused message about how the US can’t accept Russia’s invite to coordinate efforts because somehow Moscow’s involvement is going to create more terrorism. 

    With regard to the China, early reports indicated that Beijing was indeed considering some manner of military “support.” For instance, late last month the pro-Assad Al-Masdar news said the following:

    On Tuesday morning, a Chinese naval vessel reportedly traveled through Egypt’s Suez Canal to enter the Mediterranean Sea; its destination was not confirmed.

     

    However, according to a senior officer in the Syrian Arab Army (SAA) that is stationed inside the Syrian coastal city of Latakia, Chinese military personnel and aerial assets are scheduled to arrive in the coming weeks (6 weeks) to the port-city of Tartous – he could not provide any more detail.

    Three days later, Pravda reported that “according to Russian Senator Igor Morozov, Beijing has taken decision to take part in combating IS and sent its vessels to the Syrian coast.”

    “It is known, that China has joined our military operation in Syria, the Chinese cruiser has already entered the Mediterranean, aircraft carrier follows it,” Morozov allegedly said.

    Needless to say, if China were to join Russia and Iran in support of Assad in military operations against anti-regime elements, it would be a further embarrassment for Washington which is keen to pretend that it can counter what’s been pitched as military aggression on Beijing’s part in the South China. That is, were China to go into Syria while the US stood by and watched, it would send a message to Washington’s regional allies in the South Pacific that other than promising to send some ships to sail around the Spratlys, there’s really not much the Pentagon can or at least is willing, to do.

    But China is well aware that a dying hegemon is still a hegemon and while Beijing has made great strides over the past several years in terms of raising its presence on the world stage, simply invading Syria at the drop of a hat is a move that seems a bit too crass for Xi Jinping given his recent trip to the US and desire to promote social stability at home.

    Predictably, the Chinese are now out denying the Syria “rumors”. Here’s Reuters:

    China said on Wednesday it had no plans to send military ships to Syria to fight with Russian forces after reports in overseas media that it was planning to do so.

     

    Chinese media has picked up Russian and Middle Eastern news reports that China would fight alongside Russia in

     

    Syria, and that China’s sole aircraft carrier, the Liaoning, could participate too.

     

    Chinese media has also described these reports as speculative nonsense.

     

    Foreign Ministry spokeswoman Hua Chunying, when asked if China had or would send forces to Syria, told a daily news briefing that she had also noticed the reports.

     

    “I can tell you that as for China’s warships, for example the Liaoning, whether it has gone to join, for this issue, as far as I know, there is no such plan. At this time the Liaoning is in a phase of carrying out technical training and military exercises.”

     

    The Global Times, an influential tabloid run by the ruling Communist Party’s official People’s Daily, said in an editorial on Wednesday it was “unfounded rumour” that China would interfere militarily in Syria.

     

    “It’s not China that brought chaos to Syria, and China has no reason to rush to the frontlines and play a confrontational role,” it said.

    Remember, China has voted with Russia on the Security Council when it comes to Syria and there is no question which side Beijing supports. 

    Also, note that while the Politburo’s mouthpiece may have dismissed the reports as “speculative nonsense”, the other language there isn’t quite as committal and as we saw in Yemen, the PLA occasionally shows up out of the blue in surprising places. Besides Yemen, we’ve seen a plethora of examples this year of the PLA navy actively seeking to showcase China’s maritime prowess including a pass by the Alaska coast, the planned deployment of a nuclear sub, and of course the creation of 3,000 acres of new sovereign territory in the Spratlys. As brazen as it most certainly would be, another great way to make a splash (no pun intended), would be to send an aircraft carrier to Syria. 

    We’ll leave you with the following headline from Interfax:

    • CSTO, Iran, China agree on joint counteraction to ISIL

    *  *  *

    Maybe they’ll just send the girls from Fiery Cross

  • Oct 15 – US 10-year yields fall below 2% amid weak economic data

    EMOTION MOVING MARKETS NOW: 35/100 FEAR

    PREVIOUS CLOSE: 38/100 FEAR

    ONE WEEK AGO: 37/100 FEAR 
    ONE MONTH AGO: 13/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE YEAR AGO: 2/100 EXTREME FEAR

    Put and Call Options: FEAR During the last five trading days, volume in put options has lagged volume in call options by 27.55% as investors make bullish bets in their portfolios. However, this is still among the highest levels of put buying seen during the last two years, indicating fear on the part of investors.

    Market Volatility:  NEUTRAL The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 18.03. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

    Stock Price Strength: FEAR The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 18.03. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

     

    PIVOT POINTS

    EURUSD | GBPUSD | USDJPY | USDCAD | AUDUSD | EURJPY | EURCHF | EURGBPGBPJPY | NZDUSD | USDCHF | EURAUD | AUDJPY 

    S&P 500 (ES) | NASDAQ 100 (NQ) | DOW 30 (YM) | RUSSELL 2000 (TF) Euro (6E) |Pound (6B)

    EUROSTOXX 50 (FESX) | DAX 30 (FDAX) | BOBL (FGBM) | SCHATZ (FGBS) | BUND (FGBL)

    CRUDE OIL (CL) | GOLD (GC) | 10 YR T NOTE | 2 YR T  NOTE | 5 YR T NOTE | 30 YR TREASURY BONDSOYBEANS | CORN

     

    MEME OF THE DAY – WHEN DR. T SPEAKS…

     

    UNUSUAL ACTIVITY

    VXX OCT WEEKLY4 21.5 CALLS7K+ @$.58

    LOCK NOV 8 PUT Activity on the BID side

    LULU NOV 55 CALL Activity 2500 block @$1.20 on offer

    EDGE SC 13D Filed by NEW LEAF Ventures .. 8.2%

    TROX .. SC 13G Filed by Putnam Investments .. 13.2%

    More Unusual Activity…

    HEADLINES

     

    PBOC dismisses talk its engaging in QE –Sec Journal

    Fed’s Beige Book: Economic activity continued to expand modestly

    Atlanta Fed GDPNow Tracker: 0.9% (prev. 1.0%)

    US CBO: Extraordinary measures seen lasting until H1 of Nov

    US House Bill raising debt ceiling possible before Boehner retirement –Rtrs

    US 10-year yields fall below 2% amid weak economic data

    Walmart: Our profits are going to fall next year

    Bank of America Swings to 3rd-Quarter Profit

    Wells Fargo Profit Edges Up for Quarter

     

    GOVERNMENTS/CENTRAL BANKS

    Fed’s Beige Book: Economic activity continued to expand modestly

    Atlanta Fed GDPNow Tracker: 0.9% (prev. 1.0%)

    Fed rake hike bets disappear further into 2016 –FT

    US House Bill raising debt ceiling possible before Boehner retirement –aide cited by Rtrs

    US CBO: Extraordinary measures seen lasting until H1 of Nov, debt limit may need to be increased earlier or later –BBG

    COMMENT: What a vanishing Fed hike means for the ECB, BoJ –FT

    PBOC dismisses talk its engaging in QE

    Germany cuts 2015 GDP forecast to 1.7% vs 1.8% prev –ForexLive

    UK FCA issues warning against unauthorized FX firm SMP Forex –ForexLive

    Japan’s Amari says it’s too soon to be speaking about new stimulus –ForexLive

    FIXED INCOME

    US 10-year yields fall below 2% amid weak economic data –CNBC

    Bonds rally as US consumers have sluggish September –FT

    UBS Sees Sovereign Assets Shrinking by $1.2 Trillion –BBG

    NY Fed Blog: Dealers play important role in the intertemporal intermediation of Treasury supply

    FX

    USD: Pain for dollar bulls as US retail sales underwhelm –FT

    EUR, JPY: EUR, JPY strengthen vs USD after Fed’s beige book –ForexLive

    GBP: Pound boosted by strong jobs data –BBC

    SGD: Singapore Central Bank Eases Policy by Adjusting Currency Band –BBG

    ENERGY/COMMODITIES

    CRUDE: Oil down again; global glut worry offsets US output drop –Rtrs

    METALS: Gold rises to 3 month high –cnbc

    EQUITIES

    EARNINGS: Walmart: Our profits are going to fall next year –BI

    EARNINGS: Bank of America Swings to 3rd-Quarter Profit –NYT

    EARNINGS: Wells Fargo Profit Edges Up for Quarter –NYT

    EARNINGS: BlackRock Reports Lower Profit as Assets, Fees Drop –WSJ

    EARNINGS: Delta Beats Profit Estimates With Boost From Falling Fuel –BBG

    BANKS: US authorities examine Goldman Sachs role in 1MDB transactions –WSJ

    BANKS: Moody’s: 5 US regional banks’ credit pressured by low oil and gas prices; outlook negative

    BANKS: M&A boom still a bright spot for US banks –FT

    BANKS: UK banks may need billions of pounds in added capital –Sky

    TECH: Twitter names ex-Google executive Kordestani chairman –Rtrs

    Acquisitions bring Canon’s 5 trln-yen sales target back into view –Rtrs

    CONS DISC: PriceLine agrees to room-booking deal with TripAdvisor –Rtrs

    M&A: US yearbook maker Jostens sold for $1.5bn –FT

     

    JOBS: France asks Air France to drop job cut plans –BBG

  • The "Other" Shoe About To Drop

    A long way down…

     

     

    Source: Investors.com

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 14, 2015

  • Democratic Debate Post Mortem (In 1 Poignant Image)

    Sanders by a landslide…

    In the Polls..

    Drudge…

    CNN…

     

    In Searches…

     

    And On Twitter…

     

    *  *  *

    So to sum up…It's lonely sometimes…

     

     

    *  *  *

    Some key excerpts…

    Jane Wells summed up one exchange perfectly as Hillary's alleged law-breaking was conveniently swept under the carpet…

    And Benghazi won the early rounds…

    But Wall Street "won" overall…

    Hillary and her average-American-ness…

    On College education affordability (and pretty much everything else)…

  • Gold Jumps As China Devalues Yuan By Most In 2 Months, "Boosts Reforms" Of Corporate Bond Bubble

    AsiaPac stocks are extending losses in early trading asit appears our fears about the Chinese coporate bond market bubble are also on the minds of Chinese regulators as they look to "boost reforms." After the PBOC has fixed the Yuan stronger for 8 straight days, the onshore and offshore Yuan has weakened appreciably in the last 24 hours and PBOC has devalued Yuan by 177pips  – the biggest in 2 months (as PBOC researchers push to "speed up Yuan internationalization" and implicitly inclusion in the SDR basket).

     

    Gold jumped on the Yuan devaluation…

     

    AsiaPac stocks are lower again…

    • *CHINA'S CSI 300 STOCK-INDEX FUTURES FALL 0.5% TO 3,400
    • *MSCI ASIA PACIFIC INDEX DROPS 1.4%, EXTENDING DECLINE

    As fears rise of a bubble in Chinese corporate bonds…

    Reform it!

    • *CHINA TO BOOST CORPORATE BOND MARKET REFORM: 21ST HERALD

    Good luck, as Commerzbank's Zhou concludes…

    "Global investors are looking for signs of a collapse in China, which itself could increase the chances of a crash… This game can’t go on forever."

    *  *  *

    The Yuan has been 'fixed' stronger for 8 straight days… but tonight PBOC devalues Yuan by 177pips – the most in 2 months

    • *CHINA SETS YUAN REFERENCE RATE AT 6.3408 AGAINST U.S. DOLLAR
    • *CHINA WEAKENS YUAN FIXING MOST SINCE AUG. 13

    And PBOC reseeacrhers are pushing for rapid internationalization of Yuan (and inclusion in the SDR basket)… beginning their paper with the rather USD reserve Currency Status challenging statement:

    World History tells us that economic power is necessarily financial power, only to become the financial powerhouse before it can become an economic power.

    China must speed up yuan internationalization to develop the finance industry, PBOC research bureau head Lu Lei writes in People’s Daily.

    • The yuan needs to be included in the SDR basket, Lu writes
    • China’s current financial structure is dominated by indirect financing and doesn’t make enough sense, Lu writes
    • China should further improve stock market and increase the proportion of equity financing, Lu writes

    Financial power is the inevitable direction of sustainable development of economic power

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • What You're Supposed To Think Vs What You Think

    Authored by Jon Rappoport,

    I could trace my 30 years of investigative reporting as one long project emanating from what people are supposed to think.

    What they’re supposed to think about nuclear weapons, pesticides, medical drugs, vaccines, presidential elections, major media, the CIA, US foreign policy, mega-corporations, brain research, collectivism, surveillance, psychiatry, immigration…

    In each case, there are a set of messages broadcast to the population. These messages are projected to replace what people would think on their own, if left to their own devices.

    And in many cases, these messages have the same underlying theme: feel unlimited sympathy.

    Feel unlimited sympathy or else.

    In the area of immigration, for example, people are supposed to welcome endless numbers of refugees to their shores and cities and towns.

    If they don’t put out the welcome sign, they’re evil, they’re cold, they’re “capitalists,” they’re unloving, they’re cruel, inhumane.

    They’re immune to proper feelings of guilt and shame.

    There is also an interesting guilty “we” attached to the issue. “We” invaded other countries, “we” bombed populations, imposed devastating economic sanctions, launched corporate takeovers—and therefore “we” should now open our doors to these refugees.

    The government didn’t do these things. The State didn’t do these things. “We” did.

    “We” is a very, very popular collectivist concept. It assigns massive guilt, while somehow exonerating the political leaders of the collective.

    “We” is a great cheese glob that envelops all of us. “We” is a metaphysical construct that replaces “I.” There is no “I.”

    Therefore, what some “deluded individual” might think and decide and determine on his own—which could very well run counter to the “we”—is irrelevant.

    When it’s time to undertake wars on a grand scale, there is a George Bush who announces what the “we” wants. And when it’s time for the guilt and the sympathy and the bleeding heart, there is an Obama who announces what the “we” wants.

    In general, the “we” is there to convince the individual that he is useless and powerless against the advancing cheese glob. He need not bother thinking what he really thinks, because it would make zero difference. Much better to become part of the “huddled mass,” waiting for instructions on how best to serve humanity.

    Logic, rational consideration, the ability to analyze a line of thought and find flaws and gaps and deceptions? An outmoded concept that doesn’t apply to the “we.”

    You see, the “we” is something quite different. It proceeds by a) committed aggression or b) endless sympathy, depending on what is called for by our leaders.

    It moves like inexorable lava slowly leaking away from a volcano. The glob.

    It needs no individual intelligence. Making distinctions is unnecessary.

    And, one thinks, perhaps the solution to this wretched state of affairs is finding a different “we” to belong to. That will solve the whole problem.

    But the underlying solution, as formidable as it may seem, is: dismantle the whole “we.” Expose it for what it is. And reinstate the individual and what he does think, as opposed to what he should think.

    The cheese glob, the lava glob, the advancing fungus is the false construct. It was put there and massaged and stimulated to engage the individual and make him think he was excessively “privileged.” He was an outsider who couldn’t see the need and the joy of “belonging.”

    He was behaving like a criminal, even a terrorist. He was detracting from the power and the warmth and the humanity of the collective hearth.

    What most people take to be Reality is actually invented for the “we.”

    And to take all this a step further, Reality is meant to distract the individual from discovering the depth of his own power, which is to say, creative power.

    Every organized religion, every State, every so-called spiritual system and philosophy is built to derail the individual in this way.

    After all, Reality points to itself. Reality says, “Look at this. Look at me. Understand me. This is what you need to focus on. This is all there is.”

    And so it seems the main attribute of the individual is “perceiving what is.” Perceiving Reality.

    However, detaching one’s self from that prescription reveals another opportunity, vast in its possibilities:

    The ability to analyze the “we” and its many messages and discover what they are and how they are designed—and the capacity to imagine and invent new independent realities without end.

    The scope and range of what the individual can do, in this regard, is limited only by: what he can imagine.

    The psyop of all psyops seeks to bury this fact.

  • "Mommy, Am I Gonna Die?": Cop Aims For Dog, Shoots 4 Year Old, After Injured Mom Calls 911

    To Protect and Serve? When Whitehill resident Andrea accidentally cut her arm on glass, her sister frantically called 911, "I need a paramedic." Columbus Police Officer Jon Thomas responded to the house where he pulled out his gun and shot toward the family's dog (which he claims ran toward him), missed, and hit Andrea's four-year-old daughter Ava in the leg, shattering her bone.

    As The Columbus Dispatch reports, Andrea also revealed that the cop never apologized or asked if Ava was okay and immediately left after shooting her.

    A Columbus police officer accidentally wounded a 4-year-old girl in Whitehall on Friday when he fired at a charging dog, police said.

     

    A neighbor and the girl’s uncle identified her as Ava Ellis, who was taken to Nationwide Children’s Hospital, where police said she was in stable condition.

     

    The officer was at a house in the 4100 block of Chandler Drive investigating a hit-and-run case about 3:10 p.m., Columbus police spokeswoman Denise Alex-Bouzounis said.

     

    As the officer was walking from the home to his patrol car, a woman a few houses away called out to him, saying her sister and the girl’s mother, Andrea Ellis, had cut herself.

     

    The officer was at the doorway when a dog charged at him, Alex-Bouzounis said.

     

    The officer fired once, missing the animal but striking the girl in the right leg. It was unclear whether the girl was hit directly or by a ricochet. The officer has not been identified.

    Neighbors say the officer walked back to his patrol car after the shooting.

    “He seemed a little disoriented, like he was really bothered,” said Norman Jones, who called the police after hearing the shot. Columbus and Whitehall police arrived at the scene shortly afterward.

     

    “Mommy, am I gonna die?” four-year-old Ava Ellis asked her mother.

    The family created a Facebook page for Ava.

     

    As Salon reports, her mother Andrea wrote her account of the incident in a post. She names the police officer who shot her child, Jonathan Thomas, and says that, as soon as he saw the dog, who was eight to 10 feet away from him, he fired — in the direction of her eight-year-old niece and Ava.

    Officer Thomas claimed that the dog charged at him, but Andrea’s sister Brandie denies this, and says the pet was in the house when he shot at it.

     

    Andrea also revealed that the cop never apologized or asked if the four-year-old was okay and immediately left after shooting her. Neighbors have corroborated this account. Ava’s mother wrote:

     

    Officer Thomas then told my sister to stop yelling at him and walked back to his vehicle. Officer Thomas never said sorry, never said it was an accident, never said that he called for help or was going to call for help, never asked if Ava was ok, and never asked if he could check on Ava. Officer Thomas went back to his vehicle and started to pull away. My neighbors have even verified that he started pulling away before any help was there. Officer Thomas shot Ava and left knowing he shot Ava and not knowing the condition she was in.”

    The young girl was taken to a nearby hospital, and is in stable condition. The Inquisitr reported that Ava started school in a wheelchair, and may walk with a limp for the rest of her life… and will likely forever mistrust the police…

     

  • It Begins – Managed High Yield Bond Fund Liquidates After 17 Years

    Since inception in June 1998, UBS' Managed High Yield Plus Fund survived through the dot-com (and Telco) collapse and the post-Lehman credit carnage but, based on the press release today, has been felled by the current credit cycle's crash. After 3 years of trading at an increasingly large discount to NAV, and plunging to its worst levels since the peak of the financial crisis, the board of the Fund has approved a proposal to liquidate the Fund. While timing is unclear, this is the worst case for an increasingly fragile cash bond market as BWICs galore are set to hit with "liquidty thin to zero."

     

    Having survived 17 years…

     

    It's Over… (as The Fund Statement reads):

    Managed High Yield Plus Fund Inc. (the "Fund") (NYSE:HYF) announced today that the Board of Directors (the “Board”) of the Fund has approved a proposal to liquidate the Fund in 2016, subject to shareholder approval.

     

    After careful deliberation and a thorough review of the available alternatives, and based upon the recommendation of UBS Global Asset Management (Americas) Inc. (“UBS AM”), the Fund’s manager, the Board has determined that liquidation and dissolution of the Fund is in the best interests of the Fund. A proposed plan of liquidation will be submitted for the approval of the Fund’s shareholders at a special shareholders meeting of the Fund, which will be scheduled to be held in April 2016. If the shareholders approve the proposed plan, the liquidation and dissolution of the Fund will take place as soon as reasonably practicable, but in no event later than December 31, 2016 (absent unforeseen circumstances).

     

    Further information regarding the liquidation proposal, including the plan of liquidation, will be included in the proxy materials that will be mailed to the Fund’s shareholders in advance of the shareholders meeting.

    *  *  *

    This is a nightmare for the corporate credit market, where, as we noted previously "liquidity is thin to zero."…

    …discussing illiquid corporate credit markets is easier if you find yourself among polite company. You see, the lack of liquidity in the secondary market for corporate bonds is a somewhat benign discussion because although it unquestionably stems from a noxious combination of regulatory incompetence and irresponsible monetary policy, myopic corporate management teams and the BTFD crowd, not to mention ETF issuers, have also played an outsized role, so there’s no need to lay the blame entirely on the masters of the universe who occupy the Eccles Building and on the "liquidity providing" HFT crowd that’s found regulatory capture to be just as easy as frontrunning.

     

    But while explanations for the absence of liquidity vary from market to market, the response is becoming increasingly homogenous. Put simply: market participants are simply moving away from cash markets and into derivatives. Where market depth has disappeared, it’s become increasingly difficult to transact in size without having an outsized effect on prices. This means that for big players – fund managers, for instance – selling into ever thinner secondary markets is a dangerous proposition. And not just for the manager, but for market prices in general.

    In Treasury markets, traders have turned to futures to mitigate illiquidty… 

    while corporate bond fund managers utilize ETFs and other portfolio products to avoid trading the underlying assets…

    With the stage thus set, Bloomberg has more on the move to smaller trades and cash market substitutes:

    Sometimes less is more. At least according to investment managers trying to navigate Europe’s credit markets.

     

    TwentyFour Asset Management capped a bond fund to new investors at 750 million pounds ($1.2 billion) and JPMorgan Asset Management, which is marketing a 128 million-pound fund, said smaller investments are more flexible in a sell-off. Other managers are also limiting the size of their trades and using derivatives to avoid getting trapped in positions.

     

    It’s become more difficult to buy and sell securities as Greece’s financial crisis curbs risk taking and dealers scale back trading activity to meet regulations introduced since the financial crisis. The Bank for International Settlements warned of a "liquidity illusion" in June because bond holdings are becoming concentrated in the hands of fund managers as banks pull back.

     

    "Liquidity is generally poor in corporate bond markets and in the U.K. market it’s thin to zero," said Mike Parsons, head of U.K. fund sales at JPMorgan Asset Management in London. "You don’t want to be in a gigantic fund where there’s potential for a lot of investors rushing for the exit at the same time. Smaller funds are more nimble."

     

    "Without enough strong liquidity, it’s hard to execute bond trades in sufficient size or price to move portfolio risk around quickly or cheaply," he said. "The bigger the position, the harder it is to find enough liquidity to sell it or buy it."

     

    Liquidity in credit markets has dropped about 90 percent since 2006, according to Royal Bank of Scotland Group Plc. That’s because dealers are using less of their own money to trade as new regulation makes it less profitable.

     

    Euro-denominated corporate bonds got an average of 5.3 dealer quotes per trade last week, up from 4.5 recorded in January and compared with a peak of 8.8 in 2009, according to Morgan Stanley data. That’s based on dealer prices compiled by Markit Group Ltd. for bonds in its iBoxx indexes.

     

    Liquidity is especially bad in the U.K. corporate bond market, which is being abandoned by companies looking to take advantage of lower borrowing costs in euros and investors seeking securities that are easier to buy and sell.

     

    NN Investment Partners said it seeks to manage difficult trading conditions by diversifying positions and capping trade size. The Netherlands-based asset manager avoids owning large concentrations of a single bond and uses derivatives such as credit-default swaps or futures that are easier to buy and sell, said Hans van Zwol, a portfolio manager.

     

    "We really want to stay away from positions we can’t get out of," he said.

    The conundrum here is that the more reluctant market participants are to venture into increasingly illiquid cash markets, the more illiquid those markets become.

    And here are the fund's largest holdings…

     

    *  *  *

    Of course, this should not be a total surprise, in light of the near-record up/downgrade ratio…

    Credit-rating firms are downgrading more U.S. companies than at any other time since the financial crisis, and measures of debt relative to cash flow are rising.

     

     

    Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services downgraded U.S. companies 297 times in the first nine months of the year, the most downgrades since 2009, compared with just 172 upgrades.

    Deteriorating fundamentals…

    U.S. companies have increased borrowing to levels exceeding those just before the financial crisis, as firms pursue big acquisitions and seek to boost stock prices by buying back shares. According to one metric, the ratio of debt to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization for companies that carry investment-grade ratings, meaning triple-B-minus or above, was 2.29 times in the second quarter. That’s higher than the 1.91 times in June 2007, just before the crisis, according to figures from Morgan Stanley.

    “We’re seeing more widespread weakness across more industry sectors in the U.S.,” Ms. Vazza said. “It’s become broader than just the commodity story.”

     

    “The metrics that you measure health and credit by have peaked a while ago,” said Sivan Mahadevan, head of credit strategy at Morgan Stanley. “They are beginning to deteriorate.”

    *  *  *

    And as we noted earlier, the credit cycle has well and truly rolled over…

     

    And no lesser market veteran than Art Cashin is concerned, What are the signals you are looking for to stay on top in such a market?

     I continue to monitor the high yield market and see where that goes. The high yield market has been of some concern of the last several weeks. If that begins to show appreciable weakness than I would think the caution flags stay up.

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • 'Socialist' Sanders Vs 'Crony' Clinton: First Democratic Debate Begins – Live Feed

    Admittedly it's not Mayweather-Pacquiao, but Las Vegas is buzzing ahead of tonight's rumble-in-the-jungle between Bernie and The Battle-axe. While Joe Biden remains the most notable absentee (or will he?) there are three other 'debaters' to carry water and towels for Hillary and Bernie as they drag one another left-er and left-er and more populist-er. In the pre-fight Sanders has lobbed some awkward Iraq War questions at 'hawkish' Hillary but as Clinton's 2008 campaign manager notes, "she's rolled out Latinos for Hillary, Women for Hillary, and met the leadership of Black Lives Matter; she has checked a lot of boxes walking into this debate."

    It's not different this time..

    And it's getting worse…

     

    Search interest shows them neck and neck…

    *  *  *

    This seemed to sum up the pre-show rather well…

    *  *  *

     

    Live Feed (via CNN)… (click image below for link – if embed unavailable)

     

    USA Today offers six things to watch for during the debate…

    Hillary Clinton speaks in Council Bluffs, Iowa, on Oct. 7, 2015. (Nati Harnik, AP)

    Hillary Clinton speaks in Council Bluffs, Iowa, on Oct. 7, 2015. (Nati Harnik, AP)

    1. Steam from the Hillary grilling

    If the CNN debate moderators treat this as their chance to grill Clinton on live TV instead of carrying out an actual debate where other candidates are allotted plenty of time to make their case, “Democrats will likely be frustrated,” said Pat Rynard, a former Democratic campaign staffer from Iowa.

    Vice President Biden in the Oval Office on Oct. 7, 2015. (Mark Wilson, Getty Images)

    Vice President Biden in the Oval Office on Oct. 7, 2015. (Mark Wilson, Getty Images)

    2. The Biden shadow

    Even if he’s not on the stage, “Joe is a real part of the debate,” said Democrat Patty Judge, a former Iowa lieutenant governor.

    “Sadly,” added Rynard, “in terms of the media narrative, nothing in the debate may matter if Biden announces his intentions the next day and wipes out all the coverage. Hopefully that doesn’t happen, but it’s near when Biden has to make a decision for ballot purposes.”

    Sen. Bernie Sanders speaks during a campaign event on Oct. 9, 2015, in Tucson, Ariz. (Rick Scuteri, AP)

    Sen. Bernie Sanders speaks during a campaign event on Oct. 9, 2015, in Tucson, Ariz.
    (Rick Scuteri, AP)

    3. Sanders’ fidelity to fixed talking points

    The liberal messenger could miss an opportunity if he expounds only a dry, policy-heavy message, Democrats said.

    “He really refuses to deviate much from his economic inequality shtick on the campaign trail — which, to be fair, is a very powerful message that has gotten him far,” said Rynard, who writes about presidential politics on the website Iowa Starting Line. “(But) debates tend to favor interaction and candidates quick on their toes who can give punchy responses.”

    Hillary Clinton and Bernie Sanders. (AP)

    Hillary Clinton and Bernie Sanders. (AP)

    4. Two debates in one

    One debate will likely be a policy contest between Clinton and Sanders, both of whom have declined to stray into personal attacks, observers said.

    “She will continue to move herself to the left in order to appeal to undecideds and to those who are leaning to Sanders but not firmly in his camp,” Judge said of Clinton. “She will also try to continue to distance herself from the Obama administration to give herself room to take on Biden if he gets into the race.”

    The second debate could feature hard swings from the low-polling contenders, especially O’Malley, who has gotten increasingly personal in drawing contrasts with Clinton.

    Watch for gun control, trade, banks and foreign policy to take center stage, said Michael Cheney, a professor of communication and economics at the University of Illinois at Springfield.

    Martin O'Malley talks on stage during the New Hampshire Democratic Party State Convention on Sept. 19, 2015 in Manchester. (Scott Eisen, Getty Images)

    Martin O’Malley talks on stage during the New Hampshire Democratic Party State Convention on Sept. 19, 2015 in Manchester. (Scott Eisen, Getty Images)

    5. O’Malley’s moment?

    Many Democrats worry that Sanders’ “socialist” label and Clinton’s struggles with her email controversy would badly hinder them in the general election, Rynard said.

    O’Malley has run a serious campaign and impressed Democrats who go see him. But he barely attracts national media coverage, and many voters haven’t noticed him yet.

    Cutter said: “This is the last best chance for Martin O’Malley.”

    O’Malley needs to pull votes from Sanders, she said. “If he doesn’t distinguish himself as the person more likely to achieve results for a progressive agenda, rather than just a protest,” Cutter said, “then he’s out.”

    Democratic presidential candidates Jim Webb and Lincoln Chafee. (Getty Images)

    Democratic presidential candidates Jim Webb and Lincoln Chafee. (Getty Images)

    6. The invisible Democrats

    It’s now or never for Webb and Chafee, neither of whom do any real campaigning, Rynard said.

    “At this point, they’re just taking up space,” he said.

    Democrats said they’re hesitant to take either candidate seriously when even low-polling GOP candidates such as Rick Santorum, Bobby Jindal and Lindsey Graham throw energy into reaching out to early state voters.

    But debates are fertile ground for earning a bump in the polls, strategists noted.

    “The best debaters,” Sefl said, “are those who don’t look like they rehearsed their one-liners thousands of times, and who know how to demonstrate command of the issues without being the annoying kid from class who always raised their hand to every question.”

     

    *  *  *

    Spot The Difference…

     

    We suspect this debate will be a little "drier" than The Trump Show, so here is a Drinking Game to make it a little more enjoyable…

     

    And for the kids and non-drinkers…

     

    Of course – as we noted earlier – the biggest 'donkey' in the room is…

  • CLSA Just Stumbled On The Neutron Bomb In China's Banking System

    Two weeks ago, using Macquarie data, we found something disturbing at China’s micro level: not only are a quarter of Chinese firms with debt unable to cover their annual interest expense currently…

     

    …. but when just looking at the commodity sector, roughly half of all companies are in the same dire straits, as a result of the collapse in commodity prices which translates into a drop off in cash flow which makes just the annual all-in cash interest payment impossible .

     

    Over the weekend, Hong-Kong based CLSA decided to take this micro-level data and look at it from the top-down. What it found was stunning.

    According to CLSA estimates, Chinese banks’ bad debts ratio could be as high 8.1% a whopping 6 times higher than the official 1.5% NPL level reported by China’s banking regulator!

    As Reuters reports, the estimate is based on analysis of outstanding debts for more than 2700 A-share companies (ex-financials) and their ability to repay loans. Or in other words, if one backs into the true bad debt, not the number given for window dressing purposes by Chinese “regulators”, based on collapsing cash flows, what one gets is a NPL that is nearly 10% of all outstanding Chinese debt.

    Reuters has some more details on the methodology:

    • Two consecutive years of a co’s interest coverage (EBITDA/interest expense) below 1x or losses for two successive years qualifies for debts to be treated as “bad” in CLSA’s analysis.
    • By these measures, wholesale & retail and manufacturing sectors boast the highest implied NPLs at 21.1% and 15.8% respectively, taking into account total debt
    • While China’s real estate sector has been the most aggressive in adding debt, profitability at developers in tier-1 cities has held up well, muting the overall NPLs for the sector
    • Developers in tier-2 and tier-3 cities, however, show high implied NPLs
    • As bad debts rise, burden falls on PBOC to ensure sufficient liquidity so that Chinese banks can gradually absorb the credit costs, CLSA says.

    Yes, the PBOC’s burden most certainly rises, and what a burden it is: here’s why.

    The chart below shows the history of total Chinese bank assets: as of the latest official data, the number is roughly $30 trillion.

    If one very conservatively assumes that loans are about half of the total asset base (realistically 60-70%), and applies an 8% NPL to this number instead of the official 1.5% NPL estimate, the capital shortfall is a staggering $1 trillion.

    In other words, while China has been injecting incremental liquidity into the system and stubbornly getting no results for it leading experts everywhere to wonder just where all this money is going, the real reason for the lack of a credit impulse is that banks have been quietly soaking up the funds not to lend them out, but to plug a gargantuan, $1 trillion, solvency shortfall which amounts to 10% of China’s GDP!

  • The Fukushima Wasteland: "Terrifying" Drone Footage Of Japan's Abandoned Nuclear Exclusion Zone

    While the world has had decades of opportunities to observe nature slowly reclaiming the consequences of human civilization, particularly at the site of the original nuclear disaster, Chernobyl, there has been far less media coverage for obvious reasons, of that other nuclear disaster, Fukushima, where as we reported last night, one year after giving up on its “ice wall” idea Tepco has renewed the strategy of encasing the radioactive sarcophagus in an ice wall.

    It was not precisely clear why this time the idea is expected to work after it was nixed last summer.

    What is clear is that something has to be done, because as renewed interest in the aftermath of the results of the 2011 disaster once again builds ahead of the 2020 Tokyo Olympics, the public is realizing just how vast the Japanese wasteland truly is.

    And capturing just that, is this eerie drone overflight of the Fukushima graveyard shown in the clip below:

     

    For those curious for more, here, courtesy of photographer Arkadiusz Podniesinski who donned protective gear to visit the “terrifying” – in his words – ghost towns of Futaba, Namie and Tomioka last month, we get an up close an personal photo essay of this generation’s Chernobyl.

    This is what he found: supermarket aisles strewn with packets. A school blackboard covered with notes for an unfinished lesson. Cars tangled with weeds in an unending traffic jam.

    These are eerie pictures from inside the 20km exclusion zone around Fukushima nuclear plant, courtesy of Guardian.

     

    The photographer, Arkadiusz Podniesinski, stands on one of the main streets of Futaba. The writing above him says: “Nuclear energy is the energy of a bright future.”

     

    A street that has been taken over by nature. Four years after the catastrophe – which drove 160,000 people from their homes – much of the region is still too dangerous to enter.

     

    The KFC Colonel and mannequins left standing in a supermarket.  “Here time has stood still, as if the accident happened yesterday,” says Podniesinski of the most-contaminated areas.

     

    An aerial photograph of abandoned vehicles.

     

    An aerial photograph of dump sites, taken by a drone. Contaminated radioactive topsoil from the fields has been bagged for removal and there have been efforts to clean deeper layers. To save space, the soil is stacked in layers.

     

    A restaurant table with crockery left behind by guests. The huge task of decontaminating the area, site of the worst nuclear disaster since Chernobyl in 1986, continues. Thousands of workers move from street to street through villages, spraying and scrubbing the walls and roofs of houses.

     

    Car bumpers overgrown with weeds. Some of the people Podniesinski spoke to doubt the official line that the area will be safe again in 30 years. “They are worried that the radioactive waste will be there for ever,” he says.

     

    A classroom on the first floor in a school. There is still a mark below the blackboard showing the level of the tsunami wave. On the blackboard are words written by former residents, schoolchildren and workers in an attempt to keep up the morale of all of the victims, including “We can do it, Fukushima!”

  • Is Washington Actually Trying To Start World War III?

    Submitted by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    Why has Barack Obama airdropped 50 tons of ammunition into areas that “moderate rebels” in Syria supposedly control?  This is essentially the equivalent of poking the Russians directly in the eyes.  Much of this ammunition will end up in the hands of those that the Russians are attempting to bomb into oblivion, and so to Russia it appears that we are attempting to make their job much harder.  And of course the truth is that there aren’t really any “moderate rebels” in Syria at all.  Nearly all of the groups that are fighting are made up primarily of radical jihadists and/or hired mercenaries. 

    Personally, I don’t see anyone over there that you could call “the good guys”.  At the end of the day, the U.S. supports just about anyone that wants to get rid of the Assad regime, and the Russians are working very hard to keep Assad in power.  Just like the civil war in Ukraine, the conflict in Syria is in great danger of being transformed into a proxy war between the United States and Russia, and many fear that these conflicts could eventually be setting the stage for World War III.

    The ferocity of Russian airstrikes in Syria has surprised observers all over the planet, and over the past couple of days these airstrikes have been extended to include some new areas

    Russian Air Forces have extended the range of their airstrikes on Islamic State positions in Syria to four provinces, focusing primarily on demolishing fortified installations and eliminating supply bases and the terrorists’ infrastructure.

     

    Over the last 24 hours Russian aircraft have attacked terrorist positions in the Hama, Idlib, Latakia and Raqqa provinces of Syria. In total, 64 sorties targeted 63 Islamic State installations, among them 53 fortified zones, 7 arms depots, 4 training camps and a command post.

    When I read reports like this, I am deeply troubled.  The Obama administration claims that it has been bombing ISIS positions in Syria for over a year.  So why in the world do these targets still exist?

    Was the U.S. military incapable of finding these installations?

    That doesn’t seem likely.

    So why weren’t they destroyed long ago?

    Did the Obama administration not want them destroyed for some reason?

    What seems abundantly clear is that the Russians are doing what the Obama administration was either unwilling or unable to do.  There is now mass panic among ISIS fighters, and thousands of them are fleeing the country

    An estimated 3,000 Islamic State fighters as well as militants from other extremist groups have fled Syria for Jordan fearing a renewed offensive by the Syrian army in addition to Russian airstrikes, a military official has told RIA news agency.

     

    “At least 3,000 militants from Islamic State (IS, formerly ISIS/ISIL), al-Nusra and Jaish al-Yarmouk have fled to Jordan. They are afraid of the Syrian army having stepped up activities on all fronts and of Russian airstrikes,” the RIA source said.

    The mainstream media in the United States is not talking much about this, are they?

    But the U.S. media is reporting on this latest airdrop of ammunition to rebel groups in Syria.  For example, the following comes from CNN

    U.S. military cargo planes gave 50 tons of ammunition to rebel groups overnight in northern Syria, using an air drop of 112 pallets as the first step in the Obama Administration’s urgent effort to find new ways to support those groups.

     

    Details of the air mission over Syria were confirmed by a U.S. official not authorized to speak publicly because the details have not yet been formally announced.

     

    C-17s, accompanied by fighter escort aircraft, dropped small arms ammunition and other items like hand grenades in Hasakah province in northern Syria to a coalition of rebels groups vetted by the US, known as the Syrian Arab Coalition.

    If you were the Russians, how would you feel about this?

    I know how I would feel.

    And just as Joe Biden has previously admitted, the “moderate middle” in Syria simply does not exist.  The following is an extended excerpt from a piece that was originally written by investigative journalist Nafeez Ahmed

    The first Russian airstrikes hit the rebel-held town of Talbisah north of Homs City, home to al-Qaeda’s official Syrian arm, Jabhat al-Nusra, and the pro-al-Qaeda Ahrar al-Sham, among other local rebel groups. Both al-Nusra and the Islamic State have claimed responsibility for vehicle-borne IEDs (VBIEDs) in Homs City, which is 12 kilometers south of Talbisah.

     

    The Institute for the Study of War (ISW) reports that as part of “US and Turkish efforts to establish an ISIS ‘free zone’ in the northern Aleppo countryside,” al-Nusra “withdrew from the border and reportedly reinforced positions in this rebel-held pocket north of Homs city”.

     

    In other words, the US and Turkey are actively sponsoring “moderate” Syrian rebels in the form of al-Qaeda, which Washington DC-based risk analysis firm Valen Globals forecasts will be “a bigger threat to global security” than IS in coming years.

     

    Last October, Vice President Joe Biden conceded that there is “no moderate middle” among the Syrian opposition. Turkey and the Gulf powers armed and funded “anyone who would fight against Assad,” including “al-Nusra,” “al-Qaeda in Iraq (AQI),” and the “extremist elements of jihadis who were coming from other parts of the world”.

     

    In other words, the CIA-backed rebels targeted by Russia are not moderates. They represent the same melting pot of al-Qaeda affiliated networks that spawned the Islamic State in the first place.

    It has been well documented that many of these so-called “moderate rebel groups” in Syria have fought alongside ISIS and have sold weapons to them.  So this false dichotomy that Barack Obama keeps trying to sell us on is just a giant fraud.  The following comes from a recent Infowars report

    In September, 2014 a commander with the FSA admitted cooperating with ISIS and the al-Nusra Front.

     

    “We are collaborating with the Islamic State and the Nusra Front by attacking the Syrian Army’s gatherings in … Qalamoun,” Bassel Idriss said. “Let’s face it: The Nusra Front is the biggest power present right now in Qalamoun and we as FSA would collaborate on any mission they launch as long as it coincides with our values.”

     

    In July of 2014 a report in Stars and Stripes documented how the 1,000 strong Dawud Brigade, which had previously fought alongside the FSA against al-Assad, had defected in its entirety to join ISIS.

     

    The same month factions within the FSA — including Ahl Al Athar and Ibin al-Qa’im — pledged services to the Islamic State.

     

    Members of the Islamic State claim to cooperate with the FSA and buy weapons provided by the U.S.

     

    “We are buying weapons from the FSA. We bought 200 anti-aircraft missiles and Koncourse anti tank weapons,” ISIS member Abu Atheer told al-Jazeera. “We have good relations with our brothers in the FSA. For us, the infidels are those who cooperate with the West to fight Islam.”

    U.S. anti-tank weapons are playing a critical role in the Syrian conflict.  As reported by the Washington Post, U.S.-made anti-tank missiles are being used by the rebels to destroy lots of Russian-made tanks that are being used by the Syrian army…

    So successful have they been in driving rebel gains in northwestern Syria that rebels call the missile the “Assad Tamer,” a play on the word Assad, which means lion. And in recent days they have been used with great success to slow the Russian-backed offensive aimed at recapturing ground from the rebels.

     

    Since Wednesday, when Syrian troops launched their first offensive backed by the might of Russia’s military, dozens of videos have been posted on YouTube showing rebels firing the U.S.-made missiles at Russian-made tanks and armored vehicles belonging to the Syrian army. Appearing as twirling balls of light, they zigzag across the Syrian countryside until they find and blast their target in a ball of flame.

    Like I said earlier, this is looking more and more like a proxy war between the United States and Russia.

    Could that be what Obama actually wants?

    *  *  *

    Obama is poking China in the eyes lately too.  CNN is reporting that U.S. warships may soon be sailing into territorial waters around the Spratly Islands.  These are islands that the Chinese government claims ownership over, but the U.S. government disputes that claim, and Obama seems determined to flex his muscles in the area…

    The United States (US) may soon deploy war ships near China’s artificial islands in the South China Sea.

     

    It wants to send a message that it does not recognize China’s territorial claims over the area.

     

    This is according to a Financial Times report quoting a senior U.S. official who said its ships will sail within 12-nautical-mile zones that China claims as its territory around the Spratly Islands within the next two weeks.

    If Obama sends warships into that area, there is a very real chance that they could get shot at.  According to  Newsweek, the Chinese are saying that they will not permit U.S. ships to violate those territorial waters under any circumstances…

    We will never allow any country to violate China’s territorial waters and airspace in the Spratly Islands, in the name of protecting freedom of navigation and overflight,” Foreign Ministry spokeswoman Hua Chunying said in response to a question about possible U.S. patrols. “We urge the related parties not to take any provocative actions, and genuinely take a responsible stance on regional peace and stability.”

    Such exchanges appear to be moving China and the U.S. toward a much feared, yet long expected, military confrontation. Just as unsettling, both sides seem confident they can prevail.

    Over the past couple of years our relations with China have really gone downhill very rapidly, and if the trading relationship between the two largest economies on the planet breaks down, that would have massive implications for the entire global economy.

    In addition to everything above, the civil war in Ukraine continues to rage on.  The United States funded, equipped, trained and organized the forces that violently overthrew the democratically-elected government in Ukraine, and then once those thugs (which actually included some neo-Nazis) took power, the Obama administration immediately recognized them as the legitimate government of Ukraine.

    The Russians were absolutely infuriated by this, and they have been providing soldiers, equipment and supplies to the rebel groups that are fighting back against this new government.  Of course the Russians deny that they are doing this, but it is exceedingly obvious that they are.

    The rebel groups that the Russians have been backing have been doing very well and have been steadily taking ground, and this is not how the power brokers in D.C. envisioned things playing out in Ukraine.  So in a desperate attempt to shift the momentum of the conflict, a bill is going through Congress that would provide “lethal military aid” to the government in Kiev.  Initially the bill would have provided 200 million dollars in lethal aid, but now it has been upped to 300 million dollars.  There are some that believe that the final figure will be significantly higher.

    Once this bill gets passed, it will be an extremely important event.  For the Russians, it will mean crossing a red line that never should have been crossed.  You see, the truth is that Ukraine is Russia’s most important neighbor.  Just imagine how we would feel if the Russians helped overthrow Canada’s government and then start feeding weapons to the new pro-Russian government that they helped install.  That is exactly how the Russians view our meddling in Ukraine.

    Earlier this year, I wrote an article in which I discussed an opinion poll that showed that 81 percent of all Russians now view the United States negatively, and only 13 percent of Russians have a positive view of this nation.  Not even during the height of the Cold War were the numbers that bad.

    The stage is being set for World War III, but most Americans are completely and totally oblivious to all of this because they are so wrapped up in their own little worlds.

    Most Americans still seem to assume that the Russians and the Chinese are our “friends” and that any type of conflict between major global powers is impossible.

    Well, the truth is that conflict has already begun in Ukraine and Syria, and tensions are rising with each passing day.

    It won’t happen next week or next month, but we are on the road to World War III.

  • ON To WaSHiNGToN…

    ON TO WASHINGTON

  • HSBC Is Now "Highly Risk Averse" Amid Growth Worries, Loss Of Central Bank Put

    Earlier today, we brought you one graphic from HSBC which shows that based on at least one metric, the world is already in recession:

    That graph is part of a larger thesis HSBC has developed about how a confluence of circumstances have conspired to make asset allocation a somewhat vexing task. The so called “tricky trinity” is comprised of the following three factors:

    • Global growth is decelerating
    • The absence of a policy put
    • Risk premia offers a limited buffer 

    These are all ideas that we have of course discussed at great length. 

    As for decelerating global growth, here’s what we said earlier:

    …the entire world seems to be decelerating in tandem with China’s hard landing (which most recently manifested itself in another negative imports print). 

     

    For evidence of this, one might look to the WTO, whose chief economist Robert Koopman recently opined that “it’s almost like the timing belt on the global growth engine is a bit off or the cylinders are not firing.” And then there’s the OECD, which recently slashed its global growth forecasts. The ADB joined the party as well, citing China, soft commodity prices, and a strong dollar on the way to cutting its regional outlook. Even Citi has jumped on the bandwagon with Willem Buiter calling for better than even odds of a worldwide downturn.

    And here is HSBC: 

    At this point we find few investors that believe growth is likely to accelerate. Rather, consensus growth expectations have moderated significantly in recent months. Our leading indicators found a peak in June and have since declined gradually. As we pointed out in our most recent publication, the downturn has been fairly broad-based with peaking or past peak cyclical data in all regions and most types of data. Only consumer data continues to improve. However, given the broad-based decline in other data we doubt that consumers are going to be able to withstand this cyclical story.

    The global PMI story is similar and we can now see that the manufacturing sector numbers have fallen to a 26-month low, which has resulted in a deterioration of the service sector as well. That said, global PMI was still at an expansionary 52.8 in September. Growth on this metric is low but still positive. In effect, September data verifies the slowdown that our leading indicators started to highlight in July. While the current decline in manufacturing data is clearly in the minds of many investors, the slowdown in the service sector PMI is a cause for concern. That said, if our leading indicators are correct, we are unlikely to see a stabilisation of global growth numbers over the coming 3-6 months. This presents global asset markets with a significant growth problem at the time of fairly limited risk premia in US equity markets, for example. 

     


    On the absence of a policy put, the message is simple: central banks have lost credibility, but the market is still largely dependent on QE. The BoJ and the ECB will eventually have trouble finding enough supply to purchase, which means that they will have literally monetized everything that isn’t tied down and yet still, both the eurozone and Japan are mired in deflation. We’ve seen the same dynamic unfold in Sweden where, for the first time, QE actually broke and just three months later, the Riksbank is being forced to look at purchasing muni bonds just to avoid the possibility that the scarcity of collateral created by central bank purchases doesn’t end up causing things (yields, the SEK) to move in the “wrong” direction (i.e. higher). And of course there’s the Fed, which is stuck in the impossible position of accidentally accelerating EM capital outflows whether it hikes or whether it holds. In a market that’s still largely hooked on stimulus, it is not good when central planners run out of options, creditbility, and lose the narrative all at the same time. And that is exactly what’s happening now. 

    Back we go to HSBC:

    Clearly, in this slow growth outlook it is easy to rely on central banks to provide an economic put. However, as our eurozone economics and fixed income strategy team highlighted in The ECB & QE: Constraints will test credibility from 22 September 2015, there are constraints on what the ECB can do. The chief limitations are negative yields and the relative lack of Bunds in a capital key driven QE program. Most notably, it is worth highlighting that such constraints limit the ability of the ECB to defend a weak EUR or to reignite growth and inflation expectations.

    The ECB, however, isn’t the only central bank that faces constraints to its unconventional monetary policy program. Investors continually question the limits of the BoJ’s JPY80trn asset purchase program whilst giving the benefit of the doubt. At present the BoJ owns 30% of JGBs outstanding but at the current run rate that would reach 50% by December 2018. How long can the BoJ keep buying 100% of the government’s new deficit issuance? The BoJ will have to do this to meet its asset purchase target in 2015. At the same time, it is not clear who will sell to the BoJ going forward as the GPIF is close to being done with its rebalancing, whilst life insurers and megabanks are limited in their ability to reduce JGB dependence due to ALM and regulatory considerations. 

    As we look at the success of QE it appears that the marginal benefit of further monetary policy is constrained. As this prospect starts to affect consumers and corporates alike, their belief in economic fortunes starts to become more volatile. This behavioural effect on global growth is not fully priced into financial markets, in our view. If anything, the distribution of future economic outcomes is becoming more extreme. 

    Finally, on risk premia:

    Monetary policy in the post crisis period has been like one giant blanket that has kept investors sheltered from the stiff breeze of structural stagnation. This blanket has also encouraged investors to move further and further into riskier assets. In effect, risk premia has slowly been pushed down. The eurozone crisis and now the EM crisis highlight that depressed risk premia are unlikely to unravel in a slow and gradual manner. Rather, once risk premia reach unsustainable levels, then only one proverbial straw will break the camel’s back. At the moment, EM assets are in the maelstrom of this unravelling.

    There, ladies and gentlemen, is the “tricky trinity” and in a nutshell, the takeaway is fairly simple, so we’ll just leave you with the bank’s conclusion: 

    Going into year-end and looking at the financial landscape for 2016, we cannot help but remain highly risk averse.

    So sell it all we suppose. Or don’t. 

  • How To Create A Gun-Free America In 5 'Easy' Steps

    Submitted by Austin Bragg via Reason.com,

    Want to create a gun-free America in 5 easy steps?

    Here's all there is to it:

    Step 1: Elect. For a gun-free America, the first thing you'll need is two-thirds of Congress. So elect a minimum of 67 Senators and 290 Representatives who are on your side.

    Step 2: Propose. Then, have them vote to propose an amendment to the Constitution which repeals Second Amendment gun rights for all Americans.

    Step 3: Ratify. Then convince the legislators of 38 states to ratify that change.

    At this point, the Second Amendment is history, but you've done nothing to decrease gun violence. All you've done is remove the barrier for Congress to act.

    Step 4: Legislate. You need to enact "common sense" reform.

    You can try to do what Australia did and…ban all guns? That's not at all what they did, but whatever, fuck it. Go big or go home, right?

    It will have to be passed by Congress and signed by the president.  

    Great! The law is passed and guns are now illegal.  The only thing left to do is…

    Step 5: Enforce. Guns won't just disappear because you passed a law. You need to confiscate some 350 million guns scattered among 330 Million Americans.

    Sure, you can try a buy-back program like Australia, but like Australia that will still leave behind anywhere from 60 percent to 80 percent of privately owned firearms.

    The rest you have to take.

    You'll need the police, the FBI, the ATF or the National Guard—all known for their nuanced approach to potentially dangerous situations—to go door-to-door, through 3.8 million square miles of this country and take guns, by force, from thousands, if not, millions of well-armed individuals. Many of whom would rather start a civil war than acquiesce.

    So inevitably gun violence, which is currently at a historic low, will skyrocket.

    But that is how you get a gun-free America in five easy steps.

    (For more in that vein, read this piece by Charles C.W. Cooke of National Review.)

  • Russia Releases New Airstrike Videos, Says "Most" ISIS Ammo, Heavy Vehicles Destroyed

    Don’t be deceived, there are always two sides (or more) to every propaganda war and as we’ve been careful to mention on the way to critiquing US foreign policy in Syria, just because what Washington says about the war is so completely absurd as to warp the mind, that doesn’t thereby mean that everything which comes out of The Kremlin’s spin team should be taken as gospel. So when you see the steady stream of Russian Defense Ministry videos that purport to show the destruction of an ISIS stronghold or weapons cache which supposedly has some strategic significance, you should take it with a grain of salt. 

    Having dispensed with the customary disclaimer, we’ll move swiftly to say that although it might not be easy to tell what, Russia is certainly blowing up something in Syria and the videos – especially when viewed in light of how inept they make the US air force look by comparison – are always worth a look. 

    Below, we present the latest videos from Russia’s airstrikes in Syria. One interesting thing to note is that this is Moscow claiming to have destroyed a large portion of ISIS’ ammo right around the time the US paradropped 50 tons of ammo to the “Free Syrian Army.” Time for another caveat: correlation does not equal causation. 

    Without further ado:

    And here’s RT with a bit of color on what you’re supposedly watching there:

    Islamic State militants have lost “most” of their ammunition, heavy vehicles and equipment in Russian airstrikes, the Defense Ministry said Tuesday. At least 86 ISIS targets were hit during 88 sorties in the last 24 hours.

     

    Sukhoi Su-24M and Su-34 bombers, together with Su-25SM ground support aircrafts targeted Islamic State (IS, formerly ISIS/ISIL) sites in the provinces of Raqqah, Hama, Idlib, Latakia and Aleppo, according to the ministry. The jets hit command posts, ammunition and armament depots, military vehicles, plants producing explosives, field camps and bases.

     

    Su-24M bombers also targeted an IS field headquarters near the city of Anadan in the province of Aleppo from which the terrorists coordinated their activities. There was an ammunition depot at the site, the ministry said. 

     

    One more IS field post was destroyed near the city of al-Bab in Aleppo Province.

    We’ll close with a quote from… well… from who else?

    “[Western countries] say we are bombing false targets. On Sunday US air forces targeted a power station and a transformer in Aleppo. Why did they do it? Whom did they punish? What was the sense? That is unclear,” Russian President Vladimir Putin said on Tuesday.

  • What Keeps Neil Howe Up At Night: An Interview With The Author Of "The Fourth Turning"

    Underproduction, undercapacity, deflation, currency wars, demographics, falling birth rates” – those are the biggest fears which Fourth Turning author, and head of Saeculum Research Neil Howe, lays out in this interview excerpt courtesy of RealVision TV.

    While Howe goes on an interesting tangent on the one topic that will surely be absent from all presidential debates, namely the fact that migration into the US is “actually in huge decline“, and that the largest immigrant group into the US is Asian (after all someone has to buy those luxury NYC condos), what is more interesting are Howe’s parallels of the current economic situation to the Great Depression: “whole areas of the world no longer having a global superpower, no longer having global institutions that enforce orders so you have these huge areas of failed states and power vacuums and regional authoritarian governments – that’s exactly what people saw in the 1930s and we’re seeing it now in Russia, China, Iran doing whatever they want.”

    He continues:

    “Another interesting economic parallel is the crisis of overvaluation: in the 1930s it was the gold standard, for southern Europe it’s the Euro, and for China they have a fixed rate regime that they’re attending to too little too late. It’s the nature of an authoritarian regime to always to do too little and too late. Everyone is too timid to tell the person in power “this is what you need to do.” I think China faces an absolute choice between a huge devaluation to restimulate its economy, because becoming competitive I think the carry trade is going to go and I think even domestic savings are going to flee. If they don’t do that they have very few options left at this point. They have $3.5 trillion of reserves – you’ll be amazed how quickly that goes. So that’s another parallel.

    Of course no Howe interview would be complete without some observations on generational shifts:

    “And then there are some fascinating cultural parallels with the 1930s. Another thing that was true in the 1930s was that after the early 30s you saw a continuous decline in the crime rate. Crime began falling over the the course of the 30s: substance abuse, alcohol abuse began to fall, and this is true with Millennials today. And I tell people that Millennials are responsible today for the most dramatic and rabid decline in youth violence in American history. This is why so many young people are moving to cities, because they are safe again.”

    Will this trend reverse if and when the economy stumbles, as the full parallels to the sad conclusion of the 1930s play out?

    The answer is unclear, but for a fascinating, broad and unconventional perspective on where the economy is headed from one of the cult non-establishment figures, watch the full interview on RealVision’s website.

    Raoul Pal has generously given Zero Hedge readers an exclusive weekly trial so both the full Howe, and all the other fascinating interviews in RealVision’s database can be watched in their entirety. To do so, please click here and use the “zerohedge” trial code, at which point the full Howe interview can be seen via this link.

    Here is the excerpt with Neil Howe excerpt :

  • Oct 14 – Ex-Fed's Fisher: "FOMC has egg on its face"

    EMOTION MOVING MARKETS NOW: 38/100 FEAR

    PREVIOUS CLOSE: 44/100 FEAR

    ONE WEEK AGO: 30/100 FEAR 
    ONE MONTH AGO: 14/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE YEAR AGO: 0/100 EXTREME FEAR

    Put and Call Options: FEAR During the last five trading days, volume in put options has lagged volume in call options by 26.86% as investors make bullish bets in their portfolios. However, this is still among the highest levels of put buying seen during the last two years, indicating fear on the part of investors.

    Market Volatility:  NEUTRAL The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 17.67. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

    Stock Price Strength: FEAR The number of stocks hitting 52-week lows exceeds the number hitting highs and is at the lower end of its range, indicating fear.

     

    PIVOT POINTS

    EURUSD | GBPUSD | USDJPY | USDCAD | AUDUSD | EURJPY | EURCHF | EURGBPGBPJPY | NZDUSD | USDCHF | EURAUD | AUDJPY 

    S&P 500 (ES) | NASDAQ 100 (NQ) | DOW 30 (YM) | RUSSELL 2000 (TF) Euro (6E) |Pound (6B)

    EUROSTOXX 50 (FESX) | DAX 30 (FDAX) | BOBL (FGBM) | SCHATZ (FGBS) | BUND (FGBL)

    CRUDE OIL (CL) | GOLD (GC) | 10 YR T NOTE | 2 YR T  NOTE | 5 YR T NOTE | 30 YR TREASURY BOND | SOYBEANS | CORN

     

    MEME OF THE DAY – WHEN DR. T SPEAKS…

     

    UNUSUAL ACTIVITY

    VXX OCT WEEKLY4 21.5 CALLS7K+ @$.58

    LOCK NOV 8 PUT Activity on the BID side

    LULU NOV 55 CALL Activity 2500 block @$1.20 on offer

    EDGE SC 13D Filed by NEW LEAF Ventures .. 8.2%

    TROX .. SC 13G Filed by Putnam Investments .. 13.2%

    More Unusual Activity…

    HEADLINES

     

    Fed’s Bullard: Liftoff is appropriate despite challenges

    Fed’s Tarullo: US Rate hike likely not appropriate

    Ex-Fed’s Fisher: FOMC has egg on its face

    Fed Discount Rate Mins: 8 votes to hike rate to 1% (vs 5 in July)

    NY Fed: Consumers See Lower Inflation, Spending Growth –BBG

    US NFIB Small Business Optimism Sep: 96.1 (est 95.5; prev 95.9)

    ECB’s Mersch: Near-term inflation may continue to hover near zero

    BoE new boy Vlieghe says weak inflation may delay rate rise

    BoE’s McCafferty: Downside pressures in prices seen as transitory

    Venezuela: Opec technical meeting to be held 21/Oct in Vienna; non-opec members Brazil, Russia, Norway among invitees

     

    GOVERNMENTS/CENTRAL BANKS

    Fed’s Bullard: Liftoff is appropriate despite challenges –ForexLive

    Ex-Fed’s Fisher: FOMC has egg on its face –CNBC

    Fed’s Tarullo: Rate hike likely not appropriate –CNBC

    NY Fed: Consumers See Lower Inflation, Spending Growth –BBG

    Fed Discount Rate Mins: 8 votes to hike rate to 1% (vs 5 in July)

    Fed Discount Rate Mins: 3 voted to hold discount rate at 0.75%

    Fed Discount Rate Mins: Minneapolis again voted to cut discount rate to 0.5%

    ECB’s Mersch: Near-term inflation may continue to hover near zero –Rtrs

    BoE new boy Vlieghe says weak inflation may delay rate rise –MW

    BOE’s McCafferty wants rates at a level that they can cut again –ForexLive

    BoE’s McCafferty: Downside pressures in prices seen as transitory –FXstreet

    FIXED INCOME

    Prices rise on growth fears, bets on later Fed rate hike –Rtrs

    Treasuries Wilder Than Ever as Ultrafast Bond Traders Rise Up –BBG

    Italian-German Bond Yield Spread Narrows to Least Since April –BBG

    China picks London for renminbi debt issue –Eftee

    Putin: IMF should provide additional $3 bln loan to Ukraine to repay its debt to Russia –TASS

    FX

    USD: Dollar bulls vexed by Federal Reserve rate outlook –FT

    COMMODITY FX: Weak Chinese data bogs down commodity FX –ET

    CNY: PBoC fixed yuan higher for an 8th straight day –FT

    GBP: Deflation takes pound down after M&A lift –FT

    ENERGY/COMMODITIES

    Venezuela: Opec technical meeting to be held 21/Oct in Vienna; non-opec members Brazil, Russia, Norway among invitees

    WTI futures settle 0.9% lower at $46.66 per barrel

    CRUDE: IEA: Oil market glut will persist through 2016 as demand growth slows –FT

    METALS: Copper Prices Fall After Weaker-Than-Expected Chinese Import Data –WSJ

    EXCHANGES: China’s largest commodities exchange to build intl platform –FT

    USDA: NZ milk production seen declining –BBG

    EIA Drilling Productivity Report for October

    EQUITIES

    EARNINGS: J&J got slammed by the strong dollar again –BI

    EARNINGS: J&J plans to buy back shares up to $10bn –Yahoo

    M&A: GE to sell $30 bln specialty finance business to Wells Fargo –Rtrs

    M&A: Diageo to announce sale of wines unit –Sky

    M&A: EMC to pay Dell $2 billion as breakup fee in go-shop period –Yahoo

    LEGAL: SEC Prepares Civil Charges Against Mondelez in Cadbury Probe –WSJ

    AUTOS: Volkswagen announces ?750m spending cuts to fund product revamp –Guradian

    AUTOS: VW gloom hits German economic sentiment –FT

    PRIVATISATION: UK government sells ?591m stake in Royal Mail –FT

    TECH: Twitter Slashing Costs With Workforce Layoffs –Sky

    TECH: Bloomberg: U.S. Wants To End Apple E-Book Antitrust Monitoring –Nasdaq

    BANKS: Citi dials down risky block trading amid market turmoil –Rtrs

    EMERGING MARKETS

     

    Economists gloomier on Brazil’s inflation outlook –FT

     

  • 'America The Herd' Is Ever At Odds With 'America The Civilization'

    Submitted by Dan Sanchez via DanSanchez.me,

    “Make America Great Again” is the slogan for Donald Trump’s phenomenally popular presidential campaign.

     

    With it, Trump has tapped a deep well of frustration among American conservatives about the direction of the country under President Barack Obama.

    This longing for lost greatness especially concerns American foreign policy (although upon close examination Trump’s actual statements are less hawkish than those of his Republican rivals).

    Conservatives are sick of America looking weak on the world stage. They sense that Obama has transmitted his own lack of virility to the nation as a whole. 

    Many blame the spectacular and gruesome rise of ISIS on Obama for having pulled out of Iraq. The bad guys are on the rise, because our leader wasn’t “man enough” to stay and stand up to them. As the great George Carlin said:

    “This whole country has a manhood problem. Big manhood problem in the USA. You can tell from the language we use; language always gives you away. What did we do wrong in Vietnam? We pulled out! Not a very manly thing to do is it?”

    Masculine Trump promises to be different. Oh sure, he wouldn’t have invaded Iraq in the first place. But if he had inherited the occupation, he wouldn’t have pulled out until he had taken all of the country’s oil. A “real man” doesn’t leave until he gets what he wants.

    And now, so this narrative goes, Obama has “yielded,” on behalf of America, to both Cuba and Iran. Trump, who presents himself as a masterful business negotiator, sneered at Obama’s nuclear deal with Iran as, “one of the weakest contracts I’ve seen of any kind.”

    But perhaps most emasculating of all is Obama’s feeble showing next to the famously tough Russian president Vladimir Putin. Virile Vlad has taken Obama’s lunch money time and again.

    Putin frustrated Obama’s plan to launch an air war on Syria by calling Secretary of State John Kerry’s bluff over a chemical weapons deal with the Syrian regime.

    Putin countered the Washington-backed coup in Ukraine by swiftly annexing its Crimean province without firing a shot.

    And now, in a blitzkrieg campaign, Putin seems to be smashing in a matter of days the ISIS menace that Obama declared war on eight months ago.

    Many Americans look at Putin with a mix of fear, hate, and envy. They wish they had a leader like him, and hope Trump will fill that role. Trump himself has predicted that as president he will get along with his Russian counterpart, because Putin will respect him (perhaps as a fellow alpha male). In contrast, Trump added, Putin, “has absolutely no respect for President Obama. Zero.”

    It is conceivable that Obama feels he has something to prove as a spindly former community organizer, and that is why he has been susceptible to be pressured into foreign interventions by the neocons (like Victoria Nuland of the Ukraine debacle) and liberal interventionists (like Hillary Clinton, Susan Rice, and Samantha Power of the Libya debacle) in his administration (especially the above female ones), as well as his steely-eyed generals (like Stanley McChrystal and David Petraeus of the Afghan Surge debacle).

    And perhaps Obama’s non-martial inclinations have curbed his commitments to these foreign misadventures, preventing them from being quite as grandly calamitous as Bush’s, while at the same time making him look timorous and indecisive.

    It may be tempting to think that Trump is comfortable enough in his own masculinity to not start fights he can’t finish, and that this is why he strays from the GOP script on Iraq, Syria, and Russia.

    But ultimately it is a waste of time to pore over what candidates say on the hustings. Politicians are generally inveterate liars and manipulators whose policies in office rarely match their rhetoric, and often don’t even resemble it.

    What is important is why the rhetoric is successful: why it resonates with the public and what that says about the spirit of the times, which is what actually limits or enables the rapacity of government.

    What exactly are conservatives longing for when they clamor to Make America Great Again? What do they even mean by “America”?

    *****

    It could be any of three senses, each of which was expounded by the great American journalist Randolph Bourne in his 1918 essay “The State.”

    They could mean America the Country. According to Bourne, when speaking of country or nation:

    “We think vaguely of a loose population spreading over a certain geographical portion of the earth’s surface, speaking a common language, and living in a homogeneous civilization. Our idea of Country concerns itself with the non-political aspects of a people, its ways of living, its personal traits, its literature and art, its characteristic attitudes toward life.”

    Or they could mean America the State. According to Bourne:

    “The State is the country acting as a political unit, it is the group acting as a repository of force, determiner of law, arbiter of justice.”

    It is important to note that Bourne’s idea of the State is distinct from his idea of government, which is:

    “…the machinery by which the nation, organized as a State, carries out its State functions. Government is a framework of the administration of laws, and the carrying out of the public force. (…) That the State is a mystical conception is something that must never be forgotten. Its glamor and its significance linger behind the framework of Government and direct its activities.”

    And in wartime, the State eclipses all else, as the alarmed populace amalgamates into a herd, huddling and stampeding in unison under the guiding rod of government-as-shepherd:

    “Wartime brings the ideal of the State out into very clear relief, and reveals attitudes and tendencies that were hidden. (…) For war is essentially the health of the State. The ideal of the State is that within its territory its power and influence should be universal. (…) And it is precisely in war that the urgency for union seems greatest, and the necessity for universality seems most unquestioned. The State is the organization of the herd to act offensively or defensively against another herd similarly organized. The more terrifying the occasion for defense, the closer will become the organization and the more coercive the influence upon each member of the herd.”

    Bourne noticed a key problem for clearly thinking about these matters:

    “The patriot loses all sense of the distinction between State, nation, and government.”

    As a result, these terms have become thoroughly confused.

    The terms “patriotism” and “nationalism” as used by today’s arch-conservatives refer to attitudes that used to be called “jingoism.” So, what is today called “country” in the sense of “patriotism” and “nation” in the sense of “nationalism” is actually what Bourne referred to as “the State.”

    What is today called “the State” Bourne instead called “government.”

    And what Bourne meant by “country” and “nation” is a concept so neglected today, that it doesn’t really have its own name at all.

    It will clarify things if we adopt our own set of labels for Bourne's rigorous concepts: one that doesn’t confusingly contradict current usage as Bourne’s does, but also doesn’t have the deceptive Orwellian qualities of standard modern parlance.

    Our meaning should be unmistakable if we speak of America the Civilization, America the Herd, and America the Regime.

    Those who display the “Make America Great Again” injunction on baseball caps and bumper stickers are specifically hoping for a particular prospective government official to fulfill it. So, they are clearly not saying “Make the American Civilization Great Again.”

    Yet they are also saying far more than “Make the American Regime Great Again.” They are not merely concerned with the glory of the Federal government.

    What Trump’s supporters desperately want is to Make the American Herd Great Again. And by “Great,” they mean big, imposing, mighty, and fearsome.

    In a time of sparse grazing (that is, a deep economic recession), they are irrationally alarmed at perceived economic inroads being made by the Mexican and Chinese Herds.

    And in a time of military and diplomatic humiliation (see above), they are irrationally terrified that the Russian, Chinese, and Muslim Herds may someday supplant or even overrun them.

    They want their Herd’s military stampede to be irresistible and earthshakingly awesome again, and its huddle (immigration and trade barriers, the national security state, etc.) to be impenetrable and intimidatingly forbidding. And they are looking to Trump to restore these herd characteristics as the new strongman shepherd.

    This is why Trump’s vaunted masculinity is so important. His fans want their shepherd to have a firm hand, like a stern but protecting father.

    As Bourne explained:

    “There is, of course, in the feeling towards the State a large element of pure filial mysticism. The sense of insecurity, the desire for protection, sends one’s desire back to the father and mother, with whom is associated the earliest feelings of protection. It is not for nothing that one’s State is still thought of as Father or Motherland, that one’s relation towards it is conceived in terms of family affection.”

    And this is especially true in times of war such as ours. Bourne added that the wartime State’s…

    “… chief value is the opportunity it gives for this regression to infantile attitudes. In your reaction to an imagined attack on your country or an insult to its government, you draw closer to the herd for protection, you conform in word and deed, and you act together. And you fix your adoring gaze upon the State, with a truly filial look, as upon the Father of the flock, the quasi-personal symbol of the strength of the herd, and the leader and determinant of your definite action and ideas.”

    But in order for this filial piety toward the Herd to really take hold, there usually needs to be a figurehead with a face, a name, and a personality to function as a devotional focal point: a father-figure embodiment of the Herd itself. This was the function of Big Brother in George Orwell’s Nineteen Eighty-Four. And this is the function of Trump in his supporters’ dreams of an American Herd made great again.

    If America’s spooked-herd mindset continues to intensify, it could even turn the populist demagogue Trump into Nationalist America’s answer to Nationalist Italy’s Benito Mussolini: our “Il Douche” to their “Il Duce.”

    *****

    Conservatives need to snap out of their fight-or-flight response, take a moment to step out of the fevered haze of election season, and realize that there is no need or good reason to seek provision and protection in a Herd. (Class warrior leftists are also guilty of this in their own way.)

    The shepherds they bleat for don’t tend to their flocks for the sake of the protection and provision of the sheep, but for the sake of their own wool and mutton. And such regime herdsmen are the ones who set herds against each other in order to divide and rule.

    And protection and provision cannot be sustainably achieved through the bestial means of swarming and stampeding over outsiders. The “biological competition” (as Ludwig von Mises called it) of tribalism and warfare (both military and economic) is a zero-sum game. And it ultimately only endangers and impoverishes all by breaking down the positive-sum division of labor (social competition and cooperation), which is the rational and characteristically human means of attaining protection and provision.

    As Mises taught, civilization is based on the division of labor, which in turn depends on respect for individual property rights (including self-ownership): in a word, justice.

    The more that justice reigns, the more intensified and productive will be the division of labor, and the more the populace will be civilized: i.e., economically integrated, prosperous, and peaceful.

    Justice (liberty and property) is what makes a civilization great. And civilization is what makes a populace rich and safe. In short, being good is what makes a people truly great.

    Being good means peaceful and voluntary exchange, both commercial and cultural, to the enrichment of all, both material and spiritual.

    Being good means not making enemies throughout the world by bombing, starving, and subjugating potential fellow members of the ecumenical market society and excusing it as “foreign policy,” “global strategy,” and “collateral damage.”

    Being good means not pretending to have a partial claim over every single piece of private or “public” property under your government’s illegitimate jurisdiction, such that you can exclude others from it based on them being born under a different illegitimate jurisdiction.

    And as the left needs to realize, being good also means not raiding the coffers of other socio-economic “classes” simply because they have more than you, and excusing it as “addressing wealth inequality.”

    In other words, being good means acting like decent human beings, and not like a ravenous, paranoid, amoral Herd.

    America the Herd is ever at odds with America the Civilization. It is America the Herd that is keeping America the Civilization from feeling and being prosperous and safe. For too long, we have let our rulers ride us roughshod, using us to trample the economy and global tranquility with its economic and military interventions.

    *****

    Apocalyptic Islamophobes like to speak of a “Clash of Civilizations,” but that is a contradiction in terms. Civilization is a concept of natural, unforced harmony. It is Herds that clash, not Civilizations. Civilizational commonalities may determine who is considered in the fold. But it is the Herd dynamic that hurls the throngs against each other.

    And such clashes damage civilization in two senses. Civilization is degraded domestically, as the heterogenous dance of individuals yields the stage to the homogenous march of the horde.

    And civilization between the two peoples is shattered as well.

    There are many nested levels of civilization. Within the American civilization, there are distinctive sub-civilizations. The Midwest, the Northeast, the South, etc, each have their own recognizable subcultures and trading networks, even though they are also to some extent integrated with the broader American culture and trading network.

    All these civilizations are, in turn, integrated with a broader Western civilization. And Western civilization has certain cultural affinities and (especially) economic relationships with virtually all the rest of the world as well.

    So, no matter how distinctive two sets of people are, military and economic warfare between them breaks the bonds of civilization that culturally and materially enrich them both.

    *****

    Next time someone accuses you of “hating America” for denouncing beastly policies and the tribalism that endorses and enables such savagery, tell them, “I love America the Civilization, which is why I despise America the Herd. For you, it seems to be the other way around.”

    Make America good again, and the kinds of greatness actually worth having will naturally follow.

  • Bond Market Breaking Bad – Credit Downgrades Highest Since 2009

    Despite The Fed's best efforts to crush the business cycle, the crucial credit-cycle has reared its ugly head as releveraging firms (gotta fund those buybacks) and deflationary pressures (liabilities fixed, assets tumble) have led to a surging market cost of capital.

    As WSJ reports, softening U.S. corporate fundamentals have been largely overlooked but the markets for riskier debt have become snarled with rising downgrades and an increase in U.S. corporate defaults indicate “some cracks on the surface” of the domestic-growth outlook. In fact, in the latest quarter, the ratio of upgrades-to-downgrades is its weakest since the peak of the financial crisis in 2009.

    Falling profits and increased borrowing at U.S. companies are rattling debt markets, a sign the six-year-long economic recovery could be under threat.

     

    Credit-rating firms are downgrading more U.S. companies than at any other time since the financial crisis, and measures of debt relative to cash flow are rising.

     

     

    Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services downgraded U.S. companies 297 times in the first nine months of the year, the most downgrades since 2009, compared with just 172 upgrades.

     

    Meanwhile, the trailing 12-month default rate on lower-rated U.S. corporate bonds was 2.5% in September, up from 1.4% in July of last year, according to S&P.

     

    Analysts expect profits at large companies to decline for a second straight quarter for the first time since 2009.

     

    U.S. companies have increased borrowing to levels exceeding those just before the financial crisis, as firms pursue big acquisitions and seek to boost stock prices by buying back shares. According to one metric, the ratio of debt to earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization for companies that carry investment-grade ratings, meaning triple-B-minus or above, was 2.29 times in the second quarter. That’s higher than the 1.91 times in June 2007, just before the crisis, according to figures from Morgan Stanley.

    “We’re seeing more widespread weakness across more industry sectors in the U.S.,” Ms. Vazza said. “It’s become broader than just the commodity story.”

     

    “The metrics that you measure health and credit by have peaked a while ago,” said Sivan Mahadevan, head of credit strategy at Morgan Stanley. “They are beginning to deteriorate.”

    *  *  *

    You Are Here…

  • JPMorgan Misses Across The Board On Disappointing Earnings, Outlook; Stealthy Deleveraging Continues

    Maybe we now know why JPM decided to release results after market close instead of, as it always does, before the open: simply said, the results were lousy top to bottom, the company resorted to its old income-generating “gimmicks”, it charged off far less in risk loans than many expected it would, and its outlook while hardly as bad as it was a quarter ago, was once again  dour.

    First, the summary results, in which JPM saw $23.5 billion in non-GAAP net revenues, because yes, JPM has a pre-GAAP “reported revenue” item which was even lower at $22.8 billion… 

    … missing consensus by $500 million, down $1 billion or 6.4% from a year ago.

     

    While the Net Income at first sight seemed to be a beat, printing at $1.68, this was entirely due to addbacks and tax benefits, which amounts to a 31 cent boost to the bottom line, while for the first time, JPM decided to admit that reserve releases are nothing but a gimmick, and broke out the contribution to EPS, which added another $0.05 to the bottom line.

     

    There were two surprises here: first, JPM’s legal headaches continue, and the firm spent another $1.3 billion on legal fees during the quarter – one assumes to put the finishing touches on the currency rigging settlement. Also, as noted above, instead of taking a credit charge, i.e., increasing reserve releases, JPM resorted to this age-old gimmick, and boosted its book “profit” by $450 million thanks to loan loss reserve releases, the most yet in 2015; ironically this comes as a time when JPM competitors such as Jefferies are taking huge charge offs on existing debt. It appears JPM is merely doing what Jefferies did for quarters, and is hoping the market rebounds enough for it to not have to mark its trading book to market.

    While the release of reserves helped JPM in this quarter, unless the economy picks up substantially next quarter, JPM’s EPS will be hammered not only from the top line, but also from the long-overdue rebuilding of its reserves which will have to come sooner or later.

    Completing the big picture, was something rather troubling we first noticed last quarter: JPM’s aggressive push to deleverage its balance sheet, by unwinding billions in deposits. Indeed, as the bank admits, it has now shrunk its balance sheet by a whopping $156 billion in 2015, driven by a massive reduction in “non-operating deposits” of over $150 billion. Perhaps the US does not need NIRP: it appears banks like JPM are simply saying not to deposits.

     

    Then stepping away from the bank, and looking just at JPM’s most important division, its Investment Bank, there were no major surprises there: Fixed Income Revenue crashed by $854 million Y/Y to $2.933 billion, which however was in line with sellside expectations. The silver lining: equity markets revenue of $1.4 billion posted a modest improvement of $173 million from Q3 2014.

    This is how JPM explained it:

    • Fixed Income Markets of $2.9B, down 11% YoY, excluding business simplification
    • Equity Markets of $1.4B, up 9% YoY, driven by strong performance across derivatives and cash

    The punchline:

    • Firm loans-to-deposits ratio of 64%, up 8% since year-end

    This was up to 61% last quarter, and is indicatively of the end of QE as the fed no longer pumps the company full of deposits without a matching loan increase.

    Perhaps the most interesting thing about this slide was JPM’s admission at the very end that it had suffered $232 million in credit costs “reflecting higher reserves driven by Oil & Gas.” Considering this was a decline from the $299MM cost from a year ago, one wonders just how (in)sufficient this will be if and when the oil rebound once again fizzles.

    Curiously, despite the most recent tumble in yields, JPM was happy to reported that after NIM rose by 2 bps last quarter, in Q3, “Firm NIM is up 7bps QoQ largely driven by positive mix impact of lower cash balances and higher loan balances.”

    Finally, the outlook: while hardly as dour as last quarter when as a reminder JPM said “for 3Q15, expect business simplification to generate YoY negative variance in Markets revenue of 9%, with an associated reduction in expense”, this time the revenue guidance cut is only 2%. We expect this number to prove insufficient if the current market volatility continues.

    JPM also said to “Expect 4Q15 YoY core loan growth to continue at 15%+/-.” So a 30% swing from top to bottom.

     

    Here is the full outlook for what was a quarter JPM would be happy to forget

  • Is This 2000, 2007 Or 2011?

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    In last week's update, I discussed the short-term oversold condition that existed at that time. To wit:

    "As you can see, the markets did retest the late August lows, and when combined with the very oversold conditions, led to a frantic "short covering" rally back to previous resistance. It is worth noting that the recent market action is very similar to that of the August decline and initial rebound as well.

     

    Of course, the question that must be answered is whether we have seen the end of the current correction or is this just another "reflexive rally" that will fail?"

    The chart below is updated through yesterday's close.

    SP500-MarketUpdate-101315

    Currently, the bulls have clearly been in charge of the market. The question is for "how long?"

    While last week's FOMC minutes gave the "bulls" some confidence that the Federal Reserve is not removing its accommodative policy, it was the massive amount of short-interest (people betting on markets to fall) that provided the fuel. 

    NYSE-short-interest

    The chart above, from ZeroHedge, shows the massive jump in short-interest that has to be covered as stock prices rise. When players are "short the market," bullish reversals in prices force traders to close out their positions by "buying" into the market. This fuels additional buying, which pushes prices higher, which forces more players to close out their short positions. This cycle continues until the "fuel" is exhausted. This is why market rebounds tend to be extremely sharp and fast, but also fade just as quickly.

    For a visualization think about the "Whoosh Bottle" where an air/gas mixture is fairly inert until ignited by a catalyst. (Vine by @scienceporn)

    That mixture of oversold market conditions, combined with a sharp rise in "short interest" in the market, was the perfect accelerant waiting on a match.  That match was the Fed failing to hike rates and a lack of China in the headlines. 

    However, there is a big difference between a fundamentally based "bull market" advance and a short-covering rally in a "bear market" cycle. While it is too early to say that we are indeed in a bear market, there are many indications such is indeed the case as I discussed yesterday in "4 Warnings."  

    • Profit margins have had a 60bp decline.
    • Margin debt has fallen below its moving average.
    • Valuations have started to contract.
    • Economic measures have fallen sharply.

    Add to those fundamental arguments the technical deterioration of momentum and relative strength in the market and a more worrisome picture emerges. 

    SP500-MarketUpdate-101315-2

    Importantly, despite many of the mainstream calls for a continued bull market, it is worth noting that historically the negative alignment of both the fundamental warnings and technical indicators have only occurred at the onset of more protracted bear market declines.

    Could this time be different? It's possible, particularly if the Federal Reserve once again intervenes with more liquidity driven monetary policy. However, such action by the Federal Reserve seems unlikely as they are focused on "tightening" monetary policy by hiking interest rates, rather than "loosening" it with additional liquidity. Of course, another sharp decline in the market that erodes consumer confidence will likely quickly change their stance. 

    Is This 2000, 2007 or 2011?

    One of the primary arguments by the more "bullish" media is that the current setup is much like that of 2011 following the "debt ceiling" debate and global economic slowdown caused by the Tsunami in Japan. 

    While there are certainly some similarities, such as the weakness being spread from China and a market selloff, there are some marked differences. 

    From a fundamental standpoint the Federal Reserve, along with the ECB, were actively engaged in pushing support for the financial markets globally. This is not the case today, as stated above.

    Furthermore, the economy was "saved" in Q3 and Q4 of 2011 by the warmest winter in 65 years that allowed for continued manufacturing and production during a period when inclement weather is generally a concern. This also coincided with the "reboot" in Japan which allowed for "pent up" demand to be filled. As we once again face an extremely cold winter period, as we saw in the last two, the outcome fundamentally is far different. 

    From a technical backdrop, there is a striking difference as well. In 2011, asset prices plunged on fears of a "debt default" coupled with the lack of liquidity following the end of QE 2. However, price momentum and the relative strength of the underlying market internals remained bullishly biased. 

    SP500-MarketUpdate-101315-3

    Currently, the technical deterioration is more aligned with the previous bear market cycle as "sell signals" have been registered for only the third time since the turn of the century. With only one "sell signal" not registered, the moving average crossover, there is a minor "hope" for the bulls at this juncture. However, given the steepness of the decent it is likely that signal will be registered in the weeks ahead if the "bulls" are unable to gain solid footing and push markets to new highs fairly quickly. 

    No matter how you want to view the market, it is hard to make the case that this is simply just a correction within an ongoing bull market cycle. As I quoted in yesterday's post (Edward Harrison):

    "We are now in the seventh year of a cyclical recovery and bull market. Shares have tripled in that time frame. I would say this means we are much closer to the end of the business cycle than the beginning.

     

    To me, the pre-conditions for this profits recession speak to downside risk, both for risk assets and for the real economy. None of the data speaks to recession in the real economy right now. We are seeing a slowing of job growth and likely of trend economic growth as well. But with a profits recession hitting, the potential for further downside is high."

    That view, combined with the fundamental and technical backdrop that is more aligned with historical bear market cycles, suggests that excessive risk taking currently is ill-advised. If the backdrop changes to a conducive environment, then that view will change accordingly. For now, it remains prudent to use rallies to reduce risk. Remember, it is always easier to get back into the market once the path higher is clear. Conversely, it is harder, and a bit pointless, to keep using rallies simply to make up previous losses. Getting "back to even" is simply not a viable long-term investment strategy.

     

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 13, 2015

  • The Rise of the Sharing Economy

    Everyday I hear new stories of friends and family offering
    rides through Uber, renting out rooms in their home on AirBnB, Uber or selling product on Framestr. while it’s a fairly new way of making money, it’s here to stay. There are obvious changes in consumer practices and
    an opportunity for new market entrants to support a sharing economy in Canada.

    Why is this happening? It’s pretty clear that Canadians have
    become stretched. Debt-to-income hovers at record levels, contract positions
    have increased (at the detriment of full-time work), and housing becomes as unaffordable
    as ever.

    According to a study conducted by PWC, the sharing industry itself is projected
    to rake in $15 billion of revenue in 2015, compares to $240 billion for traditional rental services, and $335 billion by 2025.

    Such “collaborative consumption” is a good thing for several reasons. Owners are able to leverage what was previously an unused asset, in some cases, even a liability. According to Airbnb, “The typical Airbnb host in
    Montreal earns $280 a month, renting out their home 52 nights per year.” Even
    more pronounced are the benefits to the city, “Airbnb activity contributed
    $55-million to the Montreal economy over 12 months ending last March 2014.”
    Research illustrates that travellers using the service stay longer in the city
    and spend more money than typical visitors as they roam well past the city
    centre.

    However, regulators and traditional service sector
    businesses are struggling to adapt to the new economy. For example, should
    room-renters be subject to hotel taxes? In Amsterdam, officials previously used
    Airbnb
    listings
    to track down unlicensed hotels. In some American cities,
    peer-to-peer taxi services, such as Uber and Lyft, have been banned after
    lobbying by traditional taxi firms. The danger is that although some rules need
    to be updated to protect consumers from harm, incumbents will try to destroy
    competition. People who rent out rooms should pay tax, of course, but they
    should not be regulated like a Ritz-Carlton hotel. The lighter rules that
    typically govern bed-and-breakfasts are more than adequate.

    In addition to regulation, there are also complex insurance issues at stake.
    Take the case of Tawfiqul Alam, an UberX driver in Toronto, who was T-boned by
    a re-right runner while transporting a passenger. The accident sent both him
    and his passenger to the hospital and his vehicle was totaled. The real shock
    came after; Alam’s claim through his personal insurance company was invalid
    because the vehicle was being used for commercial use.

    According to Isaac Zisckind, a Toronto personal injury lawyer at Diamond & Diamond, personal auto insurance
    policies don’t cover drivers who are transporting passengers for commercial
    purposes. Taxi drivers are required to get a special kind of commercial
    insurance that is significantly more expensive than personal insurance, but the
    vast majority of UberX drivers — Zisckind estimates 95 per cent — don’t have
    any coverage beyond their personal insurance.

    Like any new disruptive technology, there are growing pains.
    It’s hard to imagine where we’d be as a society if we consistently derailed new
    technologies created by greater connectivity around the world.

    However, the sharing economy is the latest example of the
    internet’s value to consumers and it’s hear to stay. Canadians are forced to become more efficient with their assets to make ends meet and the sharing economy will play a large part. This emerging model is
    growing up and is a large enough force for regulators and companies to take
    notice. That is a sign of its immense potential. Start sharing.

  • 8 Cities That Have Replaced Columbus Day With Indigenous Peoples Day

    Submitted by Claire Bernish via TheAntiMedia.org,

    As tensions boil on the international stage, eight U.S. cities in two months abolished a federal holiday that has long insulted and infuriated the indigenous population and many others — Columbus Day — but that’s not all. These eight cities (including three just last week) then replaced much-maligned October 12 “holiday” with one long overdue: Indigenous Peoples Day.

    Here’s the rundown of U.S. cities that decided a brutal imperialist might not be an appropriate figure to celebrate:

    1. Albuquerque, New Mexico

    In an official declaration of the transformation of the second Monday in October to Indigenous Peoples Day, the city made “an effort to reveal a more accurate historical record of the ‘discovery’ of the United States of America” by recognizing “the occupation of New Mexico’s homelands for the building of our City.” This year, Albuquerque is encouraging businesses and individuals to “reflect upon the ongoing struggles” of the indigenous population “and to celebrate the thriving culture and value” of their societal contributions.

    2. Lawrence, Kansas

    Haskell University students — representing 151 tribal nations — have been trying since September for implementation of Indigenous Peoples Day. Their endeavor finally paid off on October 6th at a City Commission meeting, where Mayor Mike Amyx announced that in order to observe “that the city of Lawrence was built upon the homelands of the Kansa and Osage people” and that Indigenous peoples’ intellectual, spiritual, and deep cultural contribution has enhanced the character of the City of Lawrence.”

    Haskell Indian Nations University’s Student Senate President Christopher Sindone called the transformation a move toward unity. Expressing surprise, he said, For them to pass something like this, as a city, from being at Haskell, that’s 180 years of resiliency by Native Americans recognized.

    3. Portland, Oregon

    Portland City Council last week announced an outcome tribal leaders had pursued for over six decades: Instead of Columbus Day, by a declaration, October 12, 2015 will be Indigenous Peoples Day. In an interview with local station KOIN-6, tribal chairman of the Confederated Tribes of Grand Ronde, Reyn Leno, said of the largely symbolic declaration:

    We’ve been here for hundreds of thousands of years, and we’ve been shy about telling our story. I think that has led the public to have a lot of interest in what we do. We’ve been working hard to tell our story and the story of all Native Americans, and this is just one more movement toward getting that accomplished. You can pour all your concrete and lay all your gravel and blacktop, but these are still the lands that our people walked.

    4. St. Paul, Minnesota

    In August, St. Paul City Council passed a resolution intended to “reaffirm the commitment to promote the well-being and growth of St. Paul’s American Indian and Indigenous community” by celebrating Indigenous Peoples Day instead of Columbus Day on the traditionally designated second Monday in October.

    With language similar to other cities’ resolutions of the holiday, city officials recognize that St. Paul was built “on the homelands of the Dakota people” and that “indigenous nations have lived upon this land since time immemorial.”

    5. Bexar County, Texas

    On Tuesday last week, the Bexar County Commissioners Court resolved to designate October 12th as Indigenous Peoples Day — a move to be inclusive of Native American history that recently helped the San Antonio Missions garner UNESCO World Heritage status.

    City Councilman Ray Saldaña and indigenous advocate Antonio Diaz are now collaborating on a council consideration request to formally bring the same measure before San Antonio City Council.

    6. Anadarko, Oklahoma

    “The city of Anadarko strongly supports the proposition that Indigenous Peoples Day shall be an opportunity to celebrate the thriving cultures and values of the Indigenous Peoples of our region,” stated Mayor Kyle Eastwood in a mid-September meeting in Anadarko City Hall’s council chambers. Apache, Choctaw, Delaware, Wichita, and affiliated tribe members and leaders attended the reading of the full proclamation to replace Columbus Day with Indigenous Peoples Day — a proposal originally brought by Chamber of Commerce Executive Director and Choctaw Nation member, David Scott.

    “We are only able to learn from our past when we learn the facts,” said Eastwood. “I hope this step will be the beginning of our learning from history when it comes to the role indigenous peoples played and still play in the creation of this wonderful country.”

    He added this was an opportunity to put past differences aside because “Anadarko does best when we work together.”

    7. Olympia, Washington

    Replacing that contentious federal holiday’s spot on October’s second Monday, Indigenous Peoples Day will henceforth be celebrated by the City of Olympia, answering a request filed in October last year. An August 17th rally at Heritage Park saw member representation from the Squaxin, Nisqually, Quileute, and Quinault Nations deliver speeches and join in traditional songs to an audience of nearly 150 people standing in support of the measure.

    Mayor Stephen Buxbaum’s proclamation, read by Mayor Pro Tem Nathaniel James, in part noted the city’s responsibility to “oppose the systemic racism toward Indigenous People in the United States, which perpetuates poverty and income inequality, and exacerbates disproportionate health, education, and social stability.”

    Indigenous Peoples Day is meant to celebrate the contributions of the Squaxin, Nisqually, Quinault, Puyallup, Chehalis, Suquamish, and Duwamish tribal nations and their influence on the city.

    The City of Olympia does not recognize or celebrate Columbus Day.

    8. Alpena, Michigan

    At the beginning of September, Alpena Mayor Matt Waligora proclaimed October 12th would be called Indigenous Peoples Day to facilitate a productive relationship based on mutual respect and trust between the city, the Saginaw Chippewa Tribe, and all indigenous people in the region.   

    The proclamation was to be read during the celebration of the cultural and societal contributions of the area’s indigenous peoples, taking place over what is traditionally Columbus Day weekend, October 9th through the 12th.

    *  *  *

    These eight cities follow Minneapolis and Seattle in creating official recognition for Indigenous Peoples Day. Oklahoma City attempted to pass a similar measure unsuccessfully in September, but plan to try again on October 13th — the day after Columbus Day.

    *  *  *
    Meanwhile, in Detroit, someone took an ax to the forehead of a Christopher Columbus bust (with fake blood spilling out).

  • AsiaPac Stocks Tumble After Chinese Trade Data Signals Growing Global Growth Scare

    After an initial knee-jerk reaction (perhaps on better-than-expected exports – signalling perhaps the devaluation 'worked), AsiaPac stocks are tumbling rapidly as the 11th monthly decline in imports (down a stunning 17.7% YoY in Yuan terms) signaling significant domestic weakness (and thus a larger drag on global growth).

    As Bloomberg reports,

    China’s imports extended the longest losing streak in six years, underscoring the headwinds to global growth from a rebalancing in the world’s second-largest economy and declining commodity prices.

     

    Imports plunged 17.7 percent in yuan terms in September, widening from a 14.3 percent decrease in August and an 11th straight decline. Overseas shipments fell 1.1 percent in September in yuan terms, the customs administration said Tuesday, compared with a 6.1 percent drop in August. The trade surplus was 376.2 billion yuan ($59.4 billion).

     

     

    The import slide reflects the pressure China’s economic slowdown is having on global growth and this year’s plunge in commodity prices. On the export side, signs of stabilization suggest improved external demand and offers the first indication that the People’s Bank of China’s surprise devaluation of the yuan in August is giving a boost to competitiveness.

     

    "Import growth remained sluggish, suggesting weakening domestic demand, particularly investment demand," said Yang Zhao, China economist at Nomura Holdings Inc. in Hong Kong. "We maintain our view that GDP growth will decline to 6.7 percent in the third quarter.”

    Of course, policymakers are out with more promises…

    • *DJ China Customs Spokesman: Weaker Yuan to Help Boost Exports

    Which we are sill sound an awful lot like currency manipulation to The US Congress.

  • Inspired By Game Of Thrones, TEPCO Resumes Building "Ice Wall" Around Fukushima

    14 Months after abandoning the "Game of Thrones"-esque frozen-water-wall containment plan for Fukushima, Bloomberg reports that TEPCO expects to begin freezing a soil barrier by the end of the year to stop a torrent of water entering the wrecked Fukushima nuclear facility, moving a step closer to fulfilling a promise the Japanese government made to the international community more than two years ago. Officials noted, rather uninspiringly, the frozen wall, along with other measures, "should be able to resolve the contaminated water issues before the Olympic games."

     

    When they unveiled this "Pacific-Rim-like' 1.4km long ice-wall a year ago, we snarkily wished them luck, questioning their sanity. Of course, we got a hint when TEPCO admitted that "we have yet to form an ice plug because we can’t get the temperature low enough to freeze the water."

     

    At the time, there was no Plan B – though we noted that 'wasting' JPY 32 billion on the project so far was likely helping GDP.

    But now Plan B appears to be the same as failed Plan A… (as Bloomberg reports)

    “In the last half-year we have made significant progress in water treatment,” Akira Ono, chief of the Fukushima Dai-Ichi plant, said Friday during a tour of the facility north of Tokyo. The frozen wall, along with other measures, “should be able to resolve the contaminated water issues before the Olympic games.”

     

    Solving the water management problems would be a major milestone, but Tokyo Electric is still faced with a number of challenges at the site. The company must still remove highly radioactive debris from inside three wrecked reactors, a task for which no applicable technology exists. The entire facility must eventually be dismantled.

     

    Currently, about 300 metric tons of water flow into the reactor building daily from the nearby hills. Tepco, as the nation’s biggest utility is called, has struggled to decommission the reactors while also grappling with the buildup of contaminated water.

     

    Even four years after the meltdown and despite promises from policymakers, water management remains one of Tepco’s biggest challenges in coping with the fallout of Japan’s worst nuclear disaster.

     

    The purpose of the ice wall — a barrier of soil 30 meters (98 feet) deep and 1,500 meters long which is frozen to -30 Celsius (-22 Fahrenheit) — is to prevent groundwater from flooding reactor basements and becoming contaminated.

     

     

    It is a very important issue for the public, and good water management is needed for Tepco to restore the public’s trust.”

     

    The proposed ice wall has never been done on such a scale, and there could be operational issues due to the complicated nature of the project, according to Lake Barrett, former head of the U.S. Department of Energy’s Office of Civilian Nuclear Waste Management.

    *  *  *

    Prime Minister Shinzo Abe promised in 2013 that the government would take the lead in resolving the water management issues at the Fukushima site ahead of the 2020 Tokyo Olympics. Two years later, hundreds of tons of water continue to pour into the reactor building, while tainted water at other parts of the site overflows into the ocean.

  • Paul Craig Roberts: A Decisive Shift In The Power Balance Has Occurred

    Submitted by Paul Craig Roberts,

    The world is beginning to realize that a seachange in world affairs occured on September 28 when President Putin of Russia stated in his UN speech that Russia can no longer tolerate Washington’s vicious, stupid, and failed policies that have unleashed chaos, which is engulfing the Middle East and now Europe.

    Two days later, Russia took over the military situation in Syria and began the destruction of the Islamic State forces.

    Perhaps among Obama’s advisors there are a few who are not drowning in hubris and can understand this seachange. Sputnik news reports that some high-level security advisors to Obama have advised him to withdraw US military forces from Syria and give up his plan to overthrow Assad. They advised Obama to cooperate with Russia in order to stop the refugee flow that is overwhelming Washington’s vassals in Europe. The influx of unwanted peoples is making Europeans aware of the high cost of enabling US foreign policy. Advisors have told Obama that the idiocy of the neoconservatives’ policies threaten Washington’s empire in Europe.

    But Washington’s impulsive use of power is a danger to America and to the world. Arrogant Washington politicians and crazed neoconservatives are screaming that the US must shoot down Russian aircraft that are operating against the US-supplied forces that have brought death and destruction to Syria, unleashing millions of refugees on Europe, in Washington’s effort to overthrow the Syrian government.

     

    Even my former CSIS colleague, Zbigniew Brzezinski, normally a sensible if sometimes misguided person, has written in the Financial Times that Washington should deliver an ultimatum to Russia to “cease and desist from military actions that directly affect American assets.” By “American assets,” Brzezinski means the jihadist forces that Washington has sicced on Syria.

     

    Brzezinski’s claim that “Russia must work with, not against, the US in Syria” is false. The fact of the matter is that “the US must work with, not against Russia in Syria,” as Russia controls the situation, is in accordance with international law, and is doing the right thing.

     

    Ash Carter, the US Secretary for War, repeats Brzezinski’s demand. He declared that Washington is not prepared to cooperate with Russia’s “tragically flawed” and “mistaken strategy” that frustrates Washington’s illegal attempt to overthrow the Syrian government with military violence.

     

    Washington’s position is that only Washington decides and that Washington intends to unleash yet more chaos on the world in the hope that it reaches Russia.

     

    I guess no one in hubristic and arrogant Washington was listening when Putin said in his UN speech on September 28: “We can no longer tolerate the state of affairs in the world.”

     

    The intolerable state of affairs is the chaos that Washington has brought to the Middle East, chaos that threatens to expand into all countries with Muslim populations, and chaos from which millions of refugees are flooding into Europe.

     

    Not satisfied with threatening Russia with war, Washington is preparing to send US Navy ships inside the 12-nautical-mile territorial limit of islands created by China’s land reclamation project. The Navy Times reports that three Pentagon officials have said on background that “approval of the mission is imminent.”

     

    So here we have the US government gratuitously and provocatively threatening two nuclear powers. The Washington warmongers try to pretend that land reclamation is “an act of regional aggression” and that Washington is just upholding international law by protecting “freedom of navigation.”

     

    By “freedom of navigation,” Washington means Washington’s ability to control all sea lanes. After all of Washington’s violations of international law and war crimes during the last 14 years, Washington’s claim to be protecting international law is hilarious.

     

    Lt. Gen. Michael Flynn, a former director of the US Defense Intelligence Agency, the Pentagon’s intelligence organization, said that Washington needs to understand that “Russia also has foreign policy; Russia also has a national security strategy” and stop crossing Russia’s “red lines.”  Gen. Flynn thus joins with Patrick J. Buchanan as two voices of sense and sensibility in Washington. Together they stand against the arrogance and hubris that will destroy us.

    Several commentators, such as Mike Whitney and Stephen Lendman, have concluded, correctly, that there is nothing that Washington can do about Russian actions against the Islamic State. The neoconservatives’ plan for a UN no-fly zone over Syria in order to push out the Russians is a pipedream. No such resolution will come out of the UN. Indeed, the Russians have already established a de facto no-fly zone.

    Putin, without issuing any verbal threats or engaging in any name-calling, has decisively shifted the power balance, and the world knows it.

    Washington’s response consists of name-calling, bluster and more lies, some of which is echoed by some of Washington’s ever more doubtful vassals. The only effect is to demonstrate Washington’s impotence.

    If Obama has any sense, he will dismiss from his government the neoconservative morons who have squandered Washington’s power, and he will focus instead on holding on to Europe by working with Russia to destroy, rather than to sponsor, the terrorism in the Middle East that is overwhelming Europe with refugees.

    If Obama cannot admit a mistake, the United States will continue to lose credibility and prestige around the world.

  • "Now Is Not The Time To Raise Rates" China Demands The Fed Live Up To Its "Global Responsibilities"

    With all eyes on China's Trade Data (due out shortly), propagandists aplenty are out en masse to explain a) China's slowing economy is a "healthy rebalancing" (in other words, please do not pull your capital, or this will get very serious), b) The Fed should not raise rates (or we will bury them in Treasury selling and force QE4), and c) Credit demand is extremely weak (in other words, no matter what supply is jammed down the banks' throats, it won't reach the real economy).

     

    The PBOC fixed the Yuan massively stronger (+0.28% – the most since Nov 2014)

    • *CHINA SETS YUAN REFERENCE RATE AT 6.3231 AGAINST U.S. DOLLAR
    • *CHINA STRENGTHENS YUAN FIXING MOST SINCE NOV. 2014

     

    and injects more liquidty:

    • *PBOC TO INJECT 40B YUAN WITH 7-DAY REVERSE REPOS: TRADER

    After 8 straight days of stronger fixes, On- and Off-shore Yuan is trading back at 2-month highs (having retraced most of the August devaluation) and notably erased all of the spread between the two rates…

     

    Technicians note that CNY has broken below the 50DMA and retraced 50% of the August rally, targeting 6.30 as the next support….

     

    The USD is notably stronger (against Asian FX) once again as Asia opens

    *  *  *

    As Reuters reports, The Fed just got its marching orders from China…

    Now is not the right time for the United States to raise interest rates, given the global economic situation, China's Finance Minister Lou Jiwei said in an interview published in the China Business News on Monday.

     

    Speaking on the sidelines of the annual meeting of the World Bank and International Monetary Fund in Lima, Lou said developed economies were to blame for the global economic malaise because their slow recoveries were not creating enough demand.

     

    "The United States isn't at the point of raising interest rates yet and under its global responsibilities it can't raise rates," Lou was quoted as saying.

     

    The finance minister said the United States "should assume global responsibilities" because of the dollar's status as a global currency.

    But for those hoping (and praying) for moar stimulus from China to save the world, think again. As Bloomberg reports, while the QE-esque CAR program announced overnight may free up some lending "room" – there is no end-demand at anything but off-market rates (as the Chinese reach peak debt saturation like the rest of the developed world.

    PBOC Academic Warns of Falling Borrowing Demand in Real Economy

     

    Some manufacturers in China are cutting capacity and reducing borrowing demand amid increasing downward pressure in economy, Wang Yong, a professor at the People’s Bank of China’s Zhengzhou training school, writes in Securities Times.

     

    Weak demand in credit market has “severely” affected lendings and some banks are forced to reduce credit lines

     

    Policies should work on both credit supply and demand

     

    Chinese central bank’s expansion in re-lending program could increase commercial banks’ lending ability

     

    Regulators need to build confidence in cos. to boost investment and borrowing demands

    Despite The PBOC demanding yesterday that "China's market correction is nearly over" which was 'confirmed' by panic-manipulation in Chinese stocks yesterday…

     

    But are sliding modestly in the pre-open…

    • *FTSE CHINA A50 INDEX FUTURES FALL 0.2% IN SINGAPORE
    • *CHINA'S CSI 300 STOCK-INDEX FUTURES FALL 0.3% TO 3,420

    Earnings expectations continue to collapse…

     

    As SCMP reports, as the authorities on the mainland moved to project confidence in the country's economy and stock markets, investors yesterday picked up on the positive stance and bought shares to move the markets more than 3 per cent higher.

    Hopes are high for more official measures to boost the country's economy after the Communist Party said it would be holding a key meeting from October 26 to 29 to map out the 13th five-year plan.

     

     

    A Politburo statement said the plenum would develop a strategy for building a well-off society and set the direction for the nation's socioeconomic development.

     

     

    But analysts said the mini rally would not be sustained without significant policy support in the new five-year plan.

     

    "Personally, I do not see much room for further growth in the share market," said Eric Wu, an analyst in Shanghai. "It is crucial to see if this meeting will break through the reform strategies laid out since the plenum in 2012."

     

     

    "We need to see a more detailed ownership reform plan for the state-owned enterprises, or a tax-reduction plan for emerging industries. If neither of the two catalysts comes into being after the party plenum, the current rebound will be small in size and unsustainable," the note said.

    ut all the excitement and re-promises from the leadership has done nothing but drive the bloody chinese to relever!!

    • *SHANGHAI MARGIN DEBT BALANCE RISES TO ONE-MONTH HIGH
    • Balance rose 3%, biggest gain since Dec. 8

     

    And finally, just in case you were still believing the mainstream media mantra that "China doesn't matter" – it does!!

     

    On a side note, Aussie miners are taking it on the chin again (just a shame their rugby team didn't last weekend)

     

    Charts: JPMorgan and Bloomberg

  • The Fingerpointing Begins: House Armed Services Chairman Slams Obama's Syria Policy

    Yesterday we showed the full transcript of Barack Obama’s surreal, confrontational, stuttering 60 Minutes interview, specifically the part dealing with the US foreign policy fiasco in Syria, and by implication, with Vladimir Putin.

    For those who missed it, please watch it here. Below we have transcribed the key section which is must read for anyone curious what it looks like when the president of a formerly undisputed superpower of a unipolar world, is clutching at straws (or as far left website Vox put it, delivering “sick burns“), and in this case, clutching at the place where the teleprompter stood for advice on how to make Putin appear to be the loser in two conflicts which have either expanded Russia’s geographic territory or have boosted Russian sphere of influence by orders of magnitude in the middle ease.

    Steve Kroft: A year ago when we did this interview, there was some saber-rattling between the United States and Russia on the Ukrainian border. Now it’s also going on in Syria. You said a year ago that the United States– America leads. We’re the indispensible nation. Mr. Putin seems to be challenging that leadership.

     

    President Barack Obama: In what way? Let– let’s think about this– let– let–

     

    Steve Kroft: Well, he’s moved troops into Syria, for one. He’s got people on the ground. Two, the Russians are conducting military operations in the Middle East for the first time since World War II–

     

    President Barack Obama: So that’s–

     

    Steve Kroft: —bombing the people– that we are supporting.

     

    President Barack Obama: So that’s leading, Steve? Let me ask you this question. When I came into office, Ukraine was governed by a corrupt ruler who was a stooge of Mr. Putin. Syria was Russia’s only ally in the region. And today, rather than being able to count on their support and maintain the base they had in Syria, which they’ve had for a long time, Mr. Putin now is devoting his own troops, his own military, just to barely hold together by a thread his sole ally.

    And in Ukraine–

     

    Steve Kroft: He’s challenging your leadership, Mr. President. He’s challenging your leadership–

     

    President Barack Obama: Well Steve, I got to tell you, if you think that running your economy into the ground and having to send troops in in order to prop up your only ally is leadership, then we’ve got a different definition of leadership. My definition of leadership would be leading on climate change, an international accord that potentially we’ll get in Paris. My definition of leadership is mobilizing the entire world community to make sure that Iran doesn’t get a nuclear weapon. And with respect to the Middle East, we’ve got a 60-country coalition that isn’t suddenly lining up around Russia’s strategy. To the contrary, they are arguing that, in fact, that strategy will not work.

     

    Steve Kroft: My point is– was not that he was leading, my point is that he was challenging your leadership. And he has very much involved himself in the situation. Can you imagine anything happening in Syria of any significance at all without the Russians now being involved in it and having a part of it?

     

    President Barack Obama: But that was true before. Keep in mind that for the last five years, the Russians have provided arms, provided financing, as have the Iranians, as has Hezbollah.

     

    Steve Kroft: But they haven’t been bombing and they haven’t had troops on the ground–

     

    President Barack Obama: And the fact that they had to do this is not an indication of strength, it’s an indication that their strategy did not work.

     

    Steve Kroft: You don’t think–

     

    President Barack Obama: You don’t think that Mr. Putin would’ve preferred having Mr. Assad be able to solve this problem without him having to send a bunch of pilots and money that they don’t have?

     

    Steve Kroft: Did you know he was going to do all this when you met with him in New York?

     

    President Barack Obama: Well, we had seen– we had pretty good intelligence. We watch–

     

    Steve Kroft: So you knew he was planning to do it.

     

    President Barack Obama: We knew that he was planning to provide the military assistance that Assad was needing because they were nervous about a potential imminent collapse of the regime.

     

    Steve Kroft: You say he’s doing this out of weakness. There is a perception in the Middle East among our adversaries, certainly and even among some of our allies that the United States is in retreat, that we pulled our troops out of Iraq and ISIS has moved in and taken over much of that territory. The situation in Afghanistan is very precarious and the Taliban is on the march again. And ISIS controls a large part of Syria.

     

    President Barack Obama: I think it’s fair to say, Steve, that if–

     

    Steve Kroft: It’s– they– let me just finish the thought. They say your–

     

    President Barack Obama: You’re–

     

    Steve Kroft: —they say you’re projecting a weakness, not a strength–

     

    President Barack Obama: –you’re saying “they,” but you’re not citing too many folks.

    While there’s much more humiliation piled upon embarrassment for the president (or as a ranked democrat put it previously, handing over Syria to Putin on a silver platter is “letting him hang himself”) we’ll stop there and instead cite one highly placed “folk” who in the aftermath of Obama’s gruesome performance, decided to provide Russian media with just the soundbites they will need to make Putin’s triumph complete, when the Chairman of the House Armed Services, Mac Thornberry, slammed the Obama administration’s policy on Syria in an interview published Monday. 

    Thornberry called the White House’s recently canceled $500 million program to train and equip 5,400 Syrian rebels “a complete failure”, The Hill reports, and said the president has not yet presented any plan that has any signs of making a difference in the region. 

    “As a matter of fact, it’s going the other way,” he told the Times Record News. “As time goes on, the options for Syria get worse and worse. I think it’s getting harder and harder to see a way forward here.”

    Furthermore, as we have repeatedly warned, the chairman is concerned about Russian airstrikes in Syria to shore up Syrian President Bashar Assad and the possibility of an accident escalating into something bigger, the paper reported.

    He said Russia’s involvement in the conflict would only worsen sectarian fighting in the region.  “It is only going to inflame the Sunni versus Shia aspects of this conflict and may drive some of the Sunni countries to ratchet it up,” he said.

     

    But the peak in embarrassment came with Thornberry told the paper that he could not recall anytime during his 20 years in Congress where Russia or any other country told the U.S. when and where American forces could fly in another country.

    There  is always a first time for everything, and just in case Mac didn’t read our article from Friday, the same week as Russia telling the US where to fly, China told the US not only are US warships not welcome next to the disputed islands in the South China Sea, but that China will not tolerate any provocations on its territorial waters. 

    Perhaps the only left way for Obama to save face will be to start World War III? Just think of the upside in the S&P – all those broken Keynesian windows…
     

  • Meet The Ghostly Iranian Spymaster Running Every Mid-East Proxy War: "He Is Everywhere But Nowhere"

    Everyone likes a good ghost story every now and again and as it turns out, at the other end of the rabbit hole that is Syria’s bloody civil war, you come face to face with a shadowy Iranian general the mere mention of whom is enough to send chills down the spines of intelligence operatives the world over.

    Earlier in September, conservative talk show host Hugh Hewitt had an awkward exchange with Donald Trump on air:

    Hewitt: Are you familiar with Gen. Soleimani?

    Trump: Yes, but go ahead, give me a little, go ahead, tell me.

    Hewitt: He runs the Quds Forces.

    Trump: Yes, okay, right.

    Hewitt: Do you expect his behavior..

    Trump: The Kurds.. have been horribly mistreated by us.

    Hewitt: No, not the Kurds, the Quds Forces, the Iranian Revolutionary Guard Quds Forces.

    Trump: Yes, yes.

    Hewitt: The bad guys.

    Trump: Right.

    Here’s how The New Yorker describes Hewitt’s “bad guys”: “The force is the sharp instrument of Iranian foreign policy, roughly analogous to a combined C.I.A. and Special Forces.”

    Their commander is Gen. Qassem Soleimani and if you believe the legend, he is a spy among spies – a general among generals – a kind of ghost story that intelligence agents might tell their kids around a campfire.

    Weeks ago, we began to suggest that it was Soleimani who orchestrated the Russian-Iranian incursion in Syria. That now looks to have been the case as we explained in “Mid-East Coup: As Russia Pounds Militant Targets, Iran Readies Ground Invasions.” But before we delve further into the General’s role in Syria, we’ll first give you a taste of the backround story behind a man who many Iranians look upon with near religious reverence.

    There are competing accounts regarding Soleimaini’s birthplace. Consider the following from the American Enterprise Institute

    “According to the US Department of State, Suleimani was born in the city of Qom on March 11, 1957. Persian-language sources contest this claim, identifying the village of Rabord in Kerman Province in south-eastern Iran as Suleimani’s place of birth[9]–which has significant implications for understanding Suleimani. Qom’s population is centered around religion, including theologians and seminary students from all over the world, along with pilgrims and those who make their living from the pilgrimage industry. In contrast, the mountain village of Rabord in remote Kerman–closer to the Afghan border–has a tribal structure, which would have prepared Suleimani for operating in tribal societies such as those in Afghanistan and Iraq.” 

    Keep that last bolded passage in mind. 

    When Soleimani was a child, he and a relative left home to earn money for their fathers who they feared would be arrested in connection with money their families owed to the Shah. Soleimani worked menial jobs until 1979 when, after the Shah was overthrown by Ayatollah Ruhollah Khomeini, he joined the newly-created Revolutionary Guard. When Saddam invaded Iran, Soleimani was sent to the frontlines as a water boy (literally) and ended up staying there until the end of the war. Here are a few excerpts from The New Yorker’s account:

    Suleimani earned a reputation for bravery and élan, especially as a result of reconnaissance missions he undertook behind Iraqi lines. He returned from several missions bearing a goat, which his soldiers slaughtered and grilled. “Even the Iraqis, our enemy, admired him for this,” a former Revolutionary Guard officer who defected to the United States told me. On Iraqi radio, Suleimani became known as “the goat thief.” In recognition of his effectiveness, Alfoneh said, he was put in charge of a brigade from Kerman, with men from the gyms where he lifted weights.

     

    The Iranian Army was badly overmatched, and its commanders resorted to crude and costly tactics. In “human wave” assaults, they sent thousands of young men directly into the Iraqi lines, often to clear minefields, and soldiers died at a precipitous rate. Suleimani seemed distressed by the loss of life. Before sending his men into battle, he would embrace each one and bid him goodbye; in speeches, he praised martyred soldiers and begged their forgiveness for not being martyred himself. When Suleimani’s superiors announced plans to attack the Faw Peninsula, he dismissed them as wasteful and foolhardy. The former Revolutionary Guard officer recalled seeing Suleimani in 1985, after a battle in which his brigade had suffered many dead and wounded. He was sitting alone in a corner of a tent. “He was very silent, thinking about the people he’d lost,” the officer said.

    Iran, bitter at the West’s role in helping Saddam during the war (yes, that’s right, the US has been using the same flawed Mid-East foreign policy for decades wherein the only thing that matters is expediency, leading directly a disastrous brand of geopolitical myopia) but having come away with a lesson in the futility of open warfare, set out (again in The New Yorker’s words) to “build the capacity to wage asymmetrical warfare—attacking stronger powers indirectly, outside of Iran.” The Quds Force was born.

    You can read more details of Soleimani’s exploits in the articles cited and linked above including how he battled the Taliban on the Afghan border, but for brevity’s sake, suffice to say he became the Quds commander in 1998. From then on, he capitalized on various opportunities to build the alliances that Tehran needed in order to ensure that the regional balance of power didn’t tip too far in the direction of Riyadh and the Sunnis. In one famous case, he allegedly tried to orchestrate the assassination of the Saudi ambassador in a Washington DC restaurant. From Wikileaks:

    Designated today pursuant to Executive Order (E.O.) 13224 for acting for or on behalf of the IRGC-QF were: Manssor Arbabsiar, a naturalized U.S. citizen holding both Iranian and U.S. passports who acted on behalf of the IRGC-QF to pursue the failed plot to assassinate the Saudi ambassador; IRGC-QF commander Qasem Soleimani.

    He also coordinated heavily with the US in the wake of 9/11 before Bush’s “axis of evil” comment soured the relationship at which point the General purportedly began sponsoring attacks on US troops. He formed stronger relations with Hezbollah and developed powerful Shiite militias in Iraq on the way to becoming what one former Iraqi official described as “the most powerful man in the country, without question.” He is even feared by the Peshmerga, who aren’t exactly known for cowardice. Sound far fetched? Consider the following short clip: 

    Don’t forget that Russia and Syria just recently sealed an intelligence sharing deal which is almost invariably the precursor to Russian bombing raids in support of Iraq’s Shiite militias as they battle ISIS.

    And as for who’s arming the Shiite Houthis in Yemen against the Saudis: you guessed it, Soleimani.

    As for Syria, he has quite simply been running the show for years. As one American official told The New Yorker two years ago, “he’s running the war [in Syria] himself.” Here’s an excerpt from a 2009 secret diplomatic cable (again, via Wikileaks):

    The public showcasing of these three visits  contrasted with the secrecy with which Iranian Revolutionary  Guard Commander/al-Quds Force Ghassem Soleimani conducted  his.  Reportedly accompanying Jalili, Soleimani returned to  Damascus after a long absence, perhaps a reflection of  lingering tensions between Iran and Syria that erupted after  the February 2008 assassination of Hizballah military  strategist Imad Mugniyah in the Syrian capital.  Al Hayat  Bureau Chief Ibrahim Hamidi (strictly protect) spoke very reluctantly about Soleimani’s presence in Damascus, saying  only that “he was here,” and “when he visits, it’s usually  significant.” 

    The problem, in Soleimani’s own words, is that “the Syrian Army is useless!” And so in light of that rather blunt assessment, the General appears to have gotten fed up with SAA incompetence leading directly to the following:

    Back in June, the commander of Iran’s Quds Force, Qasem Soleimaini, visited a town north of Latakia on the frontlines of Syria’s protracted civil war. Following that visit, he promised that Tehran and Damascus were set to unveil a new strategy that would “surprise the world.” 

     

    Just a little over a month later, Soleimani – in violation of a UN travel ban – visited Russia and held meetings with The Kremlin. The Pentagon now says those meetings were “very important” in accelerating the timetable for Russia’s involvement in Syria. The General allegedly made another visit to Moscow in September.

    Here is Reuters with more color on what exactly took place when Soleimani flew to Moscow:

    At a meeting in Moscow in July, a top Iranian general unfurled a map of Syria to explain to his Russian hosts how a series of defeats for President Bashar al-Assad could be turned into victory – with Russia’s help.

     

    Major General Qassem Soleimani’s visit to Moscow was the first step in planning for a Russian military intervention that has reshaped the Syrian war and forged a new Iranian-Russian alliance in support of Assad.

     

    As Russian warplanes bomb rebels from above, the arrival of Iranian special forces for ground operations underscores several months of planning between Assad’s two most important allies, driven by panic at rapid insurgent gains.

     

    Senior regional sources say Soleimani has already been overseeing ground operations against insurgents in Syria and is now at the heart of planning for the new Russian- and Iranian-backed offensive.

     

    That expands his regional role as the battlefield commander who has also steered the fight in neighboring Iraq by Iranian-backed Shi’ite militia against Islamic State.

     

    His Moscow meeting outlined the deteriorating situation in Syria, where rebel advances toward the coast were posing a danger to the heartland of Assad’s Alawite sect, where Russia maintains its only Mediterranean naval base in Tartous.

     

    “Soleimani put the map of Syria on the table. The Russians were very alarmed, and felt matters were in steep decline and that there were real dangers to the regime. The Iranians assured them there is still the possibility to reclaim the initiative,” a senior regional official said. “At that time, Soleimani played a role in assuring them that we haven’t lost all the cards.”

     

    Three senior officials in the region say Soleimani’s July trip was preceded by high-level Russian-Iranian contacts that produced political agreement on the need to pump in new support for Assad as his losses accelerated.

     

    The decision for a joint Iranian-Russian military effort in Syria was taken at a meeting between Russia’s foreign minister and Khamenei a few months ago, said a senior official of a country in the region, involved in security matters.

     

    “Soleimani, assigned by Khamenei to run the Iranian side of the operation, traveled to Moscow to discuss details. And he also traveled to Syria several times since then,” the official said.

     

    The Russian government says its Syria deployment came as the result of a formal request from Assad, who himself laid out the problems facing the Syrian military in stark terms in July, saying it faced a manpower problem.

     

    Khamenei also sent a senior envoy to Moscow to meet President Vladimir Putin, another senior regional official said. “Putin told him ‘Okay we will intervene. Send Qassem Soleimani’. 

    And the rest, as they say, is history in Syria.

    That, in brief, is the story of Iran’s spymaster general who not only controls Iraqi politics and serves as the supreme commander for the country’s various Shiite militias, but who is also the puppet master for the Houthis and Hezbollah. Now, he’s orchestrated Russian air support for Iran’s ally in Damascus. 

    Everything laid out above would obviously be intriguing enough on its own but consider one last excerpt, this one from BBC:

    Switch on the television in Iran these days and it won’t be long before you see General Qasem Soleimani.

    The once reclusive head of the Revolutionary Guards’ elite Quds Force has emerged from a lifetime in the shadows directing covert operations abroad, to achieve almost celebrity status in Iran.

     

    The man who, until a couple of years ago most Iranians would not have recognised on the street, is now the subject of documentaries, news reports and even pop songs.

     

    One music video widely shared in Iran was made by Shia militia fighters in Iraq. It shows soldiers spray-painting the general’s portrait on a wall and parading in front of it while stirring music plays in the background.

     

    Inside Iran a campaign has started among conservative bloggers for Gen Soleimani to go into politics. They have dubbed him Iran’s most honest and least corrupt politician and are calling for him to put his uniform aside and stand for president in 2017.

    Is Soleimani set to make a play for the Iranian presidency? And if so, what comes next? That is, what use is the Ayatollah in the face of the most revered general in the country who all at once embodies everything the Supreme Leader stands for while also possessing a steely resolve and measured (or maybe “calculated” is the better word) approach to diplomacy? Finally, what happens if the man who, in the West anyway, is generally considered to be the number one agent for state sponsored terror becomes president shortly after the nuclear deal?

    Perhaps this is simply an example of a decorated war verteran around which a legend has grown that bears no resemblance to reality. 

    Or perhaps – just perhaps – there’s something bigger going on and between all of the Moscow versus Washington, East Vs. West, Cold War 2.0 headlines everyone simply missed it. And if there is a bigger picture here, will we even get to see it play out, or will Soleimani simply recede back into the shadows to run the show from behind the curtain?

    And on that note, we close with one quote, and one clip…

    A senior US official in 2011: “He is indeed like Keyser Soze. He is everywhere, but nowhere.”

  • "We've Never Seen Anything Like This" – Dumbfounded Central Bankers Brace For "Rolling Series Of Crises"

    One of the most important things to grasp about the Fed’s September (in)decision is that the FOMC had no viable options when it came to emerging markets. 

    The combination of low commodity prices, falling demand, slumping global trade, a decelerating China, and the yuan devaluation have all served to accelerate capital outflows for EM and there’s certainly an argument to be made for the contention that a Fed hike and a subsequent spike in the dollar would be just about the last thing EM needs when it comes to stopping the bleeding. 

    That said, there’s another line of argumentation which says the Fed missed its window to hike long ago and so now, all they’re doing in the Eccles Building is fostering continued uncertainty which is also causing capital to flow out of EM. 

    In the simplest terms possible: no one really has any idea whether it’s best to rip the band-aid off or not, and adding to the confusion is the fact that the Fed has now telegraphed its own uncertainty by explicitly acknowledging the reflexivity problem, meaning EMs (and everyone else for that matter) are desperately trying to figure out how to incorporate themselves into their own outlook for what the Fed may or may not do. 

    Here’s how one former Treasury economist framed the latter argument:

    ”Short-end rates move higher as the Fed gets closer to hiking, and that causes the dollar to strengthen, and that causes global funding stresses. They are creating the conditions that are causing the external environment to be weak, and then they say they can’t hike because of those same conditions that they have created.” 

    Obviously this is an impossible quagmire. There’s no way out and the decision is just going to get more difficult with each passing FOMC meeting. It’s made all the more convoluted by the fact that not hiking sends a negative message about the US economy, thus imperiling domestic risk assets but hiking could send EM over the edge … or maybe not… or who knows. 

    The wording there is no accident. It’s literally that indeterminate.

    That’s the problem facing the world’s EM central bankers and as you can see from the following, everyone is simply dumbfounded. 

    Via The New York Times:

    After a week of discussions [in Lima], bankers and policy makers agreed that stemming the rush of investments from emerging markets was one of the most important challenges facing the global economy. But there was little agreement on how to actually do that.

     

    On official panels, in closed-room sessions and over drinks in Lima restaurants, market participants struggled to come to grips with the persistent flows of money escaping emerging-market stocks and bonds in search of safer investment shores.

     

    “We have never seen something like this,” said Hung Tran, a senior executive at the Institute of International Finance, a trade group for global banks. Mr. Tran said that he was expecting net outflows from emerging markets to be around $800 billion for this year and next — by far the largest amount since institutions began investing in these markets in the late 1980s.

     

    The fear is that these numbers could increase substantially, especially if China’s currency weakens further. That could result in a rolling series of emerging-market crises.

     

    At the root of the debate has been whether the Federal Reserve’s decision last month to hold interest rates near zero has increased investor confidence in emerging markets or hurt it.

     

    Those on the front lines of the outflows of funds from the emerging markets — central bankers in countries like Brazil, Turkey, Malaysia and Mexico — are beginning to say that the Fed’s decision to hold back has actually made their job more difficult. That is because instead of staying put, or making new investments, investors are rushing out all the faster, spooked that the Fed has larger fears about China and other emerging markets.

     

    “I heard time and again this week from governors of emerging-market central banks that it’s not the hike itself that worries them,” said Jacob A. Frenkel, the chairman of J.P. Morgan Chase International and the former head of Israel’s central bank. “It’s how much and when it occurs.”

     

    “Delaying an increase in rates only increases volatility and uncertainty in emerging markets,” said David Fernandez, a currency and bond specialist at Barclays in Singapore. “Emerging markets will continue to see outflows.”

    As indicated above, there’s really no telling if these bankers’ assessments are correct. That is, it could very well be that when the hike actually comes – even if it’s a paltry and largely “symbolic” 25 bps – the resultant “tantrum” (so to speak) will be far worse than the what would have occurred if the Fed had just remained on hold and left everyone in suspense. But again, we won’t know until it’s too late. 

    Meanwhile, it’s important to remember that the fundamentals are awful across EM and at the end of the day, that’s the problem. The obsession with the Fed is unhealthy for any number of reasons, but when you’ve got a commodity space that’s in freefall, declining global growth and trade, and acute political crises that include a civil war in one key market (Turkey) and an intractable legislative stalemate in another (Brazil), it’s not entirely clear that even if the Fed were to somehow get everything just right going forward that the picture would materially change for the world’s emerging economies.

  • US Paradrops 50 Tons Of Ammo To Syrian Rebels

    As we noted over the weekend, the US has now thrown in the towel on the ill-fated (and that’s putting it lightly) strategy of training Syrian fighters and sending them into battle only to be captured and killed by other Syrian fighters who the US also trained. 

    The Pentagon’s effort to recruit 5,400 properly “vetted” anti-ISIS rebels by the end of the year ended in tears when the entire world laughed until it cried after word got out that only “four or five” of these fighters were actually still around. The rest are apparently either captured, killed, lost in the desert, or fighting for someone else. 

    This has cost the US taxpayer somewhere in the neighborhood of $40 million over the last six months.

    Because this latest program was such a public embarrassment, the Pentagon had to come up with a new idea to assist Syria’s “freedom fighters” now that they are fleeing under bombardment by the Russian air force only to be cut down by Hezbollah.

    The newest plan: helicopter ammo. No, really. The US has now resorted to dropping “tons” of ammo into the middle of nowhere and hoping the “right” people find it. 

    No, really. 

    Here’s CNN:

    U.S. military cargo planes gave 50 tons of ammunition to rebel groups overnight in northern Syria, using an air drop of 112 pallets as the first step in the Obama Administration’s urgent effort to find new ways to support those groups.

     

    Details of the air mission over Syria were confirmed by a U.S. official not authorized to speak publicly because the details have not yet been formally announced.

     

    C-17s, accompanied by fighter escort aircraft, dropped small arms ammunition and other items like hand grenades in Hasakah province in northern Syria to a coalition of rebels groups vetted by the US, known as the Syrian Arab Coalition.

    And here’s a bit more color from GOP mouthpiece Fox News:

    The ammunition originally was intended for the U.S. military’s “train and equip” mission, the official said. But that program was canceled last week. 

     

    “So now we are more focused on the ‘E’ [equip] part of the T&E [train & equip],” said the official, who described equipping Syrian Arabs as the focus of the new strategy against ISIS. 

     

    The Defense Department announced Friday that it was overhauling the mission to aid Syrian rebel fighters. After the program fell far short of its goals for recruiting and training Syrian fighters, the DOD said it would focus instead on providing “equipment packages and weapons to a select group of vetted leaders and their units so that over time they can make a concerted push into territory still controlled by ISIL.” 

     

    The shift also comes as Russia continues to launch airstrikes in Syria, causing tension with the U.S. amid suspicions Moscow is only trying to prop up Bashar Assad. 

     

    Col. Steve Warren, spokesman for the U.S.-led anti-ISIS coalition, confirmed that coalition forces conducted the airdrop on Sunday. 

     

    “The aircraft delivery includes small arms ammunition to resupply counter-ISIL ground forces so that they can continue operations against ISIL. All aircraft exited the drop area safely,” he said in a statement. All pallets successfully were recovered by friendly forces, a U.S. official said.

    Yes, “friendly forces.”

    Just let the hilarity of that sink in.

    The US just paradropped 50 tons of ammo on pallets into the most dangerous place on the face of the planet with no way of ensuring that it falls into the “right” hands (it goes without saying that the term “right” is meaningless there). Meanwhile, the Russians are dropping bombs on the same extremists who are set to receive the guns the US is dropping. 

    Of course if it does somehow fall into the “wrong” hands, it wouldn’t be the first time (see Mosul and recall the $500 billion worth of weapons Washington “misplaced” in Yemen) and as we said a few days ago, this is at least great news for the military-industrial complex. It means more “terrorist attacks” on U.S. “friends and allies”, and perhaps even on U.S. soil – all courtesy of the US government supplying the weapons – are imminent.

  • The Monetary Policy Dead-End

    Submitted by Christopher Dembik via SaxoBank,

    The Federal Reserve’s September status quo proved how difficult it is for central bankers to bring an end to the emergency measures they adopted in the aftermath of the 2007 crisis. Fed chief Janet Yellen’s hesitations and the market turmoil since August seem to validate that it is impossible to stop the accommodative monetary policy, unless you accept that doing so would trigger a new global crisis.
     
    Markets have been used to living in a protracted low rate environment, which led to a $57 trillion increase in public and private debt between 2008 and 2015. The surge of public debt represents almost half of this growth. It is the result of the fiscal stimulus and rescue measures taken to save the global banking system. In most advanced countries, household debt has also increased, except in the US where the financial situation of households has improved due to the default on real estate loans.
     
    The Fed is aware that raising interest rates too fast and too high could have the same effect as pressing the nuclear button. The whole system could collapse and it cannot be taken for granted that the central banks would be able to extinguish the fire this time. Their strike force has weakened because their balance sheets are exposed to market fluctuations and their credibility was seriously damaged because the measure they have taken have failed to strengthen the economy.
     
    The comeback of financial excesses
     
    The same mistakes that led to the financial crisis are now happening again worldwide. Access to credit, hardened for some time, is softening, leading to over-indebtedness and speculative bubbles. In the United States, first-time buyers can get loans covering the equivalent of  97% of their purchase. In the UK, the housing market moves the same way thanks to a first-purchase aid programme launched in 2012. It met such success that first-time buyers now account for half of real estate loans, a proportion not seen since 2000.
     
    David Cameron’s ambition to make the United Kingdom a country of owners is about to be achieved. An easier access to credit, particularly for first-time buyers, was systematically the political answer to favour the forgotten ones of globalisation.
     
    During the past 20 years, only two parts of the world’s population have seen their income grow: the Chinese and the top 1%. At the opposite end of the spectrum, the middle and working classes in western countries, as well as the poorer, have benefited sparsely from the economic spinoffs of the increasing commercial exchanges and trade restrictions removals.
     
    Their stagnating incomes urged them to borrow at attractive rates to maintain their living standards which, until now, allowed social peace. Nevertheless, this patch found by the political authorities is illusive. Should even a slight rise occur in interest rates, the most fragile households will prove unable to make their loan repayments, with consequent negative effects on demand and economic activity.
     
    Increasing income inequality
     
    Even if European GDP rises at 2% per year in the next few years, leading to a decrease of the unemployment rate, this growth would be nothing but a flash in the pan as the financial system hasn’t actually been drained and no serious anti-inequality fight has started. We live in the middle of a huge speculative bubble, possibly bigger than in 2007 because of the rise of shadow banking and quantitative easing by central banks.
     
    We can credit economist Thomas Piketty for picking on the figure of the rentier, as John Maynard Keynes did decades before, but his long-term analysis forgets the misdistribution of incomes, despite the fact that this element is enough to explain the last crisis and the one we are leaning towards.
     
    The 1914-1950 period enabled an unprecedented decrease of income inequality, but that movement was then brutally stopped. The wage differential between those who have access to knowledge and technology and those whose instruction is insufficient for highly qualified jobs is increasing and will increase with the digitalisation and robotisation of the economy. This increasing income inequality explains why demand, a traditional supporting factor in the advanced economies, is no longer sufficient to restart growth.
     
    There is no readymade solution available to impulse a better wealth distribution. Everyone knows that keeping interest rates low longer is not the solution. It prepares the ground for a new financial crisis. From this perspective, we certainly have to get used to the idea that capitalism will suffer more and more frequent upheavals, given the fact that households are not ready to accept a reduction of their consumption and that politicians are reluctant to focus on the core issues.

  • Dennis "Every Futures Broker's Best Friend" Gartman Does It Again (Again)

    While we haven’t heard the term “churn ’em and burn ’em” for a while, we can only assume that world-renowned newsletter-writer Dennis Gartman is long futures brokers (in commission terms) as in the space of just 3 trading days he has flip-flopped (once again) from “the most bullish I’ve been” to “you have to fade the oil market here” with WTI trading at almost the exact same price level. If you listen carefully, even CNBC’s Melissa Lee is starting to get the joke…

    October 7th 1226ET… “This Is The Most Bullish I’ve Been On Crude”

     

    October 12th 1700ET… “Fade The Crude Oil Market”

     

    Or in more visual terms…

     

    A glimpse at the following images is all one needs to know…

     

    Chart: Bloomberg

  • Thousands Of Angry Unpaid Chinese Workers Protest Shocking Bankruptcy Of Major Telecom Supplier

    When two weeks ago we reported what may have been the biggest layoff announcement in China’s current economic turmoil, after the second largest coal company Longmay Group announced it would lay off 100,000 – or about 40% of its entire workforce – while dramatic, the news did not shock too many. After all, China’s commodity fiasco (as a reminder, as we first reported, at current commodity prices more than half of Chinese companies do not generate enough cash flow to even cover their interest expense) is known to most and as such rationalization of this kind are only just starting: it is not exactly clear how China will deal with millions of suddenly unemployed workers, but it will only cross that bridge when it comes to it.

    Far more disturbing was today’s news from China’s prosperous, and far more high-tech, city of Shenzhen, and specifically major telecom supplier Fu Chang Electronic Technology Co. (also known as Fosunny), which supplies parts to domestic telecommunication giants such as Huawei Technologies Co and ZTE Corp. as well as international telecom companies like Vodafone and AT&T.

    The company made headlines last week after reports that it had told clients it was planning to list on the stock exchange. The news couldn’t have been more wrong because on Thursday, instead of going public, the company announced it would be going dark, when it issued a statement saying it was ceasing operations due to liquidity problems resulting from legal and debt issues.

    Even more surprising is that Fu Chang wouldn’t be the first – Fosunny is the third supplier of plastic parts to the telecom industry to go bankrupt in the past month, the Global Times said.

    The immediate outcome of the announcement, according to IBtimes, was that thousands of factory workers and suppliers staged protests outside the company’s Shenzhen office, where China Business News showed pictures of a line of police in helmets confronting a group of protesters.

    The Global Times says that protests started after the Thursday announcement and continued through the weekend, with thousands of people gathered outside the company in the Longgang District of Shenzhen, demanding compensation, according to Chen Li, whose company supplied packaging materials for Fu Chang.  Chen told the Global Times on Sunday that the impact on his company may be severe.

    “It might even lead to liquidity problems for our company and we might end up going out of business,” he said, adding that Fu Chang owes his company 2.51 million yuan ($395,600).

    Fu Chang owes banks 190 million yuan in debt and suppliers 270 million yuan, and it is two months behind on pay for its employees, the National Business Daily reported on Friday. The newspaper also said the shutdown would affect more than 3,800 employees and more than 300 suppliers. 

    In a troubling sign for China’s supposedly thriving telecom sector, Global Times cited experts as saying such firms “have seen their profit margins squeezed by rising labor costs in southern China, and a slowdown in both international and domestic demand. China’s smartphone sales contracted in the first half of this year, for the first time since 2009, while the country’s overall exports fell more than 8 percent in August, and more than 4 percent in September, compared to last year.”

    Labor experts told International Business Times recently that factory workers’ wages have risen in southern Guangdong province in particular, not least because the new generation of better-educated rural migrant workers — the mainstay of China’s labor force over recent decades — is less willing to do mindless production line work. As a result, Guangdong has seen some of its lower value-added companies close, and others move out to cheaper parts of Southeast Asia or inland parts of China.

    It is troubling (not so much for the business cycle which demands it but for China’s increasing lack of centralized control) that what was once taboo, namely Chinese corporations defaulting, has now become a practically daily occurrence.

    It is even more troubling that China’s cash flow weakness appears to have spread far more rapidly and broadly than even we anticipated, and is impacting industries which most had though would be immune from a hardish landing, if only in the beginning.

    But where it is most troubling, is that what recently became the largest market for Apple’s iPhones suddenly appears to be stuttering. And while the Fed can pretend all it wants that there are no substantial and direct connections between China and the US (just don’t tell that to Bravo TV’s Millon Dollar Listing which while thoroughly fake would absolutely not exist without Chinese buyers), if and when the world’s largest company by market cap admits just how bad the Chinese reality is, not even the US government secretly buying up all of AAPL’s excess inventory (remember: Apple is the NSA’s best friend) will save the gargantuan gadget maker which simply can not exist in a world where the marginal consumer, whether in Boston or Beijing, has tapped out.

  • Obama Won't Back Down After Chinese Threat, Sends U.S. Warships To Contested Islands In "Matter Of Days"

    On Friday, we reported the latest provocation in what has truly become a very dangerous, if largely pointless, staring contest between Beijing and Washington over China’s reclamation of land in The South China Sea. 

    Responding to suggestions that the US was set to sail warships around the islands Beijing has constructed atop reefs in the Spratlys, China served noticed that it would “never allow any country to violate China’s territorial waters and airspace in the Spratly Islands, in the name of protecting freedom of navigation and overflight.” This was simply a formalized version of the more concise phrasing the PLA navy used when they instructed the pilots flying a US spy plane to “Go now!” when it ventured too close to Fiery Cross earlier this year. 

    It’s not immediately clear what China intends to do with the islands and further, it’s not entirely clear why anyone should necessarily care if Beijing wants to build “sand castles” in the middle of the ocean, but then again, for America’s regional allies the land reclamation efforts look a lot an attempt to build a series of military outposts by creating sovereign territory where there was none thereby effectively redrawing maritime boundaries and so, big brother in Washington is set to step in in order to protect vital shipping lanes. 

    Of course having already said that the navy plans to sail ships into the waters around the islands, the US can ill-afford to allow China’s “we won’t tolerate that” pronouncement to deter the Pentagon because the optics around that would be terrible at a time when the world is already questioning the strength and resolve of the US military. So the ships will indeed sail. Here’s WSJ:

    The U.S. determination to challenge China with patrols near Chinese-built islands in the South China Sea will test Xi Jinping’s recent pledge that Beijing doesn’t intend to “militarize” the islands, an announcement that took U.S. officials by surprise.

     

    The Chinese leader made the commitment during a news conference with President Barack Obama at the White House late last month, though he left it unclear how the pledge would affect China’s activities in the disputed area of the South China Sea.

     

    If Mr. Xi’s goal was to discourage the U.S. from conducting patrols near the artificial islands, he doesn’t appear to have succeeded. After months of debate in the U.S. government, there is now a consensus that the U.S. Navy should send ships or aircraft within 12 nautical miles of the artificial islands to challenge China’s territorial claims there, according to people familiar with internal discussions.

     


     

    A U.S. official confirmed Sunday that a decision had been made to conduct such patrols but said it was unclear when that might happen or where exactly. “It’s just a matter of time when it happens,” the official said. Another U.S. official indicated that the operation could come within days.

     

    The question now is whether China will respond to such operations by reining in its plans to develop the islands or backing away from the commitment not to militarize them, pointing to the U.S. patrols as a provocation.

    Anyone who knows anything about how China generally prefers to respond in situations like these knows that Beijing will almost certainly call any US naval presence a “provocation” and they’ll be exactly right. After all, there’s something rather ironic about claiming that China is in the process of militarizing the South China Sea and then deciding that the best way to de-escalate the situation is to sail warships to the area. Here’s WSJ again:

    The Pacific Fleet has been ready to conduct “freedom of navigation operations,” or Fonops, around China’s artificial islands for months after being asked to draw up options by U.S. Defense Secretary Ash Carter earlier this year. The decision to begin the patrols appears to have been delayed to avoid disrupting the summit, people familiar with internal discussions say.

     

    “A U.S. Fonop gives China an opportunity to assert that the United States is the country ‘militarizing’ the South China Sea and, if China chooses, such a Fonop provides a rationale for China to further militarize or develop the features it occupies,” said Taylor Fravel, an expert on the Chinese military at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

    So in reality, the real question is this: now that Russia has moved to effectively reclaim the Mid-East from US influence, and now that China is in the process of using its island building efforts to establish what we’ve called a kind of Sino-Monroe Doctrine, how long will it be before someone actually challenges the US military by shooting down a plane in the desert or firing on a ship in the Spratlys just to test Washington’s resolve?

    * * *

    Finally here again, as a reminder, are the satellite images which demonstrate the extent to which Beijing is “changing the landscape”, so to speak, in the South China Sea.

    Subi:

    Fiery Cross:

    Mischief: 

  • Democracy Uber Alles (But Only When It Goes Our Way)

    Submitted by Tibor Machan via Acting-Man.com,

    Democracy – but only when it goes your way!

    Over the years of watching the democratic process I’ve noticed something important.  People tend to reject democracy, indeed, fight it tooth and nail, when it doesn’t go their way.  But when it does, well, it is the tops.

    Consider the case of California’s Proposition 187.  Then governor Gray Davis of California was maneuvering to essentially gut this referendum, one that won with over 60% of the votes.  So let us recognize that the leader of the Democratic Party in California has no problem rejecting what the majority of the people want when he and his friends believe that the people are wrong.

     

    Former California governor Gray Davis, a typical representative of the cronyism prevalent in the US merchant State. What eventually tripped him up wasn’t his attempt to gut prop. 187 by legal maneuvering, but his perceived poor performance during California’s energy crisis. Many of his energy advisors were the very speculators who benefited the most from the crisis. It was one affront too many. Davis was the first member of California’s ruling caste to fall prey to a recall, after 117 previous recall attempts throughout California’s history had failed, and only the 2nd politician in US history to suffer this ignominious fate. During the boom of the 1990s, Davis had greatly expanded government spending, landing California with a near $35 bn. deficit when the bust inevitably struck.

    Now if you believe in democracy regarding the handling of certain problems in society, whether people actually have signed up for that process, you will go along with the verdict regardless of whether you like the outcome.  That is a principled defense of democracy.

    During all the health (Obama) care reform debates it is liberal Democrats who said, repeatedly, that their demand for a government supervised health care system merely expresses the will of the public and thus has ample legitimacy behind it.

    That is why there is so much polling, too, by the media — it is widely believed that if “the people” want something, then it is OK. What, then, makes for a good law for champions of democracy is whether the majority wants it to be enacted.  (One reason that most Democrats used to oppose a balanced budget amendment is that they believe it would place undue obstacles before the will of the people.  Surely if they people want to go into debt [read: if that’s what the majority wants], we ought all to comply and go into debt.)

     

    Healthcare Act Zingers

    A couple of well-known affordable health-care act zingers. #Grubered is a well-known scandal (see “Dr. Gruber, wie geht’s dir?” and “#Grubered” for the highly amusing details) which was however at least marked by a truly candid assessment on the part of the good doctor/government advisor, who described the obfuscation tactics and the reliance on the “stupidity of the American voter” that were so instrumental in passing the law. What is perhaps less well known is that Ms. Pelosi channeled mid 1930s and mid 1940s satirists and cartoonists when she made her infamous remark about having to “pass the law so that you can find out what’s in it” – more on this below this post.

     

    The people — the public interest, the general will, the greatest satisfaction of the greatest number, the will of the people, etc. — have been the objects of adoration of the leading lights of the Democratic Party.  Until the people no longer like what Democrats want, that is.

    Consider prop 187.  The people of California wanted it.  But the Democrats did not.  Some years back they did want to make people in business stop hiring illegal aliens, so they enacted legislation and claimed, again, that they impose such restrictions and delegate such police powers as this requires on businesses because, well, the people demand it.

    But if you keep fighting the outcome, via law suits and such, you testify to your dismissal of democracy in favor of something else — say, judicial intervention, some kind of higher law that democracy must not abridge, whatever.

    Not that there is that much wrong with judicial intervention, as far as I can tell.  After all, the US Supreme Court interferes often when Congress or some other political body acts in defiance of the US Constitution, thus testifying to the conviction that there are some things that are way beyond the reach of the democratic process.

    And few folks think it would be OK to, say, vote the Mooney church out of existence or to vote to shut down the New York Times.  That is because the US Constitution protects church and press from democratic meddling, no matter how eager the majority of the people are to meddle.

     

    Leaving Matters to Popular Vote – When Convenient

    One of the mainstays of the liberal democrats, mainly members of the Democratic Party of the United States of America, has been that in most matters we should leave decisions up to a vote.

    We should vote on whether smoking is to be allowed in restaurants, how much money is too much when given to political candidates, whether zoning ordinances are to be enacted, how high taxes should be, how to run public schools, and so forth and so on.

    Not OK by me, of course, but notice that it isn’t OK even by those who champion the “democracy uber alles” theme.  The process seems to be kosher only until things don’t quite go the liberal democratic way.

    The flack over Proposition 187 was a wonderful case in point.  Just how hypocritical can you get!  Be a fervent supporter of people power except when people do not like what you like.  Then suddenly people power sucks.

    I guess California’s majority will have to pick and choose some other issue on which to unite in order to fend off the duplicitous legalism of liberal Democrats.  I am sure there will be no problem with voting away private property rights, voting for massive government intervention in practically any area of human life, voting for extensive government regulation of business, medicine, and so on.

     

    Bastiat

    Frederic Bastiat had the right idea about socialist statism and the associated legalism. Generally speaking one could state that statism gives you “laws”, but not justice. To the extent that State power expands, the power of society is diminished.

     

    But if there is a successful vote to rid the community of the expanding tyranny of government, the liberal democrats suddenly aren’t democrats any more.

    It just goes to show you.  In their hearts of hearts most democrats are never really democrats at all but merely opportunists who make use of the power of the majority over the minority’s rights.  But should the majority not wish to go along with this plan, well down with democracy — it is the enemy of higher principles in which democrats believe only sporadically, however.

    *  *  *

    Addendum by PT:

    As noted above, Ms. Pelosi, presumably unwittingly, channeled satirists and cartoonists of the 1930s and 1940s. In a joke appearing in the August 14, 1937 issue of the New Yorker, an anonymous author wrote (hat tip to Ben Zimmer of the Language Log):

    “The wages-and-hours bill has become so complicated that it is a mystery to everybody in Washington. Congress will have to pass it to find out how it works.”

     

    ofallthings

    Copy of the actual “Of All Things” joke as it appeared in the New Yorker, Aug 14, 1937

     

    The joke made a reappearance in a “Grin and Bear It” cartoon by George Lichty in the Mar. 12, 1947 issue of the Los Angeles Times:

     

    grinandbearit

    “I admit this new bill is too complicated to understand….we’ll just have to pass it to fin out how it works!” – the “senate committee on new legislation” in action.

    The problem is that Ms. Pelosi didn’t intend to make a joke. There is actually a serious background to the joke – as George Madison once said:

    “It will be of little avail to the people that the laws are made by men of their own choice if the laws be so voluminous that they cannot be read, or so incoherent that they cannot be understood.”

    Unfortunately the entire body of law is these days “so voluminous it cannot be read” and “so incoherent it cannot be understood” – characteristically, not even by those passing the laws. One suspects this is by design, as it is the easiest way to make sure that a potential criminal is made out of everybody (sometimes, as in Dennis Hastert’s case, this can lead to poetic justice being delivered).

  • Cyberwars Escalate With US NSA As "Crown Creators Of Cyberespionage"

    Those who follow the constant barrage of geopolitical headline hockey might have noticed that this has been the year of the cyberattack. 

    As we’re fond of chronicling, what started with an alleged attempt on the part of Kim Jong Un to sabotage a James Franco and Seth Rogen premier and what took a turn for complete absurdity when Penn State claimed Chinese hacker spies had taken control of the engineering department, turned rather serious with the OPM breach, the scope of which is still not fully understood. 

    The incessant cyber espionage talk along with the creation (by Washington) of a kind of cyber “axis of evil” that of course includes all of the usual suspects including China, Russia, North Korea, and Iran, has led directly to discussions of how to effectively conduct cyber warfare. The Pentagon laid out a somewhat vague strategy earlier this year and now WSJ has more on what’s being billed as a “digital arms race”: 

    A series of successful computer attacks carried out by the U.S. and others has kicked off a frantic and destabilizing digital arms race, with dozens of countries amassing stockpiles of malicious code. The programs range from the most elementary, such as typo-ridden emails asking for a password, to software that takes orders from a rotating list of Twitterhandles.

     

    The proliferation of these weapons has spread so widely that the U.S. and China—longtime cyber adversaries—brokered a limited agreement last month not to conduct certain types of cyberattacks against each other, such as intrusions that steal corporate information and then pass it along to domestic companies. Cyberattacks that steal government secrets, however, remain fair game.

     

    In total, at least 29 countries have formal military or intelligence units dedicated to offensive hacking efforts, according to a Wall Street Journal compilation of government records and interviews with U.S. and foreign officials.

     

    Some 50 countries have bought off-the-shelf hacking software that can be used for domestic and international surveillance. The U.S. has among the most-advanced operations.

     

    In the nuclear arms race, “the acronym was MAD—mutually assured destruction—which kept everything nice and tidy,” said Matthijs Veenendaal, a researcher at the NATO Cooperative Cyber Defence Centre of Excellence, a research group in Estonia. “Here you have the same acronym, but it’s ‘mutually assured doubt,’ because you can never be sure what the attack will be.”

     

    Governments have used computer attacks to mine and steal information, erase computers, disable bank networks and—in one extreme case—destroy nuclear centrifuges.

     

    Nation states have also looked into using cyberweapons to knock out electrical grids, disable domestic airline networks, jam Internet connectivity, erase money from bank accounts and confuse radar systems, experts believe.

    Amusingly, WSJ got a shot in at the Assad government because after all, now that anti-regime forces are on the run, it’s all hands on deck with the Western media propaganda campaign:

    “It’s not like developing an air force,” in terms of cost and expertise, said Michael Schmitt, a professor at the U.S. Naval War College and part of an international group studying how international law relates to cyberwarfare. “You don’t need to have your own cyberforce to have a very robust and very scary offensive capability.”

     

    For example, hackers aligned with the Syrian government have spied into the computers of rebel militias, stolen tactical information and then used the stolen intelligence in the ongoing and bloody battle, according to several researchers, including FireEye Inc.

    Then there is the obligatory shot at the Russians:

    Russian hackers have targeted diplomatic and political data, burrowing inside unclassified networks at the Pentagon, State Department and White House, also using emails laced with malware, according to security researchers and U.S. officials.

     

    They have stolen President Barack Obama’s daily schedule and diplomatic correspondence sent across the State Department’s unclassified network, according to people briefed on the investigation. A Russian government spokesman in April denied Russia’s involvement.

     

    “Russia has never waged cyberwarfare against anyone,” Andrey Akulchev, a spokesman for the Russian Embassy in Washington, said in a written statement Friday. “Russia believes that the cybersphere should be used exclusively for peaceful purposes.”

    And finally, there’s a reference to the hilarious incident documented here earlier this year wherein Obama spied on Netanyahu only to discover that Netanyahu was spying on Obama:

    Even Israel, a U.S. ally, was linked to hacking tools found on the computers of European hotels used for America’s diplomatic talks with Iran, according to the analysis of the spyware by a top cybersecurity firm. Israeli officials have denied spying on the U.S.

    Here’s an inforgraphic that shows which countries employ which specific types of cyber sabotage:

    But the good news, as WSJ cheerfully reminds us, is that “many cybersecurity experts consider the U.S. government to have the most advanced operations [and the NSA to be] the crown creator of cyberespionage.”

    Which is great. Unless it’s you they’re spying on…

  • Oct 13th – Fed's Evans's expects 3 hikes by end of 2016

    EMOTION MOVING MARKETS NOW: 44/100 FEAR

    PREVIOUS CLOSE: 44/100 FEAR

    ONE WEEK AGO: 32/100 FEAR 
    ONE MONTH AGO: 14/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE YEAR AGO: 1/100 EXTREME FEAR

    Put and Call Options: NEUTRAL During the last five trading days, volume in put options has lagged volume in call options by 29.76% as investors make bullish bets in their portfolios. This is a lower level of put buying than has been the norm during the last two years and is a neutral indication.

    Market Volatility:  NEUTRAL The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 16.17. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

    Stock Price Strength: FEAR The number of stocks hitting 52-week lows exceeds the number hitting highs and is at the lower end of its range, indicating fear.

     

    PIVOT POINTS

    EURUSD | GBPUSD | USDJPY | USDCAD | AUDUSD | EURJPY | EURCHF | EURGBPGBPJPY | NZDUSD | USDCHF | EURAUD | AUDJPY 

    S&P 500 (ES) | NASDAQ 100 (NQ) | DOW 30 (YM) | RUSSELL 2000 (TF) Euro (6E) |Pound (6B)

    EUROSTOXX 50 (FESX) | DAX 30 (FDAX) | BOBL (FGBM) | SCHATZ (FGBS) | BUND (FGBL)

    CRUDE OIL (CL) | GOLD (GC) | 10 YR T NOTE | 2 YR T  NOTE | 5 YR T NOTE | 30 YR TREASURY BONDSOYBEANS | CORN

     

    MEME OF THE DAY – NO HIKE! TOLD YOU FOOL!

     

    UNUSUAL ACTIVITY

    MCK OCT 190 CALLS 2k+ @$1.66-1.70

    CI OCT 140 Call Activity 1500 @ 0.40 on the offer

    RIT 10% Owner P    4,860  A  $ 12.6705   P    16,700  A  $ 12.8423

    FXCM .. SC 13G .. Franklin Resources .. 13.5%

    NSR .. SC13G Filed .. William Blair Investment Management, LLC .. 11.38%

    More Unusual Activity…

    HEADLINES

     

    S&P sees 2015 U.S. growth at 2.5%, 2016 at 2.8%, and 2017 at 2.7%

    S&P sees U.S. Q3 15 CPI at -0.2%, +0.5% in Q4, +2% in Q1 and Q2

    Fed’s Evans’s expects 3 hikes by end of 2016

    Fed’s Lockhart repeats: Appropriate to hike in 2015, but Fed data-dependent

    Fed’s Fischer says central bank ‘cautious’ about next rate hike

    US NABE Outlook Survey: Expect 2.5% to 2.8% Growth Though 2016

    PBOC’s Yi: China’s Stock-Market Correction Almost Over

    PBOC to let commercial banks use loan assets as collateral

    ECB’s Coeure Says Too Early To Decide On More Stimulus

    ECB’s Vasiliauskas: For the Moment, No Need to Fine-Tune QE

    BoC Poloz: BoC examining ties between financial stability and monpol

    BOE Weale Optimistic Western European Productivity To Rebound

    Opec: Oil Market To Rebalance As US Supply Hit

    Vix tumbles in longest losing streak since ’09

    AB InBev raises bid for SABMiller to $103bn

    Dell agrees $67bn EMC takeover

    Italy plans EUR2.2bn rescue of three small banks

     

    GOVERNMENTS/CENTRAL BANKS

    Fed’s Evans’s expects 3 hikes by end of 2016 –ForexLive

    Fed’s Lockhart repeats: Appropriate to hike in 2015, but Fed data-dependent –Rtrs

    Fed’s Fischer says central bank ‘cautious’ about next rate hike –MW

    S&P sees 2015 U.S. growth at 2.5%, 2016 at 2.8%, and 2017 at 2.7%

    S&P sees U.S. Q3 15 CPI at -0.2%, +0.5% in Q4, +2% in Q1 and Q2

    US NABE Outlook Survey: Expect 2.5% to 2.8% Growth Though 2016 –MNI

    ECB’s Coeure Says Too Early To Decide On More Stimulus –CNBC

    ECB’s Vasiliauskas: For the Moment, No Need to Fine-Tune QE –WSJ

    EU: Spain’s Budget Plans Would Break Spending Rules –WSJ

    BoC Poloz: BoC examining ties between financial stability and monpol –Rtrs

    BOE Weale Optimistic Western European Productivity To Rebound –MNI

    UK draws up plan of key demands to stay in EU –Tele

    HSBC sees BOE hiking rates by 0.5% in 2016 –ForexLive

    U.K. Europe Minister Casts Doubt on Late-2017 Referendum Date –BBG

    Riksbank’s Floden: Not certain that inflation will rose as forecast –DI via BBG

    FIXED INCOME

    Bonds biding time for Fed interest rate hike –FT

    Dell to add $50bn in debt to acquire EMC –BBG

    FX

    USD: Fed keeps US dollar on the defensive –Rtrs

    GBP: Pound Gains Versus Dollar as Traders Await Signs From BOE, Data –BBG

    EUR: Euro Approaches 1.14 vs the dollar –WSJ

    AUD: Aussie rises for ninth day on commodities rebound –Age

    COMMODITY FX: Resurgent commodity prices push dollar down –Livemint

    ENERGY/COMMODITIES

    CRUDE: WTI futures settle 5.1% lower at $47.10 per barrel

    CRUDE: Brent futures settle 5.3% lower at $49.86 per barrel

    CRUDE: Opec: Oil Market To Rebalance As US Supply Hit –FT

    CRUDE: Kuwait Oil Minister Says No Calls Within OPEC For Policy Change –CNBC

    METALS: Rio Tinto won’t follow Glencore in cutting copper output –Australian

    METALS: Chile Mining Minister: Not enough copper output cuts to balance the market –BBG

    NATGAS: Natural Gas Prices Rise on Colder Forecasts –WSJ

    NATGAS: Gazprom Restarts Gas Deliveries to Ukraine –WSJ

    EQUITIES

    VOL: Vix tumbles in longest losing streak since ’09 –FT

    M&A: Dell agrees $67bn EMC takeover –BBC

    M&A: AB InBev raises bid for SABMiller to $103bn –FT

    M&A: SABMiller’s fourth largest investor rejects AB InBev offer –Rtrs

    M&A: GE nears deal to sell over $30 billion of loans to Wells Fargo –Rtrs

    M&A: Allianz sells vending machine operator Selecta to KKR –Rtrs

    C&E: Oil Price Slide Puts a Lid on Gains in Other Sectors –WSJ

    BANKS: Barclays Close To Naming Jenkins Successor –Sky

    BANKS: Italy plans EUR2.2bn rescue of three small banks –Rtrs

    BANKS: Three groups bid for $20 bln book of ex-Northern Rock loans –Rtrs

    BANKS: DB plans Abbey Life sale to focus on core biz –WSJ

    AUTOS: Volkswagen has announced the recall of 1,950 diesel vehicles in China –Sky

    AUTOS: S&P Downgrades Volkswagen?s Credit Rating –WSJ

    PHARMA: Eli Lilly and China’s Innovent Expand Partnership –WSJ

    PHARMA: Fitch Affirms Roche at ‘AA’; Outlook Stable

    Twitter Slides After Report of Potential Layoffs

    CON DISC: Tobacco Firms Tried to ‘Delay and Derail’ UK Plain Packaging Law –WSJ

    TECH: Facebook launches new advert gizmo –Rtrs

    EMERGING MARKETS

    PBOC’s Yi: China’s Stock-Market Correction Almost Over –MW

    PBOC to let commercial banks use loan assets as collateral as a way to boost lending –WSJ

    Chinese FinMin Lou Says US Shouldn’t Raise Rates Yet –MW

    Fitch Affirms Roche At ‘AA’; Outlook Stable

  • Leaving The Eye Of The Hurricane

    Submitted by Jeff Thomas via InternationalMan.com,

    In the early 2000’s, there were those economists and investors who believed that the U.S. was headed for an economic fall – that the repeal of the Glass-Steagall Act in 1999 would allow the financial institutions to enter into widespread reckless loan practices that would lead to a housing crash. And that that crash would lead to a stock market crash that would herald in The Great Unravelling – The Greater Depression.

    Most of us who made these predictions hypothesized that the initial collapse would be significant, but not severe – that the governments of the world would come to the rescue with bailout programmes that would stave off the symptoms of the problem, but would do nothing to cure the disease itself – that of massive debt.

    We suggested that there would be a false recovery, resulting in the easing of symptoms. There would be repeated claims by both governments and the media that “recovery is nigh.” However, underneath all the folderol, the disease would worsen considerably, eventually reaching the point at which the patient (the economy) could not be saved. At some point, public confidence in the leaders’ abilities to resuscitate the body would fade. This would be triggered by some event or events, such as a crash in the stock or bond market, a dumping of debt back into the U.S. by creditor nations, debt default by Greece or some other nation, commodity price spikes, backlash from sanctioned nations, the imposition of protective tariffs – any one of a dozen possible triggers would do the trick. From that point on, each of the other triggers would eventually occur, as toppling dominoes, fulfilling the prediction of Depression.

    Only in this latter period would the dreaded “D-word” be acknowledged by the governments and media.

    Most prognosticators (myself included) went on the general assumption that the initial collapse would last two to three years and that the following “suspension” period of bailouts and other attempts to paper over the problem might last another three years or so. During this period, conditions would not be good, but they would be better than the conditions during the initial crash and far better than the conditions that would follow the suspension period. Not surprisingly, many of us came to refer to this period as “the eye of the hurricane,” an apt term, as the eye of a hurricane is a period of relative calm after the first onslaught of the storm and just prior to the inevitable and often more devastating second half.

    The second half of the economic storm will prove to be far more devastating than the first, since the fact that its onset will mean that the governments of the world have already thrown everything they have at the problem and will be out of ammunition in the second half.

    In a sense, we could suggest that governments have done a good job in staving off the inevitable, since the eye of the hurricane has lasted more than five years (longer than most of us had expected). Unfortunately, the level of debt created in the attempt to postpone the inevitable assured that every month of postponement meant that the eventual crash would be that much worse, and that the recovery would be that much more prolonged.

    But, if the assumption is correct that there will be a second, more devastating, half of the storm, when will it be? Well, an actual date would be impossible to predict with accuracy, but we can look at the possible triggers and ask ourselves if we’re getting closer. Recently, we’ve observed a very near miss on debt default by Greece. We’ve witnessed a crash in the Chinese stock market, coupled with several downgradings of the yuan, causing a significant drop in the U.S. stock market. Further, although it hasn’t received the media attention it should receive, China has been dumping U.S. Treasuries back into the U.S. in a significant way. One prominent candidate in the U.S. presidential elections is calling for the imposition of protective tariffs and has received cheers from voters for his “courageous” position. (The reader might study the Smoot-Hawley Tariff Act of 1930 if he is uncertain of just how disastrous protective tariffs can prove to be.)

    Readers of this column will already be aware of what may be heading their way, economically, politically, and socially, as we once again enter the hurricane. (Others may check the International Man archive to learn more.)

    In past generations, when folks observed warning signs of an approaching storm, they would often ask Grandpa if his arthritis was giving him trouble, as any dramatic change in barometer pressure is both an irritation to arthritis and a warning of dramatic change in weather.

    Today, in questioning whether we’re reaching the far side of the hurricane, we might do much the same. There are a number of old-timers out there who have tracked economic trends for decades. Those who have developed a reputation for successful prediction tend to go as much by “feel” as by analysis.

    For several months, in communicating with the economic “Grandpas” around the world, the reaction I’ve received from them has been as though they’re all sitting in their rockers on the same porch together. Every one of them is saying the same thing – “It’s really beginning to ‘feel’ close. The first major event could happen anytime now.”

    But, rather than be alarmist, it can also be said that the magicians who run the world’s governments may yet come up with another delay or two. The question for the reader is whether he wishes to put off dealing with the coming hurricane until it’s on his doorstep or whether he’d rather be prepared when the time comes. As it is, the palm fronds are blowing and Grandpa’s joints are getting stiff.

    This might be a good time to get the lawn furniture in and to close up the shutters.

    For those who wish to be the least impacted by the hurricane, this would be the time to (if possible) prepare an overseas bolthole, move funds away from any jurisdiction that’s likely to confiscate or impose capital controls, and move investments out of stocks and bonds and into real estate in a jurisdiction that’s at lesser risk, and into precious metals – to be stored in a jurisdiction where the government has a reputation for low taxation and non-invasiveness into private wealth.

    The coming storm promises to be the largest of our lifetime. We shall all be affected by it. A few will profit from it. Some will be mildly negatively impacted; most will be hit hard, due to being unprepared.

    Those who choose to distance themselves (and their wealth – however large or small) geographically from the centre of the hurricane will fare best.

  • The Dummy's Guide To The Syrian Conflict

    Russia’s intervention has made the complex pattern of alliances and enmities in Syria still more intricate. As The Guardian notes, the Assad regime and its local opponents are backed to differing degrees and in different configurations by military powers from near and far, so here is your cocktail-party-napkin-sized guide to who supports/opposes whom in Syria.

    Consider it the Middle East’s own “dot plot”

     

     

    All “dots” subject to change.

    Source: The Guardian

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 12, 2015

  • America Has REPEATEDLY Committed War Crimes By Bombing Civilians

    The U.S. criticized Russia for killing civilians in Syria.

    But just last week, the U.S. intentionally bombed one of the only hospitals in Northeastern Afghanistan (run by Nobel prize-winner Doctors Without Borders), killing hundreds.  This occurred 3 months after U.S.-backed Afghani special forces raided and threatened the hospital, and after the hospital had repeatedly given its gps coordinates to the U.S. military … and repeatedly called saying they were under attack.

    And the Washington Post notes that incendiary bombs may have been used:

    The AC-130U plane, circling above in the dark, raked the medical compound with bursts of cannon fire, potentially even using high explosive incendiary munitions, for more than an hour. The assault left at least 22 people dead, some of them burned to death.

    It’s a war crime to bomb a hospital without giving adequate warning so patients can leave:

    Delete

    This is not the first time the U.S. has bombed civilian targets:

    • On February 13, 1991, the U.S. purposefully targeted an air raid shelter near the Baghdad airport with two 2,000-pound laser-guided bombs, which punched through 10 feet of concrete and killed at least 408 Iraqi civilians.
    • On April 23, 1999, NATO intentionally bombed a Serbian television station, killing 16.   President Clinton said of the bombing: “Our military leaders at NATO believe … that the Serb television is an essential instrument of Mr. Milosevic’s command and control. … It is not, in a conventional sense, therefore, a media outlet. That was a decision they made, and I did not reverse it.” U.S. envoy Richard Holbrooke said right after the attack that it was “an enormously important and, I think, positive development.” Amnesty International noted it was “a deliberate attack on a civilian object and as such constitutes a war crime.”
    • On October 16, 2001, the U.S. attacked the complex housing the International Committee of the Red Cross in Kabul, Afghanistan. After detailed discussions between the U.S. and the Red Cross about the location of all of its installations in the country, the U.S. bombed the same complex again two weeks later. The second attack destroyed warehouses clearly marked with the Red Cross emblem containing tons of food and supplies for hungry refugees
    • On April 8, 2003, the U.S. bombed the Al Jazeera bureau in Baghdad, killing a reporter. The British home secretary at the time subsequently revealed that – a few weeks before the attack – he had urged Prime Minister Tony Blair to bomb Al Jazeera’s transmitter in Baghdad.
    • Also on April 8, 2003, a U.S. tank fired a shell at the 15th floor of the Palestine Hotel, where most foreign journalists were then staying. Two reporters were killed.  The Committee to Protect Journalists found that the attack “was avoidable”

    The U.S. has also carried out numerous war crimes by killing civilians with drone strikes. This includes “double tap” strikes which target rescuers attempting to save those injured by drone strikes, and “signature strikes” that kill people whose identities aren’t even known, based on metadata on their phones or their proximity to war zones.

    And the U.S. has committed a slew of other war crimes, including:

    • The use of depleted uranium, which can cause cancer and birth defects for decades (see this, this, this, this, this and this)

    None of this is intended to excuse any civilian casualties inflicted by Russia.   But America should not throw stones in glass houses …

  • The Menace Of Egalitarianism

    Submitted by Llewellyn H. Rockwell Jr, via The Mises Institute,

    This talk was delivered at the Dallas-Ft. Worth Mises Circle, “Against PC,” on October 3, 2015.

    A sharp Martian visiting Earth would make two observations about the United States — one true, the other only superficially so.

    On the basis of its ceaseless exercises in self-congratulation, the US appears to him to be a place where free thought is encouraged, and in which man makes war against all the fetters on his mind that reactionary forces had once placed there. That is the superficial truth.

     

    The real truth, which our Martian would discover after watching how Americans actually behave, is that the range of opinions that citizens may entertain is rather more narrow than it at first appears. There are, he will soon discover, certain ideas and positions all Americans are supposed to believe in and salute. Near the top of the list is equality, an idea for which we are never given a precise definition, but to which everyone is expected to genuflect.

    A libertarian is perfectly at peace with the universal phenomenon of human difference. He does not wish it away, he does not shake his fist at it, he does not pretend not to notice it. It affords him another opportunity to marvel at a miracle of the market: its ability to incorporate just about anyone into the division of labor.

    Indeed the division of labor is based on human difference. Each of us finds that niche that suits our natural talents best, and by specializing in that particular thing we can most effectively serve our fellow man. Our fellow man, likewise, specializes in what he is best suited for, and we in turn benefit from the fruits of his specialized knowledge and skill.

    And according to Ricardo’s law of comparative advantage, which Mises generalized into his law of association, even if one person is better than another at absolutely everything, the less able person can still flourish in a free market. For instance, even if the greatest, most successful entrepreneur you can think of is a better office cleaner than anyone else in town, and is likewise a better secretary than all the other secretaries in town, it would make no sense for him to clean his own office or type all of his own correspondence. His time is so much better spent in the market niche in which he excels that it would be preposterous for him to waste his time on these things. In fact, anyone looking to hire him as an office cleaner would have to pay him millions of dollars to compensate for drawing him away from the extremely remunerative work he would otherwise be doing. So even an average office cleaner is vastly more competitive in the office cleaning market than our fictional entrepreneur, since the average office cleaner can charge, say, $15 per hour instead of the $15,000 our entrepreneur, mindful of opportunity cost, would have to charge.

    So there is a place for everyone in the market economy. And what’s more, since the market economy rewards those who are able to produce goods at affordable prices for a mass market, it is precisely the average person to whom captains of industry are all but forced to cater. This is an arrangement to celebrate, not deplore.

    This is not how the egalitarians see it, of course, and here I turn to the work of that great anti-egalitarian, Murray N. Rothbard. Murray dealt with the subject of equality in part in his great essay “Freedom, Inequality, Primitivism, and the Division of Labor,” but really took it head on in “Egalitarianism as a Revolt Against Nature,” which serves as the title chapter of his wonderful book. It is from Murray that my own comments today take their inspiration.

    The current devotion to equality is not of ancient provenance, as Murray pointed out:

    The current veneration of equality is, indeed, a very recent notion in the history of human thought. Among philosophers or prominent thinkers the idea scarcely existed before the mid-eighteenth century; if mentioned, it was only as the object of horror or ridicule. The profoundly anti-human and violently coercive nature of egalitarianism was made clear in the influential classical myth of Procrustes, who “forced passing travellers to lie down on a bed, and if they were too long for the bed he lopped off those parts of their bodies which protruded, while racking out the legs of the ones who were too short.”

    What are we to understand by the word equality? The answer is, we don’t really know. Its proponents make precious little effort to disclose to us precisely what they have in mind. All we know is that we’d better believe it.

    It is precisely this lack of clarity that makes the idea of equality so advantageous for the state. No one is entirely sure what the principle of equality commits him to. And keeping up with its ever-changing demands is more difficult still. What were two obviously different things yesterday can become precisely equal today, and you’d better believe they are equal if you don’t want your reputation destroyed and your career ruined.

    This was the heart of the celebrated dispute between the neoconservative Harry Jaffa and the paleoconservative M.E. Bradford, carried out in the pages of Modern Age in the 1970s. Equality is a concept that cannot and will not be kept restrained or nailed down. Bradford tried in vain to make Jaffa understand that Equality with a capital E was a recipe for permanent revolution.

    Now, do egalitarians mean we are committed to the proposition that anyone is potentially an astrophysicist, as long as he is raised in the proper environment? Maybe, maybe not. Some of them certainly do believe such a thing, though. In 1930, the Encyclopaedia of the Social Sciences claimed that “at birth human infants, regardless of their heredity, are as equal as Fords.” Ludwig von Mises, by contrast, held that “the fact that men are born unequal in regard to physical and mental capabilities cannot be argued away. Some surpass their fellow men in health and vigor, in brain and aptitudes, in energy and resolution and are therefore better fitted for the pursuit of earthly affairs than the rest of mankind.” Did Mises commit a hate crime there, by the standards of the egalitarians? Again, we don’t really know.

    Then there’s “equality of opportunity,” but even this common conservative slogan is fraught with problems. The obvious retort is that in order to have true equality of opportunity, sweeping government intervention is necessary. For how can someone in a poor household with indifferent parents seriously be said to have “equality of opportunity” with the children of wealthy parents who are deeply engaged in their lives?

    Then there is equality in a cultural sense, whereby everyone is expected to ratify everyone else’s personal choices. The cultural egalitarians don’t really mean that, of course: none of them demand that people who dislike Christians sit down and learn Scholastic theology in order to understand them better. And here we discover something important about the whole egalitarian program: it’s not really about equality. It’s about some people exercising power over others.

    At the University of Tennessee this fall, the Office for Diversity and Inclusion explained that traditional English pronouns, being oppressive to people who do not identify with the gender they were “assigned at birth,” ought to be replaced with something new. The diversity office recommends, as replacements for she, her, hers, and he, him, his, the following: ze [pronounced zhee], hir [here], hirs [heres]; ze [zhee], zir [zhere], zirs [zheres]; and xe [zhee], xem [zhem], xyr [zhere]. When approaching people for the first time, students were told, we should say something like, “Nice to meet you. What pronouns should I use?”

    When the whole world burst out laughing at this proposal, the university was at pains to assure everyone that these were just suggestions. Of course, what are not suggestions are the thoughts all right-thinking people are expected to have about moral questions that have been decided for us by our media and political classes.

    Another aspect of equality that’s been in the news in recent years is, of course, income inequality. We are told how terrible it is that some people should have so much more than others, but rarely if ever are we told how much (if any) extra wealth the egalitarian society would allow the better-off to have, or the non-arbitrary basis on which such a judgment could be rendered.

    John Rawls was possibly the most influential political philosopher of the twentieth century, and he advanced a famous defense of egalitarianism in his book A Theory of Justice that attempted to answer this question (among others). If I may summarize his argument in brief, he claimed that we would choose an egalitarian society if, as we contemplated the rules of society we’d want to live under, we had no idea what our own position in that society would be. If we didn’t know if we would be male or female, rich or poor, or talented or untalented, we would hedge our bets by advocating a society in which everyone was as equal as possible. That way, should we be unlucky and enter the world without talents, or a member of a despised minority, or saddled with any other disability, we could still be assured that of a comfortable if not luxurious existence.

    Rawls was willing to allow some degree of inequality, but only if its effect was to help the poor. In other words, doctors could be allowed to earn more money than other people if that financial incentive made them more likely to become doctors in the first place. If incomes were equalized, people would be less likely to go to the trouble of becoming doctors, and the poor would be deprived of medical care. So inequality could be allowed, but only on egalitarian grounds, not because people have the right to acquire and enjoy property without fear of expropriation.

    Since no one in his right mind accepts full-blown egalitarianism, Rawls was bound to run into trouble. That trouble came in the form of his attempts to deal with equality between countries. Even the most dedicated egalitarian living in the First World doesn’t seriously favor an equalization of wealth between countries. College professors who teach the moral superiority of egalitarianism during the day want their wine and cheese parties at night.

    So Rawls came up with a strained and unpersuasive argument that although inequality between persons was outrageous and could be justified only on the basis of whether it helped the poorest, inequality between countries was quite all right. He then proceeded to give reasons that inequality between countries was quite all right, even though these were the exact reasons he had said inequality between individuals was unacceptable.

    Even if egalitarianism could be defended philosophically, there is the small matter of implementing it in the real world. Just one reason the egalitarian dream cannot be realized involves what Robert Nozick called the Wilt Chamberlain problem; James Otteson has called something like it the “day two problem.” In Chamberlain’s heyday, everyone enjoyed watching him play basketball. People gladly paid to watch him play. But suppose we begin with an equal distribution of wealth, and then everyone rushes out to watch Chamberlain play basketball. Many thousands of people willingly hand over a portion of their money to Chamberlain, who now becomes much wealthier than everyone else.

    In other words, the pattern of wealth distribution is disturbed as soon as anyone engages in any exchange at all. Are we to cancel the results of all these exchanges and return everyone’s money to the original owners? Is Chamberlain to be deprived of the money people freely chose to gave him in exchange for the entertainment he provided?

    But the reason the state holds up equality as a moral ideal is precisely that it is unattainable. We may forever strive for it, but we can never reach it. What ideology could be better, from the state’s point of view? The state can portray itself as the indispensable agent of justice, while at the same time drawing ever more power and resources to itself — over education, employment, wealth redistribution, and practically any area of social life or the economy you can name — in the course of pursuing the unattainable egalitarian program. “Equality cannot be imagined outside of tyranny,” said Montalembert. It was, he said, “nothing but the canonization of envy, [and it] was never anything but a mask which could not become reality without the abolition of all merit and virtue.”

    In the course of working toward equality, the state expands its power at the expense of other forms of human association, including the family itself. The family has always been the primary obstacle to the egalitarian program. The very fact that parents differ in their knowledge, skill levels, and devotion to their offspring means that children in no two households can ever be raised “equally.”

    Robert Nisbet, the Columbia University sociologist, openly wondered if Rawls would be honest enough to admit that his system, if followed to its logical conclusion, had to lead to the abolition of the family. “I have always found treatment of the family to be an excellent indicator of the degree of zeal and authoritarianism, overt or latent, in a moral philosopher or political theorist,” Nisbet said. He identified two traditions of thought in Western history. One he traced from Plato to Rousseau, that identified the family as a wicked barrier to the realization of true virtue and justice. The other, which viewed the family as a central ingredient in both liberty and order, he followed from Aristotle through Burke and Tocqueville.

    Rawls himself appeared to admit that the logic of his argument tended in the direction of the Plato/Rousseau strain of thought, though he ultimately — and unpersuasively — drew back. Here are Rawls’s own words:

    It seems that when fair opportunity (as it has been defined) is satisfied, the family will lead to unequal chances between individuals. Is the family to be abolished then? Taken by itself and given a certain primacy, the idea of equal opportunity inclines in this direction. But within the context of the theory of justice as a whole there is much less urgency to take this course.

    Nisbet took little comfort in Rawls’s pathetic assurances. Can Rawls, he wondered,

    long neglect the family, given its demonstrable relation to inequality? Rousseau was bold and consistent where Rawls is diffident. If the young are to be brought up in the bosom of equality, “early accustomed to regard their own individuality only in its relation to the body of the State, to be aware, so to speak, of their own existence merely as part of that of the State,” then they must be saved from what Rousseau refers to as “the intelligence and prejudices of fathers.”

    The obsession with equality, in short, undermines every indicator of health we might look for in a civilization. It involves a madness so complete that although it flirts with the destruction of the family, it never stops to consider whether this conclusion might mean the whole line of thought may have been deranged to begin with. It leads to the destruction of standards — scholarly, cultural, and behavioral. It is based on assertion rather than evidence, and it attempts to gain ground not through rational argument but by intimidating opponents into silence. There is nothing honorable or admirable about any aspect of the egalitarian program.

    Murray noted that pointing out the lunacy of egalitarianism was a good start, but not nearly enough. We need to show that the so-called struggle for equality is in fact all about state power, not helping the downtrodden. He wrote:

    To mount an effective response to the reigning egalitarianism of our age, therefore, it is necessary but scarcely sufficient to demonstrate the absurdity, the anti-scientific nature, the self-contradictory nature, of the egalitarian doctrine, as well as the disastrous consequences of the egalitarian program. All this is well and good. But it misses the essential nature of, as well as the most effective rebuttal to, the egalitarian program: to expose it as a mask for the drive to power of the now ruling left-liberal intellectual and media elites. Since these elites are also the hitherto unchallenged opinion-molding class in society, their rule cannot be dislodged until the oppressed public, instinctively but inchoately opposed to these elites, are shown the true nature of the increasingly hated forces who are ruling over them. To use the phrases of the New Left of the late 1960s, the ruling elite must be “demystified,” “delegitimated,” and “desanctified.” Nothing can advance their desanctification more than the public realization of the true nature of their egalitarian slogans.

    The only Rothbardian word missing from that stirring conclusion is one of Murray’s favorites: “de-bamboozle.” It is that, above all, that needs to be done. The Mises Institute has accomplished many things over the years: advancing scholarship through our academic conferences and scholarly journals, educating students in the economics of the Austrian school, and reaching out to the public to give them a free education worth vastly more than what many people spend six figures for. But put it all together, and it amounts to perhaps the greatest de-bamboozling effort of all time. Once you understand the economics of the Austrian school and the philosophy of liberty in the tradition of Rothbard, you never look at anything — not the state, the media, the central bank, the political class, nothing — the same way again.

    Help us carry on our great de-bamboozling mission, as we devise more and more programs and outreach to the public, and provide a new generation of brilliant young scholars with the tools they need to resist and defy a regime that would intimidate us into silence. Their way is violence, envy, and destruction. Ours is peace, liberty, and creation. With your help, we can tear down the state’s benign facade, which has bamboozled so many, and reveal for all to see that the only winner in the state’s crusades is the state itself.

  • Obama Defends The Failure Of His Syria Policy Before A Beligerent 60 Minutes

    Yesterday, in a comprehensive takedown of Obama’s handling of the second Syrian proxy war in three years (which is not over yet), we summarized events as follows: “The Tragic Ending To Obama’s Bay Of Pigs: CIA Hands Over Syria To Russia.”

    The facts, which are largely undisputed, confirm this: having achieved no progress “against ISIS”, the stated goal of US intervention in Syria, and no progress in kicking Assad out of office and starting the Qatar has pipeline to Europe, the real goal of US intervention in Syria, the top democrat on the House Intelligence Committee, Adam Schiff, said that Obama “is debating the merits of taking further action or whether they are better off letting Putin hang himself.”

    By “hanging himself”, the democrat meant handing Syria over to the Kremlin on a silver platter aafter just a few short weeks of Russian military intervention in Syria which has crushed US supply routes to ISIS and other CIA-sponsored rebel groups, and once again –  just like in 2013 – put a premature end to US attempts to overthrow yet another head of state.

    Fast forward to today when in what may have been the most awkward 60 Minutes interview for Obama before the US nation, Steve Kroft asked Obama about Trump, about Hillary, but it was Obama’s take on the US loss in (and of) Syria and the Russian gains there, and everywhere else, that demonstrated two things.

    The first is just how marginalized the US has suddenly become in the global arena, with an impotent and insolvent Europe behind its back for moral if no other support, opposing a suddenly ascendant Russian axis in the middle-east, one which has China’s backing, especially in the aftermath of the quite demonstrative US implementation of the TPP which is meant first and foremost to offset China’s rising trade influence in the region.

    The second is the extent of Obama’s delusion, or perhaps it was merely his spin relying on the naivete of the US public when it comes to foreign affairs, about the abovementioned snubbing of a superpower that until recently nobody dared to challenge unilaterally in the global arena.

    The full exchange is presented below. We still can’t decide if Kroft’s at times near-aggressive belligerence toward the president was actually genuine, or as revealed previously especially in the case of the 2011 60 Minutes interview of Julian Assange, the host was directly instructed by the administration on how to approach the topics at hand, and to make Obama squirm on purpose, so as to make the loss more palatable to the people of America.

    * * *

    Steve Kroft: The last time we talked was this time last year, and the situation in Syria and Iraq had begun to worsen vis-à-vis ISIS. You had just unveiled a plan to provide air support for troops in Iraq, and also some air strikes in Syria, and the training and equipping of a moderate Syrian force. You said that this would degrade and eventually destroy ISIS.

    President Barack Obama: Over time.

    Steve Kroft: Over time. It’s been a year, and–

    President Barack Obama: I didn’t say it was going to be done in a year.

    Steve Kroft: No. But you said…

    President Barack Obama: There’s a question in here somewhere.

    Steve Kroft: There’s a question in here. I mean, if you look at the situation and you’re looking for progress, it’s not easy to find. You could make the argument that the only thing that’s changed really is the death toll, which has continued to escalate, and the number of refugees fleeing Syria into Europe.

    President Barack Obama: Syria has been a difficult problem for the entire world community and, obviously, most importantly, for the people of Syria themselves that have been devastated by this civil war, caught between a brutal dictator who drops barrel bombs on his own population, and thinks that him clinging to power is more important than the fate of his country. And a barbaric, ruthless organization in ISIL and some of the al Qaeda affiliates that are operating inside of Syria. And what we’ve been able to do is to stall ISIL’s momentum to take away some of the key land that they were holding, to push back, particularly in Iraq against some population centers that they threatened. And, in Syria, we’ve been able to disrupt a number of their operations. But what we have not been able to do so far, and I’m the first to acknowledge this, is to change the dynamic inside of Syria and the goal here has been to find a way in which we can help moderate opposition on the ground, but we’ve never been under any illusion that militarily we ourselves can solve the problem inside of Syria.

    Steve Kroft: I want us to take some of these things one by one. You mentioned an awful lot of things. One, the situation with ISIS, you’ve managed to achieve a stalemate. So what’s going to happen to ISIS?

    President Barack Obama: Well, over time–

    Steve Kroft: I mean, they have to be– somebody has to take them on. I mean, what’s going on right now is not working. I mean, they are still occupying big chunks of Iraq. They’re still occupying a good chunk of Syria. Who’s going to get rid of them?

    President Barack Obama: Over time, the community of nations will all get rid of them, and we will be leading getting rid of them. But we are not going to be able to get rid of them unless there is an environment inside of Syria and in portions of Iraq in which local populations, local Sunni populations, are working in a concerted way with us to get rid of them.

    Steve Kroft: You have been talking about the moderate opposition in Syria. It seems very hard to identify. And you talked about the frustrations of trying to find some and train them. You got a half a billion dollars from Congress to train and equip 5,000, and at the end, according to the commander CENTCOM, you got 50 people, most of whom are dead or deserted. He said four or five left?

    President Barack Obama: Steve, this is why I’ve been skeptical from the get go about the notion that we were going to effectively create this proxy army inside of Syria. My goal has been to try to test the proposition, can we be able to train and equip a moderate opposition that’s willing to fight ISIL? And what we’ve learned is that as long as Assad remains in power, it is very difficult to get those folks to focus their attention on ISIL.

    Steve Kroft: If you were skeptical of the program to find and identify, train and equip moderate Syrians, why did you go through the program?

    President Barack Obama: Well, because part of what we have to do here, Steve, is to try different things. Because we also have partners on the ground that are invested and interested in seeing some sort of resolution to this problem. And–

    Steve Kroft: And they wanted you to do it.

    President Barack Obama: Well, no. That’s not what I said. I think it is important for us to make sure that we explore all the various options that are available.

    Steve Kroft: I know you don’t want to talk about this.

    President Barack Obama: No, I’m happy to talk about it.

    Steve Kroft: I want to talk about the– this program, because it would seem to show, I mean, if you expect 5,000 and you get five, it shows that somebody someplace along the line did not– made– you know, some sort of a serious miscalculation.

    President Barack Obama: You know, the– the– Steve, let me just say this.

    Steve Kroft: It’s an embarrassment.

    President Barack Obama: Look, there’s no doubt that it did not work. And, one of the challenges that I’ve had throughout this heartbreaking situation inside of Syria is, is that– you’ll have people insist that, you know, all you have to do is send in a few– you know, truckloads full of arms and people are ready to fight. And then, when you start a train-and-equip program and it doesn’t work, then people say, “Well, why didn’t it work?” Or, “If it had just started three months earlier it would’ve worked.”

    Steve Kroft: But you said yourself you never believed in this.

    President Barack Obama: Well– but Steve, what I have also said is, is that surprisingly enough it turns out that in a situation that is as volatile and with as many players as there are inside of Syria, there aren’t any silver bullets. And this is precisely why I’ve been very clear that America’s priorities has to be number one, keeping the American people safe. Number two, we are prepared to work both diplomatically and where we can to support moderate opposition that can help convince the Russians and Iranians to put pressure on Assad for a transition. But that what we are not going to do is to try to reinsert ourselves in a military campaign inside of Syria. Let’s take the situation in Afghanistan, which I suspect you’ll ask about. But I wanted to use this as an example.

    Steve Kroft: All right. I feel like I’m being filibustered, Mr. President.

    President Barack Obama: No, no, no, no, no. Steve, I think if you want to roll back the tape, you’ve been giving me long questions and statements, and now I’m responding to ’em. So let’s– so– if you ask me big, open-ended questions, expect big, open-ended answers. Let’s take the example of Afghanistan. We’ve been there 13 years now close to 13 years. And it’s still hard in Afghanistan. Today, after all the investments we have there, and we still have thousands of troops there. So the notion that after a year in Syria, a country where the existing government hasn’t invited us in, but is actively keeping us out, that somehow we would be able to solve this quickly– is–

    Steve Kroft: We didn’t say quickly.

    President Barack Obama: –is– is– is an illusion. And– and–

    Steve Kroft: Nobody’s expecting that, Mr. President.

    President Barack Obama: Well, the– no, I understand, but what I’m– the simple point I’m making, Steve, is that the solution that we’re going to have inside of Syria is ultimately going to depend not on the United States putting in a bunch of troops there, resolving the underlying crisis is going to be something that requires ultimately the key players there to recognize that there has to be a transition to new government. And, in the absence of that, it’s not going to work.

    Steve Kroft: One of the key players now is Russia.

    President Barack Obama: Yeah.

    Steve Kroft: A year ago when we did this interview, there was some saber-rattling between the United States and Russia on the Ukrainian border. Now it’s also going on in Syria. You said a year ago that the United States– America leads. We’re the indispensible nation. Mr. Putin seems to be challenging that leadership.

    President Barack Obama: In what way? Let– let’s think about this– let– let–

    Steve Kroft: Well, he’s moved troops into Syria, for one. He’s got people on the ground. Two, the Russians are conducting military operations in the Middle East for the first time since World War II–

    President Barack Obama: So that’s–

    Steve Kroft: —bombing the people– that we are supporting.

    President Barack Obama: So that’s leading, Steve? Let me ask you this question. When I came into office, Ukraine was governed by a corrupt ruler who was a stooge of Mr. Putin. Syria was Russia’s only ally in the region. And today, rather than being able to count on their support and maintain the base they had in Syria, which they’ve had for a long time, Mr. Putin now is devoting his own troops, his own military, just to barely hold together by a thread his sole ally. And in Ukraine–

    Steve Kroft: He’s challenging your leadership, Mr. President. He’s challenging your leadership–

    President Barack Obama: Well Steve, I got to tell you, if you think that running your economy into the ground and having to send troops in in order to prop up your only ally is leadership, then we’ve got a different definition of leadership. My definition of leadership would be leading on climate change, an international accord that potentially we’ll get in Paris. My definition of leadership is mobilizing the entire world community to make sure that Iran doesn’t get a nuclear weapon. And with respect to the Middle East, we’ve got a 60-country coalition that isn’t suddenly lining up around Russia’s strategy. To the contrary, they are arguing that, in fact, that strategy will not work.

    Steve Kroft: My point is– was not that he was leading, my point is that he was challenging your leadership. And he has very much involved himself in the situation. Can you imagine anything happening in Syria of any significance at all without the Russians now being involved in it and having a part of it?

    President Barack Obama: But that was true before. Keep in mind that for the last five years, the Russians have provided arms, provided financing, as have the Iranians, as has Hezbollah.

    Steve Kroft: But they haven’t been bombing and they haven’t had troops on the ground–

    President Barack Obama: And the fact that they had to do this is not an indication of strength, it’s an indication that their strategy did not work.

    Steve Kroft: You don’t think–

    President Barack Obama: You don’t think that Mr. Putin would’ve preferred having Mr. Assad be able to solve this problem without him having to send a bunch of pilots and money that they don’t have?

    Steve Kroft: Did you know he was going to do all this when you met with him in New York?

    President Barack Obama: Well, we had seen– we had pretty good intelligence. We watch–

    Steve Kroft: So you knew he was planning to do it.

    President Barack Obama: We knew that he was planning to provide the military assistance that Assad was needing because they were nervous about a potential imminent collapse of the regime.

    Steve Kroft: You say he’s doing this out of weakness. There is a perception in the Middle East among our adversaries, certainly and even among some of our allies that the United States is in retreat, that we pulled our troops out of Iraq and ISIS has moved in and taken over much of that territory. The situation in Afghanistan is very precarious and the Taliban is on the march again. And ISIS controls a large part of Syria.

    President Barack Obama: I think it’s fair to say, Steve, that if–

    Steve Kroft: It’s– they– let me just finish the thought. They say your–

    President Barack Obama: You’re–

    Steve Kroft: —they say you’re projecting a weakness, not a strength–

    President Barack Obama: –you’re saying “they,” but you’re not citing too many folks. But here–

    Steve Kroft: No, I’ll cite– I’ll cite if you want me, too.

    President Barack Obama: –here– yes. Here–

    Steve Kroft: I’d say the Saudis. I’d say the Israelis. I’d say a lot of our friends in the Middle East. I’d say everybody in the Republican party. Well, you want me to keep going?

    President Barack Obama: Yeah. The– the– if you are– if you’re citing the Republican party, I think it’s fair to say that there is nothing I’ve done right over the last seven and a half years. And I think that’s right. It– and– I also think what is true is that these are the same folks who were making an argument for us to go into Iraq and who, in some cases, still have difficulty acknowledging that it was a mistake. And Steve, I guarantee you that there are factions inside of the Middle East, and I guess factions inside the Republican party who think that we should send endless numbers of troops into the Middle East, that the only measure of strength is us sending back several hundred thousand troops, that we are going to impose a peace, police the region, and– that the fact that we might have more deaths of U.S. troops, thousands of troops killed, thousands of troops injured, spend another trillion dollars, they would have no problem with that. There are people who would like to see us do that. And unless we do that, they’ll suggest we’re in retreat.

    Steve Kroft: They’ll say you’re throwing in the towel–

    President Barack Obama: No. Steve, we have an enormous presence in the Middle East. We have bases and we have aircraft carriers. And our pilots are flying through those skies. And we are currently supporting Iraq as it tries to continue to build up its forces. But the problem that I think a lot of these critics never answered is what’s in the interest of the United States of America and at what point do we say that, “Here are the things we can do well to protect America. But here are the things that we also have to do in order to make sure that America leads and America is strong and stays number one.” And if in fact the only measure is for us to send another 100,000 or 200,000 troops into Syria or back into Iraq, or perhaps into Libya, or perhaps into Yemen, and our goal somehow is that we are now going to be, not just the police, but the governors of this region. That would be a bad strategy Steve. And I think that if we make that mistake again, then shame on us.

    * * *

    And just like that the US foray in Syria is unofficially over.

    The sad thing is that for all the fake posturing by both Kroft and Obama, the US may still very well make this mistake and send 100,000 or 200,000 troops under the leadership of the Nobel Peace Prize winner, especially if our assessment of what the US withdrawal from the middle-east means for the upcoming dramatic shift in the regional balance of power.

    * * *

    The rest of the interview is primarily focused on domestic affairs, i.e., Trump, Hillary’s emails and Biden’s latest presidential run, which for the purpose of this post or the opinions coming from a lame duck president, are irrelevant.

    At the end of the interview, Kroft asks Obama if he’s glad he can’t run for president again. Obama says he feels a mixture of satisfaction at what he’s accomplished and a desire to still do more.

    Kroft then asks him: “Do you think if you ran again, could run again, and did run again, you would be elected?”

    Yes,” says Obama, without missing a beat.

    Judging by the “changing” IQ landscape in the US over the past eight years, the golfer-in-chief well be right.

    Because just as the Obama was saying this, the following tweet hit the tape:

    Somewhere Putin is laughing.

  • Ruble, Lira, & Ringgit Tumble On USD, Yuan Gains As PBOC States "China Correction Nearly Over"

    After surging stronger for 2 weeks, EM FX is starting to lose ground in early Asia trading following Fischer's comments Friday. The biggest losers so far are Turkish Lira, Russian Ruble, and Malaysian Ringgit which has dropped over 1% in early Asia trading – its biggest drop in a month. China expanded its regulatory crackdown to 11 more firms for "illegal stock operations" – i.e. selling – bringing the total to 41 firms. The PBOC Deputy Governor tells anyone who will listen that "China's market correction is nearly over," following the IMF annual meetings – "China's economy is basically stable" – and Chinese stocks are modestly higher in the pre-open (with Dow futures -40pts). Yuan at 2mo highs after strengthening 7 days in a row.

     

     

    After a couple of weeks of serious strength, EM FX is leaking back lower against the USD…

     

    With Lira, Ruble, and Ringgit the biggest losers for now…

    • *RINGGIT FALLS 1.1% TO 4.1795 PER DOLLAR
    • The dollar reasserted itself, snapping an eight-day rally in Australia’s currency after Federal Reserve Vice Chairman Stanley Fischer joined the chorus touting a potential U.S. interest-rate hike by year end. Australian stocks fell with U.S. index futures following the best week for global equities since 2011.

     

    *  *  *

    Exceited by comments on China "managing:" to avoid a hard landing dureing discussions at The IMF's annual meeting

    The Chinese regulatory crackdown begins again…

    CHINA CSRC HOLDS HEARING FOR ILLEGAL STOCK OPERATIONS: XINHUA

     

    China Securities Regulatory Commission (CSRC) has held a two-day hearing for 11 illegal cases of reducing share holding.

     

    It was the first time that the CSRC dealt with cases involving such amount of illegal share-holding reductions in one hearing.

     

    The regulator asked big shareholders of public companies not to sell shares in an effort to keep the market stable in the past months.

     

    Altogether 41 such cases had been investigated, and the 11 cases at the hearing on Friday and Saturday were suspected of similar operations, the commission said.

     

    All the persons concerned admitted the facts at the hearing, but requested less punishment, claiming their operations tended to lower financial cost and made no impacts to the stock market, while they had carried out timely remedial measures.

    Margin debt rises again…

    • *SHANGHAI MARGIN DEBT BALANCE REBOUNDS FOR SECOND DAY

    And stocks are modestly bid in the pre-open…

    • *FTSE CHINA A50 OCTOBER FUTURES RISE 1% IN SINGAPORE
    • PBoC Dep Gov: China’s Market Correction Nearly Over — RTRS
    • *NDRC OFFICIAL LIU HE SAYS CHINA ECONOMY BASICALLY STABLE

     

    And with the Yuan at 2-month highs, PBOC fixes the Yuan stronger for the 7th day in a row….

    • *CHINA SETS YUAN REFERENCE RATE AT 6.3406 AGAINST U.S. DOLLAR

     

    A top Chinese central banker said a “persistent” weakening of the yuan would be inconsistent with the fundamentals of the world’s second-biggest economy, and the country is committed to making its currency regime more flexible and market based.

     

    “As wide-ranging structural reforms are being carried out, the Chinese economy will become more balanced and sustainable,” People’s Bank of China Deputy Governor Yi Gang said Friday in a statement at the IMF annual meetings in Lima. Reforms to make the yuan more market-determined will make its exchange rate more flexible, “floating around the equilibrium level in both directions.”

    *  *  *

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • Moscow Demands Britain Explain "Green Light To Shoot Down Russian Jets"

    The chances of escalation from a proxy war to outright war just went to 11 on the Spinal Tap amplifier of sabre-rattling. A day after British and NATO pilots were reportedly given the green light to take drastic action against Russian fighter jets if they come under threat during missions over Iraq, Interfax reports that the Russian Defense Ministry has demanded clarification. Senior defence sources say it is just a matter of time before our fighters are involved in a deadly confrontation with Russian jets.

    The Chinese, it appears, are wholeheartedly behind Putin's efforts, judging by the following puff-piece from Xinhua (unofficially China's government mouthpiece)…

    Russia's recent military intervention in the Syrian war in the form of airstrikes and missile attacks aimed both at supporting the government of President Bashar Al-Assad in combatting the Islamic State (IS) has reaped initial gains.

     

    Russia's bombing campaign in Syria, which began on Sept. 30, has strengthened the Syrian government, laying the foundation for a dialogue with all countries concerned to come up with solutions that could drag Syria out of the internal conflict that has lasted for more than four years.

     

    According to Russia Today, Russia started its bombing campaign in Syria with a goal to provide air support to the government troops in fighting various terrorist groups, primarily the IS.

     

    Russian air strikes hit 55 Islamic State group targets in Syria in the past 24 hours, the defense ministry said Saturday, as Moscow ramped up its military campaign in the war-torn country.

     

    Russia's air force has attacked a total of 112 targets since the start of the military actions.

     

    On Thursday, Syrian government troops launched large-scale ground offensives under the cover of Russia's repeated air strikes. At the same time, Russia launched 26 cruise missiles from the Caspian Sea and destroyed 11 IS targets.

     

    Syrian political analyst Osama Dannura said Russia's involvement in the Syrian conflict has upset the initial planning of Western powers that have their minds bent on toppling the Assad government.

     

    The West's strategic shortcomings were demonstrated by the disastrous 500 million-U.S.-dollar program to train and arm moderate rebels, which generated only a handful of fighters, many of whom surrendered or were captured almost immediately. The scheme was finally scrapped on Friday.

     

    The reason why the U.S.-coalition has failed to deal a blow to the IS, according to Syrian political analyst Maher Ihsan, is a lack of offensives by ground troops. Besides, while attacking the IS, the United States is also offering the opposition rebels assistance including weapons, most of which end up into the hands of IS fighters.

     

    In an interview with Iranian television broadcast on Sunday, al-Assad said a campaign of Western and Arab airstrikes against IS targets in Iraq and Syria has been counterproductive and terrorism has spread in terms of both territory and new recruits.

     

    Around 40 percent of the IS infrastructure in Syria has been destroyed in just one week, Syria's Ambassador to Russia Riad Haddad said on Wednesday.

    But the huge escalation in British and NATO rhetoric towards Russia – green-lighting direct conflict – has made the situation dramatically more dangerous…

    British and Nato pilots have been told to take the drastic action if they are fired on by Vladimir Putin's air force during missions over Iraq.

     

    The move comes after British ministers warned Russia had made the situation in the Middle East "much more dangerous".

     

    Senior defence sources say it is just a matter of time before our fighters are involved in a deadly confrontation with Russian jets.

     

    One source said: "We need to protect our pilots but at the same time we're taking a step closer to war. It will only take one plane to be shot down in an air-to-air battle and the whole landscape will change. "

     

    RAF pilots have been told to avoid contact with Russian jets at all costs and both US and British mission control teams will do their best to keep them apart.

     

    But the pilots have been warned they must be prepared to fire on Russian jets if their lives depend on it.

     

    One source said: "No one knows what the Russians will do next. We do not know how they will respond if they come into contact with a Western jet.

     

    "When planes are flying at supersonic speeds the airspace gets crowded very quickly. There could be a collision or a Russian pilot might be mistakenly shot down. "

    And then, as Reuters reports,

    Russia has asked the British defense attache in Moscow to clarify media reports that British pilots had been given permission to attack Russian jets if they are fired on whilst flying sorties over Iraq, Interfax news agency reported on Sunday.

     

    The British attache said he would submit an official response in the near future, RIA news agency reported.

    *  *  *

    One wonders just how far US, NATO "leadership" are willing to go to 'expose' Putin's evil intent? Especially in light of China's official mouthpiece (Xinhua News) reporting the following…

    "The Russians have shown a naval capacity that was not expected," said Thomas Gomart, head of the French Institute for Foreign Relations, adding that Russia is "challenging the West's aerial supremacy."

     

    Moscow offered on Tuesday to resume talks with Washington to avoid any misunderstanding concerning its airstrike operation, as well as to discuss ways to avoid conflicts between the United States and Russian warplanes over Syria.

     

    Washington also said on Saturday that it would resume talks with Moscow to avoid accidents in the skies over the war-torn country.

  • "Maybe It's Not The Guns… Maybe It's The People Holding The Guns"

    Submitted by Mac Slavo via SHTFPlan.com,

    If the only gun violence statistics you see are disseminated by the mainstream media or left-wing anti-Second Amendment groups, then in all likelihood you are horrified by America’s murder culture.

    But what if what we’re being sold as truth is merely a means to achieve an agenda focused on seeing the American people totally disarmed?

    In the following must-see video report from Truth Revolt, host Bill Whittle shows  the reality of America’s per capita murder rates.

    Though we understand that a cranial rectal inversion may be their immediate response for fear of admitting the truth, we strongly encourage you to share this with those who may not have the full picture:

    “Maybe It’s Not the Guns… Maybe It’s the People Holding the Guns”

    In a recent article Dr. Ignatius Piazza from the Front Sight Firearms Training Institute examines the reasons behind the push against personal firearm ownership in America and why anti-gun proponents like President Barack Obama refuse to address other deadly issues that cause far more deaths than guns:

    Guns are not responsible for the 10 deaths at Umpqua College yesterday any more than cars are responsible for the 395 deaths over Labor Day weekend. That’s right, 395 men, women and children were killed over Labor Day in car accidents.

     

    Why didn’t Obama hold a press conference the day after Labor Day, expressing, his grief and anger over the senseless killing of nearly 400 people on our highways during Labor Day Weekend?

     

    Why didn’t Obama ask the American people to do something by pressuring their elected representatives to change our laws?

     

    Why didn’t Obama take a swipe at the car manufacturers and car dealers for building and selling cars to the American people knowing full well that EVERY YEAR, over 32,000 people are killed in car accidents? Yes, 32,000 EVERY YEAR.

     

    Why didn’t Obama plead with the American people to make a change and pressure Congress to pass laws that forbid the sale and consumption of alcohol, recreational drugs, and pharmaceutical drugs, all of which dramatically contribute to 87 highway deaths PER DAY?

     

    Why didn’t Obama sign an Executive Order forever banning Labor Day. After all it would save nearly 400 people EVERY YEAR.

     

    WHY? Because banning the manufacture and sale of automobiles, or alcohol, or recreational and pharmaceutical drugs, or getting rid of all the national holidays, does not fit in his Socialist agenda to disarm the American public so he doesn’t give a shit about the 32,000 innocent lives that are lost EVERY YEAR on our highways.

     

    Full Report: Show your anti-gun neighbor this… #1 With a Bullet

    It should be obvious that guns are not the problem. As Ignatius Piazza and Bill Whittle note, it’s the people holding the guns that are the problem.

    Banning firearms or imposing unreasonable restrictions not only goes against the spirit and letter of Constitutional Law, but increases the odds that innocent Americans will become targets of violent criminals like we have seen in “gun-free” cities such as Detroit and Chicago.

    We realize that if you are a left-leaning gun grabber you could argue that we are merely throwing out Republican and Libertarian talking points, so don’t take our word for it.

    Maybe the warnings from this little known author and Statesman will convince you:

    “Laws that forbid the carrying of arms…disarm only those who are neither inclined nor determined to commit crimes. Such laws make things worse for the assaulted and better for the assailants; they serve rather to encourage than prevent homicides, for an unarmed man may be attacked with greater confidence than an armed one.”

     

    Thomas Jefferson

    We’ll be happy to give up our guns… just as soon as former New York’ Mayor Michael Bloomberg, Chicago Mayor Rahm Emanuel and President Barack Obama remove their ARMED security details.*

    Lead by example, right?

    protected-by-guns-2

    (*Note: This statement was made in jest. We don’t plan on giving up our guns even if the President and aforementioned Mayors were to give up their armed security details.)

  • What The "Real F**king News" Would Look Like

    Tired of the same old government-directed, politically-correct mainstream media diatribe of ‘everything is awesome’, good-guy-bad-guy, “this is what to think” news? Well this angry ‘reporter’ exposes what the real news would sound like.

     

    Note: Jonathan Pie is a satirist

  • Fed Quietly Revises Total US Debt From 330% To 350% Of GDP, After "Discovering" Another $2.7 Trillion In Debt

    Everyone has seen the chart of “Total Credit Market Instruments“, which as of its most recent update on March 31, 2015, was just over $59 trillion, or 330% of US GDP.

     

    For those who have not seen it, as well as for those who are familiar with this chart, take a long look, because this is the last update of this particular data series, pulled straight from the Fed’s Z.1 Flow of Funds (section L.1), you will ever see.

    So did the Fed spontaneously terminate the reporting of what until the second quarter’s update of the Flow of Funds, was the most comprehensive official summary of Household, Financial, Corporate and Government debt in existence? And if so why?

    Many Fed watchers assumed that this is precisely what happened, and indeed, searching high and low for the infamous L.1 Section revealed nothing.

    We can only assume that the vocal outcry that emerged in the aftermath of the Fed’s release of its Q2 Flow of Funds statement missing this most critical of data sets on September 18, was so loud that three weeks later, this past Friday on October 9, the Fed released an official follow up explanation what exactly happened.

    Here is what happened to the missing so very critical data series, straight from the horse’s mouth:

    Q: In the September 18, 2015 release of the Z.1 Financial Accounts of the United States, some tables in the summary section on credit market instruments seem to have disappeared. What happened to these tables and where can I find the equivalent data series?

     

    With the September 18, 2015 Z.1 release, the classic presentation of the instrument category “credit market instruments” has been discontinued and replaced with two new instrument categories, “debt securities” and “loans”.  Reporting debt securities and loans separately brings the Financial Accounts more in line with the international standards for national accounts. The debt securities instrument includes open market paper, Treasury securities, agency- and GSE-backed securities, municipal securities, and corporate and foreign bonds. The new loans instrument includes depository loans not elsewhere classified, other loans and advances, mortgages, and consumer credit. Together, debt securities plus loans include all of the financial assets or liabilities previously included in credit market instruments. While the underlying instrument categories that make up the sum of debt securities and loans are the same as those in old “credit market instruments” concept, changes to a few of these categories make the new sum of debt securities and loans larger than in previous publications. 

     

    This change has had three major impacts on the table structure of the publication: (1) summary tables focusing on “credit market instruments” have been eliminated; (2) remaining summary tables have been renumbered; and (3) new instrument tables for debt securities (tables F.208 and L.208) and loans (tables F.214 and L.214) have been created.

    That’s the “what”, as for the why, note what the Fed said above: “the new sum of debt securities and loans larger than in previous publications.” Which means that not only did the Fed stop reporting a consolidated total debt series, it admits that the actual debt was higher. Some $2.7 trillion higher.

    Oops.

    Here is the Fed’s mea culpa on that particular topic:

    Q: Why is the level of total debt outstanding in the September 18, 2015 release of the Z.1 Financial Accounts of the United States so much higher than it was in the previous Z.1 release?

     

    Total debt outstanding was revised upwards due to methodology changes to both Treasury securities and security credit. Total debt outstanding is now the sum of two new instrument categories: debt securities (table L.208) and loans (table L.214). The aggregate of these instrument categories was previously called credit market instruments.

     

    Treasury securities, part of the debt securities instrument category, now include nonmarketable Treasury securities held by federal government defined benefit retirement plans (FL343061145). The inclusion of federal government defined benefit retirement plans resulted in an upward revision to the level of federal government debt of about $1.408 trillion for 2014:Q4. See the published FEDS Note “Federal Government Defined Benefit Retirement Plans” for more details http://www.federalreserve.gov/econresdata/notes/feds-notes/2015/federal-….

     

    In the domestic financial sector, borrowing previously classified as security credit liabilities (see release highlights) are now included as part of loans for the securities brokers and dealers sector. These are: (1) U.S.-chartered depository institutions loans for purchasing or carrying securities (FL763067003); (2) foreign banking offices in the U.S. loans for purchasing or carrying securities (FL753067003); and (3) Households and nonprofit organizations cash accounts at brokers and dealers (FL153067005). The revision to broker dealer debt for 2014:Q4 was roughly $962 billion.

     

    Similarly, borrowing previously classified as security credit liabilities of the household sector are now classified as loan liabilities. Margin accounts at brokers and dealers (FL663067003) are now included in the household sector’s other loans and advances instrument category. This change resulted in an upward revision of $370 billion to the outstanding amount of household sector loans for 2014:Q4.

    The bottom line:

    The total revision to the level of debt outstanding (debt securities plus loans) due to these methodology changes is approximately $2.74 trillion 2014:Q4. 

    And so the Fed has managed to kill two birds with one stone: it no longer provides a simple, one-stop-shop way to reconcile the total US credit stock, and it quietly boosted total US consolidated credit by $2.7 trillion to $62.1 trillion as of June 30, 2015.

    Luckily, for those who still care about such trivial memorandum items as “data” – made up as it may be – and would like to keep track of total US credit exposure, now better known as total debt and total loans, they can simply add up the two line items, with debt (found here) and loans (found here).

    This is how the old and new data look like: as noted, the consolidated total has risen by $2.7 trillion as of March 31, the last time the Fed reported the “old” series, and is currently a total of $62.1 trillion.

     

    Not surprisingly, with GDP not revised higher, it means that the two most important data sets for the US economy, total debt (or credit) however defined, and total GDP, now look as follows:

     

    The end result is that the ratio of Consolidated Credit to GDP, has quietly risen from 330% to 350%, without anyone in the broader public saying a word and without any of the official institutions, so seemingly concerned about the total stock of global debt, even noticing. And why should they: the S&P500 is back over 2000 so all is well.

  • Japanese Firms Admit Abenomics Failed, Government Now "Left Trying To Redistribute Wealth"

    Do not believe in official statistics, Japanese retailers seem to be saying, as they cut earnings forecasts and warn of lackluster consumer spending, a key growth engine for Japan at a time when exports and factory output are stalling. Despite government statistics claining a 2.9% rise in household spending, Reuters reports Japanese retailers exclaimed "Consumer spending has ground to a halt," as Japan heads for a quintuple dip recession. Amid falling wages and higher costs, on apparel maker warned "shoppers are tightening their purse strings."

    Abenomics is not working…

     

    "Consumer spending has ground to a halt," said Noritoshi Murata, president of Seven & i Holdings (3382.T). "There are a lot of concerns about the global economy and not many positives for consumption. Weak spending could continue into the second half of the fiscal year."

     

    Seven & i, which operates Japan's ubiquitous 7-Eleven convenience stores, on Oct. 8 trimmed its full-year profit forecast by 1.6 percent to 367 billion yen ($3.05 billion) and cut its revenue forecast by 3.9 percent to 6.15 trillion yen, triggering a fall in its shares in Tokyo.

    As Reuters reports, shortly after Abe took office late in 2012, the wealthy cashed in on a stock rally and went shopping. Unions got the pay increases they asked for, and companies started raising retail prices.

    Since then, the monetary and fiscal measures taken by Abe to rekindle Japan's economy have delivered uneven results.

     

    A sales tax hike last year to 8 percent from 5 percent helped tip the economy into a brief recession.

     

    Now, the world's third-largest economy is at risk of falling into its fourth recession in the past five years as exports, factory output and consumer spending stumble.

     

    Abe had a bold agenda of ending deflation and knocking down the barriers to growth, but many economists say the requisite policies never really materialized.

     

    Some economists worry consumer spending is now stuck in a prolonged period of very low growth.

    The main problem is wages are not rising fast enough to keep pace with rising food prices, and consumers are starting to cut back on other goods…

    Real wages, adjusted for inflation, rose 0.5 percent in July from a year earlier. That was the first gain in 27 months. But wage growth subsequently slowed to 0.2 percent in August, and summer bonuses fell from last year, government data shows.

     

    Another problem is more and more workers are getting stuck in jobs with low pay. Part-time and irregular workers comprised a record 37.4 percent of the workforce last year, according to the National Tax Bureau. Irregular workers earn on average less than half of what regular full-time workers earn, tax data show.

    The third problem is the government plans to raise the nationwide sales tax again, to 10 percent in 2017 from 8 percent, and households are already changing their behavior.

    And now the retail sector is adapting to a return to more subdued household spending.

    "Some companies are starting to realize they've actually driven away some customers by raising retail prices," said Norio Miyagawa, senior economist at Mizuho Securities.

     

    "The government's initial growth strategy did not really expand the pie. Now the government is simply left trying to redistribute wealth."

    As we noted previously, the cultish fervor remains though among the mainstream media…

    From all that you might ask yourself why would the BoJ need more QQE when its own argument put forth suggests exactly the opposite. Such contradictions are scarcely the exceptions, as the entire idea is itself at odds with itself. Apparently the only true economic danger in Japan, as elsewhere, is not the actual economy (which is always terrific or just about to be) but the evil, dreaded “deflationary mindsight.” So the BoJ upped its ante in case Japanese people start thinking unhappily about what QQE might not be able to do with, apparently, no real basis for them to actually think that way. Thus is the treasure of monetarism as it applies “forward guidance” and the Krugman version of “credibly promise to be irresponsible” as if nobody should notice anything but the intended happy ending. It really is the monetary equivalent of “the beatings will continue until morale improves.”

  • The Mindless Stupidity Of Negative Interest Rates

    Submitted by Lee Adler via The Wall Street Examiner,

    Here we are in the midst of The Great Stagnation Middle Class Elimination and some central bankers and mainstream economists are promoting negative interest rates. One economist was quoted in a Marketwatch piece by Greg Robb as saying,

    “…pushing rates into negative territory works in many ways just like a regular decline in interest rates that we’re all used to.”

    OK. That’s false. We know exactly what negative interest rates do since Europe has made a fine case study of it. They don’t work just like a “regular decline in interest rates.” I mean not that a “regular decline in interest rates,” does what economists think it does, but that’s another story. The issue here is how negative interest rates work.

    Negative interest rate proponents ignore the basic tenets of double entry accounting.

    Because there are two sides to a bank balance sheet, negative interest rates are the mirror image of positive rates. The move to negative rates imposes new costs on the banks, unlike low positive rates or ZIRP which reduce bank costs.

    The greater the negative interest rate, the higher the cost imposed, which is the same as a central bank raising interest rates when they are positive. When the Fed lowers a positive interest rate, it lowers the bank’s cost. But when there are trillions in excess reserves held by the banks as deposits at the Fed and the Fed lowers the interest rate to below zero, that becomes a cost to the banking system which it cannot avoid, except by using those cash assets to pay down debt.

    So the banks in Europe did exactly what I said they would do in mid 2014 when the ECB announced negative deposit rates. It’s exactly what any person with common sense would do, and therefore knew the banks would do. Those with the ability to do so pay off loans, which extinguishes deposits, thereby getting rid of the added cost. As opposed to stimulating growth, the European banking system shrinks. As opposed to encouraging borrowing and spending and economic growth, the policy encouraged deleveraging.

    We know that it is categorically false the negative rates are working in Europe. But facts have a way of eluding mainstream economists and central bankers.

    I wrote about this and also did a video on it in mid 2014 when the ECB went to the negative deposit rate. I showed that it would result in shrinkage of the ECB balance sheet because it would be an incentive for the banks to pay off their existing loans from the ECB in order to extinguish the offsetting reserve deposit. That is exactly what happened, both when the policy was first known immediately before it took effect, and ever since.

    So the ECB was forced to institute outright QE to reverse that shrinkage. I then predicted that the banks would use part of the QE not to stimulate lending, but to continue to pay off outstanding ECB credit. That is exactly what has occurred. This is not rocket science. It’s just common sense and paying attention to facts instead of ridiculous economic myths.

    The European banks have been steadily paying down LTRO credit and MRO credit, month in and month out. That cancels out a portion of the growth that would otherwise accrue to the ECB balance sheet from QE. Not that that QE does an iota of good for the European economy—but that’s tangential.

    So what has happened to European bank deposits since the ECB instituted negative rates? They have shrunken. Has one single mainstream economist or proponent of negative rates mentioned that, ever? I suspect not. Because they either don’t know, don’t want to know, or do not understand that if you raise the costs of holding deposits then the deposit holders will get rid of them. And the only way the system as a whole accomplishes that is to pay off loans, using the existing deposits to do so. Sooner or later the hot potato of the negative interest bearing deposit lands in the lap of someone who will do just that–use a deposit to pay off a loan and extinguish the deposit.

    But would it work differently in the US where the banking system cannot escape paying that cost because the Fed issued permanent reserves? Much of the ECB’s balance sheet was in the form of loans that could be voluntarily repaid. Not so with the Fed. It bought assets with newly issued money that instantly became cash assets of the banks, held as reserve accounts at the Fed. The amount of cash in the system is fixed until the Fed decides it isn’t. The cash can move from the reserve account of one bank to that of another. But the Fed’s balance sheet is like the Hotel California. You can never leave.

    The banks can unload their cash on other banks by buying long term assets from them. That gets rid of their reserve deposit at the Fed, but the cash just ends up in the reserve account of the bank that sold the asset. So maybe this starts a buying frenzy that pushes long term rates to zero because the banks will all want to exchange cash assets (reserves) for long term assets. That’s apparently what happened in Europe as the system there shrank. But in the US some banks always end up holding the hot potato–the reserve deposit on which they must pay the cost.

    Then what? Then you, Mr. or Ms. Banker try to recoup the cost. So you charge your depositors to hold deposits. What do they do? Rather than pay the interest on deposits, some pay off loans, extinguishing their deposits. They pay off their credit cards, their auto loans, even their mortgages, because there’s an incentive not to hold deposits. The banks start to shrink, just like today in Europe. As their balance sheets shrink, their cash assets grow as a percentage of assets and the cost of the negative deposit rate on reserves at the Fed grows as a drag on earnings.

    How can anything positive come from this?

    Seriously, has anyone thought this through?

    Can anyone show a clear example connecting the dots to show where negative interest rates have stimulated an economy? Can anyone clearly explain how charging an institution or business to hold deposits is in any way stimulative… not net stimulative, but stimulative AT ALL?

    It defies common sense.

  • There Will Be Blood – Part IV

    By Chris at www.CapitalistExploits.at

    In today’s penultimate piece on shale oil (you can catch up on the previous letters here:Part IPart II, and Part III), Harris talks about the role of central bankers of the world in the current energy bloodbath. Enjoy!

    ——————————

    Date: 20 January 2015

    Subject: There Will Be Blood – Part IV

    Modern central bankers are from the school of thought where there is always an eloquent academic model to approach each crisis with. Naturally, volatility is their enemy – in a highly leveraged world, volatility usually leads to dislocation and crisis. Central bankers obviously know that the halving of oil’s price in a few short months adds unnecessary volatility to their carefully orchestrated worlds. What they want to do is corner the price of oil within a narrow range, suppress volatility and allow complex derivatives to be built up around it so that they can use financial means to manipulate it.

    Unfortunately, oil doesn’t behave like an interest rate derivative. When there is too much supply, the only way to solve the problem is to destroy supply. When there is too much demand, it is impossible to create supply – or not within the timelines demanded by central bankers. Have the central bankers finally met the first crisis that they cannot solve?

    Bernanke Printing Money

    Ever since the great crash of 2008, central banks have learned that the solution to any instability is to print money and lower interest rates. This approach has been used repeatedly, because every crisis has stemmed from either a solvency issue caused by a lack of equity capital or a near-term liquidity constraint at some financial institution. As the oil crisis asserts itself, the central banks may have finally found a crisis that will not respond to their magic elixir of QE. In fact, lending more money to insolvent shale producers will only serve to increase oil supply. To the central banker with a hammer, every problem looks like a nail. This will be one well-oiled nail.

    Over the past six years, investors have been treated to a false sense of security regarding the financial markets – one where they’ve learned to trust that the central banks are there to bail them out. The violence of the move in EUR/CHF shows what happens when everyone expects a central banker to support things, but the support isn’t there. I think this oil crisis will be the first one to really test the central bankers globally. Too much money was lent to too many oil companies and oil producing nations – most of which cannot service this debt, much less pay it off at $45 oil. For once, the central banks have no way to save the situation – it may actually be out of their hands. When investors realize that the central bankers aren’t there…

    There Will Be Blood Explosion

    Get ready for the carnage.

    ——————————

    Next week we’ll have the final piece for you as well as a special subscriber-only report on specific ways to capitalize on the oil and gas carnage. Make sure you’re subscribed here to receive this.

    – Chris

     

    “I’m calling a top in the Narrative of Central Bank Omnipotence because it has, in fact, reached its asymptotic limit of influence and belief.” – Ben Hunt, Chief Risk Officer of Salient Partners

  • Viral Video Claims To Prove US Support Of ISIS In Iraq

    While Russian warplanes over Syria have been systematically eradicating – and providing supporting video evidence – countless ISIS outposts and command centers over the past two weeks in Islamic State-held territories (even if in the process they may have taken on some of the CIA-supposrted “moderate rebels” whose only purpose was to remove Assad and are now left without US support), many have been wondering just what the US airforce, which over the past year has been engaged in “supporting missions” over the same region, has been doing? After all, shouldn’t US warplanes have been doing for the past year what Putin’s air force has been busy with in the past 14 days?

    One answer, and a rather provocative one as it goes counter to everything that US has publicly claimed, comes courtesy of Hayder al-Khoei, an associate fellow at Chatham House, who notes that “another ‘U.S. supports ISIS’ video is going viral in Iraq.” In the video US “parachutes & supply crates” are seen in the area of Iraq’s Baiji refinery, a site of recurring ISIS incursions and battles. He adds that Vids like this & others of helos flying above Hashd/ISF positions towards ISIS-held areas reinforce narrative that US supports ISIS in #Iraq.”

    While the videos are clearly unconfirmed, the bigger question is with the US now ending its official support of Syria’s “moderate rebels” in Syria – those who were tasked to “fight ISIS” but were in fact merely arming it while failing in their given task to toppled Assad – will the Pentagon also cease support for its clandestine op, the one which has the US supporting both al Qaeda and ISIS in their pursuit to topple the Syrian leader who has steadfastly refused to allow passage to a Qatari gas pipeline.

    We should know the answer in the coming weeks, because if ISIS – under the constant bombardment of Russia – is suddenly in full retreat from the region and disappears as fast as it has appeared, then the biggest post-mortem question should be: how is it that Russia succeeded in eradicating a terrorist threat which the US was supposedly fighting for over a year, and whether instead of fighting ISIS the Pentagon, and the CIA (which as most know by now created ISIS) weren’t unofficially supporting it?

    The final question: why did Al Qaeda not issue proclamations such as the one below issued hours ago, during the “coalition”-led campaign to eradicate the region of alleged terrorists, and instead had to wait until the Russians showed up before calling in sheer panic for a united front against the aggressor?

  • PuTiN OF NeoCoN DiSTuRBia…

    PUTIN OF NEOCON DISTURBIA

  • Saudi Arabia Warns "Rumor-Mongers" On Facebook And Twitter Risk Execution

    Submitted by SM Gibson via TheAntiMedia.org,

    A specific moment from the biopic film, The Doors – starring Val Kilmer – took up residence in my subconscious years ago. In actuality, it’s two lines of slurred dialogue that randomly and subtly float into my thoughts as if they are propelled by hot air into the atmosphere. The scene depicts an inebriated Jim Morrison taunting an audience of unsuspecting concert-goers from a stage in Miami, Florida in 1969. With the sincerity that only a vainglorious sot could conjure, Morrison towers and growls over the crowd of mostly teenagers and bellows out: “Adolf Hitler is alive and well and living in Miami! I f***ed her last night,” and with the following alcohol-fueled breath he concluded the thought: “You’d all eat sh*t, wouldn’t you?”

    Because the plebeians choose to eternally dine at the media’s trough of propaganda, the ramblings of a bloated drunkard are all that make sense after the frustration takes hold. People will believe anything. One man’s lies are another man’s facts.

    The overwhelming rush of bewilderment clouds any intellectual discourse I could bring to the topic of Saudi Arabia. I have exasperated myself on the subject to a manipulated mass of deafened sycophants. Just because the veil is lifted doesn’t mean anyone will look.

    So I will leave you with strictly the facts.

    According to state-run Makkah Newspaper in Saudi Arabia, the wealthy Gulf-nation is threatening its citizens with the death penalty for spreading rumors about the government on social media.

     

    An anonymous source within the Ministry of Justice stated only the worst “rumour-mongers” will be sentenced to death, while lesser offenders of the new policy will be disciplined with flogging, imprisonment, travel bans, house arrest, fines and social media bans.

    Although the source is not mentioned by name, it should not be assumed that details of the column are any less credible. Human rights organization Reprieve reports that Makkah’s allegiance to the Saudi government is such that the claims should be considered legitimate.

    “Although the report does not use a named source, the nature of state-censorship in the Kingdom makes it unlikely that such claims would be made without the consent of the authorities. In addition, the Makkah Newspaper appears to enjoy government support – according to local news reports, it was launched last year by the Governor of Mecca, in the presence of the Minister for Culture and Information,” according to Reprieve.

    The inside source went on to state that social media websites “cause confusion in societies.”

    Maya Foa, director of Reprieve’s death penalty team, said “This looks like yet another heavy-handed attempt to crush dissent in Saudi Arabia, especially among the young.”

    Saudi Arabia, which was recently chosen to head the U.N. Human Rights Council, has already been the subject of staunch criticism by human rights groups around the globe in recent months for various vile rulings and barbaric acts.

    Last month, the oil-rich nation and strong ally of the United States denied the final appeal for 20-year-old Ali Mohammed al-Nimr, who was arrested at age 17 for alleged involvement in anti-government protests. He faces beheading and crucifixion at the hands of the regime, which could be carried out any day.

    UNICEF has also recently reported that a Saudi-led military campaign resulted in the deaths of over 2,300 civilians – including over 500 children – since March 26th of this year.

    The same Saudi government that has inked arms deals with the United States totaling over $95 billion over the past five years is also responsible for at least 134 executions in 2015.

    If free speech in the modern era includes the phrase ‘Give us Tweets or give us death,’ the Saudi royal family is more than content to administer the latter.

    How does the United States still align itself with a kingdom that is a clear perpetrator of countless human rights abuses while at the same time militarily intervening in numerous other countries under the guise of promoting human rights? Even stranger, why have the American people still not acknowledged the blatant hypocrisy of their government?

  • The Tragic Ending To Obama's Bay Of Pigs: CIA Hands Over Syria To Russia

    One week ago, when summarizing the current state of play in Syria, we said that for Obama, “this is shaping up to be the most spectacular US foreign policy debacle since Vietnam.” Yesterday, in tacit confirmation of this assessment, the Obama administration threw in the towel on one of the most contentious programs it has implemented in “fighting ISIS”, when the Defense Department announced it was abandoning the goal of a U.S.-trained Syrian force.

    But this, so far, partial admission of failure only takes care of one part of Obama’s problem: there is the question of the “other” rebels supported by the US, those who are not part of the officially-disclosed public program with the fake goal of fighting ISIS; we are talking, of course, about the nearly 10,000 CIA-supported “other rebels”, or technically mercenaries, whose only task is to take down Assad.

    The same “rebels” whose fate the AP profiles today when it writes that the CIA began a covert operation in 2013 to arm, fund and train a moderate opposition to Assad. Over that time, the CIA has trained an estimated 10,000 fighters, although the number still fighting with so-called moderate forces is unclear.

    The effort was separate from the one run by the military, which trained militants willing to promise to take on IS exclusively. That program was widely considered a failure, and on Friday, the Defense Department announced it was abandoning the goal of a U.S.-trained Syrian force, instead opting to equip established groups to fight IS.

    It is this effort, too, that in the span of just one month Vladimir Putin has managed to render utterly useless, as it is officially “off the books” and thus the US can’t formally support these thousands of “rebel-fighters” whose only real task was to repeat the “success” of Ukraine and overthrow Syria’s legitimate president: something which runs counter to the US image of a dignified democracy not still resorting to 1960s tactics of government overthrow. That, and coupled with Russia and Iran set to take strategic control of Syria in the coming months, the US simply has no toehold any more in the critical mid-eastern nation.

    And so another sad chapter in the CIA’s book of failed government overthrows comes to a close, leaving the “rebels” that the CIA had supported for years, to fend for themselves.

    From AP:

    CIA-backed rebels in Syria, who had begun to put serious pressure on President Bashar Assad’s forces, are now under Russian bombardment with little prospect of rescue by their American patrons, U.S. officials say.

     

    Over the past week, Russia has directed parts of its air campaign against U.S.-funded groups and other moderate opposition in a concerted effort to weaken them, the officials say. The Obama administration has few options to defend those it had secretly armed and trained.

     

    The Russians “know their targets, and they have a sophisticated capacity to understand the battlefield situation,” said Rep. Mike Pompeo, R-Kan., who serves on the House Intelligence Committee and was careful not to confirm a classified program. “They are bombing in locations that are not connected to the Islamic State” group.

    With the US now in damage control mode, the finger pointing begins.

    First, it is only natural that finger will point at Putin – after all he is an easy target:

    U.S. intelligence officials see many factors motivating Russia’s intervention: Moscow’s reasserting its primacy as a great power, propping up Assad and wanting to deal a blow to the United States, which has insisted that Assad must go to end Syria’s civil war.

     

    Russia is also interested in containing IS, an organization that includes thousands of Chechen fighters who may pose a threat to Russia, officials say.

     

    But in the short term, “my conclusion is that the timing of their intervention was driven by Assad really going critical,” said Rep. Jim Himes, D-Conn., also a House Intelligence Committee member.

    Alas, blaming Putin only underscores his latest victory over the US state department, leaving the US diplomatic corps no choice but to blame its own. This is imminent, and many heads will – or should – roll.

    The administration is scrambling to come up with a response to Russia’s moves, but few believe the U.S. can protect its secret rebel allies. The administration has all but ruled out providing CIA-backed groups with surface-to-air missiles that can down aircraft, fearing such weapons would end up in the wrong hands, officials say.

     

    Rep. Adam Schiff, the top Democrat on the committee, says the U.S. should consider establishing a no-fly zone that allows rebels a safe place from which to operate, and shooting down Syrian helicopters that are bombing civilians. He said the U.S. also should provide arms to the Ukrainian government fighting Russian-backed separatists.

     

    A no-fly zone would require the U.S. military to be ready to engage in air battles with the Syrian government, something it is not prepared to do.

    Why? Because it is not the Syrian government that is flying those sorties above Syria, it is Putin, and despite all the posturing, Obama is unwilling to risk World War III just to stop a Qatar gas pipeline to Europe.

    Which means Obama now has just one option: admitting that his latest gamble to overthrow Assad, one which started in 2013 with the fake YouTube clips of “chemical attacks”, and the resultant naval escalation, coupled with the CIA’s training of thousands of local rebels mercenaries, and which escalated with the “appearance” of ISIS in the summer of 2014, is about to end with Obama admitting yet another major political defeat.

    The administration “is debating the merits of taking further action or whether they are better off letting Putin hang himself,” he said, referring to Russian President Vladimir Putin.

    Because somehow handing over control of the Middle East to the Russian-controlled axis – incidentally the topic of another article yesterday in the WSJ “America’s Fading Footprint in the Middle East” – is now spun as a defeat for Putin.

    “Our options are much narrower than they were two weeks ago,” said Sen. Angus King, I-Maine, who serves on the Intelligence and Armed Services committees. “I don’t think there is any simple answer. … Further air involvement has become very problematic because of the Russian engagement.”

    * * *

    And so Putin has once again “won”, or as the administration would prefer to spin it, “has hung himself.”

    Incidentally, this is just the beginning. Now that the U.S. has begun its pivot out of the middle-east, handing it over to Putin as Russia’s latest sphere of influence on a silver platter, there will be staggering consequences for middle-east geopolitics. In out preview of things to come last week, we concluded by laying these out; we will do the same again:

    The US, in conjunction with Saudi Arabia and Qatar, attempted to train and support Sunni extremists to overthrow the Assad regime. Some of those Sunni extremists ended up going crazy and declaring a Medeival caliphate putting the Pentagon and Langley in the hilarious position of being forced to classify al-Qaeda as “moderate.” The situation spun out of control leading to hundreds of thousands of civilian deaths and when Washington finally decided to try and find real “moderates” to help contain the Frankenstein monster the CIA had created in ISIS (there were of course numerous other CIA efforts to arm and train anti-Assad fighters, see below for the fate of the most “successful” of those groups), the effort ended up being a complete embarrassment that culminated with the admission that only “four or five” remained and just days after that admission, those “four or five” were car jacked by al-Qaeda in what was perhaps the most under-reported piece of foreign policy comedy in history.

     

    Meanwhile, Iran sensed an epic opportunity to capitalize on Washington’s incompetence. Tehran then sent its most powerful general to Russia where a pitch was made to upend the Mid-East balance of power. The Kremlin loved the idea because after all, Moscow is stinging from Western economic sanctions and Vladimir Putin is keen on showing the West that, in the wake of the controversy surrounding the annexation of Crimea and the conflict in eastern Ukraine, Russia isn’t set to back down. Thanks to the fact that the US chose extremists as its weapon of choice in Syria, Russia gets to frame its involvement as a “war on terror” and thanks to Russia’s involvement, Iran gets to safely broadcast its military support for Assad just weeks after the nuclear deal was struck. Now, Russian airstrikes have debilitated the only group of CIA-backed fighters that had actually proven to be somewhat effective and Iran and Hezbollah are preparing a massive ground invasion under cover of Russian air support. Worse still, the entire on-the-ground effort is being coordinated by the Iranian general who is public enemy number one in Western intelligence circles and he’s effectively operating at the behest of Putin, the man that Western media paints as the most dangerous person on the planet.

     

    As incompetent as the US has proven to be throughout the entire debacle, it’s still difficult to imagine that Washington, Riyadh, London, Doha, and Jerusalem are going to take this laying down and on that note, we close with our assessment from Thursday:  “If Russia ends up bolstering Iran’s position in Syria (by expanding Hezbollah’s influence and capabilities) and if the Russian air force effectively takes control of Iraq thus allowing Iran to exert a greater influence over the government in Baghdad, the fragile balance of power that has existed in the region will be turned on its head and in the event this plays out, one should not expect Washington, Riyadh, Jerusalem, and London to simply go gentle into that good night.”

    Which is not to say that the latest US failure to overthrow a mid-east government was a total failure. As Joshua Landis, a Syria expert at the University of Oklahoma says “probably 60 to 80 percent of the arms that America shoveled in have gone to al-Qaida and its affiliates.”

    Which is at least great news for the military-industrial complex. It means more “terrorist attacks” on U.S. “friends and allies”, and perhaps even on U.S. soil – all courtesy of the US government supplying the weapons – are imminent.

  • The G-30 Group Of Central Bankers Warn They Can "No Longer Save The World"

    In a detailed report by the Group of Thirty, central bankers warned that ZIRP and money printing were not sufficient to revive economic growth and risked becoming semi-permanent measures. As Reuters reports, the flow of easy money has inflated asset prices like stocks and housing in many countries but have failed to stimulate economic growth; and with growth estimates trending lower and easy money increasing company leverage, the specter of a debt trap is now haunting advanced economies. "Central banks have described their actions as 'buying time' for governments to finally resolve the crisis… But time is wearing on," sending a message of "you're on your own" to governments around the world.

    The G30 begins their report rather pointedly…

    Central banks worked alongside governments to address the unfolding crises during 2007–09, and their actions were a necessary and appropriate crisis management response. But central bank policies alone should not be expected to deliver sustainable economic growth. Such policies must be complemented by other policy measures implemented by governments.

     

    At present, much remains to be done by governments, parliaments, public authorities, and the private sector to tackle policy, economic, and structural weaknesses that originate outside the control or influence of central banks. In order to contribute to sustainable economic growth, the report presumes that all other actors fulfill their responsibilities.

    Roughly translated… central bankers are saying "you are now on your own."

    Central banks alone cannot be relied upon to deliver all the policies necessary to achieve macroeconomic goals. Governments must also act and use the policy-making space provided by conventional and unconventional monetary policy measures. Failure to do so would be a serious error and would risk setting the stage for further economic disturbances and imbalances in the future.

    And the "need to exit" appears to be front and center for The G30 bankers…

    There seems to be an almost unanimous view that monetary policy in the major AMEs will have to be normalized at some point. However, even if views differ about what precisely normal might mean, presumed dates for exit also differ due to different countries being at different points in the business cycle. There is also agreement that a danger exists of exiting too soon, thus aborting a nascent recovery, and also of exiting too late, thus encouraging some combination of higher inflation and other imbalances that could also weigh on recovery.

     

    However, where serious disagreement arises is when it comes to discussing which danger is the greater. Those worried about too early an exit point to the example of the Federal Reserve in 1937. In contrast, those worried about too late an exit point to the inflation that followed the Fed-Treasury Accord in the late 1940s and to the inflationary surge in the early part of the 1970s.

     

    In recent years, distortions in financial markets and the effects on EMEs have also moved much higher up the list of concerns of this latter group.

     

    While reasonable people can disagree on such objective issues, a number of political economy factors seem to make exiting too late the more likely outcome.

     

    First, there is great uncertainty concerning the consequences of tightening.

     

    Second, in some cases it will in fact be clear that tightening will reveal some debts as being unserviceable, and some financial institutions as undercapitalized. Central banks will then be asked to wait until these other sectors have become more robust, which could well take a long time. The danger is that debt levels will rise with the passage of time, strengthening the arguments for still more forbearance—the debt trap discussed above.

     

    Third, debtors will obviously resist the tightening of policy. Since governments are struggling to manage record-high sovereign debt levels, they too will be tempted to put pressure on their central banks to push back tightening as far as possible.

    But delaying an 'exit' has costs…

    Wicksell, Hayek, Koo, Minsky, and others have, over many decades, identified a variety of theoretical concerns arising from the excessive expansion of money and credit during booms. Rising inflation, investment misallocations, balance sheet overhangs, banking sector instability, and volatile international capital flows were all highlighted as threats to future economic stability. Moreover, by 2007 it was evident that these were matters of practical concern as well.

     

    The policies followed by the major central banks since 2008, while contributing to stability in the short run and conceivably avoiding a second great depression, might also have aggravated threats to future stability. These policies have had undesirable macroeconomic side effects both in the AMEs themselves and in EMEs. Admittedly, in the latter case, the policy responses of the EMEs themselves to inflows of foreign capital have also played a contributing role.

     

    "Capital losses would affect many investors, including banks, and the process of extend and pretend for poor loans would have to come to a stop," the G30 report said.

     

    With the consequences of an exit from easy money so unpredictable, the G30 said the risk was of exiting too late for fear of sparking another crisis.

    And so, while 'exit' is seen as urgent, it is unlikely…

    "Faced with uncertainty, the natural default position is the status quo," the G30 said.

    In other words more of the same… and while  The G30 are careful to note the glass-half-full persepctive of the future, their "endgame" scenario of continuing weak (or even weaker) growth  is troubling…

    Should the global economy stay weak, or indeed should it weaken again as financial markets overshoot, we could face the possibility of debt deflation. The almost 40 percent decline in commodity prices since mid-2014 could be a precursor of such a slowdown. In this environment, risk-free rates would stay very low and there would be no exit for monetary policy.

     

    Nevertheless, the current prices of many other financial assets would be revealed as excessive. Capital losses would affect many investors, including banks, and the process of extend and pretend for poor loans would have to come to a stop. In this scenario, for all the political economy arguments presented above, attempts might nevertheless be made to rely on monetary policy to restore demand. However, just as past efforts have failed to gain traction, renewed efforts would likely have a similar outcome. This would be particularly likely if the overhang of debt had worsened in the interval as has indeed happened over the last few years.

     

    In such circumstances, governments would also be faced with chronic revenue shortfalls. This could lead to a worst-case situation where deflation would actually sow the seeds for an uncontrolled inflationary outcome. Governments with both large deficits and large debts must borrow to survive, but worries about debt accumulation might imply an increasing reluctance on the part of the private sector to lend to them at sustainable rates. In that case, recourse to the central bank is inevitable, and hyperinflation often the final result.

    And the side effects of central bank policies during the crisis is still more worrying…

    Central banks see their actions as buying time for governments to address problems that are essentially real, not monetary. However, governments have thus far not reacted as necessary. Recognizing the political difficulties of addressing these underlying problems, they prefer to believe that central bank actions will be sufficient to restore strong, stable, and balanced growth. Thus, they are strongly tempted to forebear in the pursuit of policies that might be more effective. The longer this standoff persists, the more dangerous it becomes as the undesirable side effects of current central bank policies continue to cumulate.

    Which is exactly what Macquarie hinted at… the academics will be the first to note that policy escalation may be required (helicopter money).. and then policy-makers have the ivory tower to lean on when they unleash it.

    *  *  *
    Finally, The G30 admits – it's all an illusion…

    Central bank policies since the outbreak of the crisis have made a crucial contribution to restoring the appearance of financial stability.

     

    Nevertheless, for this appearance to become a reality, underlying problems rooted in very high debt levels must be resolved if global growth is to be more sustainably restored.

    So, the bottom line, reading between the lines of this 80-page report, is that

    Central Bankers know their policies have done (and will do) nothing to promote real economic improvements, are puttingh pressure on governments to do something (anything), admit that is unlikely (because the central bankers have always saved them before), expect extreme policy measures to become the status quo (despite admitting their failure) for fear of any asset weakness, and suggest more measures might be needed (which have led to hyperinflation in the past).

    But apart from that – everything is awesome!!

    *  *  *

    Full G30 Report below…

  • The Failure To Act Responsibly Will Be The Addendum To Bernanke's Memoirs

    Authored by Mark St.Cyr,

    There was a time not all that long ago if someone asked who was The Chair of The Federal Reserve more than likely you’d get a blank stare or, just a shrug. Today, not only can people (people is a relative term as in; people at least trying to pay attention) name the current Chair, they can also name more than two or three current members. e.g. Fisher, Bullard, Evans, and so on.

    This change whether by design or, by happenstance is inconsequential. Either way, what it has done is changed the very fabric, as well as understanding, of how not only the economy is fostered in the U.S. But also – who controls it.

    Long gone is the illusion of: an elected body by the citizenry. Today, it’s become demonstrably self-evident the economy is run by an elected body – by the elected. And the consequences of this change is only now beginning to openly reverberate both in amplitude and frequency with every passing day.

    Currently as I type this former Fed. Chair Ben Bernanke has just wrapped up a week-long tour of financial media frenzy to promote his book, The Courage To Act: A memoir of a crisis and its aftermath (2015 W.W. Norton & Company). Personally I watched a few. Yet, I could only bear the burden so far. So inspired by the title I myself acted, with courage – and changed the channel.

    Listening to the answers to many of the “soft ball” style questions was one thing. Listening to the near sycophantic, vapid, lack of understanding or depth concerning the economy and its relationship as expressed via the capital markets and more by the many that hold themselves out to be “experts?” I just couldn’t take it for more than a few minutes. It was painfully monotonous.

    One point that Mr. Bernanke kept referring to, that for me, in many respects was the underlying issue that demonstrates exactly how far beyond the Fed’s mandate as well as its scope not only within the economy, but (and it’s a very big but) how this insertion has adulterated the capitalistic dynamic known as free markets (i.e., printed money via QE and its other programs as to bolster the financial markets) was this…

    His assertion, as well as his stated defense for such policy actions was (I’m paraphrasing) “He was disappointed with the lack of policy responses from Washington which left the bulk of the heavy lifting solely on the shoulders of the Fed.”

    Well Duh – imagine that. Washington shifting the burden (or setting up the ability to shift blame) to another body or person rather than take the lead themselves. Oh, say it isn’t so!

    I mean truly – are you kidding me? What form of academic genius does it take to realize if the Fed. is willingly inserting itself into the economic structure along with remaining at the Zero bound and a willingness, as well as obligingly printing and injecting TRILLIONS of dollars for years into the very fabric of the financial markets propping them up. Washington doesn’t need (nor probably will) to do a single thing? Even if this “propping up” has more in common with a Potemkin Village analogy than any real example resembling a true recovery. Washington is going to say “Hey, stop propping things up making our lives easier. That’s our territory?” Please spare me.

    Capital formation has now been replaced with nothing more than front-running schemes. And this has only been made possible not by the courage to act – but rather – the failure to act responsibly.

    For years now it’s been clear to anyone who wasn’t some next in rotation “economics expert” in financial media that this juiced up HFT Frankenstein inspired monstrosity borne only to a punch-bowl made available, refilled, and spiked with the monetary equivalent of amphetamines and energy drinks would inevitably turn on its masters. Yet we’re told (now near daily) “They’ve got this!” Sure they do. All this coming from those that couldn’t even see (or anticipate) the obvious responses they would get from Washington.

    Who needs a budget when the Fed. is printing and buying? Who needs to cut costs when the Fed. is (repeat former line here)? Who needs to worry about tax legislation when (again cut and paste last line here)? Who needs to argue if your spending too much on this program or that program if (you guessed, rinse repeat). And you could fill a book let alone an article with far too many more.

    The issue I take with Mr. Bernanke’s stance is one I take with the whole Ivory Tower cabal. It would seem economics is a profession based solely on “The chicken or the egg” quandary. Everything first and foremost must be presented, formulated, and articulated through this prism. There’s never anything such as 1+1=2.

    Here’s a clue to any and all within the Ivory Tower or Ivy League academia using 1+1=2 math.

    When you replace the economic policy stewardship of the body politic with actions that can both mask the health of that economy, as well as benefit its donor class, while simultaneously allowing that body politic to defend and deflect criticism stating “It’s not us – it’s them!” Not only are you not going to get any help, you’re going to get something you thought was only meant to be voiced at the schleps, not the Ivory Ivy class.

    For proof as well as leaving no room for doubt what Mr. Bernanke was allowing the Fed. to morph into. It was here during the following exchange where “courage” turned into something else in my opinion. For it was stated both clearly, publicly, and forcefully in 2012 exactly what was being expected (as well as insinuated to be continued) from Washington. And it seems today Mr. Bernanke is a little mystified, befuddled or, possibly upset with Washington’s lack of response? Please, it couldn’t have been stated any clearer. They demanded – you acted. Period end of story. No several hundred paged book to explain. No chicken or egg quandary. No Einstein inspired formulations with Rube Goldberg styled flow chart needed to explain. It was all done in elementary fashion: They dictated, The Fed. acquiesced, the results are self-evident: A mess. Again, period. End of story.

    As I’ve stated far too many times to count, it’s a purely legitimate argument on both sides with completely reasonable assertions on whether or not the Fed. should have intervened in the ways that it did during the original financial panic and crisis of 2008. Again, there are justifiable reasoning’s on both sides that will (as well as should) be debated for years to come. However, it’s what was allowed as well as fostered and promoted after the original crisis that is not only controversial, but rather – a catastrophe of monetary policy.

    When I think of the courage to act when it comes to monetary policy my mind seems to hearken back to times in history when former Chair holders such as Paul Volker raised interest rates in the face of staggering opposition from Washington. He stayed his course and brought inflation back under control. I also think of William Martin Jr. who like very few others understood the hardest job of the Fed. was to not only remind Wall Street, but to articulate those necessities that a responsible Fed’s primary function also included (I’m paraphrasing) “to take away the punch-bowl just as the party gets going” Again, all to Washington’s chagrin. This is not what we have today.

    All I’ll use as an example to illustrate how the Fed. has captured itself with a seemingly never-ending resolution more in concert with “The Sorcerer’s Apprentice” (Fantasia/Disney) rather than the “Wizard of Oz” (L. Frank Baum/Geo-M.Hill Co.) is the following:

    When the “Great financial crisis” hit the S&P 500™ was bouncing within the 1500 range. After the now referred to “generational low” during the crisis of 666-ish one could as I’ve iterated earlier argue both for, as well as against, the Fed’s insertion with its transfiguration of monetary policy to stabilize the then fragile markets. Again, this debate will go on for decades.

    However; exactly what “courage” took place after that? In other words: once the markets regained within 100 odd points of its previous all time highs. What enabled or emboldened the decision to not only leave the “punch-bowl” out, but rather – to continually refill it to surpass those previous highs just shy of an additional 1000 points?! (i.e., 1400’s in April 2012 to 2100’s Nov. 2014) Let it not be lost this happened in 2012 at precisely the same time period of Mr. Bernanke’s appearance before Congress mentioned above.

    Today this “failure to act responsibly” has led us to witnessing a failed communication strategy initiated by the then former Chair. An economy that is faltering at every level of unadulterated measurement. A political class that is still enabled as well as emboldened to deflect and deter any criticism, as well as responsibility for their own inaction. An ever-growing Emerging Market crisis fostered by years of ZIRP policy, combined with credit markets, as well as money markets beginning to not only show stress, but beginning to buckle with withdrawal symptoms from the “free money” equivalent only to those experienced by a junkie going cold turkey and a whole lot more.

    You can also add to this in the wake of Mr. Bernanke’s exit we now have a Fed. so confused, scared, or reluctant to make the slightest of monetary changes; considerations of international developments, as well as Wall Street unease must now openly be stated. Along with an open admission for the first time in Fed. history (via their Dot Plot) negative interest rates are on the table of discussion. It’s an absolute mess pure and simple. And it’s going to get a whole lot worse – not better in the coming future.

    All one needs for proof between “courage” and “failure” is to look back just a mere 30-ish days ago when it appeared as if the markets were once again going to free-fall if the Fed. dared try to move toward the slightest adjustment in relation to normalizing monetary policy. Once again the markets did a spin-on-a-dime and reversed rallying back towards all time highs not on “economic stability” but rather the realization that the Fed. was not only painted into a corner by its own hands, but also boxed, locked, and handcuffed. The continuation of “free money” as well as the resurgence of QE are once again back on the agenda. You just can’t make this stuff up. It’s maddening.

    The only brilliant move that appears as more of an act of self-preservation as opposed to anything resembling courage or monetary policy was his decision to get the heck out of Dodge and leave the oncoming disaster to anyone foolish enough to accept it.

    After all – you can’t rewrite history as well as reform one’s image if you’re the one that has to clean up the resulting mess in one’s wake. It seems to be working for his own predecessor, he was smart to follow. The ones who may not be so lucky is not only the current Chair, but rather – all of us.

  • Pentagon Will Pay "Condolence" Blood Money To Afghan Hospital Bombing Victims

    Following last weekend’s horrific killing of 22 innocent civilians in an Afghanistan hospital, of whom a majority were physicians belonging to the Doctors Without Borders (MSF) group, at first first the Pentagon denied responsibility for the attack calling the dead “collateral damage” and accusing the Taliban of fighting from the hospital; then after the global media refused to quickly turn the other way, the US blamed Afghans for calling in the strike while a desperate for distractions Pentagon was raging about “civilian casualties” in Syria at the hands of Russian warplanes; then, when this too gambit failed and when the MSF screamed bloody murder, literally, and accused Nobel Peace Prize winner Barack Obama of engaging in a war crime, the US finally admitted it did it.

    And while Obama did apologize to the MSF, and demanded a deeper investigation to “get to the bottom of things” like any alleged peace prize holding war criminal, it is what he did yesterday that showed just how alleged “war criminals” treat collateral damage aka human casualties: as goods whose ultimate value can be expressed in dollar (or rather loans, since as we noted the US has 3.5x more debt than it has GDP).

    According to the WSJ, the Pentagon is offering “condolence payments” to the civilians injured and the families of those killed by a U.S. airstrike that destroyed a hospital near Kunduz, Afghanistan. Because, the thinking probably goes, human lives are like any other commodity and can be measured in reserve notes. However, what is more disturbing is that since the US prints the world’s reserve currency, should Obama proceed to exterminate countless other “collaterally damaged” civilians, all that the US will need to do is print a few more million to wash its – and that of the “free and democratic world” – conscience, and all shall be well in all future cases.

    We say “millions” loosely: in reality we don’t know what the agreed upon payment will be – if any – because the Pentagon didn’t say how much it would pay: it could well be much less. We do wonder, however, just what the actuarial calculation involved is when the US determines the value of a human life, both in Afghanistan and elsewhere, because surely to the Pentagon one Afghanistani life has a vastly different value than the life of civilians in other nations.

    Perhaps the Obama administration should disclose the assumptions used in its death-for-pay.xls model?

    Less controversial was the Pentagon’s announcement on said Saturday that it would also provide funds for repairing the hospital, which has been abandoned, as well as the payments. It is unclear just why it would do this: it is not as if anyone will work in a hospital that the US has declared a bomb zone and which can explode at any given moment for no reason at all aside from some AC-130 gunnery sergeant got an order to shoot it and so he did.

    The WSJ adds that the compensation will be handled through the existing Commanders’ Emergency Response Program in Afghanistan, and if necessary additional authority will be sought from Congress, Pentagon press secretary Peter Cook said in a statement issued Saturday.

    “The Department of Defense believes it is important to address the consequences of the tragic incident that the Doctors Without Borders hospital,” Mr. Cook said.

    By which he now know he meant to spend “blood money” to silence the families of the dead.

    Elsewhere, Doctors Without Borders has called for an independent probe of the incident by the Swiss-based International Humanitarian Fact-Finding Commission, which is made up of diplomats, legal experts, doctors and some former military officials from nine European countries, including Britain and Russia. It was created after the Gulf War in 1991 and has never deployed a fact-finding mission.

    It was unclear just how much the Pentagon would have to spend here to, mostly in the form of bribes, to assure the found “facts” are in line with a narrative that is least damaging to the US war machine.

  • How 'ObamaTrade' Will Drive Up The Cost Of Medicine Worldwide

    Authored by Julia Belluz, originally posted at Vox.com,

    After nearly eight years of negotiations, the United States and 11 other countries have finally reached consensus on the Trans-Pacific Partnership, one of the largest trade deals in a generation that'll involve nearly half the world's GDP.

    The sprawling deal would affect a variety of issues, including tariffs, labor rights, and international investment. But the deal's most controversial provisions are the ones limiting competition in the pharmaceutical industry. According to Doctors Without Borders, "The TPP will still go down in history as the worst trade agreement for access to medicines in developing countries."

    Though the final text of the agreement won't be available for at least another month, here's what we know so far.

    The TPP will drive up costs for some of the most expensive drugs on the market in the poorest countries

    One of the biggest sticking points in the negotiations had to do with data protection for biologic drugs.

    Biologics are treatments made from biological sources, including vaccines, anti-toxins, proteins, and monoclonal antibodies for everything from Ebola to cancer. As the Brookings Institution explains, biologics are much more structurally complex than regular "small-molecule drugs" and are therefore more difficult and expensive to make, costing on average 22 times more than nonbiologic drugs.

    Because of the high prices of these drugs, companies are very interested in developing "biosimilars" – cheaper copies of the original drugs, similar to generic versions of pharmaceuticals. The reason these biosimilars are so cheap is that manufacturers can usually just rely on data from clinical trials submitted by the maker of the original biologic. But, of course, the maker of the original drug doesn't want everyone using its data and making cheap knockoffs.

    So in the United States, there are really protective rules around this: Any maker of a biologic gets 12 years of data exclusivity. The FDA can't approve a similar drug that relies on the original data during this time. (Theoretically, other companies could conduct their own trials to create a biosimilar, but because this is so expensive, it defeats the point.) By contrast, in other countries, there are looser rules – or no rules – around such data exclusivity. Japan offers eight years, for instance. Brunei offers zero.

    As part of the TPP, the United States (and the pharmaceutical lobby) had been pushing to get every country to agree on 12 years of data protection for biologics. The final agreement falls somewhere in between, with a period of data exclusivity from at least five to eight years, according to the New York Times.

    This means the agreement will prevent more affordable biosimilars from entering the market for a longer period of time in places that previously had no bar to entry. And the burden of this provision will be felt by the world's poorest countries, according to Judit Rius Sanjuan, the legal policy adviser for Doctors Without Borders.

    "Peru, Vietnam, Malaysia, and Mexico – they had zero monopoly protection on data for biologics," she said. Now they'll have to wait at least five years before allowing cheaper biosimilars onto the market. "It's a loss for people in developing countries. They'll face higher prices for longer periods of time, and there are many products we need that are biologics."

    The TPP could also delay cheaper, generic versions of drugs

    Meanwhile, every country has systems for granting patents and legal privileges to the first company to invent a drug – a reward for innovation. After these expire, other companies can apply to get their cheaper "generic" copies of these drugs on the market.

    At the moment, it's up to countries to decide whether things like a small change in a drug molecule should warrant a patent extension. But the final TPP creates patent-related obligations in countries that never had them before, explained Rius Sanjuan. To put it simply, this would directly target a country's ability to define its own patent law and put a higher standard on when generics can become available.

    Critics believe these provisions will likely to limit the availability of cheaper generics. "We know from experience that more expansive patent laws end up reducing the availability of generic medicines," said Yale law professor and global health researcher Amy Kapczynski, who wrote about the deal's health impact in the New England Journal of Medicine. "When you start mucking around in the precise ways countries can define your patent laws," she said, "you limit everyone’s policy flexibility."

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 11, 2015

  • The Tragic Ending To Obama's Bay Of Pigs: CIA Hands Over Syria To Russia

    One week ago, when summarizing the current state of play in Syria, we said that for Obama, “this is shaping up to be the most spectacular US foreign policy debacle since Vietnam.” Yesterday, in tacit confirmation of this assessment, the Obama administration threw in the towel on one of the most contentious programs it has implemented in “fighting ISIS”, when the Defense Department announced it was abandoning the goal of a U.S.-trained Syrian force.

    But this, so far, partial admission of failure only takes care of one part of Obama’s problem: there is the question of the “other” rebels supported by the US, those who are not part of the officially-disclosed public program with the fake goal of fighting ISIS; we are talking, of course, about the nearly 10,000 CIA-supported “other rebels”, or technically mercenaries, whose only task is to take down Assad.

    The same “rebels” whose fate the AP profiles today when it writes that the CIA began a covert operation in 2013 to arm, fund and train a moderate opposition to Assad. Over that time, the CIA has trained an estimated 10,000 fighters, although the number still fighting with so-called moderate forces is unclear.

    The effort was separate from the one run by the military, which trained militants willing to promise to take on IS exclusively. That program was widely considered a failure, and on Friday, the Defense Department announced it was abandoning the goal of a U.S.-trained Syrian force, instead opting to equip established groups to fight IS.

    It is this effort, too, that in the span of just one month Vladimir Putin has managed to render utterly useless, as it is officially “off the books” and thus the US can’t formally support these thousands of “rebel-fighters” whose only real task was to repeat the “success” of Ukraine and overthrow Syria’s legitimate president: something which runs counter to the US image of a dignified democracy not still resorting to 1960s tactics of government overthrow. That, and coupled with Russia and Iran set to take strategic control of Syria in the coming months, the US simply has no toehold any more in the critical mid-eastern nation.

    And so another sad chapter in the CIA’s book of failed government overthrows comes to a close, leaving the “rebels” that the CIA had supported for years, to fend for themselves.

    From AP:

    CIA-backed rebels in Syria, who had begun to put serious pressure on President Bashar Assad’s forces, are now under Russian bombardment with little prospect of rescue by their American patrons, U.S. officials say.

     

    Over the past week, Russia has directed parts of its air campaign against U.S.-funded groups and other moderate opposition in a concerted effort to weaken them, the officials say. The Obama administration has few options to defend those it had secretly armed and trained.

     

    The Russians “know their targets, and they have a sophisticated capacity to understand the battlefield situation,” said Rep. Mike Pompeo, R-Kan., who serves on the House Intelligence Committee and was careful not to confirm a classified program. “They are bombing in locations that are not connected to the Islamic State” group.

    With the US now in damage control mode, the finger pointing begins.

    First, it is only natural that finger will point at Putin – after all he is an easy target:

    U.S. intelligence officials see many factors motivating Russia’s intervention: Moscow’s reasserting its primacy as a great power, propping up Assad and wanting to deal a blow to the United States, which has insisted that Assad must go to end Syria’s civil war.

     

    Russia is also interested in containing IS, an organization that includes thousands of Chechen fighters who may pose a threat to Russia, officials say.

     

    But in the short term, “my conclusion is that the timing of their intervention was driven by Assad really going critical,” said Rep. Jim Himes, D-Conn., also a House Intelligence Committee member.

    Alas, blaming Putin only underscores his latest victory over the US state department, leaving the US diplomatic corps no choice but to blame its own. This is imminent, and many heads will – or should – roll.

    The administration is scrambling to come up with a response to Russia’s moves, but few believe the U.S. can protect its secret rebel allies. The administration has all but ruled out providing CIA-backed groups with surface-to-air missiles that can down aircraft, fearing such weapons would end up in the wrong hands, officials say.

     

    Rep. Adam Schiff, the top Democrat on the committee, says the U.S. should consider establishing a no-fly zone that allows rebels a safe place from which to operate, and shooting down Syrian helicopters that are bombing civilians. He said the U.S. also should provide arms to the Ukrainian government fighting Russian-backed separatists.

     

    A no-fly zone would require the U.S. military to be ready to engage in air battles with the Syrian government, something it is not prepared to do.

    Why? Because it is not the Syrian government that is flying those sorties above Syria, it is Putin, and despite all the posturing, Obama is unwilling to risk World War III just to stop a Qatar gas pipeline to Europe.

    Which means Obama now has just one option: admitting that his latest gamble to overthrow Assad, one which started in 2013 with the fake YouTube clips of “chemical attacks”, and the resultant naval escalation, coupled with the CIA’s training of thousands of local rebels mercenaries, and which escalated with the “appearance” of ISIS in the summer of 2014, is about to end with Obama admitting yet another major political defeat.

    The administration “is debating the merits of taking further action or whether they are better off letting Putin hang himself,” he said, referring to Russian President Vladimir Putin.

    Because somehow handing over control of the Middle East to the Russian-controlled axis – incidentally the topic of another article yesterday in the WSJ “America’s Fading Footprint in the Middle East” – is now spun as a defeat for Putin.

    “Our options are much narrower than they were two weeks ago,” said Sen. Angus King, I-Maine, who serves on the Intelligence and Armed Services committees. “I don’t think there is any simple answer. … Further air involvement has become very problematic because of the Russian engagement.”

    * * *

    And so Putin has once again “won”, or as the administration would prefer to spin it, “has hung himself.”

    Incidentally, this is just the beginning. Now that the U.S. has begun its pivot out of the middle-east, handing it over to Putin as Russia’s latest sphere of influence on a silver platter, there will be staggering consequences for middle-east geopolitics. In out preview of things to come last week, we concluded by laying these out; we will do the same again:

    The US, in conjunction with Saudi Arabia and Qatar, attempted to train and support Sunni extremists to overthrow the Assad regime. Some of those Sunni extremists ended up going crazy and declaring a Medeival caliphate putting the Pentagon and Langley in the hilarious position of being forced to classify al-Qaeda as “moderate.” The situation spun out of control leading to hundreds of thousands of civilian deaths and when Washington finally decided to try and find real “moderates” to help contain the Frankenstein monster the CIA had created in ISIS (there were of course numerous other CIA efforts to arm and train anti-Assad fighters, see below for the fate of the most “successful” of those groups), the effort ended up being a complete embarrassment that culminated with the admission that only “four or five” remained and just days after that admission, those “four or five” were car jacked by al-Qaeda in what was perhaps the most under-reported piece of foreign policy comedy in history.

     

    Meanwhile, Iran sensed an epic opportunity to capitalize on Washington’s incompetence. Tehran then sent its most powerful general to Russia where a pitch was made to upend the Mid-East balance of power. The Kremlin loved the idea because after all, Moscow is stinging from Western economic sanctions and Vladimir Putin is keen on showing the West that, in the wake of the controversy surrounding the annexation of Crimea and the conflict in eastern Ukraine, Russia isn’t set to back down. Thanks to the fact that the US chose extremists as its weapon of choice in Syria, Russia gets to frame its involvement as a “war on terror” and thanks to Russia’s involvement, Iran gets to safely broadcast its military support for Assad just weeks after the nuclear deal was struck. Now, Russian airstrikes have debilitated the only group of CIA-backed fighters that had actually proven to be somewhat effective and Iran and Hezbollah are preparing a massive ground invasion under cover of Russian air support. Worse still, the entire on-the-ground effort is being coordinated by the Iranian general who is public enemy number one in Western intelligence circles and he’s effectively operating at the behest of Putin, the man that Western media paints as the most dangerous person on the planet.

     

    As incompetent as the US has proven to be throughout the entire debacle, it’s still difficult to imagine that Washington, Riyadh, London, Doha, and Jerusalem are going to take this laying down and on that note, we close with our assessment from Thursday:  “If Russia ends up bolstering Iran’s position in Syria (by expanding Hezbollah’s influence and capabilities) and if the Russian air force effectively takes control of Iraq thus allowing Iran to exert a greater influence over the government in Baghdad, the fragile balance of power that has existed in the region will be turned on its head and in the event this plays out, one should not expect Washington, Riyadh, Jerusalem, and London to simply go gentle into that good night.”

    Which is not to say that the latest US failure to overthrow a mid-east government was a total failure. As Joshua Landis, a Syria expert at the University of Oklahoma says “probably 60 to 80 percent of the arms that America shoveled in have gone to al-Qaida and its affiliates.”

    Which is at least great news for the military-industrial complex. It means more “terrorist attacks” on U.S. “friends and allies”, and perhaps even on U.S. soil – all courtesy of the US government supplying the weapons – are imminent.

  • "Carpe Chaos" – ISIS, Israel, Iraq, & Syria: It's All Part Of The Plan

    Authored by Dan Sanchez, originally posted at AntiWar.com,

    Israel lacks a national motto. If its leaders are looking for a Latin one, “carpe chaos” would be an apt and honest choice.

    “Seize the chaos” is half of Israeli foreign policy in a nutshell (the other half being the instigation of that chaos in the first place). Indeed, even its friends in the media cannot help but put it in such terms. For example, The New York Times recently reported about the:

    “…many Israeli leaders and thinkers seizing on the chaos in Syria to solidify Israel’s hold on Golan.”

    This refers to the Golan Heights, which Israel captured from Syria in 1967 and has occupied ever since. Even the Israel-enabling United Nations considers that occupation and subsequent annexation to be unjust and illegal. Returning Golan to Syria has long been advanced as part of a potential peace deal.

    But now, Israel is using the civil war in Syria as an excuse to expand settlements in the Golan Heights; a senior minister wants 100,000 new residents in the next five years. Its potential uses are manifold:

    “The 400-plus square miles of the Israeli-controlled Golan on the northeast border with Syria is both strategic plateau and lush agricultural terrain yielding prize apples, cherries and beef. It is also a vast playground that drew 3 million tourist visits last year.”

    This is Israel’s usual M.O. in the Palestinian West Bank as well: forging ahead with illicit settlements to establish “realities on the ground” that will be too intractable to reverse, thereby fixing the occupation permanently in place.

    Advocates of the new Golan settlements defend them by citing the chaos in Syria:

    “With Syria ‘disintegrating’ after years of civil war, they argue, it is hard to imagine a stable state to which the territory could be returned.”

    The Times quotes Israeli MP Michael Oren who adds a blatant lebensraum argument to the case for good measure:

    “We need places to build, and the world doesn’t want us to build in the West Bank. I don’t think anyone in the world can come at us and say we’re building on land that’s going to be part of a peace deal if we build on the Golan Heights.”

    “Seize the chaos” is not a new doctrine: neither is it limited to Israeli halls of power. A veritable “carpe chaos” manifesto was written in 1996 for a Washington think tank by David Wurmser, an Israel-first neocon (but I repeat myself) who would later play a key role in the Bush administration’s drive to the Iraq War: advising Dick Cheney in the Vice President’s Office, assisting John Bolton at the State Department, and fabricating fanciful “connections” between Iraq and Al Qaeda at the Department of Defense.

    David Wurmser

    In “Coping with Crumbling States: A Western and Israeli Balance of Power Strategy for the Levant,” Wurmser made a case for “limiting and expediting the chaotic collapse” of the Baathist governments in Iraq and Syria.

    Wurmser predicted that “Baathism’s days are numbered,” due to its own inherent failings as a stable basis for statehood. Indeed, he argued, Arab nationalism in general was unsuitable for the Arab people, given their particularist and tribal tendencies. Therefore, its adoption can only condemn Arab countries to forever “fluctuate between repression and anarchy.”

    In particular, the Gulf War had “accelerated Iraq’s descent into internal chaos.” To Wurmser, this made the Middle East of 1996 resemble Europe of 1914. Just before World War I, the Ottoman Empire had long been dubbed “the sick man of Europe.” Its imminent demise was beyond doubt; what was in question was who would get to despoil its corpse.

    In 1996 Iraq was “the sick man of the Middle East.” Wurmser predicted that, after the inevitable downfall of its ruler Saddam Hussein, Iraq would be dominated either by the Baathist regime in Syria or the “Hashemite” royal house in Jordan.

    He characterized Iraq not as any serious threat to Israel or the West but as “the prize” in a Middle Eastern game of thrones:

    “The prize itself is more powerful than any of the neighbors that covet it. Iraq, a nation of 18 million, occupies some of the most strategically important and well-endowed territories of the Middle East.”

    Wurmser called for the West and Israel to help the Hashemite monarch of Jordan win this game of thrones by enthroning one of his kin as king of Iraq. He advanced what he termed Jordan’s “Hashemite option for Iraq” as a far superior alternative to a Syrian-dominated continuation of Baathist Arab nationalism. The former, he averred, is “more solid and traditional,” and:

    “The Hashemites alone are adept enough in forging strong tribal, familial and clan alliances to create viable nations in the Levant.”

    Of course Wurmser’s amateur sociological analysis is poppycock, and the real advantage the neocons saw in the “Hashemite option” was that the royal house of Jordan is obedient to Israel because it is a wholly-owned western client completely dependent on the hundreds of millions of dollars in foreign aid the US feeds it every year.

    Indeed, Wurmser hinted at this real reason when he argued that, if Iraq were to go Hashemite:

    “…then Syria would be isolated and surrounded by a new pro-western Jordanian-Israeli-Iraqi-Turkish bloc…”

    Thus isolated, Baathist Syria’s own inevitable “chaotic collapse” could then be “expedited.” And the expanded pro-western bloc could:

    “…contain and manage… the scope of the coming chaos in Iraq and most probably in Syria.”

    This was the “balance of power strategy” Wurmser proposed for the West and Israel, to replace the despised:

    “…quest for ‘comprehensive peace?—?including its ‘land for peace’ provision, with Syria.”

    Nineteen years later, Wurmser must now be elated that the Golan Heights are, as discussed above, being taken off the table for any future “land for peace” deals thanks to his hoped-for chaotic collapse in Syria.

    In fact, mere months before he wrote “Coping with Crumbling States,” Wurmser made the case for implacable antagonism toward Syria as a preferred alternative to returning Golan in particular:

    “Given the nature of the regime in Damascus, it is both natural and moral that Israel abandon the slogan ‘comprehensive peace’ and move to contain Syria, drawing attention to its weapons of mass destruction program, and rejecting ‘land for peace’ deals on the Golan Heights.”

    Wurmser wrote this in the infamous policy paper “A Clean Break: A New Strategy for Securing the Realm,” which was addressed, not to Washington, but to Tel Aviv (indicating his true loyalties).

    In “A Clean Break,” Wurmser even more expressly made the case for outright regime change in Iraq as a “means” of “weakening, containing, and even rolling back Syria.” (This in turn was imperative because, “Syria challenges Israel on Lebanese soil.”)

    “A Clean Break” was written under the auspices of a “study group” headed by Wurmser’s mentor Richard Perle and including fellow Perle-protege Douglas Feith. This is extremely significant because Perle and Feith, like Wurmser, also played key roles in the Bush administration’s war drive.

    For more details on both the “Lebanese connection” mentioned above and the role of the “Clean Breakers” in starting the Iraq War, see my essay, “Clean Break to Dirty Wars.”

    Indeed, it is Washington’s Israeli-occupied foreign policy that has enabled Israel’s “seize the chaos” doctrine by using America’s vast imperial might to create so much seizable chaos in the first place.

    As it turned out, Iraq was not nearly as mired in mayhem or blundering toward the brink as Wurmser judged in 1996. At the dawn of the 21st century, Saddam was as firmly ensconced in power as ever. So much for Wurmser as a geopolitical analyst.

    This posed a problem. There was no chance of “expediting” a “chaotic collapse” that wasn’t there; a process has to exist first before it can be accelerated. So Wurmser and the other neocons in the Bush administration had to cook up a collapse from scratch themselves.

    And it took a full-scale invasion and occupation by a global superpower to make this particular Leninist “omelet,” at the cost of a prodigious amount of “broken eggs”: 4,425 American lives and $1.7 trillion.

    But the neocons and Israel finally did get their longed for chaotic collapse in Iraq, along with the deaths of over a million Iraqis and the displacement of millions more. This blood-soaked business is what they call “statecraft.”

    Yet, even then, the best laid plans of the neocons and Likudniks still completely failed to pan out.

    In both of his seminal strategy documents of 1996, Wurmser imagined that if the Hashemites were installed in Iraq, they could use their influence with a certain prominent cleric there to turn the Shiites of Syria and Lebanon against Assad, Iran, and Hezbollah.

    And the “Coping” report envisioned a supporting role in that project for Ahmed Chalabi, identified by Wurmser as “one of the most prominent of the Iraqi opposition figures to Saddam” and “himself a Shiite and a close, long-time Hashemite confidant.” Wurmser further anticipated that:

    “…pro-Jordan Iraq Shiites as Ahmed Chalabi… would define the Iraqi Shiite community after Saddam’s removal.”

    By the Iraq War, the neocons had given up on outright enthroning a Hashemite in Baghdad. It’s one thing to coordinate something like that from behind the scenes, but installing a royal despot through a high-profile American war would have made for unacceptably bad press for Washington.

    So Perle and Company settled for a “democratic” “Hashemite option.” In this Plan B, “Hashemite confidant” Ahmed Chalabi graduated from a supporting to a leading role in Israel’s plan for the new Iraq.

    Chalabi had long delighted the neocons by feeding Washington bogus “intelligence” on Iraqi weapons that eventually helped to justify the US invasion. On the basis of this rapport, Chalabi assured the neocons that, as a leading light in “democratic” Iraq, he would steer state policy in Israel’s favor. The neocons even swallowed his pledge to build a pipeline for them from Iraq’s oilfields to an Israeli refinery and port.

    None of Chalabi’s promises ever manifested. As it turned out, Chalabi was just as much an agent of Iran (enemy to both Saddam and Israel) as he was a “Hashemite confidant.” For more details on this, see the amazing article, “How Ahmed Chalabi Conned the Neocons.”

    The neocons and Israel got their war and collapse in Iraq, but it blew up in their faces. The new US-armed Iraqi government, as well as the Shiite militias that do most of its fighting, became dominated, not by loyal Jordan, but by hated Iran. Oops.

    And after the war, the neocons were faced, not with Wurmser’s anticipated “Jordanian-Israeli-Iraqi-Turkish bloc,” but what they perceive as an anti-Israel “Shia crescent” including Iran, Iraq, Syria, and (most importantly) Hezbollah in Lebanon. Far from being isolated, Syria seemed to have more friends than ever. Oops.

    But Israel sure as hell wasn’t going to leave bad enough alone. Where the subtleties of neocon “strategists” miserably failed, Israel’s influence over the sheer wealth and brute power of the US empire (what Wurmser has called its “raw capability”) would have to make up the difference once again.

    So for the sake of Israel, and since at least 2007, Washington, along with its regional allies, has been waging a broad covert proxy war to undermine the “Shia crescent.” This policy pivot, which legendary journalist Seymour Hersh dubbed “The Redirection,” has involved supporting Sunni Islamist mujahideen in Lebanon, Syria, and Iran.

    Then, after the 2011 “Arab Spring” of popular uprisings reached Syria, “The Redirection” went into overdrive. The US-led regional coalition (Turkey, Jordan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, etc) has been strenuously trying to overthrow the Syrian regime of Bashar al-Assad since at least 2012 by heavily sponsoring an insurgency led by jihadists including Al Qaeda and ISIS .

    Israel has also been contributing to the cause of chaos more directly. Like a prizefighter’s “cutman,” the Israeli military has stood in Al Qaeda’s corner, taking in its wounded terrorist “rebels,” patching them up, and then sending them back into Syria to resume fighting.

    In Syria too, the neocons and Israel have finally seen their longed for chaotic collapse, to the tune of a quarter of a million Syrian deaths and millions more displaced (many fleeing to Europe or drowning en route).

    As discussed above, Israel has seized on the chaos it has unleashed on its northern neighbor as an excuse for expanding settlements in the Golan Heights.

    Moreover, whenever that chaos even slightly spills over into Golan, Israel has been seizing that as a pretext for still more war.

    Syrian soldiers are desperately battling Al Qaeda just north of Golan. Whenever a shell strays into the Heights (almost always exploding harmlessly in some unoccupied field), Israel responds by bombing Syrian military positions, thus effectively serving as Al Qaeda’s air force as well as its combat medic.

    It does this regardless of (and generally clueless as to) who actually fired the offending projectile: whether it was the Syrian army, Al Qaeda, or any other faction. As CBS News related in a report of recent such strikes:

    “Lt. Col. Peter Lerner, an Israeli military spokesman, said in a statement that Israel holds the Syrian military ‘responsible and accountable for any aggression emanating from Syria.’”

    Israel’s self-righteously sociopathic behavior toward Syria and the Golan Heights beggars belief. It’s like some wealthy homeowner taking over his poor neighbor’s backyard and then sending a gang of crazed ruffians to invade his home. Then in the ensuing brawl, when something crashes through the neighbor’s window onto the seized yard, the land thief yells from a balcony, “Why can’t you get your house in order!” and fires at him with a shotgun. Then the thief walks back to his room muttering to himself, “What a hopeless basket case! How I’m definitely not giving him back his yard.”

    What makes it especially incredible is that the ruffians in the real-life scenario are Al Qaeda and ISIS. But from the twisted perspective of Israel and the neocons, it makes perfect sense.

    Even way back in 1996, Wurmser was already stressing in his “Coping” report that Arab nationalism must be considered enemy number one, and that Islamic fundamentalism was only a distant second.

    Wurmser flat-out rejected any pragmatic detente with the Baathists, even for the sake of having a “bulwark” against the spread of radical Islam. He despised any such “peace process” as “prop[ping] up secular-Arab nationalism in its crumbling weakness.” He contended that such a policy is:

    “…anchored to the belief that [secular-Arab nationalism] can be “reformed” enough to be resurrected as a bulwark against Islamic fundamentalism. Yet, one of the main strategic objectives of the peace process is to perpetuate Levantine secular-Arab nationalist regimes. Indeed, the previous Israeli government believed that, “[Israel’s] role is to protect the existingregimes, to prevent or halt the process of radicalization, and to block the expansion of fundamental religious zealotry.”

    But the present study… shows that the pursuit of comprehensive peace and the effort to harness secular-Arab nationalist regimes such as Syria’s in the battle to stem the fundamentalist tide is not only futile. It is also a dangerous strategic misstep.

    Wurmser argued that US support for secular Arab-nationalist Iraq in its brutal invasion of fundamentalist Iran in the 1980s was “an explosive mistake,” as Iraq’s subsequent “rogue” invasion of Kuwait demonstrated. And so:

    “The same lesson should now be applied to Syria. It is in both Israel’s and the West’s interest to expedite the demise of secular-Arab nationalism. (…) The pursuit of the peace process is preventing this.”

    Secular-Arab nationalism, Wurmser insisted, is nothing but an “obstacle” to introducing better defenses against and alternatives to fundamentalism, and to “more healthy future” for the Arab world.

    “The West and its local friends must engage fundamentalism with better associates than Baathists.”

    Such thinking would seem to explain the otherwise baffling tendency of today’s policy makers in Washington and Tel Aviv to stubbornly insist on the overthrow of one secular-Arab nationalist regime after another?—?Saddam in Iraq, Gaddafi in Libya, and now Assad in Syria?—?even though it invariably leads to explosive growth for extreme Islamist groups in membership, might, and conquests.

    Yet, one would expect the 9/11 attacks to have pulled the rug out from under this rationale. Aren’t the 9/11 attacks why the US is raining bombs throughout the Muslim world in the first place? And secular-Arab nationalists didn’t knock down the Twin Towers; Islamic fundamentalists did.

    Even ignoring the crucial issues of empire and blowback, and taking militaristic “offense as the best defense” premises for granted, shouldn’t Islamist terror organizations?—?which have actually attacked American cities?—?be menace number one, and secular-Arab nationalist states?—?which have never dared?—?be at most a distant second?

    And so, especially after 9/11, wouldn’t creating “jihadist wonderlands” throughout the Middle East by decapitating the secular-Arab nationalist regimes that are the jihadists’ chief mortal enemies be the last thing our government should do? Especially when one of the groups thriving the most amid the chaos is Al Qaeda, the very perpetrators of the 9/11 attacks?

    Not from Israel’s perspective. Michael Oren (the lebensraum-loving Israeli official mentioned above) has made it crystal clear that Wurmser’s priorities are still official state policy. In 2013, at the end of his tenure as Israeli ambassador to the US, Oren delivered this parting message through The Jerusalem Post:

    “‘The initial message about the Syrian issue was that we always wanted [President] Bashar Assad to go, we always preferred the bad guys who weren’t backed by Iran to the bad guys who were backed by Iran,’ he said.

    This was the case, he said, even if the other ‘bad guys’ were affiliated to al-Qaida.

    ‘We understand that they are pretty bad guys,’ he said, adding that this designation did not apply to everyone in the Syrian opposition. “Still, the greatest danger to Israel is by the strategic arc that extends from Tehran, to Damascus to Beirut. And we saw the Assad regime as the keystone in that arc. That is a position we had well before the outbreak of hostilities in Syria. With the outbreak of hostilities we continued to want Assad to go.’”

    Michael Oren

    Then in 2014, just after ISIS advanced through Iraq to Mosul and declared itself a Caliphate, Oren said this regarding the conflict between the Shiite-led government of Syria and the Sunni extremists overrunning eastern Syria and western Iraq:

    “From Israel’s perspective, if there’s got to be an evil that’s got to prevail, let the Sunni evil prevail.”

    Lest he be misunderstood, by “Sunni evil” Oren is here specifically referring to ISIS. This is clear, because seconds before, he conveyed his recognition of the fact that they are indeed “bad guys” by referring to a specific mass-execution that ISIS had just committed.

    That is Israel’s position. “Assad must go. We prefer Al Qaeda. Let ISIS prevail.”

    In other words: “To hell with your towers, America. And your big city residents can go to hell too, where they can burn along with the Syrian victims of Al Qaeda and ISIS for all I care. Israel has its own regional strategic goals to think of. Now get back to work to pay your taxes so your government can keep decimating Muslim countries for me and my power clique and keep sending us billions of dollars in foreign aid.”

    This from “America’s greatest friend in the Middle East.”

    Israel would have preferred to have the Levant ruled by stable sock puppets of the West. But failing that, it would much rather be surrounded by an extremist-stricken Muslim maelstrom of mutual massacres than to have in its neighborhood even a single secular-Arab nationalist state with an independent rational leadership, a steady tax base, and a disciplined military.

    And for 14 years, Washington has been adopting Israel’s perspective on this question with incredible fidelity. And as a recently-released government intelligence document revealed, it has done so knowing full well that it would likely result in the Levant being overrun by America-hating Islamic terrorists.

    And thus it is demonstrated that the only enemy of the American people greater than Israel’s government is our own.

    David Wurmser warned that if the West did not adopt his warlike strategic vision, it:

    “…will still not get peace. Instead it will look beyond Israel’s borders at secular-Arab nationalism’s final legacy: a chaotic sea… (which will painfully intrude on the West)…”

    The West has indeed adopted the neocon/Israeli strategy, precipitating the “chaotic collapse” of secular-Arab nationalism in Iraq, Libya, and Syria. But the chaos has not been “contained and managed” as Wurmser anticipated. Neither has it cleared the way for “a more healthy future” as he promised.

    Instead it has created exactly what Wurmser said it would prevent: a “chaotic sea” immersing the entire Middle East and “painfully intrud[ing] on the West.” That chaotic sea is even lapping up onto the shores of Europe in the form of the refugee crisis.

    And now that Russia has been drawn into the Syrian war, where its bombers and troops operate at cross purposes with American bombers and proxy fighters, the chaotic sea threatens to become a thermonuclear lake of fire engulfing the whole world.

    Israel may eventually see every secular-Arab nationalist regime that defies it fall. It may yet see Assad die in some humiliating way, just as it saw Saddam hanged before a jeering crowd and Gaddafi sodomized in the street. It may also finally see American bombs raining down on Tehran.

    Israeli troops may once again march upon Beirut, and this time see every important member of Hezbollah executed or buried under a prison. (It’s extremely unlikely, but it’s conceivable.) It may then have total sway over Lebanon and untrammeled access to all its natural resources (including the coveted Litani River).

    Israel may never have to give the Palestinians freedom, restitution, or peace. And it may never have to give up any of its territorial spoils of war: the West Bank, the Gaza Strip, East Jerusalem, or the Golan Heights. Golan’s “places to build,” its “strategic plateau,” its “prize apples,” and its “vast playground” spaces may be Israel’s until the end of mankind.

    But if that end is a decade from now?—?or a day?—?will it really be worth it?

     

  • There's No Correlation Between Gun Ownership, Mass Shootings, & Murder Rates

    Submitted by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    While I was fact checking my previous article, I checked some correlation coefficients of my own so I didn't have to rely on Volokh's numbers as my only source.

    I approached the data a little differently than Volokh did and instead of using a subjective ranking by an organization like the Brady organization, I just looked at the rate of gun ownership in the state. After all, the argument is often that more guns and more gun owners leads to more violence.

    So, I looked at the correlation between the gun ownership rate (a percentage on the x axis) and the murder rate (n per 100,000 on the y axis) in each state. The visual result is this:

     

    As you can see, there is no correlation. In fact, if you run the numbers, the correlations coefficient is 0.1, which suggests a negligible correlation, or none at all. The murder data is 2012 data from the Justice Department. The gun ownership rate data is from a 2015 report called "Gun ownership and social gun culture."

    Just for good measure, I also went in and looked for a correlation between mass shootings and gun ownership rates. Here, I took the total number of mass shooting victims in all states so far in 2015. This is updated constantly by Mass Shooting Tracker, and includes the most recent Oregon mass shooting. Mass shootings here include a shooting involving 4 or more people, and do not necessarily mean school shooting. They can mean someone went nuts and shot his wife, her lover, and two bystanders at a birthday party when the shooter personally knew all the victims. There are not just cases of random public shootings. If we only included those, the total numbers would be microscopically small. Even with all mass shooting data together, it's obvious that your odds of being involved in one in any given year are vanishingly small, and less than 1 per 100,000 in 48 states. I've included all victims, not just fatalities here. If I used only fatalities, the mass shooting numbers would be much smaller:

    There's even less of a correlation here: -0.006.

    Now, I've noticed that when someone points out the lack of a correlation here, gun-control advocates are quick to jump in and say "but you didn't control for this" and "you didn't control for that." That's true. But what I do show here is that the situation is much more complicated than one would think from absurd claims like "states with fewer guns have fewer murders" and so on. Apparently, claims that new gun laws are commonsensical can't be true if the relationship between gun laws and murder rates require us to adjust for half a dozen different variables. In fact, by looking at the data, I could imagine any number of other factors that might be more likely a determinant of the murder rate than gun ownership.

  • How Much Longer Can Our Unaffordable Housing Prices Last? (Spolier Alert: Not Much)

    Submitted by Charles Hugh-Smith via PeakProsperity.com,

    Markets discover price via supply and demand: Big demand + limited supply = rising prices. Abundant supply + sagging demand = declining prices.

    Eventually, prices rise to a level that is unaffordable to the majority of potential buyers, with demand coming only from the wealthy. That’s the story of housing in New York City, the San Francisco Bay Area and other desirable locales that are currently magnets for global capital.

    In the normal cycle of supply and demand, new more affordable housing would be built, and prices would decline.

    But that isn’t happening in hot real estate markets in the U.S.  What’s happening is rental housing is being built to profit from rising rents and luxury housing is being built to meet the demand from wealthy overseas buyers.

    With limited land in desirable urban zones and high development fees, it’s not possible to build affordable housing unless the government subsidizes the costs.

    Meanwhile, the supply of existing homes for sale is limited by the owners’ recognition that they won’t be able to replace their own home as prices soar; it makes financial sense to stay put rather than sell and try to move up.

    Some homeowners are cashing in their high-priced homes and retiring to cheaper regions. But this supply is being overwhelmed by a flood of offshore cash seeking real estate in the U.S.

    This is part of the global capital flows I described in my recent analysis What Happens Next Will Be Determined By One Thing: Capital Flows. As China and the emerging market economies stagnate, capital that was invested in these markets in the boom years is moving into dollar-denominated assets such as bonds and houses.

    This globalization of regional housing markets is pricing the middle class out of housing in areas that also happen to be strong job markets.

    Many commentators are concerned that a nation of homeowners is being transformed into a nation of renters, as housing is snapped up by hedge funds and wealthy elites fleeing China and the emerging markets.

    But will current conditions continue unchanged going forward?

    Let's start with the basics of demographic demand for housing and the price of housing.

    Demographics & Housing Valuations

    There are plenty of young people who'd like to buy a house and start a family (a.k.a. new household formation), but few have the job or income to buy a house at today's nosebleed levels — a level just slightly less insane than the prices at the top of Housing Bubble #1:

    (Charts courtesy of Market Daily Briefing)

    The current Housing Bubble #2 (also known as the Echo Bubble) certainly isn’t being driven by rising household income, as median household income has declined when adjusted for inflation:

    What enabled households to buy homes as prices pushed higher?  Super-low mortgage rates:

    Now that mortgage rates have hit bottom, there’s not much room left to push housing valuations higher by lowering rates. No matter how solid the buyers’ credit rating, mortgages remain intrinsically risky, as unexpected medical emergencies, job losses, divorces, etc., trigger defaults in the best of times. In recessions, job losses typically cause defaults and lenders’ losses to rise.

    All debt, including home mortgages, is based on household income and debt levels. The higher the debt load, the more money the household must devote to debt service. That leaves less to spend on additional debt or other spending.

    As this chart shows, the ratio of debt-to-earned income (wages and salaries) has declined since the speculative frenzy of Housing Bubble # 1, but it remains almost twice the levels of the pre-bubble era:

    Based on the fundamentals of domestic income — debt levels and current home prices — only the top 10% of households has much hope of owning a home in globally desirable regions:

    If domestic buyers can no longer afford to buy, then who’s left? Cash buyers from overseas is one answer.

    Capital Flows into U.S. Real Estate

    Chinese millionaires buying homes for cash in the U.S. and Canada have been voting on conditions in China with their feet.  The tide of money leaving China has turned into a veritable flood, with hundreds of billions of dollars leaving China in the past year aone as economic conditions there deteriorated.

    This flood tide can be seen in real estate transactions, not just in the U.S. but in Australia, Canada and the U.K.:

    These cash purchases by wealthy foreign nationals are creating a bifurcated housing market.

    In areas deemed desirable, Chinese and other foreign nationals are dominating the market (see: 80% Of All New Home Buyers in Irvine, CA Are Chinese).

    In regions that are below the radar of offshore buyers, for example, broad swaths of the Midwest, home prices remain more affordable.

    But even domestic markets with relatively few foreign buyers have seen soaring home prices if there is strong job growth and limited land for new development.

    A Bifurcated Housing Market: The New Normal?

    These dynamics have created islands of strong job growth and global/domestic demand for housing in which only the wealthy can afford to buy and everyone else is a renter for life. These islands are surrounded by a sea of lower-cost housing in regions with weak job growth and stagnant wages.

    Is this bifurcation the New Normal? Or is Housing Bubble #2 heading for the same shoals that popped housing bubble #1 in 2007-08?

    Right now, the general consensus is that housing prices “will never decline” in New York City, the San Francisco Bay Area, etc.—the islands of job growth and high valuations–due to the strong U.S. economy and capital flows into USD-denominated assets. But if the bulk of this capital flow has already occurred, and capital controls and clawbacks become the order of the day, this prop under current nosebleed housing valuations might be kicked away far sooner than anticipated.

    In Part 2: How A Major Housing Correction Can Happen Over The Next 1.5 Years we examine the strong argument can be made that conditions are far more fragile in this Bubble #2, as the global recession that is rapidly spreading around the globe can’t be reversed with the same bag of tricks that worked in 2008-09.I expect home valuations to fall rather quickly once capital flows out of China drop off and the recession swamps America’s economy.

    History suggests that the markets that soared the most are also the ones that collapse the farthest.

    Click here to read Part 2 of this report (free executive summary, enrollment required for full access)

     

  • "It's Over For Me" Matt Drudge Warns Public "You're A Pawn In The 'Ghetto-isation'" Of The Web

    The very foundation of the free Internet is under severe threat from copyright laws that could ban independent media outlets, according to Matt Drudge. "I had a Supreme Court Justice tell me it’s over for me,” said Drudge, warning web users that they were being pushed "pawn-like" into the cyber "ghettos" of Twitter, Facebook and Instagram.

    "Reclusive" Drudge says he has not had a photo taken in 8 years

    As DCClothesline.com reports,

    During an appearance on the Alex Jones Show, Drudge asserted that copyright laws which prevent websites from even linking to news stories were being advanced.

     

    “I had a Supreme Court Justice tell me it’s over for me,” said Drudge. “They’ve got the votes now to enforce copyright law, you’re out of there. They’re going to make it so you can’t even use headlines.”

     

    “To have a Supreme Court Justice say to me it’s over, they’ve got the votes, which means time is limited,” he added, noting that a day was coming when simply operating an independent website could be outlawed.

     

    “That will end (it) for me – fine – I’ve had a hell of a run,” said Drudge, adding that web users were being pushed into the cyber “ghettos” of Twitter, Facebook and Instagram.

     

    “This is ghetto, this is corporate, they’re taking your energy and you’re getting nothing in return – nothing!”

    Watch the full interview below…

    Drudge warned that social media giants like Twitter and Facebook were swallowing up content and strangling the organic growth of independent Internet news platforms. Automated news aggregators like Google News also came under fire.

    “Google News – hello anybody? The idiots reading that crap think there is actually a human there – there is no human there – you are being programmed to being automated even up to your news….a same corporate glaze over everything,” said Drudge.

     

    “Stop operating in their playground, stop it,” said Drudge, asserting that people were being confined by what the likes of Facebook and Twitter defined as the Internet as a result of this “corporate makeover” of the web.

     

    “I’m just warning this country that yes, don’t get into this false sense that you are an individual when you’re on Facebook, no you’re not, you’re a pawn in their scheme,” concluded Drudge.

  • The Endgame Takes Shape: "Banning Capitalism And Bypassing Capital Markets"

    One month ago we presented to readers that in the first official “serious” mention of “Helicopter Money” as the next (and final) form of monetary stimulus, Australia’s Macquarie Bank said that there is now about 12-18 months before this “unorthodox” policy is implemented. We also predicted that now that the seal has been broken, other banks would quickly jump on board with an idea that is the only possible endgame to 8 years of monetary lunacy, and sure enough, both Citigroup and Deutsche Bank within days brought up the Fed’s monetary paradrop as the up and coming form of monetary policy.

    So while the rest of the street is undergoing revulsion therapy, as it cracks its “the Fed will hike rates any minute” cognitive dissonance and is finally asking, as Morgan Stanley did last week, whether the Fed will first do QE4 or NIRP (something we have said since January), here is what is really coming down the line, with the heretic thought experiment of the endgame once again coming from an unexpected, if increasingly credibly source, Australia’s Macquarie bank.

    * * *

    Would more QE make a difference? Have to move to different types of QE or allow nature to take its course

    It seems that over the last week investor consensus swung from expecting Fed tightening and some form of normalization of monetary policy to delaying expectation of any tightening until 2016 and possibly beyond whilst discussion of a possibility of QE4 has gone mainstream.

    Although “QE forever” and no tightening has been our base case for at least the last 12-18 months, we also tend to emphasize the diminishing impact of conventional QE policies. As the latest Fed paper (San Francisco) highlighted, “There is no work, to my knowledge, that establishes a link from QE to the ultimate goals of the Fed-inflation and real economic activity. Indeed, casual evidence suggests that QE has been ineffective in increasing inflation”.

    Whilst one could apply the same for BoJ and ECB QE policies, the above quote perhaps underestimates what could have happened to inflation if there was no QE. In other words, whilst it is true that both real GDP and inflation rates are undershooting CBs’ targets and have been lower than consensus expectations, would the global economies have undergone a severe case of deflation in the absence of QE? The answer is probably in the affirmative.

    However, the challenge is that ongoing flow of QEs prevents rationalization of excess capacity (in turn created through the process of preceding three decades of leveraging) whilst also precluding acceleration of demand (both household and corporate), as private sector visibility declines. Hence declining velocity of money requires an ever rising level of monetary stimulus, which further depresses velocity of money, and requiring even further QEs. Also as countries compete in a diminishing pool by discounting currencies, global demand compresses, as current account surpluses in these countries rise not because of exports growing faster than imports but because imports decline faster than exports. This implies less demand for the global economy.

    If the above fairly “bleak” picture is correct, then how much incremental QE do we need to arrest (at least temporarily) the decline in global liquidity and ensure that overall liquidity grows by at least ~10%+ to enable continuing leveraging? In the context of 2016, the numbers would suggest that we would require incremental QEs to the tune of at least US$700bn to replace declining FX reserves. However, if we were to aim for 10%+ rise in  overall liquidity, incremental QEs need to be at least US$1.5-2 trillion, rising annually into perpetuity. As QEs rise, their efficacy would continue to drop.

    Hence, there is an urgent need to either allow nature to take its course (i.e. re-set the business cycle by either closing excess capacity or writing down debt) or re-assess the nature and type of QEs used. We maintain our view that it is highly unlikely that CBs would be prepared to accept the inevitable and stop “managing business cycles”. If nothing else the consequences of re-setting the cycle (either demand or supply) are perceived to be socially and politically unacceptable.

    We believe that the path of least resistance would be to effectively ban capitalism and by-pass banking and capital markets altogether. We gave this policy change several names (such as “Cuba alternative”, “British Leyland”) but the essence of the new form of QE would be using central banks and public instrumentalities to directly inject “heroin into blood stream” rather than relying on system of incentives to drive investor behaviour.

    Instead of capital markets, it would be governments that would decide on capital allocation, its direction and cost (hence reference to British Leyland and policies of the 1960s). It could involve a variety of policy tools, with wholesome titles (i.e. “Giving the economy a competitive edge”, “Helping hard working American families” or indeed recent ideas from the British Labour party of “People’s QE”). Who can possibly object to helping hard working families or improving productivity?

    However as the title of our previous note suggested (“Back to the Future”), most of these policies have already been tried before (such as Britain in the 1960-70s or China over the last 15 years) and they ultimately led to lower ROE and ROIC as well as either stagflationary or deflationary outcomes. Whilst the proponents of new attempts of steering capital could argue
    that we have learned from the lessons of the past and economists would start debating “multiplier effects” and “private-public partnerships”, the essence of these policies remain the same (i.e. forcing re-allocation of capital, outside normal capital market norms), and could include various policies, such as:

    1. Central banks directly funding expansion of fiscal spending;
    2. Central banks and public instrumentalities funding direct investment in soft (R&D, education) and hard (i.e. infrastructure) projects; and
    3. Outright nationalization of various capital activities (such as mortgages, student loans, SME financing, picking industry winners etc).

    Whilst, these policies would ultimately further misallocate resources, they could initially result in a significant boost to nominal GDP and given that capital markets are now populated by highly leveraged financial instruments, the impact on various financial asset classes would be immediate and considerable. In other words, neither China nor Eurozone need to spend one dime for copper prices to potentially surge 30%+.

    Are we close to such a dramatic shift in government and CB policies?

    We maintain our view that for CBs to accept this new form of QE, we need to have two key prerequisites:

    1. Undisputed evidence that it is needed. The combination of a major accident in several asset classes and/or sharp global slowdown would be sufficient; and
    2. There has to be academic evidence (hopefully supported by sophisticated algebra and calculus) that there are alternatives to traditional QEs.

    At the current juncture, none of these conditions are satisfied. However, we maintain that as investors progress through 2016-17, there is a very high probability that both conditions would fall into place.

    What about short-term (say next three-to-six months)?

    Whilst we believe that it is indisputable that the Fed needs to ease rather than tighten, the hurdle rate for Fed to embark on QE4 in an election year is far greater than doing nothing. At the same time, both ECB and BoJ are likely to maintain their current policies, perhaps somewhat expanding the scope but they are unlikely to embark on anything more dramatic. In terms of PBoC, it is currently attempting to fine tune its policies and avoid what it perceives to be excessive policy shifts (as it tries to reconcile short-term liquidity and a long-term structural agenda). Ultimately, we maintain that China is at the very early stages of massive stimulus (both monetary and fiscal). However, it probably lies beyond the next three-to-six months.

    If the above policy choices are made, then we believe that global liquidity would continue to contract, creating ever greater deflationary pressures and potentially causing both “accidents” as well as slower growth.

    However, this assumes perpetuation of perceived policy errors, which is always a dangerous assumption to make. We maintain that it is likely that prior to trying extremely unorthodox measures, Central Banks are likely to have another try of more traditional monetary stimulus measures. However, as outlined above, in order to make a difference, the incremental increase in the size has to be significant. Small and incremental changes are unlikely to make much difference.

    * * *

    Thank you Macquarie for stating what most “fringe” blogs have been saying for years.

    To summarize what Australia’s biggest investment bank just said, in a nutshell, “small and incremental is out”, and will be replaced by big and “paradroppy”, a step which as Macquarie succinctly puts it, will “ban capitalism and by-pass banking and capital markets altogether.

    Crazy? Not at all: since the status quo will be fighting for its life, this step is all too likely if it means perpetuating a broken system, and an economic orders based on textbook after textbook of lies. In fact, we would go further and say war (of the global variety) is also inevitable, as the global “1%” loses control. It won’t go quietly.

    Finally, we most certainly agree that the catalyst to unleash the “endgame” cycle will be some “combination of a major accident in several asset classes and/or sharp global slowdown.” But long before that even, keep an eye on gold: having provided a tremendous buying opportunity for the past 4 years because for some idiotic reason “conventional wisdom” decided that central banks are in control, have credibility and can fix a problem they created and make worse with each passing day, soon the global monetary debasement genie will be out of the bottle, and not even the entire BIS trading floor will be able to suppress the price of paper (as physical gold has not only decoupled from paper prices but long since departed on a one-way trip to China) for much longer.

  • The Death Of Cognitive Dollar Dissonance & The Remonetization Of Gold

    Submitted by John Butler via The Amphora Report,

    THE ECONOMIST RINGS OUT COGNITIVE DOLLAR DISSONANCE

    Two years ago, prior to travelling to Sydney to present at the Annual Precious Metals Symposium, I prepared an article for the Gold Standard Institute Journal titled Cognitive Dollar Dissonance: Why a Global De-Leveraging Requires the De-Rating of the Dollar and the Remonetisation of Gold (see here). This article highlighted the growing inconsistency between those arguing on the one hand that the dollar’s role in international trade and finance was clearly diminishing; yet denying that it was in any danger of losing the near-exclusive monetary reserve status it has enjoyed since the 1940s.

    This apparently contradictory yet mainstream thinking about the future of the international monetary system continues to the present day. Indeed, earlier this month the Economist magazine ran a special feature on fading US economic power replete with dollar dissonance. The experts cited note the accelerating trend towards bilateral trade settlement, say between Russia and China, who plan to finance their multiple ‘Silk Road’ infrastructure projects using their own currencies and their own development bank (The Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank or AIIB: See http://www.aiib.org/). They also observe that Russia, China and the other BRICS are no longer accumulating dollar reserves (although curiously overlook that they continue to accumulate gold). They acknowledge that not only the BRICS but many other countries have repeatedly expressed their desire that the current set of global monetary arrangements should be restructured in some way, although they are not always clear as to their specific preferences.

    Note the sharp contrast in these two paragraphs, both on the very same page of the Economist feature:

    “This special report will argue that the present trajectory is bound to cause a host of problems. The world’s monetary system will become more prone to crises, and America will not be able to isolate itself from their potential costs. Other countries, led by China, will create their own defences, balkanising the rules of technology, trade and finance. The challenge is to create an architecture that can cope with America’s status as a sticky superpower.”

    And:

    “Today’s world relies on a vastly bigger edifice of trade and financial contracts that require continuity. Trade levels and the stock of foreign assets and liabilities are five to ten times higher than they were in the 1970s and far larger than at their previous peak just before the first world war… China and America are not allies. The greater complexity and risk involved in remaking the global order today create a powerful incentive for current incumbents to keep things as they are.”

    Does anyone else hear the clear dissonance, confusion even? On the one hand we have a complex system prone to debt and currency crises, a growing lack of cooperation between the two largest players and a need for a ‘new architecture’. Yet on the other we are supposed to accept that there is sufficient common incentive to cooperate in monetary matters? Really?

    Now consider the developing global economic context. Although the mainstream tend to be quiet on these issues, they cannot possibly fail to notice that, seven years on from the 2008 global financial crisis, following unprecedented economic and monetary policy intervention, dollar interest rates are still zero; quantitative easing has failed to achieve its stated objectives; global imbalances have risen to record levels; emerging market balance-of-payment crises are springing up all over; leading indicators in every major global economy have rolled over; and financial markets, in particular the credit markets, are beginning to tell you that another major crisis may lurk in the near future. It is thus entirely reasonable if unfashionable to hold the view that the dollar monetary reserve system has become unstable and is overdue a fundamental restructuring or reset of some kind. None other than IMF Managing Director Christine Lagarde has hinted at this in multiple speeches over the past two years.

     

    THE PERSISTENCE OF DISSONANCE

    But let us ask: Why is this cognitive dollar dissonance so persistent? There are several plausible and complimentary explanations. First, much human reasoning, expert or otherwise, is affected by at least some degree of so-called ‘normalcy bias’, that is, a naïve if not necessarily incorrect belief that the future will resemble in whole or part the recent past. The dollar has been the world’s pre-eminent monetary reserve for some 70 years, so the thinking goes. Why should that change now?

    Second, and potentially reinforcing the above, is what one might call ‘The Whig view of international monetary history.’ This is a subset of the better known, general ‘Whig view of history’, perhaps best represented by Scottish Enlightenment philosopher David Hume, that history is the evolution of an ever-more perfect world, of constant if not always understood or appreciated progress. Hence the dollar-centric monetary regime of today is superior to those that have come before, because it is that of today, not yesterday. No further explanation is required or desired. (It is worth noting here that German late Enlightenment / early Romantic philosopher GWF Hegel postulated a more subtle, dialectical process of historical progress. Karl Marx would subsequently adapt this particular strain of teleological thought to demonstrate in his unique way the inevitable replacement of Capitalism by Communism.)

    We know such thinking is flawed. History shows us it is flawed: Recessions, financial crises, depressions, wars, revolutions, nation-building, nation-busting, tyranny, despotism, etc, feature with some regularity, including in much of North Africa and the Middle East today. But this facile sense of steady (or sporadic) progress is nevertheless surprisingly common across all knowledge disciplines, not only in economic and monetary matters. Indeed, even in the hard sciences, where presumably only hard facts and evidence should matter, there can be tremendous resistance to new ways of thinking. Thomas Kuhn cogently demonstrated this to be the case in his monumental study of the history of science, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. According to Kuhn, even in hard science, it is not the facts that matter. Rather, it is the ‘paradigm’, as Kuhn chose to call it. Facts that clearly do not fit the existing paradigm are either conveniently ignored, or those proffering them are persecuted outright, such as with Galileo’s observations of Jupiter’s moons. Given the relative subjectivity of the social sciences, including economics, one should wholly expect that the power of the presiding paradigm to misconstrue, ridicule or simply ignore inconvenient facts and their associated theories would be all the more powerful in stifling real understanding, productive debate and progress.

    Kuhn also noted that one reason why paradigms were so hard to break down once established was that those in highest regard within the discipline—akin to the high priests of a hierarchical church—had so much to lose if challenged by unorthodox thinking. We laugh at the Papal persecution of Galileo today but to them it was no laughing matter. His observations, plain to see as they were through a telescope, directly contradicted the venerable, geo-centric or Ptolemaic paradigm of the day, thus threatening the very foundations of Church power.

    Today we generally pat ourselves on the back that, atheists or not, we tend to treat science as distinct from religion. And yet quasi-faith-based paradigmatic thinking nevertheless still infects science to a great if underappreciated degree. Take the ‘Big Bang’ theory, for example, which has stood for decades but is still mere theory. This is due in part to the fact that, notwithstanding huge investments in research into the origins of the universe, there is still no convincing data to confirm it. Although I am hardly an authority on this matter, I do note that, in my youth, astrophysicists believed strongly that, due in large part to the Big Bang framework, a Grand Unified Theory of the universe was within reach. All they needed for confirmation was a powerful enough supercollider. Today, some 30 years later, against these optimistic expectations, they are nearing exasperation. All the observational and computing power of which they could only have dreamed a generation ago is today at their disposal, yet they haven’t got qualitatively farther than did Einstein a century ago with maths, chalk and slate? Could it be that astrophysics has become stuck in a paradigm that has outlived its usefulness and is now retarding rather than facilitating progress? I don’t have the answer but no doubt Kuhn would agree the question is clearly worth asking.

    Given that in today’s dollar-centric monetary world US Federal Reserve and dollar policies comprise the dominant part of global monetary policy generally, should we not fully expect those in power to resist ideas that might expose their policies as unsustainable or outright counterproductive? What of the anointed academics who advise and are, directly or indirectly, funded by them? Yes there are some scholars who are willing to challenge the paradigm, a few of whom are rather prominent. Nobel Laureate Robert Mundell, the so-called ‘Father of the euro’, speaks openly about the dollar’s gradually eroding reserve status (although he stops short of claiming it will lose reserve status entirely). Professor Kevin Dowd, architect of monetary reform plans through the decades, has also expressed this view. But the mainstream financial media have chosen mostly to ignore them.

    Intriguingly, however, the International Monetary Fund (IMF) has begun to promote the idea that the dollar might indeed eventually lose its premier reserve currency status. But here, too, we observe a self-serving paradigm at work: the IMF is proposing in no uncertain terms that the ‘solution’ for the erosion of the dollar’s reserve currency status is to replace it with the IMF’s very own ‘Special Drawing Right’ or SDR. And can you guess which essentially unaccountable supranational bureaucracy the IMF suggests could administer an SDR-centric international monetary regime? Yes, the IMF itself is put forward as the institution to control the world’s money supply and, by implication, global interest rates.

     

    CENTRAL PLANNING SOUNDS NICE ON PAPER BUT WHAT ABOUT IN PRACTICE?

    This may all sound nice on paper, but as I wrote in my book back in 2011, it is nothing but a bureaucratic pipe-dream. The idea, amid record global economic imbalances and associated historic, unserviceable debt burdens in Japan, the euro-area and arguably the US itself, that somehow China, the other BRICS, oil producers and other creditor nations are going to agree just how the IMF can take over from where the US Federal Reserve has left off is a non-starter. No, as with the US in the 1940s, the creditor nations are going to insist on an international monetary restructuring that favours their economic interests, even if at the expense of others. The requisite international cooperation required for the IMF to implement sustainably a ‘one size fits all’ international monetary policy is just not there, nor should we be at all optimistic that it will be prior to a meaningful global deleveraging and rebalancing which is being resisted by economic and monetary officials at all costs and by all means.

    The recent experience of the euro-area should serve as an example in this regard but, as observed above, facts can be quite an inconvenience for those clinging to a flawed paradigm. Here too, we see cognitive dissonance in the fashionable belief that what demonstrably does not work at the regional level can work miraculously at the global one. The fact is, monetary central planning does not work. It didn’t work for Europe in the 1920s and 1930s, as currency devaluations and outright hyperinflations were used as weapons in the so-called ‘currency wars’ of that era. It didn’t work in the 1960s, as the London Gold Pool struggled to hold the Bretton Woods conventions together. It didn’t work in the 2000s, when the so-called ‘Great Moderation’ in business cycles merely disguised colossal misallocations of capital, exposed as such in 2008. And seven years on from that spectacular crisis, as the global economy again enters a steep downturn, it is not working still.

    There is good reason to believe that what is already underway is going to be more severe than 2008-09. This time around, interest rates are already at zero, or outright negative. QE has failed. Confidence in economic officials’ general ability to restore healthy, sustainable growth has weakened considerably. Indeed, at a recent roundtable event at Chatham House I attended, multiple prominent international economists suggested that with ‘conventional QE’ having failed, the next logical arrow in the monetary policy quiver is that of direct money injections into corporations or households, in effect a Friedmanesque ‘Helicopter Drop’ of money. This conversation would not be taking place at all were the macroeconomic outlook not so poor.

    Prolonged economic weakness has now fostered the growth and migration of previously fringe parties to what may eventually become a new political centre, attesting to deep discontent with the status quo in many countries around the world. In some places, such as where I now reside, in the UK, the major opposition party borders on advocating socialism. Senator Sanders in the US, a possible Democratic nominee for President, sings a similar socialist tune. Such developments increase the political risks to global financial markets, potentially further destabilising the now-fragile dollar-centric system. In this regard we should take note of a recent article in the Financial Times:

    “Investors have long known that markets reflect better than they predict. By nature they are better at pricing existing information than pricing the probability and scale of an unexpected event. But they can fail at both.”

    For those who generally prefer free market commerce to socialistic central planning, this can all seem rather frightening. A glance back at history can reinforce these fears. But if one looks carefully between the clouds of the gathering global monetary storm one can discern a distinct silver lining, or rather a golden one as it were.

     

    THE INTERNATIONAL MONETARY FUTURE

    If the dollar is indeed losing pre-eminent international monetary reserve status and the requisite cooperation required for the IMF to simply replace it with the suprantional SDR is lacking, then what on earth is going to happen in international monetary relations? Without stable international money, countries will find they cannot trade as easily with one another. What currencies will be held as reserves against external trade (or capital) imbalances? Chronic net importers such as the US have the incentive for the world to hold their currencies as reserves whereas chronic net exporters have the opposite, that is, to keep their currencies artificially cheap in order to maintain or grow their global export market share. But as the imbalances accumulate, as they have today to a record level relative to global GDP, beyond a certain point there is insufficient trust in the importing countries’ currencies as reliable stores of value.

    But then if distrustful exporters insist on invoicing for exports strictly in their own currencies, trade will grind to a halt: It is by definition the importing nations, not exporting nations, which must provide the net balance of circulating media for international trade, as these media represent the international ‘IOU’ that must eventually be repaid through a reversal in the trade (or capital) balance or otherwise liquidated (eg via a default).

    We all know global trade is hugely beneficial for consumers, who benefit from the associated, evolving global division of labour and capital. A contraction in global trade, ‘globalisation in reverse’ as it were, would thus be highly damaging to global economic growth, implying a general ‘stagflation’ of both weaker growth and higher real goods prices. No politician, socialist or otherwise, wants that; it will force them from office in short order. So absent demonstrably unworkable central planning, how can future international monetary arrangements nevertheless facilitate international commerce with exporters and importers at loggerheads over which currencies to use?

    Why, the same way they did so in the 1800s: Just re-monetise gold. While gold may have retreated backstage for a time, it is about to make a spectacular reappearance. For gold is the only international monetary asset that can resolve the exporter/importer dilemma of a lack of trust on the one hand; yet a deep, essential need to trade on the other. Gold is not itself a national liability. It can be neither arbitrarily devalued nor defaulted on. It is real international money, not bureaucratic fiat scrip.

    But wait, one might protest, why on earth would governments willingly give up the power to devalue and inflate their way out of debt? Because if their essential trading partners so demand it, they simply have no choice. What if Russia, concerned about the future of the euro, were to demand its European customers pay for imports of oil and gas in gold instead of euros? What if China, concerned about the dollar, made a similar demand vis-à-vis the US? How about the Gulf oil producers? What if they were to insist that China pay for imports of their oil in gold? The fact is, if just one exporting country, even a relatively small one, begins to demand payment in gold, then their trading partners must supply the gold. For each incremental move in this direction gold’s share of international monetary reserves grows exponentially due to the ‘network’ or ‘node’ effect. Conversely, the dollar’s share exponentially declines. And as those familiar with game theory will note, while there is no doubt a ‘first mover disadvantage’ associated with demanding trade settlement in gold—a possible loss of market share—there is a far larger ‘last-mover cost’, that is, the last exporter to switch from dollars to gold will find they have accumulated the residual dollar reserves from the rest of the world at a greatly reduced if not worthless value.

     

    GOLD IS THE NATURAL INTERNATIONAL MONEY FOR A MULTIPOLAR WORLD

    As Nobel Laureate Mundell wrote a few years back:

    “We can look upon the period of the gold standard as being a period that was unique in history, when there was a balance among the powers and no single superpower dominated.”

    The Economist and the IMF recognise that the US is no longer the sole global economic superpower that it once was, able to dictate terms in monetary matters. A new, multipolar balance of power is forming. Gold, the only internationally-recognised non-national money provides the game-theoretic international monetary solution to an economically multipolar, globalised, competitive world. It represents the Nash equilibrium. Whether or not this is ever formalised in a de jure ‘gold standard convention’ or not is beside the point. The classical 19th century gold standard was never de jure formalised as such. As renowned monetary historian Guilio Gallarotti observes, it arose spontaneously from below, catalysed by the rise to economic power of the United States and the German Zollverein in the late 19th century, thus transforming what had been, following the Napoleonic wars, a nearly unipolar British imperial world into a clearly multipolar one.

    As gold again begins to circulate in order to settle cross-border balance of payments, it resolves the perennial floating fiat currency (ie Triffin’s) dilemma of ever-growing imbalances and the associated ever-growing debts to finance them. As gold moves physically, from place to place (or simply from vault to vault in London or New York, as it did once upon a time) imbalances are settled, then and there, at whatever price gold commands at that location and time. No arbitrary monetary expansion or contraction is necessary; no central planning required.

    By implication, as the demand function for gold shifts due to de facto remonetisation, the price of gold is going to rise. By how much depends largely on the degree of confidence in the dollar and other currencies that circulate alongside gold. As long as the global imbalances and associated debts remain large relative to incomes, confidence will be low, implying a far higher gold price than that observed today. One way to benchmark the order of magnitude price increase for gold would be to allow the price to rise to a level that would back a substantial portion of the narrow or perhaps even broad money supply of major currencies. At current prices gold only backs about 5% of the narrow major currency global money supply and barely 2% of broad money. A substantial price increase would thus be required to restore gold backing to where it was under the Bretton Woods system, for example, when it exceeded 20%.

    Not only will gold rise in price. Once gold is remonetized in some way at the international level, there will be an international interest rate imputed from the price of gold forward contracts or swaps. While gold itself pays no interest, these derivatives will, and that rate of interest will be as close an approximation as one can come to a ‘risk-free’ interest rate, the purest possible expression of the time value of money. Henceforth, no national or supranational central bank will be required to tell the international marketplace what the time value of money should be at any given point. Rather, the international money (gold) market will determine spontaneously what interest rate clears the market for gold delivery today, or tomorrow, or next year. This information will then flow into international commerce generally, where it will provide a robust basis for the sensible allocation of international capital in all forms, financial and real, across both time and space. The escalating boom and bust cycles of modern times will become a thing of the past, and the natural, occasional recessions that do occur will allow for the Schumpeterian ‘creative destruction’ required to qualitatively re-order the capital stock so as to clear malinvestments and incorporate new technologies.

     

    GOLD AND THE INFORMATION THEORY OF FREE-MARKET (NOT CRONY!) CAPITALISM

    As George Gilder demonstrates in his masterful work on economics and information theory, Knowledge and Power, “Capitalism is not primarily an incentive system but an information system.” Prices are the information. And the price of time itself is the single most valuable piece of information. Time, as we intuitively know, is money; they are two sides of the same coin. Mess with time and money, and you mess with everything else. Yet as with central planning in general, the central planning of either money, or time, cannot possibly work. Hayek warned the economics profession of precisely this in the 1970s. They didn’t listen, ensconced as they still remain within their interventionist Keynesian paradigm. Well that paradigm is about to be blown apart, time and money are about to return to the market, where they belong, and real, sustainable economic progress is about to restart once again.

    Having begun with a timeless quote from Lord Acton, it would seem apposite to so conclude. He also once wrote:

    “The wisdom of divine rule appears not in the perfection but in the improvement of the world.”

    At first glance, this might seem a teleological Humian or Hegelian statement. Yet when juxtaposed to Acton’s eponymous dictum on the corruption of power, it provides for further understanding both for the understanding of retrograde socio-economic cycles and of hope, that with each such setback eventually comes a great, qualitative improvement in the human condition. If I may be so bold, I predict we are on the cusp of precisely this today. If it requires a global monetary crisis as a catalyst, then bring it on.

    *  *  *

    PDF version available here

  • US Foreign Policy Explained (In 1 Simple Flow-Chart)

    No Exit…

     

     

    h/t @Ognir2

  • The Devil's Dictionary Of Post-Crisis Finance, Part 1

    Reuters published a pioneering appropriation of Ambrose Bierce's 1911 form in 2007, when the global financial crisis was barely beginning. Call it "The Original Devil’s Dictionary of Finance."

    But it no longer seems adequate for the post-crisis task. Herewith part one – for the letters A to K – of the sequel, updated and enlarged for the world of hedge funds, private equity, structured finance, subprime equity and the like: "The Devil's Dictionary of Post-Crisis Finance."

    A

    Activist: One who makes importunate demands for financial engineering*.

    Alpha: An investment return above that of a benchmark index, usually achieved by luck or by “gaming” the index.

    Analyst: A stock puffer whose purpose is to generate brokerage commissions. See Chinese walls.

    Arbitrage: The time-consuming and risky activity of buying an underpriced asset whilst simultaneously selling an equivalent overpriced asset. Eschewed by Wall Street, which instead profits from regulatory arbitrage, accounting arbitrage, jurisdictional arbitrage and fiscal arbitrage.

    Asset price bubble: The most noticeable consequence of the U.S. Federal Reserve’s easy money policy. See ZIRP.

    Auction house: A place where Wall Street high-flyers blow their windfall gains. See Contemporary art.

    Austerity: Also known as “sado-fiscalism”. A forlorn attempt to stave off government bankruptcy.

    B

    Bandwagon: That which every investor jumps upon. “If you see a bandwagon, it’s too late.” (James Goldsmith, financier.)

    Bank: An institution which, by applying leverage and mismatching assets and liabilities, earns short-term profit and generates long run losses.

    Bankrupt: A person who has run out of liquidity. Also, the intellectual state of modern economics.

    Basel: The Swiss home of the Bank for International Settlements, an institution which creates global banking rules thus setting the stage for regulatory arbitrage and, thereby, precipitating crises at regular intervals.

    Behavioural finance: The field of study resting on the notion that an asset price bubble is the result of “irrational exuberance” (see Greenspan*) rather than the inevitable consequence of bad monetary policy and conflicts of interest on Wall Street.

    Bell curve: A visual representation of the false assumption, baked into most financial models, that outcomes are what statisticians call “normally distributed”.

    Bernanke, Ben: Former Fed chairman who failed to spot the housing bubble before it burst and in 2007 claimed that U.S. subprime mortgage problems were “contained”. After the Lehman Brothers bust, Bernanke succeeded in re-inflating the Greenspan* superbubble. Soon after leaving the Fed, he was rewarded with a job at Citadel, a hedge fund, which presumably didn’t hire Bernanke for his market insights. See Revolving door.

    Biotech: A pharmaceutical Ponzi scheme of a company. See Burn rate.

    Bitcoin: A digital tulip bulb.

    Black swan: A common bird on Wall Street, renowned for its fat tail.

    Bonus: In banks, a large payment out of short-term profit to retain “talent”. While a bank’s profit is generally illusory, bonuses endure.

    BRIC: A “Bloody Ridiculous Investment Concept” (Peter Tasker, fund manager and author). An emerging bull market acronym comprising the first letters of Brazil, Russia, India and China coined by Jim O’Neill, a former member of theGoldman Sachs marketing department.

    Burn rate: The alarming pace at which technology and biotechnology companies run through their cash piles.

    Business school: Networking hotspot where young people pay large sums of money to have their scruples expensively removed. See MBA.

    Buybacks: Debt-funded purchases of a company’s own shares in order to enhance growth in earnings per share. A tool to maximize the value of a chief executive’s stock options.

    C

    Capex: The splurging of shareholder funds on the latest investment fad (see Mine). Sensible CEOs prefer financial engineering*.

    Capital controls: A futile attempt to evade the global carry trade. Chinese capital controls are circumvented through gaming in Macau, faking exports, offshore borrowing and the age-old expedient of carrying suitcases of cash abroad.

    Capital flight: The last act of the global carry trade. Currently under way in China.

    Career risk: The near inevitability that a fund manager will be sacked if he or she refuses to participate in an asset price bubble or exhibits more than a hint of tracking error.

    Carried interest: The “performance” fee extracted by private equity firms for leveraging assets. Proposals to remove the advantageous tax rate on carried interest were compared by Stephen Schwarzman, co-founder of private equity firm Blackstone, to the Nazi invasion of Poland.

    Carve-out: A seemingly profitable Chinese business freshly separated from a larger loss-making state-owned enterprise, which retains control, in preparation for an initial public offering.

    Chief executive officer: A corporate boss who extracts any surplus value created by the business he or she runs for his or her own benefit. SeeShareholder value.

    China: Since GDP growth started slowing, a country suffering from 3,000 years of bureaucratic despotism and corruption.

    China dream: The age-old business vision of selling a toothbrush to everyone in China. Until recently, a useful way of pushing stocks. Now Wall Street’s worst nightmare.

    Chinese credit guarantees: The provision of credit insurance, unregulated and without adequate reserves, which supports China’s non-bank, or shadow, financial system.

    Chinese economic growth: “Unstable, unbalanced, uncoordinated, and unsustainable” (Wen Jiabao, Chinese premier, in 2007).

    Chinese GDP: A “man-made” figure (Li Keqiang, future Chinese premier, in 2007).

    Chinese infrastructure: The construction of bridges to nowhere, ghost cities and the like, which has driven recent economic growth. “In China you don’t rob a bank, you rob infrastructure” (Minxin Pei, expert on Chinese corruption).

    Chinese public debt: Beijing’s vastly understated liabilities, which are mostly hidden off balance sheet – in local government funding vehicles, asset-management companies, policy banks, and so forth.

    Chinese real estate: Jerry-built apartment buildings standing empty on the outskirts of second-tier cities and providing the collateral for China’s broken credit system.

    Client: See Muppet.

    Commodity supercycle: A term coined in 2004 so that investment banks could extract fees from selling commodity index funds and arranging mining-related IPOs, mergers and debt issuance.

    Company accounts: A misrepresentation of a firm’s profitability and financial state. See Off balance sheet and Kitchen sink.

    Compensation committee: A group of people, often the chief executives of other companies, tasked with ratcheting up the CEO’s pay. See Executive pay consultants.

    Compliance officer: A box-ticking functionary charged with ensuring the letter – but not the spirit – of the law is observed on Wall Street.

    Contemporary art: A bubble asset class, which combines conspicuous consumption with tradability whilst making no demands on taste.

    Corporate governance: A set of rules intended to preserve the fiction that executives are working on behalf of shareholders. See Shareholder value.

    Corporate psychopaths: Clive Boddy, who studies company leadership, maintains the recent financial crisis was the consequence of Wall Street being run by mentally unstable types. A plausible hypothesis.

    Correlation: A spurious statistical relationship between the prices of different assets, used in risk models.

    Credit cycle: The ebb and flow of finance determined by the actions of central bankers, who are blissfully unaware of its existence. See Bernanke, Ben.

    D

    Debt supercycle: The apparently endless accumulation of financial obligations by people and governments around the world. The road to perdition.

    Default: “A thorough and complete deception of the creditor by the debtor” (Max Winkler, 1933). See Greece.

    Deflation: A benign fall in the price level due to productivity improvements and the expansion of global trade. Not to be confused with debt deflation, the consequence of the Fed’s easy money policies.

    Derivatives: “Financial weapons of mass destruction” was the definition once used by Warren Buffett, but that hasn’t stopped the Berkshire Hathaway chairman from dabbling in them himself. See Sage of Omaha.

    Dollar: A worthless token conjured up by an entry in the Fed’s balance sheet. The lynchpin of the global financial system, which results in low U.S. interest rates wreaking havoc in all corners of the globe.

    Dollar-weighted return: The investment industry’s dirty little secret. The average return on every dollar invested in a fund over its lifetime. Invariably lower than the published return of a fund since inception, and sometimes negative.

    Dot-com 2.0: The second coming of the internet bubble. See Burn rate.

    E

    Earnings per share: A corporate performance metric, published quarterly, which says little about a company’s true profitability and is easily manipulated. Often set as a target for executive compensation schemes.

    Economist: A person who failed to anticipate the global financial crisis; generally, an undistinguished mathematician with a poor understanding of finance. See Bernanke, Ben.

    Efficient market hypothesis: The discredited notion that market prices reflect all available information and that asset price bubbles cannot be identified in advance.

    Elon Musk: A company promoter who may one day be seen to have taken investors for a ride (in electric cars, spaceships, and so on).

    Emerging markets: A collection of relatively poor countries with little in common save a history of economic mismanagement, widespread corruption and the absence of the rule of law. See BRIC.

    Endowment: A speculative investment fund, which embraces illiquidity and leverage in an attempt to emulate Yale University’s past success.

    Eurodollar market: A $5 trillion unregulated offshore financial market in which banks fund the global carry trade and enable emerging market countries to borrow cheap dollars. Such asset-liability mismatches lie at the heart of most emerging market crises.

    European Central Bank: An institution which holds the euro zone together by providing limitless credit to insolvent members. See Target 2.

    Exchange-traded fund: An investment vehicle which trades like shares, providing retail investors with exposure to illiquid assets and the latest investment fads, for example the ALPS U.S. Equity High Volatility Put Write Index Fund.

    Euro zone: Europe’s “permanent” currency union. A doomsday machine which generates debt deflation, economic sclerosis and sovereign bankruptcy.

    Evergreening: the practice of rolling over a bank’s bad debts in order to avoid reporting losses and to support corporate zombies*. A Japanese invention of the early 1990s, more recently adopted by China and the euro zone.

    Executive pay consultants: Advisers who justify one CEO’s proposed pay increase by reference to another client’s recent pay increase.

    F

    Finance: The work of the devil, sometimes known on Wall Street as “God’s work” (Lloyd Blankfein, CEO of Goldman Sachs).

    Financial innovation: New ways conceived by Wall Street to extract fees, conceal risks, and evade financial regulation.

    Financial liberalization: The loss of control by a government of its domestic financial system, antecedent to the system’s collapse.

    Financial regulation: A Maginot Line constructed around Wall Street after the last bust. See Regulatory arbitrage.

    Financial repression: The Fed’s mechanism for transferring wealth from savers to bankers by keeping interest rates below the rate of inflation.

    Fine: A punishment inflicted on a bank’s shareholders after its employees have abused their trust.

    Flack: A purveyor of financial propaganda and public relations pabulum, normally an ex-journalist, who ensures a favourable news flow by feeding pet journalists with “scoops”.

    Flash Crash: A brief but large dip in the stock markets on a May afternoon in 2010, resulting from the antics of high-frequency traders. The authorities have found an unlikely scapegoat for this event in the Hound of Hounslow.

    Forecast: An inaccurate prediction, invariably optimistic, produced by brokers to generate turnover and by pension plan sponsors to mask insolvency.

    Fund management: An industry built on the “illusion of skill” (Daniel Kahneman, Nobel laureate). Although it takes several decades to distinguish luck from skill in the investment world, successful fund managers are inclined to believe in their own skill. See Lucky fool*.

    G

    Gate: That which slams on investors in hedge funds and money market funds during periods of market turmoil, preventing them from redeeming their investments.

    Gaussian copula: A quantitative tool used to measure securitization risk based on faulty assumptions of correlation and normal distributions. Sometimes known as “the formula which killed Wall Street”, this invention of rocket scientists was one of the biggest causes of the global financial crisis.

    German banker: The patsy of global finance.

    Global carry trade: The flooding of the global financial system with cheap dollars. This trade normally comes to a sudden stop when U.S. rates rise, ushering forth the inevitable emerging-market crisis.

    Global financial crisis: An event which, before the Fed came to the rescue, threatened to bring to an end Wall Street’s well-oiled fee-extraction machine.

    Globalisation: The opening up of the world economy to the global carry trade.

    Gold: “A pet rock” (Wall Street Journal).

    Goldman Sachs: “A great vampire squid wrapped around the face of humanity” (Matt Taibbi). Wall Street firm that specializes in “handling” conflicts of interest.

    Goldman Sachs alumni: Former employees who infest central banks and finance ministries around the world, ensuring that the authorities bail out the bank whenever it is about to go belly up.

    Goodwill: An accounting entry quantifying how much a firm has overpaid for past acquisitions. Written off by incoming CEOs. See Kitchen sink.

    Greece: A country which has spent half its time since independence in default. Qualified to join the euro zone after taking off-balance-sheet financial advice from Goldman Sachs.

    Greenspan put: The Fed’s practice of using monetary policy to prevent asset price bubbles from bursting. A cause of even bigger bubbles. See Moral hazard.

    Gunning the fund: The practice of marketing investment funds with good initial track records. Funds with poor initial returns are either dropped or merged with better performing funds. See Survivorship bias.

    H

    High-frequency trading: A zero-sum game played by computer nerds.

    High-water mark: The high point of a hedge fund’s value, below which it cannot charge extra fees. Falling below this level indicates that it is time to start a new fund.

    Hot money: Short-term debt used to finance the global carry trade. Runs for the door at the first sign of trouble.

    Hound of Hounslow: A trader operating from his parents’ sitting room underneath the Heathrow flight path, blamed by the authorities for the Flash Crash.

    I

    Inequality: The social consequence of Fed policies that inflate Wall Street fees and CEO pay while simultaneously reducing returns on the public’s savings.

    Initial public offering: An opportunity for insiders to sell overpriced shares to outsiders and for Wall Street to extract exorbitant fees, manipulate markets and distribute favours. See Spinning and Laddering.

    Interest: A reward for saving enjoyed in distant memory by our forefathers. SeeZIRP.

    Interest rate: The price of money over time, which balances saving and investment. In the hands of the Fed, a dangerous policy tool.

    Internal rate of return: A distorted measure of performance used by private equity firms to boost reported returns. A high IRR can be achieved by selling their best investments early whilst hanging on to the dogs.

    Investment conference: A place where asset managers meet to discuss the latest investment fad. Investment strategist: A person who always recommends buying equities regardless of price.

    K

    Keynesians: Economists “who hear voices in the air (and) are distilling their frenzy from some academic scribbler of a few years back” (John Maynard Keynes).

    Kitchen sink: Excessively large writedowns whose subsequent reversal becomes a source of future profit. Usually announced by an incoming CEO. Also known as “cookie-jar accounting”.

     

    Source: Reuters (Part 2 next week)

  • Should We Be "Scared" Of Capitalism?

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    Physicists Should Stick to Physics

    We know already since Einstein that renowned physicists would do better to avoid straying into the field of economics. In 1949 Einstein published an essay on economics and education that is brimming with ignorance. According to Einstein, “The economic anarchy of capitalist society [is] the real source of evil”. Any old Marxist could have written that of course – the “capitalist anarchy of production” was routinely mentioned as an alleged drawback by Marxists, one that their “scientific” central economic planning would overcome.

     

    einstein-big-idea-merl

    Albert Einstein: great physicist, terrible economist.

    Photo credit: Steffen Kugler / Getty Images

    This conviction eventually cost the lives of hundreds of millions of people and utterly bankrupted half of the world for good measure. A representative quote from Einstein’s article:

    “I am convinced there is only one way to eliminate these grave evils, namely through the establishment of a socialist economy, accompanied by an educational system which would be oriented toward social goals. In such an economy, the means of production are owned by society itself and are utilized in a planned fashion. A planned economy, which adjusts production to the needs of the community, would distribute the work to be done among all those able to work and would guarantee a livelihood to every man, woman, and child.”

    We have no idea what possessed Einstein to write this clap-trap. Was he not aware, in 1949, of the evils perpetrated by Stalin and the planners of the Soviet Union? Had he not heard of the purges, the famines and the Gulag?

    There should be no need to mention that Ludwig von Mises already showed in 1920 that economic calculation is literally impossible in a society in which the State is the sole owner of the means of production. Moreover, a vigorous debate between F.A. Hayek and Lionel Robbins on the one side, and assorted supporters of central economic planning such as Oskar Lange and Henry Dickinson on the other side had been raging between the mid 1930s and early 1940s (previously Marxist writers had proscribed such debates on the basis of polylogism).

    Possibly Einstein wasn’t aware of this debate, but a salient feature of it was that the socialist planners had been forced to retreat step by step, until in the end, the only proposal they were left with was that the central planning agency should try to “imitate a market”. As Mises remarked on this later (in Human Action, which incidentally was also published in 1949):

    “What these neo-socialists suggest is really paradoxical. They want to abolish private control of the means of production, market exchange, market prices, and competition. But at the same time they want to organize the socialist utopia in such a way that people could act as if these things were still present.

     

    They want people to play market as children play war, railroad, or school. They do not comprehend how such childish play differs from the real thing it tries to imitate.”

    (italics in original)

    If the socialists had succeeded in establishing socialism globally after the Russian revolution, the world would have been back in something resembling the stone age within a few short years. Society would have fallen apart, people would have been forced to lead a hand-to-mouth existence, barely subsiding. The only reason why the communists held on for as long as they did was that socialism was not implemented on a global scale. The planners were therefore able to observe prices in the capitalist societies, allowing them to engage in a rudimentary form of economic calculation.

     

    400px-Oskar_Lange_20-65

    Polish economist and “Market socialist” Oskar Lange: he lost the socialist calculation debate and didn’t even realize it, as he simply failed to grasp the essence of the argument. Poland’s economy was duly run into the ground by his fellow socialists.

    Photo credit: W?adys?aw Miernicki

    It is truly remarkable how deeply embedded socialist thought remains in society to this day, in spite of the downfall of the socialist Prison State in the late 1980s/early 1990s, after its utter bankruptcy could no longer be concealed (as an aside, we plan to soon post another article on the enduring popularity of collectivism, a phenomenon that strikes us as more than passing strange). Thus yet another popular and renowned physicist, namely Stephen Hawkins, has jumped into the debate, seemingly attacking capitalism. According to the Huffington Post, “Stephen Hawking Says We Should Really Be Scared Of Capitalism, Not Robots”.

    To paraphrase Albert Jay Nock, it is downright absurd that socialist ideas are still so unquestioningly accepted that one is actually forced to discuss and defend capitalism, as if there were any other type of economy! An economy cannot be anything but capitalistic; without economic calculation, there is simply no rational economy to discuss. It makes no sense to call any other system an “economy”.

    It follows that the only people who have reason to discuss the viability of the capitalist system are those who want to return to a hunter-gatherer lifestyle. But they can do that without trying to enforce their nonsense on anyone else. Surely there is enough room in the Amazon forest. If a handful of morons eager to shun civilization want to ship themselves there, we imagine no-one would object (such as e.g. the insane eco death-cult of Paul Kingsnorth in the UK; they probably wouldn’t do it though, due to the lack of wall plugs needed to recharge the batteries of their iPhones).

     

    Production and Distribution are not Separate Activities

    We are not sure why Mr. Hawking would object to capitalism. Does he not realize that without the free market economy (hampered as it is nowadays), there would be no modern physics as we know it? That the radio telescopes and the particle accelerators used by experimenters to check the validity of his theories wouldn’t exist?

     

    hawking

    Stephen Hawking, world-renowned theoretical physicist. He has inter alia published books on physics even laymen can enjoy, and which we highly recommend.

    Photo credit: NASA

    Here is what the Huffington Post writes about Hawking’s remarks (perhaps not surprisingly, French Marxist economist Thomas Piketty is mentioned as well in the commentary proved by the HuffPo’s author. In spite of the – in our opinion artificially blown out of all proportions – popularity of Pikkety’s tome, it is a book that is absolute garbage both in terms of theory and and its misrepresentation of empirical data).

    “Machines won’t bring about the economic robot apocalypse — but greedy humans will, according to physicist Stephen Hawking. In a Reddit Ask Me Anything session on Thursday, the scientist predicted that economic inequality will skyrocket as more jobs become automated and the rich owners of machines refuse to share their fast-proliferating wealth.

     

    “If machines produce everything we need, the outcome will depend on how things are distributed. Everyone can enjoy a life of luxurious leisure if the machine-produced wealth is shared, or most people can end up miserably poor if the machine-owners successfully lobby against wealth redistribution. So far, the trend seems to be toward the second option, with technology driving ever-increasing inequality.”

     

    Essentially, machine owners will become the bourgeoisie of a new era, in which the corporations they own won’t provide jobs to actual human workers.

    As it is, the chasm between the super rich and the rest is growing. For starters, capital — such as stocks or property — accrues value at a much faster rate than the actual economy grows, according to the French economist Thomas Piketty. The wealth of the rich multiplies faster than wages increase, and the working class can never even catch up. But if Hawking is right, the problem won’t be about catching up. It’ll be a struggle to even inch past the starting line.”

    (the emphasized part are Hawking’s own words)

    First of all, as we have discussed in these pages on many occasions, inequality cannot possibly be a problem as such (here is an example from 2011: “Wealth and Income Inequality in the US”). It may produce envy, but that doesn’t mean inequality is a problem – envy is.

    Let us simply consider two hypothetical societies. In one of them, every inhabitant makes the equivalent of $1,000 per month. Perfect equality! In another, three people make $6,000 per month each, while the rest make $2,000 each. Bad, bad, bad….there are three rich people! Rhetorical question: which one do you think people would prefer to live in?

    The reason why inequality is seen as a problem nowadays, is that the incomes of the middle class and the poor have stagnated or even declined since the adoption of the full-fledged fiat money system in the 1970s, while already rich owners of assets have seen their wealth and income soar. Had everybody’s wealth increased, even if at unequal rates, there would be precisely zero reason to complain.

    What is the reason for this deplorable development? It certainly isn’t the fact that the “machine-owners” (read: capitalists) have successfully lobbied against wealth redistribution” as Mr. Hawking avers. As a matter of fact, in the US a tiny minority of the population pays the vast bulk of the taxes the State then redistributes. As of 2015, the top 20% of income earners pay 84% of all income tax. It seems their “lobbying against wealth redistribution” hasn’t been all that successful so far.

    The bottom 20% (up to annual earnings of $47,300) pay no income tax at all – on the contrary, they receive a net income tax benefit. The slightly dated chart below shows the situation as of 2012 (it shows the bottom 50% as a single group, so one doesn’t see the tax beneficiaries, but it also shows a more finely grained overview of the top earners and how much they are paying).

     

    wrd

    Wealth redistribution hardly seems to be a “problem” (chart by Erik Soderstrom) – click to enlarge.

    As Murray Rothbard notes in Man, Economy and State, in a free market there is no such thing as “distribution” that is separate from production:

    “The theory of the market determines the prices and incomes accruing to productive factors, thereby also determining the “functional distribution” of the factors. “Personal distribution”— how much money each person receives from the productive system—is determined, in turn, by the functions that he or his property performs in that system. There is no separation between production and distribution, and it is completely erroneous for writers to treat the productive system as if producers dump their product onto some stockpile, to be later “distributed” in some way to the people in the society. “Distribution” is only the other side of the coin of production on the market.

     

    Many people criticize the free market as follows: Yes, we agree that production and prices will be allocated on the free market in a way best fitted to serve the needs of the consumers. But this law is necessarily based on a given initial distribution of income among the consumers; some consumers begin with only a little money, others with a great deal. The market system of production can be commended only if the original distribution of income meets with our approval.

     

    This initial distribution of income (or rather of money assets) did not originate in thin air, however. It, too, was the necessary consequence of a market allocation of prices and production. It was the consequence of serving the needs of previous consumers. It was not an arbitrarily given distribution, but one that itself emerged from satisfying consumer needs. It too was inextricably bound up with production.”

    (italics in original)

     

    MurrayBW

    Murray Rothbard: production and distribution are not separate activities

    Photo credit: Ludwig von Mises Institute

    This leaves the question why the real incomes of the middle class and the poor have stagnated and declined – and the answer was already implicit in what we wrote further above. It is the unfettered fiat money inflation that has been in train since Nixon’s gold default that is to blame. Newly printed money always enters the economy at discrete points, and there will be earlier and later receivers of this money. Wealth will be redistributed from the latter to the former. The rich are in a better position than the poor, as asset prices tend to rise earlier and disproportionately relative to other prices. However, the central bank and its fiat money system are not capitalist free market institutions – they are socialist central planning agencies and tools.

    It seems to us Mr. Hawking should be worried about socialism, not about capitalism. To be fair, we cannot really see as strong an indictment of capitalism in Mr. Hawking’s words as insinuated by the HuffPo’s author and the title of his article. Hawking definitely sounds a lot more harmless than Einstein did. However, he still seems to be advocating some sort of forcible wealth redistribution – plenty of which is already occurring.

     

    Fear of Robots and the Problem of Scarcity

    Hawking also seems to some extent express the fear of modern-day Luddites, that “robots will take all our jobs”. First of all, economic activity is primarily about producing more with less. It is about “economizing” – to relieve us of the drudgery of the pre-capitalistic order is its very object. It is absurd to complain and worry about its success in this department. The assertion that machines will “steal jobs” is of course as old as the first machines.

    And yet, in spite of ever greater progress and ever more work being done by machines, human prosperity has continued to increase (by any measure one can possibly apply). Instead of jobs simply “disappearing”, different and better ones have taken their place. No-one can as of yet know what industries there will be in the future. No-one knew in 1990 that one day, a “social media company” would employ 10s of thousands of people and earn $10 billion per year.

    Simply put, as long as there is more land (in the widest sense) than there are people on the planet, labor will always remain a scarce resource. What unemployment there is, is in part catallactic (voluntary), while the rest consists of “institutional” unemployment. The latter is to 100% the result of government intervention in the economy and specifically the labor market – it is not a result of capitalism or technological progress.

    We also want to briefly address the belief that “robots will do all the work and produce everything”, the implied assertion that these production processes will somehow come for free, and that therefore only the “distribution question” remains. It is in a sense true that we are no longer constrained by a scarcity framework as long as we have a capitalist system. As Israel Kirzner wrote in this context in Discovery and the Capitalist Process – encapsulating both what we said above regarding the as of yet unknown future and the fact that capitalism is not confined by the problem of scarcity:

    “We are not able to chart the future of capitalism in any specificity. Our reason for this incapability is precisely that which assures us . . . the economic future of capitalism will be one of progress and advance. The circumstance that precludes our viewing the future of capitalism as a determinate one is the very circumstance in which, with entrepreneurship at work, we are no longer confined by any scarcity framework. It is therefore the very absence of this element of determinacy and predictability that, paradoxically, permits us to feel confidence in the long-run vitality and progress of the economy under capitalism.”

    However, “not confined” doesn’t mean that scarcity has all of a sudden ceased to exist. If not for scarcity, there would be no need to allocate resources properly. In fact, there would be no economic goods and no prices. We may not be confined by scarcity under capitalism, but we still have to deal with it; it is a fact of life.

     

    Kirzner

    A stern looking Israel Kirzner. Kirzner’s has produced highly interesting works on the entrepreneurial process, partly based on Hayek’s ideas about the role of knowledge in society

    What many of the “robot worriers” overlook is that while we have enormous knowledge, and in theory could probably automate a great many production processes that are as of yet not automated, we are still faced with the fact that capital is scarce. The main reason why e.g. the Central African Republic is not at the level of development of an industrialized nation is precisely that it lacks capital. In other words, it is not “technology” or know-how that is the obstacle to the Utopia Hawking imagines to come into being – it is scarcity.

     

    744px-Atlas_frontview_2013

    Caution, job thief!

    Image credit: DARPA

    However, if the problem of scarcity were licked once and for all, why should there still be a problem of distribution? As we noted above: scarcity is why there are economic goods that have prices. The air we breathe is an example of a non-scarce good. Has anyone ever worried about its “distribution”? If there is no longer any scarcity, i.e. once Utopia or the Land of Cockaigne has been achieved, everything will indeed come for free. There will no longer be anything worth stealing and redistributing.

     

    Conclusion

    Stephen Hawking is undoubtedly a nice man and a genius in his field. This is probably also the field he should stick with. Anyway, we can lay his worries to rest: once there is no longer scarcity in the world, nobody will have reason to worry about wealth redistribution. Of course, it’s also not going to happen anytime soon and probably never will. There is also no reason to worry about employment while at least vestiges of a free market exist: as long as there remain unsatisfied human wants and as long as there are more resources than people, everybody will find work. The only real problem is government intervention in the market process.

  • Obama Is Considering Gun Control Through Executive Order

    After yesterday’s not one, not two, but three campus shootings, which come a week after the latest mass killing at Umpqua Community College left 10 people dead, it was only a matter of time before the administration would pick up where it left off shortly after the Sandy Hook shooting of December 2012.

    The time has arrived, and according to The Hill after Obama’s failed efforts to implement any form of gun control in early 2013 fizzled, the lame duck president is preparing to do what he has been threatening to do for a long time, by issuing a new executive action on gun control.

    “Obama is wading back into the divisive issue of gun control as he travels to Roseburg, Ore., Friday to meet privately with survivors and families of victims of the mass shooting at Umpqua Community College.”

    While not a full ban on gun sales (yet) Obama is considering extending background check requirements to more dealers, according to The Washington Post. A White House official confirmed the plan is under consideration.

    As we have noted previously, this proposal is among a number of executive actions that Obama considered after the 2012 shooting at an elementary school in Newtown, Conn. Back then the idea was abandoned, partly due to objections from the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (ATF).

    Still, unwilling to ride off into the sunset without imposing at least one executive order on gun control, the White House is giving the plan a second look.

    At a press conference last week, a frustrated Obama said he had asked his advisers “to scrub what kinds of authorities do we have to enforce the laws that we have in place more effectively to keep guns out of the hands of criminals.”

    The details:

    Under the plan, dealers who sell guns above a certain amount would have to perform background checks and obtain a license from the ATF.

     

    Many of those dealers are exempt from the requirements now under a federal law that states people who make “occasional sales” as a hobby do not have to obtain a license or perform background checks, The Post notes.

     

    The rule change would effectively help to close what critics call a loophole that allows people to purchase firearms online and at gun shows without going through a background check.

     

    The president’s legal staff is weighing just how far he could tighten the standard without the regulation being overturned in court.

    Like on previous occasions, such an executive order is certain to set off a firestorm in Washington, with a debate raging in Congress whether gun control is needed to stem the tide of mass shootings.

    Obama’s proposal is sure to also launch a firestorm on the presidential campaign trail, where Hillary Clinton, the front-runner for the Democratic presidential nomination, has seized on the Oregon shooting to put forward a number of gun control proposals, including an executive action on background checks that is similar to what Obama is now considering.

    The Democratic Party’s focus on guns has drawn fierce criticism from Republican White House hopefuls, who largely say mental health, and not gun control, is the correct policy response. They say Democrats are using the shootings to roll back Second Amendment rights.

    Meanwhile, just like in 2012, the threat of more gun control is having just the opposite effect of what the president intends, and as we reported earlier this week, gun sales are soaring in the aftermath of the most recent cluster of shootings. In fact, “gun sales this year could surpass the record set in 2013, when gun purchases surged after the December 2012 Sandy Hook murders.”

    In the first nine months of this year, 15.6m of the background checks needed to purchase guns from federally licensed sellers have been processed, compared with the 15.5m applications in the same period in 2013, according to the National Instant Criminal Background Check System.

    Why the surge? Simple: “Once the public hears the president on the news say we need more gun controls, it tends to drive sales,” said Mr Hyatt, who owns one of the largest gun retailers in the US. “People think, if I don’t get a gun now, it might be difficult to get one in the future. The store is crowded.

    Because if you want something to be truly broken, just invite the government to “fix” it. Which is not to say that everyone is a loser – two clear winners from Obama’s repeated attempts to enforce gun control are shown in the chart below.

  • Peak Sovereign Wealth Fund?

    Via ConvergEx's Nicholas Colas,

    Sovereign wealth funds tied to oil producing states have been much in the news of late. With the volatility in energy prices, Norway, Saudi Arabia and Russia have all tapped their SWFs over the course of the year to plug budget shortfalls.  So have we seen “Peak SWF” in terms of assets under management with last year’s $7 trillion balance?  Only if oil prices stay permanently low, an unlikely event barring a global depression.

     

    SWFs are here to stay, and a review of this year’s major conferences dedicated to these investors points to how the global investment landscape will change in coming years.  SWFs want more exposure to non-correlated returns from private equity, infrastructure and hedge funds while using more passive strategies for their “core” financial asset investments. Also, aware that much of their funding comes from carbon-based fuels, some are keenly interested in “Green” investing and other socially-conscious initiatives. The only caveat to the money management industry: SWFs are becoming much more fee conscious.

    There was a small piece of good news out of civil war ravaged Libya today: there’s a tanker loading some oil at a terminal in the east of the country.  According to a Wall Street Journal article, it is the first such production in months and provides a glimmer of hope that the country can begin to stabilize the local petroleum-based economy. “Normal” production for Libya is 1.5 million barrels/day. Current output is less than a third of that number.

    Given all the terrible news out of the country since the fall of Muammar Ghaddafi in 2011, you might be surprised to know that the country is far from broke.  In fact, the Libyan Investment Authority (LIA) has some $67 billion in assets – the equivalent of $10,000 for every citizen. The only problem is that no one seems to quite agree on the legitimate leadership of the country, and both sides are pressing their claims in British courts. In the meantime, the fund is still a player in global finance with +$8 billion in public equity investments alone. 

    Sovereign wealth funds such as the Libyan Investment Authority started in the 1950s – Kuwait had one even before its independence from Great Britain – and they most often associated with energy exporting countries. Their goal is to invest excess cash generated from oil and other fossil fuel sales so that when the country’s natural resources run out there is another base of assets to support the population. There are also SWFs in countries with long histories of exporting finished goods, such as Singapore, Hong Kong and, of course mainland China. 

    Now, with oil prices under pressure over the last year it should be no surprise that energy exporting countries would be tapping their SWFs to fill budgetary gaps. Some recent headlines:

    Norway, which actually runs the largest sovereign wealth fund in the world, plans to draw approximately $450 million from the fund in 2016 to replace oil revenues diminished by low energy prices.  Since the fund has $820 billion under management, that’s not much of a drawdown. The fixed income portion of the fund generates more than that in interest over the next 12 months, so the fund doesn’t actually have to sell assets to meet the government’s financial needs.

     

    Saudi Arabia, where the central bank also doubles as the country’s SWF, is drawing on its foreign currency reserves to make up for declining oil revenues.  Now, the country still has over $600 billion in reserves, but that is down 10% from last year.

     

    Russia has tapped its SWF for $14.3 billion over the course of 2015 according to press accounts

    So was last year some kind of “Peak SWF”, or will the $7 trillion invested in these funds continue to grow?  The short answer is that it depends on energy prices, with 60% of SWF assets domiciled in oil and gas producing countries. So if you believe energy prices will remain low for the next 10 years, then yes…  Sovereign wealth funds might continue to shrink. But if and when (emphasis on the latter) oil prices recover, these funds will certainly resume their growth track.

    Regardless of when oil prices turn, SWFs are large enough right now – and for the near future – to play a prominent global role in capital markets.  There are two major conferences for this group of investors just this month – the International Forum of Sovereign Wealth Funds in Milan, and the Institute Fund Summit (hosted by SWFI) in Amsterdam.  If you want to know what’s important to SWFs at the moment, the answers are in the titles of the presentations at these two events:

    • Interest in alternative asset classes, specifically Private Equity, Infrastructure Investments, and Hedge Funds.
    • A focus on European investment, leveraging an improving economic picture for the region.
    • “Decarbonizing Investment Portfolios” by lowering exposures to fossil fuel related companies and also investing in “Clean energy”.
    • Optimal Asset allocation, with an eye on underappreciated asset classes.
    • Responsible Investing benchmarking.
    • Smart beta and factor-based investing.

    There are three distinct threads from these topics.  First, at least some SWFs clearly feel they must synchronize their investing approach to the populations they serve.  If environmental responsibility is a national social priority, then that should be reflected in the portfolio (even if the source of the capital was not originally so pristine). Second, SWFs clearly want to move beyond the 60/40 equity-fixed income model and invest in alternative assets. Some of the largest funds (Norway, for example) are already doing this, especially in real estate. Lastly, they want low cost options for “Core” investments in stocks and bonds that still offer some opportunity for outperformance. 

    The bottom line to this brief tour of sovereign wealth funds is that, even with the drop in oil prices, the $7 trillion invested in SWFs makes them important participants in global capital markets; what they do, even at the margin, matters.  Having seen the volatility in equity markets – first in 2008 and again this year – they want to diversify.  Moreover, SWFs have the time horizon to look at long time frame projects like real estate and infrastructure; they don’t have to limit their scope to just liquid capital markets like stocks and bonds. The great unknown is how they will reallocate capital if oil prices really do remain muted for longer than expected.  Will they take more risk?  Or less?  And in what form?  Given their collective size, those decisions could alter the global investment environment more permanently than issues like Federal Reserve policy or next quarter’s corporate profits.

  • Trump's Success Exposes America's Winner-Loser Society

    Everywhere you look – from political campaigns, both Democratic and Republican, that are focused on the haves and have-nots, to much of the Internet – people are upset. They are angry that they are being bullied by folks who have more power – and sometimes lots more money — than they have.

    You feel a tension in America now between “us” and “them.” This is not about the usual suspects of polarization – conservatives and liberals. It is “us” and those myriad groups that the public feels have disempowered them. Because bullying isn’t just an issue for children any more. It is an issue – perhaps the issue – for everyone.

    Trump is a beneficiary of something ubiquitous in America today: The United States is a winner and loser society.

    That is how most Americans think of it. We have long been told that anyone in this country who wants to succeed, can. Casting aside the increasing impediments to social mobility, such as high college tuition costs and the loss of high-paid, blue-collar jobs, the onus is entirely on the individual. Surveys show that Americans strongly believe it. In fact, among industrialized nations, Americans are the only people who believe that they have the power to determine their own destiny.

    Yet, however much Americans espouse it, that belief is shakier than we let on. Many Americans increasingly feel, deep down, that the game is rigged. That the people who run this country – the economic, political and intellectual elites – get all the advantages. Average Joe can’t win.

    We know people feel this way because they say so. It is what unites Tea Party activists and Senator Bernie Sanders’ supporters, reactionaries and radicals. Both sides rail at the abuse of power and the power of abuse.  They may not agree on much, but they see themselves as victims of the same force: bullies.

    Read more here at Reuters…

  • US Recession Watch: The Inventory Liquidation Looms

    Submitted by Eugen von Bohm-Bawerk via Bawerk.net,

    In The Coming US Recession Charted (June 20, 2015) we argued that the US economy is heading toward recession, not escape velocity as the sell-side and Fed officials have been telling us. Today we will revisit the possibility of the US entering a recession in 2016 and by extension substantiate our argument for NIRP, and not lift-off, as the most likely next move by FOMC.

    One of the most reliable predictors for the business cycle is the yield curve. Unfortunately, due to Federal Reserve manipulation, whereby the short end of the curve have been permanently pegged to zero, an inverted yield curve is more or less impossible. However, if we look at the relative change from trend we can construct an equally good predictor. The blue line in the chart below depicts difference in the 10/5 term spread vs. its underlying trend. Historically, a breach of 50 basis points have indicated an upcoming recession. While the current trend deviation is not giving a clear signal yet, it is close enough to suggest we are heading straight into another recession.  

     Term Spread Recession

    Source: Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, Bawek.net

    The growth rate in real GDP for 2015 goes a long way to validate what we see in the picture above. Sup-par performance, even by a lacklustre post-crisis standard, is the most likely outcome for the year. Recent data point to a very weak third quarter, with growth probably coming in less than 1 per cent SAAR;  supported by the prescient Atlanta nowcast model. The annual run rate for GDP suggest growth below 2 per cent, thus entering 2016 on slowing momentum.

    Nowcast vs, actua

    Source: Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta, Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, Bawerk.net

    Why do we believe the second half will weaken from an already dismal first half? One reason stems directly from the outcome of the so-called residual seasonality debate that raged after the catastrophically poor first quarter. In what, by now, have become a sell-side embarrassing ritual, first quarter GDP ruin all preceding year-end forecast of impending escape velocity.

    This year they had enough of it and demanded from the BEA to remove any residual seasonality that had to still be left in the data. The BEA complied and revised the first quarter as requested. The problem with such myopic thinking is that it obviously comes back to bite you when you least need it. We are sure the Atlanta Fed model does not account for the fact that GDP “given” to the first quarter must be “taken”, most likely from second and third quarter, since seasonal adjustment cannot (or should not) change the average growth rate for the year as a whole. If BEA shifted GDP units into the first quarter, they must revise down second and third quarter correspondingly as shown by our “second round” seasonal adjustment in the chart below. In other words, there should be downside in the already downbeat Atlanta Fed nowcast.

    The FOMCs lift-off debate will thus do a one-eighty quicker than most people think possible.Residual Seasonality

    Source: Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA), Bawerk.net

    In addition, as we pointed out in our update from June 20, time is getting ripe for another down cycle. Historically the trough to peak last around 40 months, while the current expansion has been ongoing for 75 and is by that the fourth longest on record (actually third, as the second world war was not a time of prosperity in the US, but the statistics measure it as such).Expansion Length

    Source: National Bureau of Economic Research, Bawerk.net

    As we should expect in a mature expansion, business sales stalls and have actually started to fall; this is not something that just tend to happen now and then. The chart below clearly shows what falling business sales means – recession.

     Total Bus Sales

    Source: Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, Bawerk.net

    Inventories, as witnessed in the latest wholesale sale report, are rising fast with the inventory to sales ratio clearly in recessionary territory. As ZeroHedge recently pointed out, the dollar value of inventories over sales have never been higher.

    Wholesale Sales with dollar diff

    Source: Census Bureau, Bawerk.net

    In this environment, we should expect imports to slow down, but due to a strong dollar, it makes more sense for Americans to import goods than buy from local suppliers. We calculate the non-oil trade deficit to be at a record while the overall deficit is flattered by increased domestic oil production and oil product exports. As the shale-gale settles down, domestic oil production will fall; probably 400 – 600kb/d in 2016. Imports will obviously rise accordingly. The total deficit will converge with the non-oil deficit, creating another GDP headwind.Total and non oil trade balance

    Source: Census Bureau, Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, Bawerk.net

    As a side-note regarding the strong dollar and how the Fed has become the global central bank. In times of QE, dollar liquidity has improved, which includes the all-important Eurodollar market. With increased confidence that actual dollars will be there if needed, money flows back out pulling the dollar value down. However, as soon as the Fed stops the flow of fresh dollars,  the dollar value spikes wreaking havoc to global dollar liquidity. What is interesting to note is how QE3 completely failed to lift confidence in the global dollar market and the mere taper crushed the remaining confidence leading to a scramble for actual dollars, thus bringing the EM down with it. USD and QE

    Source: Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, Bawek.net

    But we digress, with higher inventories and more goods flowing in from foreign markets US industrial production growth has fallen (to a large extent tied into reduced activities in shale oil development) and will soon cross the zero line as production need to be realigned with demand.

    Industrial Production

    Source: Federal Reserve, Bawerk.net

    The factory order report confirms our view. Both “core” and headline factory orders are pointing to tougher times for US manufacturing.  

    Factory Orders

    Source: Census Bureau, Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis, Bawerk.net

    Excess capacity leads to another round of deflationary pressure; exacerbated by the dramatic change in EMs FX reserve accumulation. We showed yesterday that even Norway is on the brink of becoming a net seller of financial securities. Bond markets agree with that assessment witnessed in the rapidly falling 5Y/5Y, in both Europe and the US.

    We end with an update to our cumulative goods sales vs. cumulative inventories chart derived from the GDP report.

    Cumulative goods sales vs inventory

     

    There can be little doubt that the massive, unprecedented surge in inventory accumulation (which counts positively to GDP) will eventually be liquidated. When it does the US enter recession,  global dollar liquidity crashes, the value of dollar surges even higher, pulling EM further down and a world recession will be upon us again. In this scenario central banks panic; NIRP, QE4 and helicopter money is the only thing they know and they will stick to it.

  • We Are All (Almost) Japanese Now

    Submitted by Jeffrey Snider via Alhambra Investment Partners,

    It may be unexpected to economists, but the sudden and uniform economic downside that is either appearing or strengthening almost everywhere in the world is closely tracking the wholesale “dollar.” In many cases, that flows through China and so is given that gloss, but there can be little doubt now about either cause or effect. In Japan, machine orders (a highly-used proxy for capex) tumbled “unexpectedly” in August after a mixed view from July (to put it kindly).

    Machine orders – a proxy for private capital expenditures – fell 3.5 per cent in August from a year earlier, with the drop catching economists off guard.

    They had predicted a 3.5 per cent increase for the month, building upon a 2.8 per cent year-on-year gain in July.

    Worse than that, the measure of private “non-volatile” (read: core) machine orders fell 5.7% year-over-year in August after declining 3.6% in July and 7.9% in June. The fact that there is apparent downside gathering two and a half years into QQE without any actual upside to date is perfectly ruinous. As noted discussing Japan’s lack of progress for industrial production, there has been no such upside to QE in any of the channels and pathways that economists were absolutely sure would result. Instead, without any gains, there has only been engineered a massive economic hole that is “unexpectedly” widening and deepening again.

    ABOOK Oct 2015 Global Econ Japan Machine OrdersABOOK Oct 2015 Global Econ Japan IP

    The Bank of Japan mercifully held off from expanding QQE again this week, which only allows some minor reprieve for Japan’s beleaguered households. Real wages were up just 0.2% Y/Y in August only because “inflation” was calculated as close to zero. Total hours worked was once more flat, suggesting that the best that the Japanese can hope is “scraping along the bottom” before any renewed contraction.

    ABOOK Oct 2015 Global Econ Japan Hours ABOOK Oct 2015 Global Econ Japan Real Wages ABOOK Oct 2015 Global Econ Japan Real Wages Index

    The Japanese economy has only “grown” smaller without any apparent catalyst for the recovery (QQE no longer counts, having been proved decisively ineffective and harmful) and “defeat of deflation” that pushed at least asset markets to multi-year extremes. So where Japan risks continuing a downward slope of depression, despite pressing against quadrillion and the true debasement via orders of magnitude, there is purportedly no connection to the “unexpected” trade developments in Germany:

    German exports fell sharply in August, in the latest sign that the slowdown in emerging markets is beginning to affect Europe’s biggest exporter.

    Exports in August were 5.2 per cent lower than July, their sharpest monthly fall since the financial crisis, according to Germany’s national statistics office. Imports also fell 3.1 per cent.

    Of course, we are re-assured that all that is left “overseas” and unrelated to the monetary-driven boom in the QE feudal districts of the US and Europe (it must be that Japan’s extra “Q” in QQE is the difference):

    “The figures are consistent with the industrial data we’ve already had this week and round off quite a bad August for German data,” said Richard Grieveson, an economist at the Economist Intelligence Unit.

    “Clearly, what’s happening in emerging markets — particularly China and Russia — is having an effect and the outlook is not as positive as it was, given the fall in factory orders and the possible impact of the Volkswagen scandal on the ‘Made in Germany’ brand.

    “However, it would be dangerous to read too much into one month’s numbers, given the impact of summer holidays, as well as the fact that the year-on-year data and sentiment indicators are not showing a big change in trend.”

    “Transitory” again? The credentialed economist assures us that there isn’t yet any slowdown in trade activity with especially the US and non-Eurozone EU, despite the Census Bureau reporting this week an August continuation of the 2015 slowdown in US imports from Europe (to nearly 0%).

    ABOOK Oct 2015 USTrade Imports Europe

    Perhaps the US is importing more from Germany than the rest of the EU, but even if that were the case such a situation where the US is buying from Germany at the expense of other European nations doesn’t bode well for any European trade business in the future. Denials aside, there isn’t any evidence to support the idea of US economic strength which is why the September payroll report was only shocking to those that testify to the Yellen economy; US and global. Thus, Japan wages and machine orders and German exports all figure in with US consumers further slipping down in economic function, to and through China or not.  And each is met with the growing chorus of “more stimulus” as if the word itself accomplished the directive (since semantics is undoubtedly all that is left of it).

    ABOOK Sept 2015 Stimulus Japan QE the rest

     

    Apparently the “slippery slope” of economic denial is likewise as universal as the aligned direction of economic progression across the world:

    1. Dollar doesn’t matter, indicates strong economy relative to the world
    2. Dollar matters for oil, but lower oil prices mean stronger consumer
    3. Manufacturing slump doesn’t matter, only temporary
    4. Manufacturing declines are consumer spending, but only a small part
    5. Manufacturing declines are becoming serious, but only from overseas
    6. Global Recession
    7. MORE GLOBAL STIMULUS!!

    Fittingly, we are all almost Japanese now.

  • China's President Tops Obama In "Most Influential" Ranking

    Chinese President Xi Jinping topped US President Barack Obama to take the second place amongst 50 people in Bloomberg's 5th annual Market Most Influential Ranking. As Xinhua notes, according to Bloomberg, the world is waiting for Xi and the Communist Party of China to steer the world's second largest economy through turmoil. Xi, however, lost out on the "most" influential position to the diminutive Federal Reserve Chairwoman Janet Yellen… which, rather worryingly, exposes the terrifying central-planned reality of our 'utopian' new world order.

     

     

    Apple's CEO Tim Cook ranked the third, with Berkshire Hathaway CEO Warren Buffett came the fifth and U.S. President Barack Obama the sixth.

    Meanwhile, the number of Chinese people got on the list this year marks a record high. Among them were Bao Fan, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer at China Renaissance (22th); Wang Qishan, the head of the CPC Central Commission for Discipline Inspection (33rd); and Wang Jianlin, Chairman of Wanda Group (37th) – clearly signifying China's growing influence on global markets.

  • Fairy Tales & The Gun Control "Middle Ground"

    Presented with no comment…

    Because of this…

    Source: Townhall.com

     

    This…

    Source: Investors.com

  • The Massive Energy Top

    From the Slope of Hope:  I’m getting uncomfortable pounding on the same theme over and over again (there’s only so many times I can point out the large, looming topping patterns across the board), so I thought I’d mix things up a bit and just get of the price bars entirely and catch up on a trio of exponential moving averages to show how things have turned south, irrespective of the gargantuan, quadruple-point rally on the Dow. Here are the Industrials:

    1010-indu

    The even-more-important Dow Composite:

    1010-comp

    And the S&P 500:

    1010-spx

    I’ll be the first one to admit that the moving averages looked very similar to this in October 2011, after which time we simply kept soaring higher. But – dare I say it? – it’s different this time! OK, OK, stop throwing rotten vegetables at me. I’m serious.

    Even more enticing to me is the shape of the energy sector, which has been simply nuked:

    1010-xoi

    I have vastly expanded my short holdings over the course of this week, and if we (finally) start re-weakening this week, I’m going to augment my favorite positions. As I suggested, my favorite sector is (once again) energy, as giants like Exxon are exhibiting topping patterns that strike me as once-a-generation type opportunities.

    1010-XOM

  • "The Biggest Protest This Country Has Seen In Years" – Quarter Million Germans Protest Obama "Free Trade" Deal

    When it comes to official and media opinion on Obama’s crowning trade “achievements”, the Trans-Pacific Partnership (TPP) and the Transatlantic Trade And Investment Partnership (TTIP), the party line is united. As previously noted, Barack Obama has assured the population that this treaty is going to be wonderful for everyone:

    In hailing the agreement, Obama said, “Congress and the American people will have months to read every word” before he signs the deal that he described as a win for all sides.

     

    “If we can get this agreement to my desk, then we can help our businesses sell more Made in America goods and services around the world, and we can help more American workers compete and win,” Obama said.

    The mainstream media’s chorus of support for these trade deal is likewise deafening: here are some indicative headlines from this past Monday:

    The far less popular opposing view, one repeatedly presented here, is that like with every other “free trade” agreement that the U.S. has entered into since World War II, the exact opposite is what will actually happen: the outcome will be that the US trade deficit (which excluding petroleum is already back to record levels) will get even larger, and we will see even more jobs and even more businesses go overseas, thus explaining the secrecy and the fast-track nature of the TPP and TTIP’s passage through Congress.

    And while the US population, which is far more perturbed by what Caitlyn Jenner will wear tomorrow than D.C.’s plans on the future of world trade, has been mute in its response to the passage of the first part of the trade treaty, the TPP – after all the MSM isn’t there to tell it how to feel about it, aside to assure it that everything will be great even as millions of highly-paid jobs mysteriously become line cooks – other countries are standing up against globalist trade interests meant to serve a handful of corporations.

    Case in point Germany, where today hundreds of thousands of people marched in Berlin in protest against the planned “free trade” deal between Europe and the United States which they say is anti-democratic and will lower food safety, labor and environmental standards.

    TTIP critics fear that it would lead to worse safeguards in Europe, bringing down standards for consumer safety, food and health or labor rights down to those in America. European nations have stricter regulations for things like genetically modified foods or workers benefits than the US does. There is also discontent with the secretive nature of the negotiations, which prompts skeptics to assume the worst about the document they would eventually produce.

    The organizers – an alliance of environmental groups, charities and opposition parties – claimed that 250,000 people were taking part in the rally against free trade deals with both the United States and Canada, far more than they had anticipated.

    As many as 250,000 protesters gathered in Berlin, according to organizers
     

    “This is the biggest protest that this country has seen for many, many years,” Christoph Bautz, director of citizens’ movement Campact told protesters in a speech.

    According to Reuters, “opposition to the so-called Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP) has risen over the past year in Germany, with critics fearing the pact will hand too much power to big multinationals at the expense of consumers and workers.”

    Popular anger appears to be focused on the encroachment by corporations into every corner around the globe:

    “What bothers me the most is that I don’t want all our consumer laws to be softened,” Oliver Zloty told Reuters TV. “And I don’t want to have a dictatorship by any companies.”

    Other are mostly concerned about the secrecy covering the treaty and its negotiations: “Dieter Bartsch, deputy leader of the parliamentary group for the Left party, who was taking part in the rally said he was concerned about the lack of transparency surrounding the talks. “We definitely need to know what is supposed to be being decided,” he said.”

    As Deutsche Welle adds, the EU and US aim to conclude the negotiations, which began in 2013, by sometime next year. The next round of negotiations is set to begin later this year. Once completed, TTIP would create the world’s largest free-trade zone, home to some 800 million consumers.

    Campaigners are particularly concerned about a provision in the deal that would allow companies to sue governments in special tribunals. Such an arrangement, they fear, would lead to an erosion of labor and environmental protections . TTIP’s supporters dismiss such thinking and argue that the deal would boost the EU’s economy by removing tariffs and creating common standards.

    Gerhard Handke, who heads the Federation of German Wholesale, Foreign Trade and Services, told DW that TTIP would even help uphold such standards. Europe, he explained, would soon be overshadowed by other economic players, such as India and China. “Now is the time to set standards, rather than have other countries dictate them later on,” he said. “Otherwise, one day, we’ll have Asia setting those standards, without anyone asking us what we think.”

    Those gathered in Berlin, though, take a very different view. “We have heard these promises before, these promises of jobs and prosperity and growth,” Larry Brown, a trade unionist from Canada – which is negotiating a similar trade deal with the EU – shouted into a microphone on Saturday as demonstrators clapped and cheered and several police looked on. “They are lies. They have to be stopped.”

    * * *

    Oddly, few in the US aside from the fringe media, share any of these concerns.

    In Germany however, the marchers banged drums, blew whistles and held up posters reading “Yes we can – Stop TTIP.”

    As Reuters adds, the level of resistance “has taken Chancellor Angela Merkel’s government by surprise and underscores the challenge it faces to turn the tide in favor of the deal which proponents say will create a market of 800 million and serve as a counterweight to China’s economic clout.”

    And just like in the US, the government is scrambling to soften the popular opposition before the deal is scuttled:

    In a full-page letter published in several German newspapers on Saturday, Economy Minister Sigmar Gabriel warned against “scaremongering”.

     

    “We have the chance to set new and goods standards for growing global trade. With ambitious, standards for the environment and consumers and with fair conditions for investment and workers. This must be our aim,” Gabriel wrote.

     

    “A fair and comprehensive free trade deal promotes growth and prosperity in Europe. We should actively participate in the rules for world trade of tomorrow,” Ulrich Grillo, head of the BDI Federation of German industries, said in a statement.

    Businesses hope the trade deal will deliver over $100 billion of economic gains on both sides of the Atlantic.

    Which, naturally, is jargon for millions in cost-cuts and layoffs, meant to boost profitability and shareholder equity.

    For now the U.S. public remains largely inert to the TPP and TTIP concerns sweeping the globe; we expect that to last until the next major round of layoffs hits the US, just in time for the NBER to admit the country has been in a recession for at least 6 months.

    This is how the protest looked like covered by social networks and other non-US media outlets:

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 10, 2015

  • The Deep State: Source Of All Negativity

    Submitted by Doug Casey via InternationalMan.com,

    I’d like to address some aspects of the Greater Depression in this essay.

    I’m here to tell you that the inevitable became reality in 2008. We’ve had an interlude over the last few years financed by trillions of new currency units.

    However, the economic clock on the wall is reading the same time as it was in 2007, and the Black Horsemen of your worst financial nightmares are about to again crash through the doors and end the party. And this time, they won’t be riding children’s ponies, but armored Percherons.

    To refresh your memory, let me recount what a depression is.

    The best general definition is: A period of time when most people’s standard of living drops significantly. By that definition, the Greater Depression started in 2008, although historians may someday say it began in 1971, when real wages started falling.

    It’s also a period of time when distortions and misallocations of capital are liquidated, and when the business cycle, which is caused exclusively by currency debasement, also known as inflation, climaxes. That results in high unemployment, business failures, uncompleted construction, bond defaults, stock market crashes, and the like.

    Fortunately, for those who benefit from the status quo, and members of something called the Deep State, the trillions of new currency units delayed the liquidation. But they also ensured it will now happen on a much grander scale.

    The Deep State is an extremely powerful network that controls nearly everything around you. You won’t read about it in the news because it controls the news. Politicians won’t talk about it publicly. That would be like a mobster discussing murder and robbery on the 6 o’clock news. You could say the Deep State is hidden, but it’s only hidden in plain sight.

    The Deep State is the source of every negative thing that’s happening right now. To survive the coming rough times, it’s essential for you to know what it’s all about.

    The State

    Now, what causes economic problems? With the exception of natural events like fires, floods, and earthquakes, they’re all caused directly and indirectly by the State, through its wars, taxes, regulations, and inflation.

    Yes, yes, I know this is an oversimplification, that human nature is really at fault, and the institution of the State is only a mass dramatization of the psychological aberrations and demons that lie within us all. But we don’t have time to go all the way down the rabbit hole, so let’s just talk about the proximate rather than the ultimate causes of the Greater Depression. And here, I want to talk about the nature of the State, in general, and then something called the Deep State, in particular.

    A key takeaway, and I emphasize that because I expect it to otherwise bounce off the programmed psyches of most people, is that the very idea of the State itself is poisonous, evil, and intrinsically destructive. But, like so many bad ideas, people have come to assume it’s part of the cosmic firmament, when it’s really just a monstrous scam. It’s a fraud, like your belief that you have a right to free speech because of the First Amendment, or a right to be armed because of the Second Amendment. No, you don’t. The U.S. Constitution is just an arbitrary piece of paper…entirely apart from the fact the whole thing is now just a dead letter. You have a right to free speech and to be armed because they’re necessary parts of being a free person, not because of what a political document says.

    Even though the essence of the State is coercion, people have been taught to love and respect it. Most people think of the State in the quaint light of a grade school civics book. They think it has something to do with “We the People” electing a Jimmy Stewart character to represent them. That ideal has always been a pernicious fiction, because it idealizes, sanitizes, and legitimizes an intrinsically evil and destructive institution, which is based on force. As Mao once said, political power comes out of the barrel of a gun. But things have gone far beyond that. We’re now in the Deep State.

    The Deep State

    The concept of the Deep State originated in Turkey, which is appropriate, since it’s the heir to the totally corrupt Byzantine and Ottoman empires. And in the best Byzantine manner, the Deep State has insinuated itself throughout the fabric of what once was America. Its tendrils reach from Washington down to every part of civil society. Like a metastasized cancer, it can no longer be easily eradicated.

    I used to joke that there was nothing wrong with Washington that 10 megatons on the capital couldn’t cure. But I don’t say that anymore. Partially because it’s too dangerous, but mainly because it’s now untrue. What’s now needed is 10 megatons on the capital, and four more bursts in a quadrant 10 miles out.

    In many ways, Washington models itself after another city with a Deep State, ancient Rome. Here’s how a Victorian freethinker, Winwood Reade, accurately described it:

    Rome lived upon its principal till ruin stared it in the face. Industry is the only true source of wealth, and there was no industry in Rome. By day the Ostia road was crowded with carts and muleteers, carrying to the great city the silks and spices of the East, the marble of Asia Minor, the timber of the Atlas, the grain of Africa and Egypt; and the carts brought out nothing but loads of dung. That was their return cargo.

    The Deep State controls the political and economic essence of the U.S. This is much more than observing that there’s no real difference between the left and right wings of the Demopublican Party. It’s well known by anyone with any sense (that is, by everybody except the average voter) that although the Republicans say they believe in economic freedom (but don’t), they definitely don’t believe in social freedom. And the Democrats say they believe in social freedom (but don’t), but they definitely don’t believe in economic freedom.

    Who Is Part of the Deep State?

    The American Deep State is a real, but informal, structure that has arisen to not just profit from, but control, the State.

    The Deep State has a life of its own, like the government itself. It’s composed of top-echelon employees of a dozen Praetorian agencies, like the FBI, CIA, and NSA…top generals, admirals, and other military operatives…long-term congressmen and senators…and directors of important regulatory agencies.

    But Deep State is much broader than just the government. It includes the heads of major corporations, all of whom are heavily involved in selling to the State and enabling it. That absolutely includes Silicon Valley, although those guys at least have a sense of humor, evidenced by their “Don’t Be Evil” motto. It also includes all the top people in the Fed, and the heads of all the major banks, brokers, and insurers. Add the presidents and many professors at top universities, which act as Deep State recruiting centers…all the top media figures, of course…and many regulars at things like Bohemian Grove and the Council on Foreign Relations. They epitomize the status quo, held together by power, money, and propaganda.

    Altogether, I’ll guess these people number a thousand or so. You might analogize the structure of the Deep State with a huge pack of dogs. The people I’ve just described are the top dogs.

    But there are hundreds of thousands more who aren’t at the nexus, but who directly depend on them, have considerable clout, and support the Deep State because it supports them. This includes many of the wealthy, especially those who got that way thanks to their State connections…the 1.5 million people who have top secret clearances (that’s a shocking, but accurate, number)… plus top players in organized crime, especially the illegal drug business, little of which would exist without the State. Plus mid-level types in the police and military, corporations, and non-governmental organizations.

    These are what you might call the running dogs.

    Beyond that are the scores and scores of millions who depend on things remaining the way they are. Like the 50%-plus of Americans who are net recipients of benefits from the State…the 60 million on Social Security…the 66 million on Medicaid…the 50 million on food stamps…the many millions on hundreds of other programs… the 23 million government employees and most of their families. In fact, let’s include the many millions of average Joes and Janes who are just getting by.

    You might call this level of people, the vast majority of the population, whipped dogs. They both love and fear their master, they’ll do as they’re told, and they’ll roll over on their backs and wet themselves if confronted by a top dog or running dog who feels they’re out of line. These three types of dogs make up the vast majority of the U.S. population. I trust you aren’t among them. I consider myself a Lone Wolf in this context and hope you are, too. Unfortunately, however, dogs are enemies of wolves, and tend to hunt them down.

    The Deep State is destructive, but it’s great for the people in it. And, like any living organism, its prime directive is: Survive! It survives by indoctrinating the fiction that it’s both good and necessary. However, it’s a parasite that promotes the ridiculous notion that everyone can live at the expense of society.

    Is it a conspiracy, headed by a man stroking a white cat? I think not. I find it’s hard enough to get a bunch of friends to agree on what movie to see, much less a bunch of power-hungry miscreants bent on running everyone’s lives. But, on the other hand, the top dogs all know each other, went to the same schools, belong to the same clubs, socialize, and, most important, have common interests, values, and philosophies.

    The American Deep State rotates around the Washington Beltway. It imports America’s wealth as tax revenue. A lot of that wealth is consumed there by useless mouths. And then, it exports things that reinforce the Deep State, including wars, fiat currency, and destructive policies. This is unsustainable simply because nothing of value comes out of the city.

  • "It's Over For Me" Matt Drudge Warns Public "You're A Pawn In The 'Ghetto-isation'" Of The Web

    The very foundation of the free Internet is under severe threat from copyright laws that could ban independent media outlets, according to Matt Drudge. "I had a Supreme Court Justice tell me it’s over for me,” said Drudge, warning web users that they were being pushed "pawn-like" into the cyber "ghettos" of Twitter, Facebook and Instagram.

    "Reclusive" Drudge says he has not had a photo taken in 8 years

    As DCClothesline.com reports,

    During an appearance on the Alex Jones Show, Drudge asserted that copyright laws which prevent websites from even linking to news stories were being advanced.

     

    “I had a Supreme Court Justice tell me it’s over for me,” said Drudge. “They’ve got the votes now to enforce copyright law, you’re out of there. They’re going to make it so you can’t even use headlines.”

     

    “To have a Supreme Court Justice say to me it’s over, they’ve got the votes, which means time is limited,” he added, noting that a day was coming when simply operating an independent website could be outlawed.

     

    “That will end (it) for me – fine – I’ve had a hell of a run,” said Drudge, adding that web users were being pushed into the cyber “ghettos” of Twitter, Facebook and Instagram.

     

    “This is ghetto, this is corporate, they’re taking your energy and you’re getting nothing in return – nothing!”

    Watch the full interview below…

    Drudge warned that social media giants like Twitter and Facebook were swallowing up content and strangling the organic growth of independent Internet news platforms. Automated news aggregators like Google News also came under fire.

    “Google News – hello anybody? The idiots reading that crap think there is actually a human there – there is no human there – you are being programmed to being automated even up to your news….a same corporate glaze over everything,” said Drudge.

     

    “Stop operating in their playground, stop it,” said Drudge, asserting that people were being confined by what the likes of Facebook and Twitter defined as the Internet as a result of this “corporate makeover” of the web.

     

    “I’m just warning this country that yes, don’t get into this false sense that you are an individual when you’re on Facebook, no you’re not, you’re a pawn in their scheme,” concluded Drudge.

  • Gun Control: Fashionable Prohibition For Modern Lawmakers

    Submitted by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    With the latest school shooting, all humane people are expected to jump up and do something to stop the next shooting. The most popular response among media pundits and national policymakers right now is an expansion of the various prohibitions now in place against guns.

    For anyone familiar with the history of prohibitions on inanimate objects, however, these appeals to prohibition as a “common sense” solution are rather less convincing.

    Americans and others have tried a wide variety of similar prohibitions before, and with mixed results at best. Nowadays, prohibitions on drugs are in decline as states continue to unravel prohibitions of the past and make the nature of prohibition less drastic and less punitive. And, of course, the prohibition of alcohol has been dead for decades.

    The prohibitions of old have been deemed failures. But fortunately for prohibitionists, there’s a fashionable form of modern prohibition that won’t go away.

    Why Not Ban Alcohol?

    Now, I know what some of you are saying: “Hey, McMaken, you can’t compare alcohol prohibition to gun prohibition because alcohol mostly only hurts the drinker, while guns have many harmful side effects for the public at large.”

    But the fact that anyone could think this shows just how well the anti-alcohol-prohibition rhetoric has worked. Since the repeal of prohibition in the 1930s, alcohol has taken on an image of fun and relaxation. Sure, some people use it irresponsibly, we are told, but for the most part, people should be allowed the freedom to use it. For those high risk behaviors linked to alcohol, such as drunk driving, we’ll regulate that, but the ownership of alcohol itself, of course, should be open to all adults.

    And yet, in the face of this laissez-faire attitude toward drinking, we could offer a host of illustrations of how alcohol is in fact a public safety menace.

    Indeed, prior to the 1920s, during the heyday of the temperance movement, alcohol’s image was as anything but a mere benign luxury among a sizable portion of the population.

    While many people today assume that the prohibitionists argued along puritanical lines, and emphasized the dangers of moral ruin, the arguments against alcohol were really far more complex than that.

    The prohibitionists argued — quite plausibly, mind you — that any number of social ills could be addressed through alcohol prohibition. Chief among these was the fact that many families, including children, were often rendered destitute by the drinking of the male head of the household who was unable to hold down a job due to his addiction. Moreover, cases of child abuse and spousal abuse were clearly connected to alcohol consumption, as were household accidents and accidents on the job.

    When breadwinners were killed or injured on the job, or if a drunk spent half his income at a bar on payday, families often ended up on the local dole. Or worse.

    And there was a connection to non-domestic violence too. Public drunkenness, bar fights, and the deadly and irresponsible use of guns were connected to drinking as well.

    Ironically, back then though, it wasn’t the guns that were seen as the problem (although gun control advocates did exist). For many, the problem was that drunks were irresponsibly using guns and that the common-sense solution was to prevent them from getting drunk.

    Guns are Less Deadly than Alcohol

    Nowadays, 88,000 deaths per year are attributed to alcohol abuse, and thirty people per day in the United States die in alcohol-related auto accidents. Heavy drinkers are more prone to violence, suicide, and risky sexual behavior.

    In fact, if we compare these statistics, we find that alcohol abuse is significantly more deadly and problematic than misuse of guns. There were 36,000 gun-related deaths (including suicides and accidents) in the US in 2013, and as a percentage of all causes of death, alcohol-related deaths are more than twice as common as gun deaths.

    What’s more, one-third of gun deaths are alcohol related. Thus, according to prohibitionist logic, we could eliminate one-third of gun-related deaths overnight by prohibiting alcohol consumption. So why aren’t we doing it? If it could save one life, wouldn’t it be worth it?

    Most have concluded that saving one life is not, in fact, worth it. In practice, alcohol-related deaths (including those inflicted against third-party victims) are treated very differently than gun-related deaths.

    For example, it is clear that alcohol is a central component in the more than 10,000 drunk-driving deaths that occur each year. So, is the response to restrict certain types of alcohol or populations that can buy it? Are background checks instituted to prevent sales to incorrigible drunk drivers? No, the response is to ban how alcohol is used in certain cases.

    On the other hand, in response to the 11,000 gun-related murders per year, the prescribed response is to restrict the guns themselves. But, if we were to apply the same logic behind drunk driving bans to gun violence, the only legislation we would be considering would be something along the lines of special penalties for carrying firearms when mentally impaired, on psychotropic drugs, when sight impaired, or in crowded areas where accidents are more likely to affect bystanders. The mere purchase or ownership of guns would not be restricted, just as the purchase or ownership of alcohol is not restricted in response to drunk driving.

    Indeed, if we add to drunk driving all the cases of spousal abuse and child abuse and public cases of assault, bar fights, and more, it becomes clear that alcohol is in fact far more damaging to the social fabric than guns have ever been. Once we factor in the harm that alcohol does to the user himself, in terms of health problems, riskier sex, and suicides, the numbers look even worse for alcohol.

    Does Prohibition Work?

    Now, you might be thinking, “yes, but if gun prohibition works, shouldn’t we try it?” Unfortunately, there are few reasons to believe that it would work, or that the cure would not be worse than the disease.

    Mark Thornton illustrated years ago that alcohol prohibition led to more alcohol consumption, and more consumption of harder distilled drinks versus more mild beer and wine beverages. In addition to the complete failure to end the behavior it targeted, Americans also became acquainted with numerous unpleasant side effects of prohibition including more organized crime and more government harassment of peaceful citizens.

    Comparing the States

    As far as gun prohibition goes, thanks to a diversity of gun laws among the American states, we can compare between gun ownership levels in the states and homicide rates.

    And what we find is that there is no correlation between the level of restrictiveness in gun laws and the murder rate. Most recently, Eugene Volokh ran the numbers looking at homicide rates and the so-called Brady Score assigned to states by gun-control advocates. Volokh even provides the data so you can analyze it yourself. (Volokh explains why homicides and not “gun deaths” is the important metric here.)

    We can also see that this is quite plausible by simply eyeballing the data if we look at gun restrictions by state and homicide rates. Gun-control advocates like to point to southern states that have both permissive gun laws and high murder rates, such as Alabama and Mississippi. But, even a cursory analysis beyond this cherry-picking shows that there are numerous states with permissive gun laws (such as Utah, Wyoming, Kansas, and others) where the murder rate is very low. And states with more restrictive laws, such as Illinois, New York, and California have higher murder rates than numerous states where it is easy to buy a gun.

    So, while gun-control advocates press for “common-sense” restrictions, real common sense suggests that gun restrictions cannot explain the prevalence of murder in a state. This means that gun-control advocates are looking at the wrong social statistics to explain the violence.

    Reasons Why They Want to Ban Guns and Not Alcohol

    But none of this matters when gun violence is being exploited to drive for more state power and more regulation of private citizens. Many gun-control advocates really do believe that government regulation and management can solve every social ill. They ignore the realities behind failed experiments such as alcohol prohibition or the war on drugs, and instead move on to the latest sexy prohibitionist drive because they sense an opportunity to control one more aspect of daily life.

    Most everyone accepts that prohibition creates unintended consequences that can be negative, and with alcohol prohibition, these consequences included organized crime and the criminalization of peaceful citizens. Gun-control advocates assert, however, that whatever the downsides of gun control may be, they are minimal compared to the many advantages.

    As Murray Rothbard pointed out in For a New Liberty, whether or not you come face to face with those down sides ban depend a lot on your wealth and influence within society. For example, white, middle class people who live in safe suburbs, have influence over local police forces, and can even resort to private security (including alarm systems) see little down side to gun control. After all, they have little reason to fear police or common criminals when they can exercise their well-established political influence at the local level or purchase a home security system with the expectation that police will arrive quickly in case of emergency.

    Powerless minorities, on the other hand, face much larger downsides to gun control. For them, police are an unreliable deterrent to local crime, and are little use in cases of social unrest. Many may remember how police in Ferguson, Missouri protected government buildings, but left the rest of the town on its own during the riots there. Local citizens paid for police protection, but got none. And then, of course, there are countless cases of the “proper” authorities using their legal guns against powerless populations, with no resource left to them other than private firearms. Just one example would be the Texas Ranger rampages that followed the so-called Plan de San Diego when the Rangers swept through southern Texas lynching Mexican-Americans who were deemed traitors.

    Consequently, some principled leftists, most of whom are radicals, do not subscribe to the dominant gun-control position of the left. But certainly the mainline left, dominated by university intellectuals, government employees, and politicos with nice houses in safe neighborhoods, see few problems associated with centralizing coercive power in the hands of “official” law enforcement.

    The downsides of restricting alcohol, however, are plentiful for those who spend many hours at cocktail parties and send their children to booze-soaked elite universities to be paired up with the appropriate social class.

    So, until this changes, we ought not expect much of a change in the double standard applied to alcohol and guns in terms of violence, health, and safety. The people who make the laws are quite happy having plenty of booze around. But they can afford to pay someone else to handle the guns for them.

     

  • "We Should Have Known Something Was Wrong"

    Remember when stuff such as the following was written exclusively on “conspiracy” tin-foil blogs by deranged lunatics who could not appreciate the brilliance of the neo-Keynesian system and central-planning by academics, in all its glory? Good times.

    Here is Bank of America’s Athanasios Vamvakidis channeling Tyler Durden circa 2009

    The real cost of QE

    QE was not a free lunch after all

    If only it was that easy to print our way out of a global crisis. Eight years after the crisis, we are still debating about whether the recovery has gained enough of a momentum to allow exit from crisis-driven policies and start hiking rates from zero. The world economy has actually lost momentum this year (Chart 1), deflation risks have increased (Chart 2), and EM indicators and overall market volatility have reached crisis levels (see Chart 3). All this is despite unprecedented expansion of central bank balance sheets (Chart 4). Things may have been worse otherwise, but in hindsight we believe relying too much on unconventional monetary policies was not a free lunch after all.

    We should have known something was wrong

    The Fed “taper tantrum” could have been the first warning that QE had gone too far. The Fed’s announcement in June 2013 that they would consider tapering QE, contingent upon continued positive data, triggered a sharp market sell-off, particularly in EM. The aggressive search for yield, which intensified after the Fed announced QE3—or QE infinity as markets called it—came to a sudden stop. QE was not for infinity after all. The Fed tried to reassure markets that QE tapering was still policy easing and that its end would not imply rate hikes immediately, but the markets apparently thought otherwise. A key takeaway was not that QE had already gone too far, but that announcing its tapering may have been a mistake. The Fed waited until December to start tapering, although the market had already priced its beginning in September.

    The second warning sign may have been the across-the-board EM sell-off that started in mid-2014, as QE tapering was coming to an end and the market started pricing Fed tightening, a sell-off that intensified substantially this year. EM FX tends to underperform when the Fed tightens and the USD strengthens, but by early 2015 the EM FX index had reached a level below that during the global financial crisis (Chart 3). China’s devaluation made things worse in August, but the EM sell-off started much earlier. Risk assets more broadly have reached oversold levels. The market has been anxious about Fed hikes, despite pricing a very slow tightening and expecting interest rates to remain historically very low for years to come.

    The point when things started going wrong

    The Fed and other major central banks were the first to act when the global crisis started, and we believe their actions helped avoid another great depression. Political disagreement and brinkmanship led to a messy fiscal policy in the US and a neverending Eurozone crisis. The Fed and the ECB, successfully, came to the rescue a number of times in recent years. In Japan, the BoJ has delivered the strongest arrow from the three arrows in Abenomics, with mixed progress in the arrow on structural reforms and no progress in the arrow on fiscal sustainability. However, monetary easing is not the solution to every problem and risk in an economy – and we believe that using it when other polices may have been better used has its own costs.

    At some point during Fed QE, the markets started reacting positively to bad news. In our view, this is when things started going wrong. Bad news became good news for asset prices, as markets expected more QE by the Fed. Asset prices were increasingly deviating from fundamentals, as the markets were trading the Fed instead of the economic reality. This was clearly not sustainable.

    We believe QE1 by the Fed (Nov 2008) was a necessity. Without it, the world economy was heading to a new global depression. The Fed, led by the world’s expert on the great depression, did what needed to be done. The ECB took the opposite approach, avoiding QE and even hiking rates in the midst of the global crisis and again in the midst of the Eurozone crisis. The crisis got worse, the Eurozone economy still had the largest output gap in the Q10 group, and deflation forced the ECB to finally start QE this year. We are more skeptical about QE2 (mid 2011). The world had avoided a second great depression by that point. The justification was to address deflation risks and support the recovery during deleveraging. It was not clear cut—US inflation was above 2% and core inflation only slightly below—but one could see the Fed’s point taking into account the risks and empirical evidence that recoveries from balance sheet recessions are very slow. QE2 was not trying to address depression risks, but to avoid a Japan scenario. As such, we think QE2 was needed, albeit less so than QE1.

    However, we are less sure about QE3. We believe this round was intended to support asset prices, with the idea that high asset prices would lead to a stronger recovery. Instead, Wall Street was increasingly deviating from Main Street, inflating asset prices. Equity prices started pointing towards a strong recovery, while bond prices were flagging a Japan scenario for the next decade. Both could not be right, and both turned out to be wrong. The recent sell-off suggests to us that the Fed underestimated the risks from strong EM inflows because of QE.

    While we will of course never know what would have been had other policies been pursued, we believe that excessive reliance on unconventional monetary policies in recent years has had side effects. The recent market turmoil has shown that macroprudential measures have limited ability to deal with such side effects. Indeed, despite continued central bank balance sheet expansion (Chart 4) and further easing by most G10 central banks from already historically low policy rates (Chart 5), monetary conditions have tightened in most G10 economies (Chart 6) and global liquidity conditions have worsened this year (Chart 7). No macro-prudential measures could prevent this from happening, in our view.

    We wouldn’t necessarily look at QE as the root of these issues. Less QE might have been necessary if US fiscal policy wasn’t so fractious, Europe had been faster to respond to the crisis, global policy coordination was stronger, and governments worldwide had grasped the “opportunity” of the crisis to implement structural reforms and progress in trade agreements. As the IMF has warned, we believe the world put too much burden on monetary policy. We have started seeing the consequences this year.

    The above has lessons for both the Eurozone and Japan looking forward:

    • ECB QE has led to historically low periphery yields, which are not pricing sovereign risks—just think where Greek yields are going to be if the ECB starts buying GGBs. When at some point in the (likely distant) future the ECB stops QE, the adjustment in the periphery yields is unlikely to be smooth, particularly if the countries in the region have not taken advantage of the ECB easing to implement reforms. These concerns would not justify stopping ECB QE early, but we believe they do point to consequences when central bank policies force markets to ignore risks for too long and governments are not addressing these risks in the meantime—recent reform progress in Italy is encouraging from this point of view.
    • Japan could face challenges if delivery of the non-monetary “arrows” in Abenomics remains so weak. In our opinion, Japan needs structural reforms to grow and a credible long-term fiscal consolidation plan to ensure debt sustainability. We believe aggressive BoJ QE is currently kicking the can down the road, but these problems could eventually come back to haunt Japan.

    Now what?

    The story of the year so far may be that of a negative feedback loop leading to a bad equilibrium. First, risk assets sold-off expecting the Fed to tighten. Then, the sell-off went too far and started affecting the real economy, including in the US. Now, the Fed is not tightening as a result. However, postponing Fed tightening does not necessarily increase the demand for risk assets. We are oversimplifying, and there are certainly many other things going on, but it helps make the point.

    This appears to be a new regime, in which bad news is bad news, as we wrote a year ago and reiterated recently. Fed QE does not appear to be coming to the rescue anymore. The Fed staying on hold can support risk assets in the short term, but is not as strong as QE. This is an environment with high market volatility, as the so-called central bank put is less powerful without Fed QE. ECB and BOJ QE apparently cannot do the trick. Bad news is supposed to be bad news and this should be a healthier market than before, but the adjustment back to normal has not been, and in our view is not going to be, easy.

    Risk-on recommendations are only tactical. If the US data improves in the months ahead, the Fed will likely tighten and risk assets could sell-off again. If the US data remains weak, or weaken even further, we would expect risk aversion to increase, as the threshold for QE4 by the Fed appears high—and more QE may not be as effective anymore.

    * * *

    And that, dear Janet Yellen, is how you trapped yourself in reflexivity from which there is no way out. Now if only someone could have possibly foreseen all of this years ago…

  • The Real Reason Belgium Sold 1,098 Tonnes Of Gold

    Submitted by Koos Jansen via BullionStar.com,

    For our global investigation how much physical gold central banks have stored at what location and how much is leased out, I decided to submit the local equivalent of a Freedom Of Information Act (FOIA) request at the central bank of Belgium, de Nationale Bank van België (NBB), to obtain information about the amount of Belgian official gold reserves, the exact location of all gold bars, the type of gold accounts NBB holds at the Bank Of England (BOE) and how much is leased out and to whom. The outcome of this research was not what I had expected.

    History Of The Official Gold Reserves Of Belgium

    Some of the questions I directed at the NBB I used a stepping stone, as this information is publicly available in part. At the end of August 2015 NBB was holding 227.4 tonnes of gold, down 0.04 tonnes from 227.44 tonnes in July, according to data from the Bundesbank that publishes the gold holdings of 19 European central banks and the ECB in compliance with the IMF’s most recent version of the Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual (BPM6). The Bundesbank (BuBa) publishes the fine troy ounces of the official gold reserves in ‘Gold bullion’ and ‘Unallocated gold accounts’. If we add up both categories the outcome for all countries equals the reserves disclosed by the World Gold Council.

    From BuBa:

    The balance of payments statistics will … be consistent with the framework set out in the sixth edition of the Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual (BPM6). The application of the sixth edition of the Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual (BPM6) is binding for EU member states by virtue of a regulation adopted by the European Commission. 

    Back in 1965 NBB was holding over 1,300 tonnes of gold. Since 1978 it has sold a whopping 1,098 tonnes, or 83 %.

    Belgium official gold reserves

    Belgium was one of the eight participating countries in the London Gold Pool, together with the US, Germany, the UK, France, Italy, the Netherlands and Switzerland, that operated from 1961 until 1968 to stabilize the gold price at $35 an ounce by selling/buying gold in the London bullion market. Eventually the pool collapsed in 1968 because the US had printed too many dollars and France was not willing to sell any more gold to defend the gold price at $35.

    Remarkably, Belgian official gold reserves dropped significantly after the Pool collapsed, from 1978 until 1999. Likely, NBB was partially seeking to diversify its reserves into higher yielding assets or to lower the national debt, in addition it could have sold metal to lower the price or to “equalize its holdings relative to other gold holding nations”. Let me explain that last quote. Belgium was not the only European country that has sold vast amounts of gold in the nineties and before. When the Dutch Minister Of Finance in 2011, J.C. De Jager, was questioned about the gold sales of the central bank of the Netherlands in the nineties he answered:

    Question 6:  Can you confirm that since 1991 DNB [central bank of the Netherlands] has sold 1,100 tonnes of the 1,700 tonnes it owned…

     

    Answer 6: Since 1991 DNB sold 1,100 tonnes. At the time DNB determined that from an international perspective it owned a lot of gold proportionally. It decided to equalize its gold holdings relative to other important gold holding nations.

    So, the independent central bank of the Netherlands (DNB) had decided to sell gold because “from an international perspective it owned a lot of gold proportionally”. Clearly DNB was considering the amount of gold reserves of other central banks and weighed these against its own holdings before it decided to make a downward adjustment. Was this a unilateral decision for the sake of balanced gold reserves among central banks? I don’t think so.

    In 1999 the Central Bank Gold Agreement (CBGA, also called the Washington Agreement On Gold) was signed by 14 European central banks, inter alia NBB, to jointly manage gold sales. This demonstrates central banks are not unfamiliar with managing their gold reserves in concert. First there was the London Gold Pool, then the Dutch sold gold to equalize their holdings relative to other central banks and then CBGA was signed.

    Maybe NBB has sold part of its reserves prior to 1999 for the same reason De Jager mentioned; to equalize the chips. Allegedly this was the idea behind the euro. GoldCore wrote on 28 May 2013:

    Belgium announced another sale of 203 tons of gold on March 27, 1996, stating that the sale had reduced the share of gold in total reserves to a level which would facilitate the participation of the National Bank of Belgium [NBB] in the process of European unification and which, corresponded to the proportion of gold in the total reserves of the Member States of the European Union.

    More information about the Belgian gold reserves that was perviously known: most of it is stored at the BOE in London, the heart of the global gold lease market, hence my question at the NBB regarding the type of gold accounts it has with the BOE. From searching the internet and the website of NBB I could read Belgium had leased out 84 tonnes of its gold reserves in 2011, this decreased to 37 tonnes in 2012 (lent to 5 commercial banks) and 25 tonnes in 2013 (lent to 5 commercial banks).

    Data from the Bundesbank shows Belgium has a steady 17 tonnes of ‘unallocated gold’ since January 2013 and 210 tonnes of ‘gold bullion’. Apparently reserves qualified as ‘gold bullion’ (allocated gold) can be leased out, as in 2013 NBB had leased out more than was unallocated (25 tonnes versus 17 tonnes). This makes me wonder why Belgium still has any unallocated gold. (It also makes me wonder how much of the allocated gold held by other central banks is leased out.)

    Belgium official gold reserves unallocated

     

    The Verdict

    In response to my FOIA, the NBB notified me it is exempt from any such requests regarding its gold reserves – click here to read the reply from NBB in Dutch. This response was similar to that of a FOIA request I submitted to DNB in 2013 in order to obtain the list of bar numbers of the Dutch official gold reserves, which bounced as well.

    NBB wrote me that aside from the rules they aim to be as transparent as possible by disclosing all information to the public about their official gold reserves that is not sensitive. NBB wrote me (my translation):

    – Total NBB gold reserves amount to 227.4 tonnes (7,311,955.9 fine ounces).

    – The majority of this stock is stored at the Bank or England [BOE]. The remainder is at the Bank of Canada and the Bank for International Settlements. A very tiny amount is stored at the NBB.

    – The storage and safekeeping abroad happens according to standards and practices that are common among central banks.

    – Against a guarantee covering 101.5 % of the credit NBB had an average of 15.7 tons of gold leased out in 2014. The counterparties are commercial banks with high creditworthiness. The NBB will not enter into any new gold leases and leave the existing book until it’s fully unwound in February 2018.

    Because I sensed to be in touch with an employee from NBB that knew all about the Belgian gold, I asked why they had sold 1,098 tonnes of gold since 1978? Was it to diversify reserve assets, reduce the national debt or to be accepted to the Eurosystem. NBB replied (my translation):

    The sales in question took place in the context of a more balanced composition of the reserves of NBB with regard to its integration into the European System of Central Banks, although it was not the result of a legal obligation.

    Next I asked what the reason was to sell the gold if there was no legal obligation, was there a verbal agreement among central banks? NBB replied (my translation):

    The aspects of the management of the foreign reserves that have not been communicated by the NBB through its annual reports and press releases constitute confidential information that can not be disclosed on the grounds of professional secrecy laid down in Article 35 of the law of 22 February 1998 establishing the Statute of the NBB.

    So indeed there was a secret agreement among central banks to sell gold and balance reserves, but NBB is not required to disclose this information based on “Article 35 of the law of 22 February 1998 establishing the Statute of the NBB” – a law that was passed right before CBGA was signed and the euro was launched. Actually, the details of the agreement are secondary because NBB’s statement “the sales in question took place in the context of a more balanced composition of the reserves of NBB with regard to its integration into the European System of Central Banks”, is very clear to me. Especially when we add De Jager’s statement from 2011, “DNB determined that from an international perspective it owned a lot of gold proportionally. It decided to equalize its gold holdings relative to other important gold holding nations.”

    It can’t be a coincidence both central banks sold gold prior to 1999 for “more balanced reserves” while the sales would not have been executed in conjunction of each other. My conclusion is that the gold sales of European central banks prior to CBGA have been jointly managed in secret.

  • The Dumbest Thing You Will Read Today… Maybe Ever

    Dear Americans, meet your venerable central planners:

    • FED’S EVANS: DOT PLOT CHART CLEARLY SHOWS US ECON DOING BETTER

    So, according to the Fed’s academic experts, the US economy is not, well, the US economy, it’s not Y = C + I + G + NX, it’s not the product of all goods and services created in the United States…  it’s this:

    Which, for those confused, is precisely what it appears to be: a bunch of dots drawn on a piece of paper, not to be confused with this following random bunch of dots drawn on a piece of paper, which however is far more indicative of what the US economy is really like.

    So the actual – you know – economy may be on the verge of a recession, but the Fed’s model of an “economy” as represented by the dotted paint-by-numbers gibberish shown above, which only a cabal of arrogant academic hacks, who have never held an actual job in their lives and who can only do one thing: print money and make the rich richer while crushing the rest of the economy with trillions of debt, can deem is anything more than just that – utter gibberish – is recovering.

    (Please just ignore the negative “dot”, of course. That is what, in economic parlance, one calls a (non-GAAP) outlier to be ignored drawn by an angry, outgoing member of said cabal.)

    * * *

    And just in case anyone wants more, there was this:

    • EVANS: STRONGER GLOBAL ECONOMY WILL BENEFIT EVERYBODY

    Finally, this:

    • EVANS: MAINTAINING CREDIBILITY IS KEY TO EFFECTIVE MONETARY POLICY

    ???

  • Brazil Bank Interest Rates At 20-Year High

    Things in Brazil are getting worse by the day as the following brief summary of soaring interest rates courtesy of BNAmerics demonstrates.

    Brazil Bank Interest Rates At 20-Year High

    Brazil’s overdraft interest rates reached 12.28% in October, the highest since September 1995 when the rate was 12.58%, according to research conducted by consumer protection group Procon.

    Of the seven financial institutions included in the research, five increased their overdraft rates and one upped its rate for personal loans. The average overdraft rate of 12.28% per month was higher than that registered in September, 11.90%.

     

    The bank that increased its rate the most was Caixa Econômica Federal, which changed its rate to 11.38% from 10.35% per month, a variation of 9.95% when compared to the September rate, Procon said.

    Santander saw a positive variation of 4.21% from the previous month, Banco do Brasil had a variation of 3.69%, Itaú‘s variation was 2.58%, and Bradesco‘s was 2.41%. Other banks maintained their rates.

    For personal loans, the average rate of banks surveyed was 6.27% per month, higher than the previous month, which was 6.26%. Bradesco raised its rate to 6.61% per month, an increase of 0.61% over September’s rate. Other banks maintained their rates.

    * * *

    That said, she doesn’t appear too concerned.

  • The War On Islamic State: A New Cold War Fiction

    Submitted by Nafeez Ahmed via MiddleEastEye.net,

    Russia is bombing “terrorists” in Syria, and the US is understandably peeved.

    A day after the bombing began, Obama’s Defence Secretary Ashton Carter complained that most Russian strikes “were in areas where there were probably not ISIL (IS) forces”.

    Anonymously, US officials accused Russia of deliberately targeting CIA-sponsored “moderate” rebels to shore-up the regime of Bashir al-Assad.

    Only two of Russia’s 57 airstrikes have hit ISIS, opined Turkish Prime Minister Ahmet Davutoglu in similar fashion. The rest have hit “the moderate opposition, the only forces fighting ISIS in Syria,” he said.

    Such claims have been dutifully parroted across the Western press with little scrutiny, bar the odd US media watchdog.

    But who are these moderate rebels, really?

    Moderate al-Qaeda

    The first Russian airstrikes hit the rebel-held town of Talbisah north of Homs City, home to al-Qaeda’s official Syrian arm, Jabhat al-Nusra, and the pro-al-Qaeda Ahrar al-Sham, among other local rebel groups. Both al-Nusra and the Islamic State have claimed responsibility for vehicle-borne IEDs (VBIEDs) in Homs City, which is 12 kilometers south of Talbisah.

    The Institute for the Study of War (ISW) reports that as part of “US and Turkish efforts to establish an ISIS ‘free zone’ in the northern Aleppo countryside,” al-Nusra “withdrew from the border and reportedly reinforced positions in this rebel-held pocket north of Homs city”.

    In other words, the US and Turkey are actively sponsoring “moderate” Syrian rebels in the form of al-Qaeda, which Washington DC-based risk analysis firm Valen Globals forecasts will be “a bigger threat to global security” than IS in coming years.

    Last October, Vice President Joe Biden conceded that there is “no moderate middle” among the Syrian opposition. Turkey and the Gulf powers armed and funded “anyone who would fight against Assad,” including “al-Nusra,” “al-Qaeda in Iraq (AQI),” and the “extremist elements of jihadis who were coming from other parts of the world”.

    This external funding enabled Islamist factions to systematically displace secular Free Syria Army (FSA) leaders, culminating in the rise of IS.

    In other words, the CIA-backed rebels targeted by Russia are not moderates. They represent the same melting pot of al-Qaeda affiliated networks that spawned the Islamic State in the first place.

    Our Islamists

    And they rose to power in Syria not in spite, but because of the US rubber-stamping the jihadist funnel through the so-called “vetting” process. This summer, for instance, al-Qaeda led rebels received accelerated weapons shipments in a US-backed operation to retake Idlib province from Assad.

    Notice here that the US priority was to rollback Assad’s forces from Idlib – not fight IS. Yet the brave Western press, so outspoken on Russian duplicity, somehow overlooked how this anti-ISIS coalition operation failed to target a single IS fighter.

    Since Russia’s intervention, the press has been particularly coy about the fact that Washington’s “moderate” rebels include the likes of al-Nusra, Ahrar al-Sham and the Islamic Front.

    While al-Nusra, of course, is al-Qaeda’s Syrian branch, Ahrar al-Sham openly “cooperates with the Syrian affiliate of al-Qaeda and has welcomed former associates of Osama bin Laden” according to the New York Times. “While its leaders say they seek to create a representative government, they avoid the word ‘democracy’ and say Islam must guide any eventual state.”

    The Islamic Front, Syria’s largest opposition grouping consisting of tens of thousands of fighters, aims to establish an “Islamic state” in Syria, rejects democracy and secularism, and welcomes al-Qaeda foreign fighters as “brothers who came to help us”.

    Islamic Front leader Zahran Alloush is on record as having praised Osama bin Laden, endorsed cooperation with al-Nusra, and repeatedly called for the total extermination of Shia and Alawite communities in the Levant.

    These are the “moderates” the US has empowered in the name of fighting IS.

    How not to vet rebels and influence people

    The US has evaded formal responsibility for doing so using the best covert operation traditions: plausible deniability by passing the buck.

    Since 2012, the CIA-run clandestine rebel-vetting programme has been conducted outside Syria, in partner countries like Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Jordan and Turkey. Although CIA and US military personnel oversee the programme, they “vet” rebels largely through ‘intelligence’ provided by its own allies.

    The supposedly rigorous vetting process includes “psychological exams,” gathering of “biometric data,” and running the names of candidates “through US databases” and “with regional allies for checks”.

    Recruits already known to the US government are checked easily based on internal data. But for new recruits, the US depends on the “expertise” of its coalition partners like Saudi Arabia and Turkey.

    Still, CIA personnel were “helping allies decide which Syrian opposition fighters” would receive arms. But the relationship between the “moderate” FSA and the jihadist factions, including IS, had grown increasingly porous.

    German journalist Jurgen Todenhofer, who spent 10 days inside the Islamic State, reported last year that IS militants are being “indirectly” armed by the West: “They buy the weapons that we give to the Free Syrian Army, so they get Western weapons – they get French weapons… I saw German weapons, I saw American weapons.”

    The CIA knew what was happening: classified intelligence assessments year after year showed that most Saudi, Turkish and Qatari arms ended up with “hard-line Islamic jihadists, and not the more secular opposition groups”.

    The CIA programme has not been shut down, although it has predictably failed to arm moderates despite seeding nearly 10,000 rebel fighters – many of whom have joined the IS terrorists the West is supposed to be fighting.

    Instead, the Pentagon has been tasked to establish a “new,” separate, “moderate” rebel-training programme.

    Unsurprisingly, that programme has virtually collapsed, even as the CIA continues to arm the jihadists that pretend to hate IS while cooperating with IS to fight Assad.

    Just last month, in extraordinary testimony before the Senate Armed Services Committee, General Lloyd Austin who leads the anti-ISIS strategy at US Central Command admitted that there are only “four or five” US-trained “moderate” rebels in Syria currently fighting IS.

    Who is fighting IS, really?

    This doesn’t mean questions about Russia’s strategy are unjustified. Clearly, Vladimir Putin’s self-serving intervention in Syria is about keeping the brutal Assad in power, by crushing the rebel forces seeking his removal.

    But Western journalists obediently mimicking the State Department line have universally failed to ask the sort of questions they rightly ask of Russia: namely, why is the US-led coalition refusing to bomb Islamic State extraction wells and oil truck convoys?

    A sobering Greenwich University study published by Maritime Security Review in March on the Islamic State’s illicit oil trafficking networks comes to some surprising conclusions on this issue.

    Authored by George Kiourktsoglou, lecturer in maritime security and former Royal Dutch Shell strategist, and Dr Alec Coutroubis, acting head at the Faculty of Engineering and Science, the study finds that US, Turkish and Gulf air raids on ISIS “oil manufacturing facilities” have not gone far enough: “Extraction wells in the area of bombardments have yet to be targeted by the US or the air-assets of its allies, a fact that can be readily attributed to the at times ‘toxic’ politics in the Middle East.”

    The scholars, who have previously given evidence before the UK Parliamentary Foreign Affairs Select Committee, further report that despite large convoys transporting IS oil through Syria, Iraq and Turkey, “allied US air-raids do not target the truck lorries out of fear of provoking a backlash from locals” (although killing up to a thousand Syrian civilians is apparently fine). As a result, “the transport operations are being run efficiently, taking place most of times in broad daylight”.

    So the US is not targeting the Islamic State’s financial lifeline – its black market oil infrastructure – but instead is teaming up with the same al-Qaeda affiliated groups that spawned IS in the first place, to undermine Assad. And Russia, for all its muscle-flexing rhetoric, sees its main priority as countering US-led efforts to topple Assad, by targeting his most immediate opponents.

    This is, in other words, a New Cold War between competing empires, the unending victims of which are the Syrian people. As for the Islamic State, it is little more than the proxy bastard child of a conflict that looks set to escalate.

  • As World "Recovers", China's Economic Weakness Spreads Wider & Deeper In September

    While much of this latest round of exuberant short-squeezing stocks and hot money flows into EM FX is driven by a Fed that is scared of its own shadow, the underlying meme has been that China is “stabilizing”… that everything will land softly… that policymakers have got this…

    However, as Bloomberg’s Tom Orlik points out – it is not! China’s economic weakness widened and deepened in  September…

     

     

    Source: Bloomberg’s @TomOrlik

  • Another Petro-State Throws In The Towel: The Last Nail In The Petrodollar Coffin

    Submitted by  Eugen von Böhm-Bawerk  of Bawerk.net

    Another Petro-State Throws In The Towel – The Last Nail In The Petrodollar coffin

    Source: Norwegian Ministry of Finance, Bawerk.net

    According to the proposed budget submitted by the current ‘blue-blue’ government the Norwegian deficit will reach another record high in 2016. Mainland taxes are expected to bring in 1,008 billion NOKs, while expenditures are estimated at 1,215 billion NOKs. In other words, 2016 will be another year of record mainland deficit which need to be covered by the offshore sector and its 6,900 bn NOK sovereign wealth fund (SWF).

    While record mainland deficits covered by the petroleum sector is nothing new in Norwegian budget history, on the contrary it is closer to the norm, the 2016 budget did raise some eyebrows. The other side of the ledger, the net inflow to the SWF from activities in the North Sea will, again according to budget, be lower than the required amount to cover the deficit. This has never happened before and is testimony of the sea change occurring in the world of petrodollar recycling. Interestingly enough, the need to liquidate SWF holdings is helping to create further deflation in the Eurodollar system in a self-reinforcing loop.

    As Eurodollar liquidity dries up and consequently pushes up the price of actual dollar (note, Eurodollars are international claims to domestic US dollars but for which no such dollars actual exists) the problem for petro-states compounds. One way this manifest itself is through international purchasing power of prior savings. A SWF as the Norwegian was created through a surplus of exports over imports meaning it can only be utilized through future imports over exports. When the Norwegians look at their wealth expressed in Norwegian kroner it all looks fine, but expressed in dollars the SWF has shrunk considerably in size. Thus, the surfeit imports expected by the Norwegian populace cannot be met. Norway rode high on a wave of liquidity which pushed up commodity currencies, leading Norwegians to consume more imported goods today, without realizing they were tapping into the principal of their future. When the tide turns the gross misconception is revealed.

    Source: Norwegian Ministry of Finance, Central Bank of Norway, Bawerk.net

    The Government claims it is all fine though. The current down-cycle will, according to them, end early 2016 so despite a 2 percentage point reduction in corporate- and personal income tax, mainland tax revenues are expected to increase 1.9 per cent.  That is obviously a pipedream, just as the expected 17.9 per cent increase in interest and dividend income which will make sure the SWF continue to grow at a healthy pace despite the massive mainland deficit.

    Assuming oil prices remain low, mainland tax revenue will plummet as they are very much a function of what goes on offshore, while expenditure will rise as they do in all welfare states during a down cycle.

    If we are right, a global recession is imminent, meaning the expected increase in dividend income will never materialize.

    In other words, the drawdown of the SWF will exceed its inflow even after adding financial income flows. The last remnant of the petro-dollar will thus die in 2016.

    For a country 100 per cent dependent on continued leverage in the Eurodollar system the absolutely best case scenario is for the US economy to grow just slowly enough for international monetary policy to again realign; reducing the value of the USD through continued ZIRP in the US.

    Robust growth in the US will prompt Yellen to hike, spiking the dollar (as Eurodollar claims scramble for actual dollars) while paradoxically a recession in the US will lead to the exact same outcome. The goldilocks scenario of 1-2 per cent growth is the best that the Norwegian government can hope for. It will minimize the gap between the lies and propaganda spewed out by the Ministry of Finance and reality.

  • This "Unlivable $350,000 Shack" Is The Cheapest Home In San Francisco

    According to the broker, it's the cheapest home on the market in San Francisco, and it's an unlivable shack.

    As Fortune reports, it is a worn-down, decomposing wooden shack that was built in 1906, and the interior is unlivable in its current condition. The San Francisco house is also selling for $350,000.

    According to Zillow, $350,000 would comfortably fetch a 1,500-square-foot, three-bedroom home in many smaller cities in the U.S., including Cincinnati, Ohio.

     

    Realtor Alexander Han, would definitely advise against moving in too soon.

    "The house still needs a lot of work. I would not recommend anyone moving right in. The bathroom is not functioning. The kitchen needs a bit more work. The flooring has a couple of places that are little bit weaker, and needs to be reinforced."

    Located at 16 De Long Street in the (slightly) more affordable Outer Mission district, the house’s price is a reflection of the skyrocketing real estate market in San Francisco.

     

    Since 2012, the city has seen a 103% increase in median housing prices; this month, that figure stands at $1.35 million.

  • Summing Up Obama's Economy In 8 Words

    We’d say this just about sums up Barack Obama’s Presidency perfectly…

     

    Source: CNN Money

    h/t @LibertyBlitz

  • Weekend Reading: Is The Correction Over?

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    This past week saw the markets rebound off their lows which has brought the "bulls" rushing back claiming the correction is over. However, is that really the case? As I questioned earlier this week:

    "As you can see, the markets did retest the late August lows, and when combined with the very oversold conditions, led to a frantic "short covering" rally back to previous resistance. It is worth noting that the recent market action is very similar to that of the August decline and initial rebound as well.

     

    Of course, the question that must be answered is whether we have seen the end of the current correction or is this just another "reflexive rally" that will fail?"

    SP500-TechnicalUpdate-100715-2

    "While the 'seasonally strong' period of the year could foster a further rally in the market, it is highly likely that it will ultimately fail. As shown, since the turn of the century there have only been two previous times when the market traded in oversold territory combined with all three major 'sell' signals triggered. Both of these periods marked a much more severe bear market cycle."

    SP500-MarketUpdate-100615

    "Given the late stage of the current market cycle, the issue of rising global economic weakness and deflationary pressures and deteriorating earnings, many of the "bullish" arguments have been broken."

    However, as always, it is important to look at the current market environment for opposing points of view to reduce the potential of "confirmation bias." This weekend's reading list provides a broad look at the current market environment from both the "bullish" and "bearish" perspective. Unfortunately, we will only know "who's right" after the fact. 

    But here is the rub.  If you choose the "bearish" view and are wrong, you only miss out on some of the rather limited potential upside from current levels. If you choose the "bullish"view and are wrong, you suffer a real destruction of investment capital. 

    This is a point that is rarely discussed, but is a harsh reality. As I stated last week:

     "Hoping to get back to even" has never been a successful investment strategy. 


    THE LIST

    1) A Major Headwind For Stocks by Jesse Felder via The Felder Report

    “And if profit margins reverting to their long-term mean leads to falling earnings growth, is it any wonder that major peaks in profit margins don't just foreshadow major stock market peaks but economic peaks, as well? The chart below comes from Barclays. It demonstrates that only in 1985 did the economy avoid entering recession after a 60 basis point decline in profit margins, the degree of decline we have just witnessed.

     

    Clearly, record-high profit margins have been a significant driver of both the economy and the stock market over the past few years. But this, 'most mean-reverting series in finance,' looks to be rolling over and now this powerful tailwind could is shifting into a headwind."

    Profit-margin-barclays

    Read Also: Buffett And Grantham Warned Us About This by Sam Row via Business Insider

     

    2) A Bullish Pause Or A Bear Market by Tom Petruno via LA Times

    “The forces weighing on stocks, including global economic fears, weak corporate earnings and expectations of rising U.S. interest rates, haven't diminished. That makes it a good time for a financial reality check to better prepare yourself for whatever markets bring.”

    SP500-bull-bear

    Read Also: Don't Be Fooled By Retest Of Lows by Avi Gilburt via MarketWatch

    But Also Read: How Bad News Is Good News by Mark Hulbert via MarketWatch

     

    3) Disregard Dow Theory At Your Own Peril by Jack Schannep via MarketWatch

    “So where do we stand now? Thus far, the correction lows on Aug. 25 were some 12% to 13% below all-time highs, from which there was a three-week bounce into September. That being a qualifying secondary reaction, it set up the possibility of a reversal to a Dow Theory buy signal.

     

    Later in September was a setback, which successfully tested and held above the August lows, which is encouraging, and now what is needed is for the Transports to join the Industrials in surpassing their bounce high of 8,215.44. For the Original Dow Theory, the interpretation to get a buy signal is really just that simple. The odds of the sell signal being profitable are quite favorable. There have been only seven of 24 such signals since 1953 that did not go into a bear market that year, making it hard to ignore any Original Dow Theory signal.

    Dow-Theory

    Read Also: The Bull Market Lives On by Brian Wesbury via First Trust

     

    4) Bull or Bear? Market At A Crossroad by Michael Ashbaugh via MarketWatch

    "And the S&P 500 has staged the U.S. markets' headline technical move.

     

    To start, the index bottomed last week at 1,871, just above major support at the August low. It's subsequently knifed to major resistance, topping Monday just four points lower.

     

    Price action within the range is technically bearish, though the S&P's response to the range top is worth tracking. The S&P's 50-day moving average (1,998) is descending to match resistance."

    MW-DV840 201510 20151006092316 NS

    Read Also: Margin Pressures = Subdued L-T Returns by Cam Hui via Humble Student

     

    5) Despite The Rally, Charts Favor The Bears by Michael Kahn via Barrons

    "Technically, Friday's drop and recovery following the weak September jobs report was quite bullish. Unfortunately, there are still too many negatives out there to rely on this one indication, and that means it is far too early to change teams from bear to bull.

     

    To be sure, the big bearish signal of a drop below the August low has still not happened. That leaves the market in somewhat of a funk but with a downside bias.

     

    In previous columns I suggested that the Standard & Poor's 500 was in a giant head-and-shoulders topping pattern spanning back nearly two years. The neckline, or support line, slopes gently higher but for simplicity let's just say that it comes in now at 1870 – roughly the same level as the August low."

    Read Also: 10 Signs Stocks Are Overpriced by Doug Kass via TheStreet.com

    Read Also: More Commodity Price Weakness Ahead by A. Gary Shilling via BloombergView


    Other Reading


    “When the music stops, you better have a chair.” – Barry Sternlicht

    Have a great weekend.

  • Stocks Soar To Best Week In A Year On "Mother Of All Short Squeezes"

    The week summarised… as BofA put it –"It's Not A Risk-On Rally, This Is The Biggest Short Squeeze In Years"

     

    With China shut and The Fed going full dovish panic-mode over growth fears, world markets went crazy…

    • S&P up 7 of last 8 days +3.2% – best week since Oct 2014
    • Russell 2000 +4.5% – best week since Oct 2014
    • Nasdaq up 7 of last 8 (since Death Cross) closed above 50DMA
    • Trannies up 8 of last 9 closed above 100DMA +4.9% – best week since Oct 2014
    • Dow up 8 of last 9 +3.5% – best week since Feb 2015
    • "Most Shorted" +4.7% – biggest squeeze in 8 months
    • Biotechs -2.3%
    • Financials +2.2% – best week in 3 months
    • Asian Dollar Index +1.4% (worst week for USD vs Asian FX since Oct 2011)
    • Dollar Index -1.2% (worst week for USD vs Majors in 2 months)
    • AUD +4% – best week sicen Dec 2011
    • 2Y TSY Yields +6.5bps – biggest rise in 7 weeks
    • 5Y TSY Yields +11bps – biggest rise in 4 months
    • WTI Crude +8.9% – 2nd best week sicne Feb 2011
    • OJ +4.8% – best day since March
    • Silver +3.8% – best week since May

    LOLume!!

     

    The last 8 days have seen a massive short-squeeze… 2nd biggest in history

     

    The last 2 times stocks were short-squeezed this much, did not end well…

     

    And the following stunning chart shows the percent of S&P 500 names above their 50-day moving-average has soared from 4% to 60% in a few weeks…

    h/t @ReformedBroker

    *  *  *

    Off the Payrolls lows, it's been non-stop…

     

    Credit tracked stocks all week but decoupled this afternoon…

     

    VIX has fallen for 9 straight days… the longest streak since Oct 2011..

     

    Energy stocks outperformed and Healthcare (Biotechs) were the laggards…

     

    Treasury yields surged all week but Friday saw the push slow a little… (everything but 2Y is now higher than pre-payrolls)…

     

    The USDollar Index slipped notably after the FOMC Minutes but had been weaker all week… (AUD rose 3.8% on the week)

     

    Commodities all rose on the week

     

    Crude had its 2nd biggest week since Feb 2011…

     

    Gold broke notably above its 100-day moving-average and Silver had its best week since May (breaking but not holding its 200DMA)…

     

    But The Ags were the biggest movers today after USDA forecasts sent everything crazy… (and Orange Juice had its best day since March)

     

    Finally, it appears stocks have decided to re-de-couple from any fundamentals as Macro and Micro data has tumbled in recent weeks…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • Here's What Happened When Venezuela Imposed Gun Control Laws

    Submitted by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    I just got back from Caracas, Venezuela, a city so dangerous that every time I left my hotel, the staff would warn me against even going outside.

    It’s an incredibly difficult reality to reconcile. People hate the fact that they may get robbed or killed just steps from their front door when they leave the house every morning.

    And nobody wants that.

    After all, everyone wants to be safe. Even wild animals seek out safety in nature.

    A few years ago, in response to national outcry, the government of Venezuela took steps to fix this problem.

    There was too much death, too much crime. So they imposed strict gun control laws to stop the murderers and thieves.

    The end result? Violent crime actually increased. And Caracas is now one of the most dangerous cities in the world.

    But across the Andes is another city that used to be one of the most dangerous in the world – Bogota.

    Years ago, Bogota led the region in murder. And they imposed their own strict gun control laws trying to clean up the streets.

    It worked. Bogota became safer. There was less murder. Less crime. Less violence.

    But how could the same policy engineer completely different results in two cities?

    This disparity becomes even more vexing when we look at other countries.

    Honduras and Brazil both have very high homicide rates. Yet Brazil has highly restrictive gun laws, while Honduras has fairly lax gun laws.

    Pakistan has some of the loosest gun laws in the world. Chile’s are fairly restrictive. Yet both have low homicide rates.

    Bosnia has a very liberal gun laws. Belgium has very restrictive laws. Yet their homicide rates are similar.

    Luxembourg has few privately-owned guns per capita, yet its murder rate is much higher than Germany’s, which has over twice as many.

    Hawaii and Vermont have polar opposite gun laws yet nearly the same homicide rate.

    Maryland and Virginia have vastly different gun laws, yet almost identical rates of gun-related deaths.

    The numbers are all over the board.

    • Staunch advocates for gun control tend to think that more regulations and fewer guns make us safer.
    • Those who oppose gun control tend to think that more guns and fewer regulations make us safer.
    • But the data doesn’t support either assertion, meaning there must be other factors at work.

    (By the way, the National Academy of Science and the Center for Disease Control and Prevention came up with the exact same conclusion– the numbers don’t support either assertion.)

    But it’s impossible to even begin to analyze until we admit what the real concern is. After all, we’re not really talking about gun violence.

    Gun violence has been occurring for years, predominantly in poor neighborhoods across the country. 75% of gun-related violence takes place in just 5% of US zip codes.

    But no one really cares about that.

    As long as gun violence stays localized to black people, Mexicans, and other ethnic minorities in poor neighborhoods, it’s considered ‘crime’ and never makes the news.

    It’s not until some lunatic shoots up a predominantly white, middle class neighborhood that CNN covers it, and Hollywood celebrities air public service announcements telling us that ‘we’ have to do something.

    That response is an emotional one. Let’s get rational.

    These incidents are undoubtedly tragedies. But if the goal really is to save lives, and you start with a flawed premise that it is the government’s responsibility to protect people, consider that every piece of legislation incurs a rather significant cost.

    There’s the cost of lobbying… campaigning… plus the actual costs incurred in implementing and enforcing a gun control program.

    How much is that? Billions? Tens of billions? Hundreds of billions? I mean, we’re talking about politicians who spent $2 billion on the Obamacare website.

    Also consider that the United States government doesn’t exactly have limitless resources.

    Based on its own financial statements, the US government is in the hole by more than $60 TRILLION, and they run a half-trillion dollar budget deficit each year.

    These guys are broke, which means they have to choose wisely.

    So again, if the goal is to save lives (and if you really believe this is the government’s responsibility), the cold, hard truth is that you have to make rational decisions to get the highest return on investment, i.e. the most lives saved per dollar spent.

    The President of the United States proudly told the nation last week that his government had spent $1 trillion protecting Americans against terrorists.

    That’s a pretty amazing figure given how low the odds are of dying in a terror attack.

    Hell, it’s more likely that you’d be shot by a police officer, or get killed in a US drone strike while visiting a hospital in Pakistan.

    (By any independent count, Mr. Obama has killed more innocent civilians than all the crazed lunatics put together. Perhaps he needs to control some of his own guns.)

    The government’s own numbers tell us that 3.8 people per 100,000 in the US die each year from non-suicide gun violence. Terror-related deaths are effectively 0.0.

    Meanwhile, 11.6 per 100,000 die in traffic related deaths. A whopping 169.8 people per 100,000 die from heart disease.

    If you’re going to spend scarce resources (time, energy, and money that you don’t have) to save lives, doesn’t it make sense to tackle a bigger problem that’s easier to solve, and where the solution is actually supported by the data?

    Let’s talk about this more in today’s podcast. And it’s not what you think.

    I’m not going to make an argument that more guns make us safer, or that ‘guns don’t kill people, people kill people…’ or anything like that.

    Regardless of how you feel about the issue, I really encourage you to spend some time listening to this.

  • The "Secret" Of Successful Biotech Investing Revealed: All You Need To Know In One Chart

    Back in March, just before the last parabolic phase of the biotech bubble, we showed something which at the time we thought was quite amazing: of the 150 companies that made up the Nasdaq Biotech Index, only 41 had any earnings. Of these 41 companies, just five companies (Gilead, Amgen, Shire, Biogen and Celgene) had earnings of at least $1 billion each, and the five combined accounted for 83% of all earnings in the entire sector. The combined Net Income of the profitable companies was $21 billion; this compared to a market cap for the NBI of $1.1 trillion, a 50x P/E ratio.

    109 companies, or 73% of biotechs, had never made a dime in profit.

    We were content with our “amazing” findings… until we ran into a recent note by Convergex’ Nick Colas also looking at the biotech sector, which in addition to profitability looked at a very key second dimension, one which we had ignored: 2015 profits.

    His finding is nothing short of stunning, and “explains” the “secret” behind biotechs’ success.

    * * *

    While we present the full note in its entirety below, here is the TL/DR version:

    What Colas did was first to pull the entire list of companies in the index – currently 144 in total – and ranked them by weighting in the index. The 80/20 rule applies to this group of companies – roughly 20% of the names (18.8% to be exact) made up 80% of the index. 

    27 names made Colas’ list, 15 are profitable in 2015 (and analysts expect 18 to produce profits in 2016). The balance are in the red through the next year at least. 

    Looking at this universe of names, this is what he found:

    • On valuation: for the companies with profits in 2015 and 2016, earnings multiples are 22.3x this year and 19.0x next year. 
    • On growth expectations: analysts expect our sample to show an average of 21.4% revenue growth in 2016.  As with all the other data on this group, however, individual stock results vary a lot.  Wall Street expects as little as negative 1% sales growth for one large company, and as much as 170% for another name inside the top 10. 

    And the amazing punchline: equities of companies with actual profits are down 6.8% on the year, while the stocks of loss-making companies are up an average of 46.3%. 

    … or shown visually, the scatterplot of biotech earnings vs biotech YTD returns. This is also the chart exposing the “secret” behind biotech investing success: the more cash a biotech company burns, the higher the return it generates.

     

    Thank you Federal Reserve for giving us this schizophrenic new normal.

    * * *

    Here is the full Nick Colas note:

    Taking Biotechs to 11

    There’s an old joke among equity salespeople on Wall Street that goes something like this:

    Question: When do analysts put a “Strong Buy” recommendation on a stock? 

    Answer: When it is a “Buy” recommendation that’s dropped 30% or more. 

    Like most bittersweet humor, it is funny because it is all too often true. “Strong Buy” is what analysts say when their idea isn’t working but they still like the company management and/or strategy and/or valuation. Now, money managers know that buying a stock as it declines is only for the knowledgeably brave or carelessly foolhardy.  Sell side analysts don’t really see a problem with it…  If I liked it at $50 I better LOVE it at $35, right?

    I got to wondering about the Biotech group – specifically the NASDAQ Biotechnology Index – and how analysts were responding to the price volatility in the sector.  To analyze that, we pulled the entire list of companies in the index – 144 in total – and ranked them by weighting in the index. The 80/20 rule applies to this group of companies – roughly 20% of the names (18.8% to be exact) make up 80% of the index.  Attached to this note you will find those name in list form, broken down by analyst recommendation (Strong Buy through Strong Sell) as well as revenue and earnings expectations and related valuation ratios. 

    To start with the question at hand – have analysts stepped into the recent drop of 30% since mid-July?  The answer is “No”.  Two months ago, “Buys” and “Strong Buys” were 70% of all Wall Street recommendations on our sample companies.  Now, that number is 69%. Not much difference. The average name has 4.6 “Strong Buys”, up from 4.2 such recommendations 60 days ago, but the number of “Buys” has dropped from 6.2/company to 5.4/company.  

    At some level, it is easy to understand the Street’s reluctance to amp up their profile on this group.  The overarching negative is clearly visible and seemingly growing by the day: political focus on drug pricing.  We are, after all, meandering our way into a presidential election year.  Consumers may appreciate the health benefits of new pharmaceuticals, but a few ill-timed and well publicized price increases are apparently too good a crisis to let go to waste.

    The deeper issue in analyzing this group, and the one we’ll spend the rest of this note covering, is that it isn’t really a “Group” at all.  Yes, macro issues like drug pricing create the appearance of common fundamental drivers. But the reality is that this “group” trades on individual company fundamentals more than most industries. Consider the following points, with supporting data in the tables attached:

    • On equity price performance: The NASDAQ Biotechnology Index is up 1.5% year to date. Good news: that’s better than the S&P 500, which is still down on the year to the tune of 3.1%.  Bad news: in mid-July it was up just over 30%.
      The price performance for our 80/20 list of 27 names shows a lot of single-stock volatility.  On the plus side, two equities (Anacor and Ultragenyx) are +261% and +117% higher in 2015.  Conversely, three of the 27 are lower by 20% or greater: Mylan (25.1% lower), Jazz (20.0% lower) and Isis Pharma (31.2% lower).  All told, our 27 name sample has a standard deviation of year to date returns of 59%, quite broad for a collection of stocks in one “Sector”. 
    • On profitability: of the 27 names on our list, 15 are profitable in 2015 and analysts expect 18 to produce profits in 2016.  The balance – a third of the list – are in the red through the next year at least. 
    • On valuation: for the companies with profits in 2015 and 2016, earnings multiples are 22.3x this year and 19.0x next year. 
    • On growth expectations: analysts expect our sample to show an average of 21.4% revenue growth in 2016.  As with all the other data on this group, however, individual stock results vary a lot.  Wall Street expects as little as negative 1% sales growth for one large company, and as much as 170% for another name inside the top 10. 

    The real kicker: equities of companies with actual profits are down 6.8% on the year, while the stocks of loss-making companies are up an average of 46.3%. 
     
    In that last comment is the kernel of a problem that every investor faces when they look at this group.  The biotech sector produces a lot of winning stocks, and the group as a whole has performed extremely well for years. For active investors who may be down more than the 3.1% decline for the market in 2015, the group presents an important opportunity just now. If it can recover from the recent chatter on drug pricing, it could well dramatically outperform into December. And if either the group or the market as a whole continues to swoon, then biotechs will likely have another very noticeable leg down. 

    The only other industry group with this “Make the call, right now!’ dynamic is Energy.  It, however, has been pummeled far longer than biotechs and value investors have an easier call there.  But the biotechs have a lot more beta on their side, for good or for bad.  Either way, this is one group every investor will need to consider regardless of their market call. 

    To return to that old saw from the top of this note, the group isn’t a “Buy” or “Sell” here – it is either “Strong Buy” or “Strong Sell”.

  • It A "Liquidity Mirage": New York Fed Finally Grasps How Broken The Market Is Due To HFTs

    In the aftermath of the October 15th, 2014 Treasury flash crash that was much fake “confusion” among the punditry about what caused the dramatic 20-sigma move in the 10 Year treasury. For us, however, there was no confusion, it was all due to a vicious case of HFT algo quote stuffing – a key component of algos trying to establish whether there are credible size orders to be frontrun – gone horribly wrong.

    Several months later, in July, the Joint-Staff Report released by the Treasury, Fed, SEC and CFTC confirmed as much, and even if they didn’t explicitly single out HFTs as the culprit for the flash crash (that would mean having to redo the topography of the market, in the process gutting and redoing the entire market structure after tacitly admitting the market is broken), they did very clearly note that it was “self-trading”, or quote stuffing, that was responsible for the unprecedented move.

    Here are the only two charts that mattered from that report:

    As we thoroughly documented back in July, this is what the staff report said: “Given the finite capacity of any matching engine to simultaneously process messages and execute matches between buyers and sellers, extremely high message rates appeared to cause trading platform latency to temporarily jump higher”, or as we explained it ” a massive burst of quote stuffing (seen with absolute clarity on Figure 3.29 above) in the form of a surge in messages, resulted in a burst of accumulated order latency, which in turn was the catalyst to send the price soaring from 129 to over 130 in the span of 5 minutes, and then sliding back down again once the quote stuffing effect was eliminated.”

    Which brings us to our conclusion then:

    … what is surprising is that unlike the SEC’s Flash Crash report which was a travesty and blamed the crash on Waddell and Reed, to be followed by another travesty of a report, one which has sent an innocent trader behind bars, this time HFT is explicitly, if not deliberately, singled out.

     

    Which in our opinion sets the stage. The stage for what? Why blaming the upcoming market crash on HFTs, of course.  As Bloomberg commented, these findings “will probably add to regulatory scrutiny of the industry.”

     

    The reality is that regulators know very well what is really going on in the markets, and now that HFTs have been exposed as the catalyst for the bond market crash, when the inevitable stock market crash – a crash that will be the result far more of the ruinous decisions of central planners around the globe – it will be the HFTs, pardon, PTFs that will be the first to blame, while the central bankers do their best to quietly slip out to a non-extradition country.

     

    Just look at China: the government is so terrified of losing control over its own stock market bubble and the potential for violent, social conflict that would result, that it will throw everything at the market to support it. In the US, the regulators are already one step ahead: they know a crash is inevitable, and the only thing they need is the scapegoat to blame it on when it all comes crashing down.

     

    Nameless, faceless algos would be just the perfect scapegoat.

    Today we are one stop closer to that inevitable moment when the enabled systemic parasite, high frequency trading, which exists solely as a result of the market overhaul allowed in the aftermath of Reg NMS, is rooted out.

    In a report authored by NY Fed economists Dobrislav Dobrev and Ernst Schaumburg, we get one step closer to the regulators admitting what we have said since day one: HFT does not provide liquidity (although it does provide a whole lot of liquidity-rebate generating volume), it provides a “liquidity mirage.

    In the note the authors roundly crush the biggest, and frequently only, benefit of HFTs as stipulated ad nauseam by its advocates, namely an increase in “market efficiency and pricing developments.” The authors note:

    “that the (price) efficiency gain comes at the cost of making the real-time assessment of market liquidity across multiple venues more difficult.

     

    * * *

     

    it has arguably become more challenging for large investors to accurately assess available liquidity based on displayed market depth across venues.

     

    * * *

     

    This situation, which we term the liquidity mirage, arises because market participants respond not only to news about fundamentals but also market activity itself. This can lead to order placement and execution in one market affecting liquidity provision across related markets almost instantly. The modern market structure therefore implicitly involves a trade-off between increased price efficiency and heightened uncertainty about the overall available liquidity in the market.”

     

    * * *

     

    The striking cross-market patterns in trading and order book changes
    suggest that quote modifications/cancellations by high-frequency market
    makers rather than preemptive aggressive trading
    are an important
    contributing factor to the liquidity mirage phenomenon.

    Goodbye to “fat fingers” being blamed for flash crashes, and welcome to the Heisenberg uncertainty market: you can have your 1 cent bid/ask spreads… but you can’t have any real market depth at the same time.

    And the moment you try to buy or sell a big chunk in Treasurys (or any other asset class), that tight bid/ask spread explodes as HFTs yanks opposing offers (or bids), and all the telegraphed market depth evaporates in an instant, leading to events like October 15, 2014.

    As Bloomberg summarizes the note, which adds nothing new to what we have said over the past 6 years, “after examining trading across the most active platforms, including futures through CME Group Inc. and cash Treasuries on ICAP Plc’s BrokerTec and Nasdaq OMX Group Inc.’s eSpeed, the researchers found evidence that high-frequency traders create an illusion of liquidity in the Treasuries market.

    With their stealth technology, high-frequency traders are able to detect competing investor orders on one of the trading venues, and with a five millisecond delay — the shortest possible transmission time between the CME and BrokerTec — they’re able to pre-empt the order that’s likely to appear on the other venue.

    Once again: what HFTs do in a normal state is not trading; it’s frontrunning and trying to evaluate just how many of the other concurrent “orders” in the market are just as fake; needless to say, the one with the fastest server and most expensive colo box wins, even if they never actually provide liquidity.

    Investors often submit orders to buy or sell to all three venues in an effort to get the most competitive prices. The order is likely to reach one of the trading venues first, which gives the high-frequency traders the opportunity to profit from the time lapse.

    The moment a real order does enter the marketplace, the quasi equilibrium represented by the order book disappears in an insant leading to the liquidity mirage the NY Fed has exposed.

    How did the two authors reach their conclusion, one which has been known to our readers for years?

    The researchers pointed out a trade that may be completed by an investor on BrokerTec.

     

    “As soon as the BrokerTec transaction is observed in the market data feed, co-located low-latency market participants may immediately seek to cancel top-of-book offers on eSpeed and CME or submit competing buy orders to eSpeed and CME,” researchers Dobrislav Dobrev and Ernst Schaumburg wrote on the N.Y. Fed’s blog. Top-of-book orders reflect the highest buy and the lowest sell prices. Low-latency is another term for the high-speed trading technology.

     

    “The striking cross-market patterns in trading and order-book changes suggest that quote modifications/cancellations by high-frequency market makers, rather than preemptive aggressive trading, are an important contributing factor to the liquidity mirage phenomenon,” the researchers wrote.

    Worse, the researchers “did not find any evidence that the liquidity mirage was more pronounced on Oct. 15 compared with our control days.” In other words, courtesy of HFTs, multiple-sigma events like October 15 are always just around the corner, and always threaten to unleash market chaos the moment some unexpected “shock variable” disturbs the artificial equilibrium created by countless HFT algos to give the impression of an deep, orderly market.

    In the aftermath of this report, one can be sure that the days of current market structure are numbered, and that the scene is now set to throw the book at the HFTs. The only thing that is missing is the appropriate catalyst. And what is better than an orchestrated, or ad hoc, market crash, one which exonerates the real culprit for the stock market bubble – the Federal Reserve – and unleashes populist anger by millions of investors who lose their net worth in an HFT instant, aimed squarely at the HFTs, and the 20-year-old math PhDs behind them?

  • Ranking The Peasants: China Introduces Orwellian "Citizen Scores"

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    The following is extraordinarily creepy and disturbing. It’s also extremely clever, from a jackbooted, fascist thug perspective. When massive censorship itself isn’t enough…

    TechDirt reports:

    China’s plan to control the hearts, minds and internet connections of its citizens continues unimpeded. That’s the great thing about authoritarian regimes: rollout of mandatory programs is usually only a problem of logistics, not opposition.

     

    The Chinese government has mandated a rating system for all of its connected citizens. It looks like a credit rating but goes much deeper than just tying a measurement of financial risk to a number. It’s a way of defining who someone in terms of the government’s desires and aims. And its desires aren’t all that honorable.

     

    Everybody is measured by a score between 350 and 950, which is linked to their national identity card. While currently supposedly voluntary, the government has announced that it will be mandatory by 2020…

     

    In addition to measuring your ability to pay, as in the United States, the scores serve as a measure of political compliance. Among the things that will hurt a citizen’s score are posting political opinions without prior permission, or posting information that the regime does not like, such as about the Tiananmen Square massacre that the government carried out to hold on to power, or the Shanghai stock market collapse.

     

    This is where all the government’s moves towards greater control of the internet comes to fruition. To keep “score,” the government needs to tie IDs to online activity. Keeping the internet within the government’s walls makes it that much easier. But it’s not just online activity that will affect “citizen scores.” It’s almost every aspect of their lives.

     

    Most disheartening is the fact that many citizens seem to view higher scores as status symbols.

     

    Sadly, many Chinese appear to be embracing the score as a measure of social worth, with almost 100,000 people bragging about their scores on the Chinese equivalent of Twitter.

    How do you say “fucking morons” in Mandarin?

    The government’s program feeds on the natural competitive desires of human beings. There may be no official leaderboard (YET!) but with millions of easily-accessed “citizen scores,” anyone can enter this unofficial score-measuring contest. The government obviously realizes this, as it has tied perks to certain score tiers.

     

    Those with higher scores are rewarded with concrete benefits. Those who reach 700, for example, get easy access to a Singapore travel permit, while those who hit 750 get an even more valued visa.

     

    Klout, but for controlling the hearts and minds of a large populace.

    So who will run this sick, perverted system? Let’s turn to Cory Doctorow at BoingBoing for the answer:

    It’s a perfect storm of terrible: the program will be administered by Alibaba (China’s answer to Amazon) and Tencent (the country’s huge, government-compliant social network). Your score will be generated not only by your activities, but by the activities of the friends in your social graph — the people you identify as friends on social media. Your score will be decremented for doing things like mentioning Tienanmen Square or speculating on official corruption, or for participating in activities that the state wishes to “nudge” you away from, like playing video-games.

     

    Paternalism, surveillance, social control, guilt by association, paternalistic application of behavioral economics and ideology-driven shunning and isolation — it’s like someone took all my novels and blended them together, and turned them into policy (with Chinese characteristics).

    Screen Shot 2015-06-10 at 12.00.19 PM

    (Unless you have a serf score of 700 or higher)

    *  *  *

    For related articles, see:

    Australian Senate Kills Civil Liberties with Draconian New Anti-Terror Law in Orwellian Orgy of Baseless Fear-Mongering

    Video of the Day – Godfrey Reggio’s Haunting and Incredibly Accurate Prediction of Our Orwellian Future…from the 1970s

    The New Orwellian Term for Americans that Disagree with Government: “Paper Terrorists”

    Introducing the Latest Orwellian Definition of Terrorists: “Associates of Associates”

  • Obama Weighs "Syria Retreat" As White House Ends Training Of Moderate Rebels

    This past weekend we called Obama’s latest failed attempt to replace Syria’s president (after a comparable attempt in 2013 also ended in failure) for what it is: “Make no mistake, this is shaping up to be the most spectacular US foreign policy debacle since Vietnam – and we don’t think that’s an exaggeration.

    Some of our high level observations:

    The US, in conjunction with Saudi Arabia and Qatar, attempted to train and support Sunni extremists to overthrow the Assad regime. Some of those Sunni extremists ended up going crazy and declaring a Medeival caliphate putting the Pentagon and Langley in the hilarious position of being forced to classify al-Qaeda as “moderate.” The situation spun out of control leading to hundreds of thousands of civilian deaths and when Washington finally decided to try and find real “moderates” to help contain the Frankenstein monster the CIA had created in ISIS (there were of course numerous other CIA efforts to arm and train anti-Assad fighters, see below for the fate of the most “successful” of those groups), the effort ended up being a complete embarrassment that culminated with the admission that only “four or five” remained and just days after that admission, those “four or five” were car jacked by al-Qaeda in what was perhaps the most under-reported piece of foreign policy comedy in history.

     

    Meanwhile, Iran sensed an epic opportunity to capitalize on Washington’s incompetence. Tehran then sent its most powerful general to Russia where a pitch was made to upend the Mid-East balance of power. The Kremlin loved the idea because after all, Moscow is stinging from Western economic sanctions and Vladimir Putin is keen on showing the West that, in the wake of the controversy surrounding the annexation of Crimea and the conflict in eastern Ukraine, Russia isn’t set to back down. Thanks to the fact that the US chose extremists as its weapon of choice in Syria, Russia gets to frame its involvement as a “war on terror” and thanks to Russia’s involvement, Iran gets to safely broadcast its military support for Assad just weeks after the nuclear deal was struck. Now, Russian airstrikes have debilitated the only group of CIA-backed fighters that had actually proven to be somewhat effective and Iran and Hezbollah are preparing a massive ground invasion under cover of Russian air support. Worse still, the entire on-the-ground effort is being coordinated by the Iranian general who is public enemy number one in Western intelligence circles and he’s effectively operating at the behest of Putin, the man that Western media paints as the most dangerous person on the planet.

    Today, less than a week later, we have confirmation that this assessment was accurate, following two major developments in the Syria global proxy war.

    First, Bloomberg reports that a week into Russia’s military intervention in Syria, some top White House advisers and National Security Council staffers are trying to persuade President Barack Obama to scale back U.S. engagement there, to focus on lessening the violence and, for now, to give up on toppling the Syrian regime.

    It adds that “the administration came to this conclusion late. Despite warnings from U.S. intelligence agencies that Putin’s military buildup was intended to keep Assad in power, the White House nonetheless decided to explore cooperating with Russia on the ground. Throughout the summer and into the fall, top Russian officials — including Putin himself in a meeting last month with Obama at the U.N. — said they were not committed to keeping Assad in power for the long term, and would only target Islamic State fighters in their military offensive, according to U.S. officials.”

    So U.S. intelligence is shocked that following a multi-year campaign which was launched in 2011, which escalated in 2013 to a near-naval war, and which culminated in 2014 with the “mysterious” emergence of ISIS whose stated purpose according to leaked CIA documents was a simple one: to depose Assad, that Obama’s biggest antagonist on the global superpower stage, Russian president Putin would do everything in his power to prop up his own key pawn in the middle east.

    Putin’s intervention has had the U.S. flummoxed from day one. As the Russian military moved into Syria, U.S. intelligence officials tell us, the intelligence community was skeptical that it intended to focus its military campaign on the Islamic State. Even so, as the New York Times reported, the U.S. was surprised by the speed with which Russia built and then announced its new coalition with the governments of Syria, Iran and Iraq to support its military campaign.

    Did we say “U.S. intelligence”? Scratch that.

    In any event, after confirming virtually every word of our conclusion from past weekend, now that the administration realizes it is trapped without a credible way out absent de-escalation, it has no choice but to do just that:

    Obama has ruled out engaging in a proxy war with Putin’s military, leaving few good options. One path, however, would mean finding ways to tamp down the fighting by negotiating small, local ceasefires with the Assad regime. “The White House somehow thinks we can de-escalate the conflict while keeping Assad in power,” one senior administration official told us.

     

    “The current policy of the United States and its partners, to increase pressure on Assad so that he ‘comes to the table’ and negotiates his own departure, must be rethought,” Malley’s predecessor at the National Security Council, Philip Gordon, wrote at Politico as Russia was amassing its forces in Syria.

    The planted Bloomberg story, meant solely to lessen the blow from the latest foreign policy humiliation adds that “that view, being pushed by top White House National Security staffers, including senior coordinator for the Middle East Rob Malley, is not new. But it has received fresh emphasis given Russian intervention.”

    To be sure, there are neo-con war hawks, led by John Kerry and Samantha Power, who as a reminder was the puppet-masted behind the Ukraine coup, who want to escalate to the bitter end, even if it literally ends in a mushroom cloud: “The NSC view is opposed by top officials in other parts of the government, especially Secretary of State John Kerry and U.S. Ambassador to the UN Samantha Power. They are trying to persuade Obama that the only way to solve Syria is to increase the pressure on Assad in the hopes he will enter negotiations.”

    However, just like in the 2013 Syria campaign, when Kerry huffed and puffed and ultimately folded, so two years later the man who married into the Heinz family fortune will have no choice but to fold again:

    Yet Kerry and Power now find themselves without any hope that Putin might bring the Syrian regime to the table. Kerry, though always skeptical of Russia, has been the point man on engaging the Russian government through several conversations with Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov. But it’s now clear the Russians were leading the Obama administration down the primrose path.

    Others in Congress have already understood the endgame: Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Bob Corker said that by not doing more to confront Putin’s escalation, “the administration is tacitly admitting it will no longer be able to secure Assad’s ouster.”

    The implications are profound:

    “If Assad is staying and there’s no political process in sight, this argument goes, the U.S. might as well focus on alleviating the suffering of the Syrian people and mitigate the growing refugee crisis.

     

    Local ceasefires have been struck sporadically throughout the war, mostly in areas under siege by the Assad regime. The United Nations special envoy for Syria, Staffan de Mistura, has been pushing this idea for over a year.

    This means that the dramatic migrant exodus heading into Europe, which is now spun as positive for the economy, and would have been the catalyst form more deficit-funding QE as a result of debt-funded spending spree required by Germany to pay for the millions in refugees, may be coming to an end, with substantial implications for monetary policy.

    Bloomberg’s own conclusion shows a glimmer of hope that the end is not in sight just yet:

    Caught between two camps in his administration, Obama may not end up shifting the U.S. approach to Syria at all, although the de-escalation side has the momentum. Either way, as Russia, Iran and the Syrian regime change facts on the ground, the relative position of America and the Syrians it has supported becomes graver by the day.

    And then moments ago, the NYT confirmed that the de-escalation process has begun, when it reported that “the Obama administration has ended the Pentagon’s $500 million program to train and equip Syrian rebels, administration officials said on Friday, in an acknowledgment that the beleaguered program had failed to produce any kind of ground combat forces capable of taking on the Islamic State in Syria.”

    Pentagon officials were expected to officially announce the end of the program on Friday, as Defense Secretary Ashton B. Carter leaves London after meetings with his British counterpart, Michael Fallon, about the continuing wars in Syria and Iraq.

     

    A senior Defense Department official, who was not authorized to speak publicly and who spoke on the condition of anonymity, said that there would no longer be any more recruiting of so-called moderate Syrian rebels to go through training programs in Jordan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia or the United Arab Emirates. Instead, a much smaller training center would be set up in Turkey, where a small group of “enablers” — mostly leaders of opposition groups — would be taught operational maneuvers like how to call in airstrikes.

    To be sure, the admin tried to soften the blow: moments ago Reuters added that “The U.S. military program to train and equip Syrian rebels is not “ending” but is instead being refocused, a senior U.S. defense official said on Friday, ahead of an announcement on overhauling the troubled U.S. effort.” No matter how one diplomatically phrases it though, at this point the wheels are in motion.

    Which brings us to our own conclusion from last week:

    If Russia ends up bolstering Iran’s position in Syria (by expanding Hezbollah’s influence and capabilities) and if the Russian air force effectively takes control of Iraq thus allowing Iran to exert a greater influence over the government in Baghdad, the fragile balance of power that has existed in the region will be turned on its head and in the event this plays out, one should not expect Washington, Riyadh, Jerusalem, and London to simply go gentle into that good night.

    It is precisely this scenario that U.S. “intelligence” just realized, and why Obama is now sounding the retreat. The only question is whether Putin, who is now on the offensive across the mid-east region, agrees to take Obama’s olive branch, or whether he continues the “campaign to end ISIS“, in the process creating the biggest shift in the mid-east balance of power with a Russia-Syria-Iran-Iraq axis, and with China waiting patiently in the wings.

    Finally, this may be just the catalyst that ends the torrid surge in oil higher over the past week now that the biggest geopolitical factor pushing black gold above $50 is in the rear view mirror.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 9, 2015

  • Dollar Demolition Extends To 6th Day As EM/Asian FX Soars Most In Over 6 Years

    As the odds of a Fed rate-hike this century drift asymptotically back towards zero, the stability-desirous central bankers of the emerging world are suddenly facing soaring currencies as hot money floods back into Emerging Asian markets. The Rupiah and Ringgit are up almost 3% overnight as everything from the Baht to the Won are surging against the USD. Asian FX is up 6 straight days against the USD (and 8 of the last 9) for the biggest 9-day gain since May 2009.

     

    The China devaluation spike in The USD against Asian FX is rapidly being unwound…

     

    The Dollar Demolition of the last 9 days is the biggest since May 2009.

     

    As all EM FX is soaring…

     

    Led by a massive spike in Indonesia's Rupiah…

     

    So now what will the talking-heads say about a weaker USD? Especially in light of the fact that they crowed about a strong USD being indicative of a strong US economy… is The US now the dirtiest dirty shirt?

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • "Neutralizing" John Lennon: One Man Against The "Monster"

    Submitted by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “You gotta remember, establishment, it’s just a name for evil. The monster doesn’t care whether it kills all the students or whether there’s a revolution. It’s not thinking logically, it’s out of control.”—John Lennon (1969)

    John Lennon, born 75 years ago on October 9, 1940, was a musical genius and pop cultural icon.

    He was also a vocal peace protester and anti-war activist and a high-profile example of the lengths to which the U.S. government will go to persecute those who dare to challenge its authority.

    Long before Chelsea Manning and Edward Snowden were being castigated for blowing the whistle on the government’s war crimes and the National Security Agency’s abuse of its surveillance powers, it was Lennon who was being singled out for daring to speak truth to power about the government’s warmongering, his phone calls monitored and data files collected on his activities and associations.

    For a little while, at least, Lennon became enemy number one in the eyes of the U.S. government.

    Years after Lennon’s assassination it would be revealed that the FBI had collected 281 pages of files on him, including song lyrics, a letter from J. Edgar Hoover directing the agency to spy on the musician, and various written orders calling on government agents to set the stage to set Lennon up for a drug bust. As reporter Jonathan Curiel observes, “The FBI’s files on Lennon … read like the writings of a paranoid goody-two-shoes.”

    As the New York Times notes, “Critics of today’s domestic surveillance object largely on privacy grounds. They have focused far less on how easily government surveillance can become an instrument for the people in power to try to hold on to power. ‘The U.S. vs. John Lennon’ … is the story not only of one man being harassed, but of a democracy being undermined.”

    Indeed, as I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, all of the many complaints we have about government today—surveillance, militarism, corruption, harassment, SWAT team raids, political persecution, spying, overcriminalization, etc.—were present in Lennon’s day and formed the basis of his call for social justice, peace and a populist revolution.

    For all of these reasons, the U.S. government was obsessed with Lennon, who had learned early on that rock music could serve a political end by proclaiming a radical message. More importantly, Lennon saw that his music could mobilize the public and help to bring about change. Lennon believed in the power of the people. Unfortunately, as Lennon recognized: “The trouble with government as it is, is that it doesn’t represent the people. It controls them.”

    However, as Martin Lewis writing for Time notes: “John Lennon was not God. But he earned the love and admiration of his generation by creating a huge body of work that inspired and led. The appreciation for him deepened because he then instinctively decided to use his celebrity as a bully pulpit for causes greater than his own enrichment or self-aggrandizement.”

    For instance, in December 1971 at a concert in Ann Arbor, Mich., Lennon took to the stage and in his usual confrontational style belted out “John Sinclair,” a song he had written about a man sentenced to 10 years in prison for possessing two marijuana cigarettes. Within days of Lennon’s call for action, the Michigan Supreme Court ordered Sinclair released.

    What Lennon did not know at the time was that government officials had been keeping strict tabs on the ex-Beatle they referred to as “Mr. Lennon.” FBI agents were in the audience at the Ann Arbor concert, “taking notes on everything from the attendance (15,000) to the artistic merits of his new song.”

    The U.S. government was spying on Lennon.

    By March 1971, when his “Power to the People” single was released, it was clear where Lennon stood. Having moved to New York City that same year, Lennon was ready to participate in political activism against the U. S. government, the “monster” that was financing the war in Vietnam.

    The release of Lennon’s Sometime in New York City album, which contained a radical anti-government message in virtually every song and depicted President Richard Nixon and Chinese Chairman Mao Tse-tung dancing together nude on the cover, only fanned the flames of the conflict to come.

    The official U.S. war against Lennon began in earnest in 1972 after rumors surfaced that Lennon planned to embark on a U.S. concert tour that would combine rock music with antiwar organizing and voter registration. Nixon, fearing Lennon’s influence on about 11 million new voters (1972 was the first year that 18-year-olds could vote), had the ex-Beatle served with deportation orders “in an effort to silence him as a voice of the peace movement.”

    Then again, the FBI has had a long history of persecuting, prosecuting and generally harassing activists, politicians, and cultural figures, most notably among the latter such celebrated names as folk singer Pete Seeger, painter Pablo Picasso, comic actor and filmmaker Charlie Chaplin, comedian Lenny Bruce and poet Allen Ginsberg.

    Among those most closely watched by the FBI was Martin Luther King Jr., a man labeled by the FBI as “the most dangerous and effective Negro leader in the country.” With wiretaps and electronic bugs planted in his home and office, King was kept under constant surveillance by the FBI with the aim of “neutralizing” him. He even received letters written by FBI agents suggesting that he either commit suicide or the details of his private life would be revealed to the public. The FBI kept up its pursuit of King until he was felled by a hollow-point bullet to the head in 1968.

    While Lennon was not—as far as we know—being blackmailed into suicide, he was the subject of a four-year campaign of surveillance and harassment by the U.S. government (spearheaded by FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover), an attempt by President Richard Nixon to have him “neutralized” and deported. As Adam Cohen of the New York Times points out, “The F.B.I.’s surveillance of Lennon is a reminder of how easily domestic spying can become unmoored from any legitimate law enforcement purpose. What is more surprising, and ultimately more unsettling, is the degree to which the surveillance turns out to have been intertwined with electoral politics.”

    As Lennon’s FBI file shows, memos and reports about the FBI’s surveillance of the anti-war activist had been flying back and forth between Hoover, the Nixon White House, various senators, the FBI and the U.S. Immigration Office.

    Nixon’s pursuit of Lennon was relentless and in large part based on the misperception that Lennon and his comrades were planning to disrupt the 1972 Republican National Convention. The government’s paranoia, however, was misplaced.

    Left-wing activists who were on government watch lists and who shared an interest in bringing down the Nixon Administration had been congregating at Lennon’s New York apartment. But when they revealed that they were planning to cause a riot, Lennon balked. As he recounted in a 1980 interview, “We said, We ain’t buying this. We’re not going to draw children into a situation to create violence so you can overthrow what? And replace it with what? . . . It was all based on this illusion, that you can create violence and overthrow what is, and get communism or get some right-wing lunatic or a left-wing lunatic. They’re all lunatics.”

    Despite the fact that Lennon was not part of the “lunatic” plot, the government persisted in its efforts to have him deported. Equally determined to resist, Lennon dug in and fought back. Every time he was ordered out of the country, his lawyers delayed the process by filing an appeal. Finally, in 1976, Lennon won the battle to stay in the country when he was granted a green card. As he said afterwards, “I have a love for this country…. This is where the action is. I think we’ll just go home, open a tea bag, and look at each other.” 

    Lennon’s time of repose didn’t last long, however. By 1980, he had re-emerged with a new album and plans to become politically active again.

    The old radical was back and ready to cause trouble. In his final interview on Dec. 8, 1980, Lennon mused, “The whole map’s changed and we’re going into an unknown future, but we’re still all here, and while there’s life there’s hope.”

    That very night, when Lennon returned to his New York apartment building, Mark David Chapman was waiting in the shadows. As Lennon stepped outside the car to greet the fans congregating outside, Chapman, in an eerie echo of the FBI’s moniker for Lennon, called out, “Mr. Lennon!”

    Lennon turned and was met with a barrage of gunfire as Chapman—dropping into a two-handed combat stance—emptied his .38-caliber pistol and pumped four hollow-point bullets into his back and left arm. Lennon stumbled, staggered forward and, with blood pouring from his mouth and chest, collapsed to the ground.

    John Lennon was pronounced dead on arrival at the hospital. He had finally been “neutralized.”

    Yet where those who neutralized the likes of John Lennon, Martin Luther King Jr., John F. Kennedy, Malcolm X, Robert Kennedy and others go wrong is in believing that you can murder a movement with a bullet and a madman.

    Thankfully, Lennon’s legacy lives on in his words, his music and his efforts to speak truth to power. As Yoko Ono shared in a 2014 letter to the parole board tasked with determining whether Chapman should be released: “A man of humble origin, [John Lennon] brought light and hope to the whole world with his words and music. He tried to be a good power for the world, and he was. He gave encouragement, inspiration and dreams to people regardless of their race, creed and gender.”

    Sadly, not much has changed for the better in the world since Lennon walked among us. Peace remains out of reach. Activism and whistleblowers continue to be prosecuted for challenging the government’s authority. Militarism is on the rise, with police acquiring armed drones, all the while the governmental war machine continues to wreak havoc on innocent lives. Just recently, for example, U.S. military forces carried out airstrikes in Afghanistan that left a Doctors without Borders hospital in ruins, killing several of its medical personnel and patients, including children.

    For those of us who joined with John Lennon to imagine a world of peace, it’s getting harder to reconcile that dream with the reality of the American police state. For those who do dare to speak up, they are labeled dissidents, troublemakers, terrorists, lunatics, or mentally ill and tagged for surveillance, censorship or, worse, involuntary detention.

    As Lennon shared in a 1968 interview:

    I think all our society is run by insane people for insane objectives… I think we’re being run by maniacs for maniacal means. If anybody can put on paper what our government and the American government and the Russian… Chinese… what they are actually trying to do, and what they think they’re doing, I’d be very pleased to know what they think they’re doing. I think they’re all insane. But I’m liable to be put away as insane for expressing that. That’s what’s insane about it.”

    So what’s the answer?

    Lennon had a multitude of suggestions.

    “If everyone demanded peace instead of another television set, then there’d be peace.”

     

    “Produce your own dream. If you want to save Peru, go save Peru. It’s quite possible to do anything, but not to put it on the leaders….You have to do it yourself. That’s what the great masters and mistresses have been saying ever since time began. They can point the way, leave signposts and little instructions in various books that are now called holy and worshipped for the cover of the book and not for what it says, but the instructions are all there for all to see, have always been and always will be. There’s nothing new under the sun. All the roads lead to Rome. And people cannot provide it for you. I can’t wake you up. You can wake you up. I can’t cure you. You can cure you.”

     

    “Life is very short, and there’s no time for fussing and fighting my friends.”

     

    “Peace is not something you wish for; It’s something you make, Something you do, Something you are, And something you give away.”

    “If you want peace, you won’t get it with violence.”

     

    “Say you want a revolution / We better get on right away / Well you get on your feet / And out on the street / Singing power to the people.”

    And my favorite advice of all: “All you need is love. Love is all you need.”

  • Fukushima Kids Suffer Thyroid Cancer Up To 50x Normal Rate, New Study Finds

    Children living near the Fukushima nuclear meltdowns have been diagnosed with thyroid cancer at a rate 20 to 50 times that of children elsewhere, according to a new study. As AP reports, most of the 370,000 children in Fukushima prefecture have been given ultrasound checkups since the meltdown and thyroid cancer is suspected or confirmed in 137 of those children. "This is more than expected and emerging faster than expected," according to the lead author of the study, and raises doubts about the government's less fearful view.

     

    Right after the disaster, the lead doctor brought in to Fukushima, Shunichi Yamashita, repeatedly ruled out the possibility of radiation-induced illnesses. The thyroid checks were being ordered just to play it safe, according to the government. But, as AP reports, a new study says children living near the Fukushima nuclear meltdowns have been diagnosed with thyroid cancer at a rate 20 to 50 times that of children elsewhere, a difference the authors contend undermines the government's position that more cases have been discovered in the area only because of stringent monitoring

    Most of the 370,000 children in Fukushima prefecture (state) have been given ultrasound checkups since the March 2011 meltdowns at the tsunami-ravaged Fukushima Dai-ichi nuclear plant. The most recent statistics, released in August, show that thyroid cancer is suspected or confirmed in 137 of those children, a number that rose by 25 from a year earlier. Elsewhere, the disease occurs in only about one or two of every million children per year by some estimates.

     

    "This is more than expected and emerging faster than expected," lead author Toshihide Tsuda told The Associated Press during a visit to Tokyo. "This is 20 times to 50 times what would be normally expected."

     

     

    But Tsuda, a professor at Okayama University, said the latest results from the ultrasound checkups, which continue to be conducted, raise doubts about the government's view.

     

    Thyroid cancer among children is one sickness the medical world has definitively linked to radiation after the 1986 Chernobyl catastrophe. If treated, it is rarely fatal, and early detection is a plus, but patients are on medication for the rest of their lives.

    Scientists are divided on Tsuda's conclusions. Conclusions about any connection between Fukushima radiation and cancer will help determine compensation and other policies. Many people who live in areas deemed safe by the government have fled fearing sickness, especially for their children.

    An area extending about 20 kilometers (12 miles) from the nuclear plant has been declared an exclusion zone. The borders are constantly being remapped as cleanup of radiated debris and soil continues in an effort to bring as many people back as possible. Decommissioning the plant is expected to take decades.

     

    Noriko Matsumoto, 53, who used to work as a nurse in Koriyama, Fukushima, outside the no-go zone, fled to Tokyo with her then-11-year-old daughter a few months after the disaster. She had initially shrugged off the fears but got worried when her daughter started getting nosebleeds and rashes.

     

    "My daughter has the right to live free of radiation," she said. "We can never be sure about blaming radiation. But I personally feel radiation is behind sicknesses."

    *  *  *

    So once again, despite all the promises from officials that everything is under control, the fact is that Fukushima has devastated a generation and continues to leak radioactive material into the groundwater (and ocean).

    Still… at least The 2020 Olympians won;t be swimming in shit like in Brazil next year.

  • Liquidity Strains Reappear As China's "Golden Week" Stock & Housing Market Disappoints

    Despite last night's disappointingly weak China re-open (notably less than US ADRs had implied), it appears everyone and their pet rabbit levered up as China margin-buying rose CNY21bn – the most in 2 months. It appears China's housing market also disappointed hope-strewn expectations as Golden Week home sales slowed dramatically YoY (blamed on weather). All is not well in the liquidioty stress department as despite ongoing injections, o/n HIBOR spiked 240bps overnight. China stocks are mixed at the open as PBOC strengthens the Yuan fix for the 5th day in a row to 2 month highs. Concerns are also growing in China's corporate bond market where bubble flows have greatly rotated from stocks to drive yields on risky firms to record lows.

     

    The China (Stock) Bubble Is Dead, Long Live The China (Bond) Bubble…

    As a rout in Chinese stocks this year erased $5 trillion of value, Bloomberg notes that investors fled for safety in the nation’s red-hot corporate bond market. They may have just moved from one bubble to another.

     

    China margin-buying surged 129% off 13 month lows, the biggest daily rise in almost 3 years…

     

    Overall, Chinese stocks re-opened notably weaker than US ADRs expected…

     

    And there is not much further gains today, despite US equity exuberance…

    • *CHINA'S CSI 300 STOCK-INDEX FUTURES RISE 0.2% TO 3,241.4

    And PBOC strengthens the Yuan fix further…for the 5th day in a row to 2 month highs

    • *CHINA SETS YUAN REFERENCE RATE AT 6.3493 AGAINST U.S. DOLLAR

     

    And just as the stock market disappointed, so did the housing market… Golden Week property mkt in major cities weaker than expected due to bad weather, limited time for developers to react to supportive measures, analyst Jinsong Du says in note, citing data collected by Credit Suisse.

    • Recommends shrhldrs of lower-tier city developers take profit given increasing downside risks
    • Agile, Guangzhou R&F among lower-tier city players
    • Y/y growth in subscription sales slowed during holiday
    • Sales in Sept.to early Oct. weaker than May to early June’s
    • NOTE: Sunac leads Chinese developers retreat today, down 3.6%; Sino-Ocean Land -3.4%, Fantasia -3.2%

    And Hong Kong Existing Home Prices Snap 5-Mo. Rising Streak

    Overnight HIBOR rates surged 242bps to 4.11% as China re-opened, suggesting more than a little liquidity stress remains…

    *  *  *

    Japanese stocks are holding their heads just above water despite a major miss by Fast Retailing (parent of UNIQLO):

    • *FAST RETAILING FALLS AS MUCH AS 8.9% AS FORECASTS LAG ESTIMATES

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • Edward Snowden's New Revelations Are Truly Chilling

    Submitted by Sophie McAdam via TrueActivist.com,

    Former intelligence contractor and NSA whistleblower Edward Snowden told the BBC's Panorama that the UK intelligence centre GCHQ has the power to hack phones without their owners’ knowledge.

    In an interview with the BBC’s ‘Panorama’ which aired in Britain last week, Edward Snowden spoke in detail about the spying capabilities of the UK intelligence agency GCHQ. He disclosed that government spies can legally hack into any citizen’s phone to listen in to what’s happening in the room, view files, messages and photos, pinpoint exactly where a person is (to a much more sophisticated level than a normal GPS system), and monitor a person’s every move and every conversation, even when the phone is turned off. These technologies are named after Smurfs, those little blue cartoon characters who had a recent Hollywood makeover. But despite the cute name, these technologies are very disturbing; each one is built to spy on you in a different way:

    • “Dreamy Smurf”: lets the phone be powered on and off
    • “Nosey Smurf”:lets spies turn the microphone on and listen in on users, even if the phone itself is turned off
    • “Tracker Smurf”:a geo-location tool which allows [GCHQ] to follow you with a greater precision than you would get from the typical triangulation of cellphone towers.
    • “Paranoid Smurf”: hides the fact that it has taken control of the phone. The tool will stop people from recognising that the phone has been tampered with if it is taken in for a service, for instance.

    Snowden says: “They want to own your phone instead of you.” It sounds very much like he means we are being purposefully encouraged to buy our own tracking devices. That kinda saved the government some money, didn’t it?

    His revelations should worry anyone who cares about human rights, especially in an era where the threat of terrorism is used to justify all sorts of governmental crimes against civil liberties. We have willingly given up our freedoms in the name of security; as a result we have neither. We seem to have forgotten that to live as a free person is a basic human right: we are essentially free beings. We are born naked and without certification; we do not belong to any government nor monarchy nor individual, we don’t even belong to any nation or culture or religion- these are all social constructs. We belong only to the universe that created us, or whatever your equivalent belief. It is therefore a natural human right not to be not be under secret surveillance by your own government, those corruptible liars who are supposedly elected by and therefore accountable to the people.

    The danger for law-abiding citizens who say they have nothing to fear because they are not terrorists, beware: many peaceful British protesters have been arrested under the Prevention Of Terrorism Act since its introduction in 2005. Edward Snowden‘s disclosure confirms just how far the attack on civil liberties has gone since 9/11 and the London bombings. Both events have allowed governments the legal right to essentially wage war on their own people, through the Patriot Act in the USA and the Prevention Of Terrorism Act in the UK. In Britain, as in the USA, terrorism and activism seem to have morphed into one entity, while nobody really knows who the real terrorists are any more. A sad but absolutely realistic fact of life in 2015: if you went to a peaceful protest at weekend and got detained, you’re probably getting hacked right now.

    It’s one more reason to conclude that smartphones suck. And as much as we convince ourselves how cool they are, it’s hard to deny their invention has resulted in a tendency for humans to behave like zombies, encouraged child labor, made us more lonely than ever, turned some of us into narcissistic selfieaddicts, and prevented us from communicating with those who really matter (the ones in the same room at the same time). Now, Snowden has given us yet another reason to believe that smartphones might be the dumbest thing we could have ever inflicted on ourselves.

     

  • Carmageddon: This Is What 750 Million Chinese Hitting The Road Looks Like

    If you've ever complained about your commute, or the traffic jams on your way to vacation destinations, here is some context from China…

     

    As RT reports, the carmageddon took place on the 2,273-kilometer Beijing-Hong Kong-Macau Expressway that links the cities of Beijing and Shenzhen in the Guangdong province, at the border with Hong Kong on Tuesday.

    According to China's National Tourism Administration, more than 750 million Chinese were on the roads between October 1 and 7.

  • Why This Feels Like A Depression For Most People

    Submitted by Jim Quinn via The Burning Platform blog,

    “And the little screaming fact that sounds through all history: repression works only to strengthen and knit the repressed.” John Steinbeck, The Grapes of Wrath

     

    Everyone has seen the pictures of the unemployed waiting in soup lines during the Great Depression. When you try to tell a propaganda believing, willfully ignorant, mainstream media watching, math challenged consumer we are in the midst of a Greater Depression, they act as if you’ve lost your mind. They will immediately bluster about the 5.1% unemployment rate, record corporate profits, and stock market near all-time highs. The cognitive dissonance of these people is only exceeded by their inability to understand basic mathematical concepts.

    The reason you don’t see huge lines of people waiting in soup lines during this Greater Depression is because the government has figured out how to disguise suffering through modern technology. During the height of the Great Depression in 1933, there were 12.8 million Americans unemployed. These were the men pictured in the soup lines. Today, there are 46 million Americans in an electronic soup kitchen line, as their food is distributed through EBT cards (with that angel of mercy JP Morgan reaping billions in profits by processing the transactions).

    These 46 million people represent 14% of the U.S. population. There are 23 million households on food stamps in a nation of 123 million households. Therefore, 19% of all households in the U.S. are so poor, they require food assistance to survive. In 1933 there were approximately 126 million Americans living in 30 million households. The government didn’t keep official unemployment records until 1940, but the Department of Labor estimated 12.8 million people were unemployed during the worst year of the Great Depression or 24.9% of the labor force. By 1937 it had fallen to 14.3% or approximately 8 million people.

    The number of people unemployed during the 1930’s is an excellent representation of the number of households on government assistance during the Great Depression because 79% of all households were occupied by married couples with 4 people per household versus 48% married couple households today with 2.5 people per household. The unemployment rate averaged 19% during the heart of the Great Depression. Therefore, approximately 19% of all the households in the U.S. needed government assistance to feed themselves. That happens to be the exact percentage of households currently needing food stamps to feed themselves.

    We are now supposedly five years into an economic recovery. The unemployment rate, according to the government, has fallen from 10% to 5.1%. Maybe a comparison to the the Great Depression in 1937, five years after the worst of it, would reveal some truth. It is not easy to do an apples to apples comparison because very few women worked outside the home in 1937 and the average life expectancy in the 1930s was 60 years old. Today, the majority of women are theoretically in the work force and the average life expectancy is 78 years old. In 1937 only 5% of the population was over 65 years old versus 13% today.

    There were approximately 55 million Americans in the labor force in 1937, according to the DOL, and approximately 47 million of them were employed. So 85% of the eligible work force was working. There was no BLS to massage, manipulate, seasonally adjust, or fake the data to make things appear better than they were in 1937. Edward Bernay’s Propaganda techniques and methodologies weren’t perfected for a few more years. According to Census information there were 52 million Americans between the ages of 18 and 44, along with another 21 million between the ages of 45 and 64 in 1937. So even considering that very few women worked and many people died by the age of 60, we had a workforce of 55 million out of an age eligible population of 73 million at a maximum. That yields a participation rate of 75%.

    These facts reveal the utter falsity of the propaganda drenched duplicitous data dumped by the BLS on behalf of vested interests who have captured our government and have an agenda requiring the public to be kept in the dark regarding their own dire financial situation. No matter how you slice the data, it reveals an absolute parallel to the situation during the Great Depression. There are 251 million Americans of working age and only 149 million are employed, of which 20 million are part-time and 8 million are self employed. Only 59% of working age Americans actually work. The BLS has the cajones to declare that only 157 million of the 251 million working age Americans are actually in the labor force.

    This outrageous assumption flies in the face of all reasonableness, facts, and truth. In 1937, even with women not working outside the home and very few people living past 65 years old, the participation rate was 75%. Today, with the majority of women capable and willing to work and older Americans working well into their 60s, the BLS actually expects a critical thinking person to believe the participation rate is only 62.4%, the lowest since 1977. It’s a pure and simple despicable lie. The true participation rate should exceed the rate in 1937, based on the facts. Using the 75% participation rate today, yields a true unemployment rate of 21%, not the preposterous 5.1% shoveled by the bullshit artists at the BLS. The 21% rate ties very closely to the figure arrived at by John Williams at Shadowstats. An unbiased assessment of the facts reveals unemployment numbers and people on government assistance numbers that match or exceed those of the Great Depression.

    I also wonder whether the corporate mainstream media purposely chooses not to show pictures of the poor waiting in long lines to be fed because their function is not to report facts and truth, but to perpetuate the lie that all is well in America.  I pass the Grace Lutheran church at 36th and Haverford Avenue in West Philly everyday on my way to work. Every Thursday is when the church, in partnership with the Philabundance food bank, distributes free food to the people of West Philly. The line stretches around the block at 7:30 am awaiting the Philabundance truck to arrive. There are old, young, black, white, Latino, and Asian in the line. It looks exactly like the line pictured in the Great Depression above. I’m sure there are similar scenes across every city in America on a daily basis. People dependent on food banks and living in homeless shelters are at record levels. Where are the mainstream media pictures? How does that jive with Ben Bernanke’s self congratulatory book tour about how he saved America by secretly handing Wall Street and foreign bankers $16 trillion?

    For the average American family, the US economy has been in recession since 2000, with the Greater Depression arriving in 2008. The working age population has grown by 40 million since 2000, with only 12 million jobs added over that time frame. Of those, 10 million were in the government controlled health, education, social services (HES) sectors, with millions of good paying manufacturing jobs destroyed, replaced by a couple million low paying services jobs. As David Stockman points out, Bernanke and the vested interests he serves continue to spew disingenuous propaganda  to cover up the fact average American households continue to experience depression-like conditions. When your real household income is lower than it was in 1989, while your basic living costs for food, energy, transportation, rent, housing, healthcare, taxes, and education have skyrocketed, you just might be experiencing a depression.

    “The Fed’s balance sheet has grown from $500 billion to $4.5 trillion or 9X during that span, but job growth outside the HES Complex amounts to less than 2%. For crying out loud, that’s a 12,000 per month rounding error in an economy which has 250 million adults. Virtually every job gained since December 2009 shown in the chart below was not a “new” job at all; it was just a “born-again” job that Greenspan had claimed credit for a few years earlier. Yet Bernanke has the nerve to boast about the Fed’s success on jobs and claim that the “labor market is close to normal”!”

    Edward Bernays wrote the book Propaganda in 1928. It was utilized quite well by Goebbels and Hitler over the next decade or so. But the corporate fascist oligarchy, disguised as American democracy, puts Goebbels efforts to shame. Bernays would be thrilled by the efficiency and professionalism with which the invisible Deep State governing power is able to utilize mass media, the internet, public schools, and academia to shape, mold, manipulate and alter the minds of the masses. The unholy alliance between shadowy billionaires, a private bank owned by Wall Street and controlling our currency, the military industrial complex, the sick care complex, mega-corporations peddling consumer goods, and politicians who are easily bought, has left a hollowed out rotting carcass of a nation, with the peasants experiencing a depression, while the lords of the manor feast like there is no tomorrow. But at least the 103 million peasants who aren’t working believe only 5.1% of them are unemployed. It’s a Bernaysian Miracle!!!

    “The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country. …We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of. This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society. …In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons…who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind.” Edward Bernays – Propaganda

  • Goldman "Picks Apart" The Labor Paradigm: 50 Years Of A Productivity Paradox

    “Let me put this in perspective. For the total economy, productivity growth was 2.7% from 1920 to 1970, 1.6% from 1970 to 1994, 2.3% from 1994 to 2004 during what we call the dotcom era, and just 1.0% from 2004 to the second quarter of 2015.1 So the productivity growth of the last 11 years was not only slower than in the dotcom era, but even slower than in the so-called slowdown period beginning in the early 1970s.”

    That’s from Robert Gordon, a professor of economics at Northwestern University and it comes courtesy of Goldman who has taken a close look at declining labor productivity in the US.

    As the Vampire Squid notes, falling productivity is something of a paradox. That is, better technology and advances in efficiency should by all rights have increased productivity but apparently, a number of factors are intervening to short circuit the system. Here’s Goldman’s full interview with Gordon.

    The reason for the slowdown after 1970 is straightforward: we simply exhausted the productivity benefits of prior innovations. In the late 19th century, hugely important “general purpose” technologies, like electricity and the internal combustion engine, were invented. Then there were major developments in entertainment and communication in the form of the telephone, telegraph, radio, motion pictures and television. We made major breakthroughs in health. And we vastly improved working conditions. All of that came together between 1920 and 1970. The last three spin-offs of the great inventions— interstate highways, commercial air travel, and air conditioning in most businesses—were also largely complete by 1970.So at that point we had run through the productivity payoffs. 

     

     

    Allison Nathan: Why has productivity growth stalled?

     

    Robert Gordon: Let me put this in perspective. For the total economy, productivity growth was 2.7% from 1920 to 1970, 1.6% from 1970 to 1994, 2.3% from 1994 to 2004 during what we call the dotcom era, and just 1.0% from 2004 to the second quarter of 2015.1 So the productivity growth of the last 11 years was not only slower than in the dotcom era, but even slower than in the so-called slowdown period beginning in the early 1970s. The reason for the slowdown after 1970 is straightforward: we simply exhausted the productivity benefits of prior innovations. In the late 19th century, hugely important “general purpose” technologies, like electricity and the internal combustion engine, were invented. Then there were major developments in entertainment and communication in the form of the telephone, telegraph, radio, motion pictures and television. We made major breakthroughs in health. And we vastly improved working conditions. All of that came together between 1920 and 1970. The last three spin-offs of the great inventions— interstate highways, commercial air travel, and air conditioning in most businesses—were also largely complete by 1970. So at that point we had run through the productivity payoffs.
    We have also now run through the payoffs of the digital revolution that followed. Between 1980 and 2005 there was a total transformation of business practices from paper and filing cabinets to flat screens and search engines. But that transition is over. And the temporary revival of productivity during the dotcom era was uniquely concentrated in a very short span, with remarkably few gains in productivity growth since. We’re using software and computers now that are very similar to the ones we used ten years ago. So it is no surprise that productivity growth has been slower over this decade.

     

    Allison Nathan: Are the productivity statistics simply failing to account for the impact of new technologies?

     

    Robert Gordon: Many consumer benefits are clearly missing from the GDP statistics. But GDP has always suffered from this fault. For example, GDP completely failed to capture the transition from the horse to the motorcar and the enormous benefits that resulted from an environment free of horse manure droppings in the streets. If anything, I think a case could be made that what productivity statistics failed to capture 1 Note from GS Research: The figures cited here are for the overall economy; corresponding numbers for the US nonfarm business sector (the conventional measure) tend to run about 0.4 pp higher. in the first 50 years of the 20th century was larger and more important than what is missing now. At that time, we left out the benefits of conquering infant mortality; of going from the 60-hour work week to the 40-hour work week; of the new ability to travel with a car. In any case, what we’re seeing now is more of the same: a general failure to translate new inventions into GDP, and therefore into productivity measures.

     

    Allison Nathan: Should we be measuring productivity differently?

     

    Robert Gordon: I think it’s impossible to quantify the benefits of new inventions. Economists have done experimental work on specific inventions like tractors, and it is possible to come up with ballpark estimates. But quantifying those improvements has always been difficult. And the hypothetical measurement of the benefits of more recent inventions like smartphones and tablets is probably more difficult than most.

     

    Allison Nathan: Could we be experiencing delays in seeing the effects of new technologies on productivity?

     

    Robert Gordon: Yes, we could be seeing some of this dynamic. For example, the rollout of electronic medical records has been very slow even though we have had the necessary technology for a good 15 years. But the real delay happened in the early 2000s. Despite the sharp drop in the stock market and a tremendous collapse in high-tech investment from 2000 to 2003, productivity growth was very rapid throughout the whole decade from 1994 to 2004, reflecting the delay in learning how to make full use of the internet, which was first introduced in the early 1990s. My favorite example is the introduction of airport check-in kiosks, which took place between 2001 and 2005 using technology that had been invented a decade earlier.

     

    Allison Nathan: You argue that recent technological developments don’t hold a candle to the breakthroughs of the past. Are the world’s best innovations truly behind us?

     

    Robert Gordon: In my view, the inventions of the century from 1870 to 1970 utterly changed human life in a way that now is taken for granted. When you consider the immense progress in getting rid of disease, filth, manure; the advances in health with antibiotics and treatments for heart disease and cancer; the liberation of women from the chores of doing laundry with a scrub board; the transition away from steel workers working 12 hours a day, six days a week, there really is no comparison with the inventions taking place today. Smartphones and social networks are entertainment and not basic to human life. But “best” is subjective. Some people may think it is more important to have a social network than indoor plumbing.

     

    Allison Nathan: Some would say that the productivity contributions of past inventions, particularly during the industrial revolution, did not properly account for environmental or other costs. What are your thoughts? Robert

     

    Gordon: More than overstating productivity growth during the industrial revolution, I think we have understated the growth of productivity from 1970 to the turn of the 21st century when we had major improvements in air and water quality mandated by legislation. We have incorporated part of this clean-up into productivity statistics in a very subtle way by accounting for emissions control devices on auto engines. But most of the improvements in the environment are missing from GDP. That being said, the costs of current technology are probably lower than the costs of past industrialization, so these types of omissions are likely less prevalent today. Allison Nathan: Are there any areas of innovation that hold substantial promise in your view? Robert Gordon: Most of the excitement is centered on artificial intelligence and robots. Robots are nothing new. The first industrial robot was introduced by General Motors in 1961. Since then, robots have steadily replaced human labor in manufacturing, and they continue to create more rapid productivity growth in the manufacturing sector than in most of the service sector. Another place where robots are gradually appearing is warehousing. But they don’t fetch individual items and bring them to a station for packing; they simply pick up an entire tier of shelves and bring it to a person who selects the right item and manually packs it. Developments in robotics have so far been unable to duplicate the actions of the human hand, even for many tasks that human beings do intuitively. So the gradual arrival of robots in the economy is very slow. As far as artificial intelligence, computer technology has already steadily replaced human jobs. Think of the disappearing travel agent and reservation clerk, or, more recently, the legal associate. So there is a lot of excitement about technological change, but it is taking place at a very measured pace, especially to the extent that it is replacing human labor.

     

    Allison Nathan: Will these innovations be sufficient to boost productivity?

     

    Robert Gordon: Not meaningfully. I expect productivity growth over the next quarter-century of 1.2%, slightly above the 1.0% growth rate of the last 11 years but still below the 1.4% rate over the past 45 years if you take out the dotcom decade, which was an unusual period that I don’t think will be repeated. That difference of 0.2% is the contribution of slower innovation compared to history. Keep in mind that this slowdown already occurred in the last ten years. So I am basically predicting more of the same, not some new arrival of stagnation.

     

    Allison Nathan: How important is the pace of productivity to your overall outlook for US economic growth?

     

    Robert Gordon: It’s absolutely central. By definition, growth in real GDP is equal to growth in productivity plus growth in hours of work. The growth in hours of work is limited by population growth and growth in the number of hours that each member of the population works. The latter is going to be shrinking over the next 25 years due to the retirement of the baby boomers. So while US population growth should be about 0.8% per year, we can only expect growth in hours of work of 0.4%, much lower than what we observed in the latter part of the 20th century. Adding that to the 1.2% I expect for productivity growth, my projection for growth in real GDP is 1.6% a year. This is just the same as the last 11 years, but it is only half of the 3.2% growth rate we experienced from 1970 to 2004. Allison Nathan: You seem skeptical of technological tailwinds and more focused on economic headwinds. Which headwinds concern you the most?

     

    Robert Gordon: I see four main headwinds to economic growth. The first is rising inequality. Our winner-take-all society provides very high payoffs to the top rock stars, CEOs, lawyers, and so forth. And at the bottom, we have machines gradually but steadily replacing workers, and an erosion of manufacturing jobs from globalization and trade. So the gap between the very top and the mass of people in the middle and the bottom continues to widen inexorably. The second headwind is the end of the great expansion of education that brought Americans from completing only an elementary school education in 1900 to a great majority having a high school education by around 1970. There has been a gradual increase in the share of young people going to college, but the United States has fallen from its previous position of leadership in global education and now ranks about 16th among nations in the percentage of its young people completing a four-year college degree program. The third headwind is the demographic shift I mentioned of baby boom retirement pushing down overall hours worked. And the final headwind, also related to aging, involves federal government expenditures on Social Security and Medicare increasing faster than the shrinking workforce’s ability to provide the tax revenue to finance these benefits. This will eventually necessitate tax increases and/or benefit reductions, which will cause people’s after-tax disposable income to grow even more slowly than their pre-tax income. Allison Nathan: Does your outlook owe more to a measured pace of innovation or to these headwinds?

     

     Robert Gordon: Quantitatively, the headwinds are more important. That said, there is a whole list of policies that would help address them, from a more progressive tax system and increased spending on pre-school education to massive immigration reform. And many of those proposals also deal with productivity by raising the quality of human capital.

     

    Allison Nathan: You are often described as a “technopessimist.” Is that a fair characterization?

     

    Robert Gordon: I would certainly classify myself as a technopessimist. But, if you think about it, the terms techno-optimist and techno-pessimist belie the meaning of the words optimism and pessimism. Techno-“optimists” are predicting a future of massive technological unemployment with a quarter or half of the labor force unable to find jobs. Under the hood of their optimism, they are deeply pessimistic about the future of work. I think that technological change is proceeding slowly, just as it has over the past decade, which should allow us to keep our unemployment relatively low. So under the hood of my technopessimism, I’m very optimistic about the future of work. Where I see the real problem is not in finding a job for everybody, but in finding good jobs for people, and in dealing with the inevitable rise of inequality.

  • The Real Reason For The Refugee Crisis You Won't Hear About In The Media

    Submitted by Nick Giambruno via InternationalMan.com,

    There’s a meme going around that the refugee crisis in Europe (the largest since World War II) is part of a secret plot to subvert the West.

    I completely understand why the locals in any country wouldn’t be happy about waves of foreigners pouring in. Especially if they’re poor, unskilled, and not likely to assimilate.

    It leads to huge problems. Infrastructure gets strained. More people are sucking at the teat of the welfare system. The unwelcome newcomers compete for bottom-of-the-ladder jobs. Things easily turn nasty and then turn violent.

    But the idea that the refugee crisis in Europe is part of a hidden agenda – rather than a predictable outcome – strikes me as strange. And it’s a notion that conveniently deflects blame away from the people and factors that deserve it.

    Interventions Destabilize the Middle East

    The civil war in Syria has turned the country into a refugee-maker.

    Syria’s neighbors have reached their physical limit on their ability to absorb refugees.

    That’s one of the reasons so many are heading to the West.

    Lebanon has received over 1 million Syrian refugees. That’s an enormous number for a country with a population of only 4 million – a 25% increase. Jordan and Turkey also have millions of Syrian refugees. They’re saturated.

    The number of refugees heading to the West, by contrast, is in the hundreds of thousands. So far.

    But it’s not just Syria that’s sending refugees. Many more come from Iraq and Afghanistan, two other countries shattered by bungled Western military interventions.

    Then there are the refugees from Libya. A country the media and political establishment would rather forget because it represents another disastrous military decision.

    Actually, it’s not just Libyan refugees. It’s refugees from all of Africa who are using Libya as a transit point to reach Europe.

    Before his overthrow by NATO, Muammar Gaddafi had an agreement with Italy, which is directly to Libya’s north, across the Mediterranean Sea. Gaddafi agreed to prevent refugees heading for Europe from using Libya as a transit point. It was an arrangement that worked. So it’s no shocker that when NATO helped a coalition of ambitious rebels overthrow the Gaddafi government, the refugee floodgates opened.

    When there’s war, there are refugees. It’s a predictable outcome.

    It’s like kicking a bees’ nest and being surprised that bees fly out. Nobody should be surprised when that happens. And nobody should be surprised that people are fleeing war zones in Libya, Syria, Iraq, and Afghanistan.

    If Western governments didn’t want a refugee crisis, they shouldn’t have been so eager to topple those governments and destabilize those countries. The refugees should camp out in the backyards of the individuals who run those governments.

    I also have to mention the Saudis. They were very much involved in the Libyan war. They’ve also devoted themselves to ousting the Assad government in Syria, for geopolitical and sectarian reasons.

    Then there’s the war in Yemen that the Saudis have sponsored. It’s another mess the media doesn’t discuss often. But it will likely produce even more refugees.

    The Saudis make no secret about not welcoming refugees, even though the Kingdom is a primary instigator of the wars that are forcing people to flee their homelands. One reason is the Saudis don’t want more people leeching off their welfare system, especially amid budget crunches from lower oil prices.

    This brings up another interesting point. For the first time in decades, observers are calling into question the viability of the Saudi currency peg of 3.75 riyals per US dollar.

    The Saudi government spends a ton of money on welfare to keep its citizens sedated. But with lower oil prices cutting deep into government revenue, there’s less money to spend on welfare. Then there’s the cost of the wars in Yemen and Syria.

    There’s a serious crunch in the Saudi budget. They’ve only been able to stay afloat by draining their foreign exchange reserves. That threatens their currency peg.

    The next clue that there’s trouble is Saudi officials telling the media that the currency peg is fine and there’s nothing to worry about. An official government denial is almost always a sign of the opposite. It’s like the old saying…“believe nothing until it has been officially denied.”

    If there were a convenient way to short the Saudi riyal, I would do it in a heartbeat.

    Don’t Give the Welfare State a Pass

    It’s no coincidence that the refugees are flowing to the countries with the most generous welfare benefits, especially Germany and the Scandinavian nations.

    If there weren’t so many freebies in these countries, there wouldn’t be so many refugees showing up to collect them.

    The whole refugee crisis was easily predictable. It was the foreseeable consequence of shortsighted interventions in the Middle East and the welfare-state policies of nearby Europe.

    Instead of facing facts, blaming it all on a scheme to subvert the West conveniently deflects any responsibility from the authors of the mess.

    If the individuals who run Western governments really wanted to solve the refugee problem, they would throttle way back on welfare-state policies and then stay out of the Middle East free-for-all. It’s really as simple as that.

    But don’t count on the mainstream media to figure this out. They effectively operate as an organ of the State. I bet they’ll keep prescribing more of the same bad medicine that caused this crisis to begin with.

    This will help to cover the tracks of the real perpetrators, and it will obscure other real problems. I expect the media to ramp up the “blame the foreigner” sentiment, as it helps the US and EU governments distract the anger of their citizens from the sputtering economy and the shrinking of their civil liberties. From the politicians’ perspective, it’s a win-win. But it’s a lose-lose for citizens hoping for accountable government.

    And this brings up another uncomfortable truth for Americans and Europeans. The way the political and economic winds are blowing, things could get much worse.

    Central banks around the globe have created the biggest financial bubble in world history.

    The social and political implications of this bubble bursting are even more dangerous than the financial consequences.

    An economic depression and currency inflation (perhaps hyperinflation) are very much in the cards. These things rarely lead to anything but bigger government, less freedom, and shrinking prosperity. Sometimes they lead to much worse.

    One day the shoe could be on the other foot. We could see American and European refugees fleeing to South America or other havens to escape the problems in their home countries. It would be an ironic twist.

    Now, this outcome isn’t inevitable. But the chance it will happen isn’t zero, either, and the risk seems to grow each day.

  • Inflation Watch: Retiree Health-Care Costs Are Soaring

    Despite 'promises' of lower healthcare costs (from President Obama) and 'promises' of a comfortable retirement (if only you invest all your savings in stocks), Bloomberg reports the average 65-year-old couple retiring this year will face health-care costs of $245,000 in the years ahead, up 11% from 2014.

     

     

    As Bloomberg notes,

    The higher number stems in part from a change in assumptions about how long we'll live. In the wake of updated mortality tables put out by the Society of Actuaries last year, Fidelity Investments raised life expectancies in its annual Retiree Health Care Cost Estimate. For 2015, it assumes that a 65-year-old man will live to 85, and a 65-year-old woman to 87. In 2014, the estimate was 82 for a man and 85 for a woman.

     

    The estimated annual increase in medical and prescription expenses stands at 4 percent to 5 percent, about the same as last year. Prescription costs are trending higher than medical, at slightly above 7 percent, said Sunit Patel, senior vice president of Fidelity's Benefits Consulting group. Prescription drug costs account for 23 percent of that $245,000 figure. Money spent on deductibles and cost-sharing with an insurer make up 43 percent, and 34 percent goes to Medicare Part B and D premiums.

    *  *  *

    No wonder the older generation is staying at work longer… that's alarming if you're 65, and maybe more alarming if you're 25 – imagine what the cost will be when you're ready to retire.

  • The US Government Just Crossed The Rubicon

    Submitted by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    In 49 BC, a defiant Julius Caesar stood in front of his army at the River Rubicon and made the biggest decision of his life.

    It was strictly forbidden by Roman law for a general lead his army out of its province and into Rome. And the Rubicon marked the boundary.

    “Alea iacta est!” (The die is cast!) he said, and led his army across the river into civil war.

    The phrase “crossing the Rubicon” has stuck for more than 2,000 years, signifying a risky and dangerous point of no return.

    This week, the United States government crossed the Rubicon.

    In a fit of complete arrogance, a federal judge ruled that he has ‘jurisdiction’ over one of the biggest banks in mainland China, Bank of China (BOC), and demands that the bank turn over financial records to his court.

    The judge is hearing a case brought by the luxury brand Gucci against an alleged Chinese counterfeiting ring for selling fake handbags in the United States.

    The claim is that the Chinese defendants are sending their ill-gotten gains back to Bank of China in the mainland. And the judge wants to see their account activity.

    Bank of China, as you can probably guess, is predominantly owned by the Chinese government.

    So it goes without saying that this demand (not a request) is a direct affront at China’s sovereignty.

    The only leverage the judge has is that Bank of China has a branch in New York City; it is officially a licensed bank in the US.

    So if Bank of China doesn’t comply, the judge could theoretically order that their US license be revoked.

    Once again, the United States is using its financial system as a weapon.

    Since US dollars are the most widely used reserve currency in the world, every bank on the planet needs some access to the US banking system.

    Whether you’re in London, Riyadh, Sydney, or Shanghai, the most widely traded commodities, bonds, and financial contracts in the world are primarily denominated in US dollars.

    Plus most global trade takes place in US dollars.

    So not only are banks forced to hold US dollars, they require access to the US banking system in order to clear and settle US dollar transactions.

    Large international banks have what are known as ‘correspondent bank accounts’ or ‘nostro accounts’ with US banks.

    So a big bank in Denmark, for example, may have a correspondent account with JP Morgan or Citibank in New York in order to facilitate its dollar transactions.

    And sometimes foreign banks may even apply for their own US banking license, as in the case of Bank of China.

    But if a bank were to be kicked out of the US banking system, it would be incredibly detrimental to its ability to hold and transact in US dollars. And hence quite difficult to participate in global trade and finance.

    This financial leverage is an unbelievable advantage for the United States, and is a result of the rest of the world placing a great deal of trust in the US government.

    But the government has shown time and time again that they are willing to abuse that trust and use their advantage as a weapon– one that is more powerful than the US military.

    Just last year, the Treasury Department fined French bank BNP Paribas a whopping $9 billion for doing business with countries that the US doesn’t like, such as Cuba.

    Of course, Cuba and the US are BFFs now. But I doubt BNP is getting a refund anytime soon.

    And naturally, if BNP didn’t pay up, the US could threaten to evict them from its financial system.

    It’s simply amazing that the US did that to its own ally.

    Now they’re going after China, its biggest competitor.

    The Chinese are already working on a parallel, competitive financial system.

    They set up the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank to compete with the vestigial IMF and World Bank.

    And they’re nearing completion on an international payment system and clearing network to compete with SWIFT and the US financial system.

    It’s called CIPS.

    And once it’s up and running, there will likely be a rapid increase in the worldwide use of China’s currency for financial transactions– transactions that used to be executed in US dollars.

    Sticking it to Bank of China like this only gives the Chinese government even more reason to wage war on the US financial system through CIPS.

    The reduced demand for US dollars completely destroys America’s last remaining advantage.

    If they can’t force the rest of the world to use the US banking system, then they won’t be able to force the rest of the world to hold US dollars or buy US government debt.

    It weakens America considerably.

    And when future historians write the history of the decline of the United States, there will no doubt be a chapter on how the US government made it a matter of national policy to consistently abuse the power entrusted to them by the global banking community.

    Of course, Julius Caesar didn’t learn that lesson either.

    After crossing the Rubicon, he won a long civil war, after which the Roman Senate made him dictator for life.

    And fearing he would abuse it, he was assassinated just a few weeks later by the very people who entrusted him with that power.

  • Oct 9 – FOMC Mins: Fed Held Off On Hike Amid Worries About Low Inflation

    EMOTION MOVING MARKETS NOW: 42/100 FEAR

    PREVIOUS CLOSE: 37/100 FEAR

    ONE WEEK AGO: 18/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE MONTH AGO: 13/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE YEAR AGO: 4/100 EXTREME FEAR

    Put and Call Options: GREED During the last five trading days, volume in put options has lagged volume in call options by 31.29% as investors make bullish bets in their portfolios. However, this among the lowest levels of put buying seen during the last two years, indicating greed on the part of investors.

    Market Volatility:  NEUTRAL The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 17.42. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

    Stock Price Strength: FEAR The number of stocks hitting 52-week lows exceeds the number hitting highs and is at the lower end of its range, indicating fear.

     

    PIVOT POINTS

    EURUSD | GBPUSD | USDJPY | USDCAD | AUDUSD | EURJPY | EURCHF | EURGBPGBPJPY | NZDUSD | USDCHF | EURAUD | AUDJPY 

    S&P 500 (ES) | NASDAQ 100 (NQ) | DOW 30 (YM) | RUSSELL 2000 (TF) Euro (6E) |Pound (6B)

    EUROSTOXX 50 (FESX) | DAX 30 (FDAX) | BOBL (FGBM) | SCHATZ (FGBS) | BUND (FGBL)

    CRUDE OIL (CL) | GOLD (GC) | 10 YR T NOTE | 2 YR T  NOTE | 5 YR T NOTE | 30 YR TREASURY BOND | SOYBEANS | CORN

     

    MEME OF THE DAY – NO HIKE! TOLD YOU FOOL!

     

    UNUSUAL ACTIVITY

    QCOM OCT WEEKLY2 56 PUTS 5500+ @$.55 on offer

    MJN NOV 75 CALL Activity 3300+ @$2.66-2.80

    X NOV 14 CALL Activity continues over 10k+ @$.42 on the offer

    YUME SC 13D/A Filed by AVI Partners

    SPRT SC 13D Filed by Vertex Capital

    More Unusual Activity…

    HEADLINES

     

    FOMC Mins: Many Fed officials expected liftoff later this year

    FOMC Mins: Fed held off on hike amid worries about low inflation

    Fed’s Kocherlakota: Fed should cut interest rates

    GOP in disarray as McCarthy drops out of Speaker race

    ECB Mins: ECB Opted for More Time to Analyze Economic Risks

    ECB’s Praet: Seeping pessimism hindering recovery

    ECB’s Weidmann rejects calls for easier monpol

    BoE holds policy, signals rate can stay lower

    BoE’s Carney: Timing of Fed hike not decisive for BoE

    UK Citi/YouGov 1-Year Inflation Expectations (Sept): 1.5% (Prev 1.4%)

    Germany to press UK for EU negotiation details

    IMF Lagarde urges global policymakers to support eco growth

    OECD Leading Indicator: Growth outlook moderating

    Moody’s: China’s sovereign rating can withstand slower growth

    Fitch: Sharp China slowdown is top global rating risk

     

    GOVERNMENTS/CENTRAL BANKS

    FOMC Mins: Fed held off on hike Amid worries About low inflation –WSJ

    FOMC Mins: Many Fed officials expected liftoff later this year –ForexLive

    Kocherlakota: Fed should cut interest rates –Rtrs

    Moody’s Zandi: Fed to hike In December, sees four hikes in 2016 –Rtrs

    Republicans in disarray as Kevin McCarthy drops out of House speaker race –Guardian

    McCarthy exits house speaker race –FT

    BoJ Kuroda: EM slowdown hitting Japan economy and exports –ForexLive

    Lagarde urges global policymakers to support economic growth –Guardian

    OECD Leading Indicator: Outlook Of Moderating Growth In Most Major Economies

    ECB Minutes: ECB Opted for More Time to Analyze Economic Risks –BBG

    ECB’s Praet: Seeping pessimism hindering recovery –BBG

    ECB’s Praet: Premature to Judge Emerging Market Impact on EMU Growth –MNI

    ECB’s Weidmann: Core EMU Growth Projections Remain Intact –MNI

    ECB’s Weidmann Rejects Calls For Easier MonPol ?-Welt

    Germany Leading Institutes Cut 2015 GDP Growth view To 1.8% From 2.1% –ForexLive

    BoE votes 8-1 to hold policy, signals rate can stay lower –ET

    BoE’s Carney: Timing of Fed hike not decisive for BoE –BForexLive

    Angela Merkel to press David Cameron for EU negotiation details

    Riksbank Skingsley: Riksbank remains ready to act –FXstreet

    Pimco updates global growth forecasts

    FIXED INCOME

    Treasury yields take a dive after Fed minutes –CNBCz

    US sells 30-year bonds at 2.914% vs 2.920% WI –ForexLive

    PBOC to sell up to 5bn yuan of 1y bills in London –Rtrs

    HSBC: Get set for a chunky rally in bonds –FT

    ENERGY/COMMODITIES

    EIA Nat Gas Storage Number (Oct 2): 95 (est 99, prev 98)

    WTI surpasses $50 for first time since July –FT

    Saudi Arabia Said to Order Spending Curbs Amid Oil Price Slump –BBG

    Goldman Sachs makes the case for crude downside –ForexLive

    Gartman says commodity prices have bottomed –BBG

    BoE checks commodity exposures of UK banks –FT

    Gold prices rebound on dovish central banks, silver slumps on China –ForexLive

    EQUITIES

    M&A: Blackstone to buy BioMed Realty in $8 bln deal –Rtrs

    M&A: Dell, EMC in talks to merge –CNBC

    AUTOS: GM recalls 32k SUVs, says wipers could cause motor to catch fire –AP

    AUTOS: Volkswagen’s U.S. head: individuals did emissions cheating –Beeb

    LEGAL: Bill Gross to sue PIMCO for $200m –CNBC

    TELECOMS: Vodafone joins calls for BT to be broken up –FT

    MEDIA: Sony Is Said to Weigh Sale of Portion of Music Catalog –NYT

    EARNINGS: Goldman to release results on website, drops BusinessWire –CNBC

    UNIONS: Fiat, UAW reach deal; union claims ‘significant gains’ –USAT

    TRADING: Nasdaq launches tool to monitor dark pool trading –Rtrs

    EMERGING MARKETS

    Moody’s: China’s sovereign rating can withstand slower growth

    Moody’s: Slower growth and rising credit risk are symptoms of China’s challenge of structural rebalancing

    Fitch Radar: Sharp China Slowdown is Top Global Ratings Risk

     

    Alibaba’s Ma says concerns about China consumption overdone –Rtrs

  • NATO Talks Tough On Troop Deployment As Kremlin Calls West's Bluff

    For years, NATO has relied upon tough talk and promises of support for its member nations in order to reinforce an image of invincibility.

    That image is supported by the implicit backing of the US military and Washington has been keen to perpetuate it in the past 48 hours by presenting the straw man argument that Moscow is set to inexplicably bomb Turkey (and if you follow geopolitics you know that that makes absolutely no sense at all) and so the West must do it what it has to in order to support its friends in Ankara in the face of “Soviet” (and we use that term on purpose because that’s how this is being pitched now by Western media) aggression.

    To be sure, keeping up appearances was easy in the wake of Russia’s annexation of Crimea. It was simply a matter of saying publicly that the West wouldn’t allow Moscow to overrun Kiev and re-establish the Soviet Union. 

    But it doesn’t take a foreign policy genius or a lion-hearted NATO general to maintain that line.

    That is, some of this was just posturing, because no matter what one wants to say about The Kremlin’s support for the separatists at Donetsk, Moscow wasn’t and isn’t about to invade every state in the Balkans which means that NATO’s excuses for stationing heavy artillery in Poland (to cite just one example) and for conducting very public war games that look quite a bit like preparations for a Ukrainian invasion, are largely bogus. 

    Well, now that Washington is scrambling to find the right spin tactic to explain why Russia has done to ISIS in a week what the US hasn’t been able to do in over a year, NATO is now going all-in on the “we’ll defend Turkey” narrative even though i) no one is attacking Turkey, and ii) Ankara is waging a horribly bloody civil war on its own people with NATO’s blessing. Here’s AP:

    NATO talked tough Thursday about Moscow’s expanding military activity in Syria, but the U.S.-led alliance’s chief response to the Russian airstrikes and cruise missile attacks was a public pledge to help reinforce the defenses of member nation Turkey if necessary.

     

    “NATO is able and ready to defend all allies, including Turkey, against any threat,” alliance secretary-general Jens Stoltenberg declared at the onset of a meeting of NATO defense ministers.

     

    The meeting attended by U.S. Defense Secretary Ash Carter and counterparts from NATO’s other 27 countries was overshadowed by concerns about Russia’s recent military actions in Syria. On Wednesday, Russian warships fired a volley of cruise missiles in the first combined air-and-ground assault with Syrian government troops since Moscow began its military campaign in the country last week.

     

    U.S. officials said Thursday that some of those missiles missed their targets and landed in Iran.

     

    Over the weekend, Turkey reported back-to-back violations of its airspace by Russian warplanes.

     

    Stoltenberg said NATO had already increased “our capacity, our ability, our preparedness to deploy forces, including to the south, including in Turkey, if needed.”

     

    However, pressed about what NATO precisely intended to do to aid Turkey, which shares a border with Syria, Stoltenberg told a news conference the mere existence of a beefed-up alliance response force, as well as a new and highly nimble brigade-sized unit able to deploy within 48 hours, may suffice.

     

    “We don’t have to deploy the NATO Response Force or the spearhead force to deliver deterrence,” Stoltenberg said. “The important thing is that any adversary of NATO will know that we are able to deploy.”

    Oh, ok. “Any adversary of NATO will know that we are able to deploy.” Well you know what NATO? You have an “adversary” that doesn’t seem to understand that and they are called “ISIS,” and either you are incapable of eradicating a rogue band of Nike-wearing militants, or else you’re not really trying, and if the latter is the case, then the world needs to start asking serious questions about who the “bad” guys are here. 

    We’ll close with the following from … well, let’s just be honest, from Russia (via RT) and from Maria Zakharova, who is quietly turning into quite the geopolitical powerplayer:

    Vladimir Putin’s press secretary has said that the excuses used by NATO to move its infrastructure to Russian borders were nothing but camouflage and warned that none of such steps would be left unanswered.

     

    “An invented excuse about the suggested threat coming from Russia is possibly just camouflage used to disguise the plans to further expand NATO toward our borders,” RIA Novosti quoted Dmitry Peskov as saying.

     

    “We are talking about a buildup, there have been statements about larger contingent, we are talking about an increase of military presence. And it is military presence practically near the Russian borders,” he said, adding that this project was not new and that it could cause no other feelings but regret.

     

    “Of course, any plans to bring NATO’s military infrastructure closer to the Russian Federation lead to reciprocal steps needed to restore the necessary parity,” Peskov said.

     

    Earlier Thursday, NATO Secretary-General Jens Stoltenberg announced the alliance’s plans to boost its Response Force and set up two more headquarters in Hungary and Slovakia. Stoltenberg admitted that this will be the biggest reinforcement since the end of the Cold War as six more, smaller headquarters had already appeared in Eastern Europe.

     

    Russian Foreign Ministry spokesperson Maria Zakharova commented on NATO’s buildup of forces in Eastern Europe, saying that these steps were not contributing to peace and stability on the continent.

     

    “First of all, we need to hear and understand the position of those who take such actions. They need to tell us about their goals and objectives so that we could comment on them. So far, none of the latest events added stability to the European continent. On the contrary, this stability is being put in jeopardy,” Zakharova said.

  • The Stock Market Rally… To Nowhere

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    Has Consumer Confidence Peaked?

    The latest reading of consumer confidence (103 for September) was a bit of head-scratcher. With the market in the midst of a 10% correction, layoffs rising, job, wage growth stalling, and China on the verge of implosion, how could confidence rise? 

    While the media, and the Federal Reserve, focus on lifting asset prices to spur consumer confidence, as I discussed previously, such actions have relatively little impact on the vast majority of American's currently. However, there is a very high correlation between actual economic activity and consumer's confidence as shown in the chart below.

    Consumer-Confidence-GDP-100715

    This should not be a surprise since consumers drive roughly 70% of economic growth. When the economy slows down enough to curtail consumer actions, confidence will once again drop. 

    For investors, however, the question of the relationship between confidence and market behavior is more important. The chart below shows consumer confidence as compared to the S&P 500 index.

    Consumer-Confidence-SP500-100715

    Sharp contractions in confidence have historically been coincident with sharp declines in the market and the onset of economic recessions. Currently, the decline in the market has not resulted, yet, in a decline in confidence as only a small portion of the economic makeup has been affected by the drop. Furthermore, the drop in the markets has not been dramatic or sustained long enough to break the "hope" of a continued "bull market."

    However, if we look at the annual rate of change in the S&P 500 as compared to confidence, a potential warning signal emerges. 

    Consumer-Confidence-SP500-2-100715

    Declines in the rate of change of the financial markets have generally preceded more marked declines in confidence as well as economic activity. Due to the rapid onset of the recession and market decline in 2008, the declines in both measures were more coincident.  

    Currently, the annual rate of change in market performance has been declining since the beginning of 2014 when the Federal Reserve began extracting excess liquidity from the financial markets. This suggests that the current levitation of confidence will likely be transient unless market performance begins to reaccelerate. 

    While there is indeed a correlation between rising asset prices and consumer confidence, the relationship between confidence and economic activity is significantly more important. With the recent decline in asset prices, a slowdown in economic activity in the quarters ahead will likely have a bigger impact on confidence than currently anticipated. 

    GDP Forecasts Remain Weak

    The Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta publishes a weekly, "real-time" look at the economy in their GDPNow economic forecast model. As shown below, the model, currently forecasts a significantly weaker 3rd quarter GDP than even the most bearish current consensus estimate.

    GDP-Now-100715

    This is important because it confirms the Chicago Fed National Activity Index (CFNAI) which, as I have discussed in the past, is the single most important, and overlooked, economic number. To wit:

    "And of all the indicators I've tested, the CFNAI has the best track record of forecasting future GDP. Since 1980 the CFNAI has explained roughly 40% of the variation in the following quarter's GDP, an extremely high proportion for a single indicator.

     

    To assess that predictive capability I have created a second 4-panel chart with the four CFNAI subcomponents compared to the four most common economic reports of Industrial Production, Employment, Housing Starts and Personal Consumption Expenditures. For comparative purposes I used the annual percentage change for each of the four components."

    CFNAI-4-Panel-Chart-100715

    "The correlation between the CFNAI subcomponents and the underlying major economic reports do show some very high correlations. This is why, even though this indicator gets very little attention, it is very representative of the broader economy."

    Importantly, as with the GDPNow indicator, the CFNAI is showing that the economy is running weaker than headlines have suggested.

    Despite Central Bank interventions, suppressed interest rates, and a surging stock market, the economy has failed to gain any significant traction. This is an anomaly that we can also see in the CFNAI data.

    If we break the CFNAI down into a "supply" and "demand" model we see a very interesting, and telling, picture emerge.

    CFNAI-Supply-Demand-10071515

    As shown the supply side of the index has historically had an extremely high correlation to the demand side. That ended with the financial crisis. Since then the supply components have far outpaced the actual underlying demand in the economy. This goes a long way to explaning the ongoing weakness in economic growth as the lack of aggregate demand continues to weigh on labor and wage growth. 

    Until demand rises to a level strong enough to absorb the existing supply, economic growth will continue to "muddle" along. 

    Stock Market Rally To….Nowhere?

    This past Tuesday, I discussed the potential for a short-term rally in the market stating:

     "As you can see, the markets did retest the late August lows, and when combined with the very oversold conditions, led to a frantic 'short covering' rally back to previous resistance. It is worth noting that the recent market action is very similar to that of the August decline and initial rebound as well."

    SP500-TechnicalUpdate-100715

    Importantly, while the market has rallied back to its previous resistance levels, it has also become extremely overbought once again as well. This suggests that a bulk of the rally from the lows is complete, and investors should continue to "fade rallies" until a more bullish trend resumes.

    However, for that more "bullish" outlook to take root, the market will need to rise above 2060 currently. The problem will be the strong level of resistance provided by the two long-term moving averages that have only crossed during more severe market corrections. 

    With a large number of technical indicators currently suggesting that the easiest path for prices is downward, investors should remain cautious of overly aggressive exposure in the short-term. If the market is still confined within a more "bearish" trend, the current rally, like the ones that preceded it, will be a "rally to nowhere."

    Just something to think about.

  • Spoofer Complains About Spoofing, Is Ignored, Starts Spoofing, Gets Busted

    In light of Blackrock’s Hillary Clinton’s sudden interest in taming high frequency trading and imposing a fee on order cancellations, something we have said is imperative ever since 2009 and now is far too late to make a difference, it is worth highlighting that just today the SEC cracked down on yet another spoofing mastermind, no not Citadel, but another “basement” trader, Eric Oscher, 47, a former NYSE specialist and his firm Briargate Trading (an anagram of Arbitrage), who were busted earlier today for making the gargantuan profit of $525,000.

    While the argumentation in the complaint is by now familiar to most  – someone spoofs a given stock or index, then quickl takes the other side, and cancels the spoofing order –  there are three very notable items in this latest crackdown on said spoofing “mastermind.”

    The first explains why in a market in which volumes are contracting at a record pace, and where liquidity is so scarce flash crashes have become a virtually daily event, exchanges continue to proliferate like weeds. The reason is because spoofers like Oscher use one exchange in which they “telegraph” their spoof orders, they use another exchange in which to take the opposite side of the trade thus leaving no readily available trail of evidence exposing their conduct.

    This is how the SEC explains it:

    • The Imbalance Messages Begin: At 8:30 a.m., the NYSE sent the first Imbalance Message for stocks expected to open with an imbalance (buy or sell). The NYSE continued to send Imbalance Messages with increasing frequency until the open of each stock; by 9:20 a.m., Imbalance Messages
      were sent every 15 seconds.
    • The Entry of the Non-Bona Fide Orders: Between 8:30 a.m. and the NYSE open, Oscher typically placed non-bona fide orders on the NYSE in securities that the Imbalance Messages identified as having large order imbalances. Oscher’s non-bona fide orders were reflected in the next Imbalance Message for that stock. Oscher’s non-bona fide orders often impacted the price of the stock on other exchanges. For example, for a NYSE-listed stock with a sell imbalance, Oscher’s non-bona fide buy orders reduced the sell imbalance and increased the price of that stock on other exchanges.
    • Briargate Obtains Positions on Other Exchanges: After Oscher placed spoof orders for a stock on the NYSE (but before cancelling them); Briargate also traded the same stock on the opposite side of the market on other exchanges. For example, if Oscher placed a non-bona fide buy order, Briargate generally sold the same stock short on other exchanges. Doing so often allowed Briargate and Oscher to take advantage of any price change on other exchanges following Oscher’s non-bona fide orders on the NYSE.
    • The Cancellation of the Non-Bona Fide Orders: Next, Oscher cancelled the non-bona fide orders on the NYSE prior to the open. This had the effect of changing the imbalance minutes before the stock opened on the NYSE and typically reversed the effect the non-bona fide orders had on the stock’s price.
    • Briargate Unwinds its Position on Other Exchanges: To complete the spoofing scheme, Briargate’s last step was to liquidate its position in that same stock on other exchanges. Briargate was typically flat by the end of the stock’s opening auction on the NYSE.

    The key phrase here is “on other exchanges” which explains precisely why HFTs are in love with the idea of an infinite number of lit exchanges, as well as dark ATS, which they can latency arbitrage to generate the highest profits. None of this has anything to do with providing liquidity – it has everything to do with maximizing collocation efficiency which exchanges gladly sell to HFTs for a hefty fee, a fee which the HFTs then more than promptly make up in perfectly legal frontrunning of slower orders courtesy of Reg NMS.

    * * *

    As an aside, here is how the SEC explains why spoofing is illegal:

    During the Relevant Period, Oscher placed and cancelled non-bona fide orders in 242 instances with an average aggregate size of approximately 200,000 shares. These orders impacted the Imbalance Message that other traders received through their NYSE data feeds. Unlike other traders that viewed the Imbalance Message, Respondents knew that the changes in the Imbalance Message resulting from their non-bona fide orders were artificial. In nearly every instance that Oscher placed non-bona fide orders in the NYSE pre-market, Respondents placed profitable trades in the same stocks, but on the opposite side of the market, from their non-bona fide orders. In total, Respondents derived approximately $525,000 in profits from trading stocks in which they placed non-bona fide orders during the Relevant Period.

     

    Respondents benefited from non-bona fide orders that brought about an artificial change in the NYSE Imbalance Messages, and in the prices of the same securities on other exchanges. Respondents profited from this manipulative trading by sending orders on the opposite side of the market, which were executed on the other exchanges or the NYSE. Respondents traded in these stocks across multiple Briargate accounts.

     

    Oscher did not intend to execute the non-bona fide orders he placed during the NYSE pre-market trading. Respondents had no legitimate economic purpose to engage in trading involving non-bona fide orders.

     

    Respondents knew that these orders affected the Imbalance Message and impacted the same stock’s best bid and best offer on other exchanges. Despite this knowledge, Respondents took advantage of the artificial change in the Imbalance Message to trade the same securities at artificial prices on the opposite side of the market on other exchanges and on the NYSE.

    The violation in question:

    Briargate and Oscher violated Section 9(a)(2) of the Exchange Act, which makes it unlawful “to effect, alone or with one or more other persons, a series of transactions in any security . . . creating actual or apparent active trading in such security, or raising or depressing the price of such security, for the purpose of inducing the purchase or sale of such security by others.”

    Clearly this Section has an exemption when the “respondent” is Chicago hedge fund Citadel acting under advisement of the New York Federal Reserve when the mandate is a very simple one: spoof the S&P higher, without ever taking the other side of the trade.

    * * *

    But the second, and far more entertaining part of the complaint against Oscher is the following:

    Briargate’s inter-market arbitrage trading strategy depended in part on its ability to predict the opening price of a security on the NYSE. Beginning in 2009, Briargate believed there were instances where other market participants placed what Briargate believed were non-bona fide orders that were then canceled during pre-market trading. As a result, Briargate began to doubt the integrity of the information in the Imbalance Message.

     

    After identifying these concerns about other market participants’ conduct, Briargate complained to the NYSE that other market participants were engaging in manipulative conduct involving large cancelled orders. For example, in the spring of 2011, Briargate complained to the NYSE that the data feeds provided by the NYSE were “susceptible to manipulation where parties look to gain advantage by entering non bona fide orders to entice others to trade.”

    He got not reply so starting in 2011 “Oscher used his Briargate account to place large, non-bona fide orders.” Or, as they say, if you can’t beat them, join them… which is precisely what Oscher did.

    So to summarize: a veteran NYSE specialist noticed manipulation in the NYSE market open Imbalance, loudly complained to the NYSE, was ignored, then decided to profit from said manipulation himself… and got busted. 

    Come to think of it, that almost exactly what happened to Nav Sarao.

    * * *

    But the third, and surely funniest, part of this whole story is that the name Eric Oscher is not new to this website, but one has to dig far back to track him down… all the way back to our September 2010 post explaining “Why Nobody Trades During Regular Hours Any More (And How Prop Funds Just Stop Trading When Volatility Spikes).” This is what we said over 5 years ago:

    Why Nobody Trades During Regular Hours Any More

     

    For those who follow our periodic updates on intraday stock volume, today’s article by the Wall Street Journal which focuses on the dramatic decline in activity during regular working hours will come as no surprise. In a piece looking at prop trading shop Briargate (oh so witty anagram of arbitrage), founded by several former NYSE specialists, we learn that at least one firm (and likely many more) now no longer does any trading during the hours of 11 to 2. As this creates a feedback loop of inactivity, pretty soon the core of daily stock market activity will merely be the half an hour of action at the open, and the dark pool-ETF-open exchange rebalance at the very close, with everything inbetween deemed obsolete. Of course, what this will do, is create even more volatility in trading, force an even greater decline in stock trading volumes (and pain for Wall Street firms), and a further divergence between stocks and fundamentals, as momentum trading gains an even more prominent role in determine “price discovery.”

    From the WSJ:

    On the day the “flash crash” bludgeoned the stock market and chaos swept over the floor of the New York Stock Exchange, the founders of Briargate Trading were at the movies.

     

    Rick Oscher and Steven Rubinstein weren’t playing hooky. Briargate, a proprietary-trading firm that the two former NYSE floor “specialist” traders started in 2008, is mostly active at the stock market’s open and close.

     

    In between, when market activity typically drops, the Wall Street veterans play tennis in Central Park, take leisurely lunches, visit their children’s schools and work out at the gym. Dress shoes have been replaced with flip-flops, slacks with cargo shorts. Once during market hours, they walked about five miles and crossed the Brooklyn Bridge to try Grimaldi’s pizza.

     

    “We actually planned on working a full day,” says Mr. Oscher, wearing a white polo shirt and blue-plaid shorts. “But from 11 to 2, the markets are pretty quiet—what’s the point? As a specialist, you have to stand in your spot all day and we did that for 20 years.”

     

    Briargate—an anagram of “arbitrage”—isn’t the only firm taking an extended recess during the 6½-hour U.S. trading day. Trading has become increasingly concentrated in the first and last hours of the session.

     

    Those two hours now make up more than half of the entire day’s trading volume, according to an analysis of data provided by Thomson Reuters. In August, the first and last hour generated nearly 58% of New York Stock Exchange primary volume, up from 45% in August 2005, the analysis shows. The rise of high-frequency trading, where algorithms are used to exploit small discrepancies in high-volume situations, amplifies the concentration of trading at the beginning and end of the day, analysts say.

     

    Heavy trading in the first hour is largely due to the accumulation of orders placed by individual investors and their brokers after the previous day’s close, mutual-fund activity and new strategies deployed by institutional investors based on the latest research and overseas trading, says Adam Sussman, director of research at Tabb Group, a financial-markets research firm. Meanwhile, funds that track stock indexes often wait until the final hour to execute trades to better reflect the benchmark measures’ last prices.

     

    Focusing trading on those times could limit gains, but Messrs. Oscher and Rubinstein are at peace with that. “Would you rather play tennis or make an extra $80? It’s a lifestyle question,” says Mr. Rubinstein, who sometimes works remotely from Florida. “I can go play 18 holes of golf and then come back and trade and that’s a workday.”

    As for how this strategy of avoiding “noise” trading is working out, the answer is – apparently not too bad. Which can only mean that many more lazy copycats will soon emerge.

    While the firm declined to disclose their returns, Messrs. Rubinstein and Oscher say they make more than they did in their later, leaner years as specialists, though not as much as they did in the late 1990s before the industry started to consolidate.

    Oh and remember that selective “HFT Off” switch pulled during the flash crash? The same that many HFTs said is what helped them avoid massive losses (and which makes all their statements of providing liquidity moot)? It shows up again, this time helping Briargate avoid losses. We are confident all retail investors and readers will be able to stop trading at precisely the right moment as well (in addition to selling all their holdings at the very top of the bear market rally).

    Mr. Oscher said the firm, which trades only its own money, hedges its risks “so there isn’t any scenario that would move our profit and loss beyond boundaries of comfort.” Briargate says it didn’t sustain losses during the May 6 flash crash because it closes its books when the market tends to be volatile. “We actually had a pretty good day,” Mr. Oscher says.

    Indeed, with everyone not only not trading between 11 and 2, but completely shutting down when vol passes a threshold, someone please remind us what the Chicago School of Fraud case for an efficient stock market was again?

    That was a useful flashback because it explains not only why Messrs. Rubinstein and Oscher “made more than they did in their years as specialists”, but also why “Briargate didn’t sustain losses during the May 6 flash crash” and had a pretty good day.

    The good news for Mr. Oscher, now that his whole life has gone done the toilet,  will be able to play 18 holes of golf all day after day.And just like that, one more spoofing “mastermind” is gone. As for the real spoofing “manipulators of scale”, the Citadels of the world, don’t worry: they are untouchable until the market suffers its final crash. At that point the HFTs, from the favorite technology of the pro-cyclical status quo, will become the culprit on which everything will be blamed.

  • John Boehner To Stay On As Speaker After All, Fox Reports

    As The GOP lurches from turmoil to chaos, following speaker-in-waiting McCarthy's pulling out, Fox News' Bret Baier reports that Speaker John Boehner has agreed to stay on as Speaker – not just until the Caucus nominates someone – but, until that person can confirm 218 votes on the House floor (needed to take the Speaker’s gavel).

     

     

    As Fox News Bret Baier reports,

    Having Talked to several senior aides on Capitol Hill  (along with Chris Stirewalt and his sources on the Hill tied to the leadership) here is the picture that is beginning to form.

     

    Speaker John Boehner has agreed to stay on as Speaker–not just until the Caucus nominates someone –but, until that person can confirm 218 votes on the House floor (needed to take the Speaker’s gavel).  Short of that – Boehner will stay on for the rest of this Congress and steer legislation that is pending.

     

    What does this mean?   Moderates and leadership types are cheering and saying Boehner is the only one they will support.   Conservatives will go ballistic since they know this signals that Boehner will make ALL kinds of deals to get big ticket legislation through the House even if it means using Democrats votes to do it.

     

    The news… short of another candidate that can get 218 votes (and that looks like a long shot with leadership and moderates lining up behind Boehner)

     

    Looks like he may be here to stay to handle the very tough debt ceiling and next CR.

    *  *  *

    Perhaps The Pope spoke to him again?

  • Do You See What Happens, Alcoa, When Your "Restructuring" Non-GAAP Addbacks Tumble

    Moments ago, the company that traditionally kicks off earnings season did just that, and sent the ball into a throw in. The reason: just like all the other companies that have reported and pre-reported so far in the third quarter, its results were a huge miss: AA reported non-GAAP EPS of $0.07 missing expectations of $0.13, on revenues of $5.57 billion, a 10% drop Y/Y, also missing top-line estimates of $5.75.

    And while the company did have some justifications for the collapse, blaming what else but China…

    In China, Alcoa lowered its estimate for 2015 automotive production growth to up 1 to 2 percent, from up 5 to 8 percent; reduced its projection for 2015 heavy duty truck and trailer production growth to down 22 to 24 percent, from down 14 to 16 percent; reduced its 2015 commercial building and construction sales growth to up 4 to 6 percent from up 6 to 8 percent; and kept its 2015 packaging estimate unchanged at up 8 to 12 percent.

    … the real culprit is none of that. Because, as regular readers know very well, with Alcoa it is all about the Non-GAAP addbacks…. and the problem here is that while in previous quarters Alcoa’s “restructuring” charges were vast, usually eclipsing the actual GAAP earnings number, in Q3 they tumbled to “only” $66 million – the lowest since March 2013.

    They are shown as follows:

     

    Because that $0.07 EPS, that was non-GAAP. On a GAAP basis, Alcoa generated a paltry $44 million in Net Income, down 70% from a year ago, which translates into 2 cents per share.

    And just to show what Alcoa’s true EPS picture looks like, now that its restructuring charge “addbacks” are finally grinding to a halt, in the past year, GAAP Net Income was just $538 million. What about non-GAAP net income: more than double that or $1.154 billion. And that’s why, as Alcoa’s Non-GAAP myth is about to collapse into the company’s GAAP reality, its P/E is about to double… just as the company’s topline is tumbling.

  • "Market-Watching" Fed Watches Market Surge After Fearing Market Purge

    Having admitted that markets' drop played a key role in their decision-making process, the reflexivity of Central Bankers be like…

    And to the outside world…

     

    This will help to explain the stock market…

    Welcome to The Farce… Dow +1050 Points off payrolls lows…

     

    Stocks are the most overbought since the epic Bullard ramp from October 2014…

     

    As The S&P pushes back to unchanged post-QE3…

    *  *  *

    This is what happened after the dovish FOMC Minutes…

     

    Futures were weak overnight as China opened notably below expectations…

     

    Leaving stocks all higher for the day (note early decoupling between Nasdaq and rest)…

     

    The epic ramp continues to extend off the payrolls lows… just look at Small Caps!!

     

    VIX fat-fingered in its usual "Signalling" way after FOMC Minutes…

     

    The S&P broke above its 50-day moving average (and the figure 2000) as the post-FOMC Minutes buying frenmzy took hold… (and Dow tops 17k)

     

    The S&P 500 is now above Goldman, BofA year-end revised price targets of 2000. Time to revise them higher again…

    Since The September FOMC Statement, bonds & bullion remain the winners but stocks jerked up to near them today…

     

    Treasury yields surged once again today (after an initial rally/drop in yields after FOMC Minutes)…

     

    The USD slipped most of the day (led by AUD strength), then dumped and pumped on the FOMC Minutes…

     

    Commodities were very volatile today with crude and silver trading somewhat chaotically…

     

    Crude ramped back to yesterday's highs on OPEC comments about demand

     

    And silver was dumped and dumped and pumped and dumped…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

    Bonus Chart: We now know what happened to the record short-interest…

     

  • "I'm Not Here To Beg You To Open Your F##king Eyes"

    Submitted by Thad Beversdorf via FirstRebuttal.com,

    So I’m often asked whether I really believe that government and policymakers intentionally create laws and policies that hurt the people and help themselves.  My answer is typically that

    “if you’re asking me this question you know I do but you don’t believe me; so either do your own research or continue to live in the world as you wish to perceive it.  I’m not here to beg you to open your fucking eyes”.

    I started this blog about 18 months ago and I have chosen to provide my research with no income attached to it.  It means I have no axe but the truth.  I spent 13 years in major international banks and have been on both sides of the double edged sword that makes the financial services sector a place to reap riches and also to be thrown to the wolves.  That is, I am intimately familiar with the system.  That said, what I’ve discovered is that really very little effort is required to see the world for what it is.

    The closest analogy is probably best left to Orwell with Animal Farm.  Humans around the world have been molded to believe they are part of a system to enable them to get ahead.  While some do manage to find a path that has substantial monetary rewards the vast majority (and growing) have, whether they realise it or not, succumb to a role of Boxer, the cart-horse.

    That is, our lives revolve around putting in 8 to 10 hours of labour each day for which we receive enough to feed ourselves and our families, have a warm place to sleep and some of us are able to obtain some credit from which we can enjoy things like new cars every few years (while rarely actually owning them).  However, in terms of reaping rewards we sew, it is simply not reality.  The current system has a clear economic hierarchy which began taking shape centuries ago in Europe.  The problem which seems to exist is that people are willing to look at a calendar, see that it’s Thursday but believe almost any (false) figure of authority who says it’s Wednesday.  Let me give you an example.

    The official’s unemployment figure is now down to 4.9%.  However, the U3 unemployment calculation, which is the one touted in mainstream media, excludes anyone unemployed that has not looked for work in the last 4 weeks.  That’s right, so if you don’t have a job but you looked for a job 3.5 weeks ago then you are considered unemployed.  However, if you are unemployed and haven’t looked for a job in 4.5 weeks you are no longer considered unemployed, you simply no longer exist according to the U3 figure.  The result is that after 4 weeks of not looking you fall off the radar and the U3 figure goes down.  Wonderful metric eh?

    In order to see if people falling off the radar have found work or simply no longer exist we can look to labour force.  When we do it becomes clear that while U3 is moving down so too is labour force.

    Screen Shot 2015-10-08 at 10.05.21 AM

    This means people are not finding work they simply disappear out of the labour force and so no longer exist according to the unemployment figure we all follow.

    Looking at the U3 chart we find another interesting pattern.

    Screen Shot 2015-10-08 at 8.45.22 AM

    Notice that there does not appear to be a steady state of ‘full employment’.  That is, unemployment declines until it explodes higher into a recession.  So the argument that simply appealing to the U3 figure as a forward looking gauge is nonsense.  Currently we are in the second longest pattern of decline (peak to trough) without entering a recession.  This is concerning because all hard indicators are now showing recession.  So in this sense the historical U3 figure too is signaling we are overdue for a recession.

    But isn’t it just easier to accept whatever meme of happiness is being disseminated by those in charge?  Well let me bring this back to Animal Farm.  We are sold the American dream.  We are told the market is at all time highs and are led to believe that means Americans are doing fine.  We are told to continue to do our part to keep America strong and that means get out there and buy stuff and if it’s debt you need to do so well then it’s debt you shall have!  As long as you have stuff you should be happy.

    And this continuous message of “you are doing just fine but if you’re not, well everyone else is so it must just be you” prevents most of us from even attempting to explore the truth. For what if it is just me that is failing??  I surely wouldn’t want to expose myself as not keeping up.  But the real message is there in the background.

    Screen Shot 2015-10-08 at 9.23.09 AM

    While the Pigs whisper words of encouragement into your ear their real message sits ever so faintly behind the facts.  The truth so very clearly is that we have become nothing more than Boxer, the cart-horse for whom the Pigs recognize must be kept warm with belly full but beyond that all equity from your labour and all profits from your debt will go to them.   Remember true capitalism has a natural relationship between profit and labour, but our existing policies have nothing to do with capitalism. Our policies are designed by the Pigs for the Pigs.  Why can we not see that??  It’s right there, now in front of you, have a look.  Stare at it for a moment and contemplate the implications if what I’m saying is true.

    So continue to accept that unemployment is 4.9%, continue to accept a Fed manipulated all time high market indicates American workers are strong, continue to accept that 30 years of debt inflated GDP defines economic prosperity, continue to ignore the furnished facts and continue to accept the lies from the Pigs and you will continue to forge the chains of which your grandchildren will wear.  And while I recognize this all sounds very dramatic I expect you haven’t seen nothing yet.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 8, 2015

  • Syrian Crisis: What Will Happen Next?

    Submitted by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    The Syrian crisis and the confluence of clashing interests there was entirely predictable. In fact, I wrote an article on my former website in 2010 outlining the potential for Syria as a high value catalyst for global conflict titled “Will Globalists Trigger Yet Another World War?”

    In it, I summarized the dubious history of wars initiated over the past century, including the nature of false flags and false paradigms created by globalists designed to divide nations and peoples and turn them against each other. This strategy of engineered war (along with engineered economic collapse) has been used time and time again by the elites to artificially generate chaos and then consolidate and centralize power while the masses are blinded by confusion.

    Even back then, the problem with Syria seemed obvious:

    "…We have a nuclear armed Israel itching to attack Iran. We have Iran engaged in a defense pact with Syria against Israel. We have Syria with Russian navy bases and weapons on its soil, and we have the U.S. rampaging through the Middle East encroaching on the borders of Pakistan and Yemen, essentially pissing off everyone. What we have is a Globalist made recipe for disaster, using the same ingredients they have used for the last several major wars…"

    Only a year after I published the piece the civil uprising in Syria began, starting with the “Daraa protest movement”, aided by covert intelligence agencies including the CIA.

    In 2012, I decided to reexamine my original theory on Syria as a global catalyst in my article “Syria And Iran Dominoes Lead To World War.”

    In that article, I felt it was necessary to summarize trends in the region, where they might lead, and how globalists might exploit each scenario to achieve a false conflict between East and West. I predicted that the entire Syrian insurgency was conjured out of the ether by NATO interests, due to the suspicious nature of the Council On Foreign Relations and their public statements suddenly SUPPORTING Al-Qaida in Syria. U.S. involvement in the funding and training of the organization we now know as ISIS (or al-Qaida 2.0) has been proven.

    I predicted that U.S. ground troops would enter Syria. This has happened, though the U.S. government maintains that their role and numbers will be “limited.”

    I suggested that once U.S. troops were deployed in any capacity in the region, Iran would join forces with the Syrian government under their already existing mutual defense pact. Today, Iranian troops are entering Syria en masse for combat operations.

    I also predicted that U.S. involvement in Syria would eventually elicit a military response from Russia and a financial response from China. Though China has not yet used the conflict as an excuse to accelerate the dumping of U.S. treasuries, Russia is now fully committed to airstrikes and is preparing a ground invasion, possibly exceeding 150,000 troops.

    Some developments I suggested in my previous articles have not yet surfaced, though I believe there is more than enough momentum for them to be triggered. For instance, I believe Israel is still the ultimate wild card in the Syrian crisis. A military response from Israel is more than possible, particularly against Iran in retaliation for flooding into the region. Further U.S. involvement, including the greater commitment of major naval assets, is likely. And if the U.S. or Israel escalate, I believe Iran will shut down the Strait of Hormuz, perhaps even with the aid of Russia.

    Russian President Vladimir Putin has hinted that Israeli activity in Syrian airspace will be obstructed, and reports of some “near misses” between Russian and Israeli fighters have surfaced.

    Currently, U.S. “relations” with Russia are at lows not seen since the Cold War. In the meantime, the globalists have created a perfect storm of conflicting interests that could very well lead to outright world war. That said, there are different brands of warfare. And, as I pointed out five years ago, the elites do not necessarily need the threat of nuclear war to open the door to collapse.

    Economic warfare would be just as devastating to many parts of the globe and the U.S. in particular, causing massive population reduction through starvation in the span of a few months while leaving large areas of infrastructure intact. Economic warfare is also a perfect distraction of the public eye away from the crimes of international financiers. Our fiscal structure is already in the middle of an implosion set in motion by deliberately destructive central banking policies. But in the midst of economic warfare, such monetary atrocities can simply be blamed on “the treachery of the East.”  The Syrian debacle makes an economic battle scenario between East and West "believable" for many people around the world.

    Still, wider regional warfare of the shooting variety is certainly guaranteed in the near future.

    Saudi Arabia has denounced Russian and Iranian involvement in Syria and has increased support to “moderate rebels.” Of course, as we have seen repeatedly in the past couple of years, there are in fact NO moderates in Syria as rebel groups continue to obtain Western money and weapons and then join the ranks of ISIS.

    The Saudis have made it clear that they will never accept a situation in which the Assad regime continues to hold power in Syria. They have threatened a military response in the event that Assad gains superiority over the insurgency. Keep in mind that the Saudis have already committed forces to Yemen.

    Tensions are also increasing between Saudi Arabia and Iran over Syrian involvement, despite recent Saudi support for the U.S./Iran nuclear deal. The European Council On Foreign Relations has warned that there are now no “mediators for deescalation” in the region. Of course, this is exactly the way they prefer it.

    Turkey is also now a factor, with Turkish officials claiming airspace violations by Russia, and Turkish forces operating in at least a limited capacity in Syria and Iraq.  Syria is a gasoline soaked mess and there are too many potential sparks to keep track of.  The globalists have conjured an environment in which a disastrous domino effect is almost guaranteed.

    Another rather unexpected consequence of the Syrian crisis is the now active effort by the elites to initiate a Cloward-Piven strategy using so-called Syrian "refugees" to destabilize the EU and perhaps even the U.S.  Already, the suggested immigration count for such refugees, many of whom are not even from Syria, has risen from 10,000 bound for the U.S. to 100,000.  I believe as the crisis continues to grow this number will be increased to 1 million refugees or more bound for the U.S.  Expect many extremist elements to be shipped into our borders along with them.

    It is absolutely imperative to remember regardless of what happens next, almost every element of this crisis has been staged. War and economic despair are the ultimate expedient world-changing tools. They wipe the slate nearly clean, as it were, and mold public perception through fear. That which you thought impossible today becomes rather reasonable tomorrow after crisis takes hold; and this includes the final deconstruction of constitutional values, the militarization of our society, the loss of financial prosperity, the extreme degradation of living standards and the ultimate centralization of everything.

    It is also important to realize that there are no sides in this conflict. The East/West paradigm is a sham of epic proportions and always has been. False sides are meant to distract and bewilder the public. They are designed to create counterfeit cross-sections of blame. They are an anathema to truth.

    For further and deeper analysis on possible future developments on a global scale please read my articles “The Economic End Game Explained” and “Has America Been Set Up As History’s Ultimate Bumbling Villain?”

    The question today is merely one of timing. How long before a negative trigger is introduced? How long before Israeli planes come into contact with Russian or Iranian fighters? How long before U.S. troops come into contact with Russian troops? How long before Israel or Saudi Arabia strike Iran? And if the U.S. backs out completely, how long before the entire dynamic of the Middle East is flipped and America loses petro-status for the dollar? With the speed of events forming a fiscal-political riptide, it is hard to imagine we will be waiting very long to find out.

  • St. Louis Prepares For "Catastrophic Event" As Underground Fire Nears Nuclear Waste Cache

    Beneath the surface of a St. Louis-area landfill lurk two things that should never meet: a slow-burning fire and a cache of Cold War-era nuclear waste, separated by no more than 1,200 feet.

    As AP reports,

    Government officials have quietly adopted an emergency plan in case the smoldering embers ever reach the waste, a potentially “catastrophic event” that could send up a plume of radioactive smoke over a densely populated area near the city’s main airport.

     

    Although the fire at Bridgeton Landfill has been burning since at least 2010, the plan for a worst-case scenario was developed only a year ago and never publicized until this week, when St. Louis radio station KMOX first obtained a copy.

    But don't panic, as officials say it is "contained"…

    County Executive Steve Stenger cautioned that the plan “is not an indication of any imminent danger.”

     

    “It is county government’s responsibility to protect the health, safety and well-being of all St. Louis County residents,” he said in a statement.

     

    Landfill operator Republic Services downplayed any risk. Interceptor wells — underground structures that capture below-surface gasses — and other safeguards are in place to keep the fire and the nuclear waste separate.

     

    “County officials and emergency managers have an obligation to plan for various scenarios, even very remote ones,” landfill spokesman Russ Knocke said in a statement. The landfill “is safe and intensively monitored.”

    The cause of the fire is unknown. For years, the most immediate concern has been an odor created by the smoldering. Republic Services is spending millions of dollars to ease or eliminate the smell by removing concrete pipes that allowed the odor to escape and installing plastic caps over parts of the landfill.

    Directly next to Bridgeton Landfill is West Lake Landfill, also owned by Republic Services. The West Lake facility was contaminated with radioactive waste from uranium processing by a St. Louis company known as Mallinckrodt Chemical. The waste was illegally dumped in 1973 and includes material that dates back to the Manhattan Project, which created the first atomic bomb in the 1940s.

    The Environmental Protection Agency is still deciding how to clean up the waste. The landfill was designated a Superfund site in 1990.

    The proximity of the two environmental hazards is what worries residents and environmentalists. At the closest point, they are 1,000 to 1,200 feet apart.

    If the underground fire reaches the waste, “there is a potential for radioactive fallout to be released in the smoke plume and spread throughout the region,” according to the disaster plan.

    The plan calls for evacuations and development of emergency shelters, both in St. Louis County and neighboring St. Charles County. Private and volunteer groups, and perhaps the federal government, would be called upon to help, depending on the severity of the emergency.

    No reports of illness have been linked to the nuclear waste. But the smell caused by the underground burning is often so foul that Missouri Attorney General Chris Koster sued Republic Services in 2013, alleging negligent management and violation of state environmental laws. The case is scheduled to go to trial in March.

    Last month, Koster said he was troubled by new reports about the site. One found radiological contamination in trees outside the landfill’s perimeter. Another showed evidence that the fire has moved past two rows of interceptor wells and closer to the nuclear waste.

     

    Koster said the reports were evidence that Republic Services “does not have this site under control.” Republic Services responded by accusing the state of intentionally exacerbating “public angst and confusion.”

     

    Ed Smith of the Missouri Coalition for the Environment said he would like to see the county become even more involved “to ensure that businesses, schools, hospitals and individuals know how to respond in a possible disaster at the landfill, just like preparing for an earthquake or tornado.”

    Underground smoldering is not unheard of, especially in abandoned coal mines. Common causes include lightning strikes, forest fires and illegal burning of waste.

    At least 98 underground mine fires in nine states were burning in 2013, according to the Office of Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement.

    Few underground fires can match one in Centralia, Pennsylvania. In 1962, a huge pile of trash in the town dump, near a coal mine, was set on fire, and it has burned beneath the town for more than half a century.

  • Caught On Tape: Russian Warships Launch 26 Cruise Missiles At ISIS Targets

    On Monday evening, we detailed the Russian hardware being used in Moscow’s campaign to rout anti-regime forces and restore the government of Bashar al-Assad in Syria. 

    As we noted in our preface to that feature, “watching Russia effectively humiliate the West by bragging day in and day out is nothing if it’s not amusing, and indeed the leaked diplomatic cable from 2006 which outlines Washington’s intent to effectively start a civil war in Syria leaves one completely uninclined to be at all sympathetic to the ridiculous situation the US and its allies have found themselves in.”

    That, along with the fact that Western nations like France are not only unwiling to admit that the West’s participation in Syria has been an outright disaster, but are now set to “correct” a refugee crisis by bombing the very place from which the refugees are fleeing leaves us inclined to highlight the following video (out today from the Russian Defense Ministry) that shows what happens when a military superpower decides that because an existing aerial campaign has become akin to shooting fish in a barrel, it might be time to do some sea-based target practice on a few Nike-wearing, black flag-waving jihadists…

    From RT:

    Russia’s Defense Ministry has published a video of its warships firing cruise missiles from the Caspian Sea to hit the positions of Islamic State militants in Syria.

     

    “[Last] night the ship strike group of the Russian Navy, consisting of the Dagestan missile ship, the small-sized missile ships Grad Sviyazhsk, Uglich and Veliky Ustyug launched cruise missiles against ISIS infrastructural facilities in Syria from the assigned district of the Caspian Sea,” the ministry said in a comment under the video.

     

    According to the ministry, the Russian military attack was conducted “by high-precision ship missile systems Kalibr NK, the cruise missiles of which engaged all the assigned targets successfully and with high accuracy.”

     

    On September 30, Russia launched its military operation against Islamic State at the request of the Syrian government. Since the start of the operation the Russian military have destroyed at least 112 objects, including commanding pints, ammunition depots and armored vehicles belonging to jihadists.

  • Time To End Monetary Central Planning

    Submitted by Richard Ebeling via EpicTimes.com,

    There is no way to describe current Federal Reserve policy other than as monetary confusion and misdirection. In a nutshell, Janet Yellen and the other members of the Fed’s Board of Governors have no idea what to do. Do they raise certain interest rates over which they have some direct influence? Do they keep them at their current rock bottom levels, as they have for the last six years?

    On the one hand, government measured unemployment levels have fallen from their high of over 10 percent at the depth of the recent recession to 5.1 percent in September 2015.

    However, there is an alternative measure of unemployment also calculated by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. It includes not only those currently unemployed and looking for work during the previous four weeks, but also “discourage workers” who have stopped looking for jobs who would be interested in working if they found a suitable employment; and those who are part-time who would prefer to be employed full-time. If these two additional groups are included, the U.S. unemployment rate is 10 percent, double the headline “official” level of unemployment the administration touts as a “positive” sign of the economy’s recovery.

    On the other hand, price inflation as measured by the Consumer Price Index seems to be barely rising. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, price inflation in August 2015 was .02 percent higher than twelve months earlier.

    Again, however, when food and energy prices are subtracted out of the Consumer Price Index to leave what the government statisticians call “core” inflation, prices in August were 1.8 percent higher than a year ago. Certainly not a “galloping” inflation, but not the nearly zero price inflation rate the highline number suggests, particularly since food prices were up 1.6 percent over the year; the “drag” on measured price inflation was all due to a 15 percent decline in energy prices compared to twelve months earlier.

    No Trade-Offs Between Employment and Inflation

    If we look at that alternative unemployment rate of 10 percent in conjunction with the “core” price inflation rate of 1.8 percent, what we see is a moderate form of what in the 1970s was called “stagflation”: high unemployment with rising price inflation.

    The Federal Reserve could try to nudge up the key interest rates it most directly has influence over, especially the Federal Funds rate at which banks lend to each other overnight, but with the risk of threatening the investment and home mortgage borrowing that it has attempted to “stimulate” through near zero interest rates.

    Or the Federal Reserve could continue to keep those interest rates low through a continuation of their moderated “quantitative easing” monetary policy, but with the risk that price inflation (however measured) may start to rise faster than it has, creating the danger of price inflation above their declared target level of two percent a year.

    (It should be kept in mind that even the Federal Reserve’s “modest” target rate of two percent annual price inflation would still result in a near 50 percent decrease in the value of every the dollar in our pockets in around 20 years.)

    Either way, the old Keynesian notion that you can lower unemployment by accepting a higher rate of price inflation, and vice versa, shows itself to be as illusionary as when it was first touted back in the 1960s as the mechanical macroeconomic policy trade-off between unemployment and price inflation known as the Phillips Curve.

    The European Central Bank, by the way, is in its own dilemma. European Union-wide official unemployment continues to hover above 10 percent with a modest price deflation as most recently measured, in spite of that central bank’s own version of “quantitative easing” of nearly $70 billion of new paper money-creation per month since the beginning of 2015.

    Yellen says and Markets Do cartoon

    The Fed Causes Booms and Busts

    The only result of these years of monetary expansion and interest rate manipulation is economic instability and distortion. The financial market indices significantly gyrate up and down seemingly every day based on attempted nuanced readings of the latest public statements by any of the Federal Reserve Governors concerning interest rate policy changes.

    The house of cards constructed on years of artificially low or zero interest rates in terms of investments undertaken with trillions of dollars of cheap money, as well as home mortgages at manipulated interest costs, hang in the balance again as in previous boom-bust cycles.

    Every time the booms turn into busts, the central bankers insist that they have had nothing to do with it. It has been due to “irrational exuberance” in financial markets, or huckster bankers who duped people into taking out loans they could not really afford, or international events beyond a national central bank’s control, or just, well, “bad luck” with things happening in unpredictable ways even under the watchful eyes of the central bank “experts.”

    The fact is, the boom-bust cycles that have plagued modern industrial societies for well over a century, including the Great Depression of the 1930s and this most recent “Great Recession,” as it has been dubbed, have not “just happened” or been the result of inherent and inescapable weaknesses in a market economy or capitalist financial markets.

    The booms and busts of the business cycle are the result of the very central bank system that government policy-makers and central bankers insist they are there to either prevent or mitigate in its amplitude and duration.

    As I explain in my new, recently released book, Monetary Central Planning and the State, published by the Future of Freedom Foundation, central banking suffers from the same political and economic shortcomings as all other forms of central planning.

    Monetary Printing Press Plunder

    First, placing the control of the monetary system in the hands of the government or a government-created agency such as the U.S. Federal Reserve System opens the door to the temptation of political abuse in many forms. On the one hand, the temptation exists to use the monetary printing press to create the money that covers the expenses of a government’s deficit spending and provides the artificially low interest rates to manipulate the costs of funding the government’s accumulated debt.

    On the other hand, a central bank can also be used to “stimulate” employment and production in the service of politicians leading up to an election, to make it seem that those in political power have the magic wand to “create jobs” and better standards of living – what is sometimes referred to as the “political business cycle.”

    It also enables pandering to special interest groups wanting sources of below-market rates of interest for loans, as well as the banking institutions themselves that have access to the created credit supplied by the central bank with which they earn interest income that otherwise might not have been there.

    Government full or near monopoly control of any resource, asset or institution (such as a central bank) historically has always brought in its wake plunder and privilege for some at others’ expense that would not have been possible in a more open, competitive market setting.

    Monetary Central Planning and the Business Cycle

    However, even if those who oversee and manage central banks were as “pure” and benevolent as angels only wishing to do good for mankind with no ulterior self-interested motives or temptations, the monetary and banking system would still constantly run the risk of suffering from the same boom-bust cycles that we see in our world today.

    That is because central banking is a form of central planning, and as such, manifests the same weaknesses and impossibilities as all centrally planned economic systems. Interest rates are market-generated prices that are meant to coordinate the decisions of savers with those of potential investors, by bringing the two sides of the loan market into balance.

    Income-earners make a decision to spend a portion of their earned income on desired consumer goods and to save a portion of that income for planned and possible demands and uses in the future. The real resources that saved portion of their money incomes represent in terms of buying power in the market is transferred to interested and able borrowers; they use that saved portion of other people’s money income to enter the market and demand and purchase resources, raw materials, capital goods (machines, tools, equipment) and labor services to undertake future-oriented and time-consuming investment projects of various types and lengths that will bring forth goods to be bought and sold in the future.

    Interest rates, in other words, serve as the balancing rod to keep in coordinated order the use of scarce resources in society between the production of consumer goods closer to the present and the investments that will bring forth consumer goods further in the future. It is the balancing of resource uses and goods production across time.

    Uncle Sam Running on Zero Percent Interest Rates cartoon

    Central Banker Hubris vs. Competitive Markets

    There is no way to know what are the “correct” coordinating interest rates for different types of loans with differing periods of investment time in relation to people’s decisions to consume and save parts of their income other than to allow free, competitive financial markets to discover through the interactions of supply and demand what the “equilibrium” or market-balancing interest rates should be.

    This is, of course, no different than in the case of any other good or service that can be offered on the market. No central planner can replace the competitive market and its free pricing system for integrating and coordinating all the complex knowledge and circumstances of multitudes of millions of suppliers and demanders in an ever-changing world.

    And, likewise, it is shear arrogance and naïve hubris for central planners to believe that they do or ever can have the knowledge, wisdom and ability to correctly determine what the quantity of money should be in the economy, what money’s value or purchase power should be over goods and services in the marketplace, or what interest rates would assure that coordinated balance between savings and investments.

    Monetary Freedom and Private Competitive Banking

    That is why in is time to rethink and challenge the presumption of a need for and superior outcome from the institution of central banking, whether in the United States or anywhere else in the world.

    In the twentieth century a group of economists known as members of or sympathizers with the “Austrian School of Economics” challenged the reasoning and rationale behind central banking. Among these leading Austrian economists were Ludwig von Mises and F. A. Hayek.

    Though Austrian economists have differed sometimes in their emphases and arguments about the practical workings of a private, competitive free banking system, there is one underlying premise shared by all of them: a completely market-based monetary and banking system would be far superior to historical and current institutional forms of central banking.

    Money is, perhaps, the most central and essential, economic good in the market, since it is the generally used medium of exchange to facilitate all transactions entered into by buyers and sellers. It makes smoother and more effective the exchange of goods and services throughout the economy.

    Money and Banking is Too Important to Leave to Central Banks

    But precisely because of its central role and significance in a complex and ever-changing market economy the supply and control of money is too important to leave in the hands of politicians or their central bank appointees.

    They are either too open to the temptations of short-run political purposes in their control of the monetary printing press; or they suffer from what Hayek called a “pretense of knowledge” in presuming that they can ever know more or better than the cumulative knowledge of all the participants of the competitive market as manifested in the prices and interest rates that emerge through the interaction of supply and demand.

    Historically, markets – which means all of us in our roles as consumers and productions – determined which commodities were most useful as media of exchange for different types and sizes of transactions. Money was not and need not be a creation or creature of the state, and has most often been commodities such as gold and silver.

    Banking as the institutional procedure and process to facilitate and coordinate the decisions of savers and investors emerged out of the market discovery of profitable opportunities in providing intermediary services to minimize the costs of lenders and borrowers directly searching out trading partners for the exchanging of resources and goods across time.

    Wanting Gold, Not Monopoly Money cartoon

    Money Creation as a Tool of Plunder

    Governments and their central bank creations usurped market-based monetary and banking systems to serve the plundering purposes of kings, princes, parliaments, and special interest groups who all wanted to hold the magical hand of the monetary printing press.

    Print up money (or its digital substitutes and surrogates in more modern times) and you can have access to all the hard work of others who have invested in manufacturing and bringing to market all the goods and services you desire without having to undertake the reciprocal effort and work to make and trade an actual good or service to earn the money so as to honestly buy what you want from them. Some are so impolite as to refer to such monetary mischief as “fraud” and “theft.”

    Added to this more “base” purpose of government monopolization of the monetary printing press, has been, over the last one hundred years, the arrogance and hubris of social engineers, bureaucratic elites of “experts” and “socially-oriented” policy-makers who presume to know how to micro-manage and macro-manage society better than leaving people to manage their own lives through peaceful interaction with others in the competitive marketplace.

    Their century-long legacy in the arena of money and banking has been the booms and busts of the business cycle. The monetary social engineers have worn different hats at different times – calling themselves Keynesians, Monetarists, New Classical or Rational Expectations theories, or Post- and New Keynesians – but they remain variations on the same conceptual and ideological theme: monetary central planners imposing their notions of desired market outcomes by co-opting the functioning of a real and functioning market-based competitive system of free banking using market-chosen media of exchange.

    The time has come to end the tragic and disruptive reign of monetary central planning.

  • China Opens Weaker Than Expected After Goldman Downgrade And "Mirage Of A New Dawn" Warnings

    After a "no change" statement from The BoJ, today's dismal Japanese data was terrible enough to be great news in the new normal as August machine orders drop the most in at least a decade and stocks, USDJPY dipped and ripped. However, it was the China open that investors waited for (after China shares rising 10% in US trading, and CNH strengthening on lower than expected reported outflows) as Goldman slashed its 12m target for Chinese stocks, and Bocom's chief strategist (who called the boom and the bust) says "rally is mirage of new dawn, volume is dying, sell the rallies." PBOC fixed the Yuan at its strongest in 2 months and while Chinese stocks opened up notably it was less than US ADRs suggested (CSI +4% vs ASHR +9.5%).

     

    Global stocks are up 7 days in a row (since Chinese markets shut) – the longest win streak since April… the biggest 7-day rip since Dec 2011…

     

    But we start with Japan…. After a "no change" statement from The BoJ, today's dismal Japanese data is terrible enough to be great news as Machine Orders collapse 3.5% YoY (against expectations of a 3.5% rise) dropping for the 3rd month in a row. This is the biggest MoM drop (-5.7%) for August in at least a decade…

     

    In addition Japanese investors sold the most foreign bonds in 4 months and bought a near-record amount of foreign stocks…

    • *JAPAN PORTFOLIO INVESTMENTS IN INDONESIA RISE TO RECORD IN AUG.

     

    This – notably – sparked weakness in USDJPY and Nikkei 225… but Kuroda and his merry men quickly stepped in to fix that…

    *  *  *

    But global investors were waiting with baited breath for the China open (after being told "don't worry" earlier by The PBOC)…

    Before it opened, we noted that Offshore Yuan and US equities had decoupled…

     

    And if last year was anything to go by, it could get ugly…

    As China returns from a week-long holiday to the following news:

    • Factory PMIs, both official and Caixin, came in slightly above forecast for Sept.
    • Govt eased down-payment rules for first-time homebuyers to support housing;
    • FX reserves fell less than est., easing fears about extreme selling pressure on yuan

    Chinese stocks in U.S. rose almost 10% during the break… but while Chinese Stocks open higher (but less than US ADRs suggested)…

    • *FTSE CHINA A50 STOCK-INDEX FUTURES RISE 7.7% AT OPEN

    And then weakened more…

    • *CHINA'S CSI 300 STOCK-INDEX FUTURES RISE 4% TO 3,251.2
    • *CHINA SHANGHAI COMPOSITE SET TO OPEN UP 3.4% TO 3,156.07
    • *CHINA'S CSI 300 INDEX SET TO OPEN UP 3.8% TO 3,324.98
    • *HANG SENG CHINA ENTERPRISES INDEX EXTENDS DROP TO 1.1%

    So The PBOC strengthened the Yuan fix to its highest in 2 months…

     

    And injects more liquidity…

    • *PBOC TO INJECT 120B YUAN WITH 7-DAY REVERSE REPOS: TRADER

    And this…

    •   *PBOC SAYS CIPS OFFERS YUAN CLEARING, SETTLEMENT SERVICE
    • *PBOC SAYS 19 BANKS PARTICIPANT CIPS  

    *  *  *

    Goldman has downgraded China…

    • *CSI300 INDEX 12-MO. TARGET CUT TO 4,000 VS 5,000 AT GOLDMAN

    ‘Reform’ and ‘liquidity’ continue to buttress our constructive strategic market view. Our refreshed 12m CSI300 target is 4,000 (from 5,000), 25% upside, comprising 10% EPS accrual and a liquidity-based target P/E of 12.7X (-0.4 s.d.), but a harsher growth backdrop could see another 8% downside from current levels. Implementation of SOE and other structural reforms, and the 13th Five Year Plan (FYP) are the key issues to watch.

     

    But added…

    • “Harsher” growth backdrop could see another 8% downside from current level
    • Govt may need to buy another 200b to 300b yuan worth of equities to keep SHCOMP at 3,100

    However, on the other hand, the man who called China's boom and bust warns to sell rallies…

    “I still think it’s better to sell into highs rather than buying dips," Hong, the chief China strategist at Bocom in Hong Kong, said in an e-mail interview. “The government has succeeded in curbing market volatility. But volume is dying, too."

     

    "The government won’t intervene actively as long as the Shanghai Composite is at or above current level, i.e. around 3,000," said So, who has a year-end target of 3,200 for the index. "There is limited room to re-leverage. Demand for margin lending would be low anyway, as it takes time to mend investors’ broken hearts."

     

    "There will be oversold technical reprieves,” Hong said. Such rallies “can give people a mirage of a new dawn — until they give up hopes of bottom fishing.”

    *  *  *

    Finally there is this…

    • *VIETNAM TO ALLOW SHORT SELLING TO BOOST TRADING OF STOCKS: NEWS

    Just do not tell China.

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • Marc Faber Fears Sudden 1987-Like Crash Or Longer-Term "Sliding Slope Of Hope"

    Sometimes less is more (less good data is moar good for stocks) and in the case of Marc Faber's recent appearance on Bloomberg's "What'd You Miss", 66 seconds of honesty was all that the hosts could take.

     

    The Gloom, Boom & Doom report editor notes "we have had a meaningful decline in many stocks already," and warns it is far from over as market face two possibilities of "longer-term unattractiveness": "a 1987-style collapse," or a 1973-74-style slow "sliding slope of hope."

     

    In the full interview, Faber goes into more detail on the world's deflationary pressures amid "colossal financial asset inflation."

     

  • No More "Free Trade" Treaties: It's Time for Genuine Free Trade

    Submitted by Ferghane Azihari via The Mises Institute,

    It is erroneous to believe that free traders have been historically in favor of free trade agreements between governments. Paradoxically, the opposite is true. Curiously, many laissez-faire advocates fall into the government-made trap by supporting “free-trade” treaties. However, as Vilfredo Pareto stated in the article “Traités de commerce of the Nouveau Dictionnaire d’Economie Politique” (1901):

    If we accept free trade, treatises of commerce have no reason to exist as a goal. There is no need to have them since what they are meant to fix does not exist anymore, each nation letting come and go freely any commodity at its borders. This was the doctrine of J.B. Say and of all the French economic school until Michel Chevalier. It is the exact model Léon Say recently adopted. It was also the doctrine of the English economic school until Cobden. Cobden, by taking the responsibility of the 1860 treaty between France and England, moved closer to the revival of the odious policy of the treaties of reciprocity, and came close to forgetting the doctrine of political economy for which he had been, in the first part of his life, the intransigent advocate.

    In 1859, the French liberal economist Michel Chevalier went to see Richard Cobden to propose a free trade treaty between France and England. For sure, this treaty, enacted in 1860, was a temporary success for free traders. What is less known however, is that at first, Cobden, in accordance with the free trade doctrine, refused to negotiate or sign any “free trade” treaty. His argument was that free trade should be unilateral, that it consists not in treaties but in complete freedom in international trade, regardless of where products come from.

    Chevalier eventually succeeded in obtaining Cobden’s support. But Cobden was puzzled by the complete secrecy surrounding the negotiations and, in a letter to Lord Palmerston, he attributed this secrecy to the “lack of courage” of the French government. Similarly, today, the lack of transparency concerning free-trade negotiations is problematic and it is often hard to know what the content of a treaty will be.

    Today, while some of these treaties are currently being negotiated, there are already examples of similar agreements enforced. One could refer to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), the General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS), the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) or more regional agreements like the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) or the European Economic Area (EEA).

    But why would protectionist governments who spend their time hampering markets by giving monopolies and other kinds of privileges at national level, open markets at the international level? The very fact that governments are negotiating in the name of free trade should be suspicious for any libertarian or true advocate of free trade.

    Intergovernmental Agreements Enhance Government Power

    Murray Rothbard opposed NAFTA and showed that what the Orwellians were calling a “free trade” agreement was in reality a means to cartelize and increase government control over the economy. Several clues lead us to the conclusion that protectionist policies often hide behind free trade agreements, for as Rothbard said, “genuine free trade doesn’t require a treaty.”

    The first clue is the intergovernmental and top down approach. Intergovernmentalism is nothing more than a process governments use to mutualize their respective sovereignties in order to complete tasks they are not able to accomplish alone. Nation-states are entities which rarely give up power. When they finalize agreements, it is to strengthen their power, not to weaken it. On the contrary, free trade requires a decline of governments’ regulatory power.

    Also, free trade does not require interstate cooperation. On the contrary, free trade can be and has to be done unilaterally. As freedom of speech does not need international cooperation, freedom to trade with foreigners does not need governments and treaties. Similarly, our government should not rob their population with corporatist and protectionist policies just because others do. Anyone who believes in free trade does not fear unilateralism. The simple fact that bureaucrats and politicians do not conceive of the international economy outside of a legal frame settled by intergovernmental agreements is sufficient to show the mistrust they express toward individual freedom. This reinforces the conviction that these agreements are driven by mercantilist preoccupations rather than genuine free trade goals.

    Extending Regulatory Control Beyond Your Own Borders

    The second clue concerns the intense conflicts between governments on these agreements characterized by a high degree of technicality. History shows that multilateralism leads toward deadlock. The failure of the Doha Round is the cause of the proliferation of bilateral and regional initiatives. The contentious relations between governments come from the will of some states to dictate their norms to other countries’ producers through an international harmonization process. But this is the exact opposite of free trade. As economic theory shows us, exchange and the division of labor is not based on equality and harmonization but rather on differences and inequality. Furthermore, the technicality and secrecy surrounding free-trade agreements favor mercantilism and protectionism to the extent that technical regulations are used to favor producers who are politically well connected.

    The Trans Pacific Partnership (TPP) is a good illustration of this balance of power. It was at first an agreement between four countries (Brunei, New-Zealand, Singapore, and Chile.) which tried to resist some neighbors’ commercial influence, especially China. Then the United States came and convinced more countries (Australia, Malaysia, Peru, Vietnam, Canada, Mexico, and Japan) to join the negotiations. Let’s also notice that most of the countries invited are already bound by regional or bilateral agreements with the United States. China remains excluded from the process. This governmental drive toward regulatory hegemony is obviously the complete opposite of free trade. Indeed, free trade supposes letting consumers peacefully choose what products they want to promote rather than determining what is available through bureaucratic coercion.

    Consolidation of Monopolies

    The third clue concerns the vigor with which governments have tried over several decades to impose at the international level a more constraining legal framework for so-called “intellectual property.” The first initiatives appear in 1883 and 1886 with the Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property and the Bern Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works. Amended several times during the twentieth century, the initiatives embrace, respectively, 176 and 168 states. These conventions are placed under the auspices of the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), an international bureaucracy which joined the United Nations system in 1974. A turning point came in 1994 with the signature of the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) administrated by the World Trade Organization (WTO). It is now incorporated as an essential part of the administration of international commerce and benefits from the WTO’s sanction mechanisms.

    In 2012 we endured a fresh attempt by our governments to reduce our freedom to create and share intellectual works with the Anti-Counterfeiting Trade Agreement (ACTA). And, if we look at the negotiations mandates of these trade agreements, we can see they all include a chapter on the reinforcement of “intellectual property” rights. Intellectual property has become a key concept of the international economy. But this must not hide its illegitimacy.

    As Vilfredo Pareto remarked, “From the point of view of the protectionist, treaties of commerce are … what is most important for a country’s economic future.” Each time a new “free trade” treaty is enacted, what is seen is the attenuation of tariff barriers, but what is not seen is the sneaky proliferation and harmonization of non-tariff barriers impeding free enterprise and creating monopolies at an international scale at the expense of the consumer. It’s time for genuine free trade.

  • "I Would Say Don't Worry" Says Chinese Central Banker As Indian Central Banker Says "World Economy Is Looking Grim"

    Earlier today, the IMF with its usual several year delay, discovered what pretty much everyone else had known for years: that emerging markets have massively overborrowed, according to the IMF to the tune of $3 trillion, most notably in China.

    Of course, this is one of the many things we have been cautioning about for the past 6 years, perhaps nowhere more vividly than in this November 2013 infographic showing “How In Five Short Years, China Humiliated The World’s Central Banks.”

     

    So now that the IMF has finally caught up with what our readers knew two years ago, here are some more of its “profound” observations:

    This dangerous over-leveraging now threatens to unleash a wave of defaults that will imperil an already weak global economy, said stark findings from the IMF’s twice yearly report.

     

    The Fund warned there was no margin for error for policymakers navigating these hazardous risks.

     

    “Policy missteps and adverse shocks could result in prolonged global market turmoil that would ultimately stall the economic recovery,” said Jose Viñals, financial counsellor at the IMF.

    And just when one thinks there is hope yet for the IMF, and it is almost on the same page as the BIS (the same BIS whose board of directors is comprised of all modern central bankers of course), the IMF goes and says what its policy recommendation is: engage in the same policies that have not only failed, but led the world to the brink, but not just one where the market can plunge 20%, 40%, or more percent, but where the entire neo-Keynesian/fiat/fractional reserve system is ultimately left discredited in the garbage heap of history, where it belongs.

    The world’s major central banks should ensure policy remains “accommodative” for fear of setting off a new wave of instability that would see bond prices rise and asset prices collapse, said the IMF.

    In fact, just do more QE. Best of all, just paradrop money right; after all that $200 trillion in global debt (and a few quadrillion in derivatives) won’t inflate itself away, right?

    Whoever wishes to, can waste their team reading the full report here.

    One person who didn’t read it, but had no choice but to engage in damage control was China’s deputy PBOC governor Yi Gang, who had the following absolutely comical retort to the IMF:

    “I would say, don’t worry,” said Yi Gang, deputy governor of the People’s Bank of China, after the International Monetary Fund warned of risks in China’s economic challenges.

     

    China will still have pretty much middle-to-high growth in the near future,” said Mr Yi, speaking in Lima, where the IMF-World Bank annual meetings were beginning.

     

    “A lot of people are considering a slowdown of the Chinese economy,” he said, referring to how the downturn has helped send global commodity prices plummeting, hurting the economies of exporters. But he insisted that Chinese imports of raw materials for its industrial economy will grow steadily in the future.

    We won’t even dignify this utter gibberish with a comment, but instead will give the word to a far more credible and serious policy maker, former IMF chief economist and current India central bank governor Raghuram Rajan, perhaps the only sane central banker anywhere these days, who realizes it is now too late for “macroprudential policy”, and certainly far too late “not to worry.”

    Instead he called for a “global safety net” backed by the IMF to provide support to economies “that might experience liquidity crises in the future, especially given that such problems might be triggered by the reversal of years of highly accommodative, post-crisis monetary policy in advanced economies such as the US.”

    Look what he did there, IMF? He did not call for more QE/NIRP/ZIRP or money paradrops: instead he realizes when the game is over, and when it is time to move on to the next, far less pleasant stage in the global lifecycle.

    What is this safety net Rajan proposes?

    Without such a safety net, governments were reluctant to approach the IMF because of the stigma attached to such a plea and the implication that they were undergoing a full-blown solvency crisis rather than a temporary shortage of liquidity as billions of dollars of capital rushed for the exit.

     

    Mr Rajan said one possibility was a multilateral swap arrangement among central banks — of the sort that already exists between the emerging Brics economies and in the $50bn Japanese credit line for India, for example — guaranteed by the IMF. “I think a lot of emerging markets would like to see something like this,” he said, but admitted there was no appetite for the idea among advanced economies.

    Of course there isn’t: it would mean reducing the equity return for the shareholders of DM central banks. And that must be avoided at all costs, even if the currency said shareholder plans to liquidity asset holdings into will not exist for much longer.

    Finally, Rajan’s summary of the state of the global economy was far less cheerful and far more credible than that of Yi Gang:

    The world economy, he said, was “looking grim.”

    So then, worry?

  • The World Map Of Debt

    What if we were to redraw the world map based on the sustainability of national debt levels?

     

    Original graphic by: HowMuch.net

    Countries that are smaller in size, but that have big debt loads, would stand out more. If we used debt-to-GDP as scaling criteria, Japan would become the largest country on our new map. Japan holds 19.99% of all global debt despite only having about 6% of the world’s economic production. The country’s debt-to-GDP ratio is 230%.

    Greece and Italy, two medium-sized European countries, would be bigger than North America as a whole. That said, the United States does hold an extreme amount of debt itself, equal to an astounding 29.05% of global debt. It is just masked more because of the country’s significant GDP. We have also looked at the United States another way in the past, and by the measure of debt-to-revenue, the US has the 2nd largest debt burden in the world.

    On the opposite side of the question, there are large countries that have less debt – they disappear from the map almost completely. Australia, a giant land mass, is reduced to a tiny island with its load of 29% debt-to-GDP. Nigeria shrinks to a tiny speck on the map with an 11% ratio.

    Source: Visual Capitalist

  • Edward Snowden: "They've Said They Won't Torture Me…"

    Submitted by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Just in case anyone still foolishly believes that there’s a shred of decency left in the ‘justice’ system in the Land of the Free, I would humbly present exhibit A: Edward Snowden.

    In a recent interview with the BBC, Edward Snowden disclosed that he has offered numerous times to the US government to return to the United States, face trial, and if necessary, spend time in prison.

    [full interview below]

    It hasn’t mattered that hundreds of thousands of people have signed petitions asking President Obama to pardon Mr. Snowden.

    Those petitions have been totally ignored.

    So Snowden is preparing to return and face trial, negotiating terms with Uncle Sam to ensure that he’s treated fairly.

    As he told the BBC, “So far they’ve said they won’t torture me. Which is a start, I think. But we haven’t gotten further than that.”

    It’s a sad reflection on the values of a country that someone who blows the whistle on the government committing egregious crimes and violating its own constitution has to flee to Russia in order to escape oppression.

    It’s even worse that the government in the Land of the Free rescinded his passport.

    But it’s utterly shocking that any negotiation about his return has to start by taking TORTURE off the table.

    The fact that torture even has to be mentioned is utterly pathetic. And it pretty much tells you everything you need to know about justice in America… and what happens if you dare cross the government.

  • Someone In Chicago Is Shot Every 2.8 Hours (Despite Major Gun Control)

    Having pointed out the surge in gun sales that has accompanied many of the largest mass shootings in America (and the government's instant knee-jerk reaction to tighten gun control, perhaps ignoring the mental problems many Americans face), and earlier noted that 'mass shootings' are now running at a pace of more than 1 per day in America, we thought DailyCaller.com's Mike Piccione's intriguing report detailing the supposed "gun-free-zone" of Chicago provided some crucial color that few seem willing to listen to…

    Someone in Chicago has been shot every 2.84 hours this year for a total of 2,349 shootings during the period of January 1, 2015 to October 6, 2015, according to crime stats published by the Chicago Tribune.

     

    This year, Chicago is expected to eclipse the previous milestone of a shooting every 3.38 hours in 2014 with a total victim count of 2,587.

    But – Chicago ranks as one of the most regulated cities in the nation for gun control.

    Concealed carry is almost nonexistent. To purchase a gun or ammunition requires a Firearm Owners Identification card in the entire state of Illinois, and additionally, a Chicago Firearm Permit – which is required to possess a firearm in Chicago.

     

    Not only are the people heavily regulated in Chicago, but guns are also heavily regulated. Any long gun with a grip protruding from the stock or a firearm with a telescoping stock is prohibited and classified as an “assault weapon.”

     

    Magazines are limited to a 12-round capacity.

     

    Even a spring-powered pellet gun with a muzzle velocity of 700 feet-per-second is classified as a “firearm,” although it does not use gun powder, the component that puts the “fire” in “firearm.”

     

    A stun-gun — a non-lethal device with no projectile — is considered a deadly weapon and cannot be carried for self-defense.

     

    Chicago, for all intents and purposes, is a “gun-free zone.”

     

    But all the state and city regulations associated with firearms in Chicago have failed to produce a safe city, and these are the policies that President Obama and Secretary Clinton wish to extend to the rest of the country.

     

    While saying that “criminals go out-of-state to places where it is easier to obtain guns” is often used to push gun control, it illustrates that criminals ignore gun laws in every state and that onerous access to Second Amendment rights on law abiding citizens doesn’t stop crime.

     

    Clinton’s campaign platform includes a call for federal legislation mandating background checks on all private firearms transfers and sales. Clinton also wants to repeal the “Protection of Lawful Commerce in Arms Act.” That law protects firearm manufacturers from lawsuits for negligent use of firearms.

     

    President Obama, through is spokesman Josh Earnest, has announced, “The president has frequently pushed his team to consider a range of executive actions that could more effectively keep guns out of the hands of criminals and others who shouldn’t have access to them. That’s something that is ongoing here.”

     

    Per the president’s policy, Chicago has taken every action “that could more effectively keep guns out of the hands of criminals and others who shouldn’t have access to them.”

    *  *  *

    Yet the shootings continue to rise…

  • Presenting SocGen's "China Syndrome": "The Vicious Cycle Of Lower Demand, Prices And Commodity Currencies"

    To be sure, there have been no shortage of narratives that we’ve been keen on presenting, perpetuating, and explaining this year as the series of global ponzi schemes that have been built in the seven years since the crisis continue to unravel. 

    Of course what’s important to understand here is that contrary to what our mainstream media critics – some of whom are now effectively jobless – will tell you, we aren’t in the business of spinning the narrative. 

    We’re in the business of helping to explain how things actually work on the Street as well as helping readers get to the bottom of what can sometimes be an impossibly complex geopolitical news cacophony designed to make you believe what the world’s most powerful governments want you to believe. So when we run headlines like this one: “Bloomberg’s Commodity Index Just Hit 21st Century Low”, it’s important to understand that we’re not using hyperbole for the sake of using hyperbole. We’re simply alerting those who frequent these pages to a very serious dynamic that in fact is now one of the driving forces behind global economic outcomes.  

    In short, the global commodities rout that’s unfolded in the wake of the death of the petrodollar and the demise of the Chinese growth machine has served to wreak havoc on EM commodity currencies and now threatens to plunge the world into crisis and forever delay “liftoff” in the US.

    Through it all, one thing that readers and (some) analysts have noted is that even as it becomes clearer and clearer that central banks and the paper they print are on their way to having zero credibility with anyone, commodities (so, the things people actually use and the things that actually have intrinsic value) have literally collapsed when priced in terms of worthless fiat paper.

    SocGen calls this the “China Syndrome” and we present the following analysis for readers to consider on the way to determining if the rout in the prices for materials that the world actually needs is justified, or whether perhaps it is just a casualty of another nefarious feedback loop gone awry…

  • Is a Ban on Physical Cash Coming Soon?

    The Central Banks hate physical cash. So much so they there will likely try to ban it in the near future.

     

    You see, almost all of the “wealth” in the financial system is digital in nature.

     

    1)   The total currency (actual cash in the form of bills and coins) in the US financial system is a little over $1.36 trillion.

     

    2)   When you include digital money sitting in short-term accounts and long-term accounts then you’re talking about roughly $10 trillion in “money” in the financial system.

    3)   In contrast, the money in the US stock market (equity shares in publicly traded companies) is over $20 trillion in size.

     

    4)   The US bond market  (money that has been lent to corporations, municipal Governments, State Governments, and the Federal Government) is almost twice this at $38 trillion.

     

    5)   Total Credit Market Instruments (mortgages, collateralized debt obligations, junk bonds, commercial paper and other digitally-based “money” that is based on debt) is even larger $58.7 trillion.

     

    6)   Unregulated over the counter derivatives traded between the big banks and corporations is north of $220 trillion.

     

    When looking over these data points, the first thing that jumps out at the viewer is that the vast bulk of “money” in the system is in the form of digital loans or credit (non-physical debt).

     

    Put another way, actual physical money or cash (as in bills or coins you can hold in your hand) comprises less than 1% of the “money” in the financial system.

     

    As far as the Central Banks are concerned, this is a good thing because if investors/depositors were ever to try and convert even a small portion of this “wealth” into actual physical bills, the system would implode (there simply is not enough actual cash).

     

    Remember, the current financial system is based on debt. The benchmark for “risk free” money in this system is not actual cash but US Treasuries.

     

    In this scenario, when the 2008 Crisis hit, one of the biggest problems for the Central Banks was to stop investors from fleeing digital wealth for the comfort of physical cash. Indeed, the actual “thing” that almost caused the financial system to collapse was when depositors attempted to pull $500 billion out of money market funds.

     

    A money market fund takes investors’ cash and plunks it into short-term highly liquid debt and credit securities. These funds are meant to offer investors a return on their cash, while being extremely liquid (meaning investors can pull their money at any time).

     

    This works great in theory… but when $500 billion in money was being pulled (roughly 24% of the entire market) in the span of four weeks, the truth of the financial system was quickly laid bare: that digital money is not in fact safe.

     

    To use a metaphor, when the money market fund and commercial paper markets collapsed, the oil that kept the financial system working dried up. Almost immediately, the gears of the system began to grind to a halt.

     

    When all of this happened, the global Central Banks realized that their worst nightmare could in fact become a reality: that if a significant percentage of investors/ depositors ever tried to convert their “wealth” into cash (particularly physical cash) the whole system would implode.

     

    As a result of this, virtually every monetary action taken by the Fed since this time has been devoted to forcing investors away from cash and into risk assets. The most obvious move was to cut interest rates to 0.25%, rendering the return on cash to almost nothing.

     

    However, in their own ways, the various QE programs and Operation Twist have all had similar aims: to force investors away from cash, particularly physical cash.

     

    After all, if cash returns next to nothing, anyone who doesn’t want to lose their purchasing power is forced to seek higher yields in bonds or stocks.

     

    The Fed’s economic models predicted that by doing this, the US economy would come roaring back. The only problem is that it hasn’t. In fact, by most metrics, the US economy has flat-lined for several years now, despite the Fed having held ZIRP for 5-6 years and engaged in three rounds of QE.

     

    As a result of this… mainstream economists at CitiGroup, the German Council of Economic Experts, and bond managers at M&G have suggested doing away with cash entirely.

     

    If you think this sounds like some kind of conspiracy theory, consider that France just banned any transaction over €1,000 Euros from using physical cash. Spain has already banned transactions over €2,500. Uruguay has banned transactions over $5,000. And on and on.

     

    This is just the beginning. Indeed… we've uncovered a secret document outlining how the US Federal Reserve plans to incinerate savings.

     

    We detail this paper and outline three investment strategies you can implement

    right now to protect your capital from the Fed's sinister plan in our Special Report

    Survive the Fed's War on Cash.

     

    We are making 1,000 copies available for FREE the general public.

     

    To pick up yours, swing by….

    http://www.phoenixcapitalmarketing.com/cash.html

     

    Best Regards

    Phoenix Capital Research

     

     

  • Recovery? Student Homelessness Has Doubled Since Before The Recession

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    How’s that recovery going for you? That’s what I thought.

    Here’s the latest data point from the ongoing oligarch crime spree shamelessly marketed to the masses as an “economic recovery.”

    From Five-Thirty-Eight:

    The number of homeless students in the country’s classrooms has more than doubled since before the recession, according to recently released federal data. That’s an alarming trend, but a new report offers some hope: At least part of the increase, the authors say, is not because more students have become homeless, but because states have gotten better at identifying homeless students.

    Here’s a visual representation of America’s Banana Republic neo-feualism for those of you so inclined:

     

    Screen Shot 2015-10-07 at 10.28.38 AM

    Bull market in serfdom. If this is what a recovery looks like, I don’t want to see a recession.

    There were about 1.4 million homeless students nationwide in the 2013-14 school year, according to the Department of Education, twice as many as there were in the 2006-07 school year, when roughly 680,000 students were homeless.

     

    The rankings are based on an array of indicators that range from the concrete, like the number of available rental units that are affordable for extremely low-income families, to the less so, like the number of policies that reduce homeless families’ barriers to accessing child care. Matthew Adams, the institute’s principal policy analyst, said that rather than try to measure the effectiveness of policies in each state, which can be hard to quantify, the goal of the report is to identify and compare the efforts being made by each state.

    Don’t forget to send thank you notes to America’s #1 criminal at large. Return address optional:

    Screen Shot 2015-08-20 at 3.21.02 PM

  • "They're Converging To Dire Levels!": SocGen's Edwards Delivers Critical Warning On Inflation Expectations

    At a certain point, one has to wonder if there will ever be a time when developed market policy makers throw in the towel. 

    When both Japan and Europe slid back into deflation lately, it served notice that trillions upon trillions in central bank asset purchases are definitely not working to restore confidence in the global economic recovery and/or reinvigorate inflation expectations. 

    However, you cannot simply print trillions in paper liabilities in order to purchase your own other paper liabilities (and no, that is not a typo, that’s just simply what’s happening here) without creating distortions across capital markets and that’s exactly what’s happened across the globe as the Fed and its DM brethren have “accidentally” engineered an epic case of capital misallocation that, far from promoting an increase in global demand and trade, has actually contributed to a global deflationary supply glut. 

    That is actually not nearly as complicated as it sounds. Put simply: if you keep uneconomic businesses in business, you also keep their supply online, which means that at the end of the day, if the fiat money you’re injecting doesn’t end up trickling down and stimulating aggregate demand because the NIM margins of the banks you’re giving it to are so low thanks to ZIRP as to discourage them from sharing the wealth, well then, all you’ve actually done is create a scenario where the idea of inflation expectations is essentially meaningless right up until everyone wakes up to what’s going on, and then it’s Weimar time. 

    So consider all of that, and then consider the following from SocGen’s Albert Edwards who has some characteristically introspective commentary regarding the interplay between central banks and inflation expectations and generally does a nice job of explaining what we’ve been at pains to point out for months (if not years): namely that central bankers are largely hapless when it comes to achieving their stated goal of rescuing their respective economies from the deflationay doldrums.

    *  *  *

    From SocGen

    Two things caught my eye this week. The first was more soggy Japanese economic data which suggests that the BoJ may soon hit the QE button even harder. That would trigger a renewed slide in the yen and another round of Asian currency turmoil – plus c?a change! But, secondly and perhaps more important is increasing evidence of a loss of confidence that the Fed is actually in control. Ignore for a moment the stock market’s celebration of weaker than expected payrolls. Instead investors should focus on the rapid decline in US inflation expectations since the Fed meeting – even now converging to dire eurozone levels!

    Expectations of the first Fed rate hike were kicked into March next year in the wake of the weaker than expected payroll release. We?ve been here before and it?s becoming tedious. But at least the equity market?s euphoric reaction was entirely predictable.

    Far more interesting is the continuing slide in US break-even inflation expectations. The measure for 5y expectations, in 5 years time, has now decisively fallen below the January low (see chart below) and the spread verses the eurozone has now fallen to only 20bp against 60bp last October. Bond investors are signalling to us that they don?t believe the Fed is in control anymore. The Fed by contrast is brushing aside the market?s deflation concerns. It all feels very much like Japan circa 1995 in the wake of the yen?s then surge.

    Talking about Japan, we are at a crucial crossroads. Most observers, except perhaps the BoJ and the Abe government, believe the economic data has been disturbingly weak. Most therefore expect the BoJ to crank up QE, or QQE as it is known in Japan ? having added a wishful qualitative to their quantitative easing. You know my view. All this money printing will ultimately end in tears. Despite being a fully paid up member to the school of thought that believes that Japan has no option other than to monetise its public sector deficit because the government is insolvent, that is also the same reason why I remain bullish on the Nikkei. Japan?s massive QQE (many times that of the Fed and ECB) is the steroids that mean Japan should outsprint all other runners in this currency race to the bottom. And when the yen renews its slide, expect round two of Asian emerging currency weakness to begin and US and eurozone inflation expectations to head lower still.

    *  *  *

    There are two takeaways here, the first is from Edwards and the second from us.

    From SocGen:

    The collapse in inflation expectations tells us that the market believes the central banks, despite their monetary profligacy, are failing to prevent the western economies from turning Japanese, and thus at risk of repeating their devastating slide into outright deflation in the 1990s. 

    And from “The Unwind Of QE Means The “S&P Should Be Trading At Half Of Its Value”, Deutsche Bank Warns“:

    In his latest weekly note, DB’s derivatives analyst Alekandar Kocic focuses on the interplay between US inflation expectations and US equities, and points out something curious, and very much spot on:

    Policy response to the crisis post-2008 consisted of unprecedented injection of liquidity, transfer of risk from private to public balance sheet, and reduction of volatility from its toxic levels. The net result was near-zero rate levels and collapse of volatility across the board, while different market sectors developed high degrees of coordination. The last effect has been an indirect result of the central banks’ flows and the distortions they introduced in the bond market. In this environment other markets acted as a complement to rates (through which monetary policy was transmitted) and crowding out there pushed investors to articulate their views elsewhere. Their participation was a function of amount of liquidity injection. As a consequence everything was trading off of US inflation expectations as the main expression of the QE effects.

    That was the case for the first 5 years of “unconventional policy” until some time in 2013. Then something snapped. Kocic continues:

    With deflation as the main risk tackled by monetary policy, its success or failure was gauged by the ability to reflate the economy. Inflation expectations and breakevens were therefore signals for risk-on or risk-off trade. In fact, most market sectors, from FX to EM equities, were trading in high coordination with breakevens. Taper tantrum was the end of these correlations and a beginning of dispersion across different assets. In effect, it was the unwind of the “QE” trade, its first phaseWhile most other assets, like credit spreads, EM equities or different currencies, do not have a logical connection with US breakevens, US equities do. The dispersion between these assets and breakevens was an expected consequence of policy unwind. However, for US equities this unwind distorted their “natural” correlation with inflation. Persistence of these dislocations is just a manifestation of to what extent QE has been an important driver of post-2008 markets.

    Which brings us to the punchline:

    Since 2013, stocks rallied while disinflationary pressures were reinforced by a strong USD, low commodity prices and a decline in global demand. If pre-2013 coordination between the two is taken as a reference, then based on current stock prices breakevens should trade about 1.5% wider. This means the Fed should be hiking because inflation is above target. Alternatively, given the current level of inflation, S&P should be trading at half of its value.

    Wait, the S&P should be trading at 900… or even less? Yes, according to the following Deutsche Bank chart:

    Only one question remains: which breaks first – do inflation expectations surge higher, soaring by some 150 bps to justify equity valuations, or do equities crash?

    Is reconciliation likely – and, if so, in which direction? Are we returning to the pre-crisis world, or we are in a completely new regime?

    The answer will come from none other than the Fed and by now, even Janet Yellen knows that one word out of place, one signal to the market that the QE-inflation trade will converge with stocks crashing instead of inflation rising (which, unless the Fed launched QE4, NIRP of even helicopter money now appears inevitable), and some $10 trillion in market cap could evaporate overnight.

    Is it any wonder that Yellen is exhibiting “health issues” during her speeches: the realization that the fate of the biggest stock market bubble lies on your shoulders would make anyone “dehydrated.”

    In retrospect, Ben Bernanke knew exactly what he was doing when he got out of Dodge just as the endgame was set to begin.

     

  • Lawmaker Calls For Study On Links Between Pharmaceuticals And Mass Killers

    Submitted by Barry Donegan via TheAntiMedia.org,

    Following recent media reports of high-profile mass shootings, a Republican assemblywoman from Nevada is calling for an investigation into whether psychiatric pharmaceuticals commonly taken by mass murderers can cause side effects that may contribute to their mental health decline.

    According to KSNV Las Vegas, GOP Assemblywoman Michele Fiore says that, rather than blaming mass shootings on the guns used by the perpetrators, studies should be done on the drugs that many of them have a history of having taken to treat mental health disorders.

    We have to look into what is being prescribed and what is in these meds just like clinical studies. Why don’t we do studies on the medication all of these shooters were taking and take that medication off the market? Obviously, medications can alter your mind just as alcohol can alter the mind,” said Fiore.

    Though it is not yet known whether the perpetrator in last week’s tragic shooting at Umpqua Community College in Roseburg, Oregon was on psychiatric medication, early reports from The Oregonian note that he identified himself by the social media screen name “lithium love, he mentioned anger and depression in a note that was found in connection with the attack, and he had a long history of behavioral problems in school.

    He had also been discharged by the U.S. Army midway through basic training in 2008 and graduated from a school that The Oregonian described as geared for special education students with a range of issues from learning disabilities, health problems and autism or Asperger’s Disorder.

    In August of this year, a CBS46 Atlanta Reality Check report by Ben Swann raised questions about the possibility of a connection between mass murderers and pharmaceutical drugs used to treat mental health disorders, noting that 26 high-profile perpetrators had been taking psychiatric medication.

    Watch the Reality Check below.

  • As A Shocking $100 Billion In Glencore Debt Emerges, The Next Lehman Has Arrived

    One week ago, in a valiant attempt to defend the stock price of struggling commodity trading titan Glencore, one of the company's biggest cheerleaders, Sanford Bernstein's analyst Paul Gait (who has a GLEN price target of 450p) appeared on CNBC in what promptly devolved into a great example of just how confused equity analysts are when it comes to analyzing highly complex debt-laden balance sheets.

    In the clip below, starting about 2:30 in, CNBC's Brian Sullivan gets into a heated spat with Gait over precisely how much debt Glencore really has, with one saying $45 billion the other claiming it is a whopping $100 billion.

    The reason for Gait's confusion is that he simplistically looked at the net debt reported on Glencore's books… just as Ivan Glasenberg intended.

    However, since Glencore – like Lehman – is first and foremost a trading operation, one also has to add in all the stated derivative exposure (something we did ten days ago), in addition to all the unfunded liabilities, off balance sheet debt, bank commitments and so forth, to get a true representation of just how big, or rather massive, Glencore's true risk is to its countless counterparties.

    Conveniently for the likes of equity analysts such as Gait and countless others who still have GLEN stock at a "buy" rating, Bank of America has done an extensive analysis breaking down Glencore's true gross exposure. Here is the punchline:

    We consider different approaches to Glencore’s debt. Credit agencies, such as S&P, start with “normal” net debt, i.e. gross debt less cash and then deduct some share (80% in the case of S&P of “RMIs” – Readily Marketable Inventories. These are considered to be “cash like” inventories (working capital) in the marketing business. At the last results, RMIs were about US$17.7 bn. Giving full credit for RMIs plus a pro-forma for the equity raise and interim dividend we derive a “Glencore Adjusted Net Debt” of c. US$28 bn.

     

    On the other hand, from discussions with our banks team, we believe the banks industry (and ultimately regulators) may look at the number i.e. gross lines available (even if undrawn) + letters of credit with no credit for inventories held. On this basis, we estimate gross exposure (bonds, revolver, secured lending, letters of credit) at c. $100 bn. With bonds at around $36 bn, this would still leave $64 bn to the banks’ account (assuming they don’t own bonds).

    Charted, here is why Sullivan and his $100 billion number was spot on, and why Glencore's banks suddenly realize the company has more gross exposure than its has total assets!

    BofA lays out the stunning, if only for equity analysts, details:

    Over US$100bn in estimated gross exposures to Glencore

     

    We estimate the financial system's exposure to Glencore at over US$100bn, and believe a significant majority is unsecured. The group's strong reputation meant that the buildup of these exposures went largely without comment. However, the recent widening in GLEN debt spreads indicates the exposure is now coming into investor focus.

     

    Debt broadly spread

     

    GLEN debt breaks down as US$35bn in bonds, US$9bn in bank borrowings, US$8bn in available drawings and US$1bn in  secured borrowing. We then estimate that the group has US$50bn in committed lines against which it can draw letters of credit with which to finance its trading inventories. Based on public filings, we believe that the banks may have limited capacity to reduce even the undrawn portion of these lines until 2017. GLEN have publicly stated its financing is largely locked in – but we believe that this may not provide comfort to risk-averse bank shareholders and supervisors.

     

    Concentration and convexity: potential stress testing ahead

     

    GLEN had an unencumbered asset base of over US$90bn in property, plant, equipment and inventories at the half year. However, for bank investors and regulators, after the crisis, gross nominal exposure is a key metric – including committed facilities. We believe many banks may now be more carefully reviewing their exposure to the commodities complex. Glencore’s banks span the globe, with 60 in a recent financing. Glencore has stated it has locked its financing in for an extended period, but a desire to hedge would be powerful at the banks, as likely that regulators will include commodity and energy exposures in the next stress tests as it is a stated area of focus. These stress tests typically take gross exposures and assume elevated loss-given-default – a potential 5x capital uplift. A system positioned one-way on a credit has historically tended to keep spreads high; implying rising debt costs which are likely to put pressure on credit quality: convexity is alive and well.

    Furthermore, as we reported last night, while banks have so far been willing to throw good money after bad, this is about to change:

    Bond market spreads imply a non-investment grade rating

    The group's bond spreads imply a rating in the single-B range and a rollover cost of funding >200bp above the cost of debt outstanding. We believe banks’ gross margins on their exposures are below the Glencore group’s average funding cost, with drawn financing at spreads around 50bps and undrawn lines materially below this. The cost of hedging exposure is currently over 600bps. Thus, the P&L dynamics for banks are difficult; this implies to us that banks may increase challenge the business model of commodity traders; this implies to us that banks may increase the cost of and reduce the availability of credit to commodity traders, thus challenging their business model.

     

    Bank shareholder pressure on disclosure and exposure

     

    We believe bank shareholders may pressure managements to reduce exposures, if not because of potential loss then at least because of likely capital consumption under stress. In our view, current disclosures by the banks are inadequate to provide clarity. It is not possible to estimate unsecured exposures, nor to understand if individual short term loans may be a part of a long-term irrevocable commitment as in the case of Glencore, based on publicly available disclosure..

    Worse, since it is not just Glencore that the banks are exposed to but very likely the rest of the commodity trading space, their gross exposure blows up to a simply stunning number:

    For the banks, of course, Glencore may not be their only exposure in the commodity trading space. We consider that other vehicles such as Trafigura, Vitol and Gunvor may feature on bank balance sheets as well ($100 bn x 4?)

    Call it half a trillion dollars in very highly levered exposure to commodities: an asset class that has been crushed in the past year. Which explains BofA's next point:

    According to our Credit analyst, Navann Ty, GLEN’s 5y CDS tightened by 85bp yesterday to c. 640 bps. GLENLN CDS is 70bp wider to MTNA (ArcelorMittal), which is rated Ba1/BB. Trying to extrapolate to an implied credit rating is difficult as we don’t think that there are many IG-rated credits trading at the same level. Bottom line – there appears to be a lot of demand for default protection.

     

    All of the above should be well-known to our readers. However, the below exchange between the BofA equity analyst and the company's bank analyst is a must read to gain some further insight on Glencore which is increasingly – and belatedly – seen as the fulcrum entity in what may be the watershed event for any wholesale commodity-trading indudstry collapse, and why the company is, as we first called it, in danger of becoming the commodity sector' "Lehman", a name we first gave Glencore two weeks ago and which appears to have stuck.

    What are the similarities that you observe between GLEN and your experience/analysis of other financial companies during the 2008 Global Financial Crisis (GFC)? What is the roadmap for a situation like this to unwind?

     

    Alistair Ryan (AR): One key similarity I see is the financial structure of the company in time and space. Glencore’s highly leveraged financial structure has not been stress tested in its current form through a full cycle. Ultimately it appears that there is a time mismatch between the duration of its funding (short) and the time to realize the value of (some) of its assets (e.g. the industrial assets). The large notional size of its outstanding debts (US$50 bn+) is also unusual. We observed similarly mismatched capital structures during the GFC in consumer finance companies (e.g. Countrywide, Household) & public broker dealers (e.g. LEH).

     

    Can you give some examples of situations that ended well/less badly? What were the actions taken by company managements?

     

    If we look at Banks as a counterpoint through the GFC, they were, in general much more financially resilient. The institutions which came under pressure and/or failed during the GFC had large nominal amounts of short term debt. Take HSBC. HSBC bought “Household”, the largest consumer finance company. We believe because of HSBC’s relatively low leverage, and the fact that they undertook a $17 bn rights issue, they were able to absorb the losses resulting from their ownership of Household.

     

    As an interesting aside, and again speaking to the financing duration mismatch issue, while HSBC took US$22 bn in write-downs related to mark to market losses onstructured credit (sub-prime), in subsequent years, the company has written back around $21 bn of these losses. We might think about a parallel here with the duration mismatch of short term debt funding and some of GLEN’s more marginal industrial/mining assets which might be “out of the money” today but where value could be realized if the assets are held for the longer term.

     

    Can you give some examples of situations that ended badly? What were the pitfalls?

     

    If we consider the example of UBS, during the GFC found itself in the unfortunate situation of needing to do 4 share issuances support its balance sheet and ultimately sold down the assets that were causing the problems. While this combination did fix the problem at that time, it meant that the company didn’t benefit when the value of the distressed assets recovered. (As an aside, we note GLEN’s 9.99% issue may be of concern due to the fact this is the maximum permissible size that can be undertaken without shareholder approval or a prospectus). During the GFC we came to see similarly sized issues as not always adequate.

     

    A key problem then is the combination of short term funding and market moves in the price of assets which could impact the ability to raise funds either through equity raises and / or asset sales.

     

    Speaking in general terms, we think that some management teams may have been overly confident in terms of their ongoing access to funding. They may also have underestimated the severity of market moves and the extent to which these market moves might make their funding structures unsustainable in less liquid environments. Financial companies tended to have few covenants meaning there wasn’t an actionable indication of a problem under the debt terms until it was time to refinance. At Enron, by contrast, the company used funding structures which were dependent on its investment grade rating so that, effectively, 2 days after the company was downgraded to junk, it was “done”.

     

    We do note the dependence of some business models on the feedback loop of market confidence into the cost of debt which can then ultimately impact the viability of the business. For example, if the cost of debt doubled at a commodity trading company, to what extent is the business model impacted?

     

    We also find it interesting that other commodity trading houses such as ADM & Bunge use relatively lower levels of financial leverage.

     

    What are the problems for GLEN with a potential downgrade to ratings 1 notch (BBB-). What about a two notch downgrade to Junk?

     

    As a rough rule of thumb, we’d think about a 1 notch change in rating being equivalent to a 50% change in a bank’s appetite for exposure to a company. With the pressure we’ve seen on Glencore’s yields & CDS we’d expect that some banks could be looking to reduce their exposure to Glencore and would be looking to hedge existing exposures (for example through the CDS market). This would include undrawn lines. With Glencore presently financing at about Libor + 40 bps but the CDS at 800 bps, having a line out to Glencore has significant “negative carry” implications.

     

    Size matters when it comes to the size of debt issuance. Glencore is a large absolute issuer with >$50 bn in outstanding debt in various forms. What this means, in our view, is that the credit may be quite large in many banks’ portfolios already. As such, the ability of some banks/investors to take additional exposure to Glencore may be limited. We consider the example of RBS vs. HSBC. RBS “maxed out” many credit counterparties including in the short-term wholesale market during the GFC.

    We also consider the relative size of the markets for investment grade and high yield debt in Europe. Investment grade is about $1.6 trillion. High yield is about US$330 bn. These markets are anticipatory, of course, but to the extent that a large issuer were to be downgraded from IG to junk, we’d expect to see some indigestion as markets adjust to new balances.

     

    What is the feedback loop into the banking system from financial stress at Glencore? What does our experiences of 2008 tell us?

     

    The key feature of financial markets in early 2008 was that it had been a long time since something bad had happened. As such “tail risks” were underpriced and we saw an extended period of “easy money”. More and more leverage came into the financial system at different levels. The layers of leverage meant that once the market turned (and the key one here was the US housing market), and recovery proved difficult.

     

    We also note that, as financial institutions came under pressure in 2008, 2009, several companies released quite general statements reaffirming the strong state of affairs in the business. While these statements may have been true in terms of operations, they didn’t reflect the sea-change in the financing environment and the potential negative marks to which the companies were exposed. As such, we read Glencore’s statement of 29th September 2015 with interest and caution: “Glencore has taken proactive steps to position our company to withstand current commodity market conditions. Our business remains operationally and financially robust – we have positive cash flow, good liquidity and absolutely no solvency issues. …”

     

    How might stress tests evolve to include exposure to commodity traders? What is the likely outcome of this?

     

    Bank stress tests are inevitably “topical” i.e. focused on the issues of the day. Take the concept of RMI (“readily marketable inventories”). It hasn’t been tested through an economic cycle. To the extent that we saw a dislocation in commodity markets (say caused by falling commodity prices), this might cause several financial institutions to reexamine commodities / contracts that initially appeared to be cash-like. Then, recovery assumptions might be called into question with the realization value for those commodities as key. To the extent that we saw systemic distress in the GFC with several financial institutions as forced liquidators in a distressed market, liquidity became a real issue and losses were greater than financial models might have suggested. As such, based on our experience, we could hypothesize that a stress test might require an approximate 30/40% haircut on assumed commodity prices.

     

    UK, US & Swiss bank regulators are likely to be focused on this issue in the next round of stress tests (starting in January). In the US we are starting to see the fall-out from the US energy junk-bond situation. In the UK, HSBC and Standard Chartered have big exposures to emerging markets, particularly China. In Switzerland, we believe that both UBS & CS would have exposures to most of the commodity trading houses so Glencore, but also the privately held commodity trading companies such as Trafigura & Gunvor.

     

    How should we think about bank exposure to Glencore and commodity traders in general? Overall, what do you think about this situation?

     

    I’m concerned. The company has cash on hand of around $3 bn at its last results. Yes liquidity is $10 bn including credit lines [JF: latest from company is c. $13 bn post the rights issue]. However, to the extent the company chooses to fully draw those credit lines, a scenario that could emerge is that of this being a stepping stone to lines potentially not being renewed.

     

    If we look at the risks on counterparties, we think that UBS might not be in a position to “take” a $1 bn loss on funds outstanding to Glencore, if such losses were required. CS might not be in a position to “take” a $1 bn loss on funds outstanding to Glencore, if such losses were required. If we think about it from a game theory point of view, there is the danger of a “rush for the exit” in terms of bank exposure to GLEN. As such, credit departments must, we believe, be thinking about how others in the market will consider the risk.

     

    Bottom line, given that CDS in the range of 600-800 and yields on some bonds are now 7% plus, we believe it seems unlikely that a financial institution would look to actively increase its exposure to Glencore, and potentially, to the wider commodity trading space. This scenario would suggest that, while a liquidity squeeze for the wider space may not be imminent, it cannot be ruled out over the next 12-18 months. Again, we are thinking about how risk officers will be planning for the next round of stress tests. To us, part of the latter may mean reducing exposure to commodity traders. We acknowledge that some relationship banks would likely continue to “back” the relationship but whether this will be the norm for the c. 70 banks with whom Glencore has a relationship is uncertain.

    Finally, here is BofA's punchline:

    1. Comparisons are being made with some financially leveraged companies during the 2008 Global Financial Crisis (GFC).
    2. If credit is downgraded, banks could lower their exposure to Glencore both in terms of RCFs & LCs.
    3. The high yield market is small and, our credit strategist thinks we might initially see temporary dislocations in a scenario in which GLEN were downgraded to junk.
    4. Bank stress tests could start to include commodity trader distress. This could lead to less availability and more expensive bank funding of traders.

    And just like that not only is Glencore confirmed to be systemically important (something we knew when we exposed an "academic" hack's paid report to guarantee that commodity traders were not a systemic risk, confirming they are preicsely that) but suddenly – now that this warning is "out there" and even the most clueless credit, and equity, analyst who is stuck holding billions in losses to GLEN will have no excuse to say they "had no idea" – the negative convexity of bank exposure means that all those very banks which have $100 billion in exposure to the giant commodity trading company will quietly do their best to hedge their exposure, ostensbilty by buying default protection adding even more stress to Glencore's "shadow" funding channels, in the process unleashing the very same chain of events that ultimately led to Lehman's downfall.

    *  *  *

    It appears the credit markets are well aware of the systemic risks that Glencore poses…

  • Stock-Buying-Frenzy Continues Amid Longest VIX "Losing" Streak Since 2011

    Today in stocks, summarized…

     

    Before we start, this is perhaps the most important chart that no one is talking about…

     

    As The longest VIX Losing Streak Since 2011 lifts stocks…

     

    Markets ramped overnight (as shown by futures), stumbled a bit on weak EU data, then rallied on weak EU data (lol) then dumped on crude's invbentory build only to be ramped on VIX smash…

     

    The bounce occurred as S&P and Dow touched unchanged on the day…

     

    Post-Payrolls, Small Caps remain the big winner and Nasdaq the laggard (but they are all up notably)…

    TS CASH WEEK

     

    VIX was smashed to the lows of the day after Europe closed to send stocks back ramping towards the day's highs…

     

    S&P 500 briefly broke its 50-day moving average and traded as high as 1999.31 before fading back…

     

    Biotechs gained around 1-2% today as the slumping sector triggered a 'death cross'

     

    Spot The Difference…

     

    But financial credit markets remain notably more worried…

     

    GoPro NoMo… Looks like Camera-On-A-Stick will not be The Next Big Thing after all.. but but but social media.. content…

     

    YUM Yuck… biggest drop since Oct 2002… as Death Cross strikes…

     

    As Digicell pulled its IPO yesterday, Pure Storage (the biggest VC-backed IPO of 2015) was ugly…

     

    Treasury yields rose 3-5bps, pushing everything 2Y yields back above pre-payrolls levels...the european selling, US/Asia buying pattern remains in place

     

    USD drifted sideways all day (still weaker post payrolls) as AUD strength continues to stun…

     

    Commodities drifted higher early on but gold & silver were slammed going into the open and crude dumped after DOE inventory data…

     

    Crude's exuberant ramp is routed…

     

    Why did Oil drop? Well apart from the production surge and inventory build, this is why…

    In his 30 years of trading, commodities king Dennis Gartman has seen all types of markets. And now he says he's the most bullish he's ever been on crude oil.

    "If you watch the term structure in the futures, you've seen the contango narrow. Crude is no longer aggressively bidding for storage as it was it was six or seven weeks ago," said the Gartman Letter Editor Tuesday on CNBC's " Fast Money ." "I think you've seen the lows."

    Oil and energy stocks decoupled this afternoon..

     

    Silver remains the biggest winner post-Payrolls…

     

    This is silver's best 4-day run since August 2013 – with a break back above the 200-day moving-average…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

  • Hillary Flip-Flops On TPP – Shuns Obama's Trade Plan After Publicly Supporting It 45 Times

    In what seems like a nervous populist move amid Bernie Sanders' gains, Hillary Clinton has flip-flopped rather stunningly to oppose President Obama's Trans-Pacific Partnership. Despite supporting the bill at least 45 times, as CNN's Jake Tapper points out, Clinton told PBS' Judy Woodruff Wednesday in Iowa that, "As of today, I am not in favor of what I have learned about it." It's also a departure from the Clinton legacy, as CNN notes, it was President Bill Clinton who, two decades ago, signed the first mega-regional pact: the North American Free Trade Agreement.

     

    As CNN reports, Hillary Clinton came out against the Trans Pacific Partnership in an interview Wednesday, breaking with President Barack Obama and his administration, which has forcefully promoted the deal.

    Clinton told PBS' Judy Woodruff Wednesday in Iowa that, "As of today, I am not in favor of what I have learned about it."

     

    The former secretary of state cited the "high bar" she set earlier in the year as the reason she was giving the deal a thumbs down.

     

    "I have said from the very beginning that we had to have a trade agreement that would create good American jobs, raise wages and advance our national security and I still believe that is the high bar we have to meet" Clinton said, adding later, "I don't believe it's going to meet the high bar I have set."

     

    Clinton's position on the massive 12-nation trade deal that is a staple of the Obama administration's foreign policy in the region has been a festering question ever since the former secretary of state launched her bid for the White House.

     

    Clinton told reporters earlier this year that she did not want to comment on the trade deal until it was finalized, something that happened earlier this month.

    As secretary of state, Clinton actively advocated for the TPP. In fact, she did so 45 times between 2010 and 2013…

    as members of the Obama administration can attest, Clinton was one of the leading drivers of the TPP when Secretary of State. Here are 45 instances when she approvingly invoked the trade bill about which she is now expressing concerns:

    1. January 31, 2013: Remarks on American Leadership at the Council on Foreign Relations

    "First and foremost, this so-called pivot has been about creative diplomacy:Like signing a little-noted treaty of amity and cooperation with ASEAN that opened the door to permanent representation and ultimately elevated a forum for engaging on high-stakes issues like the South China Sea. We've encouraged India's "Look East" policy as a way to weave another big democracy into the fabric of the Asia Pacific. We've used trade negotiations over the Trans-Pacific Partnership to find common ground with a former adversary in Vietnam. And the list goes on."

    2. January 18, 2013: Remarks With Japanese Foreign Minister Fumio Kishida

    "We also discussed the Trans-Pacific Partnership and we shared perspectives on Japan's possible participation, because we think this holds out great economic opportunities to all participating nations."

    3. November 29, 2012: Remarks at the Foreign Policy Group's "Transformational Trends 2013 Forum"

    "…let me offer five big-ticket agenda items that we absolutely have to get right as well. This starts with following through on what is often called our pivot to the Asia Pacific, the most dynamic region in our rapidly changing world. Much of the attention so far has been on America's increasing military engagement. But it's important that we also emphasize the other elements of our strategy. In a speech in Singapore last week, I laid out America's expanding economic leadership in the region, from new trade agreements like the Trans-Pacific Partnership to stepped-up efforts on behalf of American businesses."

    "…We are welcoming more of our neighbors, including Canada and Mexico, into the Trans-Pacific Partnership process. And we think it's imperative that we continue to build an economic relationship that covers the entire hemisphere for the future."

    4. November 17, 2012: Delivering on the Promise of Economic Statecraft

    "And with Singapore and a growing list of other countries on both sides of the Pacific, we are making progress toward finalizing a far-reaching new trade agreement called the Trans-Pacific Partnership. The so-called TPP will lower barriers, raise standards, and drive long-term growth across the region. It will cover 40 percent of the world's total trade and establish strong protections for workers and the environment. Better jobs with higher wages and safer working conditions, including for women, migrant workers and others too often in the past excluded from the formal economy will help build Asia's middle class and rebalance the global economy. Canada and Mexico have already joined the original TPP partners. We continue to consult with Japan. And we are offering to assist with capacity building, so that every country in ASEAN can eventually join. We welcome the interest of any nation willing to meet 21st century standards as embodied in the TPP, including China."

    5. November 15, 2012: Remarks at Techport Australia

    "…we need to keep upping our game both bilaterally and with partners across the region through agreements like the Trans-Pacific Partnership or TPP. Australia is a critical partner. This TPP sets the gold standard in trade agreements to open free, transparent, fair trade, the kind of environment that has the rule of law and a level playing field. And when negotiated, this agreement will cover 40 percent of the world's total trade and build in strong protections for workers and the environment."

    6. November 14, 2012: Remarks With Australian Foreign Minister Robert Carr, Australian Defense Minister Stephen Smith, and Secretary of Defense Leon Panetta

    "Our diplomats work side by side at regional organizations to address shared security challenges and hammer out new economic agreements, and we congratulate Australia upon becoming a new nonpermanent member of the Security Council. Our growing trade across the region, including our work together to finalize the Trans-Pacific Partnership, binds our countries together, increases stability, and promotes security."

    7. November 14, 2012: Remarks at the Opening of the AUSMIN Ministerial

    "That means finalizing the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which will lower trade barriers, raise labor and environmental standards, and drive growth across the region. And it includes, of course, working closely together at the upcoming East Asia Summit to advance a shared agenda."

    8. September 8, 2012: Remarks at APEC CEO Summit

    "That means pushing governments to support high-standard trade agreements like the Trans-Pacific Partnership, to drop harmful protectionist policies. It means playing by the rules, respecting workers, and opening doors qualified women. And most of all, it means doing what you do best: build, hire, and grow."

    9. August 31, 2012: Remarks With New Zealand Prime Minister Key

    PRIME MINISTER KEY: "Secretary Clinton and I discussed the broad range of issues in the Asia Pacific region as we look towards the APEC summit in Russia in around 10 days time. New Zealand warmly supports the United States rebalancing towards the Asia-Pacific and we welcome the opportunities to cooperate further. In that context, we discussed our ongoing efforts to negotiate, alongside a number of other countries, a Trans-Pacific Partnership agreement."

    SECRETARY CLINTON: "I'm also very committed to expanding investment and trade in the region, in pursuit of sustainable economic growth. Later today, I'll meet with local pearl vendors from here in the Cook Islands who are running their businesses while also protecting marine resources."

    10. July 13, 2012: Remarks to the Lower Mekong Initiative Women's Gender Equality and Empowerment Dialogue

    "We've also made workers rights a centerpiece of a new far-reaching trade agreement called the Trans-Pacific Partnership. We are working with Vietnam, Malaysia, Australia, Canada, Mexico, and others in these negotiations."

    11. July 10, 2012: Remarks With Foreign Minister Pham Binh Minh After Their Meeting

    "So we're working on expanding it through a far-reaching, new regional trade agreement called the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which would lower trade barriers while raising standards on everything from labor conditions to environmental protection to intellectual property. Both of our countries will benefit. And in fact, economists expect that Vietnam would be among the countries under the Trans-Pacific Partnership to benefit the most. And we hope to finalize this agreement by the end of the year."

    12. July 10, 2012: Remarks at American Chamber of Commerce Reception and Commercial Signings

    "Domestic and international businesses alike continue to face rules that restrict their activities, and that, in turn, deters investment and slows growth. So we are encouraging the Government of Vietnam to keep on the path of economic and administrative reform to open its markets to greater private investment. And through the Trans-Pacific Partnership, we're working with Vietnam and seven other nations to lower trade barriers throughout the region, as we ensure the highest standards for labor, environmental, and intellectual property protections. Vietnam was an early entrant to the TPP, and we're hoping we can finalize the agreement this year. And the economic analysis is that of all the countries that will be participating — Australia, Canada, Mexico, others — of all the countries participating in the TPP, Vietnam stands to benefit the most. So we're hoping to really see this agreement finalized and then watch it take off."

    13. July 8, 2012: Remarks With Foreign Minister Koichiro Gemba

    "We also discussed the opportunity to strengthen our economic relationship, and the United States welcomes Japan's interest in the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which we think will connect economies throughout the region, making trade and investment easier, spurring exports, creating jobs. The TPP is just one element of our increased focus on the Asia Pacific, but it is important that we recognize that the Japanese-American relationship is really at the cornerstone of everything we are doing in the Asia Pacific. We are not only treaty allies; we are friends and partners with common interests and shared values."

    14. April 30, 2012: Remarks With Secretary of Defense Leon Panetta, Philippines Foreign Secretary Albert del Rosario, and Philippines Defense Secretary Voltaire Gazmin After Their Meeting

    "Finally, we discussed the maturing economic relationship between our countries as well as our shared commitment to enhanced development, trade, and investment. We would like to see the Philippines join the Trans-Pacific Partnership trade community. The foreign secretary raised the Philippines' interest in seeking passage of the Save our Industries Act, and we have conveyed that message to the United States Congress."

    15. April 12, 2012: Remarks at the White House Conference on Connecting the Americas

    "Now President Obama and I have said many times that this will be America's Pacific century, and we are focused on the broader Pacific. But remember, the Pacific runs from the Indian Ocean to the western shores of Latin America. We see this as one large area for our strategic focus. That's why we're working with APEC; that's why we're creating the Trans-Pacific Partnership. We recognize the mutual benefits of engagement between the Americas and the rest of the Pacific."

    16. April 10, 2012: Forrestal Lecture at the Naval Academy

    "As part of that same trip last November, the President built momentum for a new far-reaching trade agreement called the Trans-Pacific Partnership that we are negotiating with eight other countries in the Asia-Pacific region. This agreement is not just about eliminating barriers to trade, although that is crucial for boosting U.S. exports and creating jobs here at home. It's also about agreeing on the rules of the road for an integrated Pacific economy that is open, free, transparent, and fair. It will put in place strong protections for workers, the environment, intellectual property, and innovation — all key American values. And it will cover emerging issues such as the connectivity of regional supply chains, the competitive impact of state-owned enterprises, and create trade opportunities for more small-and-medium-sized businesses."

    17. April 21, 2012: Keynote Address At Global Business Conference

    "Big or small, we're standing up for an economic system that benefits everyone, like when our Embassy in Manila worked with Filipino authorities on new intellectual property protections or when our negotiators ensure that the new Trans-Pacific Partnership requires that state-owned enterprises compete under the same rules as private companies."

    18. February 1, 2012: Remarks With Singaporean Foreign Minister and Minister for Law K. Shanmugam

    "This is a very consequential relationship. The multidimensional growth of our relationship with Singapore is an example of the importance that the United States sets on strengthening our engagement in the Asia Pacific. We are working together on a full range of issues, including moving forward on a high-quality trade agreement through the Trans-Pacific Partnership process."

    19. December 19, 2011: Remarks With Japanese Foreign Minister Koichiro Gemba After Their Meeting

    "The minister and I also discussed a number of bilateral and regional issues and reviewed the close and ongoing collaboration between Japan and the United States in the aftermath of last March's earthquake, tsunami, and nuclear crisis. We discussed Japan's recent move to pursue consultations on joining the Trans-Pacific Partnership negotiations to resolve longstanding trade concerns in order to deepen the economic ties to the benefit of both our countries. I also urged that Japan take decisive steps so that it accedes to The Hague Convention on International Parental Child Abduction and address outstanding cases."

    20. November 18, 2011: Remarks at ASEAN Business and Investment Summit

    "Now let me describe briefly four ways that we want to work with you: first, by lowering trade barriers; second, by strengthening the investment climate; third, by pursuing commercial diplomacy; and fourth, by supporting entrepreneurs. We're excited about the innovative trade agreement called the Trans-Pacific Partnership, or TPP. That would bring economies from across the Pacific, developed and developing alike, into a single trading community, not only to create more growth, but better growth."

    21. November 16, 2011: Presentation of the Order of Lakandula, Signing of the Partnership for Growth And Joint Press Availability With Philippines Foreign Secretary Albert Del Rosario

    "Together we hope to deliver an array of benefits to the people, including more foreign investment to create new jobs, a more streamlined court system that can deliver justice and protect local businesses, better services, and more resources to fight poverty. Over time, these steps will better position the Philippines to join the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which we hope will dramatically increase trade and investment among the peoples of the Pacific."

    22. November 10, 2011: America's Pacific Century

    "There is new momentum in our trade agenda with the recent passage of the U.S.-Korea Free Trade Agreement and our ongoing work on a binding, high-quality Trans-Pacific Partnership, the so-called TPP. The TPP will bring together economies from across the Pacific, developed and developing alike, into a single 21st century trading community. A rules-based order will also be critical to meeting APEC's goal of eventually creating a free trade area of the Asia Pacific."

    23. October 14, 2011: Economic Statecraft

    One of America's great successes of the past century was to build a strong network of relationships and institutions across the Atlantic — an investment that continues to pay off today. One of our great projects in this century will be to do the same across the Pacific. Our Free Trade Agreement with South Korea, our commitment to the Trans-Pacific Partnership, are clear demonstrations that we are not only a resident military and diplomatic power in Asia, we are a resident economic power and we are there to stay."

    24. September 15, 2011: Celebrating 60 years of the U.S.-Australia Alliance

    "We are working to encourage trade through the Trans-Pacific Partnership and through APEC, whose leaders the President will be hosting this fall in Hawaii. Together, we are strengthening regional institutions like the East Asia Summit and ASEAN. And as Secretary Panetta will explain, our military relationship is deepening and becoming even more consequential."

    25. July 25, 2011: Remarks on Principles for Prosperity in the Asia-Pacific

    "That is the spirit behind the Trans-Pacific Partnership, the so-called TPP, which we hope to outline by the time of APEC in November, because this agreement will bring together economies from across the Pacific—developed and developing alike—into a single trading community."

    26. July 20, 2011: Remarks on India and the United States: A Vision for the 21st Century

    "The United States is pushing forward on comprehensive trade deals like the Trans-Pacific Partnership and our free trade agreement with South Korea. We are also stepping up our commercial diplomacy and pursuing a robust economic agenda at APEC. India, for its part, has concluded or will soon conclude new bilateral economic partnerships with Singapore, Malaysia, Japan, South Korea, and others. The more our countries trade and invest with each other and with other partners, the more central the Asia Pacific region becomes to global commerce and prosperity, and the more interest we both have in maintaining stability and security. As the stakes grow higher, we should use our shared commitment to make sure that we have maritime security and freedom of navigation. We need to combat piracy together. We have immediate tasks that we must get about determining."

    27. May 17, 2011: Secretary Clinton's Remarks With New Zealand Foreign Minister Murray McCully

    "We looked ahead to the East Asia summit where President Obama will participate for the first time, and the United States will send our largest, most senior delegation ever to the Pacific Island Forum in New Zealand later this year. We talked about developments in Fiji, and both New Zealand and the United States agree that the military junta must take steps to return Fiji to democracy. And we agree on the importance of pursuing negotiations on the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which will provide a free trade agreement for nine countries across the region, including both of ours. We're making steady progress on this. We hope to be able to have the negotiations complete by the time we all meet in Hawaii for APEC toward the end of this year."

    28. May 2, 2011: Remarks With Australian Foreign Minister Kevin Rudd After Their Meeting

    "And both of us understand the benefits of deeper economic integration and fair trade. Minister Rudd was very influential in helping us to work toward a greater, more relevant involvement in the Pacific-Asian institutions, such as joining the East Asian Summit. The Trans-Pacific Partnership, which is exploring ways to expand opportunity, is critical, and APEC and ASEAN are two other organizations where we work together."

    29. April 17, 2011: Remarks at the American Chamber of Commerce Breakfast

    "We will be hosting the 2011 APEC summit in Hawaii later this year. We are pushing to advance economic integration, remove trade barriers, and make sure that our national regulations line up in a way that encourages trade. We are also working hard on the trans-Pacific partnership, a cutting edge regional free trade agreement that would eventually cover an area responsible for over 40 percent of global trade."

    30. March 18, 2011: Remarks at the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS) on Latin America

    "As countries step up on the global stage, they will make essential contributions to helping all of us meet some of those most important challenges. Mexico, for example, made a crucial contribution to the fight against climate change through its remarkable leadership in Cancun last year. Brazil, Mexico, and Argentina in the G-20; Chile and Mexico in the OECD; Chile and Peru in the Trans-Pacific Partnership; and along with Mexico in APEC, these are all helping to build a foundation for balanced global growth, a transparent global economy, and broad-based opportunity. "

    31. March 9, 2011: Remarks at the First Senior Officials Meeting (SOM) for the Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) Forum

     

    "The United States is also making important progress on the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which will bring together nine APEC economies in a cutting-edge, next generation trade deal, one that aims to eliminate all trade tariffs by 2015 while improving supply change, saving energy, enhancing business practices both through information technology and green technologies. To date, the TPP includes Brunei, Chile, New Zealand, Singapore, Australia, Malaysia, Peru, Vietnam and the United States."

    32. January 14, 2011: Inaugural Richard C. Holbrooke Lecture on a Broad Vision of U.S.-China Relations in the 21st Century

    "We are taking steps to ensure that our defense posture reflects the complex and evolving strategic environment in the region and we are working to ratify a free trade agreement with South Korea and pursuing a regional agreement through the Trans-Pacific Partnership to help create new opportunities for American companies and support new jobs here at home. Those goals will be front and center when we host the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation Forum in Hawaii later this year."

    33: November 7, 2010: Remarks at U.S. Trade Promotion Event

    "Now, we've seen how bilateral trade benefits both sides. Our challenge now is to broaden those benefits. That means we have to look for even more opportunities to increase trade and investment between us. And it means that we work harder to broaden the benefits of trade even beyond our two countries. Australia is an important partner in negotiating the ambitious new multilateral trade deal called the Trans Pacific Partnership. Over time, we hope to deliver a groundbreaking agreement that connects countries as diverse as Peru and Vietnam with America and Australia to create a new free trade zone that can galvanize commerce, competition, and growth across the entire Pacific region."

    34. November 7, 2010: Speech and Townterview with Australian Broadcasting Company

     

    "To continue this progress, we are both pressing ahead on something called the Trans-Pacific Partnership. It's an ambitious multilateral free trade agreement that would bring together many more nations of the Pacific Rim. Australia and the United States are helping to lead those negotiations and we're also working through APEC, which the United States will host in Hawaii in 2011. We see that as a pivotal year to drive progress on internal economic changes that will open more markets and make sure that any growth is more sustainable and inclusive. And finally, we believe that the United States and Australia have been at the forefront of organize the entire region for the future."

    35. November 5, 2010: Christchurch Trade Reception Hosted by the American Chamber of Commerce

    "We are looking for ways to broaden and deepen our economic ties and build on the strong foundation we already have. And we think that the Trans-Pacific Partnership is a very exciting opportunity. This multilateral free trade agreement would bring together nine countries located in the Asia Pacific region — New Zealand and the United States, Australia, Chile, Singapore, Brunei, Peru, Vietnam, and Malaysia. By eliminating most tariffs and other trade barriers, and embracing productive policies on competition, intellectual property, and government procurement, we can spur greater trade and integration not only among the participating countries, but as a spur to the entire region."

    36. November 4, 2010: Remarks With New Zealand Prime Minister John Phillip Key and New Zealand Foreign Minister Murray Stuart McCully

    " Well, let me say that we discussed at some length, both the foreign minister and I and then the prime minister and I, the way forward on trade. We are very committed to the Trans-Pacific Partnership, and New Zealand, again, is playing a leading role. And we want to expedite the negotiations as much as possible. So we are exploring ways that we can try to drive this agenda. I am absolutely convinced that opening up markets in Asia amongst all of us and doing so in a way that creates win-win situations so that people feel that trade is in their interests."

    37. November 3, 2010: Remarks at the Pratt & Whitney Trade Event

    "That is why the United States is very pleased by Malaysia's decision to join the negotiations for the Trans Pacific Strategic Economic Partnership. This regional trade agreement will promote shared success by expanding markets and building a level playing field for workers in every country that participates."

    38. November 2, 2010: Remarks with Malaysian Foreign Minister Anifah Aman

    "Finally, we are pleased that Malaysia joined last month's negotiations for the Trans-Pacific Partnership. That is a pact that would expand markets and create a level playing field for people in every country that does participate. I know there are tough issues to work out, as there always are with these agreements, but Malaysia's leadership in this region for greater economic growth is absolutely essential."

    39. November 2, 2010: Secretary Clinton's Meeting with Kuala Lumpur Embassy Staff and Their Families

    "And I think we have tremendous opportunities here. But I know when I leave tomorrow, the work to make those opportunities into realities falls to all of you. So I know a lot is expected of you, but we're going to be doing even more in Malaysia. We have a lot of plans for educational exchanges. We have some very exciting work on the Trans-Pacific Partnership, enhancing trade and investment (inaudible) that will promote closer cooperation."

    40. November 2, 2010: Townterview Hosted by Media Prima in Malaysia

    "So in our meetings with your government officials and even in my conversation with the prime minister earlier today, we of course talked about our bilateral relationship but we also talked about the role that Malaysia is playing in the Trans-Pacific Partnership, a new free trade agreement that will enhance market access, but also working to support Afghanistan and the people there with training and medical services."

    41. October 30, 2010:Remarks With Vietnamese Foreign Minister Pham Gia Khiem

    "I n trade, our two countries have already made great progress. Fifteen years ago, our bilateral trade was about $450 million. Last year it was more than $15 billion. And the foreign minister and the prime minister and I talked about how to expand this trade relationship, including through the Trans-Pacific Partnership. The United States, Vietnam, and seven other countries finished a third round of negotiations on the TPP this month and we hope that Vietnam can conclude it in internal process and announce its status as a full member of the partnership soon."

    42. October 28, 2010: America's Engagement in the Asia-Pacific

    "We are also pressing ahead with negotiations for the Trans-Pacific Partnership, an innovative, ambitious multilateral free trade agreement that would bring together nine Pacific Rim countries, including four new free trade partners for the United States, and potentially others in the future. 2011 will be a pivotal year for this agenda. Starting with the Korea Free Trade Agreement, continuing with the negotiation of the Trans-Pacific Partnership, working together for financial rebalancing at the G-20, and culminating at the APEC Leaders Summit in Hawaii, we have a historic chance to create broad, sustained, and balanced growth across the Asia Pacific and we intend to seize that."

    43. September 8, 2010: Remarks on United States Foreign Policy

    "On the economic front, we've expanded our relationship with APEC, which includes four of America's top trading partners and receives 60 percent of our exports. We want to realize the benefits from greater economic integration. In order to do that, we have to be willing to play. To this end, we are working to ratify a free trade agreement with South Korea, we're pursuing a regional agreement with the nations of the Trans-Pacific Partnership, and we know that that will help create new jobs and opportunities here at home."

    44. July 22, 2010: Remarks With Vietnam Deputy Prime Minister And Foreign Minister Pham Gia Khiem

    "And I am very much supportive of Vietnam's participation as a full member in the Trans-Pacific Partnership. As Vietnam embarks on labor and other reforms, the American businesses that are investing in Vietnam can provide expertise that will aid Vietnam's economic and infrastructure development."

    45. January 12, 2010: Remarks on Regional Architecture in Asia: Principles and Priorities

    "In addition, the United States is engaging in the Trans-Pacific Partnership trade negotiations as a mechanism for improving linkages among many of the major Asia-Pacific economies. And to build on political progress, we must support efforts to protect human rights and promote open societies."

    *  *  *

    We leave it to NBC News' Chuck Todd to perfectly syum it all up…

     

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 7, 2015

  • Commodity Trading Giants Unleash Liquidity Scramble, Issue Record Amounts Of Secured Debt

    Earlier today, in its latest attempt to restore confidence in its brand and business model after suffering a historic stock price collapse, Glencore – whose CDS recently blew out to a level implying a 50% probability of default – released a 4 page funding worksheet which was meant to serve as a simplied summary of its balance sheet funding obligations and lending arrangements to equity research analysts who have never opened a bond indenture, and which among other things provided a simplied and watered-down estimate of what could happen if and when the company is downgraded to junk.

    Meanwhile, in a furious race to shore up as much liquidity as possible, Glencore – which a month ago announced a dramatic deleveraging plan – and its peers have been quietly scrambling to raise billions in secured funding. Case in point none other than Glencore’s biggest competitor and the largest independent oil trader in the world, Swiss-based, Dutch-owned Vitol Group, whose Swiss unit Vitol SA earlier today raised a record $8 billion in loans.

    It is not alone.

    As Bloomberg reports, another name profiled previously here, privately-held (but with publicly-traded debt) Trafigura  “won improved terms on a $2.2 billion loan refinancing deal on Oct. 1 via a group of 28 banks. Swiss commodity traders Gunvor Group Ltd. and Mercuria Energy Group Ltd. are also marketing credit facilities totaling $2 billion.”

    Louis Dreyfus Commodities, the world’s largest raw-cotton and rice trader, said in its interim report last month that it had six revolving credit facilities with staggered maturity dates totaling $3.3 billion. In June, it amended and extended its North American facilities totaling $1.6 billion and in July it refinanced a $400 million Asian lending facility with the company securing an option to request an increase of $100 million.

     

    Noble Agri, the agricultural commodity trader majority owned by China’s Cofco Corp., attracted four new lenders to its $1.58 billion one-year revolving credit facility, people familiar with the matter said this month.

    In short – a race against time to pledge as much unencumbered collateral as possible for future funding needs, because as every CEO knows you raise capital when you can, not when you have to. Yet this is odd, because even as the companies hold investor meetings and publicly comfort investors that they are adequatly funded and see no need for a liquidity-raising scramble, that’s precisely what the world’s commodity traders are doing.

    Bloomberg’s take was more optimistic: “The transactions show banks are still eager to loan money to commodity traders even after debt concerns caused by wild swings in Glencore’s stock and bond prices.”

    The new loans and refinancing signal banks are comfortable lending to commodity traders, whose business models allow them to profit from volatility and lower financing costs amid weaker prices for raw materials.

    According to Bloomberg, Vitol’s record credit facilities from a group of 57 banks were increased by a third after the initial $6 billion sought by the trading house was oversubscribed by $2.7 billion, the Rotterdam-based company said in a statement. The facilities, refinancing a debt package signed 12 months ago, are the biggest in the firm’s 49-year history, a Vitol spokeswoman in London said.

    Then comes even more spin:

    The loan package, coming after Trafigura last week agreed to lower lending rates, suggests some analysts don’t understand the business of trading houses, which can benefit from lower commodity prices and the current contango market structure that allows them to profit by storing oil because forward prices are higher than current costs.

    Actually analysts (at least credit) understand the business of trading houses very well; what Bloomberg’s reporters don’t seems to understand, however, is the principle of muturally assured megaleverage destruction, or the implied threat for a company’s secured lending syndicate that a borrower which already has billions of exposure to banks has all the leverage in demanding even more debt. After all, should Vitol fail, it would lead to a cascade of bank failures as all the banks that have lent money to the giant commodity trader are forced to charge off their exposure, in the process leading to serial defaults among undercapitalized financial institutions.

    It is these institutions whose credit officers underwrote the loans, that are the ones who “don’t understand the business of trading houses” because based on the recent collapse in publicly traded securities, they never modelled what happens to cash flows in a world in which the price of oil, copper,  zinc, aluminum or other commodities, suffer a 50%+ plunge in prices.

    “Given the recent turbulence in the commodities space, we have been repeatedly asked by investors on the banks’ exposure to commodity traders,” analysts at Sanford C. Bernstein led by Chirantan Barua wrote in a note Monday. 

    As they well should, and in order to avoid answering, the banks are perfectly happy to throw a little more good money after lots of bad money in order to avoid remarking their entire exposure to the sector to something resembling fair value.

    But the day of remarking is coming: as Bernstein calculates, commodity traders have raised at least $125 billion of debt, of which about $75 billion is loans. In other words, there is about $75 billion in secured debt, collateralized by either inventory and/or receivables collateral whose value has cratered in the past year, and as a result the LTV on the secured loans has soared. It is this that is prompting the panicked banks to be more eager to provide funds to the suddenly distressed energy-trading sector than even the borrowers themselves. And after all, if the banks do blow up, there is always the taxpayer-funded bailout as a last reserve.

    And here is a pop quiz to either analyst, or Bloomberg writers who don’t “understand the the business of trading houses” – if you issue secured debt to shore up liquidity as a result of what is fundamentally a massively overlevered capital structure, does the pro forma debt increase or decrease. This is not a trick question.

    The good news for the Vitols of the world is that by pledging even more of their unencumbered assets to banks, they buy themselves a few more months, or quarters, of liquidity to pay down upcoming maturities and interest. Which is what Glencore did with its “doomsday” plan in early September… a plan which calmed the stock for all of two weeks before investors saw right through it for what it was: a desperate scramble to put lipstick on a declining-stage supercycle pig.

    In the meantime, the end result is this: companies that are even more levered to commodity prices in a world in which at last check commodity prices, a proxy for China’s economy, are sliding. Which, incidentally, was our thesis in March of 2014 when we said that buying Glencore CDS is the best way to trade China’s hard landing. This is precisely what happened.

    Which is why both the companies, and their lending banks, better pray that commodity prices pick upin the coming weeks and months, becuase for the Vitols, the Glencores, the Trafiguras, the Mercurias and so on, that is all that matters. Ironically, by levering up even more, they bought themselves some time now, but if and when the next leg down in the commodity supercycle takes place, the pain will only be that much greater.

  • The Two Major Factors That Will Drive Markets In Q4 According To SocGen (Spoiler: Not The Fed)

    In the aftermath of the Fed’s September fiasco, in which Yellen single-handedly cost the Fed years if not decades of carefully scripted “credibility”, and more than unleashing a selloff has gotten us to the point where even Tier 1 banks admit that “market participants have started to question the effectiveness of monetary policy, with good reason”, we were shocked to learn that at least according to Socgen, the Fed is no longer a major factor driving the market in the fourth quarter.

    Here is SocGen’s explanation of how the Fed lost credibility.

    Monetary policy: central banks take a back seat

     

    Last month, neither the ECB’s threat to expand its QE programme nor the delay in the Fed’s rate hike succeeded in stopping the equity sell-off. Market participants have started to question the effectiveness of monetary policy, with good reason. With still a large debt overhang in many developed economies, further easing is unlikely to boost credit demand significantly from current levels. Moreover, easy financial conditions have led to a growing divergence between modest global growth and frothy valuations. This divergence culminated earlier this year in an S&P 500 P/B ratio at 2.9x (a level last seen on the eve of the Great Recession): a correction was overdue. Although growth is expected to remain solid in developed economies, corporates are now facing external headwinds, against which central banks have limited tools.

     

    We can only hope that SocGen is right and that the Fed will no longer be a driving force for the market, but as everyone knows this is merely a pipe dream. If anything, the Fed – which will not hike rates in 2015 – is merely taking a sabbatical until next year, when it will be forced to decide between either delivering on its promise, or losing all credibility and going straight to NIRP/QE4+.

    So if not the Fed then what, according to SocGen, will be the two major drivers behind the stock market in the last quarter of 2015? The answer:

    1) China: to remain a headwind into 2016, but…

     

    EM and, especially, commodity-dependent economies have been severely impacted by China’s slowdown this year. With globalisation, developed and emerging economies have become more integrated, thereby raising concerns of spillover effects spreading from EM to DM economies. But, DM economies seem to have been left relatively unscathed so far. This is because DM growth is mainly driven by stronger domestic spending, notably owing to lower commodity prices and better employment prospects. China should continue to weigh on global growth into 2016. But, we expect Chinese activity to stabilise somewhat near term, mostly due to a greater focus on infrastructure investment. Any sign of growth stabilisation in China could alleviate fears of a global recession: watch China’s leading indicators closely in Q4.

     

    And:

    2) Earnings: strong divergence between sectors

     

    US EPS growth has been very disappointing this year, with Q3 earnings likely to decline (yoy) for the second quarter in a row. Our Equity Quant team notes that profits growth has never been this weak outside of a recession. Consequently, risk aversion has increased, reinforced by fears of contagion across asset classes and notably the return of idiosyncratic risk in credit. The external headwinds of a strong USD, lower commodity prices and slower global demand should continue to weigh on sectors such as industrials, materials and energy. But, lower oil prices and a healthier job market (with the current soft patch likely to be transitory) are positive for US consumers, as reflected by strong spending data over the past months (+0.4% mom on average). As a result, sectors exposed to US consumption could still report solid EPS growth going forward. The eurozone recovery should also support earnings, allowing the Euro Stoxx to benefit from less demanding valuation levels.

     

    If SocGen is right then enjoy the last day before Chinese stocks reopen after its week-long holiday. As for earnings season, if today’s atrocious announcements by Yum Brands and Adobe are any indication, then not even a “recovering” China, one paradropping billions in debt rescue packages on top of insolvent banks, will be able to offset the acute earnings recession about to unfold.

  • Fortress Backs Hundred Million Dollar Subprime, Payday Lender Scheme: "He Has Peacock Feathers Tattooed Down His Left Arm"

    “I don’t hide tattoos, I don’t take earrings out. I just don’t do that, because ultimately if you don’t like who I am, you’re not going to like what I do.”

    Who knows what that is supposed to mean, but it’s a quote from Douglas Merrill who, as Bloomberg notes, “has peacock feathers tattooed down his left arm, black fingernail polish, [and] chin-length hair.”

    Two other things Douglas has are a Ph.D. in cognitive science from Princeton and the online version of a payday lender called ZestFinance. 

    Now make no mistake, payday lenders are bad because what they do is trap low-income households in a perpetual debt cycle and they do it in the name of providing credit to those who wouldn’t normally have access to it.

    In other words: the pitch is that before you think about criticizing a payday lender for charging an APR that amounts to 30%, you should actually think about whether you should be praising them for helping America’s downtrodden debt serfs get into still more debt. 

    Of course we’re employing quite a bit of trademark sarcasm here. Payday lenders have been proven time and again to be largely predatory in nature, capitalizing off of the desperation of poor people albeit with a business model that comes with substantial risk because.. well… because the business model depends on collecting interest payments from those same poor people who have just been made poorer-er-er by the fact that they took out yet another loan they most certaintly can’t afford to service. 

    Anyway, Fortress is ready to jump in on this to the tune of hundreds of millions:

    “I don’t lie about who I am,” [Merrill] said in an interview from the startup’s headquarters among the pawn shops and souvenir stores on Hollywood Boulevard in Los Angeles. “I don’t hide tattoos, I don’t take earrings out. I just don’t do that, because ultimately if you don’t like who I am, you’re not going to like what I do.”

     

    The funding from Fortress, which manages about $72 billion, will help ZestFinance make more of its Basix installment loans, which are capped at $5,000, last as long as three years and carry annual rates of up to 36 percent. Borrowers often use the money to consolidate credit-card debt or pay for medical expenses, Merrill said.

     

    His unusual appearance in the financial world is a luxury he can afford. ZestFinance is among a crop of startups leading a technology-driven push to make lending easier and cheaper. Wall Street firms and other large institutional money managers have taken note, writing big checks to participate in the fast-growing businesses.

     

    Avant Inc., one of ZestFinance’s competitors, said last week that it had raised $325 million from investors including private-equity firm General Atlantic and JPMorgan Chase & Co. Social Finance Inc., which helps borrowers from elite colleges consolidate student debt, said a day later that it raised $1 billion from investors including Japan’s SoftBank Group Corp. and affiliates of Dan Loeb’s hedge-fund firm Third Point LLC.

     

    ZestFinance gained notoriety in recent years for its approach to underwriting some of the most challenging borrowers. By sifting through oceans of data, Merrill and his colleagues created models that are being used to provide an online alternative to payday loans. Still, they’re not cheap: Some carry annual percentage rates of as high as 390 percent.

    Right.

    What could possibly go wrong here?

    Here’s a guy with a PhD lending money provided by a firm whose cost of capital is basically zero to borrowers whose credit is terrible and these loans carry APRs that approach 400%. 

    Let’s call this what it is: this is just nonsense and what will end up happening is that these loans will end up in the collateral pool of a CDO at some point and the very same hedge funds and PE houses that are providing the financing will end up betting against the loans they effectively made in a hilarious Abacus CDO redux that mainstreet with neither care about, remember, nor understand, which will be great news for Merrill and Wall Street because that means they can continue to perpetuate the business model.


  • Is Russia Plotting To Bring Down OPEC?

    Submitted by Dalan McEndree of OilPrice

    Is Russia Plotting To Bring Down OPEC?

    President Putin’s recent moves in the Middle East—to shore up Bashar al-Assad’s regime in Syria through deployment of combat aircraft, equipment, and manpower and build-out of air-, naval-, and ground-force bases, and the agreement in the last week with Iran, Iraq, and Syria on intelligence and security cooperation—could contribute to Russian efforts to combat the myriad negative pressures on Russia’s vital energy industry.

    Live by Energy…

    Energy is the foundation of Russia, its economy, its government, and its political system. Putin has highlighted on various occasions the contribution Russia’s mineral wealth, in particular oil and natural gas, must make for Russia to be able to sustain economic growth, promote industrial development, catch up with the developed economies, and modernize Russia’s military and military industry.

    Even a casual glance at the IMF’s World Economic Outlook statistics for Russia shows the tight correlation since 1992 between GDP growth on the one hand and oil and gas output, exports, and prices on the other (economic series available here). According to the IMF’s 2015 Article Iv Consultation-Press Release and Staff Report, published August 3, oil and natural gas exports comprised 65 percent of exports, 52 percent of the Federal government budget, and 14.5 percent of GDP in 2014. Including their domestic contribution, hydrocarbons represent ~30 percent of GDP.

    While oil and natural gas are crucial to Russia, Russia’s crude and natural gas are crucial to its neighbors on the Eurasian landmass. Russia supplied about 30 percent (146.6 bcm) of Europe’s natural gas in 2014, and about 25 percent of its crude (3.5 mmbbl/day) in 2013. Russia’s oil and natural gas are also important to its Asian and Central Asian neighbors.

    It is not only the commodities that make Russia crucial, but its massive land-based infrastructure for their distribution throughout the Eurasian landmass. As Tatiana Mitrova, head of the oil and gas department, Energy Research Institute, Russian Academy of Sciences, pointed out regarding natural gas in The Geopolitics of Russian Natural Gas:

    “Russia has a unique transcontinental infrastructure in the heart of Eurasia (150,000 km of trunk pipelines), which also makes it a backbone of the evolving, huge Eurasian gas market (which could include Europe, North Africa, the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), Caspian Sea region, and Northeast Asia). Control over the transportation assets in this region together with vast gas reserves make Russia the key element of this new market.”

    The land-based oil distribution network is smaller, but also important. The 4,000 km Druzhba pipeline delivers about 1 mmbbl/day of crude to Europe—about 30 percent of total shipments to Europe. In the Far East, Rosneft shipped 22.6 million tons of crude to China in 2014 through the East Siberian Pacific Ocean (ESPO) pipeline.

    The Russian government continues to seek to extend and expand the natural gas distribution infrastructure—into Europe, with various proposed pipeline projects (Nord Stream 2, Turkish Stream 2, 3, and 4, South European Pipeline), and into China, with two large pipeline projects, Power of Siberia Pipeline (to supply China from East Siberia), and the proposed Altai pipeline (to supply China from West Siberia).

    …Death by Energy

    In the last few years, the threats to Russia’s energy industry have multiplied and intensified. They pose an existential threat to the industry and therefore to the Russian economy:

    – The revenues Russia can earn from its crude and natural gas exports face intense pressure. The Saudi decision to let the market set prices and to pursue market share, has led to steep declines in crude and petroleum product prices. The decision also has impacted natural gas export prices negatively, since, for Russia’s long-term supply agreements, they wholly or partially are indexed to oil prices. The transition in Europe to hybrid natural gas pricing models (which take European spot hub prices into account) also has pressured natural gas pricing. (Natural gas data from Gazprom).

    (Click to enlarge)

    Adding to the revenue pain, natural gas export volumes have been falling, according to Gazprom (which has a monopoly on pipeline exports), as have domestic volumes within Russia:

    (Click to enlarge)

    It is therefore not surprising that the aforementioned IMF Article Iv Consultation-Press Release and Staff Report projected sharp declines in 2015 and 2016 from 2014 levels for oil export revenues ($109.8 billion and $96 billion respectively) and natural gas export revenues ($12 billion and $14.3 billion respectively).

    (Click to enlarge)

    Since these IMF projections are based on $60.1 and $65.8 per barrel prices in 2015 and 2016, oil export revenues will undershoot these pessimistic IMF projections, as crude prices are projected to stay below $60 through 2016 (EIA estimates for Brent are $54.07 and 58.57 in 2015 and 2016 respectively).

    – The U.S. and European Union’s decisions to impose—and maintain—sanctions on Russia after its invasion and annexation of Crimea and invasion and informal annexation eastern Ukraine will pile more pressure on the Russian energy industry. They include bans on financing for and the supply of critical equipment and technology to important Russian energy projects. Novatek and its partners Total and Chinese National Petroleum Company still lack $15 billion of the $27 billion needed to finance the Yamal LNG plant. Denis Khramov, Russia’s deputy Minister of Natural Resources, said September 28 at a conference in Russia’s Far East that Rosneft and Gazprom are delaying some offshore drilling by two to three years because of sanctions and low oil prices. The sanctions are also impeding Gazprom’s ability to develop the Chayandinskoye and Kovyktinskoye fields in eastern Siberia, from which it plans to supply natural gas to China under the bilateral $400 billion, thirty year deal signed in 2014.

    – Following the Russian invasion of Crimea and eastern Ukraine, The European Union is now even more determined to reduce its dependence on Russia for natural gas and to force Gazprom submit to EU competition rules. Europe has sought and continues to seek alternatives Russian natural gas (among them, U.S. LNG and Iranian pipeline and/or LNG). The European Commission, the European Union’s executive body, has refused to bless Gazprom’s proposed 55 bcm/year Nord Stream 2 natural gas pipeline project, citing existing surplus Gazprom pipeline capacity into Europe and insufficient future demand for Russian natural gas. Also, the EU Commission in April charged Gazprom with violating the EU’s anti-trust laws for anti-competitive practices and unfair pricing in Central and Eastern Europe. If found guilty, Gazprom could face substantial fines of around $1 billion. Even if Gazprom avoids fines and manages to reach a settlement with the EU, as it hopes to do, its European market share and pricing will remain under pressure into the future.

    – The emergence of the U.S., along with Canada, as powerful crude, NGL, and natural gas producers is also a major concern for the Russian economy. This has transformed the U.S. from a market for Russian crude and natural gas (via LNG) to a global competitor. If, as seems increasingly likely, the ban on crude exports is lifted, U.S. crude will compete with Russian crude in several key markets. It would also force foreign suppliers to seek other markets for all or part of the exports they previously sent to the U.S. This in turn would intensify competition among these crude exporting countries for share in those markets. In regard to natural gas, its explosive output growth in the U.S. undercut Gazprom’s rationale for its Baltic LNG project (10 mtpa), turned the U.S. into a major (potential) LNG competitor in global LNG import markets, and, via the U.S. toll- and Henry Hub- pricing model, weakened Gazprom’s ability to insist on oil-indexed, long-term contracts.

    Saving Russian Energy (and Russia) through the Middle East?

    Putin’s moves in the Middle East could help Russia address the impact of these threats to the Russian energy industry. They potentially enhance the attractiveness of Russian crude and natural gas supplies compared to those from Saudi Arabia and its Gulf Arab allies.

    In the selection of crude and natural gas suppliers, security is a key consideration for importers. Wary of U.S. naval power, the Chinese, for example, prefer pipeline natural gas supplies over seaborne LNG supplies. Importers therefore must take into consideration the potential threats to transport. In this critical area, Russia enjoys a decided advantage over Saudi Arabia and the Gulf Arab producers, which depend on sea transport through the Persian Gulf and the Red Sea to ship their oil and LNG.

    Each of the three routes from these two bodies of water passes through a “choke point” (from the Red Sea, through the Suez Canal to Europe and through the Mandeb Strait to Asia, from the Persian Gulf through the Strait of Hormuz). By adding an airbase to their military presence in Syria, the Russians—coordinating with Iran, Syrian President Assad, and eventually possibly Iraq—would have the capability to disrupt shipments from Persian Gulf and Red Sea terminals.

    Russia’s export channels are less susceptible to disruption. With the exception of LNG exports to Asia from Sakhalin, Russia sends natural gas to its customers via pipeline. About 70 percent of Russia’s seaborne oil exports are susceptible to choke points (shipments from two ports on the Gulf of Finland through the Baltic Sea to the Atlantic and one port on the Black Sea through the Turkish Strait/Bosporus to the Mediterranean), while 30 percent are not (pipeline shipments to Europe and ESPO pipeline shipments to the port of Primorsk near Vladivostok).

    Putin’s moves also are strengthening Russia’s influence with OPEC. Russia already has extensive and close ties with Iran and Venezuela, and is now laying the basis for such ties with Iraq. Putin has aligned Russia with OPEC’s have nots–the members lacking financial resources to withstand low crude prices for an extended period and that have objected to Saudi policies (Iran, Iraq, Angola, Nigeria, Libya, Algeria, Ecuador, and Venezuela)—against the haves (Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, the UAE, and Qatar). He has continually supported Venezuelan President Maduro’s calls for an emergency OPEC meeting on prices and his efforts to persuade Saudi Arabia to reverse its policy. Most recently, in the beginning of September, Putin told Maduro that the two countries “must team up to shore up oil prices”.

    In addition, Russia’s deputy prime minister in charge of energy policy, Arkady Dvorkovich, in the beginning of September made comments that, in tone and substance, mocked Saudi policy, saying that “OPEC producers are suffering the ricochet effects of their attempt to flush out rivals by flooding the world with excess output,” expressing doubt that OPEC members “really want to live with low oil prices for a long time,” and implying that Saudi policy is irrational.

    Indeed, Russia can be seen as maneuvering to split OPEC into two blocs, with Russia, although not a member, persuading the “Russian bloc” to isolate Saudi Arabia and the Gulf Arab OPEC members within OPEC. This might persuade the Saudis to seek a compromise with the have nots.

    A strategic alliance with Iran and Iraq offers Putin two more potential avenues to pressure the Saudis. They can test Saudi determination to defend their market share at any price and its wherewithal financially to do so. Iran claims it can raise crude output by one million barrels within six or so months of the lifting of sanctions. The Saudis may be calculating that Iran must first rehabilitate its oil fields and that Iran, cash poor, cannot do so quickly. If this is the case, Russia could step in, offer Iran financing, and force the Saudis to contemplate prices staying lower longer than they anticipated and therefore continuing pressure on their economy.

    Russia also could cooperate with Iran and Iraq to take market share from Saudi Arabia in the vital Chinese market. As a recent Bloomberg article pointed out, Saudi Arabia, Iran, Russia, Iraq and other countries are vying intensely for sales to China, the second largest import market and the major source of demand growth in coming years. Coordinating their pricing and consistently offering the Chinese prices below the Saudi price, they could seek to win market share. Such a price war would pressure the competitors’ currencies.

    Since the Russians allow the Ruble to float, Iran maintains an informal and unofficial peg for its Rial to the US$, and Iraq has indicated it is willing to adjust its peg if necessary, while the Saudis are committed to the Riyal’s peg to the US$, Russia, Iran, and Iraq would have any advantage over Saudi Arabia. To the extent that Iran and Iraq allowed their currencies to adjust, Russian, Iranian, and Iraqi revenues in local currency terms would not decline as much as Saudi revenues fixed in US$ (and might even increase) as their currencies depreciated.

    Results

    Each of these opportunities offers the possibility to address the pressures on the Russian energy industry. However, Putin will have to play his cards carefully. Played heavy-handedly, he could intensify fears in Europe of excessive dependence on Russian energy supplies and awaken such fears in China. This could lead the Europeans and Chinese to search for other suppliers. In addition, mismanaged confrontation with the U.S. and Europe in and over Syria could lead to broadening and strengthening of economic and financial sanctions. Moreover, neither Iran nor Iraq will want to become overly dependent on Russia, which lacks the resources they need develop their energy industries.

    Finally, the opportunities assume Putin’s gambits in Syria and with Syria, Iran, and Iraq in intelligence and security cooperation will succeed. And this, given the Soviet experience in Afghanistan and Putin’s experience in eastern Ukraine, is far from certain.

  • A "Heroic" Ben Bernanke Blames Congress For Poor Economic Recovery

    Make no mistake, Ben Bernanke is a “courageous” guy. 

    When the world was on the verge of collapse in 2008 thanks in no small part to the post dot-com bubble policies of his predecessor, the former Fed chair wants you to know that he did what was needed to save the world and he will tell you all about it in his new memoir “The Courage To Act”, which can be yours on Kindle for the weird price point of just $16.05 (or, in unconventional monetary policy terms, about a QE millisecond).

    Of course perhaps more than any other post-crisis DM central banker, Bernanke has a lot of explaining to do. That is, it isn’t immediately clear why, if Ben wants to contend that the Keynesian dominoe effect he set off in 2008 is such a success, that inflation expectations are still mired in the deflationary doldrums in Japan and Europe and why global demand and trade are stuck at stall speed.

    Of course what you do if you’re a Keynesian central planner in today’s low-growth world is blame lawmakers because after all, when monetary policy fails to bring about the promised defibrillator shock to global demand, you can always pin the whole debacle on an ineffective legislature. Here’s FT with Bernanke’s take:

    The former chairman of the Federal Reserve has hit out at Congress for failing to do its part to bolster America’s rebound from the financial crisis, saying the US central bank had been unfairly criticised when the recovery “failed to lift all boats”.

     

    In his newly published memoir, Ben Bernanke admitted the Fed had failed to spot some of the dangers building before the financial crash, and said that the controversial rescues of Bear Stearns and the insurance company AIG had damaged its political standing and “created new risks to its independence”.

     

    As suggested by the title of his book, The Courage to Act, Mr Bernanke argues that the Fed’s policies under his leadership were justified and helped usher in a stronger recovery than in many other countries. He draws a sharp contrast with the euro area, where monetary and fiscal policies had been “much tighter than demanded by economic conditions,” helping explain the miserable recovery in that economic bloc.

     


     

    Mr Bernanke levels frequent criticism at Congress in the book, calling for less confrontation and implicitly contrasting the bitter partisanship on Capitol Hill with a collegiate, consensus-building approach within the Fed.

     

    The publication come as Congress struggles to reach agreement on budget plans that would ensure highway building is funded and avoid a punishing fiscal clampdown after temporary spending measures lapse in December.

     

    Mr Bernanke writes: “The Fed can support overall job growth during an economic recovery, but it has no power to address the quality of education, the pace of technological innovation, and other factors that determine if the jobs being created are good jobs with high wages.

     

    “That’s why I often said that monetary policy was not a panacea — we needed Congress to do its part. After the crisis calmed, that help was not forthcoming. When the recovery predictably failed to lift all boats, the Fed often, I believe unfairly, took the criticism.”

    Fortunately for Bernanke’s successors at the Fed, there are now plenty of loud calls for monetary policy and fiscal policy to be merged which means that no longer will “heroes” like Ben have to worry about recalcitrant lawmakers, they’ll simply be able to order the issuance of bonds which they themselves will purchase, and as absurd as you might think that sounds, it’s where things are headed because as we outlined last month, it now looks like “they” are actually going to go “there” with the helicopter money drops. It’s just too bad Ben isn’t around to preside over the insanity.

  • Putin Has Just Put An End to the Wolfowitz Doctrine

    4-Star General Wesley Clark noted:

    In 1991, [powerful neocon and Iraq war architect Paul Wolfowitz] was the Undersecretary of Defense for Policy – the number 3 position at the Pentagon. And I had gone to see him when I was a 1-Star General commanding the National Training Center.

     

    ***

     

    And I said, “Mr. Secretary, you must be pretty happy with the performance of the troops in Desert Storm.”

     

    And he said: “Yeah, but not really, because the truth is we should have gotten rid of Saddam Hussein, and we didn’t … But one thing we did learn [from the Persian Gulf War] is that we can use our military in the region – in the Middle East – and the Soviets won’t stop us. And we’ve got about 5 or 10 years to clean up those old Soviet client regimes – Syria, Iran, Iraq – before the next great superpower comes on to challenge us.”

    (Skip to 3:07 in the following video)

     

    The hawks overthrew Soviet allies Iraq and Libya.

    And they’ve been pushing for regime change in Syria for years.

    By bombing Isis, Al Nusra and other jihadis in Syria who are focused on overthrowing Russian ally Assad, Putin has put an end to the Wolfowitz doctrine.

  • NYSE Short Interest Surges To Record, Pre-Lehman Level

    There are two ways of looking at the NYSE short interest, which as of September 15 surged by 1.4 billion to 18.4 billion shares or just shy of the level hit on July 31, 2008:

    • Either a central bank intervenes, or a massive forced buying event occurs, and unleashes the mother of all short squeezes, sending the S&P500 to new all time highs, or
    • Just as the record short interest in July 2008 correctly predicted the biggest financial crisis in history and all those shorts covered at a huge profit, so another historic market collapse is just around the corner.

    The correct answer will be revealed in the coming weeks or months.

    Source: NYSE

  • How Developed Markets Become Banana Republics: "Debt Is A Much Easier Way To Gather Consensus"

    Perhaps the most dangerous thing about where the world seems to be headed now that central bankers have not only lost credibility in the minds of investors, but in their own minds as well, is that it’s not entirely clear what will happen to society if credit suddenly dries up. 

    That is, if the central bank put finally disappears and the market is once again free to purge speculative excess and correct the rampant misallocation of capital, the days of easy money will quickly come to an end as rational actors begin to make decisions based on prudence and fundamentals rather than on the assumption that because the cost of capital is effectively zero, and because central planners will never “allow” the system to fail, credit can safely be extended to unworthy borrowers. 

    We’ll likely get an early indication regarding the market’s tolerance for a return to some semblance of normalcy in the coming months as capital markets become less forgiving towards the exceedingly uneconomic US shale space. But as mentioned above, the truly interesting question is what happens when everyone else starts to get the bankrupt shale driller treatment because after all, in a world where everybody is living on cheap credit, metaphorically speaking we’re all just broke US oil producers, surviving on debt and the willingness of our neighbors to finance that debt. 

    It’s against that backdrop that we bring you the following excerpts from RBS’ Alberto Gallo, whose latest note takes a look at the history and proliferation of the fiat regime.

    *  *  *

    From RBS

    Bretton Woods ended shortly after (1971), while Fannie, Freddie and various other programmes that followed marked the gradual change to a monetary system based on fiat currencies, and later on, on fiat credit. 

    The use of government subsidies to encourage private borrowing to purchase a house, a car, or any other goods was since then imitated in other developed countries. It was the start of the so-called let-them-eat-credit policies and the transformation of democracies into debt-based democracies. No government, wrote now RBI Governor Rajan, prefers the tough reality of declining growth or of a crisis. Debt is a much easier way to gather consensus, and to postpone structural issues.


    “Politicians are resourceful people. Their political skill lies partly in proposing solutions that keep their constituents happy without venturing into the rocky terrain of real reform. In the case of inequality, politicians know intuitively that households ultimately care most about their consumption over time; incomes are only a means to obtaining that consumption stream. A smart politician can see that if somehow the consumption of middle-class householders keeps rising, if they can afford a new car every few years and the occasional exotic holiday, and best of all, a new house, they might pay less attention to their stagnant monthly paychecks. And one way to expand consumption, even while incomes stagnate, is to enhance access to credit.”

    *  *  *

    For now, we’ll forgive the fact that that quote comes from a central banker that just days ago slashed rates by 50 bps in an epic dovish lean that surprised 51 out of 52 economists and simply note that the dynamic described above is exactly how a developed, powerhouse economy gradually becomes a banana republic and if EM continues to follow this blueprint, the roundtrip from frontier market to investment grade and then back to frontier “junk” won’t take long. 

  • The Trans-Pacific Partnership: Permanently Locking In The Obama Agenda For 40% Of The Global Economy

    Submitted by Mike Snyder of End of the American Dream

    We have just witnessed one of the most significant steps toward a one world economic system that we have ever seen.  Negotiations for the Trans-Pacific Partnership have been completed, and if approved it will create the largest trading bloc on the planet.  But this is not just a trade agreement.  In this treaty, Barack Obama has thrown in all sorts of things that he never would have been able to get through Congress otherwise.  And once this treaty is approved, it will be exceedingly difficult to ever make changes to it.  So essentially what is happening is that the Obama agenda is being permanently locked in for 40 percent of the global economy.

    The United States, Canada, Japan, Mexico, Australia, Brunei, Chile, Malaysia, New Zealand, Peru, Singapore and Vietnam all intend to sign on to this insidious plan.  Collectively, these nations have a total population of about 800 million people and a combined GDP of approximately 28 trillion dollars.

    Of course Barack Obama is assuring all of us that this treaty is going to be wonderful for everyone

    In hailing the agreement, Obama said, “Congress and the American people will have months to read every word” before he signs the deal that he described as a win for all sides.

     

    “If we can get this agreement to my desk, then we can help our businesses sell more Made in America goods and services around the world, and we can help more American workers compete and win,” Obama said.

    Sadly, just like with every other “free trade” agreement that the U.S. has entered into since World War II, the exact opposite is what will actually happen.  Our trade deficit will get even larger, and we will see even more jobs and even more businesses go overseas.

    But the mainstream media will never tell you this.  Instead, they are just falling all over themselves as they heap praise on this new trade pact.  Just check out a couple of the headlines that we saw on Monday…

    Overseas it is a different story.  Many journalists over there fully recognize that this treaty greatly benefits many of the big corporations that played a key role in drafting it.  For example, the following comes from a newspaper in Thailand

    You will hear much about the importance of the TPP for “free trade”.

     

    The reality is that this is an agreement to manage its members’ trade and investment relations — and to do so on behalf of each country’s most powerful business lobbies.

    These sentiments were echoed in a piece that Zero Hedge posted on Monday

    Packaged as a gift to the American people that will renew industry and make us more competitive, the Trans-Pacific Partnership is a Trojan horse. It’s a coup by multinational corporations who want global subservience to their agenda. Buyer beware. Citizens beware.

    The gigantic corporations that dominate our economy don’t care about the little guy.  If they can save a few cents on the manufacturing of an item by moving production to Timbuktu they will do it.

    Over the past couple of decades, the United States has lost tens of thousands of manufacturing facilities and millions of good paying jobs due to these “free trade agreements”.  As we merge our economy with the economies of nations where it is legal to pay slave labor wages, it is inevitable that corporations will shift jobs to places where labor is much cheaper.  Our economic infrastructure is being absolutely eviscerated in the process, and very few of our politicians seem to care.

    Once upon a time, the city of Detroit was the greatest manufacturing city on the planet and it had the highest per capita income in the entire nation.  But today it is a rotting, decaying hellhole that the rest of the world laughs at.  What has happened to the city of Detroit is happening to the entire nation as a whole, but our politicians just keep pushing us even farther down the road to oblivion.

    Just consider what has happened since NAFTA was implemented.  In the year before NAFTA was approved, the United States actually had a trade surplus with Mexico and our trade deficit with Canada was only 29.6 billion dollars.  But now things are very different.  In one recent year, the U.S. had a combined trade deficit with Mexico and Canada of 177 billion dollars.

    And these trade deficits are not just numbers.  They represent real jobs that are being lost.  It has been estimated that the U.S. economy loses approximately 9,000 jobs for every 1 billion dollars of goods that are imported from overseas, and one professor has estimated that cutting our trade deficit in half would create 5 million more jobs in the United States.

    Just yesterday, I wrote about how there are 102.6 million working age Americans that do not have a job right now.  Once upon a time, if you were honest, dependable and hard working it was easy to get a good paying job in this country.  But now things are completely different.

    Back in 1950, more than 80 percent of all men in the United States had jobs.  Today, only about 65 percent of all men in the United States have jobs.

    Why aren’t more people alarmed by numbers like this?

    And of course the Trans-Pacific Partnership is not just about “free trade”.  In one of my previous articles, I explained that Obama is using this as an opportunity to permanently impose much of his agenda on a large portion of the globe…

    It is basically a gigantic end run around Congress.  Thanks to leaks, we have learned that so many of the things that Obama has deeply wanted for years are in this treaty.  If adopted, this treaty will fundamentally change our laws regarding Internet freedom, healthcare, copyright and patent protection, food safety, environmental standards, civil liberties and so much more.  This treaty includes many of the rules that alarmed Internet activists so much when SOPA was being debated, it would essentially ban all “Buy American” laws, it would give Wall Street banks much more freedom to trade risky derivatives and it would force even more domestic manufacturing offshore.

    The Republicans in Congress foolishly gave Obama fast track negotiating authority, and so Congress will not be able to change this treaty in any way.  They will only have the opportunity for an up or down vote.

    I would love to see Congress reject this deal, but we all know that is extremely unlikely to happen.  When big votes like this come up, immense pressure is put on key politicians.  Yes, there are a few members of Congress that still have backbones, but most of them are absolutely spineless.  When push comes to shove, the globalist agenda always seems to advance.

    Meanwhile, the mainstream media will be telling the American people about all of the wonderful things that this new treaty will do for them.  You would think that after how badly past “free trade” treaties have turned out that we would learn something, but somehow that never seems to happen.

    The agenda of the globalists is moving forward, and very few Americans seem to care.

  • Russian Embassy Trolls Saudi Arabia On Twitter

    As regular readers and foreign policy critics the world over are no doubt acutely aware, the US, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, and Turkey have gotten themselves in a bit of a quagmire in Syria and Moscow has been keen on pointing it out. Still, The Kremlin has thus far observed some semblance (and we do emphasize the word “some”) of decorum in criticizing the West’s approach as Moscow has generally confined its scolding to what at least seem like serious foreign policy critiques. 

    That just went out the window – Russia is now openly mocking Riyadh, Doha, and Washington and as if the following weren’t brazen enough as it stands, note that it emanates from the UAE… 

  • The Phrase That Launches Recessions

    Submitted by Pater Tenenbrarum of Acting Man

    It Can’t Get Any Worse?

    On Friday, shortly after the release of the payrolls report, we asked half in jest whether the time had finally come for the market to interpret bad news as bad news, and not as an opportunity to speculate on more central bank largesse. As someone remarked to us later: “You had to ask”.

    Photo credit: Paul Cross

     

    Apparently a slightly later released news item informing us that “factory orders hit the skids” was taken as a buy signal of the “it can’t get any worse” sort. Normally it is considered bullish when the market rises on ostensibly bad news – and very often, this is actually the correct interpretation of such market action. However, one must be careful when the fundamental backdrop is subject to severe deterioration. Readers may recall that commentary on the markets was brimming over with the same type of argument in late 2007 and early 2008. In October 2007, the market in its unending wisdom priced the shares of Fannie Mae at $73 for instance.

     

    S&P 500, 10 minute chart

    SPX, 10 minute chart – after initially sliding on Friday, the market quickly recovered and has rallied quite a bit since then 
    click to enlarge.

     

    The point is this: Although as a trader one must always respect market action, especially in the short term, one must at the same time avoid to ascribe to the mass of market participants a degree of wisdom they simply don’t possess. The market very often “knows” nothing and frequently tends to get things completely wrong. If that were not so, there would never be any buying or selling opportunities, but plenty of those obviously exist.

     

    The “Throwing of the Light Switch”

    Anyway, over the weekend we caught up a little on our reading, and inter alia came across an article at Wolfstreet a friend had pointed out to us, which discusses the recent weakness in US manufacturing data.

    What struck us was a comment made by the CEO of a manufacturing company in the context of the latest Kansas manufacturing survey release. As Wolf street notes, according to the survey, “the future composite index and the indexes for the future production, shipments, and new orders all dropped to their worst levels since 2009”. Here is what the CEO said:

    “It feels like someone just flipped the switch to ‘off’ without any concrete reasoning,” one of the executives commented.

    (emphasis added)

    We immediately recognized that phrase – we have heard it twice before, and it has stuck with us ever since. In fact, we have mentioned it a few times when occasion demanded in past articles. The first time we heard this phrase was in late 2000, in an interview with the CEO of a telecom equipment provider. Paraphrasing: “It’s as if someone had just thrown a light switch – orders have suddenly disappeared”.

    The next time we heard the phrase uttered was in late 2007 – this time in connection with a mortgage credit company. Ever since, we have filed it away as an anecdotal reference to the onset of recessions. And lo and behold, the phrase is popping up again in a district manufacturing survey.

    Over the weekend we also looked at the latest EWI financial forecast (a monthly publication focused on US markets). In one section, the authors discuss the recent prevalence of individual stocks and corporate bonds crashing even while the market as a whole seems to be holding up relatively well. They also ponder whether certain corners of the bond market that are lately attracting funds from those fleeing the junk bond market for their perceived safety are really as safe as is widely assumed. The following turn of phrase stood out to us in this context:

    “Our view is that Glencore’s “flash crash” will turn out to be one of many “light-switch” declines, and not just in commodity-related businesses. Already, a plethora of stocks in a wide range of industries have quietly crashed over 50% this year. The industries range from specialty retail (Aeropostale, -78%) to coffee (Keurig Green Mountain, -67%) to semiconductors (Micron Technology, -61%) and the Internet (Groupon, -61%).”

     

    [and further below, in the discussion of corporate debt]:

     

    “As the charts of Glencore’s stock and its credit default swaps illustrate, the “light switch” moments are starting to appear.”

    (emphasis added)

    So there you have the same phrase again, only this time in connection with financial market behavior. As the accompanying chart shows, junk bond spreads are exhibiting a distinct similarity to how they looked just ahead of the most recent recessions and bear markets:

     

    Spreads

    Junk bond spreads with a proposed wave count by EWI – click to enlarge..

     

    This synchronicity in this turn of phrase is of course not a coincidence – both the sudden disappearance of manufacturing orders and the “quiet flash crashes” of individual stocks from a wide range of industries coupled with persistent weakness in junk bonds, are symptoms of the same underlying phenomenon.

    Conclusion

    When we see the phrase about a “light switch suddenly being flipped to ‘off’” or a variant thereof popping up in reports about the economy or descriptions of market behavior, our ears are perking up. Admittedly, a sample of two is not exactly the mother of all sample sizes. Then again, anecdotal evidence is by its nature not statistical, but rather reflects the perceptions of people, in this case people intimately involved with the underlying businesses or markets.

    We tend to believe that such evidence is actually important. Both in 2000 and 2007 we encountered this phrase shortly after the stock market (in the form of the S&P 500) had put in an all time high or a retest of an all time high. Even the very first time in 2000 it struck us as significant. The reason in this case was that only half a year earlier, there had been much talk of “equipment shortages” and even (hold on to your hat ) “DRAM shortages”.

    When manufacturers see their orders suddenly dry up, something is very wrong in the economy already (note also, this tends to happen before any material effects on employment become evident. A sudden rise in initial claims would definitely cinch it). In light of this, stock market rebounds, even impressive ones, should be viewed with a healthy dose of skepticism.

    Charts by: StockCharts, Elliott Wave International

  • Barry Diller: "If Trump Wins I'll Move Out Of The Country"

    IAC/Interactive Chairman Barry Diller spoke with Bloomberg’s Erik Schatzker about many things including the state of the TV industry, Tinder, and Jack Dorsey at the Bloomberg Markets Most Influential Summit in New York today. However, the one thing that caught our attention was the prominent Democrat’s characterization of what he would do if Donald Trump wins the presidential election.

    His quote:

    “If Donald Trump doesn’t fall, I’ll either move out of the country or join the resistance. I just think it’s a phenomenon of reality television as politics and I think that that is how it started. Reality television, as you all know, is based on conflict. All he is is about conflict and it’s all about the negative conflict. He’s a self-promoting huckster who found a vein, a vein of meanness and nastiness.”

    //

    The reality is that many, if not most US corporate executives, comfortable with the close relationship their money has with D.C. career politicians whom they know they can buy and manipulate without reproach, share Diller’s sentiment.

    Which is why one wonders if despite all his various misgivings, having Trump in the oval office may well be worth if only for the mass exodus of all those who have co-opted US democracy, who have equated corporations with people, who have put the “crony” in crony capitalism, and who have been the sole beneficiaries of the $3 trillion in Fed asset purchases to date, purchases which are set to continue shortly.

  • Oct 7 – IMF Warns On Worst Global Growth Since Financial Crisis

    EMOTION MOVING MARKETS NOW: 30/100 FEAR

    PREVIOUS CLOSE: 32/100 FEAR

    ONE WEEK AGO: 13/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE MONTH AGO: 10/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE YEAR AGO: 5/100 EXTREME FEAR

    Put and Call Options: NEUTRAL During the last five trading days, volume in put options has lagged volume in call options by 30.48% as investors make bullish bets in their portfolios. This is a lower level of put buying than has been the norm during the last two years and is a neutral indication.

    Market Volatility:  NEUTRAL The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 19.40. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

    Stock Price Strength: FEAR The number of stocks hitting 52-week lows exceeds the number hitting highs and is at the lower end of its range, indicating fear.

     

    PIVOT POINTS

    EURUSD | GBPUSD | USDJPY | USDCAD | AUDUSD | EURJPY | EURCHF | EURGBPGBPJPY | NZDUSD | USDCHF | EURAUD | AUDJPY 

    S&P 500 (ES) | NASDAQ 100 (NQ) | DOW 30 (YM) | RUSSELL 2000 (TF) Euro (6E) |Pound (6B)

    EUROSTOXX 50 (FESX) | DAX 30 (FDAX) | BOBL (FGBM) | SCHATZ (FGBS) | BUND (FGBL)

    CRUDE OIL (CL) | GOLD (GC) | 10 YR T NOTE | 2 YR T  NOTE | 5 YR T NOTE | 30 YR TREASURY BONDSOYBEANS | CORN

     

    MEME OF THE DAY – BEIJING AFTER VOLKSWAGEN

     

    UNUSUAL ACTIVITY

    FOLD .. JAN 9 and 10 CALLS on the offer

    MDT activity in the NOV 72.5 CALLS

    FUND  Senior Portfolio Manager P    18,231  A  $ 5.9175

    LPCN – President and CEO P    2,000  A  $ 12  P    700  A  $ 11.6799 P    1,300  A  $ 11.676

    More Unusual Activity…

    HEADLINES

     

    IMF warns on worst global growth since financial crisis

    IMF: Fed should wait for firmer inflation before hiking

    IMF sees China slowdown risks, urges Beijing to float yuan

    EIA raises 2015 global oil demand forecast

    Opec sees oil market stabilising, says low prices will not persist

    CA Ivey Purchasing Managers Index SA Sep: 53.7 (est 54; prev 58)

    ECB Liikanen: ECB should avoid hasty QE action, stay patient

    Fonterra dairy prices +9.9%

     

    GOVERNMENTS/CENTRAL BANKS

    IMF warns on worst global growth since financial crisis –FT

    IMF: Fed Shld Await ‘Firmer Signs’ Infl Rising Before Liftoff –MNI

    Atlanta Fed GDPNow Forecast 1.1% (prev 0.9%)

    ECB Liikanen: ECB shouldn’t take hasty policy response to recent inflation decline –BZ

    Ifo: Eurozone Recovery Driven By Domestic Demand

    EU to close tax loopholes for multinationals –CNBC

    UK FCA Introduces New Rules On Whistleblowing

    Fitch: Portugal Vote Means Policy Continuity but Some Risks

    RBA satisfied Australia’s economy ‘weathering the storm’ –AFR

    TPP : With deal’s details still a mystery, Japan parliament unlikely to meet –Nikkei

    FIXED INCOME

    US sells 3-year notes at 0.895% vs 0.901% WI –ForexLive

    Treasury yields turn lower after IMF cuts global-growth outlook –MW

    COMMENT: Has Liquidity Risk in the Treasury and Equity Markets Increased? –NY Fed Liberty Street Economics

    FX

    EUR: EURUSD shows first 55DMA/200DMA Golden Cross in 16 mths –Laidi

    SWIFT: Yuan overtakes Japanese Yen as world?s 4th largest payment currency –People

    IDR: Indonesia?s Rupiah Logs Biggest One-Day Gain In Over Six Years –WSJ

    ENERGY/COMMODITIES

    WTI futures settle +4.9% at $48.53 per barrel

    Brent futures settles +5.4% at $51.92 per barrel

    Oil rises, as market eyes less U.S. output, Saudi-Russia talks –Rtrs

    Opec chief: Could See 2016 Non-OPEC Supply Growth Of Zero Or Negative –Rtrs

    Opec: Global Oil to Cut Spending by $130 Billion –WSJ

    EIA: Crude Output to Fall Through mid 2016, Price Outlook Same –MNI

    IEA’s Birol: Oil upstream investment drop is biggest in history –Rtrs

    EQUITIES

    EARNINGS: PepsiCo revenue beats as North America sales rise –CNBC

    EARNINGS: Strong dollar drags on SABMiller earnings –FT

    M&A: AmerisourceBergen buys Pharmedium Healtchare for $2.575bn –Biz Wire

    M&A: Suncor seeking to win over investors on Canadian Oil Sands bid –BBG

    M&A: Johnson Controls is in early stage talks to buy EnerSys –DJ

    GREECE: Greece’s Piraeus Port Sale Delayed A Few Weeks –Rtrs

    FUNDS: Bain to liquidate $2.2bln absolute return capital fund –BBG

    CONSUMER: Tesco And Fraud Office Hold Talks Over Deal –Sky

    TECH: EU says Facebook Data Transfer Deal Invalid –Sky

    AUTOS: VW scandal: staff told all carmaker’s investments are under review –Guardian

    C&E: Shell boss sees signs of oil price recovery but warns of ‘spike’ –Guardian

    C: DuPont Co. chief Ellen Kullman will retire at mid-month, company says –NJ

    M&A: Irish central bank opposes takeover of forex broker Avatrade –ForexLive

    LetterOne in talks to acquire Eon oil and gas assets –FT

    Bombardier offered to sell majority stake in troubled CSeries program to Airbus, sources say

    EMERGING MARKETS

    IMF sees China slowdown risks, urges Beijing to float yuan –Rtrs

    Polish Central Bank Holds Rates, As Expected –Nasdaq

     

    Fitch: Lower Russian Bank Capital Ratio Would Be Credit Negative

  • Earnings Still Matter

    From the Slope of Hope: Many years ago, if you asked someone what drove stock prices, they would give you a simple, honest answer: earnings. If a company had strong earnings, and those earnings were projected to grow, then the stock price was strong. If not, then not.

    Take a time machine back to that same person and tell them about the new world in which what drives stock prices is the USD/JPY. Yep, the ratio of the US dollar to the Japanese Yen is what everyone follows, pip by pip (tonight being yet another example, as everyone is tied up in knots as to what that chortling buffoon Kurado is going to announce). What the USD/JPY has to do with honest-to-God equity value is beyond me.

    In spite of this, earnings still matter, and as we head into another earnings season, the bulls better pray to whatever pagan gods they worship that company after company magically defy the downturn that the economy is quite obviously entering. It isn’t off to a good start this evening, however, as the charts below show.

    First off, there is YUM, which is the organization that owns the fine dining establishments Kentucky Fried Chicken, Taco Bell, and Pizza Hut. I guess even the morbidly obese typical American gastropod has had his fill over low-quality, over-salted, over-greased crap that these dreadful little venues crank out, as the stock has lost nearly one-fifth of its market cap after hours (after having already dropped substantially in recent months):

    1006-YUM

    Software make Adobe is having a relatively gentle time of it, as its percentage loss is (as of this writing, at least) still confined to the single digits. All the same, it’s pretty ugly out there.

    1006-ADBE

    These are just two companies out of the thousands that will be reporting in the weeks ahead. Let’s hope this is representative of plenty of bad news to come.

  • SocGen Models A Chinese Hard-Landing; Sees The S&P Crashing 60%

    Now that even permabulls are openly discussing a recession as a possibility for the US economy, a comparable and far more dire scenario is making the mainstream rounds: a China hard-landing.

    Earlier today, SocGen decided to model out what what would happen to equities in just such a scenario. In fact, it took it one step further and combined this with what an “EM lost decade”, one which increasingly looks more realistic, would look like.

    This is what it found:

    Our model indicates the US equity market could potentially drop by 30% in the event of an ‘EM lost decade’ and by 60% in the event of a China hard landing (i.e. S&P 500 back to its lows).

    The silver lining will depend on just how aggressive the response to such a collapse will be:

    The amplitude of the correction would be a function of the policy response. In both scenarios, we think global equities would rebound strongly after
    having overshot (i.e. equities to price in a more optimistic scenario).

    SocGen then provides the following seven investment recommendations for what would be more or less an apocalypse for risk assets:

    While the above are largely self-exlanatory, SocGen adds the following explainer:

    The 2015 summer sell-off highlighted how nervous the markets are regarding any risk coming from China: the S&P 500 index lost 11% in one week, the Eurostoxx 50 fell 16% and the Nikkei was down 13%. Whatever the scenario (hard landing or EM lost decade), if China’s GDP growth were to drop by c. 2% between 2015 and 2016, volatility would jump and the equity market would price in a lack of future growth (i.e. via a spike in the risk premium).

    And some more details:

    ‘EM lost decade’ scenario: a square root-shaped equity market

     

    Stressing our equity risk premium model indicates that the S&P 500 could potentially drop by 30% to 1400pts due to a strong move in the risk premium during 2016. In such a scenario, the market could quickly rebound (by year-end 2016) in line with commodity prices. We would expect support from central banks and the resilience of the US and European economies to support developed equity markets, which should gradually recover, albeit to a lower level. We thus imagine a square root-shaped scenario in which European equities would underperform US equities, but would then rebound stronger (on the back of a lower oil price, weaker currency, a more aggressive ECB and more attractive valuations).

     

    ‘Chinese hard-landing’ scenario: a V-shaped equity market trend

     

    In our hard-landing scenario, a theoretical drop in China’s GDP growth from 6.9% in 2015 to 3.0% in 2016 and its consequences would have a major impact on global corporate earnings. We would expect a sharp sell-off of global equities in such a scenario. Our risk premium model indicates that the S&P 500 could in theory return to its lows (around 800pts). But then again the deflationist shock could prompt the central banks to turn more aggressive and support the equity markets to prevent the S&P 500 from sliding into such a bear market. We think that after such a shock the global equity market would rebound strongly on a return to growth in China and central banks actions.

    * * *

    So while hardly coming as a surprise to anyone, the resultant devastation across global equity markets will mean that more than even a US recession, this explains why the Fed’s 4th mandate is precisely one that focuses on both Chinese markets and the economy, because suddenly the Fed has realized that the biggest risk to the S&P 500 is not domestic, but one stemming from China whose jugging of a real estate, credit, investment, banking and equity bubble will surely take up all the Fed’s resources in the coming years.

  • Silver Coin Premiums Soar Above 50%

    Courtesy of Sharelynx’ Nick Laird who tracks precious metal premium by vendor, we continue our recent series showing the discrepancy between paper and physical metals, in this case silver. As Nick notes, APMEX price premiums are a lot higher than the Monex. And as can be seen in the charts below, premiums rose above 50% for 1-19 coins & above 40% for 500 plus coins.

     

    For now, gold is stable.

  • Biotechs Butchered As Oil Orgasms In Otherwise Uneventful Day

    Update: both YUM and ADBE are crashing at this moment, the first down 16%, the second down 11%, after both admitted they had been “overoptimistic” and cut and guided lower. YUM Q3 revenue was $3.43bn, vs Exp. $3.66bn and EPS was $1.00 vs Exp. $1.06, while ADBE said it now expecteds EPS of $2.70 vs previous expectations of $3.20, on revenue of $5.7bn vs $5.94bn prior.

    ***

    After soaring some 100 points since the terrible Friday payrolls data, and nearly 6% in the past week…

     

    … today the S&P went very much nowhere, even despite yet another solid push in the USDJPY overnight…

     

    … which was subsequently picked up by the 5Y as the correlation between TSYs and equities promptly became dominant while the announcement of the 12% cut in DuPont EPS served to push the stock as much as 12% higher on hopes the company will promptly agree to become the latest actvist fodder, one which will issue billions in debt to fund stock buybacks.

     

    All throughout the day, the dollar index (DXY) continued to slide, and closed at the LOD, rapidly approaching the pre-FOMC level.

    But the real story of the day was the bifurcation between momo stocks, manifested in this case by biotechs which were mauled once again, tumbling over 6% at the lows, and down 24% from the recent highs, closing fractionally down for the year…

     

    … and crude oil, which soared over 6% from the day lows without a clear catalyst although there was speculation that geopolitical risks out of Syria where US and Russian planes are literally within dogfight distance, are finally catching up to oil traders.

     

    But perhaps the biggest, and most under-reported story, remains the unexpected demand for safety in the shape of 3Month bills, whose yields tumbled following the FOMC and have been increasingly negative in the days since, closing at -0.005%. Is the bond market really hinting at NIRP?

    And now all eyes to the BOJ when tonight around 11pm Eastern, Japan’s central bank is expected do and say precisely… nothing. After all, as we explained, this is the last bullet both the BOJ and the ECB have, and they will delay as long as possible before boosting QE, and would much rather leave the heavy lifting to the Fed.

  • Prominent Permabull Says Correction Not Over Yet, Expect "Final Capitulation"

    Back in January 2012, all was well with the centrally-planned world: Gluskin Sheff’s David Rosenberg was staunchly bearish, while his arch-nemesis, Wells Capital’s Jim Paulsen, was the opposite. This rivalry culminated with Rosenberg writing an extensive breakdown of his showdown with “bullish strategist” Paulsen at a CFA event (see “David Rosenberg Explains What (If Anything) The Bulls Are Seeing“) in which he said that the one thing that he could “identify as market positive” was valuations, to wit: “we do understand that P/E ratios at current low levels do serve up a certain degree of confidence that there is some downside protection to the overall market here.”

    Fast forward three years, and the world, while still centrally-planned more so than ever now that the BOJ has and the ECB is about to join the massive monetization fray, has been thrown into conventional wisdom turmoil. The reason is that while David Rosenberg infamously flip-flopped from bear to bull (although supposedly he may be contemplating turning bearish again, though who knows after the last 3-day rally) three years ago, none other than permabull Jim Paulsen has come out with a very uncharacteristic and skeptical assessment of the market, in which he does not urge readers of his monthly letter on economic and market perspectives to yet again go all-in and BTFD, but to instead realize that the correction is not yet over and that he expects “a more fearful investment culture suggesting a final capitulation and more importantly, a lower stock market valuation level able to withstand a less hospitable recovery.

    First, Paulsen’s take on the torrid market rally unleashed by the worst jobs report in years:

    Finding a bottom in the stock market may well be a fool’s game, but that does not stop us fools from trying. A strong rally last week accentuated by a surprisingly weak jobs report on Friday allowed the stock market to successfully retest its initial August correction low for the second time. This show of technical strength has buoyed expectations of a coming year end market rally.

     

    While equities may be finding renewed upward momentum in the current quarter, our guess (and it is just that) is the stock market correction is not yet over. In our view, a quick recovery back near all-time highs would leave the stock market with many of the same vulnerabilities that started the correction. Consequently, we would not be surprised if the stock market tests its correction low yet again and perhaps even fails before reaching a final bottom.

    Paulsen addresses what he views as the four main challenges for the market:

    Despite the weak jobs report last week, the U.S. unemployment rate remains poised to fall below 5 percent within months. Consequently, even modest economic growth can now produce wage and price pressures, mandate higher interest rates, lower both stock and bond valuations and force Wall Street to finally wave goodbye to its great liquidity friend. Simply reviving Chinese economic growth or bottoming commodity prices may not end this stock market swoon. Today’s turbulence is more about correcting market vulnerabilities built up over the past six years, and finding a new foundation that will allow this bull market to resume as the U.S. economy moves toward full employment.

     

    In our view, the stock market faces four major challenges.

     

    First, in recent years investors have become more calm and confident than at any time in this recovery. Undoubtedly, investor confidence has cracked a bit during this correction. Some quantitative measures of investor sentiment now suggest bearishness (a positive for the stock market).

     

    However, while debatable, our current qualitative assessment of investor mindsets is that they remain fairly constructive about the future. Most media stories are not preaching the end of the world and most Wall Street strategists have maintained bullish year end targets. Moreover, financial market action is not consistent with real fear. There has been no huge and sustained rush to the safe haven U.S. treasury, U.S. dollar or gold. Finally, cyclical stock sectors have done as well or better than traditional defensive sectors in the last couple months. Industrials, consumer discretionary and emerging market stocks have been outperforming in the last couple months. Since its start, the premise behind this bull market has been “climbing a perpetual wall of worry”. Today, though, rather than  a risk, most seem to perceive the current correction more as a buying opportunity in an ongoing bull market. Once this correction finds its final bottom, we suspect many more investors will likely fear a full-fledged bear market and a heightened risk of recession.

     

    Second, at its recent peak, the trailing price-earnings multiple on the U.S. stock market reached almost 19 times earnings and is still about 17.6 times today. Trading at 19 times earnings in a recovery with a zero interest rate, low and stable inflation and no cost-push pressures is not problematic. However, the stock market is likely to go searching for better valuation support if the normal tensions associated with a recovery nearing full employment begin pressuring the financial markets.

     

    Third, after six years, the U.S. earnings recovery is showing signs of aging. Profit margins are near all time record highs  and compared to the last few years, earnings are likely to grow much more slowly during the balance of this recovery. Since profit margins cannot rise much higher, should sales  growth remain tepid so will earnings results. Alternatively, should sales growth accelerate, pressures on profit margins are likely to intensify nullifying much of the positive impact of stronger economic growth and keeping earnings performance tepid.

     

    Finally, whether it is this year yet or in 2016, the U.S. is imminently headed toward an interest rate reset. Does the current relatively high price-earnings multiple, an investment community which mostly perceives the correction as a great buying opportunity, a recovery with amazingly weak productivity and an aging corporate earnings cycle represent a good foundation for stocks to withstand a rate hike?

    Where does Paulsen see the market heading in the near-term:

    Most likely, the contemporary bull market is not over. However, the current correction may prove deeper and longer than most now expect. Should the stock market quickly return to its recent highs, the vulnerabilities that produced this correction will remain challenging.

     

    * * *

     

    Maybe the S&P 500 declines below 1800 before this correction finds a final bottom. A second break below the initial crash low in August would produce widespread fears of recession and calls for the end of this bull market rather than the popular “buy on the dip” mentalities recently evident. Moreover, and perhaps most importantly, near 1800, the S&P 500 would be selling about 15 times trailing earnings (close to its long-term 145 year historical average), which represents a much more sustainable level in an economy facing slower earnings growth, somewhat higher inflation and rising shortterm and long-term interest rates.

     

    Admittedly, there is nothing scientific about 15 times earnings. Perhaps, the stock market will find good support at 16 times or maybe it will need to fall to 14 times? Who knows? It is guesswork at best. However, we think the stock market still faces some vulnerability and until it achieves a better fundamental footing, it is not likely to sustain a meaningful advance.

    As a reminder, it was none other than David Tepper who one month ago infamously lowered his own “fair value” P/E multiple from 18x to a range of 14x-16x, noting that under these parameters the S&P 500 would trade between 1680 and 1920 within the next six to twelve months, or 1800 at the mid-point, using a $120 2016E EPS. We wonder if Paulsen was listening…

    Finally, Paulsen’s summary:

    The strong stock market rally during the last few days has pushed the S&P 500 near its highest closing level since the correction began in late August. This has boosted optimism that the recent selloff may be ending. While this could certainly prove to be the case, we remain less sanguine that the vulnerabilities, which initially produced this correction, have yet to be resolved.

     

    Ultimately, we expect a more fearful investment culture suggesting a final capitulation and more importantly, a lower stock market valuation level able to withstand a less hospitable recovery as the economy nears full employment.

    So to summarize, among the more prominent recent (perma)bull to bear conversions we have Tepper, Icahn, Gundlach and now, arguably, Paulsen, who may not be “bearish” but who clearly is not a happy buyer here. On the other hand, the bulls are Gartman and Cramer. Trade accordingly

  • Glencore Explains What Would Happen If It Is Downgraded To Junk

    As part of its ongoing scramble to defend itself against “speculators” and concerns about its balance sheet, earlier today Glencore released a 4 page “funding worksheet” detailing all of its obligations.

    Among the highlights was Glencore’s disclosure of total available liquidity as of this moment, which the firm reported to be materially above its June level of $10.5 billion:

    At 30 June 2015, available committed liquidity was $10.5 billion (p. 71 of 2015 Half-Year Report). As of today, committed available liquidity is materially above June’s level, given the recent $2.5 billion equity placement, the business generating positive free cashflow and the ongoing focus on delivery of the various other debt reduction measures, including lower net working capital. Further delivery of the debt reduction programme, including the $2 billion target for asset disposals, will similarly enhance liquidity levels.

    It also presented its sources of funding among which the well-known $31.1 billion in bonds, as well as $20 billion in short-term funding split between a $15.25 revolver (of which a “substantial portion” is undrawn), $1.2 billion in AR/Inventory secured funding, and $3.4 billion in bilateral bank facilities. Glencore was quick to point out the gullibility of its bank lenders: “No financial covenants, no rating events of default or rating prepayment events, no material adverse change events of default or material adverse change prepayment events.”

    Next Glencore details the terms of its notes and cross-guarantees which it lays out as follows:

    $36.5 billion notes outstanding at 30 June 2015, including $1.9 billion maturing in October 2015. See Appendix for full details.

    • Notes are issued on a pari passu basis, applying a cross guarantee structure introduced at the time of the Xstrata acquisition (see Moody’s and S&P reports dated 7 May 2013 and 19 June 2013, respectively).
    • Glencore Group bonds (issued by Glencore Funding LLC, Glencore Finance (Europe) AG and Glencore Australia Holdings Pty Ltd) have guarantees from Glencore plc, Glencore International AG and Glencore (Schweiz) AG (previously Xstrata (Schweiz) AG).
    • Following the Xstrata acquisition, legacy Xstrata bonds (issued by Xstrata Finance (Canada) Limited, Xstrata Canada Financial Corp, Xstrata Canada Corporation and Xstrata Finance (Dubai) Limited) also now have guarantees from Glencore plc and Glencore International AG, implemented by way of supplemental indentures.
    • Similarly, the outstanding USD notes issued by Viterra Inc. in August 2010 have guarantees in place from Glencore plc and Glencore International AG.

    Glencore also notes the $17.9 billion in Letter of Credit commitments it had outstanding as of June 30:

    As part of Glencore’s ordinary sourcing and procurement of physical commodities and other ordinary marketing obligations, the selling party (or Glencore voluntarily) may request that a financial institution act as either a) the paying party upon the delivery of product and qualifying documents through the issuance of a letter of credit or b) the guarantor by way of issuing a bank guarantee accepting responsibility for Glencore’s contractual obligations.

     

    The LC is not incremental exposure to that already reported in the financial statements. An LC is only a “contingent” obligation, disclosed as such in Glencore’s financial statements i.e. becomes a liability in the event that Glencore does not perform on an already recorded liability. The underlying transaction / procurement liability is recognised within “Trade Payables” in Glencore’s balance sheet. At 30 June 2015, $17.9 billion of such LC commitments have been issued on behalf of Glencore, with the respective liabilities reflected within the $28.1bn of recorded accounts payables. The contingent obligation settles simultaneously with the payment for such commodity. Availability is substantially higher, such that the vast majority of these Glencore facilities remain undrawn.

    An interesting tangent is when Glencore discusses it readily marketable inventories:

    Represents those marketing inventories that are contractually sold or hedged. At June 30 2015, total inventories were $23.6 billion, of which Marketing RMI were $17.7 billion.

     

    For corporate leverage purposes Glencore accounts for RMI as being readily convertible to cash due to their very liquid nature, widely available markets and the fact that price exposure is covered by either a forward physical sale or hedge transaction.

    Which brings up the very interesting question: with Glencore touting its revolver availability, and its various secured facilities, just how is Glencore marking the fair value of its inventories, because a ton of copper a year ago as collateral is worth just a little bit more than a ton of copper currently. We are confident Glencore’s banks are aware of this.

    But finally, and most importantly, Glencore presents what it believes would happen if it is downgraded from Investment Grade to Junk. This is what it says:

    Glencore is undertaking measures to strengthen its balance sheet, including a material debt reduction, that the company expects shall serve to protect and maintain a strong BBB/Baa credit rating.

     

    In the event of a downgrade by Standard & Poor’s and/or Moody’s from current ratings to the level(s) immediately below, a ratings’ grid in the $6.8 billion 5-year revolving credit facility provides for a modest additional margin step-up. As this 5-year revolving credit facility is expected to remain fully undrawn, the net additional effect would only be 35% of this modest step-up margin, being the applicable commitment fee only. The maximum margin for sub-investment grade rating from either Standard & Poor’s or Moody’s is 1.10%. There is no ratings grid in relation to the $8.45 billion revolving credit facility. In addition, there are $4.5 billion of bonds outstanding, where a 125bps margin step-up would apply, in the event that the bonds were rated sub-investment grade by either major ratings agency.

    Which reminds us of the waterfall analysis being shared around in the weeks before the AIG downgrade unleashed a series of events that ultimately led to the insurance company’s bail out. It too presented glowing picture of the potential risks. In the end it was very deficient. One can only hope that Glencore has learned the lesson of never misrepresenting the worst case scenario.

    Full letter below (link)

    Glencore Funding

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News October 6, 2015

  • World's Largest Sovereign Wealth Fund Is Forced To Begin Liquidating Assets

    One of the biggest stories of this summer, as previewed originally here in November of 2014, has been the dramatic shift in the direction of capital flow from toward emerging markets (and China), to away from emerging markets (and China). The reason for this has been the double whammy of the soaring dollar, and the collapse in oil prices which as we said one year ago, would lead to the first negative global petrodollar export balance in 18 years…

    …  a topic which the IIF finally picked up and expanded on last week when it likewise calculated that capital outflows from emerging markets are on track to exceed inflows this year for the first time since 1988.

     

    We first dubbed this phenomenon Reverse QE, a name which Deutsche Bank subsequently “reverse-engineering” into Quantitative Tightening, a different name for the same thing – the removal of excess liquidity from the market by way of obtaining liquidity for existing reserve assets, also known as “selling.”

    However, while Reverse QE, or QT, or whatever one wants to call it has become traditionally associated with Emerging Markets and petroleum exporters, nobody had linked it with one of the most advanced Developed Markets in the world which also happens to be an oil exporter, the market with the largest sovereign wealth fun in the world: Norway.

    That is about to change because as Bloomberg reports, “the future may already be here”, a future in which Norway’s gargantuan $830 billion sovereign wealth fund, the product of two decades of capital accumulation courtesy of Norway’s vast petroleum reserves and oil trade, is forced to begin liquidating its vast assets.

    According to Bloomberg, Norway could as soon as next year start making withdrawals from its massive $830 billion sovereign wealth fund, which is a nest egg for “future generations.”

    The start of asset sales marks a historic shift for said “nest egg” which was not supposed to be tapped for many more years. Unfortunately for Norway, which has already spent recent years using a growing chunk of its oil revenue to plug deficits while at the same time building the wealth fund…

    … tax revenue from petroleum extraction are down 42% which means budget spending in 2016 will outstrip income.

    The real problem for Noway is simple: the very procyclical plunge in oil prices.

    As Bloomberg calculates, taxes collected on petroleum extraction reached 138 billion kroner in the first three quarters of the year, down over 40% from 238.2 billion kroner in the same period a year earlier, according to Statistics Norway. But while oil-linked revenues are plunging, spending is going nowhere but up:

    The government said in May its non-oil budget deficit, or spending in real terms, would be a record 180.9 billion kroner ($21.6 billion). With its crude output waning and prices falling, the government saw petroleum income dropping to 251.6 billion kroner this year, almost 30 percent lower than its October projections. Those estimates assumed oil at about $69 a barrel.

    Brent crude has averaged $56 so far this year, and has been below $50 for the past several months, presenting a huge challenge: how to tap the revenue shortfall.

    The answer is simple, if unpleasant: break open the piggy bank, or in this case, start selling the securities held in the Norwegian sovereign wealth fund.

    “We have reached a point where we will from now on see that the oil-corrected balance will be above the cash flow — that’s based on oil prices increasing slowly in the future,” said Kyrre Aamdal, senior economist at DNB ASA in Oslo. Tapping the fund’s returns marks a turning point that wasn’t expected to come for “several more years,” he said.

     

    Tapping the fund to cover budget needs comes at a time when the managers of the fund, set up to safeguard the wealth of future generations, warn that it also faces diminished returns ahead amid record-low interest rates.

    To be sure, government officials, terrified of revealing the unpleasant truth to the people, are pretending that the funding shortfall can be covered only with dividend and interest income:

    Government officials and economists contend that only investment returns from the fund will be used for the budget, meaning it will not actually shrink in size. By using interest and dividends to cover the deficit, “no one will ever need to break the piggy bank,” said Knut Anton Mork, senior economist at Svenska Handelsbanken AB in Oslo. Oeyvind Schanke, chief investment officer for asset strategies at the Oslo-based fund, said in an interview last month it will be able to use the cash it gets from dividends and bond interest payments to make shifts in the portfolio, rather than having to sell assets.

    Populist rhetoric aside, the SWF will have no choice but to sell: “capital coming into to the fund has already started to dwindle. Inflows were just 17 billion kroner in the first half of this year, compared with a quarterly average of 60 billion kroner over the past 10 years. Central bank Governor Oeystein Olsen, who oversees the fund as head of the bank’s board, said in February that oil around $60 would mean transfers to the fund “may come to a halt.”

    Oil is now nearly 20% lower, and as goes the price oil, so go the inflows into the fund. Which means that any month now, if not already, Norway will shift from net buyer of global financial assets to a net seller, in the process joining the Emerging Markets and, of course, China in soaking up even more liquidity, mostly USD-denominated, out of the market, in the process removing much of the liquidity injected by the Fed and its peer central banks.

    This situation will only deteriorate that much further, and force the wealth fund to sell even more assets should the Fed hike rates, pushing the dollar even higher, and sending the price of oil crashing below. In fact, the coordinated selling of US-denominated assets will be precisely the catalyst that sends the global stock market tumbling, and ultimately serve as the catalyst for NIRP and/or QE4.

    The only question is whether Yellen has finally figured this out and will proceed straight to the NIRP/QE4 part or whether she will subject the market to 6-9 months of gut-wrenching volatility as the world’s largest sovereign wealth fund realizes what it means to try to sell billions of assets into an illiquid, bidless, market.

    In the meantime, and completely independent of what Yellen does in the near future, what was until recently a parabolic move higher in assets…

    … is about to see its first ever decline.

  • Role Reversal In The New Cold War

    Submitted by Justin Raimondo via Anti-War.com,

    This past weekend marks the twenty-fifth anniversary of the reunification of Germany, an event that formalized the end of the cold war. The so-called “German Democratic Republic,” one of the most repressive of the Soviet-imposed regimes established in the wake of World War II, was no more. It imploded without a shot being fired.

    The largely bloodless revolution that swept across Eastern Europe, toppling Communist dictatorships from Berlin to Budapest, soon penetrated the epicenter of the “evil empire” itself – and the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics evaporated like mist on a sunlit morning. It was the end of the cold war, and peoples all over the world breathed a joyful sigh of relief – and yet that joy was not shared by all.

    The cadre of that troublesome little sect known as the neoconservatives weren’t convinced that the Soviets were on their last legs: they had opposed the arms control agreements signed by Ronald Reagan in the Kremlin’s twilight years, attacking them as signs of “appeasement” and arguing that any rapprochement with the Soviets would give them breathing room and the strength to gather their forces for one last push against the West. The United States, they averred, should take the opportunity to push harder and institute a policy of “rollback,” because only a foreign policy of aggression could defeat the Evil Empire once and for all.

    They were wrong.

    What happened, instead, is that the captive nations of the Soviet bloc rose up all on their own, without any substantial support from us, and overthrew their oppressors. Not because we had weakened the USSR in any significant way, but because a system that never worked to begin with had finally reached its endpoint. As the great libertarian theoretician Ludwig von Mises had predicted as early as 1920 that it would.

    Indeed, it could be argued that all our efforts during the cold war era had merely strengthened the Leninist project, unnaturally extending its lifespan. For Joseph Stalin realized two vital facts early on:

    1) That in spite of Soviet propaganda, the Russian economy was no match for the West, and that it was necessary to build up Soviet industry on a massive scale. Thus began the various Five Year Plans that sought to make the leap from a backward agricultural economy into something resembling an industrial powerhouse.

     

    2) That the old Bolshevik ideology of “proletarian internationalism” – the idea that the World Revolution was a perquisite for the survival of the Soviet state – had to be ditched. The Trotskyists, who clung to the original Leninist conception, were purged, and in the place of the old party line the Stalinists substituted Soviet “patriotism,” i.e. Russian nationalism, as the official ideology of the post-Leninist Kremlin.

    While the economic project of the Stalinist regime rendered dubious results – slave labor cannot serve as the basis of a modern economic order, and the inability of the Soviet system to overcome the calculation problem could not be overcome – their ideological revisionism met with more success. Instead of appealing to some abstract ideal, i.e. egalitarianism, the theories of Karl Marx, etc., they instead evoked loyalty to real-world allegiances: in short, they became “patriots,” in whatever country they were operating in.

    In Russia, Soviet propaganda focused on the “Great Patriotic War” against Germany during World War II – of course downplaying Stalin’s pact with Hitler and their joint invasion of Poland, which sparked the conflict to begin with. Sure, the Russian people had to wait on line for the simplest items, but, the regime told them – with some justification – that the West was getting ready to destroy them, just as Hitler had tried to do, and that only the Soviet government could protect Holy Mother Russia from a repeat of that horrific catastrophe in which millions perished.

    In the Third World, where the Soviets were engaged in an ideological battle with Western-backed regimes, they posed as champions of “national liberation,” and – abjuring purely communist slogans – called for a “national democratic revolution” and inveighed against “foreign domination,” denouncing the brutalities of colonialism. This is what made the victory of the Communist-dominated National Liberation Front of Vietnam possible, and it energized Marxist insurrections throughout Asia, Africa, and Latin America. Fidel Castro never revealed himself as a Communist until well after taking power because he realized what Stalin discovered long before the Cuban revolution overthrew a US-supported despot: that nationalism – allegiance to a really-existing entity, rather than a moral or ideological abstraction – has the power to inspire people to resist.

    So while economic reality eventually overcame the Soviets, and doomed their system to failure from the beginning, they managed to survive as long as they did – and inspire a global movement – in large part due to the energy imparted to them by the West. The very effort to “roll back” Communism had the opposite result, generating a nationalistic reaction that aided the Soviets to such an extent that, for a while, it looked – on the surface – as if they had the advantage. Communism, you’ll recall, was supposed to be the “wave of the future,” along with all the other totalitarian movements – fascism and national socialism – that gained ascendancy in the wake of World War I. As it turned out, Marxism proved to be a dead end, albeit one that had all the appearance of an idea whose time had come.

    Looking back on the demise of the Soviets, one can see that the same hubris that blinded the Communists to their own imminent decline and fall has its echoes in today’s world.

    The Western response to the Communist implosion was, at first, quite reasonable. In negotiations with Mikhail Gorbachev, who saw the Soviet empire crumbling all around him, Western leaders guaranteed that NATO would not move eastward. As Joshua Shifrinson, citing declassified US government documents, argued in Foreign Affairs:

    “The story begins in the months after the fall of the Berlin Wall, as policymakers struggled to determine whether and how a divided Germany might reunify. By early 1990, U.S. and West German officials decided to seek reunification. Uncertain about whether the Soviets would be willing to withdraw from East Germany, they decided to offer a quid pro quo.

     

    “On January 31, West German Foreign Minister Hans-Dietrich Genscher publicly declared that there would be “no expansion of NATO territory eastward” after reunification. Two days later, US Secretary of State James Baker met with Genscher to discuss the plan. Although Baker did not publicly endorse Genscher’s plan, it served as the basis for subsequent meetings between Baker, Soviet President Mikhail Gorbachev, and Soviet Foreign Minister Eduard Shevardnadze. During these discussions, Baker repeatedly underlined the informal deal on the table, first telling Shevardnadze that NATO’s jurisdiction ‘would not move eastward’ and later offering Gorbachev ‘assurances that there would be no extension of NATO’s current jurisdiction eastward.’ When Gorbachev argued that ‘a broadening of the NATO zone’ was ‘not acceptable,’ Baker replied, ‘We agree with that.’ Most explicit was a meeting with Shevardnadze on February 9, in which Baker, according to the declassified State Department transcript, promised ‘ironclad guarantees that NATO’s jurisdiction or forces would not move eastward.’ Hammering home the point, West German Chancellor Helmut Kohl advanced an identical pledge during meetings in Moscow the next day.

     

    “At that point, it was easy to see the outline of a new strategic landscape coming into view: Germany would reunify, the Soviet Union would pull back, and NATO would halt in place. According to any ordinary sense of the term ‘east,’ all of the countries to which NATO later expanded would have remained outside the Western orbit. As a diplomatic cable summarizing Baker’s meetings put it, ‘The Secretary made clear that the US had supported the goal of [German] unification for years; that we supported a unified Germany within NATO, but that we were prepared to ensure that NATO’s military presence would not extend further eastward.’”

    Yet the domestic pressures in the US for NATO expansion were too strong to let this guarantee stand for very long. NATO maintains standards for its member militaries, and the upgrades required for the entry of the East European countries would prove immensely profitable for US weapons makers – who soon launched a campaign for NATO expansion that had its tentacles reaching into both political parties. And there was also the inherently expansionist dynamic embedded in all global empires, such as the American. This was fueled by the ideological Kool-Aid of the “end of history” fable, pushed by the neoconservatives, who dreamed of a Hegelianuniversal homogenous state” – to be established by the United States.

    As NATO pushed up to the gates of Moscow, what happened, oddly enough, is that the Americans and the Russians switched roles. The former, invoking a militant “democratic” internationalism, adopted the revolutionary rhetoric and mindset of the early pre-Stalinist communists, while the latter took up the conservatizing role abandoned by Washington.

    Which is where we are today – except that the danger posed by Washington is far greater than any the old Soviet empire could have mustered, for two reasons:

    1) The Soviet economic system was inherently unworkable, and ended the only way it could have ended. On the other hand, the American economic system is the mightiest industrial machine the world has ever known: capitalism has created enormous wealth, and while we’ve eaten a lot of our seed corn and built up an enormous mountain of debt, the system is still coasting along on the achievements of the past.

     

    2) Stalin was essentially an “isolationist,” that is, he didn’t want to get too involved in the affairs of other countries, concerned as he was with cementing his own despotic rule at home. That’s why he ditched the old Leninism, drove Trotsky into exile, and declared the official Soviet doctrine of “socialism in one country.” In the US, however, “isolationism” is out of style: both parties support an “internationalist” foreign policy, differing only in the details of how to apply the general principle of empire-building on a global scale.

    What all this means is that the world’s wealthiest nation has now decided it can and should rule the world – and has embarked on a campaign, consisting of both military and “soft power” aspects, to achieve just that. And while this effort effectively undermines whatever claim the US once had to be being the leader of the “Free” World – as Edward Snowden revealed, and as the continuous erosion of our constitutional liberties underscores every day – Washington still wields the banner of “freedom” to great effect, especially when compared with the regimes it seeks to overthrow.

    Baldly stated, the United States government is the greatest danger to peace and freedom the world has ever known. This is true precisely because it has held aloft the torch of liberty for so long, an example to the world of what a society based on individual freedom can achieve. That is the great paradox of American power. As we abandon our libertarian heritage – even as we retain the forms of a constitutional republic – we destroy what made our power possible.

    The process is reversible: we can restore our old republic – but only if we give up the mirage of empire. If we continue to pursue the fatal dream of a beneficent internationalism, America will lose itself, dissolve its unique character – and wreak destruction, not only on its own people but on the peoples of the world. In switching roles with the Soviets, we prefigure their fate: and the resulting implosion is going to shake the world to its foundations in a way that the fall of the Kremlin never did. In programming our own self-destruction, we will likely drag much of the world with us.

    Those are the stakes, and they are high – too high for us anti-interventionists to rest for a single moment.

     

  • Gun Sales Soar After Surge In US Mass Shootings

    Just as was evidenced after the 2007 shootings at Virginia Tech, after Columbine and Tucson in 2011, and following the theater shootings in Aurora, Colorado in 2012, US gun sales have soared following the mass-shooting at Umpqua Community College in Oregon, which killed 10 people and injured seven others. As The FT reports, gun sales this year could surpass the record set in 2013, when gun purchases surged after the December 2012 Sandy Hook murders.

    As The FT reports,

    Business has been brisk for Larry Hyatt, owner of Hyatt Guns in North Carolina, since the Oregon community college shooting last week that left 10 people dead, including the 26-year-old suspect.

     

    Mr Hyatt saw an even bigger surge in customers after the 2012 massacre at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Connecticut that left 26 people dead, including 20 children, before the gunman killed himself.

     

     

    However, the calls for tighter gun laws lead to an increase in weapons sales. “Once the public hears the president on the news say we need more gun controls, it tends to drive sales,” said Mr Hyatt, who owns one of the largest gun retailers in the US. “People think, if I don’t get a gun now, it might be difficult to get one in the future. The store is crowded.”

     

    “We don’t want our business to be based on tragedy but we have to deal with what we have no control over,” Mr Hyatt said. “And after these shootings and then the calls for tougher gun laws, we see a buying rush.”

    In the first nine months of this year, 15.6m of the background checks needed to purchase guns from federally licensed sellers have been processed, compared with the 15.5m applications in the same period in 2013, according to the National Instant Criminal Background Check System.

    Strong sales this year have also boosted the earnings for the two of the largest gun manufacturers in the US. Smith & Wesson and Sturm, Ruger & Co have seen their stocks rise this year by over 88% and 67% respectively.

     

     

    As Wired wrote back in 2012, the sharp spike in gun sales following mass shootings is not a new occurence and appears to happen for several reasons…

    The desire to protect one's self In many cases, gun shootings followed by 24/7 media coverage prompt citizens to arm themselves, according to testimonies. In Aurora, for instance, Jake Meyers of Rocky Mountain Guns and Ammo told The Post shoppers cited self-protection when checking out new weapons. "A lot of it is people saying, 'I didn't think I needed a gun, but now I do,' " Meyers said. "When it happens in your backyard, people start reassessing — 'Hey, I go to the movies.'"

     

    The fear of stricter gun laws Another logical factor is that gun owners' or soon-to-be-gun owners' sense a tide of gun control regulations following a massacre and seek to purchase guns ahead of fast-moving laws. Paul Helmke, president of the Brady Campaign to Prevent Gun Violence, spoke to this following a 60 percent uptick in gun sales in the aftermath of the Tucson shootings in 2011. "Some Americans fear tougher gun control laws in the aftermath of Saturday’s attack so they want to stock up now," he told Politico. “What it shows is maybe gun owners in Arizona and these other states feel that there’s going to be some change in the law, which is what I hope our elected officials” trying to enact. Obviously, that fear has been unfounded. Since coming into office, Obama has been virtually silent on the issue of gun control, despite the protestations of liberals.

     

    The feeling of uncertainty It's important to remember, spikes in guns sales don't just coincide with shooting sprees. They also coincide with violent events of any kind, as Fredrick Kunkle at The Washington Post reported. "People also rushed to buy guns after the 1992 riots in Los Angeles and the breakdown of order in New Orleans after Hurricane Katrina." That has led some industry experts and law enforcement officials to point to a general feeling of uncertainty as a driver of gun buying habits. "People often buy firearms during periods of uncertainty," Gary Kleck, a researcher at Florida State University's College of Criminology and Criminal Justice, told the paper.

    As Pew's most recent research found, America remains divided over the 'guns' issue:

    Pew’s latest survey, conducted in July this year, found that opinions had remained largely unchanged since the Sandy Hook massacre.

     

    Almost eight in 10 people surveyed supported laws to prevent people suffering from mental illness buying firearms, while 70 per cent backed the creation of a database on gun sales and almost 60 per cent wanted to see assault weapons banned.

     

    “The public continues to be more evenly divided in fundamental attitudes about whether it is more important to control gun ownership or to protect the right of Americans to own guns,” Pew’s report said.

     

    “Currently, 50 per cent say it is more important to control gun ownership, while 47 per cent say it is more important to protect the right of Americans to own guns.”

  • Peter Schiff: The Fed Has Created A "Bad Is Good" Economy

    Submitted by Peter Schiff via Euro Pacific Capital,

    The popular belief that the U.S. economy has been steadily recovering has endured months of disappointing data without losing much of its appeal. A deep bench of excuses, ranging from the weather to the Chinese economy, has been called on to justify why the economy hasn't built up any noticeable steam, and why the Fed has failed to move rates off zero, where they have been for seven years. But the downright dismal September jobs report that was released last Friday may prove to be the flashing red beacon that even the most skilled apologists can't explain away. The report should make it abundantly clear that we are far closer to recession than recovery. But old notions die hard and, shockingly, most economists still believe that we have hit a temporary speed bump not a brick wall. But at some point healthy hope turns into dangerous delusion. We may have just turned that corner.
     

    The report was horrific any way you slice it. The consensus of economists had expected to see 203,000 new jobs in September, not a particularly impressive number, but at least it would have been an improvement from the 173,000 new jobs that were added in August. Not only did September miss substantially, at just 142,000 jobs, but August was revised down to 136,000 (Bureau of Labor Statistics) (there were economists who had even expected August to be revised up to as high 247,000). This means that the last three months have averaged just 167,000 jobs, a level that is not even close to where we should have been in a real recovery. But it gets worse from there.

     

    The labor force participation rate got even lower still, dropping from 62.6% of working age adults, to just 62.4%, a near-40 year low. In September, another 579,000 potential workers gave up looking for jobs altogether and simply left the labor force. This figure dwarfs the 142,000 people that actually found jobs. Those lucky enough to still be working saw no increase in their hourly wages (the consensus had expected a .2% increase) and their average workweek ticked down from 34.6 hours to 34.5. In short, in September, fewer Americans worked, and those who did had fewer hours and lower pay. This is not supposed to be what a recovery looks like.

     

    Even after the Fed surprised markets back in September by failing to raise interest rates for the first time in nine years, most economists still strongly believed that the Fed was on track to do so this year. Just prior to Friday's jobs report, a full 94% of economists in a Reuters survey saw a hike coming this year. No word yet on how much these expectations may have changed since Friday's jobs report, but my guess is that they won't fall nearly as much as they should. Many a happy economist took to the airwaves last week to explain that two more jobs reports will be issued before the Fed's December meeting. They insisted that those reports could provide the impetus that the Fed needs to finally pull the trigger.

     

    But Janet Yellen said months ago that she would need to see "further improvements" in the labor market before she felt fully comfortable in raising rates. Since she made that statement, not only has the labor market not improved, it has actually retrogressed considerably. The fact that the headline unemployment rate has remained at a very low 5.1% is immaterial, as that rate has been low for some time without prompting any rate hikes. Yellen has already conceded that the official unemployment rate is not the benchmark she is using to assess the strength of the labor market. Instead, she is focused on labor force participation, wages, and the proliferation of involuntary part-time work. On these scores we continue to move further away from any potential rate hike.

     

    But rather than questioning the Fed's credibility in missing another forecast, most economists are lauding it for supposedly seeing weakness that others missed, which allowed it to wisely do nothing in September. But I see this simply as a continuation of the Fed's long-standing playbook: Talk the economy up through optimistic statements while continually holding off an actual rate hike that the Fed is concerned could undermine an economy teetering on the brink of recession. I did not expect the Fed to raise rates in September, and I don't expect them to do so in December either, or at all in 2016, for that matter. I expect the Fed shares this view but they know any public utterance could be disastrous. Despite the fact that I was one of the few economists to declare no hikes in 2015, the media has continued to ignore and ridicule my forecasts.

     

    Dazzled by the Fed's many statements of gaining economic strength, Wall Street has, by contrast, been completely blind to the many, many signs of gathering weakness. In September, factory orders were down year-over-year for the 10th month in a row, according to the Census Bureau's August Factory Orders report. As far as I know, this has never happened outside of a recession. But good luck finding anyone on Wall Street who shares my opinion that these figures suggest that a recession is already underway. My position is buttressed by the steady torrent of disappointing production numbers contained in the regional Fed surveys. But since manufacturing is no longer considered an important sector for the American economy, those once important surveys are no longer even mentioned in main-stream press.

     

    In addition, the Atlanta Fed's "GDPNow" statistics, which attempt to offer a real time glimpse at economic conditions, gets similarly short shrift in the media. That number currently stands at just .9% annualized growth. However, consensus on Wall Street for Q3 GDP remains at 2.4%. Those forecasts should have been slashed months ago. But they have not. Based on the reports that I am seeing, I believe that there is a good chance that the barely positive growth rate that the Atlanta Fed is seeing for Q3, could turn negative. After all, jobs reports have been revised down in six of the last eight months (BLS). What makes economists think that this trend will suddenly reverse? It is, therefore, more likely that the awful employment picture for September will even get worse. A negative GDP print in the third and fourth quarters of this year, which would qualify as a recession, is a possibility that Wall Street has not even considered, let alone prepared.

     

    If weakening conditions prevent the Fed from pulling the rate hike trigger by December, can we really expect it to do it in the election year of 2016? With the economy already on thin ice, a rising rate environment may likely push the economy into recession if it somehow isn't already there. This will play directly into the hands of the Republicans who will be able to hammer the outgoing Obama Administration's economic legacy, thereby handing the election to the GOP. Does anyone really expect the left-leaning Federal Reserve led by Janet Yellen to do that? Given that, we may not see a rate increase until 2017, even if conditions improve, which is a dubious proposition. Predictably, Goldman Sachs' chief economist Jan Hatzius came out with a statement today predicting the first move may not come until 2017. Look for many other influential economists to follow suit.

     

    My view is that it is far more likely that we will see a fresh round of Quantitative Easing before we see a rate hike. As far as I know, however, I am still one of the only economists making this "outrageous" forecast.

     

    The biggest practical implications of all this is that the commodity and foreign currency markets, which have been so thoroughly decimated by expectations of imminent rate hikes in the U.S., should reverse course. In the past, the dollar has generally risen on the anticipation of rate hikes and has sold off when the Fed actually delivered on those expectations. This is the classic "buy the rumor, sell the fact" trade.  But what will happen when the Fed fails to deliver? Then all we have is false rumor and no fact. In such a scenario, reversals in the "bid up" dollar and in "beaten down" commodities like gold, silver, copper, and oil, could be dramatic. This could be especially true when you consider all the global economic problems that would be solved by a weaker dollar. Already we are seeing the markets drifting in that direction. Today silver hit a three-month high, and other commodities are finally getting up off the mat. It's been a long time coming, and I expect that it's a pattern that will take hold for a long time to come.

     

    When the jobs report was released last Friday, markets reacted initially with a sharp 200-point sell off. For a while, traders seemed to forget that it's not the economy that has driven the markets but Fed stimulus. They thought bad news was actually bad news. But that "perverse" sentiment didn't last. Once it became clearer (to some) that rate hikes this year were less likely, the markets reversed course and completed a 450-point reversal to the upside. The Fed has created a phony "bad is good economy" and we are not about to snap out of it any time soon.
     

    I expect that once the threat of rate hikes is finally and officially taken off the table, the Wall Street rally will continue. But those gains will be attenuated by a weaker dollar and depressed earnings by domestically focused companies. In that case, it may be better to search for stocks outside the dollar and for the potential benefit of rising share prices and a rising currency. Given how far those assets have been beaten down (see my commentary of July 6th), the opportunities may be worthwhile.

     

  • An Up Close And Personal Look At The Russian Firepower Deployed In Syria

    As Moscow’s air campaign in Syria enters its sixth day, both the West and The Kremlin have put their respective media propaganda machines into overdrive. 

    In many respects, the geopolitical stakes for both sides are the highest they’ve been in decades. The West cannot afford to stand by and watch Russia do in a matter of weeks what the US has failed to accomplish in 13 months. Put simply: if Moscow declares victory over ISIS within the next month or two (and that appears as likely as not), Washington will be left to explain to a bewildered public what just happened. To the uninitiated, it will appear as though Russia’s military is far superior to the US Army when it comes to fighting terror and on top of that, Iran’s now well publicized role will not only cast further doubt on the nuclear deal, but will also raise questions about the contention that Tehran is committed to financing and exporting terror. 

    For Russia, the powerplay in Syria represents nothing short of a return to the world stage after decades of flying below the radar as a second rate superpower. Putin has now proven that Moscow can project its influence with virtual impunity and as Monday’s “accidental” violation of Turkish airspace suggests, The Kremlin is getting more brave by the day in the face of what certainly looks like a de facto surrender by the West. 

    All of the above presents a real challenge when it comes to analyzing the conflict. That is, with both sides in full-on spin mode, getting at the truth is even more difficult than it would normally be in an East vs. West standoff and while US foreign policy is something of an easy target when it comes to pointing out hypocrisy and outright incompetence, one also has to be careful to avoid taking the Russian line at face value because after all, this is all just a contest to control the narrative and thus to help determine how history will remember the Syrian civil war. 

    With all of that said, watching Russia effectively humiliate the West by bragging day in and day out is nothing if it’s not amusing, and indeed, as we said on Sunday, the leaked diplomatic cable from 2006 which outlines Washington’s intent to effectively start a civil war in Syria leaves one completely uninclined to be at all sympathetic to the ridiculous situation the US and its allies have found themselves in and on that note, we present the following rundown from Sputnik and RT, respectively, of just what type of hardware Moscow is using on the way to routing anti-regime elements in Syria.

    Of course one could easily create a similar profile for Washington’s military hardware with the only difference being that the US likes to perpetuate the myth that there’s a degree of separation between the Army, the government, and weapons manufacturers.

    From Sputnik:

    A wide range of missiles and bombs equipped with advanced guidance systems are currently being used by Russia in its air campaign against Islamic State militants in Syria.

     

    During precision airstrikes, Russian weaponry is launched from high altitudes to evade mobile air-defense systems.

     

    The precision bombs typically use the GLONASS navigation system to destroy targets, the Russian developed alternative to GPS, whereas missiles are guided by a weapons system operator.

     

     

    The precision weapons include is the KAB guided bomb, which includes two modifications such as KAB-250 and KAB-500.The KAB-250 bomb was designed in the 2000s for the Russian fifth generation PAK-FA fighter jet. Its distinctive egg-shaped form can be explained by the fact that this bomb is mounted in inside the plane’s bays.

     

     

    The bomb is also used by advanced Russian warplanes, including the Su-34 bombers, which are currently taking part in the air operation in Syria. The aircraft drop these bombs on Islamic State targets from an altitude of 5,000 meters.

     

    The concrete-piercing BETAB-500 bombs are equipped with a jet booster, which allows the bombs to completely destroy any underground installation.

     

    From RT:

    The Su-34 is a strike fighter and the most modern aircraft to take part in Russia’s operation against Islamic State in Syria. 

     

    Its development began in the mid-’80s as a replacement for the Su-24, with the country’s military receiving the first batch of new warplanes in 2006. 

     

    The jet is designed for the supersonic penetration of enemy airspace at treetop level in the most severe weather and battle conditions. 

     

    The two-pilot strike fighter is sometimes referred to as ‘a flying tank’ due to an armored cockpit and efficient standoff weapons, which enable it to survive not only missile fragments, but even direct hits from small caliber arms.

     

     

    The Su-24 is a tactical bomber meant to fly below the radar and hit ground targets from low altitudes. The military wanted the plane to have short take-off and landing capabilities to so that it could be used on small airfields.

     

    An early prototype had four turbojet engines that complemented two main engines during take-off. The scheme, however, proved to be very inefficient, so instead designers gave it variable-sweep wings.

     

    The plane first entered service in the early 1970s. A decade later a better variant called Su-24M with a different radar and targeting equipment needed for more precise weapons was introduced. This model is the backbone of Russia’s tactical bomber. Sukhoi continues upgrading the aircraft.

     

     

    Su-25 is another Russian Air Force work horse, introduced in early 1980s. The jet was designed for close air support – that is, to directly help ground forces engage the enemy.

     


  • Nickels, Meet Steamroller: Embattled Bank Suckers Hedge Funds Into EM Insurance Bet

    Are you looking to make a terrible investment decision?

    Well sure you are, isn’t everyone?

    And thanks to the fact that it appears we may now be testing the limits of the market’s collective patience with the notion of central bank omnipotence, there are plenty of bad investment opportunities out there to choose from. 

    That said, you always want to go big or go home, which is why what you might want to do is go out and ask a struggling emerging markets lender what its worst “assets” are and then offer to insure those assets against default so that said lender can then go out and invariably make more terrible decisions on the way to hopefully creating a non-negligible amount of systemic risk. 

    If that sounds crazy to you, that’s because it most certainly is, but don’t tell the buysiders who inexplicably decided to go long EM credit risk at the worst possible time in decades via their participation in a synthetic CLO from none other than Standard Chartered. Here’s Bloomberg:

    Imagine this pitch: Buy a complicated, derivatives-based deal tied to emerging-markets debt. Right now. In a shaky credit market.

     

    The expected response might be laughter — or speechlessness. But Standard Chartered pulled off just such a deal in the past few weeks, selling a $236.3 million piece of a synthetic collateralized loan obligation to a group of hedge funds in a risk-transfer maneuver.

     

    Did I mention this is Standard Chartered? The London-based bank has been accused of breaching U.S. sanctions against Iran, shook up its upper management a few months ago and does a lot of business in China. Its shares have lost more than 20 percent so far this year.

     

    Standard Chartered’s deal was aimed at lowering the amount of money it must hold to offset riskier holdings. The bank reduced its capital charges by millions of dollars on a $3.5 billion pool of debt by paying hedge funds to insure against potential losses.

     

    The bank had a ready-made audience,and other big banks have completed billions of dollars of similar deals in recent years.

     

    But this one took an extra leap of faith. About 17 percent of the reference loans were domiciled in China, some 17 percent in Hong Kong and 7 percent in India, according to the prospectus dated Sept. 23. Also, this deal came after Standard Chartered shook up its upper management and as China’s slowest growth in more than two decades roils Southeast Asia.

    Now look, there’s never really a “good” time to start moving credit risk from imperiled banks onto your own balance sheet, and apparently, the hedge funds that got into the mezz tranches here are getting something like an 11% yield which looks great in a world dominated by ZIRP, but one can’t help but wonder if this isn’t going to be a disaster. 

    Bloomberg characterizes this as “a complicated, derivatives-based deal,” which is a typical characterization for synthetic CDOs. Not to take anything away from that description (because bless their hearts, it’s probably just a well meaning attempt to warn readers that they’re about to be subjected to some financial alphabet soup), but these deals aren’t really all that complicated conceptually. Here’s how this works: I have some loans I made that I think are probably bad and it’s keeping me from making more bad loans because the regulators don’t like the amount of risk I’m taking, so what I’ll do is I’ll periodically pay you some spread over a benchmark rate I probably manipulated and then you’ll agree to pay up when these loans go bad. Because they aren’t my problem anymore, I get to go to my regulators and say “see, these guys are on the hook, not me, so now please let me go out and make more of these bad loans” and of course because the cost of capital is zero, it’s a sweet deal for me, even if I fooled you into believing that the CDS premium I’m paying you is attractive. 

    In case that’s not clear enough, allow us to simplify further: metaphorically speaking, the hedge funds that participated in this deal just knowingly issued a whole bunch of flood insurance on a bevy of homes in New Orleans knowing that hurricane Katrina is coming. 

    Of course there are no certainties in the world and if EM doesn’t suffer a complete meltdown, then anyone who agreed to provide doomsday insurance in return for a thousand basis points of yield is going to look very, very smart and we certainly won’t begrudge them their (fiat) profits, but just note that you heard it here first – this is picking up nickels in front of a steamroller.

  • How The Chinese Will Establish A New Financial Order

    Submitted by Porter Stansberry via InternationalMan.com,

    For many years now, it’s been clear that China would soon be pull­ing the strings in the U.S. financial system.

    In 2015, the American people owe the Chinese government nearly $1.5 trillion.

    I know big numbers don’t mean much to most people, but keep in mind… this tab is now hundreds of billions of dollars more than what the U.S. government collects in ALL income taxes (both cor­porate and individual) each year. It’s basically a sum we can never, ever hope to repay – at least, not by normal means.

    Of course, the Chinese aren’t stupid. They realize we are both trapped.

    We are stuck with an enormous debt we can never realistically repay… And the Chinese are trapped with an outstanding loan they can neither get rid of, nor hope to collect. So the Chinese govern­ment is now taking a secret and somewhat radical approach.

    China has recently put into place a covert plan to get back as much of its money as possible – by extracting colossal sums from both the United States government and ordinary citizens, like you and me.

    The Chinese “State Administration of Foreign Exchange” (SAFE) is now engaged in a full-fledged currency war with the United States. The ultimate goal – as the Chinese have publicly stated – is to cre­ate a new dominant world currency, dislodge the U.S. dollar from its current reserve role, and recover as much of the $1.5 trillion the U.S. government has borrowed as possible.

    Lucky for us, we know what’s going to happen. And we even have a pretty good idea of how it will all unfold. How do we know so much? Well, this isn’t the first time the U.S. has tried to stiff its foreign creditors.

    Most Americans probably don’t remember this, but our last big currency war took place in the 1960s. Back then, French President Charles de Gaulle denounced the U.S. government’s policy of print­ing overvalued U.S. dollars to pay for its trade deficits… which allowed U.S. companies to buy European assets with dollars that were artificially held up in value by a gold peg that was nothing more than an accounting fiction. So de Gaulle took action…

    In 1965, he took $150 million of his country’s dollar reserves and redeemed the paper currency for U.S. gold from Ft. Knox. De Gaulle even offered to send the French Navy to escort the gold back to France. Today, this gold is worth about $12 billion.

    Keep in mind… this occurred during a time when foreign govern­ments could legally redeem their paper dollars for gold, but U.S. citizens could not.

    And France was not the only nation to do this… Spain soon re­deemed $60 million of U.S. dollar reserves for gold, and many other nations followed suit. By March 1968, gold was flowing out of the United States at an alarming rate.

    By 1950, U.S. depositories held more gold than had ever been assembled in one place in world history (roughly 702 million ounces). But to manipulate our currency, the U.S. government was willing to give away more than half of the country’s gold.

    It’s estimated that during the 1950s and early 1970s, we essentially gave away about two-thirds of our nation’s gold reserves… around 400 million ounces… all because the U.S. government was trying to defend the U.S. dollar at a fixed rate of $35 per ounce of gold.

    In short, we gave away 400 million ounces of gold and got $14 billion in exchange. Today, that same gold would be worth $620 billion… a 4,330% difference.

    Incredibly stupid, wouldn’t you agree? This blunder cost the U.S. much of its gold hoard.

    When the history books are finally written, this chapter will go down as one of our nation’s most incompetent political blunders. Of course, as is typical with politicians, they managed to make a bad situation even worse…

    The root cause of the weakness in the U.S. dollar was easy to understand. Americans were consuming far more than they were producing. You could see this by looking at our government’s annual deficits, which were larger than ever and growing… thanks to the gigantic new welfare programs and the Vietnam “police ac­tion.” You could also see this by looking at our trade deficit, which continued to get bigger and bigger, forecasting a dramatic drop (eventually) in the value of the U.S. dollar.

    Of course, economic realities are never foremost on the minds of politicians – especially not Richard Nixon’s. On August 15, 1971, he went on live television before the most popular show in Ameri­ca (Bonanza) and announced a new plan…

    The U.S. gold window would close effective immediately – and no nation or individual anywhere in the world would be allowed to exchange U.S. dollars for gold. The president announced a 10% surtax on ALL imports!

     

    Such tariffs never accomplish much in terms of actually altering the balance of trade, as our trading partners simply put matching charges on our exports. So what actually happens is just less trade overall, which slows the whole global economy, making the impact of inflation worse.

     

    Of course, Nixon pitched these moves as patriotic, saying: “I am determined that the American dollar must never again be a hos­tage in the hands of international speculators.”

     

    The “sheeple” cheered, as they always do whenever something is done to “stop the speculators.” But the joke was on them. Within two years, America was in its worst recession since WWII… with an oil crisis, skyrocketing unemployment, a 30% drop in the stock market, and soaring inflation. Instead of becoming richer, millions of Americans got a lot poorer, practically overnight.

    And that brings us to today…

    Roughly 40 years later, the United States is in the middle of anoth­er currency war. But this time, our main adversary is not Europe. It’s China.

     

    And this time, the situation is far more serious. Our nation and our economy are already in an extremely fragile state. In the 1960s, the American economy was growing rapidly, with decades of expansion still to come. That’s not the case today.

    This new currency war with China will wreak absolute havoc on the lives of millions of ordinary Americans, much sooner than most people think. It’s critical over the next few years for you to understand exactly what the Chinese are doing, why they are doing it, and the near-certain outcome.

  • A New "Red Line"

    Presented with no comment…

     

     

    Source: Investors.com

  • Have We Reached A "Peak Water" Tipping Point In California?

    Submitted by Gaius Publius via DownWithTyrannry blog,

    It may be a see-saw course, but it's riding an uphill train.

    A bit ago I wrote, regarding climate and tipping points:

    The concept of "tipping point" — a change beyond which there's no turning back — comes up a lot in climate discussions. An obvious tipping point involves polar ice. If the earth keeps warming — both in the atmosphere and in the ocean — at some point a full and permanent melt of Arctic and Antarctic ice is inevitable. Permanent ice first started forming in the Antarctic about 35 million years ago, thanks to global cooling which crossed a tipping point for ice formation. That's not very long ago. During the 200 million years before that, the earth was too warm for permanent ice to form, at least as far as we know.

     

    We're now going the other direction, rewarming the earth, and permanent ice is increasingly disappearing, as you'd expect. At some point, permanent ice will be gone. At some point before that, its loss will be inevitable. Like the passengers in the car above, its end may not have come — yet — but there's no turning back….

     

    I think the American Southwest is beyond a tipping point for available fresh water. I've written several times — for example, here — that California and the Southwest have passed "peak water," that the most water available to the region is what's available now. We can mitigate the severity of decline in supply (i.e., arrest the decline at a less-bad place by arresting its cause), and we can adapt to whatever consequences can't be mitigated.

     

    But we can no longer go back to plentiful fresh water from the Colorado River watershed. That day is gone, and in fact, I suspect most in the region know it, even though it's not yet reflected in real estate prices.

    Two of the three takeaways from the above paragraphs are these: "California and the Southwest have passed 'peak water'" and "most in the region know it." (The third takeaway from the above is discussed at the end of this piece.)

    "For the first time in 120 years, winter average minimum temperature in the Sierra Nevada was above freezing"

    My comment, that "most in the region know it," is anecdotal. What you're about to read below isn't. Hunter Cutting, writing at Huffington Post, notes (my emphasis):

    With Californians crossing their fingers in hopes of a super El Niño to help end the state's historic drought, California's water agency just delivered some startling news: for the first time in 120 years of record keeping, the winter average minimum temperature in the Sierra Nevada was above freezing. And across the state, the last 12 months were the warmest on record. This explains why the Sierra Nevada snow pack that provides nearly 30% of the state's water stood at its lowest level in at least 500 years this last winter despite precipitation levels that, while low, still came in above recent record lows. The few winter storms of the past two years were warmer than average and tended to produce rain, not snow. And what snow fell melted away almost immediately.

     

    Thresholds matter when it comes to climate change. A small increase in temperature can have a huge impact on natural systems and human infrastructure designed to cope with current weather patterns and extremes. Only a few inches of extra rain can top a levee protecting against flood. Only a degree of warming can be the difference between ice-up and navigable water, between snow pack and bare ground.

     

    Climate change has intensified the California drought by fueling record-breaking temperatures that evaporate critically important snowpack, convert snowfall into rain, and dry out soils. This last winter in California was the warmest in 119 years of record keeping, smashing the prior record by an unprecedented margin. Weather records tend to be broken when a temporary trend driven by natural variability runs in the same direction as the long-term trend driven by climate change, in this case towards warmer temperatures. Drought in California has increased significantly over the past 100 years due to rising temperatures. A recent paleoclimate study found that the current drought stands out as the worst to hit the state in 1,200 years largely due the remarkable, record-high temperatures.

    The rest of Cutting's good piece deals with what the coming El Niño will do. Please read if that interests you.

    There's an easy way to think about this. Imagine the thermostat in your home freezer is broken and the temperature inside goes from 31 degrees to 33 degrees overnight, just above freezing, with no way to turn it down. Now imagine the Koch Bros (and "friends of carbon" Democrats) have emptied your town of repair people — every last one of them is gone. It's over, right? Everything in the freezer is going to thaw. Then the inside is going to dry out. And everyone in your house who doesn't already know this will figure it out. All because of a two-degree change in temperature that can't be reversed.

    When it comes to climate, two non-obvious rules apply:

    • Change won't be linear; there will be sudden bursts at tipping points.
    • Pessimistic predictions are more likely to be right than optimistic ones.

    Most people get this already, even if they haven't internalized it. Which is why most people already know, or strongly suspect, that California and the American Southwest have already crossed a line from which there will be no return. This revelation, from the state's water agency, just adds numbers. Time to act decisively? Do enough people think so?

    Negative and Positive Takeaways

    I said that two of the three takeaways about California, from the text I quoted at the beginning, were these: "California and the Southwest have passed 'peak water'" and "most in the region know it." The third is from the same sentence: "though it's not yet reflected in real estate prices"  — meaning farm land as well as urban property.

    It's just a matter of time, though. Prices will fall as awareness hits, awareness that future prices can only fall. Note that prices in bear markets tend to be decidedly non-linear. And when that awareness does hit, when land is cheap, insurance expensive and the population in decline, nothing coming out of the mouths of the Kochs — or methane-promoting politicians in the Democratic Party — will change a single mind. (In terms of our playful freezer metaphor, you know the thing's going to end up in the yard, right? It just hasn't been carted out yet.)

    But that's just the negative takeaway. There's a positive takeaway as well. It's not over everywhere, not yet. From the same piece quoted at the top, referring to the tipping point of extreme weather:

    This [incidence of extreme weather] is "a" tipping point, not "the" tipping point. We have slid into a "new normal" for weather, but please note:

    • We're talking only about the weather, not a host of other effects, like extreme sea level rise. I don't think we've passed that tipping point yet.
    • We can stop this process whenever we want to — or rather, we can force the "carbon bosses" and their minions in government to stop whenever we want to stop them. They have only the power we collectively allow them to have.

    It really is up to us, and it really is not too late in any absolute sense. For my playfully named (but effective) "Easter Island solution," see here. For a look at one sure way out, see here.

    Will it take a decidedly non-linear, noticeably dramatic, event to create critical mass for a real solution? If so, we could use it soon, because the clock is ticking. It may be a see-saw course, but it's riding an uphill train. (Again, the real solution, expressed metaphorically, is here. Expressed directly, it's here. Everything less is a delaying tactic.)

  • Caught On Tape: Furious French Workers Attack Air France Executives, Rip Their Clothes Off

    Earlier today amid the general gloom of Europe’s sliding non-manufacturing PMIs, the one place that stood out like a sore thumb bucking the deteriorating trend, was France which not only posted an increase from August but also beat expectations.

    We strongly doubt this metric has any basis in reality because among numerous other contrary-specific factors, Bloomberg reported that as part of Air France’s long-running spat with workers over cost cuts, violence erupted earlier today as protesters stormed a meeting where managers were presenting plans for 2,900 jobs cuts, causing executives to flee with their clothes in tatters.

    According to the report, human resources chief Xavier Broseta and Pierre Plissonnier, the head of long-haul flights, scaled an eight-foot high fence to escape, shielded by security guards, with Broseta emerging shirtless and Plissonnier with his suit shredded.

    Casting some serious doubt on the service PMI “recovery” is that the attacks happened Monday as Air France told its works council that after the failure of productivity talks with pilots last week some 300 cockpit crew, 900 flight attendants and 1,700 ground staff might have to go. The cuts could include the first forced dismissals since the 1990s, according to the carrier, which subsequently postponed the meeting.

    The company, unhappy with the terrible publicity that the photos and video clips presented below will unveil about the corporate culture at Air France, promptly tried to downplay the incident, saying in a statement that “these attacks were made by isolated and particularly violent individuals as the demonstration by personnel on strike was going on calmly,” adding that a complaint had been filed for aggravated violence. We expect many more complains will be filed before the latest surge in anger at the upcoming layoffs dissipates.

    It’s not just bad news for up to 3,000 soon to be unemployed workers but for Boeing too, which may be about to see the first scrapping of Dreamliner orders:

    Under the savings plan announced today, Air France’s fleet would be reduced by 14 jets, with orders for Boeing Co. 787s scrapped and aging Airbus Group SE A340s phased out. The Air France-KLM Group unit indicated there was scope for compromise should unions come forward with serious savings measure.

     

    Air France said last week it was planning cuts to jobs, jets and routes in the absence of a deal with pilots, who had been asked to work more hours for the same pay to help end annual losses that began in 2011. Government ministers had urged the sides to continue talking so that jobs could be saved.

    The upcoming layoffs were once again blamed almost entirely on events in Asia: “The changes would require a shrinking of Air France’s network, with a reduction in frequencies and more sweeping seasonal capacity cuts next year, following by the termination of some routes in 2017, especially to Asia, where competition is toughest. Frequencies to 22 destinations would be affected.”

    Expect more outbursts of violence and even more profits for tailors in Paris, confirming the Keynesian “torn suit fallacy”, because the job cuts are said to be implemented around mid-December at the earliest, or just in time for the holidays.

    Meanwhile, this is the outcome as the anger of several thousand French workers finally spills over.

     

    And roll the tape:

  • Saudi Oil Minister Puts On Brave Face Amid Severe Headwinds: "Eventually, Economic Producers Will Prevail"

    As the EM world looks on helplessly while Saudi Arabia’s war with the US shale complex (and, by extension, with the Fed) serves to keep crude prices depressed putting enormous pressure on commodity currencies and accelerating emerging market outflows, the question is whether Riyadh’s SAMA piggy bank can outlast the various capital market lifelines available to America’s largely uneconomic shale drillers. 

    It’s tempting to simply say “yes.” That is, with the next round of revolver raids due in days and with HY spreads blowing out amid jittery US markets, it seems unlikely that maligned US producers will be able to survive for much longer, and despite the fact that data out yesterday shows Riyadh’s FX reserves falling to a 32-month low, the Saudi war chest still amounts to nearly $700 billion,  giving the kingdom plenty of ammo. However, between maintaining subsidies, defending the riyal peg, and fighting two proxy wars, Saudi Arabia’s fiscal situation has deteriorated rapidly, forcing Riyadh to tap the bond market in an effort to help plug a hole that amounts to some 20% of GDP. 

    Given the above, some have dared to suggest that in fact, the Saudis could lose this “war” just as they may be set to lose their status as regional power broker to Tehran thanks to Iran’s partnership with Moscow in the ongoing effort to shore up Assad in Syria and wrest control of Baghdad from the US.

    But don’t tell that to Saudi Arabia’s Oil Minister Ali al-Naimi who says that despite all the uncertainty, the economics of oil exploration and production will prevail at the end of the day. Here’s Reuters, citing Economic Times:

    Saudi Arabia’s Oil Minister Ali al-Naimi believes economic producers will prevail over higher-cost suppliers and OPEC’s share of the market will rise, India’s Economic Times newspaper reported on its website on Monday.

     

    In comments suggesting Saudi Arabia, the world’s top oil exporter, is sticking to its policy of defending market share rather than supporting prices, Naimi told the paper the drop in oil prices was less of a problem than fluctuations.

     

    “The world needs a reliable, sustainable supply. Best way to do it is to make sure that demand and supply should be equal, so there will not be fluctuation of price. The biggest problem for everybody, producer and consumer today, is fluctuation — the ups and downs,” he was quoted as saying.

     

    Referring to reports that the number of drilling rigs deployed by U.S. shale producers is falling, Naimi said: “Eventually, economic producers will continue to prevail,” the paper reported.     

     

    Naimi disagreed with analysts who believe OPEC’s market share would fall further, the paper reported. “On the contrary, OPEC’s market share will be higher,” he said.

    Maybe so, but make no mistake, this is a precarious time for the Saudis. If the US shale complex finally folds under the weight of its own debt, bad economics, and less forgiving capital markets allowing Riyadh to raise prices again having secured the future of the country’s market share, and if Iran and Russia end up being content with preserving the regional balance of power and don’t move to push the issue in Iraq and Yemen once they’re done “saving” Syria, then the Saudis may well weather the storm. 

    However, there are quite a few things that can go wrong here that would serve to destabilize the situation and if the rumors about a rebellion within the royal family are true, the slightest misstep could end up being catastrophic.

  • Treasury Sells 3-Month Bills At 0% Yield For First Time Ever

    “Investors” are so desperate to hold on to short-term paper that they paid $100 for a 3-month Treasury-bill at today’s auction. That is a 0% yield – for the first time ever – lower even than the auction right after Lehman’s bankruptcy in Nov 2008.

     

    Chart: Bloomberg

    It is probably safe to say that NIRP is next, followed by more negative yields further to the right of the curve, as the US gradually becomes Europe.

    But don’t worry: as Yellen admitted during her healthcare-scare speech, “nominal interest rates cannot go much below zero“, just a little.

  • Russia Escalates Syria Proxy War: Threatens Full Naval Blockade Of Syria

    Last week, NATO’s supreme allied commander for Europe, General Philip Breedlove, suggested that Russia has effectively declared a no-fly zone in Syria. 

    That contention was supported by Moscow’s rather bold move to effectively instruct the US-led coalition to keep its planes out of the sky starting last Wednesday. Ultimately, The Kremlin has declared a monopoly on Syrian air space for the duration of Russia’s military campaign, marking an epic embarrassment for Washington, and serving notice to the anti-regime forces operating in Syria that there’s a new sheriff in town. 

    Well, don’t look now, but in addition to the de facto no-fly zone, some experts are out suggesting that Russia is set to use its Black Sea fleet to enforce a blockade on the Syrian coast. Here’s Sputnik:

    Russia’s Black Sea Fleet may be used in Syria to blockade the Syrian coastline and deliver armaments, as well as possibly deliver artillery strikes, the head of Russian State Duma’s defense committee and former Black Sea Fleet commander Vladimir Komoyedov said.

     

    “Regarding the large-scale use of the Black Sea Fleet in this operation, I don’t think it will happen, but in terms of a coastal blockade, I think that it’s quite [possible]. The delivery of artillery strikes hasn’t been excluded; the ships are ready for this, but there is no point in it for now. The terrorists are in deep, where the artillery cannot reach,” Komoyedov said.

     

    Komoyedov added that the size of the naval grouping used in the operation will depend on the intensity of the fighting. He noted that currently, the navy’s Mediterranean flotilla is currently sufficient for actions in the given area.

     

    Komoyedov also said that auxiliary vessels will certainly be used in the operation against ISIL to deliver armaments as well as military and technical equipment.

    Meanwhile, the aerial bombardment continues unabated as Russian warplanes have reportedly destroyed “a terrorist base in the woods” where tanks – which are ironically Soviet made- were stationed. Here’s RT:

    The Russian Air Force in Syria has conducted 25 sorties on 9 Islamic State installations in the last 24 hours, eliminating a disguised terrorist base equipped with tanks, a command center and a communication hub, the Defense Ministry reported.

     

    Russian bombers taking off from Khmeimim airbase knocked out a terrorist base hidden in the woods near the city of Idlib, eliminating 30 vehicles, among which were several Soviet-made T-55 tanks.

     

    “Six airstrikes hit the base, and the terrorists’ equipment was fully destroyed,” Konashenkov said. 

    And here’s the video which purportedly shows the attack on the hidden ISIS base:

    While according to Russian weatherwomen, mother nature is smiling on The Kremlin’s efforts (via The Guardian):

    It’s warm and sunny in Syria – and conditions are perfect for flying fighter jets and launching airstrikes, according to a weather report broadcast on Russian state television. 

     

    “Russian aerospace forces are continuing their operation in Syria. Experts say the timing for it was chosen very well in terms of weather,” said the forecaster in a segment aired on Rossiya 24 on Sunday, standing in front of a screen showing a Sukhoi Su-27 fighter jet with the words “flying weather”.

    For those wondering how long it would be before an “accident” took place, “inadvertently” pitting Russian fighter planes against NATO, we got the answer on Monday as Turkey scrambled F-16s to the border after Russia allegedly violated Ankara’s air space. Here’s a bit of color from BBC:

    Russia said the incident was a “navigational error” and that it has “clarified” the matter to Ankara.

     

    Turkish jets patrolling the border were also “harassed” by an unidentified plane on Sunday, Turkey said.

     

    Turkey, a Nato member, has called the Russian strikes a “grave mistake”.

     

    Turkish Prime Minister Ahmet Davutoglu told Turkish TV that the rules of engagement were clear, whoever violates its airspace.

     

    “The Turkish Armed Forces are clearly instructed. Even if it is a flying bird, it will be intercepted,” he said.

    Only, that’s not true, because the first time Ankara shoots down a Russian “flying bird”, Erdogan will have a real war on his hands and will swiftly discover that while bombing air force-less Kurdish separatists with impunity is easy, dog fights with Russian fighter pilots are not, and just about the last thing Turkey needs with inflation soaring and the lira tumbling and elections looming is to go to war with Russia. 

    In any event, the situation is clearly escalating, and as the Russians get more bold with each passing NATO bluff and subsequent fold, the stakes get still higher. As hyperbolic as it may sound, the West is now one Erodgan miscalculation away from open warfare with Russia and Moscow looks to be just days away from enforcing a full naval blockade of what is rapidly becoming a Mid-East Kremlin colony.

  • US Government Accused Of "War Crime" By Doctors Without Borders In Bombing That Killed 22

    In the aftermath of Saturday’s tragic and unprecedented bombing of an Afghanistan hospital by the US air force, one which killed 22 and continued for 30 minutes after mission command has been allegedly notified of the “error” which the US initially claimed was “collateral damage”, the Doctors without Borders physician group in charge of operating the hospital has come out swinging and has equated the US bombing of a hospital to engaging in nothing short of a war crime.

    According to AFP, “pressure mounted on Washington Monday to come clean over the apparent US airstrike on an Afghan hospital that killed 22, an incident the Pentagon chief said was “confused and complicated” but which medical charity MSF branded a war crime.”

    MSF general director Christopher Stokes, however, had no intention of waiting:

    “Under the clear presumption that a war crime has been committed, MSF demands that a full and transparent investigation into the event be conducted by an independent international body.

    Stokes also hit out at claims by Afghan officials that insurgents were using the hospital as a position to target Afghan forces and civilians.

    “These statements imply that Afghan and US forces working together decided to raze to the ground a fully functioning hospital with more than 180 staff and patients inside because they claim that members of the Taliban were present,” he said.

    “This amounts to an admission of a war crime. This utterly contradicts the initial attempts of the US government to minimise the attack as ‘collateral damage’.”

    Others joined in: UN rights chief Zeid Ra’ad Al Hussein has also called for a full and transparent probe, noting: “An air strike on a hospital may amount to a war crime.”

    To be sure, the US which has done everything in its power in the past week to divert attention to Russian bombardment in Syria as attacks on Syrian “civilians” and “moderate rebels”, had a canned response: Defense Secretary Ashton Carter expressed sadness over the “tragic loss of life” but warned that the investigation will not be swift.

    “The situation there is confused and complicated so it may take some time to get the facts, but we will get the facts, but we will be full and transparent about sharing them,” he told reporters on a flight to Madrid at the start of a European tour.

    Then, moments ago after the US government did in fact admit, again, it was at fault, the DwB once again lashes out at the US government with the following statement:

    “Today the US government has admitted that it was their airstrike that hit our hospital in Kunduz and killed 22 patients and MSF staff. Their description of the attack keeps changing—from collateral damage, to a tragic incident, to now attempting to pass responsibility to the Afghanistan government. The reality is the US dropped those bombs. The US hit a huge hospital full of wounded patients and MSF staff. The US military remains responsible for the targets it hits, even though it is part of a coalition. There can be no justification for this horrible attack. With such constant discrepancies in the US and Afghan accounts of what happened, the need for a full transparent independent investigation is ever more critical.”

    So what is the US response? Why desperately attempt to pivot once again to Russian “war crimes”

    • NATO URGES RUSSIA TO STOP HARMING CIVILIANS, SYRIAN OPPOSITION

    And the biggest US strategic asset in the region, of course: ISIS.

    More importantly, we fail to find any historical precedent for a Nobel Peace Prize winner having been accused of engaging in war crimes just several short years later.

  • How America's "Think Tanks" Are Compromised & Bought Off By Foreign Governments

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    The think tanks do not disclose the terms of the agreements they have reached with foreign governments. And they have not registered with the United States government as representatives of the donor countries, an omission that appears, in some cases, to be a violation of federal law, according to several legal specialists who examined the agreements at the request of The Times.

     

    As a result, policy makers who rely on think tanks are often unaware of the role of foreign governments in funding the research.

     

    Several legal experts who reviewed the documents, however, said the tightening relationships between United States think tanks and their overseas sponsors could violate the Foreign Agents Registration Act, the 1938 federal law that sought to combat a Nazi propaganda campaign in the United States. The law requires groups that are paid by foreign governments with the intention of influencing public policy to register as “foreign agents” with the Justice Department.

     

    At least one of the research groups conceded that it may in fact be violating the federal law.

     

    – From the New York Times article: Foreign Powers Buy Influence at Think Tanks

    Liberty Blitzkrieg readers will be under no illusions when it comes to the role “Think Tanks” play within America’s crony, unethical, slimy and entirely compromised political system. Nevertheless, the recent New York Times article exposing how foreign governments, likely illegally, use them to buy influence in Washington D.C., is extremely important and disturbing. Let’s examine a few excerpts.

    From the New York Times:

    WASHINGTON — The agreement signed last year by the Norway Ministry of Foreign Affairs was explicit: For $5 million, Norway’s partner in Washington would push top officials at the White House, at the Treasury Department and in Congress to double spending on a United States foreign aid program.

     

    But the recipient of the cash was not one of the many Beltway lobbying firms that work every year on behalf of foreign governments.

     

    It was the Center for Global Development, a nonprofit research organization, or think tank, one of many such groups in Washington that lawmakers, government officials and the news media have long relied on to provide independent policy analysis and scholarship.

     

    The money is increasingly transforming the once-staid think-tank world into a muscular arm of foreign governments’ lobbying in Washington. And it has set off troubling questions about intellectual freedom: Some scholars say they have been pressured to reach conclusions friendly to the government financing the research.

     

    The think tanks do not disclose the terms of the agreements they have reached with foreign governments. And they have not registered with the United States government as representatives of the donor countries, an omission that appears, in some cases, to be a violation of federal law, according to several legal specialists who examined the agreements at the request of The Times.

     

    As a result, policy makers who rely on think tanks are often unaware of the role of foreign governments in funding the research.

    And you wonder why U.S. foreign policy is such an epic disaster…

    “It is particularly egregious because with a law firm or lobbying firm, you expect them to be an advocate,” Mr. Sandler added. “Think tanks have this patina of academic neutrality and objectivity, and that is being compromised.”

     

    The arrangements involve Washington’s most influential think tanks, including the Brookings Institution, the Center for Strategic and International Studies, and the Atlantic Council. Each is a major recipient of overseas funds, producing policy papers, hosting forums and organizing private briefings for senior United States government officials that typically align with the foreign governments’ agendas.

     

    Most of the money comes from countries in Europe, the Middle East and elsewhere in Asia, particularly the oil-producing nations of the United Arab Emirates, Qatar and Norway, and takes many forms. The United Arab Emirates, a major supporter of the Center for Strategic and International Studies, quietly provided a donation of more than $1 million to help build the center’s gleaming new glass and steel headquarters not far from the White House. Qatar, the small but wealthy Middle East nation, agreed last year to make a $14.8 million, four-year donation to Brookings, which has helped fund a Brookings affiliate in Qatar and a project on United States relations with the Islamic world.

    Recall that Qatar was one of the major funders of ISIS in the early days. For more, see:

    America’s Disastrous Foreign Policy – My Thoughts on Iraq

    Some scholars say the donations have led to implicit agreements that the research groups would refrain from criticizing the donor governments.

     

    “If a member of Congress is using the Brookings reports, they should be aware — they are not getting the full story,” said Saleem Ali, who served as a visiting fellow at the Brookings Doha Center in Qatar and who said he had been told during his job interview that he could not take positions critical of the Qatari government in papers. “They may not be getting a false story, but they are not getting the full story.”

    Oh, they’re getting a false story.

    In interviews, top executives at the think tanks strongly defended the arrangements, saying the money never compromised the integrity of their organizations’ research. Where their scholars’ views overlapped with those of donors, they said, was coincidence.

     

    “Our currency is our credibility,” said Frederick Kempe, chief executive of the Atlantic Council, a fast-growing research center that focuses mainly on international affairs and has accepted donations from at least 25 countries since 2008.

    If that’s the case, I’d be loading up on the tenge way before buying Atlantic Council rupee.

    In their contracts and internal documents, however, foreign governments are often explicit about what they expect from the research groups they finance.

     

    “In Washington, it is difficult for a small country to gain access to powerful politicians, bureaucrats and experts,” states an internal reportcommissioned by the Norwegian Foreign Affairs Ministry assessing its grant making. “Funding powerful think tanks is one way to gain such access, and some think tanks in Washington are openly conveying that they can service only those foreign governments that provide funding.”

     

    Several legal experts who reviewed the documents, however, said the tightening relationships between United States think tanks and their overseas sponsors could violate the Foreign Agents Registration Act, the 1938 federal law that sought to combat a Nazi propaganda campaign in the United States. The law requires groups that are paid by foreign governments with the intention of influencing public policy to register as “foreign agents” with the Justice Department.

     

    “I am surprised, quite frankly, at how explicit the relationship is between money paid, papers published and policy makers and politicians influenced,” said Amos Jones, a Washington lawyer who has specialized in the foreign agents act, after reviewing transactions between the Norway government and Brookings, the Center for Global Development and other groups.

     

    At least one of the research groups conceded that it may in fact be violating the federal law.

     

    “We have to respect their academic and intellectual independence,” Mr. Otaka, the Japanese Embassy spokesman, said in a separate interview. But one Japanese diplomat, who asked not to be named as he was not authorized to discuss the matter, said the country expected favorable treatment in return for donations to think tanks.

     

    “If we put actual money in, we want to have a good result for that money — as it is an investment,” he said.

     

    But three lawyers who specialize in the law governing Americans’ activities on behalf of foreign governments said that the Center for Global Development and Brookings, in particular, appeared to have taken actions that merited registration as foreign agents of Norway. The activities by the Center for Strategic and International Studies and the Atlantic Council, they added, at least raised questions.

     

    “The Department of Justice needs to be looking at this,” said Joshua Rosenstein, a lawyer at Sandler Reiff.

    But of course, the “Justice” Department will not be looking into anything.

    Now how about this gem…

    Michele Dunne served for nearly two decades as a specialist in Middle Eastern affairs at the State Department, including stints in Cairo and Jerusalem, and on the White House National Security Council. In 2011, she was a natural choice to become the founding director of the Atlantic Council’s Rafik Hariri Center for the Middle East, named after the former prime minister of Lebanon, who was assassinated in 2005.

     

    But by the summer of 2013, when Egypt’s military forcibly removed the country’s democratically elected president, Mohamed Morsi, Ms. Dunne soon realized there were limits to her independence. After she signed a petition and testified before a Senate Foreign Relations Committee urging the United States to suspend military aid to Egypt, calling Mr. Morsi’s ouster a “military coup,” Bahaa Hariri called the Atlantic Council to complain, executives with direct knowledge of the events said.

     

    Ms. Dunne declined to comment on the matter. But four months after the call, Ms. Dunne left the Atlantic Council.

     

    Ms. Dunne was replaced by Francis J. Ricciardone Jr., who served as United States ambassador to Egypt during the rule of Hosni Mubarak, the longtime Egyptian military and political leader forced out of power at the beginning of the Arab Spring. Mr. Ricciardone, a career foreign service officer, had earlier been criticized by conservatives and human rights activists for being too deferential to the Mubarak government.

     

    Scholars at other Washington think tanks, who were granted anonymity to detail confidential internal discussions, described similar experiences that had a chilling effect on their research and ability to make public statements that might offend current or future foreign sponsors. At Brookings, for example, a donor with apparent ties to the Turkish government suspended its support after a scholar there made critical statements about the country, sending a message, one scholar there said.

     

    “It is the self-censorship that really affects us over time,” the scholar said. “But the fund-raising environment is very difficult at the moment, and Brookings keeps growing and it has to support itself.”

     

    But in 2012, when a revised agreement was signed between Brookings and the Qatari government, the Qatar Ministry of Foreign Affairs itself praised the agreement on its website, announcing that “the center will assume its role in reflecting the bright image of Qatar in the international media, especially the American ones.” Brookings officials also acknowledged that they have regular meetings with Qatari government officials about the center’s activities and budget, and that the former Qatar prime minister sits on the center’s advisory board.

     

    Mr. Ali, who served as one of the first visiting fellows at the Brookings Doha Center after it opened in 2009, said such a policy, though unwritten, was clear.

     

    “There was a no-go zone when it came to criticizing the Qatari government,” said Mr. Ali, who is now a professor at the University of Queensland in Australia. “It was unsettling for the academics there. But it was the price we had to pay.”

    The price “we the people had to pay is…

    Screen Shot 2015-09-11 at 10.03.46 AM

    The above excerpts are just a small part of the story. I suggest you read the entire article, as it also explains how the mad dash to push the corporate giveaway, Trans Pacific Partnership (TPP) agreement, was partly funded by foreign payoffs to think tanks.

  • Bad News Piles On For Hedge Fund Hotel SunEdison: First $315MM Margin Call, Now Mass Layoffs

    It has been a long way up and quick ride down for SunEdison but bad news keeps piling up for the hedge fund hotel even as it dead-cat-bounces again. As the stock bounces, just as it bounced in September after Steve Cohen's Point72 exposed their stake and JPM jumped to the rescue, uncertainty remains extreme. Amid a surge in debt and increasingly negative operating cash-flow, the plunge in stock (asset) price may have triggered a cross-collateral margin call of around $315 million. Furthermore, mass layoffs are on the cards as the CEO attempts to "optimize" the business.

     

    Another squeeze…

    Charts: Bloomberg

    Some investors have dumped the stock due to low oil prices and turmoil in commodity markets — a problem for other public solar companies as well. However, short sellers have targeted SunEdison more than its competitors.

    Recent acquisitions have nearly doubled SunEdison's debt load and increased negative operating cash flow. The Vivint acquisition, which wasn't an obvious fit with SunEdison's culture and traditional business of building large solar-power plants, added to investor skepticism.

     

    The stock has become a playground for hedge funds.

    But uncertainty remains extreme…

    SunEdison may have triggered a collateral call on its $410 million margin loan, a report from CreditSights says, citing a decline in the financially-linked TerraForm Power Inc (known as a "yieldco," the spin-off of a related business venture), which fell 36% in September and continued to slide, down 49% year ­to ­date.

     

     

    After sifting through four different SEC documents – a 10Q at SunEdison, an equity prospectus at TerraForm, a convertible bond 8K from SunEdison and a margin loan agreement at SunEdison… the report concludes it is possible SunEdison to be dragged down by TerraForm and the added burden of posting cash collateral for the margin loan that was backed by stock.

     

    CreditSights says the margin loan is yet another example of lack of disclosure but they reiterate their our conclusion on the collateral call.

    As Creditsights concludes…

    there are a lot of moving parts to SunEdison and the more we find the more negative we get on the sponsor company of TerraForm Power.

    And now, as GreenTechMedia.com's Stephen Lacey reports, SunEdison is now culling its workforce.

    According to a company-wide memo from CEO Ahmad Chatila released on September 30, SunEdison will be laying off around 10 percent of its 7,300 employees. Many employees received notices on Friday.

     

    "Overall, the proposed changes result in an overall reduction of about 30%, 20% being from non-labor expenses and about 10% from headcount reduction. And this process will take some time to complete. Most of the changes will be announced during the fourth quarter with some final steps expected in the first quarter of 2016," reads the memo.

     

    The staff reduction will come through integrating acquired companies and "eliminating redundancy." It will also come from simplifying management structures in different areas of the business, and focusing on a smaller range of geographic regions.

     

    The cuts have reached all the way to the VP level, but not the executive level. Sources within the company expressed worry and surprise that the cuts didn't impact the architects of the Vivint acquisition.

     

    When asked for comment, SunEdison would not address the cuts specifically.

     

    "We are proposing to take several actions around the world to optimize our business, align with current and expected market opportunities and position ourselves for long-term growth. In October we plan to provide investors with a more comprehensive view of our business structure and go-forward strategic growth plan in a conference call," wrote spokesperson Gordon Handelsman in an email.

    More details on SunEdison's plans to "align with current and expected market opportunities" will be forthcoming this week.

  • Oct 6 – Fed's Rosengren: Door Still Open For 2015 Fed Rate Hike

    Follow The Market Madness with Voice and Text on FinancialJuice

    EMOTION MOVING MARKETS NOW: 33/100 FEAR

    PREVIOUS CLOSE: 20/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE WEEK AGO: 12/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE MONTH AGO: 10/100 EXTREME FEAR

    ONE YEAR AGO: 5/100 EXTREME FEAR

    Put and Call Options: EXTREME FEAR During the last five trading days, volume in put options has lagged volume in call options by 25.65% as investors make bullish bets in their portfolios. However, this is still among the highest levels of put buying seen during the last two years, indicating fear on the part of investors.

    Market Volatility:  NEUTRAL The CBOE Volatility Index (VIX) is at 19.54. This is a neutral reading and indicates that market risks appear low.

    Stock Price Strength: FEAR The number of stocks hitting 52-week lows exceeds the number hitting highs and is at the lower end of its range, indicating fear.

     

    PIVOT POINTS

    EURUSD | GBPUSD | USDJPY | USDCAD | AUDUSD | EURJPY | EURCHF | EURGBPGBPJPY | NZDUSD | USDCHF | EURAUD | AUDJPY 

    S&P 500 (ES) | NASDAQ 100 (NQ) | DOW 30 (YM) | RUSSELL 2000 (TF) Euro (6E) |Pound (6B)

    EUROSTOXX 50 (FESX) | DAX 30 (FDAX) | BOBL (FGBM) | SCHATZ (FGBS) | BUND (FGBL)

    CRUDE OIL (CL) | GOLD (GC) | 10 YR T NOTE | 2 YR T  NOTE | 5 YR T NOTE | 30 YR TREASURY BONDSOYBEANS | CORN

     

    MEME OF THE DAY – BEIJING AFTER VOLKSWAGEN

     

    UNUSUAL ACTIVITY

    FOLD .. JAN 9 and 10 CALLS on the offer

    MDT activity in the NOV 72.5 CALLS

    FUND  Senior Portfolio Manager P    18,231  A  $ 5.9175

    LPCN – President and CEO P    2,000  A  $ 12  P    700  A  $ 11.6799 P    1,300  A  $ 11.676

    More Unusual Activity…

    HEADLINES

     

    Fed’s Rosengren: Door Still Open For 2015 Fed Rate Hike

    BOJ may need to ease again as prospect of Fed rate hike fades –Nikkei

    ECB: French, Dutch, Lithuanian cbanks to trial reverse auctions

    ECB PSPP: +EUR8.271Bn To EUR346.15Bn (prev +EUR11.161Bn To EUR337.879Bn)

    ECB Post-Summer Boost to Bond Purchases Slows Near Month End

    US, 11 nations on verge of historic Pacific Rim trade accord

    Russia mulls oil talks

    Saudis say Opec market share will increase

    UK FinMin Osborne: There a lot of risks in world economy

    DoJ: BP settlement will cost $20.8bn

     

    GOVERNMENTS/CENTRAL BANKS

    Fed’s Rosengren: Door Still Open For 2015 Fed Rate Hike –MW

    US, 11 nations on verge of historic Pacific Rim trade accord –WaPo

    Ford, others say trade deal lacks currency protections

    ISM’s Nieves says a slowdown in retail was linked to stocks and confidence –ForexLive

    ECB: French, Dutch, Lithuanian C. Banks To Trial Reverse Auctions –BBG

    BOJ may need to ease again as prospect of Fed rate hike fades

    UK FinMin Osborne: There a lot of risks in world economy –ForexLive

    UK FinMin Osborne: We will build a budget surplus in UK –FT

    PMI: Eurozone Shows Signs Of Growth Waning At End Of Solid Q3 –Markit

    PMI: Weakest Rise In UK Activity In Nearly 2.5-Years In September –Markit

    Germany FinMin Schaeuble: Too early to talk about delays in the Greek plan –ForexLive

    Portugal Government Re-Elected Despite Painful Austerity –Yahoo

    Greek Budget To Forecast EUR3.4 Bln Rev. Shortfall In 2015 –EFSYN

    Fitch: EU Bank Resolution Paths Diverge, Coordination Important

    Italy FinMin Padoan will tomorrow announce proposals for common funds to finance cyclical unemployment benefits in the EZ –BBG

    FIXED INCOME

    ECB PSPP: +EUR8.271Bn To EUR346.15Bn (prev +EUR11.161Bn To EUR337.879Bn)

    ECB CBPP: +EUR 2.548Bn To EUR122.803Bn (prev +EUR1.993Bn To EUR120.255Bn)

    ECB ABSPP: +EUR385Mn To EUR13.150Bn (prev +EUR759Mn To EUR12.765Bn)

    ECB Post-Summer Boost to Bond Purchases Slows Near Month End

    Portuguese bonds at five-month high after election –FT

    Central Banks Lose Bond-Market Credibility as Woes Mount –BBG

    FX

    FX: Currency trading volumes pull back in September –FT

    USD: Dollar Ticks Down After ISM Non-manufacturing Survey

    BANKS: Banks face erosion of business around currency fix –FT

    ENERGY/COMMODITIES

    WTI futures settle +1.6% at $46.26 per barrel

    Brent futures settle +2.3% at $49.25 per barrel

    Brent crude jumps most in two weeks –FT

    Oil prices rise on China stimulus hopes –MW

    Russia mulls oil talks –CNBC

    Saudi’s Naimi says OPEC share of the oil market will increase –ForexLive

    More pain ahead for copper – Barclays

    EQUITIES

    BofA, Deutsche Bank slice S&P 500 forecasts –FT

    DoJ: BP settlement will cost $20.8 billion –WaPo

    M&A: Potash Corp. Withdraws $8.8bn Offer For German Rival K+S –WSJ

    M&A: Suncor makes C$6.6bn bid for Canadian Oil Sands –FT

    Canadian Oil Sands unlikely to engage with Suncor on basis of current proposals –Rtrs source

    M&A: Nestle in talks to merge international ice cream ops with R&R –Rtrs

    ACTIVIST: Trian Takes $2.5bn stake in General Electric –MW

    ACTIVIST: Trian buys more Dupont shares –CNBC

    TECH: Jack Dorsey back in the flock as permanant Twitter boss –CityAM

    TECH: Google takes stake in messaging startup Symphony, valuing company at $650M –BI

    BANKS: UK launches Lloyds bank shares sell-off –Daily Mail

    BANKS: Banks face erosion of business around currency fix –FT

    M&A: Full Takeover Of Glencore Is Not On The Agenda –Telegraph

    COMMODS: Glencore Surges In Hong Kong Amid Unit Sale Talks –Rtrs

    ECONOMY: UK Firms See Least Certain Outlook In 2.5 Years –Deloitte

    BREXIT: Prudential May Quit Britain Over New EU Diktat –Sunday Times

    AIRLINES: Air France To Announce Job Cuts Under New Restructuring Plan –BizTimes

    TECH: The UK is the e-commerce capital of the EU –CityAM

    RETAIL: American Apparel files for bankruptcy protection –FT

    TECH: Facebook Says Planned Software Changes Caused Outages –WSJ

    RETAILS: Moody’s: US Apparel And Footwear Industry Outlook Drops To Stable As Strong Dollar Squeezes Earnings

    BANKS: ANZ limits lending to clean coal –AFR

    EMERGING MARKETS

    World Bank Trims 2015, 2016 East Asia Forecasts, Cites China, US Rate Risks –Rtrs

    Modi and Merkel vow trade talks and 2.25 billion green energy dollars –Rtrs

     

    Nigerian central bank chief hints at import ban end –FT

  • Nomi Prins: How Trump Became Trump And What That Means For The Rest Of Us

    Authored by Nomi Prins via TomDispatch.com,

    Trumpocrisy

    The Donald’s Finances and the Art of Ignoring Conflicts and Contradictions

    The 2016 election campaign is certainly a billionaire’s playground when it comes to “establishment candidates” like Hillary Clinton and Jeb Bush who cater to mega-donors and use their money to try to rally party bases. The only genuine exception to the rule this time around has been Bernie Sanders, who has built a solid grassroots following and funding machine, while shunning what he calls “the billionaire class” that fuels the super PACs.

    Donald Trump, like Ross Perot back in the 1992 and 1996 elections, has played quite a different trick on the money-saturated American political system.  He has removed the billionaire as middleman between citizen plebeians and political elites, and created a true .00001% candidate, because he’s… well, a financial elite unto himself, however conveniently posed as the country’s straight-talking “everyman.”

    Despite his I-can-buy-but-can’t-be-bought swagger, Trump’s persona has been carefully constructed to deflect even the most obvious questions of conflict of interest that his wealth and deal-making history should bring up. He claims that he would govern (or dictate) as he is, no apologies or bullshit. But would he?

    The billionaire-as-president is a new prospect for America. The only faintly comparable situation in our history came before the Crash of 1929, when President Calvin Coolidge, who famously declared that “the business of America is business,” reappointed mogul Andrew Mellon as his treasury secretary, just as President Warren Harding had done before him. A walking conflict of interest, Mellon left Washington during Herbert Hoover’s administration to avoid Congressional scrutiny of his personal business endeavors. He was later investigated by the Department of Justice for falsifying tax information in his own business empire.

    Trump is, by his own admission, a dealmaker who has, since the 1970s, utilized self-promotion and his own growing celebrity to make money.  Nonetheless, he denies the importance of money itself. His quasi-autobiography, The Art of the Deal, opens with this now-familiar tall tale: “I don’t do it for the money. I’ve got enough, much more than I’ll ever need. I do it to do it. Deals are my art form.”

    Today, he asserts that he is worth a cool $10 billion, having long been cagey about just how much he has. That figure, too, may be more scam than reality. Forbes pegs Trump's fortune at $4 billion in its 2015 top billionaires list, where he places 405th in the world and 133rd in the U.S.  In his 92-page Federal Election Committee financial filing, which doesn’t require the disclosure of his total wealth, the value of his global enterprises, assets, debts, and income sources are listed in ranges, rather than exact figures. More than 20 items are characterized as worth “over $50 million.”

    He has at least $1.4 billion in assets and $285 million in debt, if we use just $50 million as a guesstimate on those items; $2.8 billion in assets and $570 million in debt, if we pick the figure of $100 million instead. In other words, we still don’t know what he’s worth. As with so much else, we just have to take his word for it.

    Consider the presidency as Donald Trump’s ultimate deal. And don’t think for a second that if he entered the Oval Office his money and deal-making lust and every conflict of interest that went with them wouldn’t follow him there.

    He claims to be an open book — “the definition of the American success story,” as his campaign website puts it.  He wants people to believe (as his acolytes do) that he’s just like us — except for the hair — only richer, more successful, and (not to mince words) better. That narrative has, of course, been carefully constructed for our consumption, which means, if he succeeds, we are part of his chosen art form, his deal.  

    Though you might not know it from the incessant media coverage of his candidacy or his P.T. Barnum-ish self-glorification, there are plenty of pieces missing from his financial story that call into question both his skill as a dealmaker and his business acumen.  Though there’s been much discussion of how money from the Koch Brothers and other billionaire donors might influence 2016’s candidates, there’s been little discussion of how Trump might be influenced by the billionaire backing him: himself.

    Celebrity Apprentice

    The Trump phenomenon has delivered ratings to networks and, arguably, the apolitical to their TV sets. It’s probably sold a lot of cars, judging from the commercials that went with the recent Republican debates. A record 24 million people watched the first one on Fox News.  That event was, in fact, such an obvious triumph for Fox that CNN upped the ante, expanding the second debate to a full (some would say endless) three hours. As Trump noted, “I guess it was to sell commercials.” CNN similarly shattered its prior election debate records, averaging 23 million viewers.

    All of this has been a boon for The Donald, who clearly has a remarkable ability to glue cameras to him and use the media to his advantage, a skill he honed starting with his first Manhattan deal in 1973. When Trump went on ABC’s This Week with George Stephanopoulos on August 23rd, he dispatched Jeb Bush this way: “We need a person with a lot of smarts, a lot of cunning, and a lot of energy. And Jeb doesn't have that,” while dissing Scott Walker as a governor whose “state is really in trouble.” Walker just left the race. Jeb continues to falter. Call it Trump magic.

    The Donald has long perfected two proven strategies for winning: attack and deflect. On both counts, he is a TV veteran. Appearing on NBC’s Late Night with David Letterman in 1987 to promote The Art of the Deal, his skill in deflecting attention from aspects of his life that might otherwise diminish his aura was already on full display. When Letterman probed the particulars of Trump’s personal wealth multiple times, he dodged effectively, insisting, “You’ll never get it out of me.” He also deflected his host’s question about the degree to which his father’s money contributed to his success. “He was a solid guy and a bright guy, I learned a lot” was about all Letterman could dig out of him on Fred Trump.

    And here’s an irony: for all his edginess, Trump’s savvy in avoiding what might embarrass or confine him makes him much more of a politician that he’d like us to believe.  His father, however, provided Trump with far more guidance and help than that “self-made man” would care for us to realize.  So let’s start with a little tour of his celebrity apprenticeship.

    Fred Trump was born in Queens, New York, in 1905. According to The Donald, Fred's father had emigrated to the United States from Sweden in 1885.  Fred himself would convert a business in low-income housing into a $300 million fortune.

    A year after leaving high school, Fred built his first home in Woodhaven, Queens. “It cost a little less than $5,000 and he sold it for $7,500,” his son proudly wrote years later. 

    By 1929, Fred was building larger homes. When the Depression hit, he bought a bankruptcy mortgage-service company, which he sold for a profit a year later. In 1934, he returned to building lower-priced homes in the depressed Flatbush area of Brooklyn. During the next dozen years, he would build 2,500 of them in Brooklyn and Queens. 

    Trump and his father had an "a relationship that was almost businesslike,” The Donald would later write and from Fred he would, he’s testified, learn toughness, though “I also realized that if I ever wanted to be known as more than Fred Trump’s son, I was eventually going to have to go out and make my own mark.”

    Think, for instance, of George W. Bush’s urge to surpass his father’s record of political power — and war making. But don’t imagine for a moment that Trump struck out on his own any more than the young Bush did. Trump recounts his first major deal as Swifton Village, a foreclosed apartment complex in Cincinnati that he said he bought with his father in 1969, while still in college. (Cincinnati Magazine claims the purchase was Fred’s exclusively.) The price was $6 million and in 1972, they resold it for $12 million, according to Trump (and a far more modest $6.75 million according to other estimates).

    But Cincinnati was never The Donald’s dream. He wanted Manhattan from the beginning. His first deal there started in 1973 with a desire to purchase the old Penn Central rail yards at 34th Street on the West side of the island.

    At that time, New York was a complete financial mess. That summer, Trump came across a newspaper story about the Penn Central Railroad bankruptcy filing. Penn Central trustees had hired a small LA-based investment management company led by Victor Palmieri to sell its assets, including its long abandoned yards in the West thirties and sixties. Ever the con artist, Trump recalled, “I couldn’t sell him on my experience or my accomplishments, so instead I sold him on my energy and my enthusiasm.”

    Trump initially proposed building middle-income housing on the site with government financing. When the city became mired in financial problems and money for public housing dried up, he switched to Plan B and “began promoting the site as ideal for a convention center.”

    Trump still did nothing without his father’s involvement.  As their development firm had no official name, they decided to call it the Trump Organization, which covered them both and, they hoped, had a certain gravitas. Over the next several years, Trump solicited support from New York Mayor Abe Beame, who belonged to the same club as his father and to whom his father and he gave money, as he later wrote, “like all developers.” Palmieri would give Trump his virgin credibility with the press as his choice for developer, swearing to Barron’s that “he’s larger than life.”

    On July 29, 1974, the New York Times featured a front-page story on how the Trump Organization secured options to buy the two waterfront sites from Penn Central for $62 million. However, it was Mayor Ed Koch who, in 1978, gave Trump’s pet project for a future convention center at West 34th Street his official stamp of approval by agreeing to buy the site. That site would eventually become the Javits Convention Center.

    It was the symbolic, if not financial break The Donald had been waiting for. As for the West 60th street site, due to numerous problems, he let the option expire in 1979. In a sense, Donald Trump would never look back, but he would have to look down often enough.

    Trump’s Bankruptcies

    As Carly Fiorina made crystal clear to almost 23 million Americans in the second Republican debate (the topic had been broached in the first one), Trump’s companies have officially gone bankrupt four times since 1991, or as Trump spun it, “I used the law four times and made a tremendous thing. I’m in business. I did a very good job.”

    While that’s a small number of bankruptcies relative to the hundreds of companies that comprise his empire, they represented a fair amount of debt. There was the Trump Taj Mahal (with $1 billion in debt) in Atlantic City in 1991 and the Trump Plaza Hotel in Atlantic City in 1992 (with $550 million in debt). Trump Hotels and Casino Resorts, the company created from the post-bankruptcy ashes of the Taj Mahal, the Trump Plaza, and also Trump Marina in Atlantic City filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection (with $1.8 billion of debt) in 2004. Bankruptcy number four, Trump Entertainment Resorts (the post-bankruptcy company created to take over the remains of Trump Hotels and Casino Resorts) filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection (with $1.74 billion of debt) in February 2009.

    While Trump owned 28% of its stock, as he told Bloomberg News upon resigning from the board four days before the $53 million bond payment that forced it into bankruptcy was due, “I have nothing to do with it. I’m not in it. I’m not on the board.”

    He continues to argue that the Atlantic City bankruptcies weren’t his fault, but attributable to the casino environment of that moment.  Though there is some truth to that, he glosses over his method of creating new companies to purchase the bankrupt ones, after shedding their debts, and his convenient exit timing from management posts to shed blame.

    While four of his companies officially went down for the count, he had many companies that didn’t and, as he has repeatedly said, he himself never declared personal bankruptcy (so his credit score likely remains in fine shape).  Keep in mind, though, that, hard as it is to find consistent basic information about Trump’s various disasters, the count of his unofficial bankruptcies would undoubtedly run significantly higher.  After all, a number of his companies effectively went bankrupt by closing down or being bought out at bargain basement prices.

    In 1989, for instance, Trump purchased the Eastern Air Shuttle, connecting New York, Boston, and Washington, D.C. with hourly flights, for roughly $365 million. But the Trump name didn’t carry the day and passengers didn’t pony up for the line’s fancier seats and gold lavatory fixtures. Instead, in 1990 Trump defaulted on the loans he had taken out to finance the company, and its ownership reverted to its creditors, led by Citibank. The Trump Shuttle was then merged into a new corporation, Shuttle Inc., and in April 1992, its routes were assumed by USAir Shuttle, which is one way the rich make problems disappear.

    In April 2006, at a Trump Tower gala, Trump’s son Donald, Jr. promised that Trump Mortgage would become the nation's number one home-loan lender. In a CNBC interview shortly afterwards, Trump said, “Who knows about financing better than I do?” Eight months later, the company closed down amid the crashing housing market and negative publicity over an unfortunate hiring choice. Trump’s CEO, E.J. Ridings, had lied on his résumé. His previously advertised “top” spot at one of Wall Street’s “most prestigious banks” turned out to have been as a lowly broker — for one week. As Trump continually reminds us, he only has the best people work for him.

    Then there was “Trump University,” active from 2005 to 2010, where, for $25,000-$35,000, students could assumedly learn how to become real-estate gods like Trump. According to related lawsuits, they were then enticed to take out credit cards under phony business names to help pay for the privilege, and to inflate their income by projecting profits from non-existing businesses.

    Earlier this month, New York Attorney General Eric Schneiderman told the New York Daily News that approximately 600 former students have filed suit against the “university” in Manhattan Supreme Court. Similar suits are pending in California. Schneiderman claimed Trump banked $5 million personally from the scam. Trump had also ignored 2005 warnings not to use the word “university” in the name.

    Of course, if ordinary Americans declare bankruptcy due to unforeseen or difficult circumstances, they are regularly stigmatized as lazy deadbeats. The Trumps of our world, however, being rich enough to launch corporate bankruptcy protection filings, are seen as savvy dealers.  In this sense, Trump couldn’t have been savvier, since he’s survived one potential financial catastrophe after another. Unfortunately, his experiences have absolutely no applicability to ordinary Americans, even though, as David Dayen wrote at the Intercept, “Everyone would have benefited from relieving primary mortgage debt, the absence of which led to at least six million foreclosures.“

    Trump International

    It’s evident from Trump’s recent comments that his foreign policy ideas haven’t evolved much since he last seriously thought about running for president in 2011 when he wrote the first version of a campaign book, Time to Get Tough (updated for his 2016 bid). 

    Then, too, he talked about “getting China to stop playing currency charades,” while declaring his “great respect for the people of China” and blaming “our leaders and representatives” for making terrible deals with their leaders that have cost American jobs.  What Trump didn’t discuss then, and doesn’t discuss now, is how U.S. companies, his own included, produce and sell in China because they make more money doing that. Though he regularly complains that we don't manufacture anything here anymore, neither does he bother to explain his own patriotism shortfall, since he and his daughter, Ivanka, have clothing lines made in China (and Mexico, that land of “rapists,” and Bangladesh, a country continuously in violation of human rights for garment workers).

    Absent any sense of irony, he has blamed Chinese currency manipulation for making him set up shop in China and claims China is “killing us.” This, though the Chinese stock markets have recently been hammered, the Yuan is weakening, and the country’s growth is slowing, hardly signs of an imminent threat. It’s a great Trumpian combo, though: anti-China anger plays well with the xenophobic crowd, while a weaker Yuan keeps costs down on Trump’s clothing business. A deal, after all, is a deal.

    According to the Trump Organization website and his Federal Election Commission financial disclosures, he has operations practically worldwide, but notably not in Russia.  Yet Trump has had his eye on doing business there for a long time. As far back as 1987, when it was still the Soviet Union, he wanted to erect a Trump Tower in Moscow’s Red Square. In 2013, he was still talking about the possibility in Vladimir Putin’s Russia. Perhaps because of his ongoing business interests (or their mutual maverick styles), Trump, unlike his Republican presidential opponents for whom the Russian president is little short of the devil incarnate, regularly claims that he will have a “great relationship” with Putin.

    As for Trump’s Mexican border wall and the fantasy of getting the Mexican government to pay for it, Trump has made hay with the immigration issue.  You wouldn’t know, listening to him, that the number of illegal immigrants has dropped significantly since the financial crisis. On the Late Show recently, Trump doubled down on his wall, comparing it to the Great Wall of China and suggesting that “we can have a great and beautiful wall, we'll have our border, and guess what, nobody comes in unless they have their papers." This from the man who has a borderless record of outsourcing jobs and tax revenues to Mexico and elsewhere.

    All of this adds up to a vast set of potential conflicts of interest and downright deception should Donald Trump ever set foot in the White House, a subject that is at the heart of what might be called Trumpocrisy in the present campaign, but seldom part of the debate by or about The Donald himself.

    The Polls

    For now, Trump remains the clear GOP frontrunner in terms of composite polling results. His polling success has been predicated since announcing his candidacy on a cocktail of bravado, media exposure, tactical hits on opponents as if they were competitors for one of his casino deals, and the wholesale avoidance of any serious discussion of the financial baggage he brings with him into the election season. Can there be any question that, for the man who wanted to leave his father’s helping hand behind, bagging the Oval Office would be the ultimate step in outshining Fred Trump’s legacy? It’s less clear what the rest of us get out of it.

    Trump assures us that he wouldn’t let his business dealings interfere with his politics, but is he really prepared to step away from all Trump Organization matters globally? Does anyone believe that his deal-making instincts will die in the Oval Office? Or would building Trump Tower in Moscow be the touchstone for any future conversation with Putin about Ukraine and Syria? Would his acts be indicative of what happens — consider Bill Clinton netting high speaking fees from countries in which then-Secretary of State Hillary Clinton was conducting foreign policy — when you fuse public office and private power? In historical terms, it would be as if a Morgan or a Rockefeller were running the country and his private business affairs at the same time, creating the quintessential conflict of public and private interest.

    Unfortunately, we are used to politicians saying whatever they think they need to say to be elected president, and falling way short of their campaign promises on the job. Even scarier would be the notion of selling America to the craftiest bidder. The election may be more than a year away, but isn’t it time to dig beneath the carefully crafted persona that is Trump and unearth the person and the full spectrum of his business dealings? To see the real Donald Trump is to plunge into all the conflicts of interest he denies, the financial tricks he dispenses, the crucial details he obfuscates, and the flimflam he offers up day in, day out.

  • Syria Ground War Imminent? U.S. Accuses Russia Of Launching Syrian Land Campaign

    While the US was been surprised and angered by the stunningly fast turn of events in Syria where in the span of less than a month Russia unleashed a massive, Syria-based airborne campaign against what it says are ISIS terrorists, even as the US accuses Putin of targeting “moderate rebels”, it has had little recourse in accusing Putin of violating Syrian sovereignty: after all Russia is the only nation that Syria has officially invited to eradicate the “terrorist threat” that is ISIS.

    Then, last Friday, Syria raised the stakes once again, when as Bloomberg reported a loyalist of the Assad regime said “terrorism cannot only be fought from the air,” making an appeal for more military involvement to defeat Islamic State.

    In a defiant speech at the United Nations General Assembly in New York, Syrian Foreign Minister Walid al-Muallem criticized the current approach to fighting the group that has conquered swathes of territory and was encroaching on President Bashar al-Assad’s coastal stronghold in Latakia. Those gains triggered Russian intervention.

     

    “Air strikes are useless unless they are coordinated with the Syrian Arab army, the only force to combat terrorism,” al-Muallem, who also holds the title of deputy prime minister, told a largely empty assembly hall on Friday, the last day of speeches.

    The logical implication is that Syria will next invite, if it hasn’t already done so, Russian troops to join the Russian airforce in eradicating the great ISIS strawman which until recently was the pretext for “coalition” forces to bombard Syria with complete disregard for Syrian sovereignty, and the intention of destroying Assad’s military so the CIA can conclude a regime change with a pro-western leader, one which will permit the passage of a Qatar gas pipeline.

    Whether or not this assessment is accurate is irrelevant, because earlier today the US decided to jump right on it, and as CNN reported, accordint to the latest U.S. assessment of Moscow’s activity in western Syria, “Russia has moved several ground combat weapons and troops into the area to potentially back up Syrian forces in the field planning to attack anti-regime forces, according to two U.S. defense officials.

    The U.S. views the move as Russia “stepping up its ground activity” in Syria to attack those forces, rather than ISIS elements, according to one of the officials.

     

    It’s believed the Russians are positioning the weapons to be able to support a Syrian ground offensive, the officials said.

     

    The equipment includes several piece of artillery, as well as four BM-30 multiple-launch rocket systems — all considered to be highly accurate weapons. The latter is capable of rapid-fire rocket launches. Several weeks ago, Russia moved about half a dozen artillery pieces into Latakia port.

     

    The U.S. originally had thought that might be for defense of the port, but the latest move is an indication of potential ground attacks in the coming days, the official said. The weapons have been spotted between Homs and Idlib and west of Idlib.

     

    It is not clear if they’re now in final position for possible artillery strikes.

     

    The officials also said that Russia has moved electronic jamming equipment into Syria. Both a truck-mounted system and a number of pods that can go on aircraft have been observed. This could potentially give the Russians the ability to jam electronics of coalition aircraft.

    Naturally, when playing the diplomatic game, one never admits or denies one’s true intentions until well after the fact, and moments ago the speaker of the Russian Federation Valentina Matviyenko denied. According to Interfax, Matviyenko said Russia has no intention of taking part in ground operations in Syria.

    “We do not intend, and we will not engage in any ground operations” said Matvienko in the meeting with the head of Jordan’s Senate president Abdelraouf al-Rawabdeh. She stressed that the Russian air campaign in Syria is to support the actions of the regular Syrian army against terrorists.

    Which, ironically, is the excuse for US presence in Syria too.

    What happens next? A very likely course of events is that despite Russia’s denials, the Pentagon will use the gambit of a Russian ground campaign, credible or not, to get permission from Congress to send a “small”, at first, then bigger ground force of US troops in Syria to, you guessed it, “fight ISIS“, but really to do everything to prevent Russian troops from taking over key strategic positions.

    What happens then? Well, with the previously discussed Russian naval campaign of Syria as a likely next step, and with both US and Russian warplanes already flying back and forth above Syria, and now both superpowers having a legitimate, if only in the eyes of their own media, justification to dispatch land troops, what was until now a mere proxy war is about to become full blown land combat on Syrian soil, one which will soon involve both Russian and US ground, sea and airborne forces.

    The last missing step will be when US cruisers, destroyers and/or battleships park next to the Syrian coastline, within earshot (and every other “shot”) away from comparable Russian warships. Keep tabs on the weekly US naval update, because once several US warships weigh anchor in the vicinity of Syria that will be the catalyst for the next and final escalation.

    At that point, the world will be one false flag away from what some could call another world war, only this time one launched not in Serbia but Syria.

Digest powered by RSS Digest